JP2022172013A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving a player's eye-catching power.

SOLUTION: When an opening displacement direction of an opening/closing plate B2300 faces a side opposite to an opening displacement direction of an opening/closing rod B2500, game balls sliding down from an upstream side of the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing rod B2500 tend to easily face a downstream side of the opening/closing rod B2500 or the opening/closing plate B2300. Accordingly, a game machine can be configured such that game balls can be picked up easily such that a player can continue to keep a sense of expectation that game balls deviating from a guide route may be picked up in other places, thus easily collecting a player's eye-catching power to game balls.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 147

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

There is a game machine configured so that the path configuring means are displaced to the same side (Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-159997 A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of attracting the player's attention. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the player's attention.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises: a game area in which a game ball flows down; A game machine comprising a route configuration means capable of switching between a first state that configures a guide route that can be guided to a ball area and a second state that does not configure the guide route, wherein the ball entry area is a second state. A first ball-entering area and a second ball-entering area are provided, and the path configuring means is configured to be displaceable so as to configure a first guide path capable of guiding a game ball to the first ball-entering area. and a second path configuration means configured to be displaceable so as to configure a second guide path configured to guide the game ball to the second ball entry area, wherein the The displacement direction of the first path constructing means and the displacement direction of the second path constructing means are directions in which they approach each other.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein one of the first guide route and the second guide route is arranged above the other route section.

A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first path constructing means and the second path constructing means are configured to intersect when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to improve the player's attention.

According to the game machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 1, it is possible to make it easier to prevent game balls from falling out by utilizing the vertical difference.

According to the game machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 1 or 2, by setting the displacement direction along a predetermined direction, one of the path construction means at the intersection position It is possible to eliminate the need for a configuration that is divided into the other path configuration means.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the action unit along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 10(a) and 10(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the action unit taken along line XIIIa-XIIIa in FIG. 9. FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and action units taken along line XIV-XIV in FIG. 9; (a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device, (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device, and (c) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a displacement restricting device. (a) is a rear view of a contact member, (b) is a front view of a guide member, and (c) is a front view of an operating member. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. 21(a) and 21(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the action unit taken along line XXIa-XXIa of FIG. 20; It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the firing effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board and the firing effect unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the firing effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing effect unit. (a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device as viewed in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and (b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the firing unit taken along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 2; It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. 34(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34(b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34(a); and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc of FIG. 34(b). (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35(a); and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b). 36(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a); and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXVIc-XXXVIc of FIG. 36(b). (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; 29(a) to (f) are plan views of the linear motion member, the collision member, the contact member, and the front side transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29(a) to (e) are plan views of the linear motion member, the collision member, the contact member, and the front side transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29(a) to (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member, the transmission arm member, and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. FIG. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting part of the abutment member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical projection of the transmission arm member in accordance with the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member It is a diagram showing a time-measurement change of. Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the scaling unit; Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of the enlarging/reducing unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the enlarging/reducing unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a rotating plate. It is a side view of a rotating plate. (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member. (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; It is a front view of a scaling unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; It is a front view of a scaling unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; (a) and (b) are rear views of the production member. It is a rear view of a production|presentation member. (a) is a back view of the production member, and (b) is a top view of the production member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a). (a) is a back view of the production member, and (b) is a top view of the production member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75(a). FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. 75; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a displacement rotation unit; FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit; FIG. 3 is a front exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement/rotation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a lateral slide member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a lateral slide member; FIG. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII of FIG. 7; It is a perspective view of a wiring arm member. 4 is a perspective view of a path forming member of the wiring guide member; FIG. 86(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb of FIG. 86(a). 87(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87(a). 88(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88(a). 89(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 89(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the action unit along line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 2; 3 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member in the range XCVII of FIG. 2; FIG. It is a front view of the game board in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view of an enlarging/reducing unit in the third embodiment; It is a front view of a rotating plate. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruded portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member according to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fourth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the chronological change of arrangement|positioning of a columnar protrusion. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member accompanying the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fifth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the chronological change of arrangement|positioning of a columnar protrusion. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the shooting unit in the sixth embodiment taken along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 2; It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of a board box in a seventh embodiment; Fig. 2 is a rear perspective view of the board box; (a) is a front view of a board box, and (b) is a side view of the board box. Fig. 4 is a front perspective view of a box cover; It is a back perspective view of a box cover. 109. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 108, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of a box base, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base. (a) is a front perspective view of a main controller, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the main controller. FIG. 113 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the main controller in section CXIII of FIG. 112(a); (a) is a front view of the main controller viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112(a), and (b) is a side view of the main controller viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114(a); 114(c) is a side view of the main controller viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114(a). (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box with the key operated to the off position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box with the key operated to the on position. 115(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIb in FIG. 115(b). be. 115(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 115(a); It is a diagram. 115(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 115(a); It is a diagram. 116(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb of FIG. 116(a); It is a diagram. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 121(a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the board box in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. 121(a). (a) is a front view of a board box in a ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine. (a) is a front view of a board box in a tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board in 11th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a front view of a variable winning device. FIG. 131 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device taken along line CXXXI-CXXXI of FIG. 130; (a) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the variable winning device in range CXXXIIb of FIG. 132(a). FIG. 132(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device taken along line CXXXIII-CXXXIII. It is a top view of a variable winning device. It is a top view of a variable winning device. It is a top view of a variable winning device. (a) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (b) is a top view of the variable winning device as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137(a). 137(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line CXXXVIIIa-CXXXVIIIa of FIG. 137(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of FIG. 137(a). It is a front view of a variable winning device. (a) and (b) are schematic front views of a rolling surface, an upper-right inclined surface, and an upper-left inclined surface, schematically showing the movement trajectory of a rolling ball in the pre-entering range. It is a partial front enlarged view of the game board showing the vicinity of the variable winning device. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. (a) is a diagram showing the opening/closing pattern of the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the gaming efficiency of the first operation pattern; (c) is a diagram showing the opening/closing pattern of the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the gaming efficiency of the second operation pattern; 3 is a diagram showing the opening/closing pattern of the first specific prize winning port and the second specific prize winning port corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the game efficiency of the operation patterns No. 3. FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 12th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. (a) is a front view of the variable winning device, (b) is a top view of the variable winning device viewed in the direction of arrow CLb in FIG. 150(a), and (c) is a view of FIG. It is a rear view of the variable winning device viewed in the direction of arrow CLc. (a) is a front view of the variable winning device, (b) is a top view of the variable winning device viewed in the direction of arrow CLIb in FIG. 151(a), and (c) is a view of FIG. It is a rear view of the variable winning device viewed in the direction of an arrow CLIc. (a) is a front view of the variable winning device, (b) is a top view of the variable winning device viewed in the direction of arrow CLIIb in FIG. 152(a), and (c) is a view of FIG. It is a rear view of the variable winning device viewed in the direction of arrow CLIIc. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line CLIIIa-CLIIIa in FIG. 150(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line CLIIIb-CLIIIb in FIG. (c) is a sectional view of the variable winning device along line CLIIIc-CLIIIc in FIG. 151(a), and (d) is a sectional view of the variable winning device along line CLIIId-CLIIId in FIG. 152(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line CLIVa-CLIVa in FIG. 151(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line CLIVb-CLIVb in FIG. 151(a), (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device taken along line CLIVc-CLIVc of FIG. 151(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the CLVa-CLVa line in FIG. 152(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the CLVb-CLVb line in FIG. 152(a), (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the CLVc-CLVc line in FIG. 152(a). (a) and (b) are front views of the first winning opening, the second winning opening and the variable winning device. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the performance of the variable winning device in the first control example of the twelfth embodiment; It is a front view of the variable winning device in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a top view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd rotation member and a transmission member. 159(a) and 159(b) are right side views of the second rotating member and the transmission member as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLXIa in FIG. 158. FIG. 159(a) to (c) are front views of the pre-entering range in the range CLXIIa of FIG. 158. FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 14th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a front view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of the variable winning device in 15th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the variable winning device. 173(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the variable winning device taken along line CLXXIVa-CLXXIVa in FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the line corresponding to line CLXXVa-CLXXVa in FIG. 172, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the line corresponding to line CLXXVb-CLXXVb in FIG. 172. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the line corresponding to the CLXXVc-CLXXVc line in FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the line corresponding to line CLXXVa-CLXXVa in FIG. 172, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the line corresponding to line CLXXVb-CLXXVb in FIG. 172. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the line corresponding to the CLXXVc-CLXXVc line in FIG. It is a front view of the game board and the variable winning device in the sixteenth embodiment. It is a top view of the variable prize-winning device in 17th Embodiment. 179(a) is a front view of the transmission rotor, (b) is a side view of the transmission rotor as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIXb in FIG. 179(a), and (c) is the circumference of the transmission rotor. It is a developed view of a developed surface, and (d) is a schematic view schematically showing the relationship between the rotation direction of the transmission rotor and the states of the first guide plate and the second guide plate. It is a front view of a variable winning device. (a) is a diagram showing changes over time of the first guide plate and the second guide plate in the fourth operation pattern, and (b) is the first guide plate and the second guide plate in the fifth operation pattern. It is a diagram showing a time-measurement change of. It is a front view of the variable winning device in the nineteenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the variable winning device in the twentieth embodiment in the range corresponding to range CLXIIa in FIG. 158, and (c) is a view in the direction of arrow CLXXXIIIc in FIG. It is a partial top view of the variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the game board in the twenty-first embodiment.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 97. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the paper is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper is defined as the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 62, a general prize-winning port 63, a first prize-winning port 64, a second prize-winning port 640, a variable prize-winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. 1) is attached to the back side (or front side).

The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes (for example, see FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of 13 . Note that the base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate which has a rotating shaft at the lower end and is rotationally displaced in a manner of tilting or standing toward the game area. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second winning port 640 along the upper surface of the opening/closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening/closing plate separates the game area and the second prize winning port 640. By closing the space between the second prize winning port 640 and the second prize winning port 640, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time are not changed. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position (behind the window portion of the base plate 60) that can be viewed through the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display with a size of about 9 inches to 19 inches. Three symbol rows, middle and bottom, are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 .

Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be, for example, two.

Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, or the lower side. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. It should be noted that the arrangement of the second winning openings 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be below the first prize winning opening 64 in a front view, or it may be on the left side of the left-right center of the game area.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a like the second prize winning port 640, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a , so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by winning in the first prize opening 64, there are many chances of winning a big lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim to be.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and opens the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640 while setting the state.

It should be noted that, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, aiming at the first winning hole 64 with "right-handed hitting" or "left-handed hitting" at the second It is also possible to aim at the winning opening 640 . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that it is not possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 in a "right-handed" manner, and a ball shot in a "left-handed" manner does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). can be requested to be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming sluggish by adding the playability of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. For example, it may be the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, the lower left side of the first prize winning port 64, the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the upper side.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a are arranged in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205. .

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5, and the like.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be described. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500. FIG. 5 and 6, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side can be seen through the opening 511a. Further, FIG. 2 will be referred to as needed in the description of FIGS.

The operation unit 500 includes a box-shaped rear case 510 whose front side is opened from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . A rectangular opening 511 a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 , so that the rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided when viewed from the front).

The back case 510 extends as a plane plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that protrudes toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted into a fitting concave portion (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. and a plurality of insertion holes 513b through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning projections 513a into the fitting recesses of the base plate 60, and the fastening screws are inserted through the insertion holes 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the action unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the protrusion may have an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is also formed in a rectangular shape correspondingly.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a pinwheel (not shown), and rails 61 and 62. , a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a through gate 67, a variable winning device 65, and a window portion 60a (see FIG. 90) opened in the base plate 60, which can be fitted from the front side. A center frame 86 configured with a shape, a ball flow-down unit 150 configured so that the ball discharged from the game area can flow down, and a granular member 320 (see FIG. 54) is launched toward the front side of the third pattern display device 81. The firing effect unit 300 or the like that can be configured is assembled, and is attached to the inner frame 12 in such a manner that the peripheral portion thereof is arranged opposite to the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1) and fixed.

The base plate 60 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be easily viewed by the player from the front side. As a result, regardless of the shape and arrangement of the base plate 60, the structure arranged on the back side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects.

For example, even if the ball flow down unit 150 is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, the back side can be seen through the base plate 60, so the ball flowing down the ball flow down unit 150 can be visually recognized. . In the present embodiment, the ball flow downward unit 150 is designed in consideration of the effects produced by the visually recognized ball, details of which will be described later.

If there is a part that the player does not want to see, it may be dealt with by attaching a seal member with low light transmittance (or non-light transmittance).

The center frame 86 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The shooting effect unit 300 receives the granular member 320 (see FIG. 54), and the partitioning member 310 that partitions the range in which the granular member 320 can scatter is arranged inside the center frame 86, so that the granular member 320 is placed inside the center frame. It is made possible to shoot toward the inside of 86 . Therefore, the granular members 320 scattered on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively recognized by the player who visually recognizes the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window portion of the center frame 86. can. Details of the shooting effect unit 300 will be described later.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, an enlargement/reduction unit 600 arranged inside the upper part of the rear case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 arranged symmetrically on the left and right sides inside the rear case 510. Prepare.

Specifically, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is arranged above the opening 511a, and the displacement/rotation unit 800 is arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 511a on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, respectively. First, an overview of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of operation control of the operation unit 500 in chronological order. 7 shows the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the waiting state for effect, and FIG. FIG. 9 shows the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the enlargement state and the displacement/rotation unit 800 in the waiting state for rendering.

10 shows the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the waiting state for rendering, and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the top rendering state. In FIG. The unit 800 is in the lower end state of the production.

As illustrated in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement trajectory of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, when the displacement/rotation unit 800 is in the rendering upper end state (see FIG. 10), if the enlargement/reduction unit 600 changes state from the rendering standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the effect standby state is controlled to be executable on the condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state. By controlling the state change from the presentation standby state to be executable on the condition that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the presentation standby state, it is possible to prevent the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 from overlapping in front view. can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is configured such that it can be displaced downward while the effect members 700 are collectively arranged in one place. The components of the production member 700 are separated from each other in the state of being arranged in the state of being arranged, and the operation is controlled so that the area visually recognized in the front view becomes large (see FIG. 9).

After that, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is controlled so that the production members 700 are assembled again (see FIG. 8), displaced upward while being collectively arranged in one place, and returned to the production standby state shown in FIG.

The state changes shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are executed when the scaling unit 600 is in the rendering standby state. As shown in FIGS. 7, 10 and 11, the displacement/rotation unit 800 is configured such that the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced from the waiting state for rendering in a direction having not only a vertical component but also a horizontal component.

In this embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced along a route curve S1 set by a mechanism described later. The route curve S1 includes a common circular arc portion S1a having a circular arc shape centering on each center point C1, and an advancing/retreating route portion S1b extending from the lower end of the common circular arc portion S1a to the left, right, and downward.

In FIG. 10, a pair of left and right horizontal slide members 840 are arranged at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, and in FIG. The lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position above the lower end position of the common circular arc portion S1a.

11, the left lateral slide member 840 is displaced downward and the right lateral slide member 840 is displaced upward. It is possible for the player to visually recognize as if it were rotationally displaced around a center point C1 arranged near the center.

In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of the rotating performance body having the same size as the display area of the third pattern display device 81, and the degree of freedom in performance using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

12(a) and 12(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 7, and FIGS. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 along the XIIIa-XIIIa line, and FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 along the XIV-XIV line in FIG.

7 and 9 do not show the game board 13, but FIGS. 12 to 14 show the state where the game board 13 is attached to the front side of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 2).

12(a) and 13(a) show an example of a state in which the granular member 320 stays downward, and in FIGS. 12(b) and 13(b), the granular member 320 is shot and scattered. An example of such a state is illustrated.

The effect member 700 of the scaling unit 600 is arranged such that the central part of the collective arrangement is arranged above the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300 in the effect standby state shown in FIGS. Most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be visible through 310 .

On the other hand, in the enlarged state shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b), the effect member 700 is arranged close behind the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300, and is hidden by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9). ), most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is blocked invisibly.

Since the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 does not interfere with the partitioning member 310, regardless of the arrangement of the scaling unit 600, the firing effect unit 300 is operated to execute the action effect of shooting the granular member 320 at the partitioning member 310. It is possible to control

As shown in FIG. 12( a ), the granular member 320 is arranged below the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 , and is fired along a route that slopes upward toward the front. , is struck against the front wall portion of the partitioning member 310 and rises while rebounding within the range formed by the partitioning member 310 .

As a result, the granular member 320 can be made to appear to the player as if it is coming toward him or her, so that the player's attention to the presentation using the granular member 320 can be improved.

In addition, by configuring in this way, the range in which the granular members 320 are scattered can be brought closer to the player side, and the configuration members arranged in the game area such as the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2) can be reduced. It is possible to avoid lowering the degree of freedom of arrangement.

In other words, as a standby position for the granular members 320 fired toward the partitioning member 310 of this embodiment, a position directly below the partitioning member 310 or a position closer to the front can be adopted. However, in this case, since the shooting effect unit 300 is arranged in the space on the back side of the first prize winning port 64, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the guide path for the ball that has entered the first prize winning port 64. It becomes difficult, and it may be necessary to move the position of the first winning hole 64 to deal with it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the dividing member 310 is arranged at the frontmost position, and the standby position of the granular member 320 is arranged at an oblique rear side. The guide path for the ball can be arranged without any problem, and the situation in which the first prize winning opening 64 cannot be arranged freely can be prevented.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(a), when control is performed to shoot the granular members 320, as shown in FIG. It can be shown to the player together with the display in the display area. As a result, the player can visually recognize a combination of the two-dimensional display and the movement of the granular member 320 that displaces three-dimensionally.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(a), when control is performed to shoot the granular members 320, as shown in FIG. It can be shown to the player together with the change. In this case, for example, by synchronizing the timing of scattering of the granular members 320 with the timing of displacing the rendering members 700 of the scaling unit 600 in a discrete manner, the granular members 320 can be displaced on the front side of the scaling unit 600 whose state changes. Scattering can be visually recognized, and the impact of the state change of the scaling unit 600 can be enhanced.

Here, a method of switching the display of the third pattern display device 81 together with the state change of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is also conceivable as a method of producing effects in conjunction with the state change of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 .

However, in a situation where the third pattern display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the scaling unit 600 and most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is shielded by the scaling unit 600, as in the present embodiment. , even if the display of the third pattern display device 81 is switched, it is difficult to show the display, and it is difficult to produce an effective effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the division member 310 that forms the range in which the granular members 320 that produce motion effects scatter along with the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is provided on the front side of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. Therefore, even in a situation where the enlargement/reduction unit 600 blocks most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the granular member 320 is not difficult for the player to see.

Furthermore, by configuring the granular member 320 with a small member, it is possible to prevent the enlarging/reducing unit 600 from becoming difficult to see as compared with the configuration of the granular member 320 with a large member.

Therefore, even in a state where most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is blocked by the scaling unit 600, the effect of the scaling unit 600 can be improved.

Also, the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular members 320 in combination with the scaling unit 600 can be used as it is for the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular members 320 in combination with the displacement/rotation unit 800 .

That is, the displacement/rotation unit 800, similarly to the enlargement/reduction unit 600, has a state in which the horizontal slide member 840 is retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (drawing standby state, see FIG. 7), and a horizontal state. Since the slide member 840 can be changed between the state where the slide member 840 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (lower end state of production, upper end state of production, see FIGS. 10 and 11), , an effect of visually recognizing the combination of the scattering granular members 320 and the display of the third pattern display device 81, and an effect of visually recognizing the combination of the scattering granular members 320 and the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800. be able to.

In this case, it has been explained that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can effectively produce an effect by scattering the granular members 320 in accordance with the dispersing mode of the production member 700, but the displacement/rotation unit 800 can rotate By scattering the particulate members 320 in accordance with the rotation of the wing-like members 854 disposed in the wing-like members 854, an air flow is generated by the rotation of the wing-like members 854. It can be visually recognized as if it is rotating at high speed), and the presentation effect of the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the scattering of the granular members 320 is visually recognized in combination with the display area of the third pattern display device 81, and is visually recognized in combination with the scaling unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800. can be used in combination with

As shown in FIG. 14, the rear end line BL1 of the first light irradiation device 330, which is part of the shooting effect unit 300 and is arranged directly above the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800, is shown in FIG. It is arranged on the rear side of the front end line FL1 of the displacement/rotation unit 800 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement trajectory of the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement/rotation unit 800 (for example, when the lateral slide member 840 continues to displace directly upward from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 may collide.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the advancing/retreating path portion S1b is set as a path that can avoid the collision between the firing effect unit 300 and the displacement/rotation unit 800. FIG. That is, by setting the advancing/retreating path portion S1b as a path passing through a gap provided in an oblique direction between the ejection device 400 of the firing effect unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 are separated. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of setting, and it is configured to be capable of upward displacement beyond the first light irradiation device 330 that sets the trailing edge line BL1, so that a large displacement width of the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be ensured. .

As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, the effect member 700 and the partitioning member 310 are arranged to the extent that the space can be secured, but the space between the effect member 700 and the partitioning member 310 must be secured until the time of transportation. Nothing to consider. Therefore, during transport, it is desirable to maintain the effect member 700 at the upper end position of the displacement range, and to restrict the partition member 310 and the effect member 700 from being arranged close to each other.

Returning to FIG. 6, description will be made. The motion unit 500 includes a displacement restricting device 180 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 . The displacement restricting device 180 is configured to be able to change its state by manual operation from the back side of the rear case 510, and in the restricting state, restricts the downward displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the presentation standby state.

By adopting the displacement restricting device 180, it is possible to facilitate shipment and transportation of the pachinko machine 10 even when the center opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment.

In detail, conventionally, a means of suppressing the displacement of the movable role by stuffing a cushioning material (cushion member such as cotton) in the range where the movable role is displaced, and removing the cushioning material after arriving at the game hall. This sometimes prevents displacement of the movable accessories during shipment or transportation. However, if the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 12(a)), there is no through-hole for extracting the cushioning material. The cushioning material cannot be removed without disassembling, which may impose a heavy burden on the game hall.

As a countermeasure against this, the displacement forming device 180 is employed in this embodiment. As a result, the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be changed between a regulated state in which the upward/downward displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is regulated without releasing the fixation of the game board 13 and the rear case 510, and a regulated state in which the regulation is released. You can switch. Hereinafter, the details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be described first, and then the details of the state change will be described.

15(a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, FIG. 15(b) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 15(c) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180. It is a diagram.

15(a) and 15(b) illustrate the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state, and FIG. 15(c) illustrates the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state. As shown in FIGS. 15(a) to 15(c), the displacement restricting device 180 is switched between the restricted state and the restricted state by the cylindrical portion 183d protruding from the contact member 181. As shown in FIG. In the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes to the inside of the back case 510 and is configured to engage with the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, details of which will be described later.

16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 18(b) is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18(c) is a front view of the operation member 183. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement restricting device 180 includes an abutting member 181 arranged to abut on the rear case 510 (see FIG. 6), and a abutting member 181 arranged on the rear side of the abutting member 181. A guide member 182 that is fastened and fixed to 181 and guides the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction; an operation member 183 that is guided in displacement by the guide member 182; It is mainly provided with a coil spring 184 configured to be able to apply an urging force directed toward the back side to the operating member 181 .

As the operation member 183 is formed in a substantially elliptical shape elongated in the left and right direction when viewed from the rear, the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182 which accommodate the operation member 183 also have a substantially elliptical shape elongated in the left and right direction when viewed from the rear. Since it is formed, the external shape of the displacement restricting device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape elongated left and right when viewed from the rear.

The abutment member 181 is mainly designed in a plate shape so as to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the rear case 510. The plate end of the abutment member 181 extends toward the rear side to hold the guide member 182. The wall portion is extended, and insertion holes 181a are drilled at the left and right ends and through which the fastening portions protruding from the back case 510 are inserted. It has a cylindrical holding portion 181b protruding to the side, and an engaged portion 181c that forms a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the operating member 183 and is configured to be engageable with the operating member 183. As shown in FIG.

The guide member 182 includes a body portion 182a extending in the front-rear direction in an elliptical ring along the outer periphery of the contact member 181, and a screw through which a fastening screw is inserted into a fastening portion that is inserted through the insertion hole 181a. An insertion portion 182b, a fastening portion 182c into which a fastening screw to be inserted through the contact member 181 is screwed, a retainer portion 182d projecting radially inward at the back side end portion of the main body portion 182a, and the main body portion 182a. The upper and lower inner portions are provided with projections 182e projecting radially inward in the front-rear direction.

From this configuration, by fastening and fixing the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182, the operation member 183 can be arranged between the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182 and held so as not to fall off. In the embodiment, the conditions in which the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled are limited by setting the fastening direction.

In other words, in this embodiment, the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 is inserted from the front side of the contact member 182 (the side covered by the rear case 510). Therefore, when the displacement restricting device 180 is attached to the rear case 510, the fastening screws cannot be touched. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only when the displacement restricting device 180 is removed from the rear case 510 .

The fastening screws for fastening and fixing the displacement restricting device 180 to the back case 510 are inserted through the screw insertion portions 182b from the back side of the guide member 182, so that the back side of the back case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19). ) can be easily touched, and the displacement restricting device 180 can be easily removed from the rear case 510 .

The operation member 183 has a main body portion 183a formed in a cup shape with an elliptical shape slightly smaller than the retainer portion 182d of the guide member 182 when viewed from the rear, the front side being open, and a front edge portion of the main body portion 183a. a flange portion 183b projecting radially outward from the flange portion 183b; a groove portion 183c recessed in the flange portion 183b; An arc-shaped protrusion 183e projecting toward the front side in an arc shape having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 centered on the portion 183d and a position where it can be engaged with the engaged portion 181c of the contact member 181. and an engaging portion 183f that can constitute a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

An elliptical seal is attached to the rear surface of the operation member 183 . This seal has a concave shape formed on one of the ends in the short direction (see FIG. 15(a)), and by arranging this concave shape upward, it is possible to easily prevent vertical orientation errors during assembly. can do.

By making the main body portion 183a oval, it is possible to easily prevent the operation member 183 from being rotationally displaced. That is, even if the operating member 183 is about to be rotationally displaced, the rotation is regulated by coming into contact with the main body portion 182a of the guide member 182 .

The flange portion 183b is larger than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182 when viewed from the rear, thereby preventing the operation member 183 from falling off the guide member 182. As shown in FIG. That is, the operating member 183 can be displaced in the front-rear direction while the flange portion 183b is held between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182. As shown in FIG.

The groove portion 183c is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182, and has a function of smoothly moving the operating member 183 back and forth. In the present embodiment, the grooves 183c are also formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side as the ridges 182e are formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side. As a result, it is possible to prevent erroneous assembly in which the operation member 183 is mistakenly placed upside down.

The cylindrical portion 183 d is a portion that is inserted through the center of the coil spring 184 , and is configured to be able to be inserted through the central opening of the cylindrical holding portion 181 b of the contact member 181 . When the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes from the central opening of the abutment member 181, the cylindrical portion 183d engages with the restricted hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 to restrict the up-and-down displacement of the effect member 700, as will be described later.

That is, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183d can be used both as a portion that regulates the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and as a portion that supports the coil spring 184. FIG.

The arc-shaped ridge portion 183e is arranged so as to face the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184, and faces the large diameter side cylindrical portion of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction. When the operation member 183 is pushed, the arc-shaped ridge 183e and the cylindrical holding portion 181b come into contact with each other before other parts, so that the load generating area can be increased, and the load is locally increased. It is possible to prevent the load from occurring.

The arc-shaped protrusion 183e is not circular, but is formed in an arc-like shape where the circle is interrupted, and the engaging portion 183f is arranged at the interrupted position. As a result, it is possible to avoid excessive separation between the engaging portion 183f and the cylindrical portion 183d and the coil spring 184. FIG.

State changes of the operating member 183 will be described. The operating member 183 is biased toward the rear side by the coil spring 184. When the operating member 183 is pushed forward against the biasing force, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c are formed. The latch mechanism is activated, and each time it is pushed in by a stroke greater than the minimum stroke for which the latch mechanism acts, the restriction state and the restriction release state are alternately switched.

In this way, since the state can be changed by the latch mechanism, the operation member 183 is not limited to the case where the operation member 183 is intentionally operated. If it is displaced by the stroke, there is a possibility that the state of the displacement restricting device 180 will change unintentionally.

For example, in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, if the state of the displacement regulating device 180 unintentionally changes due to an impact during shipping or vibration during transportation, the scaling unit 600 will be placed in an effect standby state (effect member 700 is located at the upper displacement end). When the effect member 700 displaced from the effect standby state is placed close to the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 13), the effect member 700 receives the impact during shipment or the vibration during transportation, and the effect member 700 becomes the partitioning member of the firing effect unit 300. 310, and the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 may be damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 183f is arranged at a position (position eccentric to the right) away from the position (central position) where the biasing force is applied to the operating member 183, and the operating member 183f The gap dimension between the groove portion 183c of the guide member 183 and the projection 182e of the guide member 182 is set large, and the posture maintenance capability of the operation member 183 is intentionally lowered.

As a result, the attitude of the operation member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be tilted in advance, so that the displacement resistance of the operation member 183 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of displacement of the operating member 183 in the front-rear direction due to an unintended external force.

A relationship between the displacement restricting device 180 and the operation unit 500 will be described. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 opened, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b). 20] is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along line XXIa-XXIa of FIG.

21(a) illustrates the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 21(b) illustrates the released state of the displacement restricting device 180. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement regulating device 180 is arranged on the opening/closing base end side (left side) of the inner frame 12, and by opening the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12, the operator can extend his hand. configured to be touchable. Since this position is opposite to the side (opening/closing front end side, right side) where a worker who works with the inner frame 12 open enters, the worker may unintentionally move the displacement restricting device when the inner frame 12 is opened. Touching 180 can be avoided.

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c that constitute the latch mechanism are formed on the right side of the displacement restricting device 180. As shown in FIGS. Since the operating member 183 is loosely supported, not all of the load pushing the operating member 183 is used to move the operating member 183 back and forth, but is also used to change the posture of the operating member 183 .

For example, when the right side of the operating member 183 is pushed, even if the right side moves back and forth sufficiently, the posture of the operating member 183 may change and the left side may not be pushed sufficiently.

Therefore, for the purpose of pushing the displacement restricting device 180 to switch the state, it is easier for the operator to cause the necessary displacement of the displacement restricting device 180 by pinpointing the forming portion of the latch mechanism. It can be said that it is easy to succeed in switching the state of the regulation device 180 .

In this embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c, which constitute the latch mechanism, are formed on the right side of the displacement restricting device 180, and the operator enters from the right side to displace the displacement restricting device. Since the operator operates the device 180, the operator can reach the displacement restricting device 180 with a minimum of movement. Therefore, the operator can easily perform an operation of pinpointing the forming portion of the latch mechanism.

Also, the posture change when the operation member 183 is pushed occurs in such a manner that the pressing surface (the surface formed on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) faces the pushed side. Therefore, the pressing load of the operator can be easily transmitted to the operating member 183 as the amount of pressing increases.

In the regulated state shown in FIG. 21( a ), the cylindrical portion 183 d of the operating member 183 is inserted through the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to restrict displacement of the transmission gear 650 . This can prevent the state of the scaling unit 600 from changing.

Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (the rotation direction about the longitudinal axis) and the displacement direction of the operation member 183 (the front-rear direction) are perpendicular to each other, the operation member 183 receives the load from the transmission gear 650 in the displacement direction. can be prevented from receiving As a result, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively restricted without making the formation portion of the latch mechanism rigid.

Since the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be maintained by placing the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state, the application of the displacement restricting device 180 is not limited to transportation. For example, after installation in a game machine store, the displacement regulation device 180 is set in the regulation state to maintain the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 during maintenance, so that maintenance of the displacement/rotation unit 800, which will be described later, can be performed safely and easily.

That is, when the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement trajectory of the displacement/rotation unit 800 partially overlap as in the present embodiment, the drive motor of the scaling unit 600 is operated during maintenance work on the displacement/rotation unit 800. Even if the MT2 malfunctions, the state (arrangement) of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be maintained by the displacement regulation device 180, so that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be prevented from colliding. can be done.

When the displacement restricting device 180 is in the restricting state before the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the displacement restricting device 180 is switched to the deregulation state by pushing the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180. (See FIG. 21(b)). As a result, the transmission gear 650 can be displaced, and the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be caused to perform an effect operation accompanied by a state change.

Here, before the power is turned on, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and the displacement restricting device 180 is released from restriction by looking in from the open tip side (right side). It will be described that it is configured to be able to confirm whether or not

As shown in FIG. 21(a), in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the operation member 183 is arranged in front of the shape of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, so that when viewed from the right side, , the operation member 183 is hidden by the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21(b), when the displacement restricting device 180 is in the released state, the operation member 183 is arranged to protrude toward the back side from the shape of the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510. When viewed from the right side, the operation member 183 is visible at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511 .

Therefore, even if the operator does not fully open the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 as confirmation work before turning on the power, the operator can slightly open the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. By visually confirming that the operation member 183 protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 when viewed from the right side, it is possible to confirm that the displacement restricting device 180 is in the released state.

In this embodiment, the rear case 510 is made of a colorless transparent resin material, and the operation member 183 is made of a red transparent resin material, so that the visibility of the operation member 183 can be improved.

Here, a case will be described where the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted through the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180 (see FIG. 21(a)). . In this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state, the detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52) detects that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 has not changed in the power-on operation. is determined from the output of , and the position detection error display associated with this determination is displayed by the third pattern display device 81 .

By showing this position detection error display to the store clerk of the game machine store, it is possible to make the store clerk notice that the state of the displacement control device 180 may not have been changed. It should be noted that this error display is displayed by detecting whether or not there is a change in the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, not by detecting the state of the displacement restricting device 180. FIG.

That is, in the present embodiment, an alarm regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is issued using the position detection error display normally provided in the enlargement/reduction unit 600 without preparing an additional error display program or display material. can be output. As a result, the design cost can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted through the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21(a)). In this case, the pressing operation of the operation member 183 is disabled while the power is on, and it is required to turn off the power once, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the operating member 183 may be configured to be operable even during power-on.

In addition, the configuration for disabling the pushing operation of the operating member 183 can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be configured such that the pushing operation is disabled due to friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operation member 183, or a large-diameter portion is provided on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 to displace the transmission gear 650. Inside, the back surface of the transmission gear 650 and the large-diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183d may be engaged with each other to limit the displacement of the operating member 183. As shown in FIG.

As a different situation, an example in which the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 is pressed during maintenance at a game machine store will be described. In this embodiment, the pushing operation of the operation member 183 is not possible only when the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is aligned with the cylindrical portion 183d in the front and rear.

For example, during maintenance, even if the operation member 183 is pushed while the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 8), the displacement restricting device 180 changes its state to the restricting state. In this case, the cylindrical portion 183d is arranged on the displacement trajectory of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. Therefore, when the transmission gear 650 is displaced by the driving force after the maintenance is completed, the displacement is caused by the cylindrical portion 183d. is limited to

In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to determine that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is restricted, and by performing an error display (notification of abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement restricting device 180 remains in the restricted state. This can be notified to the clerk of the game machine store, the details of which will be described later.

As a result, the state of the displacement restricting device 180 can be determined by using the device for detecting the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 without providing a separate device for detecting the state of the displacement restricting device 180 .

It should be noted that the displacement control device 180 can be operated before or after the game board 13 and the motion unit 500 are assembled to the inner frame 12 . After assembly to the inner frame 12, it is necessary not only to open the inner frame 12, but also to open the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12. Therefore, if possible, before assembling to the inner frame 12, the displacement regulation is performed. Preferably, the device 180 has been operated.

Returning to FIGS. 5 and 6, description will be made. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described shooting effect unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement/rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for livening up the game. These rendering devices will be described in order from the firing rendering unit 300. FIG.

22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 , the partitioning member 310 is arranged to face the light guide plate 161 in the assembled state of the shooting effect unit 300 . That is, it is possible to execute an effect in which the light guide plate 161 and the partitioning member 310 are superimposed and visually recognized by the player.

Since the partitioning member 310 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the granular member 320 scattered inside can be visually recognized by the player. Thus, an effect can be executed in which the light guide plate 161 and the scattering granular members 320 are superimposed and visually recognized.

24 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing effect unit 300. FIG. 24 and 25, the partition member 310 is shown exploded.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the firing effect unit 300 includes a partitioning member 310 arranged inside the center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and forming a box shape with an open bottom, and a partitioning member 310 for the partition. A plurality of granular members 320 displaceably arranged inside the member 310, an injection device 400 arranged in such a manner as to close the lower open portion so that the granular members 320 do not drop out of the partitioning member 310, and the partitioning member. A first light irradiation device 330 arranged on the right side of the partition member 310 and a second light irradiation device 340 arranged on the left side of the partition member 310 are provided.

The partitioning member 310 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a front plate portion 311 that is a plate-like portion arranged on the forefront, and a curved plate portion 312 that is integrally formed below the front plate portion 311 . A bottom plate portion parallel to the front plate portion 311 is arranged on the rear side of the front plate portion 311, and blocking walls extending from the left, right, and top of the bottom plate portion toward the front side so as to block the gap are provided. Communicates with a back partition 313 and an internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12(a)) integrally formed below the back partition 313 and configured between the front panel 311 and the back partition 313. It has a rear section lower part 314 that allows a path to be configured between the curved plate part 312 and a deformed penetrating part 315 penetrating through the rear section lower part 314 .

Although the size of the partitioning member 310 is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, the size of the window surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 and the size of the partitioning member 310 when viewed from the front are about the same. is formed to be That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate portion 311 are formed to have substantially the same shape.

Thereby, the component for hiding the edge of the light guide plate 161 can also be used for hiding the edge of the partition member 310 . A dedicated component for hiding the edge of the partitioning member 310 is not required, and the number of members is reduced, while the edge of the partitioning member 310 is displayed by being superimposed on the display by the third pattern display device 81 and visually recognized. can be avoided, the visibility of the display by the third pattern display device 81 can be maintained.

The internal space IE1 serves as a range in which the granular members 320 can scatter. need to do more. Therefore, forming a space narrower to some extent makes it possible to perform a powerful presentation by visually recognizing a small number of granular members 320 with a high density.

On the other hand, if the space is made too narrow, there is a risk that the granular member 320 will be clogged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 is ensured to be approximately the same as the front-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear section lower portion 314 . Therefore, compared to the case where the front-to-rear width is shortened, it is possible to avoid clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and rapid deceleration during injection.

Furthermore, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are arranged closer to the rear section lower portion 314 than the left and right central portions 312b, the movement path of the granular member 320 near the left and right central portions 312b is relatively large. can be narrowed.

That is, when the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the movement path of the granular member 320 can be concentrated near the left-right central portion 312b, and the granular member 320 can be positioned in the internal space IE1. It is possible to make it easier to reach the vicinity of the central portion. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the granular member 320 .

In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and scatters in the internal space IE1. As a result, the player can visually recognize as if the granular members 320 explode from the vicinity of the center of the internal space IE1 and scatter in all directions. can be improved.

The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion that receives the granular member 320 when the granular member 320 injected into the internal space IE1 falls. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed to be inclined downward toward the rear surface side and inclined downward toward the left-right center.

As a result, regardless of where in the internal space IE1 the granular member 320 is arranged, the granular member 320, which is displaced downward by its own weight, can be displaced toward the lower side of the rear side while being moved toward the left-right center.

Further, the degree of downward inclination of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 is configured so that the downward inclination toward the left and right central side is steeper than the downward inclination toward the rear side. As a result, as the downward displacement tendency of the granular member 320, it is possible to cause displacement toward the left-right central side with priority over displacement toward the rear surface side. Therefore, due to the configuration of the injection device 400, which will be described later, at the right and left end positions where the granular members 320 are likely to be densely packed, the granular members 320 tend to be displaced to the rear side all at once, and the granular members 320 stay (clog) in the middle of downward displacement. can be avoided.

In addition, the degree of downward inclination toward the rear side of the left and right central portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 is steeper than the degree of downward inclination toward the left and right central portions of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312. is configured as This makes it easier to avoid the granular members 320 from crowding together while flowing down.

On the other hand, in the rear section lower part 314, the plate portion arranged to face the rear side of the curved plate portion 312 is approximately the same as the left and right central portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 12A) in a side view (see FIG. 12A). It is formed in a flat plate shape with an inclination angle such that the distance from the left and right center portions 312b is slightly widened toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is large.

In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the rear section lower portion 314 with respect to the vertical direction is the same (slightly larger angle) than the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction of the displacement direction of the collision member 420 that ejects the granular member 320 .

Therefore, the incident angle of the granular members 320 with respect to the rear section lower portion 314 is the same regardless of the ejection direction of the granular members 320 that can change to the left and right, so that the resistance given to the granular members 320 from the rear section lower portion 314 is substantially uniform. can do.

The deformed penetrating portion 315 is formed into a shape into which the lid member 480 can be inserted. Prepare. The penetrating direction is inclined upward from the back side toward the front side with respect to the plate surface of the back section lower portion 314 (see FIG. 12(a)). As a result, the acute-angled portion of the rear section lower portion 314 that constitutes the deformed through portion 315 (the lower portion of the deformed through portion 315 in FIG. 12A ) is not arranged to face the ejection direction of the granular member 320 .

This can reduce the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with the sharp-angled portion when the granular member 320 is injected, thereby avoiding the occurrence of local load on the granular member 320 and the rear section lower part 314, and the granular member 320. It is possible to prevent the member 320 and the rear section lower part 314 from being cracked or chipped.

24 and 25, the granular member 320 is made of a relatively soft resin material (at least softer than the resin material forming the partition member 310) and formed into a substantially soccer ball shape (12 regular pentagons). and 20 regular hexagons formed into a quasi-regular polyhedron) and provided with non-penetrating concave portions 321 formed non-penetratingly along a plurality of mutually parallel straight lines.

The non-penetrating concave portion 321 can reduce the weight of the granular member 320 and deviate the center of gravity of the granular member 320 from the central position of the shape. That is, in the linear direction in which the non-penetrating recesses 321 are formed, the meat portion remains on the side where the non-penetrating recesses 321 are not formed, so the center of gravity can be biased toward the side where the non-penetrating recesses 321 are not formed. .

Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to a posture in which the non-penetrating concave portion 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

In this case, the load from the injection device 400 can be received by the surface (see FIG. 25) on the side where the non-penetrating concave portion 321 is not formed. . Furthermore, since the non-penetrating concave portion 321 is directed toward the injection direction side when being injected with a load from the injection device 400, the surface on which the non-penetrating concave portion 321 is formed should collide with the front plate portion 311. can be done. As a result, the deformation of the granular member 320 can easily absorb the load upon collision with the front plate portion 311, and the possibility of damaging the front plate portion 311 can be reduced.

The first light irradiation unit 330 includes a fixed plate portion 331 fastened and fixed to the back side of the rear partition portion 313, an electrical board 332 fastened and fixed to the right side of the fixed plate portion 331, and the electrical board 332. A lid portion 333 is provided on the right side, is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 331 , and is formed so as to accommodate the electrical board 332 between the fixing plate portion 331 and the fixing plate portion 331 .

Light irradiation units 332a such as LEDs are arranged on both left and right sides of the electrical board 332, and light having an optical axis is emitted from the light irradiation units 332a in the left-right direction. The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are made of a resin material with low light transmittance, and are provided with through holes 331a and 333a at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. Thereby, it can be visually recognized as light divided into particles.

Of the light emitted from the illumination board 332, the light emitted to the right side often illuminates the right side path (right-handed path) of the game area where the through gate 67 and the like (see FIG. 2) are arranged. one purpose. The light emitted to the left will be described later.

The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are made of a resin material with low light transmittance (or no light transmittance), and are provided with through holes 331a and 333a at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation section 332a can be visually recognized as light divided into granules. It is possible to avoid being shielded by and visually recognized.

The second light irradiation unit 340 includes a fixed plate portion 341 fastened and fixed to the back side of the rear partition portion 313, an electrical board 342 fastened and fixed to the left side of the fixed plate portion 341, and the electrical board 342. A lid portion 343 is provided on the left side, is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 341 , and is formed so as to accommodate the electrical board 342 between the fixed plate portion 341 and the fixed plate portion 341 .

The fixing plate portion 341 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance (or non-light transmittance), while the lid portion 343 is made of a colorless and light transmittance resin material. Therefore, the electrical board 342 is visible when viewed from the left, but in the present embodiment, the left side of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) protrudes leftward. As a result, the field of view of the player can be narrowed in advance, and the left side of the decorative board 342 can be prevented from being seen when viewed from the front.

As a result, light can be emitted through the transparent lid portion 343 while avoiding the decorative electrical substrate 342 from being visually recognized.

Light irradiation units 342a such as LEDs are arranged on both the left and right sides of the electrical board 342 . Light having an optical axis directed forward is emitted from the light emitting portion 342a arranged on the left side surface. One purpose of this light is to illuminate the left side of the center frame 86 while not illuminating the left path of the game area.

Here, the reason for adopting a configuration different from the configuration in which the light emitted from the light emitting portion 342a of the electric decoration board 332 on the right side is positively directed to the game area is the playability of the pachinko machine 10 (normally It is considered that the game is played with the left hand, and the game is played with the right hand during the probability variation, the time reduction, and the jackpot game). This is explained below.

Since the game area of the pachinko machine 10 has a high degree of freedom in the ball flow path on the left side of the game area, during normal play, the shooting intensity of the ball is adjusted so that the ball will flow down the desired path. The operation of doing is performed by the player. Therefore, if the light emission intensity on the left side of the game area is increased too much, the visibility of the ball becomes poor, which hinders the adjustment of the shooting intensity of the ball and may cause dissatisfaction of the player.

On the other hand, when shooting the ball to the right side of the playing area, basically, the player launches the ball with maximum shooting strength. The momentum of the shot ball is restrained by the return rubber 69, and the degree of freedom of selection of the downstream path of the ball on the downstream side is remarkably reduced, and the same path is exclusively passed.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, a single guide path DL1 (see FIG. 2) is formed downstream of the second prize winning port 640 and has a width through which one ball can pass. All the balls that did not hit go through the guide path DL1 and go to the variable winning device 65 and the general winning opening 63 arranged on the downstream side.

As described above, since there is little need to adjust the shooting intensity of the ball, even if the visibility of the ball becomes poor in the right side of the game area (especially the part where the guide path DL1 is formed), the game will not be hindered. Since the possibility of causing this is low, it is possible to perform an effect with a high emission intensity in this range.

For this reason, in the present embodiment, the illumination board 332 arranged on the right side is provided with the light irradiation part 332a so as to direct the light to the game area, while the illumination board 342 arranged on the left side Then, the light irradiation part 342a is arranged so as not to direct the light to the game area. As a result, it is possible to execute an effective light emitting effect while suppressing the dissatisfaction of the player.

Light having an optical axis directed to the right is emitted from the light emitting portion 342a arranged on the right side. A through hole 341a is formed in the fixed plate portion 341 at a position corresponding to the light irradiation portion 342a. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a can be visually recognized as light divided into granules, and the decorative substrate 342 is shielded by the fixed plate portion 341 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 342a. You can avoid being seen. The object illuminated by the light irradiation section 342a arranged on the right side will be described later.

26(a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device 330 viewed in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and FIG. 26(b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device 340 viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), the outer shape of the partition member 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 26( a ), the light irradiation unit 332 a arranged on the left side of the first light irradiation device 330 includes an LED whose optical axis passes through the partitioning member 310 and an LED whose optical axis passes through the partitioning member 310 . an LED through which the axis passes.

As a result, not only is the effect of irradiating light onto the granular member 320 inside the partitioning member 310 , but also other movable means (enlargement/reduction unit 600 and displacement/rotation unit 800 ) arranged on the rear side of the partitioning member 310 are illuminated with light. It is possible to execute the effect to irradiate.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the right side of the second light irradiation device 340 has no LED whose optical axis passes through the partitioning member 310, and the rear side of the partitioning member 310. It consists only of LEDs through which the optical axis passes.

As a result, while suppressing the light emission intensity into the partitioning member 310, the illumination intensity of the light directed to the other movable means (the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800) arranged on the rear side of the partitioning member 310 is reduced. can be improved.

In the second irradiation device 340, by suppressing the emission intensity to the inside of the partitioning member 310, it is possible to improve the comfort of the game in the normal state. That is, in the game in the normal state, the player's line of sight is not fixed, but is mainly directed to the left side of the game area, the display of the third symbol display device 81, or the vicinity of the first winning hole 64, In many cases, the player is looking at the area to the left of the center of the game area.

In this case, when the interior of the partitioning member 310 is irradiated with light from the second irradiation device 340, it shines at a position near the front to the same extent as the game area. As a result, there is a possibility that the visibility of the game area may be deteriorated for the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 is arranged toward the back side, and the light irradiation unit 342a is separated from the game area. can weaken the degree of influence on the visibility of the game area.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 emits light that illuminates the inner side of the center frame 86 in front view with high intensity while reducing the degree of lighting the game area. can perform the performance. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of lighting up the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) without lowering the visibility of the game area.

27 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the shooting unit 300 along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the shooting unit 300 are illustrated, and the illustration of the operation unit 500 is omitted. Also, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are schematically indicated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is arranged on the left side and the rear side of the vertically placed substrate unit 167, avoiding the later-described vertically placed substrate unit 167 that irradiates the light guide plate 161 with light. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a can be prevented from entering the light guide plate 161, and the light emission effect can be performed. It can be separated from performance.

When the light guide plate 161 is employed as in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 161 may unintentionally emit light depending on the light irradiation path, which may reduce the presentation effect. In particular, since the light irradiated around the light guide plate 161 (for example, the front side of the center frame 86) tends to illuminate the light guide plate 161, it may be necessary to suppress the light emission intensity, which may reduce the degree of freedom in rendering. was

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is configured to travel while avoiding the light guide plate 161, so that the degree of freedom in setting the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is improved. be able to. As a result, the degree of freedom of the lighting effect around the light guide plate 161 can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, description will be made. The injection device 400 is disposed below the partition member 310, and is a device on which the granular member 320 that has flowed downward from the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12(a)) of the partition member 310 rides.

28, 29 and 30 are front exploded perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32 and 33 are rear exploded perspective views of the injection device 400. FIG. 28 and 31 show an outline of the configuration of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 29 and 32 show details of a part of the configuration of the injection device 400 arranged near the front side. 30 and 33 show details of the configuration of a portion of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the rear side. 24 and 25 will be referred to as necessary in the description of FIGS. 28 to 33. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 33, the injection device 400 includes, as fixed members, a fixing member 350 fastened and fixed to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 24), and a fixed member 350 fastened and fixed on the rear side of the fixed member 350. A space forming member 360 configured to be able to form a space capable of accommodating other movable members between itself and the fixed member 350, and an electric wiring and transmission arm member 470 which are fastened and fixed on the back side of the space forming member 360 and which will be described later. and an intermediate member 401 disposed between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and having a keyhole-shaped opening 402 at its center.

A fastening screw used to fasten and fix the fixing member 350 to the partitioning member 310 is inserted through the partitioning member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, it is necessary to loosen this fastening screw with a screwdriver and remove it, but the game board 13 and the shooting unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12(a)). , the base plate 60 is arranged on the front side of the fixing member 350, and is configured so that a screwdriver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw.

Therefore, as a preparation before removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, the operation of removing the shooting unit 300 from the game board 13 can be performed. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the fixing member 350 is mistakenly removed from the partitioning member 310 and the granular member 320 is ejected from the fixing member 310 while the shooting unit 300 is attached to the game board 13.例文帳に追加be able to.

Injection device 400 is configured such that a plurality of metal rods MB1 fixed to the front side of intermediate member 401 are inserted as members displaceably arranged between intermediate member 401 and fixed member 350 so as to be linearly displaceable. a linear motion member 410 arranged above the linear motion member 410 and supported so as to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410; A contact member 430 is provided below the motion member 410 and configured to be capable of changing its state between a contactable state and a non-contactable state in the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410 .

The injection device 400 is a member disposed between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 so as to be displaceable. and a drive shaft of a driving motor MT1 fastened and fixed to a fixing member 350 and engaged with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440. A gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460 disposed on the side opposite to the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440 are provided.

The injection device 400 is a member arranged displaceably on the back side of the space forming member 360 and is pivotally supported so as to be rotationally displaceable about a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440 . A transmission arm member 470 configured to be displaceable by action, and a cover member 480 that is rotatably displaceable about a horizontal straight line as a rotation axis and is displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470 .

A design concept of the injection device 400 having the above configuration will be described. In the injection device 400 , the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 divide the arrangement range of the constituent members into three along the projecting direction of the shaft portion 362 projecting from the space forming member 360 . Among the arrangement ranges divided in this way, the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is generated in the intermediate range where the driving gear 450 rotated by the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is arranged, and the driving force is distributed between the front range and the rear range. are respectively transmitted to the range of , displacement of each component occurs in the front range and the rear range.

Based on this design concept, the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 are each provided with openings for transmitting driving force. That is, the intermediate portion 401 has a keyhole-shaped opening 402 , and the space forming member 360 has a lemon-shaped (substantially elliptical) opening 361 .

Since the transmission of the driving force is completed in the front range of the intermediate portion 401 and the rear range of the space forming member 360, the details of the configuration will be described in the order of the front range and the rear range. , the details of the construction of the intermediate range are described, and the mode of operation is described.

First, description will be made focusing on the front range. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 includes the opening 402 described above, a plurality of cylindrical projections 403 projecting from the upper end to the front side, and the cylindrical projections 403 a plurality of coil springs SP1 whose upper ends are supported by the base, a plurality of rod fixing portions 404 arranged in left-right symmetrical positions so as to be able to fix a plurality of metal rods MB1, and a columnar projection protruding toward the front side near the lower end. The lower end of the coil spring SP1 is hooked on each of a plurality of claws 411 formed on the lower end of the direct-acting member 410 .

The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed to be shorter than the distance between the cylindrical projection 403 and the claw 411 when the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. Therefore, the linear motion member 410 is always biased by the coil spring SP1, and the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position by the biasing force before the driving force is transmitted from the intermediate range. The coil spring SP1 is arranged obliquely below the direct-acting member 410. This is also intended to concentrate the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 on the side where the granular members 320 tend to accumulate.

The direct-acting member 410 includes the claw portion 411 described above, a plurality of insertion portions 412 formed so that the metal rod MB1 can be inserted therethrough, a trapezoidal projecting portion 413 projecting in a trapezoidal shape from the upper end portion in the left-right center, A linear protrusion 414 extending in the left-right direction at a substantially central position in the vertical width direction on the back side, and a lower protrusion formed as a shorter protrusion than the protrusion 414 on the lower side of the protrusion 414. 415, and a displacement restricting portion 416 protruding from the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction toward the front side.

Trapezoidal protruding portion 413 is formed so as to be able to abut on collision member 420 in a state in which direct-acting member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. In other words, the direct-acting member 410 is formed such that only the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 can come into contact with the collision member 420, and the portion other than the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 does not come into contact with the collision member 420. be.

The ridge portion 414 and the lower ridge portion 415 are portions that receive loads from other constituent members during load transmission, and the details will be described later.

The displacement restricting portion 416 is a portion of the fixed member 350 that abuts against the cushioning member 352 in the displacement direction, and this abutment restricts displacement of the direct-acting member 410 (upward-side displacement end is set).

The collision member 420 includes a curved plate portion 421 forming an arch-shaped collision surface, and a flat plate-shaped portion extending from the back side end portion of the curved plate portion 421 parallel to the plane in which the linear motion member 410 displaces. A plate portion 422, a plurality of elongated guide holes 423 extending along the extension direction of the plate portion 422, and a trapezoidal projecting portion 413 at the lower end of the left and right central portion of the plate portion 422 in the displacement direction. A cushioning member 424 is fixed at a position facing each other and arranged so as to be able to abut against the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 .

The cylindrical protrusion 403 is inserted through the guide hole 423 . That is, the columnar protrusion 403 is used both as a portion that supports the upper end portion of the coil spring SP1 and as a portion that guides the displacement of the collision member 420 .

The cushioning member 424 is formed as a small piece with a square outer shape from a highly durable and flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 424 and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 of the direct-acting member 410 come into contact can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 can be prevented from being damaged or chipped. can be suppressed.

The contact member 430 is formed in a substantially triangular elongated plate shape, and has a support hole 431 formed as a circular opening through which the support column portion 405 can be inserted at one end of the elongated plate, and the other end of the elongated plate. and a hook-shaped protrusion 433 having a hook-shaped cross section and protruding toward the front side at a position between the support hole 431 and the protrusion 432. Prepare.

The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support column portion 405 is inserted, whereby the contact member 430 is pivotally supported by the support column portion 405 so as to be rotatably displaceable.

The protruding portion 432 and the hook-shaped protruding portion 433 are portions that receive loads from other constituent members during load transmission, the details of which will be described later.

The fixing member 350 includes a motor fixing portion 351 to which the above-described drive motor MT1 is arranged and fixed, a buffer member 352 arranged so as to be able to abut against the displacement restricting portion 416, and a tip end of the circular protrusion 403 which can be received. a plurality of fastening recesses 353 formed as recesses configured so that a fastening screw inserted from the front side through a through-hole inside the recess can be screwed into a female thread formed in the circular protrusion 403 to be fastened and fixed; and a guide portion 354 which is formed of an inclined surface tapered from the front side and the left and right directions and guides the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24).

The cushioning member 352 is formed as a small piece having a square outer shape from a highly durable and flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 352 and the displacement restricting portion 416 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the occurrence of breakage and chipping of the displacement restricting portion 416 can be suppressed. be able to.

As described above, in this embodiment, the buffer members 352 and 424 are arranged at a plurality of locations with which the linear motion member 410 abuts at the end of displacement in the biasing direction. As a result, as will be described later, the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward at high speed by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. can be absorbed by the deformation of the cushioning members 352 and 424, and the load can be distributed to a plurality of locations.

The columnar protrusion 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected via the fastening recess 353, and in order to release this connection, the fastening screw inserted through the coupling recess 353 needs to be turned and removed. On the other hand, since the fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, it is possible to insert a screwdriver into the fastening screw when the game board 13 and the shooting effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12). configured to prevent

As a result, in a state where the game board 13 and the shooting performance unit 300 are assembled, the tightening screws are erroneously loosened to prevent loosening of the tightening between the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401. - 特許庁can be done.

Next, description will be made focusing on the rear range. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-described opening 361, a shaft portion 362 projecting in a columnar shape toward the front side from approximately the center position of the rear plate portion, and a rear plate portion. A pair of left and right guide inclined surfaces 363 formed as inclined surfaces on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion extending toward the front side at the left and right ends of the upper end position of the face plate portion, and arranged below the left and right inner side of the guide inclined surfaces 363 A pair of left and right protruding support portions 364 protruding from the back plate portion toward the front side, and both left and right end portions are formed in a cylindrical shape and arranged on the same line, and are formed in a size capable of pivotally supporting the lid member 480 . A plurality of support column portions 365, a torsion spring SP2 that is wound around the left support column portion 364 and generates a biasing force toward the retracting side of the lid member 480, and a columnar projection on the back side at the upper left portion of the opening 361. and a cylindrical projection 366 that is

The shaft portion 362 is a portion that rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as will be described later. Correspondingly, a wall portion having an arc-shaped inner surface centered on the shaft portion 362 extends from the rear plate portion of the space forming member 360 toward the front side. This wall portion can cover the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 inside.

The guide inclined surface 363 is configured so that the inclination of the left and right inner side surfaces is flush with the left and right inner gully surfaces of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and the granular member 320 flowing down is directed to the collision member 420 side (left and right central side). It is formed so as to be able to be guided toward.

The protruding support part 364 is formed so that the protruding tip contacts the back surface of the intermediate member 401 and the upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401 . This flush upper surface supports the left and right ends of the curved plate portion 421 in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position.

The support column portion 365 has different shapes on the left and right. That is, the right side is formed in a small-diameter cylindrical shape that protrudes outward to the left and right, and the left side is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter capable of receiving the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 .

The cylindrical protrusion 366 is a portion that rotatably supports the transmission arm 470 by being inserted through the transmission arm 470 . A screw having a large head diameter is fixed to a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 366, thereby supporting the transmission arm 470 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission arm member 470 is an elongated member having an approximately V-shape in appearance, and is a support that is bored with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 366 and through which the cylindrical projection 366 is inserted. A hole 471, a columnar protrusion 472 projecting from one end in the longitudinal direction toward the front side in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 471, and the other end in the longitudinal direction perpendicular to the axis of the support hole 471. and a transmission protrusion 473 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape along the plane.

The columnar protrusion 472 extends through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 toward the front side and is formed to be engageable with the rear transmission member 460 . In the present embodiment, the position of the transmission arm member 470 is changed by changing the arrangement of the cylindrical projection 472 as the rear transmission member 460 changes its position, which will be described later in detail.

A restricting member 370 is provided on the rear side of the columnar protrusion 472 . That is, the restricting member 370 is a plate-like member that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the space forming member 360, and includes a covering plate portion 371 that covers the movement path of the cylindrical protrusion 472 from the back side and an electrical wiring. Alternatively, a plurality of pressing claw portions 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling are provided.

The covering plate portion 371 is arranged close to the back side of the transmission arm member 470, and restricts the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 toward the back side (the back side in the rotation axis direction of the transmission arm member 470). As a result, it is possible to prevent the columnar protrusion 472 from separating from the rear transmission member 460 , thereby preventing the release of the engagement between the columnar protrusion 472 and the rear transmission member 460 . can.

The pressing claw portion 372 is a portion that temporarily fastens the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 and the detection sensor SC4 to the rear side plate of the space forming member 360 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the electrical wiring from shaking (for example, the arrangement of the electrical wiring changes due to vibration, etc.), and secure the approach path for other components. It can be configured to displace lateral slide member 840 and wings 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of displacement rotary unit 800 in a path that includes positions proximate device 400 .

The transmission protrusion 473 is a portion that is inserted through the lid member 480 to transmit driving force to the lid member 480 .

The lid member 480 is a member configured to be movable forward and backward in and out of the partitioning member 310 through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 12A) of the partitioning member 310, and is formed in a curved plate shape. 481, a plurality of extension plate portions 485 extending in the same direction from both left and right ends of the advancing/retracting portion 481, and a plurality of extension plate portions 485 coaxially received at the extending end portions of the extension plate portions 485. , a transmission hole 487 formed in the left extension plate portion 485 in a curved elongated hole shape and through which the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted, and a cylindrical shape surrounding the right reception portion 486 and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support column portion 365 can be inserted while surrounding the receiving portion 486 . a left cover member 489 having a cylindrical portion inserted into the left receiving portion 486 and an elongated hole-shaped portion continuously connected to the transmission hole 487 .

The left cover member 489 is provided with abutment surfaces 489a to 489c that are functionally formed rather than drilled along the axial direction, details of which will be described later.

The cross-sectional shape of the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is arc-shaped around the rotation axis assumed for the receiving portion 486, so that the load from the outer diameter side (the load applied from the granular member 320) can be rotated. Although it is configured to face the axis, it is not a simple pipe divided shape, but the radius of the arc and the length of formation are changed according to the left and right positions. This design intent will be explained.

First, the advance/retreat portion 481 has an overhang portion 482 projecting toward the entrance side at the lateral center position. The projecting portion 482 is formed so that the projecting width becomes shorter toward the left and right outer sides, and the end surface on the entry side is formed to be inclined toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, when the overhanging portion 482 and another component (in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed) come into contact with each other, the load directed to the left and right outer sides of the component is reduced. can be provided, and the component can be driven to the left and right outside.

Secondly, as described above, the advancing/retracting portion 481 is configured to be able to enter the partitioning member 310 through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the partitioning member 310. Since it enters the member 310, the arc radius of the advance/retreat portion 481 is shortened at the lateral center position where the overhang portion 482 is formed.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation that may occur at the point where it starts to enter the deformed penetrating portion 315 (the center of the projecting portion 482 in the left and right direction). can be suppressed.

Third, the radius of the arc is increased near the left and right outer sides of the retractable portion 481 , as opposed to the center position of the projecting portion 482 . The main purpose of this is to avoid contact with the particulate material 320 . That is, in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 12A) arranged on the upper surface of the collision member 420 stays on the left and right outer sides due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421 .

This retention method is not completely uniform on the left and right, and may become non-uniform on the left and right. For example, there is a possibility that an extremely large number of granular members 320 will stay on the right side, and if sufficient space is not secured, there is a possibility that the unevenly accumulated granular members 320 and the advancing/retreating portion 481 will collide. .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advance/retreat portion 481 is increased near the left and right outer portions where a large amount of the granular members 320 tend to stay. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficiently long distance between the advancing/retreating portion 481 and the curved plate portion 421 in advance. Collisions can be avoided.

Another design concept will be described. The extension plate portion 485 is formed on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, and the end face on the entrance side is recessed toward the retraction side. As a result, the extended plate portion 485 can be prevented from colliding with the staying granular member 320 .

In addition, even if the cover member 480 is arranged at the end of displacement on the entrance side before the granular member 320 completely flows down, the granular member 320 is positioned between the recess forming portion of the extension plate portion 485 and the curved portion of the partition member 310 . The particle members 320 can be collected above the collision member 420 by configuring the particle members 320 to be large enough to pass through the gap between the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25).

The right and left receiving portions 486 have different shapes. That is, the left receiving portion 486a on the left side is formed in a circular cylinder shape, and the right receiving portion 486b on the right side is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape (half-pipe shape).

Returning to FIG. 28 and FIG. 31, description will be made. The support column portion 365 that supports the lid member 480 extends laterally outward, particularly on the right side. It is necessary to divide the advance/retreat portion 481 in order to assemble it to the column portion 365 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the lid member 480 moves forward and backward through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The deformed penetrating part 315 needs to be configured to allow the lid member 480 to move back and forth with respect to the partitioning member 310 , and to be configured to prevent the particulate member 320 from being ejected from the partitioning member 310 . In other words, the deformed through portion 315 cannot be increased indefinitely, and the degree of freedom in designing the deformed through portion 315 is limited.

Here, if the lid member 480 loses its shape to such an extent that it cannot pass through the deformed through portion 315, it becomes impossible to move forward and backward. On the other hand, when the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured by coupling a plurality of members, there is a possibility that the shape may be lost due to factors such as assembly errors.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the receiving portion 486 is made different on the left and right, so that the moving portion 481 does not need to be divided. As an assembly process, first, the left receiving portion 486a is arranged on the axially outer side (left side) of the support column portion 365, and the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 is inserted into the support column portion 365 while being inserted into the left receiving portion 486a. Thus, the left receiving portion 486a can be arranged coaxially with the support column portion 365. As shown in FIG.

At this time, the right receiving portion 486b is arranged to face the support column portion 365 on the open side of the half cylinder. The left cover member 489 is fastened and fixed to the extended plate portion 485 by inserting fastening screws through the plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489 and screwing them into the extended plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480 . can do.

After that, the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction, and the screw head of the fastening screw that is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the right support column portion 365 is used to support the lid member 480 into a space. It can be rotatably supported relative to the forming member 360 .

The design concept of the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 to 36 show the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in chronological order.

34(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34(b) is a transmission arm member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34(a). 34(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc of FIG. 34(b).

35(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35(b) is a plan view of the transmission arm member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35(a). 35(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b).

36(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 36(b) is a transmission arm member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). 36(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. 36(b).

35 and 36 illustrate a process in which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 34, and the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. Specifically, FIG. 36 illustrates a state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at the entry-side end of the displacement range, and FIG. The arranged state is shown, and FIG. 35 shows the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the intermediate position of the displacement range.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in this embodiment, the rotation axis of transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of cover member 480 are not parallel. Specifically, a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 (a plane shown in FIG. 34(a)) and a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (a plane shown in FIG. 34(b)) ) are orthogonal to each other.

Therefore, without countermeasures, the contact area of the transmission protrusion 473 that contacts the left cover member 489 normally changes as the posture changes. For example, when the inner surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending parallel to the axial direction of the lid member 480, the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 extends in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 34(a). On the other hand, in the inclined state, the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 is considered to abut on the left cover member 489 at a rightward position (near the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36( a ), when the longitudinal direction of the transmission projection 473 extends along the left-right direction, the upper side surface of the transmission projection 473 is considered to be in contact with the left cover member 489 across the width direction. be done.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34(c), 35(c) and 36(c), the upper surface of the transmission projection 473 changes in accordance with the posture change of the transmission projection 473. The left cover member 489 is designed in such a shape that the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 can abut across the lateral width direction.

That is, the left cover member 489 has a first contact surface 489a that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side, and the first contact surface 489a is relatively small. A second contact surface 489b formed with a small inclination in the left-right direction, and a lid member 480 formed with a small inclination in the left-right direction compared to the second contact surface 489b are arranged at the displacement end position on the entrance side. and a third contact surface 489c that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in a state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the inclination of the shape of the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 with respect to the left-right direction is maximized at the first contact surface 489a and gradually decreases toward the rotation axis of the lid member 480. designed to

More specifically, as the transmission arm member 470 rotates, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the cover member 480 . The inclination at the contact position of the left cover member 489 with the upper side surface of the opening is designed at an inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 in the contact state.

As a result, when the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are in contact with each other, the contact area between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can always be ensured regardless of the posture of the transmission arm member 470 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a local load (overload) from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 from the left cover member 489 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, at the timing when a large load is generated, that is, the timing at which the cover member 480 starts to be displaced against gravity, the inclination angle of the transmission projection 473 is set with respect to the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489). Therefore, the contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

As a result, the area that bears the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the durability of the transmission protrusion 473 can be improved.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the entry side, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489). In addition to the reduced contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is maximized, and there is a possibility that the transmission protrusion 473 will be overloaded. be.

As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, when the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, the proportion of the weight of the cover member 480 that is applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is reduced. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entrance side, the advance/retreat portion 481, which accounts for most of the weight of the lid member 480, is the rotational axis of the lid member 480. It is arranged on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-rear direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated in the direction of displacing the lid member 480 toward the entrance side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

In this case, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is the maximum, but since most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, the biasing force is at least Part of this can be offset by the weight of the lid member 480 itself.

As a result, the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is greater than that in the case where most of the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 473 in the state where the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side. can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480 . More specifically, the distance between the abutment position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the cover member 480 in the process of displacing the cover member 480 from the retreating position to the entering position is The member 480 is configured to be the longest when it is arranged at the displacement end position on the withdrawal side.

In addition, the first contact surface 489a has a normal line at the contact position with the transmission protrusion 473 on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480, which is an arc centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed so as to follow (the inclination angle becomes small), the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is shifted to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can occur along an arc.

This lengthens the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 when the load starts to be transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480, thereby reducing the load required to rotate the lid member 480. can do.

As a contrivance of the shape of the transmission projection 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34(c), the transmission projection 473 has a groove 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, the transmission protrusion 473 is formed with a groove 473a extending in the longitudinal direction from the front side to the rear side to a position beyond the center in the width direction.

As a result, the transmission protrusion 473 can be compressed and deformed in the direction of contact with the left cover member 489, so that the load applied during contact can be relieved by deformation, and the contact area can be easily increased by deformation. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 34(b), 35(b), and 36(b), the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane across the left and right. be done. Therefore, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 becomes shorter toward the center in the left-right direction due to the shape of the retractable portion 481 and the projecting portion 482 .

The radius of the projecting portion 482 of the lid member 480 at the center position in the left-right direction is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotation axis O1 to the curved plate portion 312 . As a result, the projecting portion 482 having the maximum approach width can be prevented from colliding with the curved plate portion 312, so that the lid member 480 is slightly over-rotated (caused by the design error of each member). In this case, the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 can be prevented from colliding and being damaged.

Returning to FIGS. 28 and 31, description will be made focusing on the intermediate range. The drive gear 450 is meshed with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, as the drive gear 450 rotates, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 440 rotate. The transmission member 460 integrally rotates about the shaft portion 362 of the space forming member 360 . In the following description, rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (viewed from the side of the front transmission member 440) is defined as forward rotation.

The front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 have a configuration for ensuring mutual relative position and rigidity on the side arranged opposite to each other, and the opposite side surface is used for driving force transmission. A shape is formed. The details of the shape portion used for this driving force transmission will be described below.

37(a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 37(b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. . The arrow XXXVIIa direction and the arrow XXXVIIb direction are set as directions parallel to the rotation axes of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 .

As shown in FIG. 37( a ), the front transmission member 440 includes a substantially disk-shaped body plate portion 441 and an axially protruding center portion of the body plate portion 441 from the edge of the body plate portion 441 . A groove forming portion 442 that is recessed, a support hole 443 that is a circular opening that is drilled in the central portion of the main body plate portion 441 and has a size that allows the shaft portion 362 to pass through, and a gear that is formed in the main body plate portion 441. A flange portion 444 covering the teeth, a detected portion 445 extending radially outward from the flange portion 444 and formed so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32), and groove formation. a transmission protrusion 446 protruding parallel to the rotation shaft from a position eccentric to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side of the groove formed in the portion 442 .

The groove forming portion 442 is recessed with a groove having a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the projecting portion 432 so that the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The groove is a first groove portion 442a formed along a first circular arc shape, and the front transmission member 440 rotates forward in a state in which the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged in the first groove portion 442a. A second groove portion 442b in which the protruding portion 432 is guided, and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 442a with respect to the second groove portion 442b and having a larger diameter than the arc serving as the reference of the first groove portion 442a. and a fourth groove portion 442d connecting the third groove portion 442c and the first groove portion 442a.

While the second groove portion 442b and the fourth groove portion 442d have a common role of connecting between the first groove portion 442a and the third groove portion 442c, their forming angle range is not common. That is, the formation angle range of the fourth groove portion 442d is smaller than that of the second groove portion 442b. designed to be

The transmission projection 446 does not have a simple cylindrical shape, but has a groove 446a formed in a straight line connecting the central portion and a point on the outer diameter side along the projecting direction. Thereby, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 with respect to the load input from the radial direction can be changed according to the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when a load is input in a direction perpendicular to the straight line that serves as a reference for the groove 446a.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), the rear transmission member 460 includes a body plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disk shape with a diameter approximately equal to that of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440, and and a groove forming portion 462 projecting in the axial direction of the body plate portion 461 and having a groove recessed therein; and a non-contact opening 463 formed to avoid contact with the

The main body plate portion 461 includes a weight portion 461a that is enlarged in the radial direction in a range in which a recessed groove portion is not formed in the groove forming portion 462 and does not function as a groove. The weight portion 461a is an adjustment portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of deviation of the center of gravity of the rotationally displaced rear transmission member 460 from the rotation axis.

In the present embodiment, the center of gravity is calculated when the rear transmission member 460 and the front transmission member 440, which are integrally rotationally displaced, are viewed as an integrated body, and the weight 461a is arranged and arranged for the purpose of correcting the center of gravity to the shape of the rotation axis. It is weighted and formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460 . As a result, the center of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be aligned with the rotation axis, so that the posture change of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation axis can be suppressed. .

The groove forming portion 462 is formed with a groove having a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the cylindrical projection 472 so that the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter. , the groove includes a first groove portion 462a formed along a first circular arc shape, and the rear transmission member 460 in a state where the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged in the first groove portion 462a. A second groove portion 462b in which the cylindrical protrusion 472 is guided by forward rotation (rotation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back), and a second groove portion 462b formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 462a with respect to the second groove portion 462b. A third groove 462c formed along an arc having a larger diameter than the reference arc of 462a, and a fourth groove 462d connecting the third groove 462c and the first groove 462a.

While the second groove portion 462b and the fourth groove portion 462d have a common role of connecting between the first groove portion 462a and the third groove portion 462c, their forming angle range is not common. That is, compared to the second groove portion 462b, the formation angle range of the fourth groove portion 462d is remarkably large (approximately 180 degrees). It is designed so that the change in the distance between is slow.

An example of a displacement mode enabled by the injection device 400 will be described below. First, an overview of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be described.

38, 39, 40 and 41 are plan views of the injection device 400 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 38, 39, 40 and 41, the illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted so that the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized. In order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring SP1 is shown in phantom lines as a schematic diagram to the extent that changes in length can be grasped.

38 to 41 illustrate the displacement of the injection device 400 in chronological order. 38 shows the state immediately after the granular member 320 flows down toward the collision member 420 and stops, FIG. 39 shows the waiting state of the injection device 400 for effect, and FIG. A shooting standby state, which is a state of waiting for the shooting timing of the device 400, is illustrated, and FIG. 41 illustrates a shooting state, which is a state immediately after the ejection device 400 executes the shooting effect. 41 shows a state in which the granular member 320 is still riding on the collision member 420, the granular member 320 scatters in the normal direction of the curved plate portion 421 immediately after this.

In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported by the direct-acting member 410, and the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreating side. A state in which the cover member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the end of displacement on the entrance side will be described as the effect waiting state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 39).

In the effect waiting state shown in FIG. 39, the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, so that the player's line of sight to the granular member 320 can be partially blocked by the cover member 480 . As a result, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be reduced, so that the player's eyes can be taken away from the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 arranged therebelow.

In the firing standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is suspended in such a manner that the cylindrical projection 403 abuts against the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreat side. . In addition, as will be described later, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430, and the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

In the firing state shown in FIG. 41, the placement of the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retreating side, the collision member 420 is bounced by the linear motion member 410 and rises, and the cylindrical protrusion 403 is pushed up into the guide hole. It stops at a position where it abuts against the lower inner surface of 423 . After that, the collision member 420 is displaced downward by its own weight or the weight of the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG.

The flowing down of the granular members 320 splashed and scattered by the collision member 420 is guided toward the collision member 420 after being gathered to the left-right central side due to the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310. (See arrows schematically shown in FIG. 38).

In the present embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided toward the collision member 420, the collision member 420 is arranged relatively upward. and the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 is set shallow.

Therefore, due to the shape, there is a possibility that the plurality of granular members 320 cannot be received unevenly. In this embodiment, the partitioning member 310 accommodates the number of granular members 320 that cannot be received unevenly.

As a result, for example, even if a large number of the granular members 320 begin to return to the right side of the collision member 420, when the granular members 320 return after that, the granular members 320 that have returned first will cause the collision member 420 to move. Since a slope that slopes downward toward the left side is formed on the right side, the granular material 320 that returns later flows along the slope to the left. That is, it flows to the left while riding on the granular member 320 .

As a result, the left and right bias of the granular members 320 accumulated on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 can be reduced, so that the bias in the arrangement of the granular members 320 (differences in the scattering mode) in each firing performance can be reduced. can do.

Further, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is arranged in the middle position of the displacement section, and the lower direct-acting member 410 and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 are located at one point. They are only in contact with each other. Therefore, the collision member 420 is allowed to change its posture by the gap generated between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423 . In other words, it is allowed to change its posture in a manner of rotating around an axis parallel to the axis of one cylindrical protrusion 403 .

As described above, for example, when a large number of granular members 320 begin to return to the right side of the collision member 420, the collision member 420 changes its posture so that the right side descends compared to the left side. However, in this case, the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is relatively displaced to the right.

Therefore, it becomes easier to guide the granular member 320, which flows down near the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) and returns to the collision member 420 side, to the left side. For example, before the collision member 420 changes its posture, the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 and the uppermost position of the curved plate portion 421 match when viewed from the front. As to which direction the granular members 320 flow down, it is considered that the granular members 320 and the curved plate portion 421 are distributed almost evenly to the left and right depending on the difference in contact points between the granular members 320 and the curved plate portion 421 .

On the other hand, when the collision member 420 changes its posture, the position of the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is shifted to the right with respect to the left-right center position of the guide portion 354, and the guide portion 354 flows downward at the left-right center position. It is considered that the granular member 320 is guided leftward along the slope of the curved plate portion 421 . As a result, it becomes easier for the granular members 320 that have returned later to flow down to the side where there are fewer staying granular members 320, so that the granular members 320 can be distributed substantially evenly to the left and right.

It should be noted that the attitude change of the collision member 420 is not always permitted. For example, in the firing standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), the cylindrical projections 403 are arranged at the upper end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is suspended at two symmetrical points. Therefore, compared with the effect waiting state of the injection device 400, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed.

Further, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), the cylindrical projections 403 are arranged at the lower end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 moves upward at two symmetrical points. is restricted, the change in posture of the collision member 420 is suppressed compared to the effect standby state of the injection device 400 .

In addition, when the collision member 420 receives the load from the linear motion member 410, the load is the biasing force generated by the pair of coil springs SP1 that expand and contract in the direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the pair of guide holes 423. The posture of the collision member 420 is easily stabilized.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the attitude change of the collision member 420 from the firing standby state to the firing state. This makes it possible to stabilize how the granular members 320 scatter under the load from the collision member 420 when the staying state of the granular members 320 (left-right imbalance in the number of particles) is the same.

As described above, when the injection device 400 executes the shooting effect, the granular members 320 scatter, flow down along the internal shape of the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 , and return to the production standby state again. That is, in the present embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes of FIGS. 38 to 41 . The relationship between the structures of injection device 400 to enable this state change is described in detail below.

FIGS. 42(a) to 42(f) and FIGS. 43(a) to 43(e) show the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430 and the front transmission member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 440 is a plan view of FIG.

42(a) to 42(f) and FIGS. 43(a) to 43(e), the outlines of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420 and the contact member 430 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 414 and 415 of the linear motion member 410, the cushioning member 424 of the collision member 420, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 and the hook-shaped The outer shape of the protrusion 433 is illustrated by a solid line, the interior thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the rear side thereof is illustrated without being hidden.

Also, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical projection 403 is shown in solid lines, and the inside thereof is shown transparently. is illustrated without being hidden.

In addition, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated by imaginary lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with drive control.

42 and 43, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 (hereinafter also referred to as "each component member" in the description of FIGS. ) are shown in chronological order. They will be described in order below.

FIG. 42(a) shows the layout of each component in the injection device 400 in the waiting state for the effect. As shown in FIG. 42(a), when the ejection device 400 is in the presentation standby state, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 begins to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled to rotate forward. By detecting a change from a state in which the portion 445 is not arranged to a state in which the portion 445 to be detected is inserted, it can be determined that the ejection device 400 is in the effect standby state.

FIG. 42(b) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 abuts on the projection 414 of the linear motion member 410 and starts pushing down the linear motion member 410. FIG. From the state shown in FIG. 42(b), the front transmission member 440 starts pushing down the linear motion member 410 against the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, from FIG. 42(a) to FIG. 42(b), since the linear motion member 410 and the front side transmission member 440 are not in contact with each other, direct load transmission between the members is interrupted. Therefore, for example, even if the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420 and the collision member 420 vibrates slightly, the vibration and load are directly transmitted to the front transmission member 440. is configured to be interruptible.

FIG. 42(c) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position of the displacement range and the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 begins to be released.

From the state shown in FIG. 42(b) to the state shown in FIG. 42(c), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are integrally displaced downward. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other, and the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are in contact with each other. , indirectly to the front transmission member 440 .

On the other hand, the load generated when the granular member 320 collides with the collision member 420 is a load in the direction of pushing down the linear motion member 410. This is the direction away from the protrusion 446 . Therefore, the influence of the load and vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the positive rotational displacement of the transmission member 440 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the influence on forward rotation displacement is not limited at all. For example, there are influences such as the difference between the speed that is driven and controlled as rotational displacement and the actual speed, and the influence that hinders the rotational displacement and causes the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat.

FIG. 42(d) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the first groove portion 442a of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 begins to tilt. be done.

The abutting member 430 is a member that does not receive an urging force from other urging means and changes its posture according to the shape of the grooved portion 442 . From FIG. 42D, the number of members displaced by the front transmission member 440 is increased to two, namely, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430. Since it is the same, substantially, the state of the load received by the front transmission member 440 is little changed from the state before FIG.

FIG. 42(e) illustrates the arrangement of each structural member in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the lower terminal position of the displacement range. As shown in FIG. 42(e), when the linear motion member 410 is located at the lower end position, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still separated from each other.

After the state shown in FIG. 42(e), the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to be displaced upward. Therefore, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction of pushing the transmission projection 446. The load required for posture change can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. As a result, the load on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

FIG. 42(f) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the second groove portion 442b of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 has finished tilting. be done.

As shown in FIG. 42(f), the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart from each other, but after the state shown in FIG. is arranged in the third groove portion 442c, the posture of the contact member 430 is maintained (posture change is prevented).

Therefore, regarding the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 after this, compared to the case where the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are brought into contact with each other at a speed in the direction facing each other, the speed of contact is greater. Aspects can be softened.

In order to facilitate understanding, FIG. 43(a) shows the same state as FIG. 42(f). In FIG. 43(b), as the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced upward, the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward. The arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state where the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of 430 starts to abut.

The state shown in FIG. 43(a) to the state immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43(d) corresponds to the firing standby state (for example, see FIG. 40).

The lower protrusion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433 are provided with projecting portions projecting toward the mutually opposing sides at the tip portions on the mutually opposing sides. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slippage at the contact position between the lower protruding portion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433, so that the lower protruding portion 415 and the hook-shaped protruding portion 433 can stably contact each other. can be brought into contact.

In the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the end position of the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front transmission member 440 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 43B, the detected portion 445 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 to be detected by the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state in which the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled to rotate forward. Control is performed to determine that the injection device 400 has transitioned to the firing standby state by detecting a change from the state in which the portion 445 is arranged to the state in which the detected portion 445 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. A coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) exerts a biasing force on the direct-acting member 410, and a load is applied to the contact member 430 in a direction that causes the contact member 430 to stand up. The displacement of the setting portion 432 is restricted by being blocked by the groove forming portion 442 .

The contact between the protruding portion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is the contact between the circularly curved surface (the outer side surface of the protruding portion 432) and the arcuate surface (the inner side surface of the third groove portion 442c). The resulting load is directed towards the center of the circle.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the grooved portion 442 is directed toward the rotating shaft of the front transmission member 440, so the load applied from the projecting portion 432 is applied to the front side. It is possible to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 440 from being affected, and to restrict the displacement of the projecting portion 432 regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440 .

Therefore, in the firing standby state shown in FIG. 43(b), the state shown in FIG. 43(b) can be maintained even after the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized. As a result, the heat generation of the drive motor MT1 can be suppressed, for example, compared to a configuration in which the drive motor MT1 must be constantly energized in the firing standby state, so the degree of freedom in setting the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be increased. can be improved.

For example, when the injection device 400 is driven and controlled in conjunction with the display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the setting of the length of the display effect from the firing standby state to the firing state is restricted. does not occur from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

FIG. 43(c) shows the arrangement of the constituent members in a state where the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the third groove portion 442c of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 begins to stand up. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(c), the position of the grooved portion 442 in contact with the projecting portion 432 changes from the third grooved portion 442c. The axis of rotation of the member 440 is displaced.

Therefore, in order to deenergize the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 must be turned off before the state shown in FIG. 43(b) changes to the state shown in FIG. must be de-energized.

In FIG. 43(d), the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of the contact member 430 retreats from the displacement trajectory of the lower projection 415 of the linear motion member 410, so that the upward displacement restriction of the linear motion member 410 is released. , and coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward by the biasing force accumulated, and the collision member 420 is bounced upward. The state shown in FIG. 43(d) corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

Since the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction is basically generated along the shape of the grooved portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, the driving force is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). . On the other hand, since the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not restricted by the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the contact member 430 via the linear motion member 410 The urging force (see FIG. 38) also acts to assist the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction.

In this embodiment, both the direction of displacement of the contact member 430 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the direction of displacement of the contact member 430 caused by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 given via the linear motion member 410 are Since they are configured to be the same in the erecting direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the contact member 430 can be generated in a mutually assisting manner.

FIG. 43(e) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 442d of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 finishes standing. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43( e ), the position of the grooved portion 442 that contacts the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is the first grooved portion 442 a. As a result, the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the grooved portion 442 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440 , so that the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the grooved portion 442 is applied to the front transmission member 440 . The influence on rotation can be reduced.

For example, in the present embodiment, the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) was applied to the contact member 430 until immediately before the state shown in FIG. ) It is expected that the load generated in the direction in which the contact member 430 is erected in subsequent displacements will also increase. Therefore, without countermeasures, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 may be hindered due to the standing displacement of the contact member 430 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the contact member 430 finishes standing up, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged in the first groove portion 442 a, and the contact member 430 moves through the projecting portion 432 . The load applied to the front transmission member 440 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440 . This makes it easier to avoid hindrance to the rotation of the front transmission member 440 due to the standing displacement of the contact member 430 .

43(e), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction to rotate the front transmission member 440 forward, and when it is detected that the detected portion 445 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. , the injection device 400 can be returned to the effect standby state by controlling the drive motor MT1 to stop, and the MPU 221 ( 4) is designed.

In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as an example of the control of the ejection device 400, the ejection execution control of making one rotation of the front transmission member 440 in the forward rotation direction from the standby state of the ejection device 400 for rendering has been described. In the shooting execution control, in the shooting state, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 which is lifted by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, and the granular member 320 scatters.

This effect is flashy because the granular members 320 are scattered in the field of view of the player, and can improve the attention of the player. At the timing near the end of the following long reach, if a big hit is achieved, the player's amusement can be improved by shifting to a shooting state and scattering the granular members 320 for presentation.

On the other hand, if it is not a big win (if it is a miss), executing the effect of scattering the granular members 320 may mislead the player into thinking that it is a big win, which is not preferable.

Further, if the driving motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all when the ejection state does not shift (in the case of a miss), the driving sound of the driving motor MT1 indicates that the long reach during execution results in a jackpot. The player will be able to ascertain whether it will be or will be lost, and there is a risk that the player's interest will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of misalignment, after the injection device 400 is placed in the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 is controlled to rotate the front transmission member 440 in the reverse direction. It is configured to be able to return to the performance standby state of the injection device 400 without going through the firing state.

That is, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 43(c), by driving and controlling the driving motor MT1 in the direction of rotating the front side transmission member 440 in the reverse direction (clockwise), each constituent member is displaced in the reverse direction of the time series. can be made

In this case, before the contact member 430 starts to be displaced in the upright direction (see FIG. 42(e)), the linear motion member 410 is pushed down to bring the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 into contact with each other. is released (see FIG. 42(f)), it is possible to avoid rubbing between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 when the contact is released.

42(e) onward, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission projection 440 via the linear motion member 410 causes the front transmission projection 440 to rotate. Since it works in the assisting direction, it is possible to reduce the magnitude of the drive force required for the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

In this case, the upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not instantaneous due to the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is configured as a gradual displacement accompanying the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446. FIG.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the linear motion member 410 from knocking off the collision member 420, so that the injection device 400 is placed in the effect waiting state (see FIG. 42(a)) without executing the effect in which the granular member 320 scatters. can be returned to

In order to achieve the state shown in FIG. 42(a) after the front transmission member 440 reversely rotates, the detection sensor SC4 is rotated after detecting that the detected portion 445 has retreated from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be driven and controlled so as to rotate the front side transmission member 440 forward until it is detected that the groove 445 to be detected has again entered the detection groove of .

As a result, both the effect control to scatter the granular members 320 and the effect control not to scatter the granular members 320 can be executed with the same preparatory motion associated with the driving of the drive motor MT1. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible for the player to easily understand whether the game is a big win or not, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the result of winning or losing due to the difference in the driving sound.

In particular, according to this embodiment, in the firing standby state (see FIG. 43(c)), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized, and the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 can be temporarily eliminated. . As a result, compared to the case where control is performed to switch the driving direction from a state in which the driving of the driving motor MT1 is continued, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize from the driving sound whether the driving direction is the same or the opposite direction. .

Therefore, even if the driving motor MT1 is driven and controlled prior to the winning/failure notification timing in the performance, and the driving sound is generated, it is difficult to determine the driving direction, thereby avoiding a situation in which the player grasps the winning/failing result. be able to.

As a result, the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started prior to the timing of the success/fail notification without running the risk of the player grasping the win/fail result by the driving sound. It is possible to give width to the stop timing. In other words, it is possible to eliminate the need to stop the driving motor MT1 in a state immediately before the firing state, and even if the driving motor MT1 is stopped in a state sufficiently before the firing state, there is no hindrance to the performance thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor MT1 overrotates against the control and unintentionally enters a firing state.

FIGS. 44(a) to 44(f) are plan views of the rear transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470, and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIb in FIG.

In FIG. 44, the change in arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter also referred to as “each constituent member” in the description of FIG. 44) associated with forward rotation (clockwise rotation) of the rear transmission member 460 is Illustrated in chronological order. They will be described in order below.

FIG. 44(a) illustrates the arrangement of each component in the injection device 400 in the effect standby state (see FIG. 42(a)). As shown in FIG. 44( a ), when the ejection device 400 is in the performance standby state, the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the third groove 462 c of the rear transmission member 460 , and the cover member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side.

Since the cover member 480 receives a biasing force directed toward the retreating side from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), a load is generated through the cover member 480 in the direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and this load is reduced. The transmission to the rear transmission member 460 may affect the rotation of the rear transmission member 460 without countermeasures.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state after FIG. 44(a), the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 contacts the third groove 462c of the groove forming portion 462, and When a load is applied to the rear transmission member 460, the contact between the circular curved surface and the arc-shaped surface causes the load generated by the contact to move toward the center of the circle.

Therefore, the load applied to the grooved portion 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the rear transmission member 460, so the load applied to the grooved portion 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is transferred to the rear side. The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

In FIG. 44(b), the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the terminal position of the third groove 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the cover member 480 is still arranged at the displacement terminal position on the entry side. The placement of each component in the state is illustrated.

In FIG. 44(c), the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the middle position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at substantially the middle position of the displacement range. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

Since the posture change of the transmission arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the grooved portion 462 of the rear side transmission member 460, the driving force for the posture change drives the rear side transmission member 460 to rotate. It is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) works in the direction of pushing down the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the cover member 480, and at the same time, this biasing force pushes the cylindrical projection 472 upward. Since the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 also acts to assist the posture change of the transmission arm member 470, it acts in the direction of displacement.

In this embodiment, the direction in which the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes due to the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the direction in which the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes due to the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied via the lid member 480 are Since both are configured identically in the clockwise direction, the driving force and the biasing force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in a mutually supportive manner.

In FIG. 44(d), the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the withdrawal side. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 44(d), the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end on the retreating side by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are arranged without contact.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 even when it is not necessary to displace the cover member 480 toward the entrance side, and it is possible to reduce the degree of accumulation of fatigue in the transmission arm member 470. .

In FIG. 44(e), the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged in the middle of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end on the retreat side. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

After the state shown in FIG. 44(e), the firing standby state (see FIG. 43(b)) is configured. From the firing standby state to the firing state, the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the retracting side, and is configured to be able to avoid collision with the ejected granular member 320 (see FIG. 41).

In FIG. 44(f), the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the terminal position of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement terminal position on the retreating side. The placement of each component in the state is illustrated.

From the state shown in FIG. 44(e) to the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the injection device 400 goes through the firing state (see FIG. 41). Then, by continuing forward rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, and returns to the effect standby state (see FIG. 44(a)).

Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44(f) is the state after execution of the shooting effect, there is no load transmission from the linear motion member 410 or the contact member 430 to the front side transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. 43 ( e) see). Therefore, the amount of the drive force of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) that is distributed to the front transmission member 440 side can be greatly reduced.

As a result, even if a large driving force is required because the lid member 480 is displaced in a direction opposing the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is maintained. can be used as a driving force for rotating other components that abut on the rear transmission member 460, a sufficient driving force can be ensured.

FIG. 45 is a plan view of the injection device 400 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 45, illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted so that the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 45, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420 and the contact member 430 are illustrated in a manner similar to that described in FIGS. Also, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical projection 403 is shown in solid lines, and the inside thereof is shown transparently. is illustrated without being hidden.

45, in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the displacement end position on the rising side (for example, the waiting state for the effect, see FIG. 42(a)), the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction, and the front transmission The figure shows a state in which the transmission projection 446 of the member 440 contacts the lower projection 415 of the direct-acting member 410 from below, and further rotational displacement is restricted.

Thus, in the present embodiment, a limit is set for the displacement mode that is allowed for the front transmission member 440 . That is, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, in forward rotation, the front transmission member 440 can be continuously driven without being restricted in displacement. When the displacement angle exceeds the allowable angle, the displacement of the transmission projection 446 is restricted by the linear motion member 410, and further continuous driving is restricted.

If the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven while the displacement is restricted, the drive motor MT1 may generate heat and may be damaged. is provided to avoid damage to the drive motor MT1, the details of which will be described later.

FIG. 46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the arrangement of the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate. and a change over time of the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470. FIG.

It should be noted that FIG. 46 does not describe the relative relationship between the variation widths of the layout changes of the respective configurations, but shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the layout changes occur. Also, the change in the arrangement of the direct-acting member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

In addition, in FIG. 46, the standard rotation angle of forward rotation from the effect standby state (FIGS. 42(a) and 44(a)) is shown on the horizontal axis. That is, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(a), 66 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(b), 125 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(c), 162 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(d), 202 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(e), 219 degrees corresponds to FIGS. 42(f) and 43(a), 228 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(b), and 266 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(c). , 287 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(d), and 295 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(e).

46, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(c), and 173 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(d). , 304 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(e), and 360 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(f).

In FIG. 46 , the forward rotation angle of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is shown on the horizontal axis with the production standby state as a reference (the angle is 0 degrees), and each of the above-described constituent members corresponding to the angle State changes in are described. The change in arrangement of each component due to drive control in forward rotation corresponds to the change toward the right in FIG. 46, and the change in placement of each component due to drive control in reverse rotation corresponds to the change toward the left in FIG. respond to changes.

As shown in FIG. 46, the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is upwardly displaced by rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the reverse direction before entering the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) is It becomes slower than the displacement speed when the collision member 420 reaches the firing state and is displaced upward. That is, in the present embodiment, the speed of upward displacement of the collision member 420 can be configured in a plurality of ways.

In addition, since the collision member 420 has already been raised after the firing state is exceeded, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted halfway (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, whether the arrangement of the front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect waiting state (angle of 360 degrees) is determined only from the output state of the detection sensor SC4. Can not.

For example, when the arrangement of the front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the presentation standby state (angle of 360 degrees), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Even so, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) cannot determine whether the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on again, the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is suspected to be between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle of 360 degrees). , that is, when the detected portion 445 is not arranged in the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is OFF), the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven in the forward rotation direction. Motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

Due to this rotation, the injection device 400 is temporarily returned to the production standby state, and then the execution control of each production is performed. As a result, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is unintentionally restricted after the control is interrupted such as when the power is turned on again, thereby preventing the drive motor MT1 from generating heat. can be done.

In this embodiment, the position of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) is changed from the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) to the state (angle of 304 degrees) where the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 begins to change its position. The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at a rotational speed at which is stabilized.

For example, if the arrangement is stabilized 2 seconds after the launch, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven and controlled to rotate at 8 degrees per second (45 seconds/rotation), so that the particles in the middle of the flow are controlled. It is possible to prevent the member 320 from being caught in the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

Note that the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be rotated at a quadruple speed. In this case, the lid member 480 can start to be displaced to the entrance side at the timing when the granular member 320 starts to flow down. In this case, the displacement of the lid member 480 can be completed before the granular members 320 are arranged in the traveling direction of the lid member 480 .

In this state, by stopping the drive in the performance standby state, the granular members 320 can be deposited above the lid member 480, so that the granular members 320 can be gathered to the left-right central side along the shape of the lid member 480. can be done. After that, by driving and controlling the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the granular member 320 falls from the lid member 480 as the lid member 480 is displaced toward the retreat side, and the impact member 420 is moved. ride on.

In this way, by controlling the rotation speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 differently, it is possible to configure a plurality of modes until the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 .

Thereby, the relative position of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) with respect to the collision member 420 can be changed for each firing execution control. Therefore, for example, by configuring the granular members 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, it is possible to change the appearance of the fired granular members 320 (arrangement and displacement direction of each granular member 320). , the performance effect can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, description will be made. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described shooting effect unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement/rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for livening up the game. Next, the scaling unit 600 will be described.

47 and 48 are front perspective views of the scaling unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are rear perspective views of the scaling unit 600. FIG. FIGS. 47 and 49 show the rendering standby state of the scaling unit 600, and FIGS. 48 and 50 show the extended state of the scaling unit 600. FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 includes an effect member 700 which can move up and down at the central position in the left-right direction and which is capable of emitting light, and a hemispherical lighting unit fixedly arranged apart from the right and left sides of the effect member 700. a device 613;

By performing a light emission effect with the effect member 700 and the hemispherical lighting device 613, the light is emitted from the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 7) to the player, and the effect is executed to make the player visually glamorous. be able to.

51 is a front exploded perspective view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 52 is a rear exploded perspective view of the scaling unit 600. FIG. 51 and 52, the effect member 700 is illustrated in an assembled state. As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, in the assembled state, the tip of the lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is arranged on the front side of the rear plate portion 611, but in FIGS. , are arranged on the rear side of the rear plate portion 611 for convenience.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 includes a left and right elongated body member 601 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 (see FIG. 5), and a front surface of the body member 601. A front cover member 610 arranged on the side and having a design surface, a pair of upper arm members 620 rotatably supported by the columnar shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and interlocked in a meshing relationship, and the upper arm member 620 and the middle. A pair of lower arm members 630 that are connected by a joint and change in posture as the upper arm member 620 rotates, a drive motor MT2 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601, and a drive gear and teeth of the drive motor MT2. A transmission gear 650 is engaged with the left upper arm member 620 so as to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT2, and is rotatably supported on the body member 601; A torsion spring SP3 that applies a biasing force in the upward direction to the upper arm member 620, and an effect member 700 that is connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630 are provided.

The main body member 601 is formed in the shape of an elongated left and right plate, and includes a pair of guide holes 602, which are elongated left and right holes arranged in a straight line from left to right, and a pair of cylindrical guide holes 602 projecting in both front and rear directions from left and right symmetrical positions. A columnar shaft portion 603, a pair of arcuate holes 604 formed in an arc with the columnar shaft portion 603 as the center axis, a columnar shaft portion 605 projecting from the left side to the rear side in a columnar shape, An arc-shaped hole 606 is drilled in an arc with the cylindrical shaft portion 605 as the center axis, and a detection groove in a circular shape centered on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 is directed toward the cylindrical shaft portion 605 side and is placed on the back side. and a detection sensor 607 that is fastened and fixed.

The guide hole 602 is formed with a vertical width that is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630 . The guide hole 602 functions as an elongated hole that guides the displacement of the lower arm member 630 by inserting the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630 .

A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes toward the front side is inserted through the support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620 to rotatably support the upper arm member 620 . A screw with a large head diameter is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the columnar shaft portion 603 to support the upper arm member 620 so that it cannot fall off.

A portion of the columnar shaft portion 603 protruding toward the rear side is inserted through the wound main body portion of the torsion spring SP3, thereby stabilizing the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3.

One arm of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from above by a protruding portion 601a that protrudes in a V-shape from the back side of the main body member 601, and the other arm is pressed against the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620. engaged. As a result, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions in the direction of pushing down the urged portion 625, so the upper arm member 620 is urged in the direction in which the connecting portion 623 is displaced upward.

The arcuate hole 604 is a through hole for passing the urged portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the rear side of the body member 601 . Thereby, the urged portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 and the torsion spring SP3 can be configured to be engaged.

The cylindrical shaft portion 605 is inserted through the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650 to rotatably support the transmission gear 650 . A screw having a large head diameter is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605 to support the transmission gear 650 so that it cannot fall off.

The arcuate hole 606 is a through hole for passing the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 to the front side of the main body member 601 . Thereby, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engaged. A screw having a large head diameter is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 , so that the upper arm member 620 is supported by the transmission gear 650 so as not to fall off.

The detection sensor 607 has a detection groove into which the plate portion 655 to be detected of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and is arranged at a position where the transmission gear 650 puts the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the rendering standby state, or at another position. It is configured to be able to determine whether the

The front cover member 610 is a thin-walled member made of a resin material with low light transmittance and fastened to the main body member 601. The front cover member 610 includes a rear plate portion 611 formed in the left-right central portion, and the rear plate portion 611. A front plate portion 612 is formed on the left and right outside from the connection position with the left and right upper end portions and is formed to protrude toward the front side from the rear plate portion 611, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate portion 612 so as to be capable of emitting light. and a hemispherical illumination device 613 .

The rear plate portion 611 is arranged on the front side of the columnar shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and shields the field of view so that the columnar shaft portion 603 is not visible. On the rear side of the rear plate portion 611, avoiding the movement locus of the gear portion 622 of the upper arm member 620, the rear plate portion 611 protrudes toward the rear side by a dimension slightly longer than the front-to-rear width of the gear portion 622, and contacts the main body member 601 with a surface. It has an overhanging abutting portion 611a that makes contact.

As a result, the fastening state of the rear plate portion 611 to the main body member 601 can be stabilized, and the upper arm member 620 can be displaced in the space divided by the rear plate portion 611 and the main body member 601 . can. In other words, a change in posture of the upper arm member 620 (for example, a change in posture such that it bends with respect to the rotation shaft) can be suppressed on both sides in the axial direction, so the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. .

The front plate portion 612 is a plate-like portion that is arranged on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 and is configured so as not to allow the players to visually recognize the structural parts of these members. A sliding surface 612a formed as a pair of left and right planes parallel to the front plate portion, and a wiring passage formed as a recess opening to the back side in the plate portion projecting from the left upper end toward the back and a recess 612b.

The sliding surface 612a is assembled to the lower arm member 630 from the front side and fastened and fixed, and is configured as a flat surface on which the pressing member PC1, which is formed with low friction due to its shape and material, can slide. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed in the middle of the lower arm member 630 in the longitudinal direction is a planar plate surface formed along a trajectory that is displaced as the lower arm member 630 is displaced.

The shape of the side of the pressing member PC1 facing the sliding surface 612a is a substantially semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a. is configured to be Thereby, the resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be smoothly displaced easily.

The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, and a gap is provided between them. On the other hand, before the amount of frontward displacement of the lower arm member 630 exceeds the permissible amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 contact each other to limit the frontward displacement of the lower arm member 630. be.

In this embodiment, the permissible amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set according to the dimensional relationship between the rear side plate portion of the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 13A) and the effect member 700 . That is, the permissible amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set to such a degree that the effect member 700 arranged as expected from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not come into contact with the partitioning member 310 .

That is, according to the present embodiment, the sliding surface 612a abuts against the pressing member PC1 to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side. Contact can be prevented.

The sliding portion 612a arranged on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the trajectory of the pressing member PC1, but the sliding portion 612a arranged on the left side includes an arc shape as the trajectory of the pressing member PC1. Although formed as a large flat surface, the functions of the left and right sliding portions 612a are common. That is, at least the circular arc shape as the trajectory of the pressing member PC1 should be formed in a plane shape, and the shape of other portions can be set arbitrarily. For example, as in the right side portion of the present embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed in a limited circular arc shape as the trajectory of the pressing member PC1, and other portions protrude toward the rear side (the design portion on the front side is It may be configured such that it protrudes toward the back side due to the effect of being arranged closer to the back side), or like the left side portion of the present embodiment, the periphery of the sliding portion 612a may also be configured in a similar planar shape. good.

The forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is restricted by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a. Forward displacement is regulated by the fixed fastening screw. That is, in addition to limiting the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630, by limiting the displacement of the upper arm member 620, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a large local load.

The wiring recess 612b is a recess that functions as a path for the electrical wiring to be passed through the base-end-side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630. As shown in FIG. That is, the electric wiring reaching between the rear case 510 and the enlargement/reduction unit 600 passes through the wiring passage recess 612b, passes through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630, and then reaches the tip side of the lower arm member 630. It is guided and passed through the production member 700. - 特許庁

In this way, by setting the path for the electrical wiring to be inserted into the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the upper side, the long lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is displaced significantly in the left-right direction as it is displaced. (In this embodiment, the displacement is about half the width of the rear case 510), it is possible to easily prevent the electric wiring from loosening and hanging downward.

The hemispherical lighting device 613 has a hemispherical lens member, and is a device for irradiating the front side through the hemispherical lens member with light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the back side thereof. . In this embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to incline downward toward the center in the left-right direction.

As a result, compared to the case where the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 is oriented in the front-rear direction, the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 can be easily improved. can. For example, it is possible to make it easier for the player who is visually recognizing the center of the third pattern display device 81 to enter the light, or to make the player notice the light by irradiating the production member 700 in the overhanging state or the enlarged state with the light. can be

The upper arm member 620 is formed in the shape of an elongated plate, and has a support hole 621 formed as a circular hole having a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 can be inserted therethrough. , a gear portion 622 which is formed on a circular arc centering on the support hole 621 and is configured to be meshable with a pair of upper arm members 620, and a lower arm member 630 which is circularly drilled at the end portion in the longitudinal direction. and a long hole formed only in the left upper arm member 620 and having a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 654 of the transmission gear 650. A transmission hole 624 is formed, and a biased portion 625 protrudes from the back side of the upper arm member 620 and has a hook-shaped tip.

The transmission hole 624 has a transmission portion 624a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621 and a margin continuously extending from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. and a portion 624b.

The transmission portion 624a functions as a portion for receiving the driving force transmitted through the transmission gear 650, and the allowance portion 624b functions as a portion for blocking the transmission of the driving force, details of which will be described later.

The urged portion 625 is a portion to which one end of the arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is engaged. Arm member 620 receives.

In addition, the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted by the engagement between the hooked end of the biased portion 625 and the torsion spring SP3 (see FIG. 49).

The lower arm member 630 is composed of a long plate member in a substantially bilaterally symmetrical manner, except that the left arm has a path through which electrical wiring is passed. A columnar protrusion 631, a columnar protrusion 632 projecting from the left and right outer sides of the columnar protrusion 631 to the rear side in a columnar shape, and a left and right inner position of the columnar protrusion 631 in the front-rear direction. and a plurality of arc-shaped holes 634 penetrating along a pair of arcs centered on the support hole 633 .

The columnar protrusion 631 is inserted through the connecting portion 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a screw with a large head diameter is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 631 from the rear side. A lower arm member 630 is non-droppably supported on the upper arm member 620 .

The columnar protrusion 632 is inserted through the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 through the collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for resistance reduction, and is attached to the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 632 on the rear side. The lower arm member 630 is supported by the main body member 601 so as not to fall off by screwing a screw having a large head diameter through the lower arm member 630 .

The support hole 633 and the arc-shaped hole 634 are used for connection with the effect member 700 . Due to the relationship with the placement portion 635, which will be described later, the thickness of the portion where the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed is thicker in the lower portion than in the upper portion. Thereby, when the production member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the production member 700 can be supported so as to be held from the left and right at the thick part, so that the production member 700 can be effectively changed to the forward leaning posture. can be regulated.

In addition, the left lower arm member 630 has a placement portion 635 that is formed open to the rear side in order to form a space for passing electrical wiring over the longitudinal direction of the arm body, and the rear side of the placement portion 635 . and a thin lid portion 636 disposed on the side and functioning as a lid for the placement portion 635 .

The arranging portion 635 includes a base-side through-hole 635a drilled in the front-rear direction at the end portion on the side of the cylindrical projection 632 .

The proximal side through-hole 635a is a through-hole for passing the electrical wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 in the front-rear direction. That is, the electrical wiring arranged in the placement portion 635 passes through the base end side through hole 635 a from the front side, is guided to the placement portion 635 , and exits from the placement portion 635 to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630 .

The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630, and a lower meat portion 637 arranged below the boundary in the waiting state for presentation is formed recessed on the back side. be done. In other words, the upper side of the tangent line is formed as a thin plate.

This lower meat portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the lateral direction in the right lower arm member 630 . In addition, the lower meat portion 637 constitutes the upper wall portion of the placement portion 635 in the left lower arm member 630, is configured to be able to guide the electric wiring inside, and is arranged as a lid on the guide path. It is reinforced by fastening and fixing the thin-walled lid portion 636 that is attached to the frame.

Since the electric wiring is guided to the direction member 700 side through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the placement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636), members arranged in front and behind the lower arm member 630 (for example, It is possible to prevent the contact between the upper arm member 620) and the electrical wiring. As a result, it is possible to avoid damage to the electrical wiring due to tangling or rubbing of the electrical wiring with these members.

The lower arm member 630 includes, in addition to the above-described pressing member PC1 assembled from the front side, a pressing member PC1 composed of the same members and assembled from the rear side. Through this pressing member PC1, the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to abut on the body plate-like portion of the body member 601 in the front and rear. The main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, but have a slight gap, so that when the lower arm member 630 is displaced to the back side, they come into contact with each other to limit the displacement. function is the same as in the case of the front pressing member PC1.

That is, the lower arm member 630 has the pressing members PC1 attached to both front and rear sides thereof, and is configured to be able to contact the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing members PC1. It is possible to facilitate the restriction of displacement and to reduce the resistance generated against the up-and-down displacement during the restriction of displacement.

The tip of the pressing member PC1 assembled from the back side, which projects toward the back side, is arranged closer to the back side than the end portion of the upper arm member 620 on the back side. As a result, even when the tip of the pressing member PC1 is displaced to the rear side to such an extent that it abuts on the body member 601, the upper arm member 620 can be prevented from abutting on the body member 601. FIG. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the body member 601 or the front cover member 610 arranged in the front-rear direction.

This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is likely to be unintentionally displaced in the front-rear direction. For example, in the present embodiment, the tip of the lower arm member 630 is arranged near the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connection position between the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 Since the lower arm member 630 is displaced in the direction, it can be said that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, due to the displacement mode of the lower arm member 630 and the driving displacement of the effect member 700 itself, the lower arm member 630 is configured to easily cause displacement in the front-rear direction.

The transmission gear 650 includes a semicircular main body portion 651 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape, a gear portion 652 carved radially outward of the semicircular main body portion 651, and a semicircular main body portion. A support hole 653 is formed as a circular hole through which the cylindrical shaft portion 605 can be inserted through the central axis of the semicircular shape of 651, and a cylindrical shape projecting from the outer diameter end portion of the semicircular main body portion 651 toward the front side. a cylindrical projecting portion 654, a plate portion 655 to be detected formed in a thin plate shape that can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 at the circumferential end portion of the semicircular body portion 651, and the plate portion to be detected An increased thickness portion 656 is formed between 655 and the support hole 653, and a regulated hole 657 is formed through the increased thickness portion 656 on the support hole 653 side in the front-rear direction.

The gear portion 652 is arranged in mesh with the driving gear of the driving motor MT2, and the driving force of the driving motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

The cylindrical protrusion 654 passes through the arc-shaped hole 606 of the main body member 601 and is arranged inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 . Accordingly, as the transmission gear 650 rotates, the driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 via the cylindrical protrusion 654 . The columnar protrusion 654 is inserted through a collar member whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a female threaded portion formed at the projecting tip of the columnar protrusion 654 has a fastening screw with a large head diameter. By being screwed in, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so as not to fall off, and the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

The thickened portion 656 and the restricted hole 657 are configured to be engageable with the displacement restricting device 180 (see FIG. 6). By disposing the regulated hole 657 on the side of the support hole 653 (position close to the support hole 653), when the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state (see FIG. 21A), the displacement from the transmission gear 650 to the displacement regulating device 180 It is configured such that the transmitted load (moment) is reduced.

Further, as a design concept for the thickness of the transmission gear 650 , a thickened portion 656 is set as a portion where it is necessary to withstand the load caused by engagement with the displacement restricting device 180 . That is, by forming thin parts where engagement with the displacement restricting device 180 cannot occur, the material cost required for the transmission gear 650 can be reduced.

53 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 700, and FIG. 54 is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect member 700. FIG. 51 and 52 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 53 and 54 as needed.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the effect member 700 includes a plate-like main body 710 connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630, and a functional plate portion 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-like main body 710. , a rotating plate 730 arranged between the function plate portion 720 and the plate-like main body 710 and supported so as to be rotatably displaceable with respect to the function plate portion 720 , and between the rotating plate 730 and the function plate portion 720 A telescopic displacement member 740 is provided and configured to be displaceable in the same manner as a magic hand in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating plate 730, and a driving gear MG3 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the function plate portion 720. A drive motor MT3 arranged on the back side, a light emitting effect device 750 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the function plate portion 720 and executes the light emitting effect, and a plurality of extensible displacement members 740 that are respectively fastened and fixed to the end portions of the extensible displacement members 740 to wait for the effect. and a plurality of shielding design members 760 combined so as to shield the passage of light on the front side of the light emitting effect device 750.

The plate-shaped main body 710 has a pair of cylindrical protrusions 711 projecting from a symmetrical position toward the rear side in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630, and the cylindrical protrusions. A plurality of auxiliary protrusions 712 projecting in a columnar shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the arcuate upper hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 and a pair of columnar protrusions projecting from an arcuate upper position centered on 711 toward the rear side. A through hole 713 drilled in the front-rear direction at a position between 711, a wiring guide member 714 arranged below the through hole 713 and opened only at the front side, and a pressing member arranged on the back surface of the plate. and a member PC1.

The through hole 713 is a through hole for passing the electrical wiring DK1, which passes through the lower arm member 630 and is guided to the tip side of the lower arm member 630 between the placement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636, to the front side. . A wire guide member 714 guides the electric wire DK1 in a section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713 . As a result, even in a limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through-hole 713, the electric wiring DK1 can be prevented from coming into contact with other members or being visually recognized by the player.

The wiring guide member 714 has a function of guiding the electric wiring DK1, and is formed with an inclined surface that slopes down toward the rear surface side. It also has the function of softening the contact of the

That is, when the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714 is arranged to face the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 when the effect member 700 is displaced upward, the effect member 700 is displaced toward the back side. Even so, the wire guide member 714 abuts on the rear plate portion 611 , so that the effect member 700 can be returned to the front side in the middle of the upward displacement along the slope of the upper surface of the wire guide member 714 .

Like the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is also disposed slidably on the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. As shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the pressing member PC1 arranged at the upper end portion and the wiring guide member 714 arranged at the lower portion can come into contact with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 during the upward displacement process of the effect member 700. , the position where the load for maintaining the attitude of the effect member 700 is generated can be divided.

55 is a front view of the function plate portion 720. FIG. In the description of FIG. 55, FIGS. 53 and 54 are referred to as appropriate.

The functional plate portion 720 is made of a resin material and has a substantially plate-like shape. An arc-shaped hole 722 drilled along the coaxial arc shape, a sensor placement portion 723 formed at one end of the arc-shaped hole 722 so that the detection sensor SC7 can be arranged, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted. a motor fixing portion 724 having an opening and capable of fastening and fixing the drive motor MT3; A plurality of (in this embodiment, five) guide holes 725 each including a pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b that intersect perpendicularly with each other, and radially outwardly extending on extension lines of the radially elongated holes 725a. A plurality of (in this embodiment, five) extension plate portions 726, and the rear side end portion of the planar portion disposed at the extension base end of the extension plate portion 726 and the width direction both ends of the extension plate portion 726 A pair of auxiliary protrusions 727 (in this embodiment, a pair for each of the extended plate portions 726) protruding from the support, and a pair of columnar protrusions protruding from the vicinity of the radially outward end toward the back side in a columnar shape. 728;

The tubular portion 721 is arranged so that the back side end abuts on the plate-like main body 710 , and is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710 in a state in which the internal through-hole communicates with the through-hole 713 of the plate-like main body 710 . be done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted through the plate-like main body 710 from the rear side of the plate-like main body 710 , and the threaded portion is screwed into the female screw formed at the rear-side end portion of the cylindrical portion 721 .

As a result, the functional plate portion 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710, and a through hole is formed in the central portion thereof. In this embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through this through hole. .

The electric wiring DK1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC7 fastened and fixed to the sensor placement portion 723 and the drive motor MT3 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing portion 724. FIG. As a result, the detection sensor SC7 and the drive motor MT3 can be energized.

The circular arc-shaped hole 722 is a through hole for allowing the detection target portion 731a of the rotating plate 730 to extend toward the front side. It is possible to determine the posture.

The guide holes 725 are a group of through holes formed with a width that allows the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 to be arranged. A long hole-shaped radial long hole 725a is formed, and on both sides of the outer diameter side end of the long hole-shaped long hole 725a, a long hole-shaped hole is formed along a straight line orthogonal to the straight line that is the reference of the radial long hole 725a. and a pair of cross slots 725b formed in the .

The radially elongated holes 725a and the intersecting elongated holes 725b function to limit the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the extension plate portion 726 and the auxiliary protrusions 727 correct the posture of the telescopic displacement member 740 in the collective arrangement state. function as described below in detail.

The columnar projecting portion 728 is configured such that the rear end thereof can come into contact with the plate-like main body 710 . In the abutting state, a fastening screw that is inserted through the plate-like body 710 from the rear side is screwed into a female thread formed on the distal end side of the columnar projecting portion 728, so that the function plate portion 720 is connected to the plate-like body. 710 is fastened and fixed.

In the assembled state, the columnar projecting portion 728 is inserted through the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730 to limit the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 . That is, the columnar projecting portion 728 is used both as a portion for fastening and fixing the function plate portion 720 to the plate-like main body 710 and as a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 .

56 is a front view of rotating plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of rotating plate 730. FIG. 53 and 54 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 56 and 57 as appropriate.

The rotary plate 730 is made of a resin material and has a substantially disk shape. A plurality of arc-shaped holes 732 drilled along the coaxial arc shape and long through-holes formed at positions on the outer diameter side of the cylindrical portion 731 and on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 732 . and a plurality of guide holes 733 (five in this embodiment), and extended hook portions 734 extending radially outward in a hook shape at positions corresponding to the guide holes 733 .

The cylindrical portion 731 is designed to have an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 721 of the function plate portion 720, and extends from the front end to the front side so that the detection sensor SC7 passes through the arc-shaped hole 722 of the function plate portion 720. and a gear portion 731b formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape that can mesh with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

The arc-shaped hole 732 is an opening in which the columnar projecting portion 728 of the function plate portion 720 is arranged, and is formed with a length that can ensure the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 at approximately 120 degrees or less.

The guide holes 733 are formed in the same shape. A large-diameter arc portion 733b having a long length from the axis and a connecting portion 733c connecting the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the small-diameter arc portion 733a are provided.

Although the aspect of the connecting portion 733c is not limited in any way, in the present embodiment, it is formed so that the change in the length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle changes according to the position. be. In particular, in the present embodiment, the change in length from the central axis of the tubular portion 731 per unit angle near the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b is designed to be relatively small.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the resistance generated when the load is transmitted to the telescopic displacement member 740, and to improve the performance effect by making the displacement speed of the telescopic displacement member 740 non-uniform.

The extended claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape that protrudes clockwise in a front view, is configured to be able to engage with the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the front side, and is formed closer to the rear side in the thickness direction. It has a rear side claw portion 734a and a front side claw portion 734b formed on the front side of the rear side claw portion 734a. In the present embodiment, the extended claw portion 734 is divided into the rear claw portion 734a and the front claw portion 734b at a substantially intermediate position in the thickness dimension.

The extended claw portion 734 functions as a portion that engages with the first guided protrusion 743 b and the second guided protrusion 744 b of the telescopic displacement member 740 . The front-side claw portion 734b and the rear-side claw portion 734a respectively correspond to the second guided projection portion 744b and the first guided projection portion 743b, which have different tip positions from the extensible and displaceable member 740, respectively. It is guided radially inward, the details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the extension claw portion 734 is arranged such that the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side has a longer extension length than the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side. formed in In this embodiment, the extension length is increased in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. Thereby, the influence of gravity can be mitigated.

That is, even if the telescopic displacement members 740 are configured to have the same shape, the displacement caused by the action of gravity is different for each telescopic displacement member 740 because the relationship between the displaceable direction and the direction of gravity is different. For example, the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side hangs down due to its own weight and is displaced in the direction away from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730 . There is a possibility that the first guided projection 743b of 740 will be arranged, and the radially inward guidance by the extended claw 734 will fail.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the extension length of the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the sagging of the telescopic displacement member 740. The radially inward guidance by the portion 734 can be stably performed.

On the other hand, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the upper side is displaced due to its own weight, the displacement is in the direction of approaching the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730, so the extension claw 734 is guided radially inward. is unlikely to fail. Therefore, the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side should not be extended longer than necessary, and should be formed short, thereby reducing the material cost and miniaturizing the rotating plate 730. can be done.

The elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. 53 and 54 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 58 and 59 as appropriate.

58(a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, FIG. 58(b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. ) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG.

In FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b), of the five sets of telescopic displacement members 740 and shielding design members 760, one set arranged at the top is illustrated in a state in which it is collectively arranged. In 59(a) and 59(b), the same set is illustrated as if it were to be discrete.

The telescopic displacement member 740 is a member that constitutes a link mechanism composed of a plurality of long members arranged in two layers, front and rear. The plane in which the first elongate member can be displaced is also called a front layer plane, and the plane in which a plurality of elongate members arranged on the rear side can be displaced is also called a rear layer plane.

The telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged in two layers, front and rear, and is supported relatively rotatably at the upper end of a pair of proximal side members 741 , which are supported at the lower end so as to be relatively rotatable. A pair of first long members 742, a pair of second long members 743 pivotally supported at the upper ends of the first long members 742, and the upper ends of the second long members 742 are and a distal adjustment member 744 having a guide slot 744a extending linearly to allow guidance.

The proximal side member 741, the first elongated member 742, and the second elongated member 743, which are configured as a pair of front and rear members, are designed to have the same length in the longitudinal direction and the same support position.

The base end member 741 includes a transmission target projection 741a projecting from the lower end of the member on the rear plane side toward the rear surface side in a cylindrical shape, and a circular transmission receiving projection 741a projecting from the rear surface toward the front surface where the cylindrical projection 741a projects. A guided protrusion 741b that protrudes in a columnar shape and is inserted into the member on the front layer plane side, and a lower end portion of a first elongated member 742 that protrudes in a columnar shape from the upper end portion of the member on the rear layer plane side toward the front side. and a guided protrusion 741c that is inserted into a through hole that is drilled in.

The transmitted projection 741a is arranged in a guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotating plate 730 and configured to be displaced in the radial direction as the rotating plate 730 rotates.

The guided projection 741b and the guided projection 741c are arranged in the guide hole 725 of the function plate portion 725 and guided in the longitudinal direction thereof. The guided protrusion 741b is arranged in the radially elongated hole 725a, and the guided protrusion 741c is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

The first elongated member 742 is rotatably supported about a front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction. A guided protrusion 742a is provided to be inserted through the upper end of the base end member 741 on the side.

The guided protrusion 742a is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b of the function plate portion 725 and guided in its longitudinal direction (see FIG. 55).

The second elongated member 743 is rotatably supported about a front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction. From the upper end of the member on the floor plane side, a diameter of about the width of the member is projected flush with the front end surface of the member on the front layer plane side, and a pair of cylindrical projections are projected from the projecting tip to the front side. It has a support protrusion 743a and a first guided protrusion 743b that protrudes in a columnar shape toward the back side from a substantially intermediate position of the member on the rear plane side.

The first guided protrusion 743b is guided by the rear side claw portion 734a of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730, and receives a radially inward load due to this guidance (see FIG. 56).

The front end adjustment member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed on the front side, and has a length that extends along the straight direction with a width that allows the support protrusion 743a of the second long member 743 to be inserted. It is provided with a pair of guide long holes 744a drilled in a hole shape, and a second guided projection 744b projecting from the central position in the longitudinal direction to the back side in a cylindrical shape.

The projecting tip of the second guided projection 744b is disposed forward of the projecting tip of the first guided projection 743b, and is guided by the front claw 734b of the extended claw 734 of the rotary plate 730, This guide receives a radially inward load (see FIG. 57).

The second guided projection 744b does not have a circular shape at the tip of the projecting part, and has an inclination that approaches as the rotating plate 730, which has the center of rotation on the side of the transmitted projection 741a, is rotationally displaced in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear. The surface on the side opposite to the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) (the left surface in FIG. 59(b)) has a chamfered inclined surface.

Due to this inclined surface, even if the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is slightly deviated in the front-rear direction, it is possible to avoid excessive resistance when the rotating plate 730 abuts against the extended claw portion 734. can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 58(b) and 59(b), when the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged and when they are separated, the telescopic displacement members 740 are arranged at the tips of the second elongated members 743. The support protrusions 743a are arranged at both outer and inner ends of the guide elongated hole 744a of the tip adjustment member 744. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the arrangement (arrangement in the longitudinal direction) of the distal end adjusting member 744 with respect to the pair of support protrusions 743a can be stabilized.

The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the distal end adjustment member 744, extends toward the front side from the fastening portion as an end, and extends toward the front side from the extended distal end toward the side covering the telescopic displacement member 740. It is a substantially triangular member in front view and has a shape portion extending in parallel with a plane (front layer plane or rear layer plane) in which the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is displaced from the extension end thereof. be.

The shielding design member 760 is configured to shield the decorative member 752 on the back side invisibly by attaching a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet to the front and back sides of the shielding design member 760. It has an extended plate portion 761 extending in a plate shape to the right side in such a manner that a plate surface is formed on the top.

The extended plate portion 761 has colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheets attached to its front and back surfaces in the same manner as the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, and is arranged to the right (clockwise direction) in front view. It is arranged to face the rear side of the left end portion of the design member 760, and when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the rear side, it abuts and is configured to be able to suppress the displacement.

The arrangement of the extended plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the plate may be arranged so as to be shifted toward the rear surface side from the rear surface of the main body of the shielding design member 760 . In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 are aligned in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 . abutment (collision) can be avoided along the

This effect becomes more pronounced as the extension plate portion 761 is placed farther from the body portion of the shielding design member 760. However, at least the positional deviation of the shielding design member 760 in the front-rear direction is allowed for the shielding design member 760. By arranging the extension plate portion 761 apart, the extension plate portion 761 and the body portion of the shielding design member 760 abut along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. (collision) can be avoided.

Further, the shape of the front surface of the extension plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface, or may be formed as a flat surface whose normal is oriented in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, it is configured as an inclined surface that approaches the back side as the distance from the shielding design member 760 increases.

As a result, for example, the shielding design member 760 is assembled in a state in which the shielding design member 760 adjacent to the top shielding design member 760 on the right side in the front view is slightly displaced toward the rear side with respect to the top shielding design member 760. Even if it is displaced to the arrangement (see FIG. 63) position, along the front inclination of the extended plate portion 761 of the uppermost shielding design member 760, the front-rear position of the shielding design member 760 adjacent to the right in the front view. Deviations can be corrected. This makes it easier to align the relative longitudinal positions of the adjacent shielding design members 760 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the second elongated member 743 of the elastic displacement member 740 supporting the shielding design member 760 has a member supporting the right side of the shielding design member 760 arranged on the rear layer plane. , the member supporting the left side of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the front layer plane, and the middle portions of the pair of second elongated members 743 intersect so that they are overlapped back and forth, so that the left side becomes the right side. It is configured so that the shielding design member 760 can be easily tilted toward the forward side in comparison.

Since the configuration of the extensible displacement members 740 that support the shielding design members 760 is common to all five sets, each shielding design member 760 is common, and the left side is the right side (the side where the extended plate portion 761 is formed). It is configured so that it can be easily tilted to a posture that is arranged on the front side in comparison.

Due to the inclination of the attitude of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate portion 761 can be positioned away from the rear side of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face the extension plate portion 761 side. In this state, the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the collective arrangement position, so that the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 move in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. ) can be avoided.

In the state where the five sets of shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 53), the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a circle, and all the shielding design members 760 are adjacent to the left side (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The extended plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 suppresses positional deviation to the rear side.

According to this configuration, the shielding design member 760 is prevented from being displaced to the front side by the extension plate portion 761 coming into contact with the shielding design member 760 on the right side (adjacent in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). Therefore, by arranging the five sets of shielding design members 760 to face each other in the front-rear direction, it is possible to suppress displacement in the front-rear direction for each of the five sets of shielding design members 760 .

Interlocking between the rotating plate 730 and the telescopic displacement member 740 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. 60 and 61 are front views of the function plate portion 720. FIG. 60 and 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotating plate 730 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and an example of the outer shape arrangement of the transmitted projection 741a, the guided projections 741b, 741c, and 742a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is illustrated. be.

FIG. 60 shows a state in which the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 58), and in FIG. 61, the rotary plate 730 rotates about 120 degrees counterclockwise in front view, and the telescopic displacement members 740 are dispersed. A state (see FIG. 59) is illustrated.

In this embodiment, the guided projections 741b, 741c, and 742a are guided along the guide hole 725, and the transmitted projection 741a is arranged in the guide hole 733 as the rotary plate 730 rotates. The state of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes by displacing it in a direction approaching the rotating shaft side of 730 .

In this state change, since the guided projections 741c and 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the function plate portion 720, the shielding design member 760 is stretched to the outer diameter side with reference to the positions of the guided projections 741c and 742a. It is configured to be displaceable so that it can be pulled out, the details of which will be described later.

Returning to FIGS. 53 and 54, description will be made. The light emitting device 750 includes an electrical board 751 having an opening in the center, and a decorative member 752 arranged on the front side of the electrical board 751 and made of a light-transmitting resin material. An opening is formed in the central portion of the electrical decoration substrate 751, and the decorative member 752 is formed in a dome shape projecting toward the front side, so that an area for arranging the drive motor MT3 can be secured.

The illumination board 751 has an opening 751a formed in the center. Inside the opening 751a, the drive motor MT3 and electrical wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are arranged. The larger the opening 751a, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and the electrical wiring, but the area for arranging the LED as the light emitting means is limited. desirable.

Since an LED cannot be arranged in the opening 751a, the front side thereof is dark and easily visible. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the decorative member 752 is divided into two.

That is, the decorative member 752 is composed of a light-transmitting member 752a formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and a light-transmitting member 752a assembled from the front side to the light-transmitting member 752a and having a mirror surface (for example, silver-plated coating). ) and a mirror member 752b.

An opening is formed in the central portion of the light transmitting member 752a, and the central portion of the mirror surface member 752b is closed, so that the mirror surface member 752b can be arranged at a position where the drive motor MT3 is arranged in a front view. . As a result, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, the reflected light by light irradiation from another direction (for example, light irradiation from the hemispherical lighting device 613) can be visually recognized by the player. , the front side portion of the opening 751a can be prevented from being viewed darkly.

The vertical displacement of the rendering member 700 of the scaling unit 600 will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. 62 to 64, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

FIG. 62 shows the effect waiting state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, FIG. 63 shows the effect member 700 descending from the effect standby state, and FIG. illustrated.

63 is illustrated as a state in which the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is half the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the presentation standby state to the extended state. In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is also halved.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the rendering standby state of the scaling unit 600, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged at the boundary between the transmission portion 624a and the allowance portion 624b of the upper arm member 620. As shown in FIG. That is, the state in which the cylindrical projection 654 immediately enters the transmission portion 624a and the effect member 700 is placed at a position where the downward displacement can be started is the effect standby state of the scaling unit 600.

This effect standby state suggests that the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is displaced downward by the effect member including the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 7) disposed in the pachinko machine 10, for example. Before the suggestive effect is executed, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged on the margin 624b side.

As described above, the clearance portion 624b is a shaped portion continuously extending from one end of the transmission portion 624a along the arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. In the state shown in FIG. 606 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 through the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 650 and does not function as a load to rotate the transmission gear 650 . Therefore, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted regardless of whether or not the driving motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is energized, whereby the upper arm member 620 is connected to the lower arm member 630 which is connected to the upper arm member 620. Displacement of the production member 700 can be regulated.

Note that even if the effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is the effect mode in which the effect member 700 is not finally displaced downward, in the present embodiment, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is placed in the effect standby state. is controlled to change state to

In this case, immediately after the player is notified that the effect member 700 will not be displaced downward, the transmission gear 650 rotates counterclockwise in front view in order to return the cylindrical protrusion 654 to the margin 624b side. The drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

As a result, when an effect suggesting downward displacement of the effect member 700 is executed, it is possible to avoid predicting the subsequent effect regarding the effect member 700 due to the difference in the driving sound of the drive motor MT2. .

The margin portion 624b also has a function of lowering the accuracy required for the drive stop position when the drive motor MT2 is rotationally driven in the direction in which the effect member 700 is lifted. 62, the effect member 700 has already been placed at the displacement end position on the upper end side, and the subsequent displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 654 is limited to the allowance portion. 624b is a displacement that only slides.

Further, the function of restricting the displacement of the upper arm member 620 does not differ regardless of the position of the columnar projection 654 in the margin 624b. Therefore, it is allowed that the setting accuracy of the stop position of the columnar protrusion 654 is lowered, so that the transmission gear 650 can be stopped immediately when the plate portion 655 to be detected enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). The rotation speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) can be set to be large when the effect member 700 is displaced upward without being limited to the speed. Thereby, the rising speed of the production member 700 can be set to be large.

In addition, even if the rising speed is excessive, when the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the columnar protrusion 654 , the load applied to the columnar protrusion 654 is directed in the radial direction of the transmission gear 650 . Therefore, it does not function to displace the cylindrical projection 654 in the rotational direction. Therefore, even if the rising speed is excessive, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted at the position where it abuts on the columnar protrusion 654 .

Furthermore, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the upward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is restricted by the upper arm member 620, which will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the lateral distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the lateral distance between the ends arranged in the guide holes 602 of the main body member 601) changes from the effect standby state. It is set larger from the halfway down state to the overhanging state compared to the halfway down state.

In this way, by increasing the displacement speed between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 accompanying the downward displacement of the effect member 700, the lower arm member 630 supporting the effect member 700 is violently displaced in the width direction. It is possible to make the player visually recognize as if the displacement speed of the production member 700 is rapidly increasing, and the production effect of the up-and-down displacement of the production member 700 can be visually recognized. can be improved.

65 to 67 are rear views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 65, FIG. 65(b) is also shown as a diagram in which illustration of the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

65(a) and 65(b) show the production standby state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, FIG. 66 shows the lowering state in which the production member 700 descends from the production standby state, and FIG. The expanded state of the scaling unit 600 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 65( a ), when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the rendering standby state, the detection target plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 . That is, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT2 is stopped in a state in which the detection plate portion 655 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 before execution of the effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward. At this point, the driving motor MT2 is driven and controlled in accordance with the execution of the above-described suggestive effect, and the driving motor MT2 is temporarily stopped at a position where it is determined that the plate portion 655 to be detected has retreated from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. It is controlled to change the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 to the presentation standby state.

Conversely, when the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven to the side of upwardly displacing the effect member 700, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive motor MT2 is energized. is released, the transmission gear 650 can be stopped at a position slightly entering the margin 624b from the position of the cylindrical projection 654 in the standby state for the effect, and as described above, the upper arm member 620 , the displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be regulated.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the plate portion 655 to be detected has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the driving of the driving motor MT2 is not stopped immediately, but regardless of whether the driving speed is maintained or decelerated, The drive motor MT2 is controlled to stop driving after a time delay sufficient for the cylindrical protrusion 654 to be positioned at the end of the margin 624b.

As a result, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a position where the cylindrical projection 654 is located at the end of the margin 624b. At this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 can be inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21(a)). Even if the stop position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly deviated, the tapered surface is formed at the tip of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15(c)), so that the cylindrical portion 183 can be easily inserted into the restricted hole 657. can do.

The position of the regulated hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position slightly rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. It is set at a position that partially overlaps with the regulation hole 657 .

Therefore, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 66 or FIG. 67, the operation member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 is pushed to set the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricting state (see FIG. 15(c)), and then the transmission gear 650 is disengaged. Even if the transmission gear 650 is rotationally controlled in the direction of driving and displacing the effect member 700 upward, the cylindrical portion 183 interferes with the displacement of the transmission gear 650, and the state shown in FIG. 65(a) is not reached.

The plate portion 655 to be detected does not enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 even though the drive motor MT2 continues to be driven, so that the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) determines that the transmission gear 650 is defective in displacement. can be done.

Based on this determination, the abnormality can be notified by a method such as displaying an error indicating the displacement failure of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 4). store clerk to understand that the displacement restricting device 180 may remain in the restricting state.

As a result, the error display or the like regarding the displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be used to convey information regarding the state of the displacement restricting device 180 to the store clerk of the gaming machine shop. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to separately provide a device for detecting the state of the displacement restricting device 180 .

Here, since the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin corresponding to the length of the margin 624b of the transmission hole 624, the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a large value. If the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 is excessive when the transmission gear 700 is displaced upward, the upward speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 will be excessive, and the lower arm member 630 will move to the upper arm member 620. There is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the direction in which the effect member 700 is displaced toward the effect standby state is set in the direction opposite to the direction of gravity (upward direction), downward acceleration is always applied to the lower arm member 630. It is possible to reduce the vertical load at the contact position when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 65(b), since the upper side surface shape of the lower meat portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side surface shape of the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 can increase the contact area in the case of collision with the upper arm member 620 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 from being locally subjected to a large load, and prevent the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 from being damaged or broken.

In this way, since the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to contact the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently wide contact area, the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 is excessive when the effect member 700 is displaced upward. Even if the rising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, the upper arm member 620 whose displacement is restricted by the columnar projection 654 as described above allows the lower arm The upward displacement of the member 630 can be restricted. Thereby, the production member 700 can be prevented from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the production standby state.

In the state shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are displaced downward from the effect standby state against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 by the driving force of the drive motor MT2. corresponds to the state

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary protrusion 712 of the effect member 700 is arranged at the intermediate position of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. An auxiliary protrusion 712 of 700 is located at the end of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 .

Thereby, the extent to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 (the extent to which the posture is stabilized) can be changed. That is, the lower arm member 630 can hold the effect member 700 to a higher extent in the effect standby state or the overhanging state than in the mid-descent state.

In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the direction of rotation about the cylindrical protrusion 711 . For example, when the auxiliary projection 712 is arranged in the middle position of the arc-shaped hole 732 and the displacement in the rotational direction is not restricted (see FIG. 66), the effect member 700 rotates in the rotational direction around the right cylindrical projection 711. Attitude may change.

In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is supported by the pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the left cylindrical projection 711, but it rotates around the right cylindrical projection 711. The displacement direction of the left columnar protrusion 711 when the performance member 700 changes its posture is the lateral direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, there is a possibility that the change in posture of the effect member 700 will be visibly caused without being restricted by the lower arm member 630, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the overhanging state, the direction of displacement of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 when the direction of the production member 700 changes in the direction of rotation around the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is downward. Lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of arm member 630 . As a result, the lower arm member 630 can effectively limit the change in the posture of the effect member 700, and the change in the posture of the effect member 700 to the extent that the effect member 700 can be identified can be prevented.

In addition, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the right side is arranged at the end position of the arc-shaped hole 732, so that the contact between the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the arc-shaped hole 732 causes the right side It is possible to prevent the attitude of the effect member 700 from changing in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back around the cylindrical protrusion 711 of . As described above, the change in posture in the counterclockwise direction in rear view is restricted by the displacement direction of the left cylindrical projection 711 along the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm member 630 .

Similarly, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary projections 712 arranged on the left side are arranged at the terminal positions of the arc-shaped holes 732, so that the contact between the auxiliary projections 712 and the arc-shaped holes 732 causes the left side It is possible to prevent the attitude of the effect member 700 from changing in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear around the cylindrical protrusion 711 . As described above, the change in posture in the clockwise direction in the rear view is restricted by the fact that the displacement direction of the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is along the longitudinal direction of the right lower arm member 630 .

Furthermore, the auxiliary protrusion 712 not only changes the attitude of the production member 700 in the direction of rotation (the direction of rotation about the axis extending in the front-rear direction), but also in the direction of tilting (the direction of rotation about the axis extending in the left-right direction). It functions to suppress posture changes and posture changes in the lateral swing direction (rotation direction around an axis extending in the vertical direction).

For example, the lower arm member 630 and the directing member 700 are not connected only by the pair of left and right cylindrical projections 711, but the auxiliary projections 712 arranged above the cylindrical projections 711, or the cylindrical projections 711. Since the lower arm member 630 and the production member 700 can be connected at three upper and lower positions by being connected also by the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the lower left and right outer sides, the posture change of the production member 700 in the tilting direction can be controlled. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the auxiliary projection 712 arranged above the cylindrical projection 711 is arranged in the middle of the elongated body portion of the lower arm member 630 (the root side of the arc-shaped hole 634), the effect member 700 tilts. The long main body of the lower arm member 630 can withstand the load caused by the change in orientation.

Further, the pressing member PC1 is disposed on the elongated body portion of the lower arm member 630 as described above (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and the body member 601 or the front cover member 610 is moved downward by the pressing member PC1. The longitudinal displacement of the arm member 630 is restricted.

In this way, when the load due to the change in posture of the effect member 700 is applied to the long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives the load in the bending direction along the lengthwise direction, the lower arm member 630 By using the configuration that regulates the displacement, it is possible to strongly prevent the attitude change of the effect member 700 .

In addition, as described above, the auxiliary projections 712 arranged on the left and right outer sides (below) of the cylindrical projections 711 can increase the number of connection positions between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, and the effect member 700 can move downward. It is possible to suppress the posture change in the lateral swing direction with respect to the arm member 630 .

In this embodiment, the connecting position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the vertical center of the plate-shaped main body 710 of the effect member 700 . In addition, in this embodiment, the center of gravity of the production member 700 is arranged on the same horizontal plane.

As a result, it is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the posture of the effect member 700 is changed in such a manner that the effect member 700 falls forward about the connecting portion with the lower arm member 630 . It is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the posture of the effect member 700 is changed in such a manner that the effect member 700 falls backward about the connecting portion.

That is, even if there is a possibility that a plurality of types of posture changes occur in the effect member 700, the front-rear direction displacement of the effect member 700 is suppressed even if any one of the plurality of posture changes occurs. Therefore, any posture change can be dealt with.

As a result, even when the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13(a)) are arranged with a narrow front-to-rear space, the effect member 700 is prevented from rubbing against or colliding with the partition member 310. Since this can be avoided, it is possible to make it difficult for the performance member 700 to be damaged, the design portion to be deteriorated, and visibility deterioration (transparency deterioration) due to damage or abrasion to the partitioning member 310 to occur.

In a state where the effect member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 abuts on the shape portion of the main body member 601 in the rotational direction and is restricted from further rotation. Therefore, even if the drive motor MT2 continues to drive, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 from being excessively displaced simply by accumulating the driving force in the transmission gear 650.

In this embodiment, in the overhanging state shown in FIG. 67, a driving force slightly exceeding the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied to prevent the production member 700 from rebounding upward and displacing it. controlling.

As a result, the effect member 700 can be stably stopped at the lower end position while setting the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 to a large value (for example, a magnitude that allows the effect member 700 to be lifted).

On the other hand, when the effect member 700 starts to be displaced upward, the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so it is possible to avoid excessive load on the drive motor MT2.

For example, when starting to displace upward, after releasing the driving force for stably arranging the effect member 700 at the lower end position, the upward displacement of the effect member 700 is prevented by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3. By generating the driving force of the driving motor MT2 after waiting (by providing a waiting time until the driving of the driving motor MT2 is started), the driving force can be applied to the effect member 700 after the start of displacement.

This makes it possible to reduce the load on the drive motor MT2 compared to the case where the effect member 700 in the stopped state is displaced upward.

65 to 67, imaginary lines show changes in the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 passing through the lower arm member 630, and hidden lines show the shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electric wiring DK1. be done.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), the electrical wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin lid portion 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner diameter side of the arcuate hole 634, and is guided to the inside of the wiring guide member 714. It passes through the through hole 713 to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the tension of the electrical wiring DK1 that may occur due to the relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the effect member 700 is offset by the excess length of the electrical wiring DK1 previously arranged inside the wiring guide member 714. I am trying to As a result, the displacement of the electric wire DK1 can be completed near the wire guide member 714, so that the displacement of the electric wire DK1 on the front side of the through hole 713 and inside the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

The shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed in an arc shape centered on the electric wiring DK1 side. Thereby, the load that the electric wiring DK1 receives from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

In addition, the shape portion of the lower arm member 630 in which the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1. For example, when the effect member 700 is displaced upward from the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 67), the shape portion in which the arc-shaped hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed is the electrical wiring DK1. DK1 can be pushed into the wiring guide member 714 side.

As a result, the electric wiring DK1 can be stably put in and taken out of the wiring guide member 714, and the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be stably caused.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the auxiliary projections 712 arranged in the arc-shaped holes 634 arranged on the front side of the thin lid portion 636 and mostly hidden by the thin lid portion 636 are in an overhanging state. is arranged at a position visible from the rear (see FIG. 67).

The auxiliary protrusion 712 is a portion guided by the arc-shaped hole 634 and a fastening portion used for connecting the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 . Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 , it is necessary to screw the fastening screw into (or remove) the auxiliary projection 712 .

Therefore, in this embodiment, the state in which the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or disassembled) can be limited to the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 . As a result, assembly efficiency and maintenance efficiency can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the production member 700 and other constituent members are damaged as a result of performing assembly or maintenance while the production member 700 is arranged in an incomplete position.

Next, the displacement (enlargement/reduction displacement) associated with the state change of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 of the effect member 700 will be described. In this embodiment, the degree of expansion/contraction displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled so as to be variable depending on the arrangement of the effect member 700 .

68 is a front view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the scaling unit 600. FIG. In FIGS. 68 and 69, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

FIGS. 68 and 69 illustrate a state in which the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the process of being lowered. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, in the midway down state of the scaling unit 600, the effect member 700 is not controlled to be enlarged and displaced until the expansion/contraction member 740 reaches its maximum diameter. It is controlled to allow expansion displacement.

In other words, the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, since it is possible to avoid the effect member 700 from becoming excessively large when viewed from the front, the allowable attitude change amount of the effect member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 22). can be increased.

At an intermediate position of the expansion displacement of the production member 700, the decorative member 752 is partially covered with the shielding design member 760 (the outer diameter side portion is covered). As for the arrangement of the decorative members 752 in a front view, the light transmitting member 752a is arranged at a position (gap position) not covered by the effect member 700, and the mirror surface member 752b is arranged at a position covered by the effect member 700, including the light transmitting member. 752a is arranged at a position other than the position where it is visually recognized.

As a result, it is possible to improve the visibility of the light emitted through the light transmitting member 752a from the LEDs or the like arranged on the electrical board 751 (see FIG. 53), and the light transmitting member 752a is transmitted through the light transmitting member 752a to provide a shielding design. By reflecting the light reflected on the back side of the member 760 by the mirror surface member 752b, the effect of the mirror surface member 752b can be improved.

For example, as an effect mode of the mirror surface member 752b, when light is not emitted from the LEDs of the electrical board 751 (see FIG. 53), the background color of the shielding design member 760 (red in this embodiment) is applied to the mirror surface member 752b. can be reflected and made visible to the player.

On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LEDs of the electrical board 751, the color reflected from the mirror surface member 752b is mixed with the background color of the shielding design member 760 and the color of the light emitted from the LEDs. can be any color. Therefore, the appearance of the mirror surface member 752b can be changed by the light passing through the portion other than the mirror surface member 752 (for example, the light transmission member 752a).

Note that the control mode is not limited at all. For example, after the shielding design member 760 is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 68, it may be controlled to return to the assembled state, or the driving direction of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) may be changed from the state shown in FIG. The shielding design member 760 may be controlled to vibrate in the radial direction by switching between normal and reverse in small steps.

When controlling the shielding design member 760 to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the position of the support protrusion 743a arranged at the tip of the second elongated member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 in the state of the enlarged displacement to the intermediate position is the position of the tip adjustment member. 744 and the intermediate position of the guide slot 744a. As a result, the distal end adjusting member 744 can be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the guide long hole 744a, so that the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

While such a displacement is achievable, when the shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged or displaced to expand in the radial direction to the maximum, the support projection 743a arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 are placed at both end positions of the guide long hole 744a of the tip adjustment member 744, the circumferential arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be returned (see FIGS. 58(b) and 59(b). ).

In addition, the midway position that is allowed as the expansion displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be a position slightly shifted from the collective arrangement state, or a position slightly before the position of maximum expansion displacement.

Here, in a state in which the extended plate portion 761 is enlarged and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state (for example, a position where the extended plate portion 761 overlaps the shielding design member 760 arranged oppositely in a front view and is visually recognized), the extended plate Since the portion 761 fills the gap between the shielding design members 760, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the collective arrangement state is maintained.

In this embodiment, a red reflective sheet is attached to the extension plate portion 761 in the same manner as the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, so the red color of the extension plate portion 761 is visible in the gap between the shielding design members 760. Even if the red color is the color of the extended plate portion 761 or the color of the shielding design member 760, it can be difficult to distinguish.

It should be noted that unlike the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is expanded and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state by means of painting the extension plate portion 761 with another color (for example, gold). The extension plate portion 761 that is visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 may be conspicuous.

Although the case where the light transmitting member 752a is made of a colorless and light transmitting resin material has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a red resin material.

In this case, even if the shielding design members 760 are displaced beyond the overlapping margin with the extended plate portion 761 from the collective arrangement state, the light transmitting members 752a visible in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 are shielded. Since it is visually recognized in red like the design member 760, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the shielding design members 760 are at least partially connected to each other.

On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LEDs of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting members 752a visible in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 can be made to emit light to make them stand out. It is possible to improve the production effect of.

70 is a front view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the scaling unit 600. FIG. In FIGS. 70 and 71, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

70 and 71 show the extended state of the scaling unit 600 and the expanded state of the effect member 700. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the extended state of the scaling unit 600, the effect member 700 is controlled to be enlarged and displaceable until the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed with the maximum diameter.

Therefore, the size of the effect member 700 when viewed from the front is maximized, and the allowable posture change amount of the effect member 700 is minimized from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). In addition, the device for suppressing the posture change of the effect member 700 is as described above.

In the expanded state of the production member 700, the shielding design member 760 is arranged to retreat from the decorative member 752 in front view. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of reflection on the mirror surface member 752b when light is emitted from the LEDs of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53) to the case where the effect member 700 is arranged in the middle of the expansion displacement.

That is, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the background color of the shielding design member 760 and make it easier for the player to visually recognize the background color (silver in this embodiment) of the mirror surface member 752b. Therefore, even in a control mode in which light of the same color is continuously emitted from the LEDs of the decorative board 751 (see FIG. 53) when the elastic displacement member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is expanded and displaced, the decorative member 752 is visually recognized. It is possible to change the color of the light visually recognized by the player who plays the game in time series.

In more detail, for example, when white light is emitted from the electrical board 751, the background color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visible near the start of enlargement, while the shielding design member changes with the displacement of the enlargement. The color of the character 760 is weakened (the range is narrowed), and the background color (silver) of the mirror surface member 752b becomes more visible at the end position of the expansion displacement. As a result, the color of the light visually recognized by the player can be changed without changing the color of the emitted light.

68 and 69 and the expansion displacements shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 do not occur continuously in this embodiment. , is controlled to execute the expansion displacement of the effect member 700 .

That is, the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled to be executable only when the effect member 700 is collectively arranged. This can prevent the shielding design member 760 from colliding with other components such as the hemispherical front device 613 (see FIG. 47).

In addition, after considering the avoidance of collisions with other constituent members, or by configuring so as not to cause problems in displacement due to collisions with other constituent members, the production member 700 is expanded and displaced in the middle of the vertical displacement. It may be controlled as much as possible.

The radial contraction displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75 . 72(a), 72(b), 73, 74(a), and 75(a) are rear views of the effect member 700 showing contraction displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. 74(b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75(a). It is a diagram.

In FIGS. 72(a), 72(b), 73, 74(a), and 75(a), illustration of the plate-like main body 710 is omitted for ease of understanding, and FIG. , the rotating plate 730 rotates counterclockwise in rear view. In FIGS. 74(b) and 75(b), the illustration of the rotating plate 730b is further omitted.

FIG. 72(a) shows a state in which the shielding design members 760 of the production member 700 are dispersed with the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and FIG. 72(b) shows the shielding design members 760 of the production member 700 A state of being expanded and displaced to the halfway position (see FIGS. 68 and 69) is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 72(a), the transmitted projection 741a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary between the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the connecting portion 733c of the rotary plate 730, and in the state shown in FIG. , the transmitted projection 741 a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is arranged in the middle of the connecting portion 733 c of the rotary plate 730 .

FIG. 73 shows a state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side starts contacting the back-side claw portion 734a of the rotating plate 730, and FIG. The first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 is guided by the back-side claw 734a of the rotating plate 730 and reaches the position just before the collective arrangement state.

Due to the difference in the influence of gravity between the members arranged on the upper side and the members arranged on the lower side, the displacement modes of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged on the members arranged on the upper side and the members arranged on the lower side. It differs depending on the material.

As shown in FIG. 73, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 arranged on the upper side are arranged close to the rotating plate 730 by their own weight, and the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side is rotated by its own weight. Since it acts in the direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in the direction away from the rotating plate 730 to the extent allowed by the gap between the guide hole 733 and the transmitted projection 741a.

This hanging portion is lifted by the load from the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the collectively arranged position. Therefore, the five shielding design members 760 do not arrive at the collective arrangement state at the same time, and at least the upper three are earlier than the lower two.

As a result, the production members 700 can be stably displaced to the collective arrangement state. That is, when the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 vigorously reach the collectively arranged state, whereby the lower telescopic displacement member is arranged. 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue accumulates in the lower expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause premature failure.

On the other hand, when the upper elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first as in the present embodiment, and then the lower elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in a collective arrangement state. Since its own weight is generated in a direction against the displacement of the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, the momentum of colliding with the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of fatigue caused by collision between the elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 .

In FIG. 74, the transmitted protrusion 741a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary between the large-diameter arc portion 733b of the rotating plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c. Immediately after this, the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is fully pushed by the back side claw portion 734a, and is brought into a collective arrangement state. On the other hand, the second guided projection 744b of the distal end adjusting member 744 is arranged apart from the front claw 734b.

In FIG. 75 , a collective arrangement state of the effect members 700 is illustrated. That is, the figure shows a state in which the rotary plate 730 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view to the end position where the columnar projecting portion 728 of the function plate portion 720 is arranged at the end portion of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotary plate 730 .

FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member 700 along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. As shown in FIG. 76, when the production member 700 is collectively arranged, the central axis side surface of the rear claw portion 734a abuts against the first guided projection 743b of the expansion/contraction member 740, and the diameter of the expansion/contraction member 740 increases. Directionally outward displacement is restricted.

In addition, the central axis side surface of the front claw portion 734b abuts against the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the radially outward displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is restricted. At this time, the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b are brought into contact with each other in the radial direction with a front-to-rear width in the projecting direction. You can stabilize your posture.

Furthermore, the front surface of the distal end adjustment member 744 is configured to be slidable on the rear surface of the extension plate portion 726 . During this sliding process, the projecting tip of the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740 abuts on the inclined surface 734c of the rotary plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotational direction. (The closer it is to the collectively arranged state, the more it is inclined in such a manner that it protrudes toward the front side.) Therefore, the inclined surface 734c can apply a load toward the front side to the second guided projection 744b.

As a result, in the configuration in which the distal end adjusting member 744 is sandwiched between the extended plate portion 726 of the functional plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730, as the rotating plate 730 rotates and the effect members 700 approach the collective arrangement state, the leading end The distal end adjusting member 744 can be displaced toward the front side in such a manner that the adjusting member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extension plate portion 726 .

Therefore, while preventing excessive increase in the resistance caused by the rotation of the rotating plate 730, the front-rear direction position and posture of the front-rear adjustment member 744 are gradually increased. can be stabilized, the longitudinal position and posture of the shielding design member 760 can be stabilized, and the shielding design member 760 can be arranged in close contact without gaps in the collective arrangement state.

With reference to FIGS. 74(b) and 75(b), the fact that the load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b can correct the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 will be described. All of the shielding design members 760 have a common configuration, and the telescopic displacement member 740 that displaces the shielding design members 760 also has a common configuration.

As described above, the shielding design member 760 is located on the side where the extended plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59(a)) is formed in the width direction (the right side in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the top, FIG. (b)) is arranged on the rear side compared to the opposite side, so that the posture can be easily inclined.

This is due to the form of the second elongated member 743, and this attitude inclination also occurs in the distal end adjusting member 744 to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed. Due to the inclination of the attitude of the tip adjusting member 744, the tip position of the second guided protrusion 744b is located on the rear surface compared to the tip position of the first guided protrusion 743b (the protrusion direction is along the front-rear direction). The position tends to shift in the clockwise direction (to the left in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the top, see FIG. 74(b)).

On the other hand, the rotating plate 730 has the extended claw portion 734 arranged to face the second guided protrusion 744b in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and is arranged to face the second guided protrusion 744b in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view. It rotates and displaces so that a load can be applied.

That is, for example, when the inner diameter side surface of the front claw portion 734b and the front side surface of the inclined surface 734c (see FIGS. 56 and 57) come into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b, the second guided protrusion 744b Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise direction side in rear view, the degree of inclination of the postures of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be relaxed (the inclination can be eliminated). As a result, it is possible to easily eliminate the attitude inclination of the shielding design member 760 at the collective arrangement position of the effect members 700 .

The load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. Therefore, in the process of changing the state of the production member 700 shown in chronological order from FIG. 72 to FIG. 75, until the shielding design member 760 is arranged at the small diameter side end (reduction side end) of the displacement allowable range (see FIG. 74). , the posture inclinations of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 are maintained, and then the posture change to eliminate (correct) the posture inclinations of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be caused.

In other words, while the shielding design members 760 approach each other, by maintaining the attitude inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760, the body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extended plate portion 761 come into contact (collision). ), on the other hand, after the shielding design members 760 have come close to each other, the attitude inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be eliminated (corrected), so that the shielding design member The plate portion arranged in the forefront of the shielding design members 760 can be arranged flush with each other, and a sense of unity of the shielding design members 760 in the collectively arranged state can be easily produced.

The state shown in FIG. 74(b) is illustrated as a state in which the posture deviation of the shielding design member 760 is maximized. In addition, the posture deviation on the opposite side of the posture deviation shown in FIG. This makes it easier to avoid the extension plate portion 761 from colliding with the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face it.

Further, an auxiliary protrusion 727 (see FIG. 54) arranged on the opposite side of the extended plate portion 726 is configured to be able to come into contact with the contraction side wall portion of the distal end adjustment member 744 during expansion/contraction displacement. Since a pair of auxiliary projections 727 are formed on the left and right sides of the extension plate portion 726, the tip adjustment member 744 is moved by contacting the left and right ends of the tip adjustment member 744 that have reached the contraction side ends of the displacement range. Posture deviation can be corrected.

As a result, it is possible not only to correct the posture by engaging with another shielding design member 760, but also to stabilize the posture when the distal end adjusting member 744 reaches the contraction side end of the displacement range by itself. can.

Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, description will be made. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described shooting effect unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement/rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for livening up the game. Next, the displacement/rotation unit 800 will be described.

Since the displacement/rotation unit 800 is a pair of units arranged symmetrically and configured to have symmetrical shapes, the configuration of the displacement/rotation unit 800 on the left side will be described below, and the explanation of the displacement/rotation unit 800 on the right side will be described below. omitted. Note that FIG. 5 will be referred to as needed in the following description.

77 is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIG. 77 and 78 show the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIG.

79 is a front exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIG. 79 and 80, the lateral slide member 840 is shown in an assembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement/rotation unit 800 includes a base plate portion 810 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and a metal plate portion fixed to the base plate portion 810 with a member such as a screw. A rod MB2, a vertical slide member 820 configured to be vertically slidable through which the metal rod MB2 is inserted, and a drive fastened and fixed to the rear side of the vertical slide member 820 and fastened and fixed to the base plate portion 810. A transmission member 830 configured to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, a metal rod MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 with a member such as a screw, and a configuration in which the metal rod MB3 is inserted and slidable in the left-right direction. a transmission means 860 configured to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT4 to the horizontal slide member 840 via the vertical slide member 820 as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced in the vertical direction; A wiring arm member 870 fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member 820 so as to be rotatably displaceable at the upper end position of the vertical slide member 820 on the side of the metal rod MB2, and a wiring guide member 880 for guiding the wiring arm member 870 and the electric wiring. .

The base plate portion 810 includes a pair of both end fixing portions 811 on which the metal rod MB2 is arranged, a slide guide portion 812 formed so as to be able to guide the transmission member 830 arranged on the front side, and a long length on the back side. A transmission guide portion 813 formed in a groove shape so as to be able to guide the columnar protrusion 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed to the back side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide portion 813. and a fall prevention plate 814 arranged on the rear side to prevent the falling of the device.

The vertical slide member 820 includes a plane plate portion 821, a wall portion 822 extending from the edge of the plane plate portion 821 toward the back side, and a circular portion extending from a substantially central position of an area surrounded by the wall portion 822 toward the back side. A cylindrical protrusion 823 protruding in a columnar shape, omission portions 824a and 824b having a size that allows insertion of a connector portion of an electrical wiring and omitting the formation of a wall portion, and the left end portion of the flat plate portion 821 A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 formed in a cylindrical shape (or a cylindrical member is disposed) through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted, and a normal plate portion 821 at the upper and lower central portions of the plane plate portion 821 through which the metal rod MB3 can be inserted. A pair of left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 formed (or a cylindrical member is disposed) on the left and right, and near the ends of the metal rod insertion portions 826, are fastened and fixed to the flat plate portion 821 to prevent the metal rod MB3 from falling off. a support portion 828 formed in a columnar shape projecting from the back side of the plane plate portion 821 and capable of supporting a two-stage pinion 861; and a support protrusion 829 that protrudes cylindrically toward the left side of FIG. 79).

The wall portion 822 is a portion for ensuring the durability of the electrical wiring by structuring inside a region in which the electrical wiring disposed between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced. The omission portions 824a and 824b formed as discontinuous portions of the wall portion 822 are composed of a first omission portion 824a formed as an opening and a second omission portion 824b formed as a concave portion opened to the rear side.

The metal rod insertion portion 825 extends in a plate shape from the upper side thereof toward the rear side, and the upper detection sensor SC8 and the lower detection sensor SC8 are fastened and fixed to the base member 810 in a posture in which the detection groove faces the front side of the base member 810. A detection target plate portion 825a configured to be arranged in the detection groove of the sensor SC9 is provided.

The transmission member 830 includes a main body portion 831 formed in a plate shape elongated in the vertical direction, and a female screw formed at the tip of a columnar protrusion 823 of the vertical slide member 820 on the upper side of the main body portion 831 . An insertion hole 832 that is formed so that a fastening screw that can be screwed into it can be inserted, and a plate portion in which the insertion hole 832 is drilled. A lid-shaped portion 833 that covers from the side, and a linear gear portion 834 in which gear teeth are linearly formed in the vertical direction on the left side surface of the main body portion 831 are provided.

The columnar protrusion 823 has both a role as a portion into which the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 832 is screwed, and a role as a winding center of the electrical wiring, as will be described later.

The linear gear portion 834 meshes with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, the transmission member 830 is vertically displaced as the drive motor MT4 is controlled to rotate. As a result, the vertical slide member 820 is vertically displaced.

81 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member 840. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the horizontal slide member 840 includes a body plate member 841 formed in a substantially circular plate shape through which a metal rod MB3 is inserted and whose lateral displacement is restricted, and a rear surface of the body plate portion 841. A wiring guide member 844 that is fastened and fixed to the upper part of the side and constitutes a guide path for electric wiring, a circular member 847 arranged on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and formed in a circular plate shape when viewed from the front, and the circular member 847. and the main body plate member 841, an annular decorative member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and the circular member 847 via a cylindrical collar member C8. and an intermediate member 857 fitted from the front side into the opening of the wing-like member 854 in order to adjust the central opening diameter of the wing-like member 854 to the opening diameter of the collar member C8. , and a central design member 858 in which a columnar member having an outer diameter that can be inserted into the central opening of the intermediary member 857 protrudes from the rear side.

The main body plate member 841 has a rod arrangement portion 842 in which the drive motor MT5 is fastened and fixed on the back side, the drive gear MG5 is arranged on the front side, and the metal rod MB3 is arranged. and a rack gear portion 843 in which gear teeth are engraved along the left-right direction.

The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding lateral displacement of the electrical wiring, and is formed in a shape that allows the electrical wiring to bypass. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring from rubbing against other components, which will be described later in detail.

The circular member 847 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured such that a wing-like member 854 and the drive gear MG5 which are formed to be able to mesh with each other are assembled from front and back directions different from each other.

The circular member 847 includes a cup-shaped receiving portion 848 of a size capable of receiving the feather-shaped member 854 and recessed toward the rear side, and a cylindrically protruding portion from the center of the receiving portion 848 toward the front side. and a cylindrical protrusion 849 that is

The receiving portion 848 has a through-hole portion 848a which is formed so as to have a shape that overlaps with the cylindrical column centered on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5. Exposed to a position visible from the back.

In this manner, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 can mesh with the drive gear MG5, and the drive motor MT5 rotates, thereby transmitting the drive force and controlling the rotation of the vane member 854. FIG. Rotational driving of the vane-shaped member 854 is possible regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 . That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the path forming member 882 is designed so that it is possible even in the waiting state for the effect.

The cylindrical protrusion 849 has a linear notch 849a at its tip. This is a shaped portion for facilitating maintenance of the posture of the central design member 858 by arranging the radially protruding portion 858b of the central design member 858, the details of which will be described later.

83 is a partial cross-sectional view of displacement rotation unit 800 taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. In the description of FIG. 83, FIGS. 81 and 82 are referred to as appropriate.

The electrical decoration board 850 includes a circular opening with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, an elongated opening extending upward, and a deformed opening 851 formed by the deformed opening. A front side light emitting means 852a composed of a plurality of LEDs etc. arranged on the front side near the opening 851, and a plurality of LEDs etc. and a rear side light emitting means 852b.

The deformed opening 851 allows the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 to be arranged inside the opening, and the gear portion 855 of the feather member 854 is arranged on the rear side of the deformed opening 851 in the assembled state.

The elongated hole portion extending upward from the deformed opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotation shaft of the drive gear MG5. As a result, the driving gear MG5 can be brought closer to the electrical board 850, and the gear portion 855 of the feather-shaped member 854 can be easily meshed with the driving gear MG5.

The front side light emitting means 852a is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces the front-rear direction. As a result, the light can be emitted to the front side along the arrow D8a in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the feather member 854 .

The rear side light emitting means 852b is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces radially outward. As a result, light can be emitted toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b. By reflecting (refracting) this light to the front side by the uneven shape formed on the plate back surface of the circular member 847 , the light can travel to the front side at a position far from the rotation axis of the feather member 854 . In addition, in this embodiment, since a plurality of elongated concave-convex shapes formed along arcs concentric with the rotational axis of the feather-shaped member 854 are densely formed on the back surface of the circular member 847, the player can In contrast, arc-shaped (or circular) light can be visually recognized when viewed from the front.

That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the front side of the electrical board 850 is not arranged with an LED or the like whose optical axis is oriented in the front-rear direction at a position far from the rotation axis of the feather-shaped member 854, the player can The position at which the light is visually recognized can be moved radially outward. In other words, while using the electrical board 850 having a smaller diameter than the outermost diameter of the wing-shaped member 854, the outer side of the surface on which the electrical board 850 is formed, that is, the outermost diameter of the wing-shaped member 854, is used. , the light can be seen (see FIG. 14).

As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in which light is visually recognized radially outward of the feather-shaped member 854 without increasing the size of the electrical board 850 . In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the wing-shaped member 854 rotates at high speed, the rear side of the wing-shaped member 854 becomes a shadow, and there is a possibility that it may be difficult to effectively perform the lighting effect in this range. . In order to solve this problem, it is considered effective to irradiate the light from the outside in the radial direction of the rotational locus of the vane member 854, but this requires increasing the layout area of the LEDs and the like. In other words, it is necessary to increase the area of the electrical board, which increases the manufacturing cost of the board.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while maintaining the size of the electrical board 850 smaller than the rotational locus of the wing-shaped member 854, only the visible position of the light is positioned radially outward from the rotational trajectory of the wing-shaped member 854. can be displaced. As a result, the effect of the lighting effect can be improved without increasing the manufacturing cost.

Returning to FIGS. 81 and 82, description will be made. The decorative member 853 is a member that is formed from a light-impermeable resin material and that is coaxially fastened to the front side of the circular member 847 . Therefore, since the light passing through the circular member 847 is separated by the decorative member 853, it is possible to effectively perform an effect in which the appearance of the light is changed between the inner side and the outer side of the decorative member 853 as a boundary.

For example, blue light is emitted from the front side light emitting means 852a while red light is emitted from the rear side light emitting means 852b. can be clearly separated by the decorative member 853 .

The feather-like member 854 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a circular opening 854a formed in the central portion in the front-rear direction, and radially outwardly extending at equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the circular opening 854a. a gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back side; and a plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back side at an intermediate position between the adjacent blade portions 854b. And prepare.

The circular opening 854a is formed with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

The wing-shaped member 854 is configured to be rotatable via a drive gear MG5 that is rotationally driven by the drive motor MT5. The attitude of the vane member 854 is controlled depending on the length of the driving time. In this configuration, the wing-shaped member 854 is configured so that the rotation axis and the center of gravity are aligned, and by minimizing idling after de-energization of the drive motor MT5, the drive motor MT5 It is possible to reduce the deviation between the attitude of the wing-shaped member 854 assumed by the driving time of , and the actual attitude of the wing-shaped member 854 . It should be noted that the orientation of the vane member 854 may be detectable by configuring the drive motor MT5 with a stepping motor.

The intermediary member 857 is formed so as to be fitted into the front opening of the circular opening 854 a , and the inner diameter of the opening 857 a is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 849 of the circular member 847 . Thereby, the intermediary member 857 can be rotatable around the cylindrical protrusion 849 .

The central design member 858 includes a central projection 858a projecting from the central portion toward the back side in a cylindrical shape, a radially projecting portion 858b projecting radially outward from the central projection 858a, and a circular body portion. and a design projected streak portion 858c projecting upward from the .

The central protrusion 858a is a portion that is inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 849 in such a manner that the radial protrusion 858b is inserted into the notch 849a. The central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847 by screwing the inserted fastening screw.

In addition to functioning as a design portion, the design rib portion 858 c can also function to abut against the wing-shaped member 854 and adjust the rotation mode of the wing-shaped member 854 . That is, when the rear surface of the design projection 858c and the front surface of the wing-shaped member 854 are arranged close to each other to such an extent that they rub against each other, the stop posture of the wing-shaped member 854 is stabilized by utilizing the increase in resistance caused by this rubbing. can be planned.

As a result, the drive control mode of the feather-shaped member 854 is a drive mode in which the rotation continues for a long period of time, and a drive mode in which the rotation of about one rotation occurs intermittently (an irregular operation at the beginning of rotation is produced). drive mode), it is possible to stabilize the intermittent stop posture of the feather member 854 in the latter drive mode.

Returning to FIGS. 79 and 80, description will be made. The transmission means 860 meshes with a two-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820 and a small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861, and is supported by the vertical slide member 820 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. and a drop prevention member 863 that prevents the rack member 862 from dropping from the vertical slide member 820 .

The two-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small-diameter pinion 861a that meshes with the gear teeth of the rack member 862 and a pinion that has a longer pitch radius than the small-diameter pinion 861a. The small pinion 861a and the large pinion 861b are integrally formed.

The rack member 862 is formed to be long in the left and right direction, and has a gear portion 862a formed as a rack gear that can be meshed with the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861. and a columnar projection 862b projecting from the end portion toward the front side in a columnar shape.

In this embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are configured with gear teeth of the same shape, and the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a , and the pitch circle radius of the large-diameter pinion 861b is designed to be 9:16. Therefore, the ratio of the amount of lateral displacement of the rack member 862 and the amount of lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is maintained at 9:16.

The columnar projection 862b has an outer diameter that allows it to be placed inside the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 . In addition, the plate thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the columnar projection 862b is formed is such that when the columnar projection 862b is arranged in the transmission guide portion 813, the rear side end portion of the rack member 862 is prevented from falling off. The thickness of the plate is such that the columnar projection 862b does not drop off from the transmission guide portion 813 even if it is moved to the rear side until it abuts against the plate 814 .

This can prevent the rack member 862 from falling off from the transmission guide portion 813 when the fall prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state.

In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth of the same shape, so that the displacement amount of the rack member 862 is larger than that of the small-diameter pinion 861a. The lateral slide member 840 is laterally displaced by a displacement amount calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the radial pinion 861b.

Therefore, the amount of displacement of the lateral slide member 840 can be increased compared to the amount of displacement of the rack member 862 . As a result, it is possible to ensure a large lateral displacement width of the lateral slide member 840 while keeping the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813 small, which will be described later in detail.

84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the path forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. FIG. 79 and 80 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 84 and 85 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is a long member made of a resin material. A circular support hole 872 is drilled at one end in the longitudinal direction of the wire, and a wire placement hole 873 is placed close to the support hole 872 and drilled in the same direction so that electrical wires can be placed. , a plurality of claw portions 874 extending from one wall portion toward the other wall portion at the open side end portion of the long main body portion 871, and a resin mold for forming the claw portions 874 can be removed. and a circular projecting portion 876 projecting in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 872 from near the other end of the long body portion 871 in the longitudinal direction.

The long body portion 871 is a portion where the electric wiring guided to the open side portion through the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged, and has a constricted portion 871a having a reduced width length in the intermediate portion thereof. The electric wiring is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the elongated body portion 871 and guided to the outside from the other end portion (the end portion opposite to the side where the support hole 872 is formed) in the elongated direction.

The constricted portion 871a functions as a portion that loosely sandwiches the electrical wiring arranged on the open side of the long body portion 871 to the extent that disconnection does not occur, and prevents the arrangement of the electrical wiring from being excessively shifted. The narrowed portion 871a can prevent the electrical wiring arranged on the open side portion of the long main body portion 871 from being displaced beyond the narrowed portion 871a.

The support hole 872 is formed with a size that allows the support protrusion 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) to be inserted thereinto, so that the wiring arm member 870 is rotatably supported by the vertical slide portion 820 .

The wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through hole through which the electric wiring arranged on the wiring arm member 870 passes when passing over to the vertical slide member 820 . In the present embodiment, since the wire placement hole 873 is arranged close to the support hole 872, the positional deviation amount of the wire placement hole 873 when the wire arm member 870 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the load applied to the electrical wiring due to the rotation of the wiring arm member 870 can be reduced.

The claw portion 874 prevents the electrical wiring arranged in a mode of being housed in the open portion side of the long main body portion 871 from falling off from the long main body portion 871 . In addition, since the through-hole 875 with a minimum area secures the space for extracting the resin mold required for forming the claw portion 874, the electrical wiring can It is possible to prevent it from slipping out from the side (the side where the through hole 875 is formed in this embodiment).

The circular projecting portion 876 is formed with an outer diameter and projecting length that can be placed in the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In this embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wire guide portion 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wire arm member 870 .

As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 comprises a prevention plate 881 for preventing the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886, and the prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to form an internal path. and a passage forming member 882 that is fastened and secured to the base member 810 .

As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in a box-like shape with one side open, and a prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to the open portion so that the path forming member 882 is opened to the rear side at a position separated in the vertical direction. A path through the upper opening 883 and the lower opening 884 is formed.

That is, the path forming member 882 has a wall portion 882a projecting to one side at the edge, and an upper opening portion 883 that forms an upper opening portion of the path by missing the wall portion 882a, and the lower end of the path forming member 882. A lower opening portion 884 drilled in the wall portion 882a with a size that enables insertion of a connector of an electrical wiring, and a portion extending from the wall portion 882a toward the upper opening portion 883 within a range not overlapping the prevention plate 881 when viewed in the left-right direction. An extension part 885 that extends, a guide recess 886 that is recessed in a long groove shape in a range that does not overlap with the extension part 885 when viewed in the left-right direction, and a lower edge of the guide recess 886 A columnar projecting portion 887 is provided so as to protrude on the side of the prevention plate 881 , and into which a fastening screw inserted through the prevention plate 881 is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip.

A space in which the vertical slide member 820 can be displaced in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the path forming member 882, and the horizontal slide member 840, which is displaced in the horizontal direction along with the displacement, has a wall portion 882a that is closest to the front side. It enters the rear side of the wall portion 882a at the arranged position (position near the lower end of displacement) (see FIG. 86(a)).

That is, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged on the rear side of the wiring guide member 880 forming the route along which the electric wiring is guided at a position near the lower end of displacement. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring from coming into contact with or rubbing against the horizontal sliding member 840 while allowing the electrical wiring and the horizontal sliding member 840 to overlap each other in the front view.

In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided along the path of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper opening 883 . and is regulated by the prevention plate 881 . Furthermore, the widthwise length of the path of the wiring guide member 880 is designed to be shorter than the sum of the widthwise lengths of the long main body portion 871 of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular projecting portion 876 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from falling out of the guide recess 886 in the assembled state.

The lower open portion 884 functions as a wire through hole through which an electrical wire arranged so as to be wound around the columnar projecting portion 887 is passed to the rear side.

The guide recess 886 includes a front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, a rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, and a connecting recess 886c connecting the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. and

The columnar projecting portion 887 has a role of a restricting portion that restricts the displacement of the electrical wiring and a role of a fastening portion for fixing the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882 .

With reference to FIGS. 86 to 89, the displacement mode of displacement/rotation unit 800 will be described. FIGS. 86 to 89 show how the displacing/rotating unit 800 changes state from the waiting state for presentation to the upper end state for presentation in chronological order.

86(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 86(b) is a sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 taken along line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb of FIG. 86(a). 87(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87(b) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87(a). 88(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88(b) is a displacement along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88(a). 89(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 89(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 800 from LXXXIXb to LXXXIXb in FIG. 89(a). 8 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 along the line; FIG.

FIG. 86 shows the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800. In FIG. 87, the detection target plate portion 825a (see FIG. 80) of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at the upper detection sensor SC8, and the horizontal slide member 840 moves along the displacement path. In FIG. 88, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the middle right end state and the upper end state of the effect, and the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged between the middle right end state and the upper end state of the effect. In FIG. 89, the upper end state of the production of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

In FIGS. 86(a), 87(a), 88(a) and 89(a), for ease of understanding, the wire guide member 880 includes a wall portion 882a, a guide recess 886 and a cylindrical projecting portion. The wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized by omitting the illustration of the other shaped portions while the outer shape of the portion 887 is shown in imaginary lines. In addition, by partially breaking the shape portion near the upper end of the base plate 810, the vertical slide member 820 is prevented from being hidden during vertical displacement.

In FIGS. 86(b), 87(b), 88(b) and 89(b), the shape line of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 is illustrated by imaginary lines. A circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the body plate member 841 is shown for the purpose of showing only the horizontal displacement width.

86 to 89, imaginary lines illustrate how the electrical wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 is displaced according to the state change of the displacement/rotation unit 800. FIG. The electric wiring DK2 is guided into the wiring guide member 880 from the lower opening 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880, passes through the wiring arm member 870, and then reaches the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. It is guided through the enclosed space to the lateral slide member 840, the details of the displacement of which will be described later.

The displacement/rotation unit 800 is configured such that the vertical slide member 820 can be vertically reciprocated. First, the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be described.

In this embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at the lower end position in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86). In the effect standby state, the plate portion 825a to be detected of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, so that the displacing rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that.

In addition, in the performance standby state, the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the left end (left and right outer ends) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the front side. That is, by arranging the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to retreat from the displacement trajectory of the horizontal slide member 840, the horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is prevented from being restricted by the horizontal position of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Therefore, the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced fully to the left and right outer sides.

The state in which the driving motor MT4 is driven and controlled in the direction of upwardly displacing the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state, and the detection plate portion 825a is arranged in the upper detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the middle right end state (see FIG. 87). ). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the displacing/rotating unit 800 is in the middle right end state from the output of the upper detection sensor SC8.

In the intermediate right end state, while the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced upward and to the right from the effect standby state, the wiring arm member 870 is only displaced upward and the posture is maintained.

84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still arranged in the front vertical recess 886a of the guide recess 886, the wiring arm member 870 is supported as a support point. The distance in the longitudinal direction between the projecting portion 829 and the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is maintained from the effect standby state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the right along with the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state to the middle right end state without changing the posture of the wiring arm member 870. be. As a result, it is possible to avoid a collision between the members due to displacement timing deviation, which tends to occur when both the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are displaced.

As shown in FIGS. 86(b) and 87(b), as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced upward, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the horizontal direction. In this displacement, the direction of displacement is switched along the shape of the transmission guide portion 813 , but the displacement in the left-right direction exceeds the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813 .

This is because the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is transmitted via the two-stage pinion 861 . That is, it is the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 that is guided by the transmission guide portion 813, and the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are connected to the two-stage pinion 861. combined. Therefore, the ratio of the pitch circle radii of the two-stage pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio of the displacement width of the rack member 862 and the displacement width of the lateral slide member 864 .

In this embodiment, the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a and the pitch circle radius of the large diameter pinion 861b of the two-stage pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) is 9:16. is multiplied by a constant (that is, 16/9=approximately 1.78).

As shown in FIG. 88(b), in the intermediate left end state, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to the right and left outwards as much as in the effect waiting state. In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to the position where it overlaps the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

In such an arrangement, as shown in FIG. 88(a), the posture of the wiring arm member 870 changes. That is, in the process from the midway right end state to the midway left end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is connected to the connecting recess 886c formed on the rear side of the front vertical recess of the guide recess 886. The distance in the longitudinal direction between the supporting projection 829 as a supporting point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is shortened compared to the effect standby state.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 is changed after the horizontal slide member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction. In the downward displacement, the reverse is established (after the wiring arm member 870 does not change its posture, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position overlapping the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction).

As a result, even if there is a deviation between the displacement timing of the lateral slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870, the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 can be prevented from colliding with each other.

The wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the left end (the outer end in the left-right direction) of the displacement/rotation unit 800, and displacement is limited to up-and-down displacement and posture change in the front-rear direction. That is, regardless of the state of the displacing/rotating unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can be continuously arranged at the left and right outer ends where the player is unlikely to notice, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 guide the wiring arm member 870. It is possible to avoid the electric wiring DK2 from entering the field of view of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), during the period until the displacing/rotating unit 800 reaches the effect upper end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is A support protrusion 829 as a support point for the wiring arm member 870 and a circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 ( 84) is maintained at a minimum.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 configured to be able to change its posture as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced vertically is used to arrange the electric wiring DK2 at different front and rear positions corresponding to the vertical position. By constructing such a structure, there is an advantageous effect that a space for arranging the constituent members can be secured.

For example, when the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at a rearward position, lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is restricted. Specifically, in order to avoid contact with the electrical wiring DK2, the horizontal slide member 840 is set to the right side (left and right inner side) in the waiting state for the effect. In this embodiment, since the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is arranged at the right side (left and right inner side) of the horizontal slide member 840, the size of the displacement/rotation unit 800 is reduced in order to avoid contact. There is a possibility that it will be necessary to deal with That is, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement/rotation unit 800 is reduced.

Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is arranged at a position closer to the front, while the horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 can be sufficiently ensured, the game board 13 arranged on the front side of the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be displaced. The degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the is lowered.

In this embodiment, since the displacement/rotation unit 800 is arranged symmetrically, in order to drive the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second prize winning port 640 arranged in the right side area of the game board 13. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the solenoid, etc., tends to be low.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 is configured to displace the electrical wiring DK2 in the front-rear direction, thereby avoiding the limitation of the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840, thereby allowing the game to be played. It is possible to avoid lowering the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the board 13 .

That is, at the lower end position where the horizontal slide member 840 is to be retracted to the right and left outer sides, the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged forward, so that the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged in front of the horizontal slide member 840, and the horizontal slide member 840 is moved forward. is avoided from being limited by the electrical wiring DK2.

In addition, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced inward to the left and right, and in the upper position where the second winning hole 640 (see FIG. 2) is desired to be arranged, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged rearward, thereby The DK2 is placed closer to the back, leaving a space on the front side. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging members arranged on the game board 13 as components such as solenoids for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second prize winning opening 640. FIG.

State changes of the electric wiring DK2 in the state changes shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. The change in the state of the electric wiring DK2 here means a change in the winding state of the electric wiring DK2 in the state where the electric wiring DK2 is wound around the pillar.

In the electrical wiring DK2, the upper portion of the lower winding portion DK2b (the side close to the wiring arm member 870) exclusively extends vertically and is not preferred to be curved. In particular, during the downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electrical wiring DK2 into the front side of the cylindrical projecting portion 887 (see FIG. 86(a)). A higher value is preferred.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a cable tube made of resin is wound around the upper portion of the lower winding portion DK2b so that the behavior is such that the rigidity is higher than that of the portion that undergoes winding displacement.

In the state shown in FIG. 89(a), the cable tube is arranged between the wall portion 882a and the electrical wiring DK2, thereby avoiding friction between the electrical wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. there is

In addition, since the opening direction of the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is configured to face vertically downward, the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 at the start of downward displacement can be directed vertically downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid unnecessary bending deformation of the electric wiring DK2.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged such that the upper winding portion DK2a is wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840, Winding portion DK2b is arranged to be wound around cylindrical projecting portion 887 below wiring arm member 870 .

Of the electrical wiring DK2, the upper winding portion DK2a arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 can be displaced in a radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion 823. configured to

Of the electrical wiring DK2, the lower winding portion DK2b arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical projecting portion 887 is displaced in a radial direction along a plane perpendicular to the central axis of the cylindrical projecting portion 887. configured as possible.

That is, the plane in which the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 is configured to be different from the plane in which the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced below the wiring arm member 870 . In this embodiment, the planes are perpendicular to each other, and the planes in which the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 are the first omission portion 824a, the second omission portion 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. 873.

Displacement of the electric wiring DK2 is suppressed by sandwiching the portion of the wiring arm member 870 that is disposed inside the long main body portion 871 between the constricted portions 871a as described above. Therefore, relative displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 with respect to the wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the displacement required for the electric wire DK2 due to the change in the state of the displacement/rotation unit 800 is completed independently in the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b. Therefore, they will be described separately below.

First, displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a will be described. The upper winding portion DK2a includes a portion that is wound counterclockwise around the columnar protrusion 823 from a portion that passes through the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870 to the right side, and is on the left side of the wiring guide member 844. It means the part up to the point guided by the tip.

The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction around the center of the cylindrical protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 as a limit, and is in the radially widest production standby state (see FIG. 86(b)). , a wall portion 822 is formed at a position (or a position with a slight gap) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load. As a result, the load applied from the wall portion 822 to the electrical wiring DK2 can be reduced in the presentation standby state.

When the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the right side from the production standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right side, thereby pulling the upper winding portion DK2a and moving it radially inward about the columnar protrusion 823. The displacement length of the horizontal slide member 840 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a. This makes it possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the lateral slide member 840 is displaced leftward, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced leftward, thereby pushing the upper winding portion DK2a and winding it radially outward around the cylindrical projection 823. The portion DK2a is displaced. At this time, a guide piece 844a is protruded from the left end of the wire guide member 844 and inclined downward toward the left, so that the upper winding portion DK2a moves outward (between the vertical slide member 820 and the wire guide member 844). ) can be prevented from protruding upward), and the upper winding portion DK2a can be appropriately pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 822.

Next, displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b will be described. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise around the columnar projecting portion 887 from a portion that hangs down from the wiring arm member 870 (as viewed from the left and right outside). 88 (see FIG. 85).

The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction around the center of the columnar projecting portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a as the limit, and the radially widest effect standby state (see FIG. 86(a)). ), a wall portion 882a is formed at a position (or a position with a slight gap) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load. As a result, the load applied from the wall portion 882a to the electrical wiring DK2 can be reduced in the presentation standby state.

When the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward due to the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward, thereby pulling the lower winding portion DK2b upward. , the displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b inward in the radial direction centering on the columnar projecting portion 887 . This makes it possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side arranged on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed downward in the radial direction around the columnar projecting portion 887. The side winding portion DK2b is displaced. At this time, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is opened in the direction of inclination toward the front side as it goes downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is positioned between the cylindrical projecting portion 887 and the wall portion 882a (a cylindrical portion). (above the projecting portion 887) can be prevented, and the lower winding portion DK2b can be appropriately pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 882a.

In this embodiment, the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is arranged is arranged below the position of the lower end of the displacement range of the lateral slide member 840. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the size of the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is displaced in the radial direction from being restricted by the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840, so that the lower winding portion DK2b can be mounted on the rear case 510 (FIG. 5). See) can be displaced by using the full front-to-rear width.

Accordingly, since a large space for accommodating the lower winding portion DK2b can be secured below the wiring arm member 870, the length of the lower winding portion DK2b can be sufficiently increased, and the wiring arm member 870 can be The allowable vertical displacement amount can be lengthened.

90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 includes a center frame 86 arranged on the front side of a window 60a formed in the base plate 60, and a plurality of flow channels whose front sides are opened from resin members. and a spherical flow down unit 150 formed in a channel shape and arranged in the lower part of the back side of the base plate 60 .

The ball flow down unit 150 is formed so as to be able to receive the ball that has flowed down the flow path lower end LB1 of the game ball entering the second prize winning port 640 in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the fixed plate portion 151 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. A first receiving channel 152 and a second receiving channel, which is a long box-shaped member whose front side is open and which is connected to the downstream side of the receiving channel 151 and is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 151 from the back side. It has a channel member 153 and a plurality of ridges 154 projecting inward from the inner side portions of the left and right walls of the second receiving channel member 153 in a direction perpendicular to the flowing direction of the ball.

The plurality of ridges 154 are alternately arranged on the left and right sides of the left and right wall portions with an interval approximately equal to the diameter of a sphere. As a result, it is possible to decelerate the flow of the balls flowing down the second receiving channel member 153 .

Functions of the first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 will be described. The first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 have a function of guiding a game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 to a ball discharge channel (not shown), There is a function to improve the production effect by allowing the player to visually recognize the later game balls. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to as needed in the following description.

The second winning hole 640 is provided with a detection sensor for ball passage detection near the lower edge shown in FIG. As a result, the payout of prize balls and the pending display on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed immediately, and a comfortable game can be provided to the player. Even if the player does not see the ball entering the second prize winning port 640, the player can notice the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the first receiving channel 152. For example, it is possible to make it easy to notice a situation in which the payout is not performed due to a problem on the gaming machine side.

As will be described below, it is clear that the ball has entered the second winning port 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1. , the timing of paying out the prize balls and the timing of the pending display may be delayed.

A game ball that enters the second winning hole 640 is placed inside the guide path DL1 in the left-right direction along which the ball deviating from the second winning hole 640 can be visually recognized in the front view. 27) flows down.

Like the guiding flow path DL1, the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be able to guide the sphere vertically downward while displacing the sphere in a zigzag pattern to the left and right. That is, since the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 and the ball flowing down the guide flow path DL1 appear to flow in the same way, the ball in the right path of the third symbol display device 81 during a right-handed game , it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the ball is flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1.

Here, the information as to which path the ball is flowing down in a right-handed game is information directly linked to the profit of the player, and the number of nails (not shown) implanted in the base plate 60. This is a portion where individual differences of the pachinko machine 10 occur depending on the state.

In this embodiment, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is left near the through gate 67, and the ball before passing through the through gate 67 collides with this position, and the ball before entering the second winning hole 640 Since the nail that the ball collides with is planted, it depends on each pachinko machine 10 whether the ball tends to flow down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 during a right-handed game. different.

A ball that does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability change or the time saving during the right-handed game flows down the guide route DL1, and unless it enters the general winning hole 63 arranged on the downstream side, The ball is discharged from the game area through the out port 71 and does not benefit the player (it becomes a useless ball).

From here, whether or not the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and whether or not the ball flows down the guide path DL1 are uniquely related. Compared to the case of focusing only on the second prize winning opening 640, the degree of freedom of the attention position is higher when focusing on the guidance route DL1 because the guidance route DL1 extends in the vertical direction. Clear.

Therefore, some players check the frequency of balls flowing down the guidance path DL1, and calculate the frequency of balls entering the second winning hole 640, the frequency of waste balls in right-handed games, and the like. It is expected that they will consider whether to continue the game or not.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a ball flowing down the guide path DL1 and a ball entering the second winning hole 640 and flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1. This makes it seem as if the frequency of entering the second winning hole 640 is high, and encourages the continuation of the game.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 has already entered the second winning hole 640 and has been ejected from the game area. If the ball falls down to a position overlapping with , it is difficult to distinguish it from a ball that can actually enter the specific winning hole 65a, which may interfere with the game.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by causing the ball to flow down to the left and right inside through the first receiving channel 152 above the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching a position overlapping the specific winning opening 65a in a front view. (See Figure 2). As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish between a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a and a ball that has already entered the second winning opening 640 and cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a. .

The first receiving flow path 152 passes from the right side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 7) when viewed from the front, passes near the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front, and reaches the display area. Let the ball flow down to the left and right center position side. That is, since the ball guided to the first receiving channel 152 enters the field of view of the player who pays attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81, the player is paying attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81. , the player who does not pay attention to the right-handed path can be made to recognize whether or not the ball has entered the second winning hole 640 .

As a result, the player can recognize whether or not the ball has entered the second winning hole 640 without moving the field of view while paying attention to the third symbol display device 81 . Therefore, when the eye is averted from the third pattern display device 81 for viewing the second prize winning opening 640, the important display is executed, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the situation where the player misses the display, and the game can be played comfortably. can be provided.

The ball flowing down the second receiving flow channel member 153 flows down diagonally leftward and downward on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view. Since this ball is decelerated by the ridges 154, the staying time of the falling ball can be extended. This makes it easier to increase the number of game balls visually recognized in the game area when viewed from the front.

Further, by securing a long lateral width of the flow-down path of the ball, the line of sight directed to the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and the flow-down path of the second receiving flow path member 153 are likely to intersect. This makes it easier for the ball flowing down the inside of the second receiving channel member 153 to come into the player's field of vision.

92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effecting means 160 and the decorating means 170, and FIGS. 94 and 95 are exploded views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effecting means 160 and the decorating means 170. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 92 to 95 , the light guide plate rendering means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 and the center frame 86 from the back side, and is configured to be able to contact the front side and top side of the light guide plate 161 . An upper supporting member 162 made of an impermeable resin material for positioning the light guide plate 161, and a center frame 86 made of a light transmissive resin material to press the lower side of the light guide plate 161 from the rear side. a lower support member 163 that can be fastened and fixed; a spherical flow path forming member 164 that is fastened and fixed to the lower support member 163 and is made of a light-transmitting resin material to form a spherical flow path; and a plurality of left and right side support members 165 which are configured to be capable of being fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in such a manner as to press the left and right side portions of the light guide plate 161 from the rear side, and a plurality of left and right side support members 165 which are formed in a left and right long shape to support the upper side. A horizontal substrate unit 166 that is fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a state of extending to the front side of the center frame 86 through the upper side of the member 162, and a horizontal substrate unit 166 that is formed in a vertically elongated shape and extends from the front side of the center frame 86 to the center frame 86. and a vertical substrate unit 167 arranged along the left inner wall and fastened and fixed.

The decoration means 170 includes a first decoration member 171 made of a light-transmitting resin material and arranged in the left-right central position near the upper part of the center frame 86, and a left side of the first decoration member 171 made of a light-transmitting resin material. a second decorative member 174 arranged on the front side of the left frame portion of the center frame 86; and a third decorative member 177 arranged.

The first decorative member 171 includes a horizontally long rectangular central decorative member 172 that can be fastened and fixed to its central portion, a margin member 173 that is composed of a separate member as a margin portion such as a title representing the pachinko machine 10, Prepare.

As shown in FIG. E4, the first decorative member 171 has a laterally elongated groove portion 171a recessed on the back side. The horizontally elongated groove portion 171a is formed with a groove width that allows the electrical decoration substrate of the horizontal substrate unit 166 of the light guide plate rendering means 160 to be arranged.

The first decorative member 171 is arranged at a position slightly overlapping with the lower side of the opening 86a formed in the upper portion of the center frame 86 in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is configured to be visible through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

Thus, in this embodiment, the front position of the third pattern display device 81 is closed by the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86, while the front position of the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is open. It is opened by the portion 86a. Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the light emission effect by the effect member 700 in the effect standby state without being shielded by the light guide plate 161 .

The relationship between the oblong groove portion 171a and the horizontal substrate unit 166 will be described with reference to FIG. 96 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 taken along line XCVI--XCVI in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 96, the vicinity of the oblong groove portion 171a is illustrated as an enlarged view separately. 92 to 95 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG.

In this embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged on the front and back sides of the electrical board of the horizontal board unit 166, and light is emitted vertically along arrows D1a and D1b. 1 The light reaching the reflective shape portion 171b formed in a horizontally long wedge shape on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally long groove portion 171a on the back side of the decorative member 171 can be conspicuously recognized.

As a result, even when the arrangement of the light emitting means is concentrated on the horizontal board unit 166, the form of the light emitting effect (light emitting range or light emitting shape) visually recognized by the player depends on the forming range or forming shape of the reflective shape portion 171b. can be visually recognized differently.

In this embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the upper surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166, and light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the lower surface. They are arranged in two horizontal rows, one row corresponding to the top and bottom and another row parallel to the row and formed on the back side. Among the rows in which the LEDs as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the upper row and the lower front row are arranged inside the oblong groove 171a, and the lower rear row is arranged outside the oblong groove 171a.

With this configuration, the LEDs arranged in the row on the upper surface and the front row on the lower surface can irradiate light onto the reflective shape portion 171b, and the LEDs arranged in the rear row on the lower surface can irradiate light to another light-emitting target. Light can be applied.

In this embodiment, the light emitting means 166b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row on the bottom surface is arranged above the light guide plate 161, and the emitted LED light is incident from the edge of the light guide plate 161. FIG. That is, the light emitting means 166b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row on the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 are used to illuminate the light guide plate 161. FIG.

The upper support member 162 is arranged between the front and rear two rows of the LEDs arranged on the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 . Thereby, the light emitted from the LEDs in the front and rear two rows can be separated by the upper support member 162 .

The horizontal substrate unit 166 is arranged right above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in front view. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area when viewed from the front. As a result, it is possible to clearly separate the light that irradiates the display area side and the light that irradiates the game area side without irradiating the display area side.

The central decorative member 172 is arranged in the same front and rear positions as the reflective shape portion 171b, and has flat front and rear surfaces. As a result, even when light is emitted from the horizontal board unit 166, it is possible to avoid intense reflection of the light and maintain visibility.

In this embodiment, a pattern such as a star shape is drawn on the front surface of the central decorative member 172, and the number of star shapes indicates the type of performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the type of spec, so-called another spec). It is configured so that By constructing the central decorative member 172 as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, when manufacturing the pachinko machine 10 with different types of performance, the pachinko machine 10 can be manufactured by replacing only the central decorative member 172.例文帳に追加Can be configured.

The blank member 173 is configured as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, and the front and rear surfaces of the blank member 173 have a shape different from the shape formed on the reflective shape portion 171b (in this embodiment, striped grooves). ) is formed, the appearance of the reflected light is different from that of the reflective shape portion 171b.

97 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member 171 in the range XCVII of FIG. 2. FIG. In the present embodiment, when light is emitted in the vertical direction of the horizontal substrate unit 166 along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light that reaches the reflective shape portion 171b travels toward the front side by reflection and refraction, and shines. While the light that reaches the blank member 173 is not mainly reflected, it is configured so that most of the light is transmitted and proceeds as it is, so it is visually recognized slightly darker.

As a result, the shape of the blank member 173 can be visually recognized as a shadow while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontal board unit 166 travels in the vertical direction. It can be visually recognized as if In other words, it is possible to visually recognize as if LEDs are arranged on the back side and a light emission effect is performed.

The second decorative member 174 includes a shielding member 175 which is a thin plate member (sheet-shaped member) with low permeability and is colored in an arbitrary manner, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back side of the second decorative member 174. . As a result, the rear side of the second decorative member 174 can be configured to be difficult to see.

As a result, the game area formed on the front side of the base plate 60 (especially the left side) and the formation area of the light guide plate 161 in front view (including the area overlapping the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the front and rear). can be clearly separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the balls flowing down the game area from being lowered by the light accompanying the performance of the light guide plate 161 and the light emitted from the third pattern display device 81 .

The third decorative member 177 has a plurality of hexagonal decorative patterns three-dimensionally formed on the front side, and a plurality of hexagonal-shaped portions displaced back and forth on the back side thereof. It has a plurality of three-dimensional decoration members 178 which are formed in a uniform manner.

Similarly to the third decorative member 177, the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged in the space arranged between the portion of the center frame 86 where the light guide plate 161 is arranged and the guide path DL1. be.

As a result, it is possible to perform a stereoscopically visible light effect instead of a two-dimensionally visible light effect between the portion where the light guide plate 161 is arranged and the guide route DL1. That is, when viewed from the front, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect with depth.

For example, when the three-dimensional decoration member 178 is irradiated with light from the back side, depending on which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front view is irradiated with the light, which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front-rear direction is It changes whether it becomes brighter. Therefore, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the front side is illuminated and the back side is illuminated from the player's point of view.

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81, the front side light emitting means 852a of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the like (see FIG. 81) are assumed as means for irradiating the three-dimensional decoration member 178 with light from the back side. , the light emission position can be changed. Therefore, compared with the case where light is emitted toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 from light emitting means such as LEDs that are fixedly arranged, it is possible to easily increase the types of light effects.

Further, for example, when the three-dimensional decoration member 178 is irradiated with light from the left-right direction or the top-bottom direction, the position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front-rear direction depends on the position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front view where the light is irradiated. which position is brighter changes. Therefore, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the front side is illuminated and the back side is illuminated from the player's point of view.

In this embodiment, the first light irradiation device 330 of the firing effect unit 300 is assumed as means for irradiating the three-dimensional decorative member 178 with light from the left and right directions (see FIG. 27). Due to its arrangement, the first light irradiation device 330 functions to block at least part of the light directed toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 among the light irradiated from the display area of the third pattern display device 81 .

As a result, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the form of light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 depends on the display effect form of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, when the color of the light emitted from the third pattern display device 81 is blue, even if the color of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 is red, the game is played through the three-dimensional decoration member 178. It is possible to easily avoid the color of the light visually recognized by a person becoming purple (a color in which blue light and red light are mixed). That is, the light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decoration member 178 can be easily visually recognized independently of the display of the third pattern display device 81 .

A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the ball flowing down the ball flow unit 150 is configured to be visible from the front, and the entire ball is configured to flow down the same route. However, the ball flow unit of the second embodiment At 2150, the falling sphere is configured to flow down any of a plurality of paths. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. In FIG. 98, an example of how the granular member 320 looks just after firing is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 98, the spherical flow downward unit 2150 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 toward the left, as a difference from the spherical flow downward unit 150 described in the first embodiment. A third receiving channel 2155 formed in a size that allows the ball to flow down is provided.

The third receiving channel 2155 is formed on the upstream side and has a lower inclination angle than the first receiving channel 152, and the lower end (left end) of the inclined portion 2155a is set on the left side of the first winning port 64 when viewed from the front. , and a discharge portion 2155b extending vertically downward in front view from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155a.

The flow speed of the balls flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is lower than the flow speed of the balls in the first receiving channel 152 due to the shallowness of the inclination angle. The ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is configured to be visible to the player, and the inclined portion 2155a is arranged near the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be kept in the player's field of vision for a long period of time.

As a result, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can enter the field of view of the player playing the game while viewing the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 12(a)) through the light guide plate 161. . In other words, it is possible to increase the attention to the ball flowing down the slope 2155a without causing discomfort.

Guidance of the ball to the inclined portion 2155a will be described. In this embodiment, the ball entering the second winning port 640 similarly flows down to the lower end of the first receiving channel 152, and at the lower end of the first receiving channel 152, along the second receiving channel member 153. The switching means switches between flowing down in the first direction D<b>21 and flowing down in the second direction D<b>22 along the third receiving channel 2155 .

In this embodiment, the flow resistance of the ball flowing through the second receiving channel member 153 is increased by the protrusion 154 (see FIG. 90) formed on the second receiving channel member 153 . Therefore, when the next ball reaches the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 while the ball is flowing down the second receiving channel member 153, the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155. .

Such a situation is likely to occur, for example, when a plurality of balls enter the second winning hole 640 in succession in a short period of time. Therefore, by visually recognizing the state of the balls flowing down the third receiving channel 2155, the player can understand that a plurality of balls have entered the second winning hole 640 in a row.

In addition, the aspect of a switching means is not limited at all. For example, the ball flow-down unit 2150 is provided with an opening/closing plate configured to be switchable between a state in which the ball is allowed to flow down in the first direction D21 and a state in which it is restricted using a driving means such as a solenoid. Alternatively, an electromagnet that can generate a magnetic force is disposed at the branch point between the first direction D21 and the second direction D22, and the generated magnetic force is used as a pulling force or a repulsive force to move the ball downward. The route may be switched.

According to these methods, it is possible not only to switch the flow-down route of the ball to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but also to stop the ball or reverse the ball. Unlike the ball that flows down the game area, even if the flow path of the ball that enters the second winning hole 640 is changed, it does not affect the subsequent game results. It is possible to switch the flow path of

As described above, when switching the flow path of a ball in a device using electricity, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can control whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22. can. Therefore, the result of the lottery by the ball entering the second winning hole 640 can be associated with the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22.

For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 in 60% of cases where the lottery by the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 is a jackpot, the third receiving channel It is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the big win, seeing the ball flowing down the 2155. - 特許庁

In this case, the player's line of sight is most likely to be gathered at the lower end position of the first receiving channel 152, which is the guide path to the third receiving channel 2155, and as a result, the discharge ball (game It can improve attention to the balls that have already been ejected from the area).

As described above, the ball flowing down the third receiving flow path 2155 is expected value of the lottery jackpot due to the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 when the frequency of the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 is high. is high.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting the passage of the ball is arranged in the middle of the discharge portion 2155b, and when the passage of the ball is determined, the granular member 320 is controlled to be shot. .

As described above, in order to shoot the granular member 320, it is necessary to change the state of the injection device 400 in advance from the presentation standby state (see FIG. 38) to the shooting standby state (FIG. 40). time consuming. On the other hand, at the timing when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, it is decided whether or not to execute the firing of the granular member 320, and it takes a certain amount of time for the ball to reach the ejection part 2155b. The injection device 400 is controlled to change its state by using this flow time.

As a result, it is possible to control the particulate member 320 to shoot at the same time when the detection sensor SC21 determines that the ball has passed. By controlling in this way, the granular member 320 is fired after a certain time delay expected for the ball to flow down the third receiving channel 2155 after entering the second winning hole 640. It is possible to make it easier to match the falling timing of the ball and the firing timing of the granular member 320, as compared with the case of controlling to .

For example, there is a case where the oil attached to the balls adheres to the first receiving channel 152, causing the falling speed of the balls to decrease. If controlled in this way, the granular member 320 will be launched before the ball reaches the third receiving flow path 2155, and there is a possibility that the rendering effect will be reduced.

On the other hand, at the same time when the passage of the ball is determined by the detection sensor SC21, by controlling the granular member 320 to be shot, the player can see that the ball reaches the third receiving channel 2155. After concentrating the attention on the third receiving flow path 2155, the granular member 320 is fired to execute a powerful effect that spreads over the area of the light guide plate 161, thereby improving the effect of a series of effects. can.

The arrangement of the third receiving channel 2155 through which the ball flows down and the arrangement of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 12(a)) visually recognized through the light guide plate 161 are partially different when viewed from the front. , the above-described series of effects can be visually recognized without requiring the player to change his line of sight.

It should be noted that control may also be combined so as not to shoot the granular member 320 when the ball passes through the detection sensor SC21. For example, if a big win occurs when the granular member 320 is not fired, control may be performed to increase the possibility of the variable probability big win described above.

In this case, since it is possible to increase the number of types of effects after the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155, at the stage when the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155 It is possible to avoid that the attention of the

In addition, when the granular member 320 is not fired, it is possible to increase attention to the subsequent display effects on the third pattern display device 81 .

A detection sensor having a function similar to that of the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged at another location. For example, it may be placed at a location through which a ball entering the specific winning hole 65a can pass. In this case, an effect of shooting the granular member 320 can be executed at the timing when the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged in a specific area where the profit given to the player becomes more advantageous as the game ball passes through.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. In the first embodiment, the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is configured to be displaced in the radial direction so as to be symmetrical and discrete, but the effect member 3700 of the third embodiment , is configured to be able to form a section that is not left-right symmetrical in the expansion/reduction displacement in the radial direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 99 is a front view of the scaling unit 3600 in the third embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment of the scaling unit 3600 is only in the rendering member 3700, and the main body member 601, the front cover member 610, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the transmission gear 650 have the same configuration. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 99 illustrates a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 3700 is arranged in the middle position (intermediate position) of the radial enlargement/reduction displacement. As shown in FIG. 99, this embodiment employs five shielding design members 760, which is the same as in the first embodiment. While the sheets are displaced radially to a similar length, the top one and the top right sheet are still in a collective arrangement (not radially displaced). A configuration for realizing this displacement will be described.

100 is a front view of rotating plate 3730. FIG. Rotating plate 3730 has the same configuration as rotating plate 730 described in the first embodiment, except that some guide holes 733 are changed to separate guide holes 3733 .

As shown in FIG. 100, the rotary plate 730 includes separate guide holes 3733 instead of the upper and upper right guide holes 733 in front view. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the above-described small-diameter arc portion 733a, large-diameter arc portion 733b, and an adjustment connecting portion 3733c that connects the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b.

The adjustment connection portion 3733c extends along the same arc shape from the connection portion with the large-diameter arc portion 733b to near the intermediate position, and on the opposite side of the large-diameter arc portion 733b (the guide hole 733 or (at a position close to the separate guide hole 3733) is formed so as to abruptly approach the small-diameter arc portion 733a side.

That is, in the displacement mode in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced from the collective arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the telescopic displacement member 740 guided by the connecting portion 733c expands and displaces in the radial direction from an early stage, while the adjusting connecting portion 3733c is displaced. The expanding and contracting displacement member 740 guided in the radial direction does not expand while being guided in the same arc shape as the large-diameter arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be shifted. The effect caused by the misalignment of the shielding design member 760 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 99, by asymmetrically disposing the shielding design member 760, the center of gravity of the effect member 3700 can be shifted from the center in the horizontal direction or the center in the vertical direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design member 760 arranged at the upper right position is still in the collective arrangement state, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 is shifted to the lower left position by that amount.

As a result, a load in the direction of correcting the deviation of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is applied to the effect member 3700 by its own weight. Due to this load, it is possible to cause the attitude of the effect member 3700 to change in the rotational direction about the longitudinal axis. can be displaced in a combination of directions.

As a result, a direction (that is, a , rotational direction).

In this embodiment, the connecting portion 733c and the adjusting connecting portion 3733c are different, and the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733 have the same shape. The arrangement of the portion 733b is the same between the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733. FIG.

Therefore, after the position of the center of gravity G31 is displaced in the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 is placed in a collective arrangement state or arranged at the end position of radial expansion displacement. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the horizontal center position and the vertical center position of the effect member 3700 again. As a result, the position of the center of gravity G31 is maintained in a displaced position, and the occurrence of problems can be prevented.

An example of effect using the return of the center of gravity G31 will be described. In the first embodiment, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 700 are not performed at the same time, but are performed separately. .

In the present embodiment, a contrivance is adopted to avoid collisions with other structures, and the vertical displacement and radial displacement of the effect member 3700 are controlled so as to be executable at the same time. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 can be expanded in the radial direction while the effect member 3700 is downwardly displaced.

In this case, in addition to the downward displacement of the effect member 3700 and the expansion displacement of the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction, the return of the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 occurs. It is possible to cause a posture change in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation assumed from the state (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

In this way, since rotational displacement in the forward and reverse directions can be added to the radial expansion displacement of the effect member 3700, a simple configuration specialized for expanding and contracting the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction is provided. while adopting, as a result, it is possible to make a complicated motion with a displacement in the rotational direction. As a result, the effect of the effect produced by the effect member 3700 can be improved.

A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the drive motor M1 is driven in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state, and the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced. The shape of the grooved portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 101 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the projection of the contact member 430 associated with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time in the placement of the installation portion 432 and the placement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470;

Note that FIG. 101 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of the respective components, but shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Also, the change in the arrangement of the direct-acting member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 . Therefore, since the downward displacement of the direct-acting member 410 and the collision member 420 is started in a state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreating side, the player can see without the lid member 480 blocking his line of sight. It is possible to visually recognize the displacement of the granular member accompanying the downward displacement of the collision member 420 (see FIGS. 12(a) and 38).

In this situation, by reciprocating the direct-acting member 410 between an angle of 66 degrees and an angle of 125 degrees shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, since the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, when the driving of the drive motor M1 is canceled, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are displaced upward by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

Therefore, by intermittently energizing the drive motor MT1, the linear motion member 410 can be reciprocated. This eliminates the need to switch the driving direction of the drive motor MT1, thereby facilitating control.

In addition, in such a manner that the granular member 320 is vibrated (micro-displaced) and visually recognized by the player, the load (fatigue) received by the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced compared to the case where the lid member 480 is displaced together. can be done.

Note that the manner in which the collision member 420 is displaced in order to vibrate (micro-displace) the granular member 320 is not limited to this. For example, vibration may be transmitted from another vibration device to the collision member 420 to cause the collision member 420 to vibrate. In this case, the other vibrating device is preferably arranged below the collision member 420 in the direction of displacement. As a result, it is possible to prevent other vibration devices from receiving a load when the collision member 420 is displaced by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the drive motor M1 is driven in the forward rotation direction from the waiting state for the effect, so that the direct-acting member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are displaced at the same time. The shape of the grooved portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and after the displacement of the direct-acting member 410 is completed, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 starts. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the projection of the contact member 430 associated with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time in the placement of the installation portion 432 and the placement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470;

Note that FIG. 102 does not describe the relative relationship between the variation widths of the layout changes of the respective components, but shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the layout changes occur. Also, the change in the arrangement of the direct-acting member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after firing the granular member 320, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed before the granular member 320 reaches the impact member 420 (see near the angle of 290 degrees).

Therefore, at least part of the granular member 320 can be put on the upper side of the lid member 480 and retained. Although it is conceivable that the particulate member 320 collides with the lid member 480 and hinders the rotation of the lid member 480, in the present embodiment, the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed toward the rotating shaft. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation of the lid member 480 from being hindered.

If the drive motor MT1 continues to rotate in the normal direction while the granular member 320 remains on the lid member 480, the transmission arm member 470 is displaced toward the retracted side (the smaller diameter side in FIG. 102), causing the granular member 320 to collide. It falls on member 420 .

On the other hand, at this timing, the contact between the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 is released, so that the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 can be prevented from being transmitted to the linear motion member 410. .

Further, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction from the firing standby state, if it is set to a high speed, the rising speed of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be increased, and the granular member 320 can be fired.

In this case, since the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entrance side at the time of firing, the firing of the granular member 320 is inhibited at the left-right central portion where the projecting portion 482 is arranged, and the firing in the left-right direction is prevented. It can be made visible to become the owner.

That is, the direction in which the granular member 320 is ejected can be changed between the forward rotation of the drive motor MT1 and the reverse rotation of the ejection mode. As a result, variations can be provided in the shooting direction of the granular member 320, and the performance effect can be improved.

A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 have flat substrates and irradiate light in the front-back direction and the left-right direction has been described. It has an electrical board on which the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are bent. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the launching unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment along the line corresponding to line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the shooting unit 6300 are illustrated, and the illustration of the operation unit 500 is omitted. Also, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are schematically illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 103, the first light irradiating device 6330 has a front end close to the front end of the electrical board 332 and a back end of the electrical board 332 . It has a second electrical decoration board 6334 that is tilted away from 332 .

The second electrical board 6334 has a light emitting means such as an LED arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the front side surface. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light to the partitioning member 310, and can improve the presentation effect of lighting the granular members 320 scattering in the internal space IE1 of the partitioning member 310. FIG.

In addition to the electrical board 342, the second light irradiation device 6340 is inclined in such a manner that the back side end is close to the back side end of the electrical board 342 and the front side end is away from the electrical board 342. A second electrical board 6344 is provided.

The second decorative board 6344 has a light emitting means such as an LED arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the rear side surface. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light to the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, the displacement/rotation unit 800, and the like arranged on the back side of the emission unit 6300, thereby improving the effect of the light emission effect.

It should be noted that the arrangement of the electrical board is not limited to this. For example, only the second electrical boards 6334 and 6344 may be employed and the electrical boards 332 and 342 may be omitted, or other combinations may be employed. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged on the side where the light emitting means is not arranged in the second electrical board 6334, 6344, or the light may be irradiated from both sides.

In addition, for the purpose of obliquely irradiating light, a device in which the attitude of the light emitting means can be changed may be constructed without adopting the method of increasing the number of decorative boards. Also, light emitting means may be arranged at intersections of the electrical boards 332, 342 and the second electrical boards 6334, 6344 so as to emit light.

A board box A100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 120. FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, a schematic configuration of the board box A100 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

104 is a rear view of the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the board box A100. 107(a) is a front view of the board box A100, and FIG. 107(b) is a side view of the board box A100.

Note that arrows F, B, arrows L, R, and arrows U, D in FIGS. 105 to 107 respectively indicate the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction of the board box A100. It should be noted that the same applies to each of the following figures, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Also, the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment except for the board box A100. Therefore, other descriptions are omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, the board box A100 includes a box cover A200, a box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and the box cover A200 and the box base A300 unopenably connected (caulked structure). and a sub-cover A500 disposed at the end opposite to the sealing unit A400 of the box cover A200 and the box base A300 connected by the sealing unit A400, and a main control device A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

A rotating shaft A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400. The rotation axis A410 is a shaft for rotatably supporting the board box A100 on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and extends in the lateral direction (arrows U, D direction) and orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the board box A100 (box cover A200).

Further, the rotation axis A410 is positioned on one side in the longitudinal direction of the board box A100 (box cover A200) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the arrow B) (on the side opposite to the first connection wall A220 across the coating A270, which will be described later). R direction side). Note that the rotation axis A410 may be arranged on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow L direction side) opposite to the one longitudinal direction side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

A switch device A120 and a key device A130 are arranged (mounted) in the main controller A110. The main controller A110 is configured by further disposing (mounting) a switch device A120 and a key device A130 to the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main controller A110 and the main controller 110 in the first embodiment have the same configuration except for the presence or absence of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, other descriptions are omitted.

The switch device A120 is a momentary push button that is operated (turned on) by pushing the operation part A122 from the initial position and turned off by releasing the push (the operation part A122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and used for input to main controller A110. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 correspond to some of the various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main controller A110 (main controller 110).

The switch device A120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (change in pushing force) when the operating portion A122 is pushed to the operating position (on position). The operator can detect completion of input to device A110. Therefore, it is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where the operation unit A122 cannot be visually recognized.

The key device A130 is configured such that the key A140 can be inserted and removed at the initial position (hereinafter referred to as the "off position"), and the inserted key A140 is rotated (right in this embodiment) to a predetermined position (hereinafter referred to as the "on position"). A key-operated selector switch (which is referred to as a "position") is operated (turned on) and is turned off by turning the key A140 (counterclockwise in this embodiment) to the off position (mode switch).

In addition, in this embodiment, the phase difference between the OFF position and the ON position is set to approximately 90 degrees. Further, the key device A130 allows the key A140 to be inserted and removed in the off position, while the key device A130 disables the removal of the key A140 in the on position.

Also, the function of the switch device A120 can be switched according to the ON/OFF state of the key device A130. For example, in this embodiment, when the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) for initializing the main control device A110 (executing RAM erasure). When the A130 is turned on, the switch device A120 functions as a setting change switch for changing the value of the winning probability in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "setting change"), as will be described later. .

Here, as described above, since the substrate box A100 (the box cover A200 and the box base A300) is unopenably connected, in order to operate the main control device A110 (for example, the switch device A120 and the key device A130), , it is necessary to open the board box A100, which is troublesome.

On the other hand, according to the substrate box A100 of this embodiment, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through these openings A250 and A260. That is, it is unnecessary to open the board box A100, and the labor can be reduced. Details will be described later.

Legs A121 and A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are provided on the rear side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the push direction side of the operation part A122, the insertion direction side of the key A140, and the arrow B direction side). The protruding legs A121 and A131 are inserted from the front side into holes opening in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the portions protruding to the rear side are soldered to form the switch device A120 and the key device. A130 is arranged on the front side of main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

In this case, an external force applied to the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (for example, a force that displaces the operation unit A122 or the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (insertion direction), a plane containing the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R When a force in a parallel direction is applied and tilted with respect to the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119), the legs of one side (the side lifted from the printed circuit board A119 by tilting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 While a tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, a compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed against the printed circuit board A119 due to tilting). As a result, the legs A121 and A131 may break or bend, the legs A121 and A131 may come out of the holes, and the solder may peel off, resulting in disconnection or poor contact. On the other hand, the board box A100 adopts means for solving such problems. Details will be described later.

The main controller 100 is provided with a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays (not shown), and such 7-segment displays are mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Since the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, the operator can visually recognize the display of the 7-segment display through the box cover A200.

Here, a method of changing settings using the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be described.

First, in a state where the pachinko machine A10 is powered off, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed in the ON position, and then the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed to the operating position, and the pachinko machine A10 is operated. power on. As a result, the setting change mode is activated, and the setting is changed each time the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed.

In the present embodiment, six values from the first to the sixth are specified as set values, and these values are circulated (for example, by pressing the operation unit A122, the set value is changed from the first value to the first value). When the operation unit A122 is pressed from the state where the sixth value is set, the set value advances to the first value).

The set value is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and when the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed (when the set value is changed), the third pattern display device is displayed. The setting value displayed at 81 is also changed. In this embodiment, the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display.

In addition, the information regarding the setting change displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the setting value, and may include other information. Other information includes, for example, the current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), previous set values, and the like. In this way, by using the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to secure (larger) the amount of information that can be displayed as compared with, for example, the case of using a 7-segment display. As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the operation state, and it is possible to improve the operability and suppress operation errors. Further, by also using a device (third symbol display device 81) for displaying information about games, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Moreover, the display of the setting value may be displayed only on one of the third pattern display device 81 and the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, neither the third pattern display device 81 nor the 7-segment display may be displayed.

After changing the desired set value, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed at the OFF position. As a result, the setting change mode is terminated (set values are fixed). In this case, the off-edge of the key device A 130 is detected, the detection triggers the execution of the power recovery process, and the normal mode is started with the set (changed) set value.

After changing the desired set value, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off without placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position (that is, while it is placed in the ON position). When the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on while the key A140 of the key device A130 is placed at the OFF position, the normal mode is started with the set (changed) set values.

Also, in the setting change mode, RAM erasure is executed. Such RAM erasure is confirmed by placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position. Examples of the timing for executing the RAM erasing include the timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed since that timing, and the timing when the key A140 is placed at the OFF position. That is, the timing for executing RAM erasure can be set as appropriate.

Also, during the setting change mode (that is, in a state in which the setting value can be changed by pressing the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is not placed at the OFF position ( In other words, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off while the key device A10 remains in the ON position, the key A140 is removed from the key device A130, or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 When the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on while the pachinko machine A10 is arranged in the off position, the normal mode is not started, an error state occurs, and an error display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Simultaneously with the third pattern display device 81 or instead of this, an error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

Next, to confirm the setting values set in the setting change mode, first turn off the power of the pachinko machine A10, place the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the ON position, and then turn on the power of the pachinko machine A10. to turn on. Thereby, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting value is activated, and the setting value set at that time is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

In addition, the display of the setting value in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed only on one of the third pattern display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, neither the third pattern display device 81 nor the 7-segment display may be displayed.

In this setting confirmation mode, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed at the OFF position. This terminates the setting confirmation mode. Also, the off-edge of the key device A 130 is detected, and the power recovery process is executed with the detection as a trigger, and the normal mode is started with the set value set at that time.

In the setting confirmation mode, turning off the power of the pachinko machine A10, placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position, and then turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 also Normal mode is activated with the set values.

In this embodiment, when the change of the setting value in the setting change mode is completed (confirmed), the 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined manner. As a predetermined mode, for example, a mode in which a predetermined display (for example, "7") blinks at regular time intervals is exemplified.

In addition, four 7-segment displays are arranged side by side to enable display of four digits, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (two) (for example, "01" in setting change mode). However, in the setting confirmation mode, "02" is displayed respectively), and the setting value is displayed by the latter two digits (two pieces) (for example, the first value is "01", the second value is " 02”, . . . , and the sixth value is displayed as “06”).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114, each part (box cover A200, box base A300, and main controller A110) constituting the board box A100 will be described in order. First, the box cover A200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG.

108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A200, and FIG. 110(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 110(b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 includes a front wall portion A201 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and four sides of the front wall portion A201 extending toward the rear side (in the direction of arrow B). The wall portions (upper wall portion A202, lower wall portion A203, left wall portion A204 and right wall portion A205 connecting the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203) which are erected and formed in a plate shape are mainly used. In preparation for this, these wall portions A201 to A205 form a box shape with an open back side. The box cover A200 is made of a light-transmissive resin material and molded using a resin molding die.

A two-stage step is formed on the upright end surfaces (surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, the left wall portion A204, and the right wall portion A205. The step has a first surface (first step) formed on the inner space side of the board box A100 (box cover A200), and a second surface on the outer side of the first surface (opposite side to the inner space). A face (first step) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the standing height from the front wall portion A201 is small), and is a surface on which the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is placed (hereinafter "seat surface A206"). ) is formed as

The seat surface A206 is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape in front view in which surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are continuous, and is formed as a surface parallel to the front wall portion A201. Four corner portions of the seat surface A206 (portions where the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are connected) are recessed with fastening holes A206a having internal threads threaded on the inner circumference. be done.

Therefore, main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) has the outer edge side of its front surface in contact with seat surface A206, and screw ASC (Fig. 117(b) and FIG. 118(b)) is screwed into the fastening hole A206a, so that it is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206) in a posture parallel to the front wall A201, and attached to the board box A100. be housed.

A plurality of engaging pieces A207 are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203. The engaging piece A207 has a base portion erected from the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B), and extends in one direction (in the direction of arrow R) from the erected tip of the base portion. It is formed in a substantially L-shaped bent shape from the extended portion, and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300, as will be described later.

A part of the front wall portion A201 is recessed toward the rear side (in the direction of arrow B). The recessed portion includes a plate-shaped operation wall portion A210 located backward (toward the main controller 110 side) from the front wall portion A201, and each side of the operation wall portion A210 is formed by the front wall portion. The front wall portion A201 is formed by the plate-like wall portions (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connected to A201.

That is, the outer surface on the front side of the board box A100 (surface in the direction of the arrow F) is positioned closer to the main controller A110 than the first area formed by the front wall portion A201 and the first area. and a second region formed by the wall portion A210.

The operation wall portion A210 is a portion that forms the operation surface of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and has a substantially oblong rectangular shape in front view (the length in the directions of arrows L and R is longer than the length in the directions of arrows U and D). It is formed in a rectangular shape with an elongated dimension) and arranged in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall portion A201.

Note that the operation wall portion A210 is arranged on one side (rotational axis A410 side of the sealing unit A400) of the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A200 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B).

The first connection wall portion A220 is a wall portion that connects one side of the operation wall portion A210 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) to the front wall portion A201. It is formed to incline (downward) in a direction approaching the main controller A110 as it goes. Therefore, on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall portion A220, a space can be formed that continues to the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. As a space including the space on the front side of the operation wall A210, the space as a whole (space that can be used when operating the key device A130) can be expanded.

In addition, in this embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210 is set to approximately 45 degrees. As a result, it is possible to achieve both expansion of the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 and securing of space inside the board box A100.

The second connection wall portion A230 extends along one side of the operation wall portion A210 in the short direction (arrow U direction side), and the third connection wall portion A240 extends along the other longitudinal direction side of the operation wall portion A210 (arrow R direction side). direction side) are connected to the front wall A201, and are arranged in a posture substantially perpendicular to the front wall A201 and the operation wall A210.

The operation wall portion A210 has an opening A250 for projecting the operation portion A122 to the outside of the board box A100, an opening A260 for allowing the key A140 to be inserted into and removed from the key device A130, and the main controller A110 ( Openings AOP1 to AOP8 are formed to enable connection to connectors (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119).

The opening A250 has a front view shape corresponding to the outer shape of the operation portion A122 (in this embodiment, a substantially square shape when viewed from the front), and is substantially square in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210. placed in the center. Around the opening A250, a guide wall A251 is erected from the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

The guide wall A251 guides the displacement of the operation part A122 in the pushing direction (direction of arrow B) and also displaces it in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (direction parallel to the plane containing arrows U, D and arrows L, R). It is a portion for restricting (tilting), and is formed in a substantially square frame shape surrounding the opening A250 when viewed from the front, and the inner peripheral surface thereof is formed to smoothly connect to the inner peripheral surface of the opening A250.

In this embodiment, the height of the guide wall A251 standing from the operation wall A210 is higher than the tip of the operation part A122 pushed to the operation position (turned on position) from the operation wall A210. The dimension is set so that the tip is at a low position (the tip of the operation portion A122 protrudes outward (in the direction of the arrow F) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide wall A251 from interfering with the push-in operation of the operation portion A122, thereby improving the operability of the operation portion A122.

However, the standing height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is higher than the tip of the operation part A122 pushed to the operation position (turned on position). The dimension may be set to a position (the tip of the operation portion A122 is retracted inward (arrow B direction side) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating portion A122 from being unintentionally pushed (turned on) to the operating position due to careless operation by the operator or contact (interference) with another member.

In addition, the tip of the operation part A122 pushed in to the operating position (turned-on position) of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is substantially the erection tip from the operation wall A210. The dimensions may be set at the same height position. When the operating portion A122 is pushed in, the fingers are brought into contact with the standing tip of the guide wall A251, so that the operator can recognize that the operating portion A122 has been pushed up to the operating position based on such abutment. . This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where the operation unit A122 cannot be visually recognized.

A covering portion A270 protrudes from the operation wall portion A210 from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface in the direction of the arrow F). The covering portion A270 is a portion that covers a portion of the front end side (arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 (see FIG. 112(a)), and is a peripheral wall that is erected from the operation wall portion A210 and formed in a cylindrical shape. A portion A271 and a plate-like end wall portion A272 that closes (forms an end face) the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271, and a part of the tip side of the key device A130 is accommodated in the inner space thereof. be.

The peripheral wall portion A271 includes a base portion A271a formed in a cylindrical shape having a substantially circular cross section, and a pair of projections projecting radially outward from two opposing locations (positions with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees) on the base portion A271a. A part A271b. The peripheral wall portion A271 (base portion A271a and projection portion A271b) is formed to have substantially the same cross-sectional shape as a whole along the axial direction (directions of arrows F and B). Therefore, the operation wall portion A210 has a shape that is substantially the same as the cross-sectional shape of the peripheral wall portion A271 (the base portion A271a and the protrusion A271b) (that is, the shape in which two opposing portions of the circular shape protrude outward in the radial direction). is formed (see FIG. 110(b)).

The opening A260 is formed in the projecting tip surface of the covering portion A270, that is, in the end surface wall portion A272. As a result, the end wall portion A272 is formed in a plate shape extending radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the projecting tip of the peripheral wall portion A271. That is, the end wall portion A272 is formed as a plate (cantilever beam) having a base end fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (opening A260 side) being free.

Here, the opening A260 is provided only in a region corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the OFF position and the ON position (the region necessary to allow the displacement). It is formed. Specifically, the opening A260 includes a first fan-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, and an opening on the other side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of the portion (one side and the opposite side) is formed in a shape that is combined with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

As a result, the end wall portion A272 has an annular portion A272a extending radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the projecting tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 and formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). A square portion A272b extending radially inward from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a and having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B) is formed. The rectangular portion A272b is arranged in a posture tapered radially inward when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), and is formed at two locations with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

Note that the key A140 has different dimensions for the turning radius of the portion on one side of the center of rotation and the radius of rotation of the portion on the other side of the center of rotation. Therefore, the opening A260 has a different size (radius) between the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening.

A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 protrude from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface facing the arrow F direction) of the operation wall A210. These first ridges A211 and second ridges A212 are ridges extending in a stripe shape while maintaining a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270. .

Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the OFF position. One end of the ridge A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the ON position. That is, one end of the first ridge A211 and one end of the second ridge A212 are connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at positions with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display portion is provided at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (on the extension line of the other end). are respectively formed. The display section is a part that shows information on the operation position (rotational position) of the key A140, and "OFF" and "ON" are displayed. That is, the key A140 with its edge toward one end of the first protrusion A211 is placed at the OFF position (see FIG. 115(a)), and the key with its edge toward one end of the second protrusion A212. A140 is placed in the ON position (see FIG. 115(b)).

The opening AOP1 is formed in the operation wall A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed (in parallel) in series (one line) along the edge of the front wall A201.

Standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the rear surface (inner surface, surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The erected wall A280 includes a first erected wall A281, a second erected wall A282, a third erected wall A283, and a fourth erected wall A284. A250 is surrounded (see FIG. 110(b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the switch device A120 is surrounded by the standing wall A280.

The first standing wall A281 is arranged between the opening A250 and the second connection wall A230, and formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the second connection wall A230 and the bottom wall A203. The second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are opposed to each other with the opening A250 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erected wall A281. The fourth erected wall A284 is arranged between the opening A250 and the lower wall portion A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first erected wall A281.

The second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are connected to the first erected wall A281 on one side and to the lower wall portion A203 on the other side. That is, the first erected wall A281 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283. The fourth standing wall A284 is connected to the second standing wall A282 on one side and to the third standing wall A283 on the other side.

The erected wall A290 includes a first erected wall A291, a second erected wall A292, and a third erected wall A293, and the opening A260 is surrounded by these erected walls A291, A292, and A293 (FIG. 110). (b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the key device A130 is surrounded by the standing wall A290.

The first erected wall A291 is arranged between the opening A260 and the second connection wall A230, and formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the second connection wall A230 and the bottom wall A203. The second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293 are opposed to each other with the opening A260 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erected wall A291.

The second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293 are connected to the first erected wall A291 on one side and to the lower wall portion A203 on the other side. That is, the first erected wall A291 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293. The fourth standing wall A284 is connected to the second standing wall A292 on one side and the third standing wall A293 on the other side.

The standing wall A290 is formed in a size surrounding the covering portion A270 (a position outside the covering portion A270) when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). Specifically, when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the outer surface (arc) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is aligned with the inner surface (straight line) of the second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293. The outer surface (circular arc) of the protrusion A271b in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is inscribed in the inner surfaces (straight lines) of the first standing wall A291 and the lower wall portion A203, respectively.

The first erected walls A281 and A291, the second erected walls A282 and A292, and the third erected walls A283 and A293 of the erected walls A280 and A290 are the rear surface (inner surface, arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The standing height from the surface) is the same, and the standing tip surfaces (surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the respective standing walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are the bearing surface A206. placed at the same height as

Therefore, the erected walls A280 and A290 are such that the erected tip surfaces of the second erected walls A282, A292 and the third erected walls A283, A293 are connected to the seat surface A206, and the seat surface A206 and the respective erected walls A281, A293 , A282, A292, A283, and A293 are located on the same plane (form the same plane). As a result, when the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat A206), the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292 and the third standing walls A282 and A292 are fixed. The upright tip surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the walls A283 and A293 are brought into contact with the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

Here, in the erected wall A280, the length dimensions of the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 (the dimensions in the directions of arrows U and D) are the length dimensions of the first erected wall A281 (the dimensions of the arrows L and R-direction dimension). Therefore, as will be described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A120 abuts against the inner surface of the erected wall A280 (the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283), the second erected wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 may be deformed and the tilting of the switch device A120 may not be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the opposing portions of the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are connected by the fourth erected wall A284, the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall Deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, tilting of the switch device A120 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the fourth standing wall A284 is arranged at a position close to the lower wall portion A203, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth standing wall A284 increases. This corresponds to the formation of a part with a large thickness dimension, and due to the difference in shrinkage rate from other parts, molding defects occur in the part with a large thickness dimension and its vicinity. give rise to

On the other hand, the erected height of the fourth erected wall A284 is smaller (lower) than the erected heights of the first erected wall A281, the second erected wall A282, and the third erected wall A283. As a result, while securing the function of suppressing the deformation of the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth erected wall A284 is reduced, and molding defects due to the difference in shrinkage rate are eliminated. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the fourth standing wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall portion A203, the switch device A120 is prevented from tilting in the direction of the arrow D, as will be described later. By bringing the outer surface of the device A120 into contact with the inner surface of the fourth standing wall A284, the tilting thereof can be suppressed within an appropriate range (that is, tilting at a smaller angle than in the case of contacting the lower wall portion A203). .

On the inner surfaces of the first erected walls A281, A291, the second erected walls A282, A292, and the third erected walls A283, A293 of the erected walls A280, A290, the erected distal end side (arrow B direction), tapered surfaces A280a and A290a, which are inclined surfaces that approach the outer surface side, are formed. As a result, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) of each of the erected walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 at the erected distal end side is gradually reduced toward the erected distal end side, and each of the erected walls A281 is reduced accordingly. , A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are reduced in area.

Note that the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. The tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the outer surfaces of the first erected walls A281 and A291, the second erected walls A282 and A292, and the third erected walls A283 and A293 of the erected walls A280 and A290. You can set it.

An erecting wall A208 is erected on the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the front wall portion A201. In addition to the erected walls A280 and A290 described above, an erected wall A209 is erected on the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface facing the arrow B direction) of the operation wall portion A210.

The standing wall A208 is formed in a box-like shape with four sides of plate-shaped bodies connected to each other and the side opposite to the front wall portion A201 is open. 4). The standing wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1, and is formed in a box-like shape with an open side opposite to the operation wall A210. is formed at a position corresponding to Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the arithmetic unit (MPU201) is surrounded by the standing wall A208, and the connector is surrounded by the standing wall A209.

Here, the plurality of erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 surrounding the plurality of objects are arranged such that the height positions of the erected tip surfaces of one or more of the erected walls correspond to the height positions of the remaining erected walls. It is set at a height position different from the height position of the tip surface. In this embodiment, the height position of the upright end face of the upright wall A209 is retreated from the height position of the upright end face of the upright walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, separated from the printed circuit board A119). side). As a result, even if there are dimensional tolerances of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290, mounting tolerances of the printed circuit board A119 to the box cover A200, or dimensional tolerances of the printed circuit board A119 (for example, variations in flatness), , the standing walls A208, A280, and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the printed circuit board A119 compared to the standing wall A209. That is, it is possible to ensure that the erected wall surrounding the object of high importance is in close contact with the printed circuit board A119.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the box base A300 will be described. FIG. 111(a) is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and FIG. 111(b) is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 includes a rear wall portion A301 formed in a plate shape of a substantially horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and four sides of the rear wall portion A301 extending toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). Mainly provided and plate-shaped wall portions (upper wall portion A302, lower wall portion A303, left wall portion A304 and right wall portion A305 connecting the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303), These walls A301 to A305 form a box shape with an open front side. The box base A300 is made of a resin material and molded using a resin molding die.

A plurality of engaged portions A307 are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303. The engaged portion A307 is a portion with which the engaging piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed to protrude downward (arrow D direction side).

To connect the box base A300 and the box cover A200, first, the phase is shifted by the extension length of the extension portion on the side opposite to the extension direction of the extension portion of the engagement piece A207 (arrow L direction side). They face each other at a shifted position, and push the box cover A200 toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the space between the adjacent engaged portions A307. arrow R direction). As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the rear side (the arrow B direction side) of the engaged portion A307, and the two are engaged (displacement of the box cover A200 in the arrow F direction is restricted).

Next, main controller A110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114. FIG. FIG. 112(a) is a front perspective view of main controller A110, FIG. 112(b) is a back perspective view of main controller A110, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the control device A110;

114(a) is a front view of main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 114(b) is a front view of main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114(a). 114(c) is a side view of main controller A110 as seen in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114(a).

112 to 114, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, only the major electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A119 are illustrated, and other illustrations are omitted. .

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the main controller A110 includes a printed circuit board A119, and a switch device A120 and a key device A130 mounted on the printed circuit board A119. The printed circuit board A119 has various electronic components (IC, resistors, capacitors and transistors) mounted on a board made of an insulating resin material, and the circuits (patterns) connecting these electronic components are conductors such as copper foil. , and insertion holes A112 are formed in four corner portions.

The printed circuit board A119 is installed in the circuit board box A100 with the front surface (the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, the surface in the direction of the arrow F) facing the rear surface of the box cover A200 (front wall portion A201). stored in.

In this case, of the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, at least the areas AS1 and AS2 on which the standing walls A280 and A290 of the box cover A200 and the seat surface A206 of the lower wall A203 abut (Fig. 114 (see (a)), no electronic components are mounted or no circuits are formed, and the areas AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. It should be noted that FIG. 114(a) shows only the portion of the area where the seat surface A206 abuts, which is continuous with the erected walls A280 and A290.

The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 that holds the operation part A122 displaceably (pushing operation), and a coil spring ( an urging means (not shown), a contact (not shown) disposed inside the main body A123 and whose contact is switched in accordance with the displacement of the operating portion A122, and a leg A121 electrically connected to the contact. Prepare.

The main body A123 is formed in a substantially cubic shape and includes a base A123a mounted on the front of the printed circuit board A119, and a cylindrical protrusion A123b protruding from the front of the base A123a (surface on the arrow F direction side), The outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is made larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (the inner edge of the guide wall A251). When the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the front surface of the protrusion A123b faces the rear surface of the operation wall portion A210 (surface in the arrow B direction).

In the present embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the bottom surface of the base A123a (the portion that is part of the bottom surface of the base A123a and from which the leg A121 protrudes) abuts the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base A123a (a portion of the bottom surface of the base A123a and from which the leg A121 protrudes) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the base A123a may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A121.

Further, in this embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the rear surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. However, the front surface of the projecting portion A123b and the back surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side) may be in contact with each other.

The legs A121 protrude from the rear surface of the base portion A123a of the main body A123 (the surface facing the arrow B direction, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119), and as described above, are inserted from the front side into the holes opening in the printed circuit board A119. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the switch device A120 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The key device A130 has a cylinder portion A132 formed as a lock that allows the rotation of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b when a suitable key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and the cylinder portion A132 is arranged inside. A main body A133 that holds the main body A133, a support A134 that supports the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the main body A133, and a contact whose contact is switched according to the state of the cylinder part A132 (rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b) (not shown) and a leg A131 electrically connected to the contact.

The main body A133 has a base portion A133a which is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and holds the cylinder portion A132 on the inner peripheral side (inside) thereof, and two positions on the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base portion A133a (positions with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees). ), and an end portion A133c forming an end face on the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the base portion A133a.

In this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the bottom surface of the main body A133 (the portion that is part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and from which the legs A131 protrude) abuts the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a portion of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and from which the leg A131 protrudes) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the main body A133 may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131.

The end surface of the protrusion A133b on the arrow F direction side is formed at a position one step lower (arrow B direction side) from the end surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) formed by the end portion A133c. The end portion A133c is formed with a circular opening in a front view at a position substantially concentric with the base portion A133a, through which the key A140 can be inserted into and removed from the cylinder portion A132 (inner cylinder A132a). .

When the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, a part of the main body A133 on the front end side (arrow F direction side) is housed in the inner space of the covering section A270.

Specifically, the outer diameter of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protruding shape of the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 The projection A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 in the portion A270 is formed to have a size equal to or slightly smaller than the recessed shape of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of the A133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271.

Further, in this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface (end surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 and the rear surface (surface in the direction of arrow B) of the end surface wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270. It is formed. Note that the front surface of the end portion A133c and the back surface of the end wall portion A272 may be in contact with each other.

The legs A131 protrude from the rear surface of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 (the surface facing the arrow B direction, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119), and as described above, are inserted from the front side into the holes that open to the printed circuit board A119. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the key device A130 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The support body A134 includes a base part A134a in which an opening is formed substantially in the center through which the main body A133 (a base part A133a and a projection part A133b) is inserted, and two opposite sides of the base part A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. A pair of extending portions A134b and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c extending from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119 are provided. formed in

The extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a is larger than the extension length of the reinforcement portion A134c from the base portion A134a, and the extension tip surface of the extension portion A134b (surface on the arrow B direction side) abuts on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface on the arrow F direction side). In addition, a leg A134b1 is protrudingly provided on the extension tip surface of the extension portion A134b. The support A134 is arranged on the front side of the printed circuit board A119 and stands on its own by inserting the leg A134b1 from the front side into the hole opening in the printed circuit board A119 and soldering the portion projecting to the rear side. As a result, the main body A133 can be supported by the support A134, and the support A134 can prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119.

A gap may be provided between the extended end surface of the extended portion A134b (surface on the arrow B direction side) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (surface on the arrow F direction side). That is, the support A134 may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131. In this case, the heat dissipation of the key device A130 can be enhanced by the gap.

On the other hand, the extension length from the base portion A134a of the extension portion A134b and the extension length from the reinforcement portion A134c may be the same dimension. That is, the extending tip surface of the reinforcing portion A134c (surface on the arrow B direction side) may also be configured to contact the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (surface on the arrow F direction side). In this case, the main body A133 is supported by both the extended portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and the tilting of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be suppressed more firmly. Also, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the leg A131 side of the key device A130.

Also, the soldering of the leg A134b1 is omitted, and the leg A134b1 is formed to have a substantially dogleg or S-shaped cross-sectional shape, and the leg A134b1 is inserted into the hole of the printed circuit board A119 in an elastically deformed state. It is good also as a structure to carry out. That is, the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1 may be used to elastically engage the leg A134b1 with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119. Since soldering can be omitted, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to elastic engagement of the leg A134b1 with the hole, soldering may also be performed. It is possible to more strongly prevent the leg A134b1 from coming out of the hole. Therefore, the function of the support A134 that supports the inclination of the main body A133 can be further enhanced.

The leg A134b1 has a width dimension (dimensions in the directions of arrows L and B, dimensions in the left-right direction in FIG. The hole of the printed circuit board A119 through which the leg A134b1 is inserted is formed in a rectangular shape. As a result, when the rigidity of the leg A134b1 is increased and the tilting of the main body A133 is supported by the support body A134, deformation or breakage of the base of the leg A134b1 (connected portion with the extended portion A134b) can be suppressed.

However, the width dimension of the leg A134b1 may be substantially the same as the thickness dimension. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the leg A134b1 may be square.

In addition, by forming the reinforcing portions A134c on the two opposing sides of the support A134, it is possible to restrict the bending and twisting of the base portion A134a. As a result, the rigidity of the support body A134 as a whole can be increased, and the function of supporting the main body A133 can be enhanced, so that tilting of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be more strongly restricted (suppressed).

Next, the detailed configuration of the board box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119. FIG.

FIG. 115(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 with the key A140 operated to the off position, and FIG. 115(b) is a board box A100 with the key A140 operated to the on position. 116(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 116(b) is a partially enlarged front view of FIG. 115(b). FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIb;

117(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the section line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 117(b) is a substrate taken along the section line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 115(a). 118(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 118(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the box A100 of FIG. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of a).

119(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the section line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116(a), and FIG. 119(b) is a substrate taken along the section line CXIXb-CXIXb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of Box A100;

117 to 119, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the internal structure is not shown, and the cross section is hatched by single hatching to schematically show the switch device A120 and the key device A130. diagrammatically.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the board box A100 has a covering portion A270 projecting from the front surface (the surface facing the arrow F direction) of the operation wall portion A210 of the box cover A200. An opening A260 is formed in an end wall portion A272 that forms a tip surface (a surface on the arrow F direction side). This makes it difficult for the tip of a foreign object such as a wire to reach the opening A260.

For example, if the opening A260 cannot be visually recognized by an unauthorized person due to a shield or the like, and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260, the tip of the foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the box cover A200 (for operation). A method of sliding on the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side surface) of the wall portion A210) to reach the opening A260 is performed.

On the other hand, since the covering portion A270 projects from the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire slides on the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210. , the tip of the foreign matter such as a wire can be brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) to stop further progress (sliding). That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall that restricts sliding of foreign matter such as wires. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted through the opening A260.

The covering part A270 has an internal space, and a part of the front end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a portion of the tip side of the key device A130.

Thereby, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent. That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the route through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (the gap between the end wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c and the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b) is bent, and the wall with which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (a wire passing through the gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c A wall against which the tip of the foreign matter abuts (that is, the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)).

The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially cylindrical main body A133 into a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension of the support A134 (horizontal dimension in FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)) corresponds to the inner diameter dimension of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)). is set to a value larger than the left-right dimension of

As a result, the upper surface of the support A134 (the surface facing the arrow F direction) can face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface facing the arrow B direction). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign matter such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign matter such as the wire passes (formed by the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the projection portion A133b) path) is bent to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire strikes (a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire passing through the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b strikes, that is, the support A134). In addition, for a foreign matter such as a wire that collides with the upper surface of the support A 134 and changes its traveling direction, the vertical walls A291, A292, A293 and the inner surface of the lower wall portion A203 are formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)).

A protruding portion A271b is formed on the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and a protruding portion A133b is formed on the main body A133. The protrusions A133b of the main body A133 are accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the protrusions A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271.

As a result, the circumferential outer surface of the projection A133b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) and the circumferential inner surface of the projection A271b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) can face each other. Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the route through which the foreign object such as the wire passes The tip of foreign matter such as a wire that passes along the circumferential direction through the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protrusion A133b. Abutting walls, that is, the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b and the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIG. 118(a)).

In the switch device A120, the outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (the inner edge of the guide wall A251). As a result, the upper surface of the protrusion A123b (the surface facing the arrow F direction) can face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface facing the arrow B direction). Therefore, it is possible to bend the gap between the inner surface of the guide wall A251 and the operation wall portion A210 and the outer surface of the switch device A120.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A250, the route through which the foreign object such as a wire passes path formed by the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation part A122) is bent to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire passing through the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation part A122 hits, that is, The upper surface of the protrusion A123b.In addition, foreign matter such as a wire that collides with the upper surface of the protrusion A123b and changes its traveling direction is routed through each of the standing walls A281, A282, A283 and the inner surface of the lower wall portion A203. can be formed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 118(a) and 118(b)).

As described above, the covering portion A270 has an internal space, in which a part of the front end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is accommodated. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a portion of the tip side of the key device A130.

As a result, the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can face each other in a direction perpendicular to the inserting direction of the key A140 (direction parallel to a plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). Therefore, for example, an operator's careless operation or rough operation of the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, collision of another member with the key A140 during the operation of opening the inner frame 12 from the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion 170 to suppress (regulate) tilting of the key device A130.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the leg A131 from being broken or bent, the leg A131 coming out of the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and the solder from peeling off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the disconnection or poor contact of the key device A130 (leg A131).

An end face wall portion A272 is formed at the projecting tip (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and this end face wall portion A272 faces the end portion A133c of the key device A130. As a result, the area of the opening A260 (in addition to the area of the opening A260 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the cross-sectional area of the path through which a foreign object such as a wire passes) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100 and the main controller A110 being tampered with.

In particular, the end wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270 has square portions A272b extending radially inward from two points on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, the projecting tip surface of the covering portion A270 (the surface facing the direction of arrow F) is open only in the region that allows the displacement of the key A140 (the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140). The rest of the tip surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) is entirely the end surface wall portion A272. Therefore, by minimizing the area of the opening A260, it is possible to make it difficult to insert a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260. In addition, since the facing area between the inner surface of the end wall portion A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c) can be maximized, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening A260, the foreign object such as the wire can pass through. It can be difficult.

In this way, in order to make the opening A260 an irregular shape (a shape in which a pair of fan shapes are opposed to each other), the end face wall portion A272 has a relatively complicated shape in which a pair of rectangular portions A272b protrude from the inner edge of an annular portion A272a. formed into a shape. In this case, the end wall portion A272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) has a plate shape with a constant thickness (a cantilever with a base end fixed to the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (extended tip) free). shape), the shape can be simplified and its formability can be ensured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, only the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed in the covering portion A270, and the end wall portion A272 is not formed. configuration), when an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 to suppress the tilting of the key device A130. (regulation) can be done.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an end wall portion A272 is formed on the projecting tip side (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge of the end wall portion A272 (the portion forming the opening A260). can be abutted. That is, the position (key A140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A131) when the key device A130 tilts due to the action of the above-described external force can be brought into contact with the end wall portion A272. As a result, tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated), and breakage of the box cover A200 (coating portion A270) can be suppressed.

In addition, the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 and the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271. Therefore, as described above, the circumferential outer surface of the projection A133b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) and the circumferential inner surface of the projection A271b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) face each other. (See FIG. 118(a)).

Therefore, for example, an operator's careless operation or rough operation of the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, collision of another member with the key A140 during the operation of opening the inner frame 12 from the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force in the direction of rotation is applied to the key A140, the outer circumferential surface of the projection A133b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) is aligned with the inner circumferential surface of the projection A271b (the surface facing the arrows L and R). ) to restrict the rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A130.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the leg A131 from being broken or bent, the leg A131 coming out of the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and the solder from peeling off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the disconnection or poor contact of the key device A130 (leg A131).

Here, for example, the operation portion A122 of the switch device A120 or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is carelessly or violently operated by the operator, and the operation portion A122 when the inner frame 12 is opened from the outer frame 11. Or, due to a collision of another member against the key A140, an external force is applied to the operation part A122 or the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction or the insertion direction (direction parallel to the plane containing arrows U, D and arrows L, R). When this is applied, the switch device A120, the key device A130 or the key A140 tilts, and there is a risk that the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) will be deformed and damaged due to their contact. .

On the other hand, erected walls A280 and A290 are erected on the rear surface (inner surface, surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. 117(a) and 117(b).

As a result, the standing walls A280 and A290 are erected (functioning as ribs) to improve the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210. The erected walls A280 and A290 can function as means). As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and damage thereof can be suppressed.

Further, when the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the outer surfaces of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 are brought into contact with the inner surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290, thereby It is possible to suppress (regulate) the tilting of the key device A130. That is, the portion that abuts on the switch device A120 or the key device A130 and suppresses its tilting is shared not only by the operation wall portion A210 or the cover portion A270 but also by the erected walls A280 and A290, and the load is increased accordingly. can be dispersed. From this point as well, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, The erected walls A280 and A290 can function as walls against which the tips of foreign objects such as wires hit (walls that restrict further progress). Thus, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being tampered with.

The erected walls A280 and A290 are formed to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 118(b)). That is, an area AS1 where the upright end surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the erected walls A280 and A290 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 and the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119 contact each other. , AS2 are formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape, and are formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114(a)).

Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can block (divide) a path for foreign objects such as wires to enter the board box A100. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, it is restricted from advancing outside the space surrounded by the erected walls A280 and A290 and the lower wall portion A203. can be done. Thus, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being tampered with.

In addition, the erected walls A280 and A290 are erected (functioning as ribs) by forming the erected walls A280 and A290 together with the lower wall portion A203 so as to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130. ), not only can the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210 be further improved by function as a supporting portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be reliably exerted even when an external force acts in any direction within the plane including. As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and damage thereof can be suppressed.

Note that the first standing wall A291 is arranged in a posture perpendicular to the key A140 in the OFF position and parallel to the key A140 in the ON position. The three erected walls A293 are arranged in a posture orthogonal to the key A140 in the ON position and parallel to the key A140 in the OFF position. Therefore, the standing wall A290 can efficiently function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270.

That is, of the external forces parallel to the plane containing the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R, when the external forces in the directions of the arrows U and D or the directions of the arrows L and R are applied to the key A140, the standing wall While the load received by A290 (withstand load to be exerted by standing wall A290 as a support portion) is maximized, an external force acts in a direction inclined by a predetermined angle from arrows U and D or arrows L and R. In this case, there is a high possibility that the key A140 will be rotated due to the inclination of the acting direction of the external force, and the amount of the external force released by the rotation will be the load received by the erected wall A290 (the erected wall A290 will act as a support part). load capacity) is lower. As a result, by arranging the posture of the standing wall A290 as described above, the standing wall A290 can efficiently function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. be able to.

The erected walls A280, A290 (the second erected walls A282, A292 and the third erected walls A283, A293) are connected to the lower wall portion A203. The rigidity of A280 and A290 can be increased, and the rigidity of the entire box cover A200 can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall portion A210 and the lower wall portion A203 via the standing walls A280 and A290. Therefore, the function of the erected walls A280 and A290 as supporting portions (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

The surface of the printed circuit board A119 to which electronic components are connected by soldering is the surface facing the box base A300 (the surface opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted). , A290 and the bearing surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 114(a)), no electronic components are mounted or circuits are formed, and the area AS1 , AS2 are formed as flat surfaces.

Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the front surface (the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119, so that the standing walls A280 and A290 and the standing walls A280 and A290 It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap with the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can reliably function as walls against which the tips of foreign objects such as wires inserted through the openings A250 and A260 abut.

The first erected walls A281, A291, the second erected walls A282, A292, and the third erected walls A283, A293 of the erected walls A280, A290 are formed with tapered surfaces A280a, A290a. The area of the surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). As a result, it is possible to increase the surface pressure of the upright end surface that abuts on the printed circuit board A119, thereby suppressing insertion of a foreign object such as a wire between the printed circuit board A119 and the upright walls A280 and A290.

In this case, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the inner surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 on the side of the erected tips (surfaces on the side facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130), thereby improving moldability. At the same time, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100.

That is, by decreasing the area of the upright tip surface by the inclined surfaces (tapered surfaces A280a and A290a) that gradually approach the outer surface side toward the upright tip side (in the direction of arrow B), the shape of the upright walls A280 and A290 can be changed. By making the change moderate, the fluidity of the resin in the mold can be ensured. Therefore, moldability can be improved.

Furthermore, when the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 are brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, a groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 ( See FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)). Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 can be moved (guided) along the groove described above. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid to pass through (into) the space between the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100.

A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 protrude from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface facing the arrow F direction) of the operation wall A210. One end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the base portion A271a or the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 115(a) and 115( b) see).

Thereby, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can be made to function as ribs for increasing rigidity, and the covering portion A270 can be supported by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, when the outer surfaces of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A270, the rigidity of the ridges A211 and 222 is used to prevent the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from tilting. While being able to suppress reliably, damage to covering part A270 can be suppressed.

In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display portion is provided at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (on the extension line of the other end). (“ON” and “OFF”) are formed respectively. As a result, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can also function as an indication line for indicating the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, the position where one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) corresponds to the end surface of the key A140 in the OFF position (the surface gripped with the fingers). (narrow surface along the outer edge of the key A140) and the same phase position (position facing the end surface of the key A140) (see FIG. 115(a)). The position connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A271a) is at the same phase position as the end surface of the key A140 in the ON position (see FIG. 115(b)).

As a result, an external force acts on the key A140 in the OFF position, and the key A140 covers the end face in the direction of the arrow U (the narrow face along the outer edge of the face gripped by the fingers) with the covering portion A270 (end face wall portion A272). ), the first protrusion A211 is positioned on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115(a)), and the ON position When an external force acts on the key A140 located in the key A140 and the key A140 is tilted in a direction (arrow L direction) in which the end surface of the key A140 on the arrow L direction side contacts the cover portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272), the The second ridge A212 is positioned on the extension of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115(b)).

As a result, when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the load is input from the end surface of the key A140 (the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the fingers) (the end surface of the key A140 abuts). The portion to be covered) can be efficiently reinforced by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

The second connection wall portion A230 can prevent the key A140 in the OFF position from being subjected to an external force in the direction opposite to that described above (a force displacing the key A140 in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 115(a)). )), the first connection wall portion A220 can suppress the application of an external force in the direction opposite to the above-described case (the force displacing the key A140 in the direction of arrow R) to the key A140 in the on position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

That is, as will be described later, the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the other side (arrow D direction side) is open (connection wall is not formed). Further, the key device A130 is positioned on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the center in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the third region from the key device A130. The distance to the connection wall portion A240 is increased.

Therefore, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the side of the third connection wall A240, the operator's hand or other components on the side of those spaces collide with the key A140, causing the key A140 to move toward the arrow D. An external force displacing in the direction or the arrow L direction is likely to act. Therefore, by forming the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 on the side of suppressing (receiving) the tilting of the key device A130 against such an external force, it is possible to reduce the material cost and secure the rigidity. can be done efficiently.

As described above, the square portions A272b of the end wall portion A272 are arranged at two locations with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees, and are formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). In this case, the two sides (the outer edge and the edge forming the opening A260) of the triangular portion A272b are set to different lengths (that is, the front view shape is formed as a scalene triangle).

Specifically, with respect to the key A140 in the off position, the rectangular portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 is the side (outer edge) of the side facing the gripping surface (surface gripped with fingers) of the key A140. The length of the key A140 is longer (larger), and the rectangular portion A272b on the far side (opposite side across the key A140) from the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the key A140 in the OFF position is the gripping surface of the key A140. The length of the side (outer edge) on the side facing is shortened (reduced) (see FIG. 115(a)).

Therefore, in other words, the square portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 has the length dimension of the side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface (surface gripped with fingers) of the key A140 in the ON position. is shortened (reduced), and the side (outer edge) of the rectangular portion A272b on the far side from the first connection wall A220 is long (large) on the side facing the gripping surface of the key A140 in the ON position. (See FIG. 115(b)).

As described above, due to the space on the open side and the space on the side of the third connection wall A240, the operator's hand or other components in those spaces collide with the key A140, and the key A140 is likely to be displaced in the direction of arrow D or in the direction of arrow L, according to the square portion A272b of this embodiment, the side of the side that receives the key A140 to which the external force in the direction of arrow D or arrow F is applied Since the length dimension of the (outer edge) is increased, the rigidity of the rectangular portion A272b is efficiently increased, and tilting of the key A140 (key device A130) can be reliably suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress damage to the square portion A272b by suppressing the surface pressure.

The outer surface on the front side of the board box A100 (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) includes a first area formed by the front wall portion A201 and an operation wall positioned closer to the main controller A110 than the first area. A second region formed by a portion A210, and openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region.

As a result, the openings A250 and A260 are arranged at positions recessed from the outer surface of the board box A100 (the box cover A200) (the first area formed by the front wall portion A201), and the first area and the second area are connected. Stepped portions (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) can be arranged around the openings A250 and A260. As a result, compared to the case where the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the front wall portion A201 (the first region), the distance to the openings A250 and A260 can be increased for a person who commits fraud. By making the openings A250 and A260 difficult to see, it is possible to make it difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260.

Considering heat dissipation from the main controller A110, the board box A100 has a distance from the main controller A110 (for example, a distance between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200 (internal space )) must be ensured. On the other hand, if the openings A250 and A260 are too far from the switch device A120 and the key device A130, the operability deteriorates.

In this case, by forming the openings A250 and A260 in the operation wall portion A210 (second region), it is possible to easily ensure the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and as described above, the openings A250, A260 are formed. It is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted from A260 into the board box A100. However, when the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is operated, the steps connecting the first area and the second area (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230 and the third connection wall A240) are difficult to work on. The hand of the person (operator) interferes and interferes with the operation. Therefore, operability deteriorates when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall A220 is formed to be inclined (downwardly inclined) toward the main controller A110 as it goes from the front wall A201 toward the operation wall A210. , the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be expanded by the amount of this inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall portion A220). As a result, it is possible to improve operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a length dimension along one direction (directions of arrows L and R) that is perpendicular to the other direction (arrows U and D 115(a) and 115(b).

The key device A130 is arranged such that the posture of the key A140 in the OFF position is aligned with the above-described other directions (directions of arrows U and D) (see FIG. 115(a)). That is, the key A140 in the off position faces the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210 (the second region), and the key A140 in the front view (direction of arrow B). The longitudinal direction of is along the lateral direction (directions of arrows U and D) of the operation wall portion A210 (second area).

As a result, it is possible to secure a space on the sides (right and left sides in FIG. 115(a)) desired to be gripped with the fingers of the key A140 in the OFF position. Therefore, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 or pulled out from the key device A130, the fingers (for example, thumb and forefinger) holding the key A140 connect the first area and the second area (first connection wall). Interference with the portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the key device A130.

In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the center of the operation wall A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R). As shown, the first connection wall portion A220 is formed to be inclined downward, so that when the key A140 is gripped with fingers and operated (rotated from the OFF position to the ON position or vice versa), the key A140 is Fingers different from the gripping fingers can be prevented from interfering with the steps (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall A240) connecting the first area and the second area. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the key device A130.

For example, when holding the key A140 in the OFF position with the index finger and thumb, the little finger and the ring finger can be placed using the space secured by the downward slope of the first connection wall A220, and the key A140 can be moved from the OFF position to the ON position. When operating (rotating) the F key A140, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220.

When the key A140 in the ON position is gripped with the index finger and the thumb, the operation wall portion A210 (second area) is formed into a horizontally long rectangle in front view, and the key device A130 is used for operation. Positioned on one side of the longitudinal center of the wall portion A210 (second region), and arranged using the space on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210. When operating (rotating) the key A140 from the off position to the on position, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side). can.

In the switch device A120, the projecting tip surface (face in the direction of arrow F) of the operating portion A122 in the initial position (height from the operation wall portion A210) is aligned with the projecting portion of the covering portion A270. It is set at a lower position (smaller dimension) than the position of the tip surface (the front surface of the end wall portion A272, the surface in the direction of the arrow F) (standing height from the operation wall portion A210). Therefore, interference between the operation unit A122 and fingers when operating the key A140 can be suppressed.

The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has connection surfaces (first connection wall portion A220 and third connection wall A220 and portion A240) is formed, and a connection surface (second connection wall portion A230) is formed on one side in the short direction (direction of arrow U), and on the other side in the short direction (direction of arrow D) , the connection surface is non-formed.

Thereby, the other side (arrow D direction side) in the short direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) can be opened. That is, by such opening, the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 (second area) can be communicated with the outside space. Therefore, when the key A140 is gripped with fingers and operated (inserted into the key device A130, pulled out from the key device A130, rotated from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is Using the space (external space) communicated with the above-mentioned opening as a space for arranging and displacing (moving) fingers (little finger and ring finger) different from the gripping fingers (for example, thumb and index finger). can be done. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the key device A130.

Here, as described above, considering the heat radiation from the main controller A110, the substrate box A100 is located at a distance from the main controller A110 (for example, between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200). distance (internal space)) must be secured.

In this case, steps (first connection wall A220, second connection wall A230, and third connection wall A240) connecting the front wall A201 (first area) and the operation wall A210 (second area) , the first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are formed by the front wall portion A201 (first region) and the It is formed in a form substantially orthogonal to the operation wall portion A210 (second area).

That is, by inclining the first connection wall portion A220 downward, interference with the fingers is suppressed, and the operability of the key device A130 is improved, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are moved downward. By not tilting (only the first connection wall A220 is tilted downward), the volume of the internal space of the board box A100 for coping with heat dissipation from the main controller A110 can be secured.

In this way, even if only the first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward and the others (the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240) are not inclined, interference with the fingers can be suppressed. The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and one side (first connection wall portion A220 side) of the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction ) in which the key device A 130 is placed close to the key device A 130 .

In addition, by forming the third connection wall portion A240 on the other longitudinal direction side (the side opposite to the first connection wall portion A220) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), the third connection wall portion A240 It is possible to protect the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (key A140). For example, it is possible to prevent the robot arm that handles the substrate box A100 from colliding with the switch device A120 and the key device A130 during manufacturing.

FIG. 120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 120, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of a part of the configuration (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to the main controller A110) is omitted. Symbols are illustrated only for the main components.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the pachinko machine A10, the hinges 18 (rotating shafts) for supporting the inner frame 12 to the outer frame 11 are attached to two upper and lower locations on the left side in front view. The inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side on which is provided as an opening/closing axis.

Here, when the inner frame 12 is opened toward the front side with the hinge 18 as the opening/closing axis, the opening angle can be made sufficiently large (for example, as shown in FIG. 120, approximately 90 degrees). 115 to 119), the operator can stand at a position facing the front of the board box A100 and operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated and the operability can be ensured.

On the other hand, if the release angle cannot be sufficiently increased (for example, only about 45 degrees can be secured for the release angle, and the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12 is opened, the outer frame 11 and the inner frame are separated from each other). 12), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is ensured.

That is, the substrate box A100 is configured such that the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (second region) (for example, the directions of arrows R and L in FIG. 115(a)) is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotating shaft). 115(a), the lateral direction (arrow U, D direction in FIG. 115(a)) is directed in a direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotating shaft), and the longitudinal direction one side (arrow in FIG. 115(a) L direction side) is positioned on the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall portion A220 is arranged on the side closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

As a result, when a hand is inserted between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 to the back surface of the inner frame 12 (the front surface of the board box A100) at the same height position as the operation wall portion A210 (second area), The space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall portion A240 (ie, the operation wall portion A210 (second region)) is formed in the thumb and the palm near the base of the thumb in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the key device A space on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 by positioning A130 on one side of the longitudinal direction center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region)) can be placed using

In such a state, it is possible to operate (depress) the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 with the thumb or forefinger, and to rotate the key A140 of the key device A130. As a space for displacing (moving) the thumb and forefinger holding the key A140, the space secured by downwardly inclining the first connection wall portion A220 can be used. As a result, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured.

Note that the above-described setting change (operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed while the board box A100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410 from the state shown in FIG. Since the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be positioned closer to the front side (the front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

With the inner frame 12 opened toward the front side with the hinge 18 as the opening/closing axis, the circuit board box A100 is further opened toward the front side (the front side of the page in FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as the opening/closing axis. Also good. As a result, the operator can stand facing the front of the board box A100 at a position where it does not interfere with the outer frame 11, and the switch device A120 and The key device A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

In this case, the main control device A110 (input/output port 205) has various devices (power supply device 115, payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoid 209, third The other end (connector) of the electrical connection line, one end of which is connected to the one-symbol display device 37, the second-symbol display device 83, the second-symbol holding lamp 84 (see FIG. 4), is connected.

If operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted regardless of the state of connection of these electrical connection lines to the main control device A110, there is a risk that the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be more likely to be illegally operated. On the other hand, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is uniformly prohibited regardless of the connection state of a plurality of electrical connection lines, the work (setting change) associated with the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 It may lead to sexual deterioration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A110. As a result, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the other end (connector) of the electrical connection lines, of which one end is connected to at least the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113, is connected to the main control device A110. (input/output port 205), regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, connected, disconnected, or mixedly connected and disconnected) ), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are allowed to operate. As a result, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

That is, if a predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is not connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not connected to the main control device A110. is prohibited, it is possible to prevent the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from being illegally operated.

On the other hand, if the connection to the main controller A110 of a predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) is ensured, and fraud can be suppressed , other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, and second symbol reservation lamp 84 are connected to the main controller A110 Even if the main control device A110 is disconnected (extracted) from the main control device A110, the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed, thereby improving workability (ensuring versatility). ) can be achieved.

That is, when the main controller A110 is opened to the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as the opening/closing axis, the main control The electrical connection must be released (pulled out) so that the rotation of the device A110 is not restricted).

Therefore, in a configuration in which operation (change of settings) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not permitted unless all of the electrical connection lines are connected to the main controller A110, the main controller A110 is set to a predetermined position (switch device A120 and key device A130 are rotated to a position where it is easy to operate), and then the electrical connection wire disconnected (unplugged) from the main controller A110 needs to be reconnected to the main controller A110.

In particular, when the main controller A110 is displaced (rotated) away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 and the length of the electrical connection wire is insufficient, an extension wire is interposed to release (remove) the electrical connection wire. It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line to the main controller A110, which is troublesome.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) is connected to the main controller A110, Since the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted, other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display It is unnecessary to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the electrical connection line that connects the second symbol holding lamp 84 to the main controller A110 by interposing an extension line.

As a result, it is possible to arrange the main controller A110 in a position where it is easy to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and at the same time, it is possible to reduce labor and improve workability associated with the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the board box A2100 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the entire back surface of the end wall portion A272 is formed as a flat surface, but the end wall portion A2272 in the eighth embodiment has a ridge A2273 projecting from the back surface. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

121(a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the board box A2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box A2100 taken along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. 121(a). is.

Note that FIG. 121(a) corresponds to FIG. 110(b). Also, in FIG. 121(b), only the cross-sectional view is shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 121, an end wall portion A2272 of the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment is provided with a ridge A2273 protruding from the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side). The protrusion A2273 is a portion (protrusion) that extends in a stripe shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and is located at the outer edge of the end wall portion A2272 (a tip in the overhanging direction that protrudes radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271). side edge) in a predetermined range.

More specifically, the range in which the ridge A2273 is formed is the position facing the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130 and the range along the outer edge of the rectangular portion A272b (position The range between the positions AP1 and AP3 including the AP2, and the range between the positions AP4 and AP6 including the position AP5) and one side of the rectangular portion A272b (radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271). (the side with a larger overhang dimension) along the inner edge of the annular portion A272a (the range between the positions AP3 and AP4), and in this range (the range between the positions AP1 and AP6) Formed continuously.

The projecting dimension from the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) of the ridge A2273 is set to a constant value in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4, The value gradually changes toward the position AP2 toward the position AP1 and gradually changes to a smaller value toward the position AP2, and is set to the same value as the position AP3 at the position AP2. Similarly, the projecting dimension gradually changes to a larger value from the position AP4 to the position AP5, and gradually changes to a smaller value from the position AP5 to the position AP6, reaching the same value as the position AP4 at the position AP6. set. Also, the position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (projection dimension).

Thus, the rigidity of the end wall portion A2272 can be increased by protruding the ridge A2273 from the end wall portion A2272. Therefore, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 receives a force in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (in a direction parallel to the plane containing the arrows U, D and the arrows L, R), and the key device A130 tilts. , the breakage of the end wall portion A2272 can be suppressed when the key A140 abuts against the inner edge of the end wall portion A2272.

Since the ridge A2273 is formed at a position facing (opposing) the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, the back surface of the end wall A2272 and the key device A130 (the end A133c of the main body A133) ) can be made smaller to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap.

Here, in the present embodiment, the projection dimension of the protrusion A2273 in the range between the positions AP3 and AP4 is the distance between the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 of the key device A130. It is set to a value approximately equal to the facing distance between the two. Therefore, the protruding tip (arrow B direction side) of the projection A2273 contacts the front of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130.

As a result, the gap between the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133) is eliminated, and a foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap. can be suppressed.

In particular, at positions AP2 and AP5, the projecting dimension of the projection A2273 is set to a large value, so that the elastic deformation of the rectangular portion A272b formed as a plate (cantilever beam) with a free outer edge side is used. As a result, the protrusion A2273 in the range from position AP1 to position AP3 and from position AP4 to position AP6 can be brought into firm contact with the front surface of the key device A130 (end A133c of main body A133). As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap between the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133). .

Also, in this way, the protruding tip (arrow B direction side) of the projection A2273 is in contact with the front of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the key device A130 Even if the end wall A2272 is accidentally pushed in the insertion direction by the key A140 when the key A140 is inserted into the key A140, deformation of the end wall A2272 in the insertion direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress damage to the base end side of the end wall portion A2272 (the side connected to the peripheral wall portion A271).

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged closer to the rotation axis A410 (arrow R direction side) than the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) center of the board box A100 (box cover A200). However, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 in the ninth embodiment are arranged farther from the rotation axis A410 than the longitudinal center of the board box A3100 (box cover A3200). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 122(a) is a front view of the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122(b) is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine A3010. Note that FIG. 122(b) shows a state in which the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range). In addition, in FIG. 122(b), only the main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the circuit board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment differs from the circuit board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in terms of the formation position of the operation wall part A210 and the opening A260 (cover part A270, key While the arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (the guide wall A251, the switch device A120) is different, the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the board box A3100 of the ninth embodiment, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the far side (arrow L direction side) from the rotation axis A410 relative to the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200. Three sides of the front wall portion A210 are connected to the front wall portion A201 by a first connection wall portion A220, a second connection wall portion A230, and a third connection wall portion A240.

An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (covering portion A270) and an opening A250 (guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through these openings A250 and A260. be done.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120 is arranged farther from the rotation axis A410 (the side closer to the first connection wall A220, the arrow L direction side) than the key device A130. That is, the arrangement is the reverse of the arrangement in the seventh embodiment.

Here, the movable range (rotatable range) when the substrate box A3100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410 is the first position (disposed during the game) that is disposed on the back side of the inner frame 12. position, see FIG. 120), the second position ( That is, it is set within a range of approximately 180° up to a position facing the same side as the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 122(b)).

As a result, the substrate box A3100 is arranged (displaced) at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated while viewing the information displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (e.g., information regarding setting changes, setting values). )be able to. As a result, it is possible to operate while confirming the display (information), so that it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 based on the display (information). As a result, operability can be improved, and operation errors can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not operated, it can be placed on the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 (inner frame 12) (that is, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside, see FIG. 120), so fraud is performed. (unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130).

In particular, in this embodiment, the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are arranged (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are oriented in the same direction (arrow The substrate box A3100 can be displaced (rotated) to a position in which the direction B) is desired (both sides are substantially parallel in this embodiment). The angle between the front surface of the operation wall A210 and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is preferably set within a range of approximately 0° to approximately 45°.

That is, the substrate is placed at a position where the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the substrate box A3100 are arranged (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized at the same time. Box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to take an unreasonable posture such as putting the hand around the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 in order to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while viewing the third pattern display device 81. .

As a result, it becomes easier to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while confirming the information displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, information about setting changes), thereby improving the operability and preventing mistakes in operation. can be achieved more reliably.

Further, as described above, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the far side (arrow L direction side) from the rotation axis A410 from the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200, and the switch device A120 and the keys are mounted on the operation wall portion A210. An apparatus A130 is provided.

As a result, the board box A3100 is placed at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged (the front face of the operation wall A210) and the display face of the third pattern display device 81 can be viewed at the same time. With the box A3100 displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122(b)), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are positioned further from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side of FIG. 122(b)). can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) and the key device A130 (key A140) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Here, in the setting change mode, it is necessary to repeatedly press the switch device A120 (operation unit A122), and the frequency of operation of the switch device A120 is higher than that of the key device A130.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120, which is operated more frequently than the key device A130, is located farther from the rotation axis A410 (that is, closer to the first connection wall A220) than the key device A130. are placed. As a result, the switch device A120, which is frequently operated, can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side in FIG. 122(b)). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the finger operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Furthermore, since the switch device A120 is disposed adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 is also used when operating the switch device A120 (operation portion A122). It can be used as a space (a space for avoiding interference between fingers and the box cover A3200). As a result, the operability can be improved also from this point.

Here, the pachinko machine A3010 in the ninth embodiment has the board box A3100 up to the second position described above (the position where the front of the operation wall A210 faces the front of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122(b)). When displaced (rotated), it engages with the board box A3100 to restrict the displacement (rotation) of the board box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (i.e., fix the board box A3100 to the second position). ). This eliminates the need to hold the board box A3100 by hand when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130, thereby improving operability.

The restricting means uses the magnetic force (attractive force) of the magnet to fix (hold) the board box A3100 at the second position (when a force exceeding the attractive force is applied, the first a projecting member that is allowed to be displaced (rotated) in a direction toward a position), and has a projecting member that is located at the projecting position by the elastic recovery force of an elastically deformed biasing means (for example, a coil spring), and is located at the projecting position The projecting member engaged with the board box A3100 placed at the second position restricts the displacement (rotation) of the board box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (biasing means from the projecting position). When the protruding member is retracted against the urging force of , displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position is permitted).

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A410 of the board box A100 is arranged along the vertical direction (directions of arrows U and D) of the pachinko machine A10 has been described, but the rotation axis A4410 in the tenth embodiment It is arranged in a posture along the width direction (horizontal direction, arrow L, R direction) of the pachinko machine A4010. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 123(a) is a front view of the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 123(b) is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine A4010. Note that FIG. 123(b) shows a state in which the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range), and is displaced to the first position. The (rotated) board box A4100 is shown in dashed lines. In addition, in FIG. 123(b), only the main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the circuit board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment differs from the circuit board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (placement position and direction) and the number of rotation shafts A4410, but other configurations are the same. Therefore, description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 123, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotating shafts A4410 protruding in directions away from each other from the sealing unit A400 and the sub cover A500. The pair of rotating shafts A4410 are located on one side of the board box A4100 in the short direction (directions of arrows U and D) (the side opposite to the operation wall portion A210, the side of the direction of arrow U), (L, R directions) are formed in a posture protruding outward along the longitudinal direction of the board box A4100 from both ends. Also, the pair of rotation shafts A4410 are arranged coaxially.

Here, the movable range (rotatable range) when the board box A4100 is rotated about the rotation axis A4410 is the first position (disposed during game play) at which the movable range (rotatable range) is arranged on the back side of the inner frame 12 123(b)) in a direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 (direction of arrow B), and the front surface of the box cover 4200 (operation wall portion A210) is vertical. It is set within a range of approximately 90° up to the second position facing upward (in the direction of arrow U) (that is, the position where the board box A4100 protrudes most toward the rear side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123(b)). .

As a result, in the second position, the operation wall portion A210 can be directed upward, and the release side thereof (opposite side to the second connection wall portion A230) can be directed toward the side where the operator is present. And the operability of the key device A130 can be improved.

On the other hand, at the first position, the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 can face the rear surface of another component provided on the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the separate parts can face the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be arranged at positions where it is difficult to operate. As a result, it is possible to prevent tampering (unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, even if the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the key A140 contacts another member of the inner frame 12. The contact prevents the board box A4100 from being placed at the first position. As a result, forgetting to pull out the key A140 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegal acquisition of the key A140 that has been forgotten to be pulled out.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the second position of the board box A4100 is positioned lower than the first position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction), so as described above, the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130. When the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position in this state, the board box A4100 can then be displaced (rotated) to the second position by its own weight. Therefore, the operator can easily recognize that the board box A4100 cannot be placed at the first position.

In addition, when the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, a part of the separate member is closer to the front side of the operation wall portion A210 than the front wall portion A201 of the box cover 4200. It is preferable to have a shape to enter into. As a result, the space formed on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 can be reduced, and unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be suppressed.

The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 143. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the variable winning device 65 arranged in the game area is opened in the special game state, and there is one winning hole (specific winning hole 65) that makes it easier for game balls to enter has been described. However, in the variable prize winning device B1000 of the eleventh embodiment, a plurality of prize winning openings are provided in which game balls can easily enter in the special game state. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 124 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. A pinball game is performed by causing balls (hereinafter also referred to as game balls or pachinko balls) to flow down the front of the game board 13 .

The game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, and has a large number of nails for guiding the ball, a pinwheel, rails 61 and 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, and a second winning port. The opening 640, the variable winning device B1000 normal winning opening (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device B1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 124, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member 70 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 124) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

The lottery based on prizes will be described in detail below. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are awarded prizes (some benefits for the player (for example, payout of prize balls, execution of lottery, transition to a more advantageous state) A lottery of special symbols (first symbol) is held when there is a ball that can be expected to give a profit, etc.). lottery will be held. In the lottery of the special symbols performed for the balls entering the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640, it is judged whether or not the special symbols are a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbols are a big hit. In that case, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbols are in a low probability state, for example, a special symbol jackpot is determined with a probability of 1/320. For example, with a probability of 1/60, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. For convenience of explanation, the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first winning port 64 will be referred to as "special symbol 1 lottery", and the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the second winning port 640 will be referred to as "special symbol 1 lottery". The lottery for the symbol is called "lottery for special symbol 2".

When the special pattern jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, Alternatively, the action of releasing 10 balls (prescribed number) is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the first specific winning hole B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1002, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. The payout of prize balls accompanying the entry into the first specific prize winning port B1001 and the second specific prize winning port B1002 and the number of payouts will be described later.

Six types of special symbol jackpot types are provided: "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot a", "jackpot b", and "jackpot c". Although the details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 are configured differently depending on the jackpot type.

When the special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, the lottery result is displayed. A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is a maximum of 4 for each type of the winning port. It is reserved until the second time, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first winning opening 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1), or the number of reserved balls for the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2 (number of pending balls) remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. When both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In this embodiment, when both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is preferentially executed. However, it is not limited to this, for example, the lottery may be preferentially executed in the order of acquisition of the special symbols (order of entering the ball), or the lottery may be executed alternately with the special symbols 1 and 2. Alternatively, the lottery may be executed simultaneously with the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

In the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), a determination is made as to whether or not the normal symbol wins. When the normal pattern wins, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize winning port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), so that the ball can easily enter the second prize winning port 640. become. In other words, when the normal symbol wins, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol becomes easier.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal winning opening 67 while the second pattern display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37. It is also shown in the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal prize winning opening 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. be done.

In this embodiment, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the special game state ends, and the special symbol lottery is performed. After completing 100 times, it is configured to be set to a normal state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability state of the special symbol is provided after the end of the special game state, the variable probability state of the special symbol is configured to end according to the number of special symbol lotteries. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot a, which will be described later), the pachinko machine 10 is operated during the period from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot. may shift to a special symbol high probability state (during the probability variation of the special symbol). In this case, after the jackpot games of other jackpot types (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, and jackpot c, which will be described later), the time-saving state of normal symbols may be set until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times. good.

In addition, the number of lotteries for the special symbols to which the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols described above is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

In addition, the number of lotteries for the special symbols that are in the time-saving state of the normal symbols described above is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times, 5 times, or 0 times.

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, during so-called probability fluctuation (during probability change), in other words, to a special game state. It is a game state that is easy to transition to. The high-probability state of special symbols in the present embodiment (during the probability change of special symbols) includes a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols (second symbols) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning port 640. On the other hand, the ``low probability state of special symbols'' refers to the time when the special symbols are not changing, and the probability of the big win is normal, that is, the state of the probability of big wins being lower than during the changing of the special symbols.

In addition, "time saving state of normal symbols (during time saving)" refers to a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and balls are likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . In addition, the ``normal state'' means a state of the game that is neither the probability variation of the special symbol nor the time reduction of the normal symbol (the state that neither the jackpot probability nor the normal symbol (second symbol) winning probability is increased).

During the probability change of the special pattern or during the time reduction of the normal pattern, not only the winning probability of the normal pattern is increased, but also the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize winning port 640 is changed to the normal state. A relatively long time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state, a state in which the tip of rotation moves to the right around the lower end and is in a tilted posture), the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state , the ball is more likely to enter the second prize winning port 640 than in the case where the leading end of the rotation stands toward the second prize winning port 640 (left side). Therefore, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol. That is, the lottery for the special symbols is facilitated.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, or in addition to changing the opening time, The number of openings of the electric accessory 640a in the case of winning the normal symbol may be increased more than in the normal state.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric At least one of the number of times the accessory 640a is opened may be changed.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed. 2 symbols) may be configured to be increased compared to the normal state.

A first pattern display provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 124). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

A plurality of LEDs 37a fluctuate by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery that is performed with the ball entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. display, display a special pattern (first pattern) according to the lottery result of the special pattern as a stop pattern after the end of the variation, or change the balls entered in the first winning hole 64. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is reserved up to four times for each type of winning hole, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but also indicates the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot C, A special pattern (first pattern) corresponding to the jackpot a, jackpot b, jackpot c) is displayed.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area.

In the variable display device unit 80, the variable display of the third pattern is performed while synchronizing with the variable display on the first pattern display device 37, triggered by the winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 (start winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter also simply referred to as a “display device”) that performs the above, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol with the passage of the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 as a trigger. A configured second symbol display device 83 and a second symbol retention lamp 84 indicating the number of retention balls corresponding to the number of times the game ball passes through the normal winning opening 67 by the lighting state are provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like

In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. In addition, the display device is not limited to a device having a liquid crystal display, and for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

In this embodiment, the third symbols are composed of 10 kinds of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbols are aligned (same main symbols A variable display that finally stops when all are aligned) is performed, and after the variable display is finished, a big win occurs (the transition to the special game state starts). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned (a variable display that finally stops when they are not aligned) is performed.

For example, if the lottery results of the special symbols are "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot b", and "jackpot c", even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. A variable display in which the main symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, if it is "jackpot A" or "jackpot a", any number among all numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including odd numbers A variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.

Next, a description will be given of the display (right-hand navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to prompt the player to hit the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a can be easily opened when the special symbols are in the variable probability state or the normal symbol is in the time-saving state. hitting (right hitting) makes it easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 640 . In addition, although the details will be described later, when a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbols 2) performed based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 results in a big hit, the player moves to the first winning hole 64. Compared to the case where a special pattern lottery (lottery of special pattern 1) is made based on the entry of a ball, a big win (jackpot a) that can obtain the maximum profit is likely to occur.

Therefore, in the variable probability state of the special symbols given after the end of the big hit, or in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right stroke. In other words, even if it is set to the probability variable state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, the ball cannot enter the second winning hole 640 unless the player hits to the right, so the special symbol The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the variable state of and the time-saving state of normal symbols.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the variable state of special symbols and the time-saving state of normal symbols, a specific image (right-handed navigation) is displayed, so that the player can enjoy the variable state of special symbols and the time-saving state of normal symbols. It is structured so that the benefits of becoming a company can be obtained without fail.

In the right-handed navigator, the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "Aim right!" By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 . Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely acquire the benefits of the variable probability state of the special symbols and the time-saving state of the normal symbols.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In this warning image, it is determined that the player is hitting the ball to the right even though it is not a period during which the player should hit the ball to the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 (to hit the ball to the right). This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player hits. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting to the right in the normal state (neither the probability changing state of the special symbols nor the time saving state of the normal symbols).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in the normal state (even if the ball is hit rightward, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second winning hole 640). Therefore, if the ball is hit to the right in the normal state, the chances of winning the lottery for the special symbols are reduced compared to the case of hitting the ball aiming at the first winning hole 64 by hitting to the left. That is, if the player hits right in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big win, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, the player is prevented (suppressed) from losing money by displaying a right-handed warning image to encourage left-handed hitting.

When it is determined that the player is playing right-handed in the normal state, the message "warning" and "play left-handed!" characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be reminded that he/she should not hit with the right hand (should hit with the left hand). Further, by confirming whether or not there is a right-handed hitting warning screen, the hall clerk can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of hitting right-handed in the normal state.

In this embodiment, as a method of determining whether or not a ball is hit to the right, the ball enters the normal prize-winning opening (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 124) into which the ball can flow when the ball is hit to the right. Judge whether or not you did.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered the normal winning hole (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 124) in the normal state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. is not limited to For example, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), when it is detected that the ball has entered the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002 not limited to, for example, a load is applied to the variable winning device B1000 to open the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002, and a game mode forcibly entering the game ball is performed. It may be configured to determine and display a right-handed warning image. As a result, the hall clerk can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud by simply confirming the presence or absence of the right-hand hitting warning image.

Further, for example, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), when it is detected that the ball has entered the first specific winning hole B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1002, the hall computer is fraudulent. It may be configured to output a signal indicating what is being done. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility that fraud has been committed, and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where fraud has occurred.

Also, for example, by narrowing the right channel of the variable display device unit 80, a range through which the game ball must pass is formed, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is arranged in that range. You can do it. In this case, it can be determined that the game ball is hit to the right based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection sensor.

Alternatively, for example, a detection sensor capable of detecting displacement of a movable member (for example, a windmill) arranged on the left side of the uppermost position of the variable display device unit 80 (corresponding to the left-right center position in FIG. 124) may be arranged. good. In this case, when the game ball is being hit, it can be determined that the game ball is being hit to the right based on the fact that the displacement of the movable member is not detected even after the expected operation timing has passed.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the variable winning device B1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the variable winning device B1000 is, for example, a case where a ball is detected to enter the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002 even though it is not in the special game state (jackpot state). be done.

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the variable winning device B1000, a large character "WARNING" is displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. At the bottom of the screen, the characters "Please call the gate error attendant" are displayed. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the player can quickly request repairs or the like from the pachinko hall clerk or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "x" after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric role object 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed as a predetermined symbol. It is configured to be activated (released) only for a period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (fluctuation time) is set so as to be shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state of the game state. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern is performed in a short time during the probability change of the special pattern and during the time saving of the normal pattern, so that the lottery of the normal pattern (second pattern) can be performed more often than during the normal state. can. Therefore, since the chances of winning the normal symbols increase, it is possible to give the player more chances of opening the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, during the probability change of the special pattern or during the time saving of the normal pattern, the winning probability is increased, or the opening time or number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a is increased. is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be set constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one normal symbol hit may be fixed regardless of the game state.

A normal winning hole (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and allows some of the balls that flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. It is configured.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84. Lights up. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern A part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 .

Also, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal winning hole (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (e.g., 8 times). can be Also, the number of normal winning openings (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit and displayed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. FIG.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. FIG.

The first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 are also one of the winning holes (ball holes) from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five. Also, the relationship of the number of prize balls may be reversed.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the electric accessory is displayed. 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the probability variation of the special design and during the time saving of the normal design, the probability of winning the normal design is higher than during the normal state, and the time taken to display the fluctuation of the normal design is short, so the fluctuation of the normal design In the display, the pattern of "○" becomes easy to be displayed. Therefore, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessary 640a is opened during the probability change of the special symbols and during the time saving of the normal symbols is longer than during the normal state.

Therefore, during the probability variation of the special symbol and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning port 640 than in the normal state. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning the jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot a) with which the maximum profit (ball output) is obtained for the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is the same as when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640. The value is set higher than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. - 特許庁

During normal operation, the electric accessory associated with the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. A ball is shot so as to pass through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning in the first prize-winning port 64, there are many chances for a big winning lottery, and a big win is expected. Aiming is more advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, by passing the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state. Since it is easy to win the second prize opening 640, the ball is shot toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right shot"), and a normal prize is won. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by passing through the opening (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and winning the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device B1000 is disposed on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64 (the lower left side of the second prize winning port 640), and a first specific prize winning port B1001 opened in the horizontal direction at the substantially vertical center portion thereof. And a second specific prize winning opening B1002 is provided.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a special symbol lottery performed as a result of winning a prize in the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, a big win is made. The first symbol display device 37 is lit so as to become a stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the first specific prize winning port B1001 or the second specific prize winning port B1002, which is normally closed, is closed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, or 10 balls (specified number) win. up to).

The first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closure, the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of game value (game value) than usual (in this embodiment, , 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of one ball.

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 below the first prize winning port 64 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 640, B1001 and B1002 are guided through an out hole 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Specifically, the variable winning device B1000 includes a first guide plate B1300 that constitutes an open state in which the ball is guided to the first specific winning port B1001 by sliding movement in the front-back direction, and a second guide plate B1300 that operates the first guide plate B1300. 1 solenoid B1410, a second guide plate B1500 that constitutes an open state that guides the ball to the second specific winning hole B1002 by sliding movement in the front and back direction, and a second solenoid B1610 that operates the second guide plate B1500. I have.

The first specific prize winning opening B1001 and the second specific prize winning opening B1002 are normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the case of a big hit, the first solenoid B1410 or the second solenoid B1610 is driven to slide the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 in the front-rear direction, and the ball is placed in the first specific winning hole B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1001. The winning opening B1002 is temporarily formed in an open state in which it is easy to win a prize, and the open state and the normal closed state are alternately repeated.

Next, the variable winning device B1000 will be described. 125, 126 and 127 are front perspective views of the variable winning device B1000. 125 shows the closed state of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, FIG. 126 shows the closed state of the first guide plate B1300 and the open state of the second guide plate B1500, and FIG. 127 shows the first guide plate B1300. , and the closed state of the second guide plate B1500.

In FIGS. 125, 126 and 127, the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is shown transparently except for the outer shape, and the shape of the rear side thereof can be visually recognized in order to improve visibility and facilitate understanding. illustrated as possible.

The variable winning device B1000 first identifies almost all of the balls that have reached the inclined surfaces B1223 and B1243 provided on the upper surface among the balls flowing down the right side of the variable timing device unit 80 when the player hits to the right. It is configured to be able to be guided to a range between the winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 (also referred to as flow path configuration range or pre-entering range).

FIG. 128 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device B1000, and FIG. 129 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device B1000. The variable winning device B1000 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and includes a base member B1100 fixed to the base plate 60, and a flow path configuration range (range before entering a ball) that is fastened and fixed to the base member B1100 from the front side. a first guide plate B1300 configured to be slidable forward from the back side of the base member B1100; a first drive device B1400 for driving the first guide plate B1300; and the base member B1100. a second guide plate B1500 configured to be slidable forward from the back side of the second guide plate B1500; a second driving device B1600 for driving the second guide plate B1500; B1300, the first driving device B1400, the second guide plate B1500, and a rear cover member B1700 configured to cover the second driving device B1600 from the rear side.

The base member B1100 includes a thin plate member B1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, and a first guide plate B1300 and a second guide plate B1500 formed substantially in the center of the thin plate member B1110. A through-formed portion B1120 formed through (with a slightly larger shape) along the through-formed portion B1120, a pair of holding holes B1130, which are through-holes into which a pair of detection sensors B1230 and B1250 are inserted, on both left and right sides of the through-formed portion B1120, and a thin plate. A plurality of protruding portions B1140 protruding toward the front side of the member B1110 toward the flow-down path of the ball, a pair of discharge ports B1150 for discharging the ball from the front side to the back side of the thin plate member B1110, and a pair of A guide port B1160 arranged in the thin plate member B1110 inside the holding hole B1130 in the left-right direction to guide the ball from the front side to the back side, and a detour B1170 for guiding the ball passing through the guide port B1160. .

The penetrating portion B1120 functions as guide means for guiding both the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 at different timings, and also serves as a support hole for supporting the extended support portion B1212 of the covering member B1200. Function.

The penetration formation part B1120 is formed as a symmetrical through hole, and is arranged to face the lower plane B1121 formed in a planar shape extending in a horizontal straight line in the vertical direction and toward the center of the left and right. A ceiling surface B1122 configured to be inclined downward, a pair of left and right support protrusions B1123 projecting inward from the left and right ends in a range between the lower plane B1121 and the ceiling surface B1122, and the pair of support protrusions B1123. A pair of left and right auxiliary protrusions B1124 projecting upward from the lower plane B1121 below the support protrusions B1123.

The ceiling surface B1122 is a surface that faces the rolling surface B1321 of the first guide plate B1300 and the rolling surface B1521 of the second guide plate B1500. It is formed. That is, it is formed so that the angle of inclination with respect to the horizontal plane is 7 degrees and it is inclined downward toward the center of the left and right sides.

The support protrusion B1123 is provided to protrude to a position facing the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 in the vertical direction. It is designed to be along (in this embodiment, parallel to) the plane.

That is, the upper side surface of the support protrusion B1123 is an inclined plane configured to be inclined downward toward the left-right center side of the through-formed portion B1120 at an angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. The side surface is an inclined plane configured to be inclined upward toward the left-right central portion side of the penetration forming portion B1120 at an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. As a result, the support protrusion B1123 can come into contact with the support protrusion B1123 at the left and right end portions of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, which are arranged to face the support protrusion B1123 in the vertical direction. Support stability can be improved.

The auxiliary protrusion B1124 has the same lateral width as the protrusion length of the support protrusion B1123 described above, and its function is also the same as the function of the support protrusion B1123 described above. That is, the upper surface of the auxiliary protrusion B1124 is configured as an inclined plane that is inclined upward toward the left and right central portions of the through-forming portion B1120 at an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. (downstream side end) and arranged to face each other in the vertical direction.

As a result, the left and right outer ends (downstream ends) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the auxiliary protrusions B1124 can come into contact with each other, so that the support stability of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be enhanced.

In particular, the left and right outer ends (downstream ends) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 are portions where the balls are bridged to the openings of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250, so positional stability is required. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the upward displacement of the left and right outer ends (downstream end portions) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 is suppressed by the supporting protrusions B1123, and the downward displacement thereof is suppressed by the auxiliary protrusions B1124. Therefore, the positional stability of the left and right outer ends (downstream ends) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 can be improved.

The protruding part B1140 is a protrusion extending in the vertical direction with a length approximately equal to the radius of a sphere. It is arranged along the flow-down path and protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the falling ball. As a result, the ball guided by the first guide plate B1300 in the open state or the second guide plate B1500 in the open state and flowing down is decelerated by coming into contact with the projecting portion B1140.

The detour route B1170 includes a partition wall portion B1171 extending to the rear side so as to surround the flow-down route of the ball that has passed through the guide port B1160, a closing plate portion B1172 that closes the rear side opening of the partition wall portion B1171, Prepare.

The partition wall portion B1171 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the rear, and an opening through which the ball can pass downward is formed at the downstream end of the ball flow path. The ball that has flowed down the detour route B1170 is discharged from the opening. The flow-down path formed by the partition wall B1171 is configured to merge with the flow-down path of the sphere passing from the left outlet B1150 to the rear side. Accordingly, the ball that has passed through the left discharge port B1150 to the back side is also discharged downward through the opening formed in the partition wall B1171.

In this embodiment, when the ball riding on the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 rolls upstream of the left-right center position, it can contact the projecting portion B1140. The projecting range of the projecting portion B1140 is set so as not to abut on the projecting portion B1140 when rolling on the downstream side, the details of which will be described later.

A similar protruding portion B1211 is also arranged on the covering member B1200 at a position that does not overlap the protruding portion B1140 when viewed in the front-rear direction (they are staggered in the front-rear direction with an interval of about the diameter of a sphere). is done).

The covering member B1200 is composed of a plate-like body member B1210 arranged at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100 on the front side, and a frame-shaped extension extending from the right side of the body member B1210 toward the back side. A right extension portion B1220 provided, a first detection sensor B1230 disposed and fixed to the right extension portion B1220, and a left extension extending in a frame shape from the left side of the main body member B1210 toward the back side. Mainly includes a set portion B1240, a second detection sensor B1250 arranged and fixed on the left extended portion B1240, and a ball guide receiving portion B1260 arranged on the main body member B1210 and guiding the ball to the guide opening B1160. .

In this embodiment, the right extending portion B1220 and the left extending portion B1240 are configured in a symmetrical shape, and the first detection sensor B1230 and the second detection sensor B1250 employ detection sensors having the same shape. .

The ball can flow down in the range surrounded by the main body member B1210, the front view left side wall portion of the right side extension portion B1220, the front view right side wall portion of the left side extension portion B1240, and the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100. Configured. Below, this range is also referred to as a “pre-ball-entering range”.

The main body member B1210 has a plurality of projecting portions B1211 projecting toward the downstream path of the ball on the back side, and an arrangement and a cross-sectional shape that can be inserted through the central portion of the through-formed portion B1120 of the base member B1100. and an extended support portion B1212 extending to the rear side.

In addition, the effect|action by arrangement|positioning of the projecting part B1211 and the effect|action by the shape of extended support part B1212 are mentioned later.

Body member B1210 is formed from a light transmissive material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the pre-entering range. The form of the main body member B1210 is not limited to this, and may be partially opaque.

In particular, the vicinity of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the vicinity of the second specific winning opening B1002, the vicinity of the straight path that guides the ball to the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002, and the first specific winning opening Even if the range except the vicinity of the guide portions B1222 and B1242 where the ball passing through B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1002 flows down is made impermeable, the visibility of the ball is not significantly affected. Therefore, a seal member having a shape that covers a range other than these ranges may be prepared and pasted, and a design surface with figures, patterns, etc. printed on the surface side of the seal member may be formed. You can improve your sexuality.

Further, a light emitting means such as an LED for emitting light to the front side may be arranged on the back side of the main body member B1210 so that the degree of light transmission of the main body member B1210 can be changed (for example, transmissive liquid crystal).

In the assembled state (see FIG. 125), the extended support part B1212 is inserted through the penetration formation part B1120 of the base member B1100, and the lower part thereof is arranged so as to ride on the lower plane B1121 of the penetration formation part B1120. That is, the extended support portion B1212 is supported by the through-formed portion B1120 on the extended end side, and supported by the main body member B1210 on the base end side and the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100. As a result, the positional stability of the extended support portion B1212 can be increased while the weight of the ball is applied to the extended support portion B1212.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 125), the extension support portion B1212 is not limited to the through-formed portion B1120, but is further extended rearward, and the sliding portions B1313 and B1323 of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 The sliding portions B1513 and B1523 of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are always opposed (abutted) regardless of the arrangement of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. As a result, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be stably guided in the front-rear direction.

The right extending portion B1220 has a sensor support portion B1221 formed so as to be able to support the first detection sensor B1230 at the left end, and a ball that has passed through the first detection sensor B1230 supported by the sensor support portion B1221. A guide portion B1222 formed so as to be able to guide to the discharge port B1150, an inclined surface B1223 formed so as to incline downward toward the left side in the front view of the ceiling portion, and a left side projecting from the left side. It has a ridge portion B1224 and a ridge support portion B1225 projecting leftward below the ridge portion B1224.

The protrusion B1224 protrudes from the vicinity of the upper end of the first detection sensor B1230 substantially parallel to the direction of inclination of the inclined surface B1243, thereby narrowing the entrance path of the ball to the first detection sensor B1230.

The ridge support portion B1225 projects from the vicinity of the lower end of the first detection sensor B1230 substantially parallel to the opening direction of the first specific prize winning opening B1001, thereby guiding the sliding displacement of the first guide plate B1300, which will be described later. It works.

The first detection sensor B1230 has a through hole as the first specific winning opening B1001. When the ball passes through the first specific winning hole B1001, the passage is detected by the first detection sensor B1230, a signal is transmitted to the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4), and the winning number is counted.

The left extending portion B1240 has a sensor support portion B1241 formed to be able to support the second detection sensor B1250 at the right end, and a ball passing through the second detection sensor B1250 supported by the sensor support portion B1241 on the back side. A guide portion B1242 formed so as to be able to guide to the discharge port B1150, an inclined surface B1243 formed so as to incline downward toward the right side in the front view of the ceiling portion, and a right side projecting rightward from the right side surface. It has a plurality of ridges B1244 and a ridge support B1245 projecting rightward below the ridges B1244.

The protrusion B1244 protrudes from the vicinity of the upper end of the second detection sensor B1250 substantially parallel to the direction of inclination of the inclined surface B1243, thereby narrowing the entrance path of the ball to the second detection sensor B1250.

The ridge support portion B1245 projects from the vicinity of the lower end of the second detection sensor B1250 substantially parallel to the opening direction of the second specific prize winning opening B1002, thereby guiding the sliding displacement of the second guide plate B1500, which will be described later. It works.

The second detection sensor B1250 has a through hole as the second specific winning opening B1002. When the ball passes through the second specific winning hole B1002, the passage is detected by the second detection sensor B1250, a signal is transmitted to the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4), and the winning number is counted.

The ball guide receiving portion B1260 is configured and arranged so that a ball entering inside is guided to the guide port B1160 on the back side and discharged to the back side of the thin plate member B1110.

The first guide plate B1300 is supported to be slidably displaceable forward and backward, and is in a state of protruding to the front side of the thin plate member B1110, and is capable of guiding (rolling) the ball toward the first specific winning hole B1001. and a closed state in which the ball is dropped, which is an open state and a state in which the ball is pulled to the rear side of the open state. an upstream member B1320 arranged upstream of the guide member B1310 and capable of guiding the ball to the guide member B1310; the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320 and a transmission hole B1340 formed in the coupling fixing member B1330 and involved in transmission of driving force from the first driving device B1400.

The guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320 are portions that are inserted through the base member B1100 from the front side at the time of assembly. assembled to member B1330). Details of the assembly method will be described later.

The guide member B1310 is a member that includes a left and right long plate-like portion, and has a width in the lateral direction that is about the diameter of a sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction can be arranged close to the first detection sensor B1230. A rolling surface B1311 formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the ball rolls, an upward extending portion B1312 extending obliquely upward from the front end on the right end side, and a left side It is provided with a sliding portion B1313 that is slidable on the extension support portion B1212, and a connection extension portion B1314 that extends to the back side of the plate-like portion and is connected to the connection fixing member B1330.

In addition, the rolling surface B1311 is formed as an inclined surface inclined downward to the right by 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal when viewed from the front.

The upwardly extending portion B1312 is a portion for preventing an unexpected entry of the ball into the first specific winning hole B1001. That is, when the first guide plate B1310 is closed when the first guide plate B1310 is closed, the upwardly extending portion B1312 is arranged inside the opening that constitutes the first specific winning opening B1001. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first specific winning hole B1001.

On the other hand, in the open state of the first guide plate B1310, it is arranged outside the opening that constitutes the first specific winning hole B1001, so that it is possible to avoid obstructing the entry of the ball into the first specific winning hole B1001. can.

In addition, the upwardly extending portion B1312 is formed to have a dimension that abuts on the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 when the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state. Thereby, in the open state of the first guide plate B1300, it is possible to increase the frictional resistance generated between the front side surface of the upper extending portion B1312 and the main body member B1210.

As a result, the vertical position of the downstream end of the guide member B1310 can be stabilized. That is, it is possible to prevent the downstream end portion of the guide member B1310 from being displaced downward (sinking displacement) or displaced upward (for example, upward displacement caused by the impact of the bounce of the ball).

In the present embodiment, the upper extending portion B1312 is formed to protrude toward the front side from the front end portions of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321, and the front end portions of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 are formed by the covering member. It stops at a position where the gap between B1200 and body member B1210 is less than the radius of the sphere. As a result, while maintaining the effect of stabilizing the vertical position of the guide member B1310 as described above, it is possible to shorten the formation width of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 and reduce the material cost. In addition, since the gap is less than the radius of the sphere, the lower end of the sphere can be placed on the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 when the first guide plate B1300 is opened. It is possible to facilitate the meandering of the ball rolling on B1321 back and forth.

Further, the upwardly extending portion B1312 is formed with an inclined surface B1312a on the opposite side of the first detection sensor B1230. The inclined surface B1312a functions to guide the ball toward the first detection sensor B1230 by being formed so as to move the contacting ball toward the back side when the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state.

In addition, the inclined surface B1312a is formed so that the contacting ball can be moved to the opposite side in the left-right direction of the first detection sensor B1230 when the first guide plate B1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state. to separate the ball from the first detection sensor B1230 and prevent (cut off) the ball from entering excessively.

As a result, the inclined surface B1312a makes it difficult for balls to enter the first detection sensor B1230 in a smooth manner, while making it difficult for balls to enter the first detection sensor B1230 in excess of the specified number.

The shape of the sliding portion B1313 is such that the side surfaces facing the lower right side surface B1215 and the right middle inclined surface B1217 of the extended support portion B1212 are planar parallel to the opposing side surfaces. In addition, the relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

The connecting extension portion B1314 is arranged on the left side (upstream side member B1320 side) from the longitudinal middle position of the guide member B1310.

The upstream member B1320 is a member including a left and right long plate-like portion, and is configured so that the width in the lateral direction is about the diameter of a sphere, and the left end in the longitudinal direction reaches the position below the ridge portion B1244. A rolling surface B1321 formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the ball rolls, a sliding portion B1323 on the right side that is slidable on the extended support portion B1212, and a plate-like portion. A connecting extension portion B1324 that extends to the rear side and is connected to the connecting fixing member B1330, and a formation portion that is formed so that the front side portion is removed while leaving the rear side end portion on the upper end side of the rolling surface B1321. B1325. The details of the inclination of the rolling surface B1321 will be described later.

The shape of the sliding portion B1323 is such that the side surface facing the upper left inclined surface B1214 of the extended support portion B1212 is a plane parallel to the opposing side surface. In addition, the relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

The connecting extension portion B1324 is arranged to the right side (toward the guide member B1310) from the longitudinal middle position of the upstream member B1320.

The formation portion B1325 is a portion that is cut for the purpose of avoiding collision with the upward extension portion B1512 of the second guide plate B1500 when the first guide plate B1300 is displaced. That is, the forming portion B1325 is formed with a sufficient horizontal width to avoid collision with the upwardly extending portion B1512.

On the other hand, the rear end portion of the notch of the forming portion B1325 (the portion arranged to face the upper extending portion B1512) can contact when the first guide plate B1300 is arranged at the front position (open state). It is formed. As a result, frictional resistance can be generated between the upstream member B1320 and the upward extension portion B1512 in the open state of the first guide plate B1300, so that the positional stability of the upstream member B1320 can be improved. .

The connection fixing member B1330 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with a thin upper and lower thickness, and includes a plurality of receiving portions B1331 formed so as to receive the connecting extension portions B1314 and B1324.

In this embodiment, the receiving portion B1331 is formed as a recess that is recessed in a shape corresponding to the rear ends of the connecting extensions B1314 and B1324. By engaging with the ends, the connecting extensions B1314 and B1324 are prevented from being dislocated with respect to the connecting fixing member B1330.

In addition, a fastening screw is inserted through an insertion hole (not shown) vertically drilled in the connecting extensions B1314 and B1324, and the inserted fastening screw is formed in the connecting fixing member B1330 in the vertical direction. By being screwed into the female thread provided therein, the connecting extension portions B1314 and B1324 are configured to be fastened and fixed to the connecting fixing member B1330.

The transmission hole B1340 includes a straight portion B1341 that extends linearly in the left-right direction, and a curved portion B1342 that extends from the right end of the straight portion B1341 along an arc centered on the projecting shaft portion B1432 of the first driving device B1400. Although it is configured as a through hole, its function will be described later.

The first drive device B1400 includes a first solenoid B1410 that linearly operates a movable member by switching excitation, a linear motion member B1420 fixed to the tip of a plunger (linear motion rod) of the first solenoid B1410, and a linear motion member B1420. A rotary member B1430 is provided, in which a short protruding portion B1434 is connected to the moving member B1420 and is rotatably supported about the protruding shaft portion B1432.

The direct-acting member B1420 has a through hole B1421 formed on the side opposite to the side fixed to the first solenoid B1410. The through hole B1421 is formed as a longitudinally elongated hole so as to receive the displacement of the short projecting portion B1434 of the rotating member B1430.

The rotating member B1430 includes a bent rod-shaped main body B1431, a projecting shaft B1432 projecting in the vertical direction from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body B1431, and an end of the main body B1431 projecting. A longitudinal projecting portion B1433 projecting in a columnar shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft portion B1432 from an end portion (first end portion) disposed on the left side of the shaft portion B1432, and an end portion of the main body portion B1431. a short projecting portion B1434 projecting in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft B1432 from an end (second end) that can be arranged on the right side of the projecting shaft B1432; Prepare.

The projecting shaft portion B1432 is supported by the rear cover member B1700, the details of which will be described later.

Since the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is inserted through the transmission hole B1340, the rotational movement of the rotating member B1430 displaces the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 along an arc trajectory centered on the projecting shaft portion B1432. Accordingly, the first guide plate B1300 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The short protruding portion B1434 is inserted into the through hole B1421, and is displaced as the through hole B1421 is displaced by the linear motion member B1420 being linearly displaced by switching the excitation state of the first solenoid B1410. .

The displacement of the short projecting portion B1434 is rotational displacement about the projecting shaft portion B1432. Since the short projecting portion B1434 and the long projecting portion B1433 are integrally formed via the body portion B1431, the long projecting portion B1433 is also rotationally displaced in correspondence with the displacement of the short projecting portion B1434.

In this embodiment, the shape of the curved portion B1342 of the transmission hole B1340 is an arc centered on the protruding shaft portion B1432, the radius of which is equal to the distance between the protruding shaft portion B1432 and the longitudinal protruding portion B1433. It has a shape that conforms to

As a result, the accuracy required for the amount of displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 for causing displacement of the first guide plate B1300 can be reduced. This effect is obtained by shifting the amount of displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 and the amount of displacement of the first guide plate B1300 accompanying the displacement of the transmission hole B1340.

More specifically, the first guide plate B1300 is displaced when the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 displaces the linear portion B1341. On the other hand, when the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is arranged on the curved portion B1342, the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is only displaced along the curved portion B1342, and the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 moves along the inner wall of the transmission hole B1340. is not generated in the longitudinal direction, the displacement of the first guide plate B1300 is not generated.

Therefore, as long as the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is arranged in the curved portion B1342, the displacement amount of the first guide plate B1300 is can be kept constant.

In other words, the curved portion B1342 can be used as a portion that absorbs the error in the amount of displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B1433. Therefore, for example, even if the displacement amount of the rotating member B1430 is insufficient due to deformation of the shape of the through hole B1421 due to aged deterioration, or insufficient displacement amount of the plunger of the first solenoid B1410 in the excited state, the shortage can be absorbed by the curved portion B1342, and the amount of displacement of the first guide plate B1300 can be kept constant.

The distance between the longitudinal protrusion B1433 and the protrusion shaft B1432 is designed to be longer than the distance between the short protrusion B1434 and the protrusion shaft B1432. As a result, the displacement amount of the first guide plate B1300 can be ensured while suppressing the displacement amount of the linear motion member B1420 (the displacement amount of the plunger of the first solenoid B1410).

Since the second guide plate B1500 is basically configured to have a symmetrically inverted shape of the first guide plate B1300, its functions are common except that they are opposite in the left-right direction.

That is, the second guide plate B1500 is supported so as to be slidably displaceable forward and backward, and is in a state of protruding forward from the thin plate member B1110, and guides (rolls) the ball toward the second specific winning hole B1002. and a closed state in which the ball is dropped, which is an open state in which the ball is dropped, and a second specific winning opening B1002. A guide member B1510 arranged so as to be able to guide the ball, an upstream member B1520 arranged upstream of the guide member B1510 and arranged so as to be able to guide the ball to the guide member B1510, the guide member B1510 and the upstream side A connecting fixing member B1530 to which the member B1520 is fixed, and a transmission hole B1540 formed in the connecting fixing member B1530 and involved in the transmission of the driving force from the second driving device B1600.

The guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are portions that are inserted through the base member B1100 from the front side at the time of assembly. assembled to member B1530). Details of the assembly method will be described later.

The guide member B1510 is a member that includes a left and right long plate-like portion, and has a lateral width that is approximately the diameter of a sphere. A rolling surface B1511 formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the ball rolls, an upper extending portion B1512 extending obliquely upward from the front end on the left end side, and a right side portion It is provided with a sliding portion B1513 that is slidable on the extension support portion B1212, and a connection extension portion B1514 that extends to the rear side of the plate-like portion and is connected to the connection fixing member B1530.

In addition, the rolling surface B1511 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward to the left by 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal when viewed from the front.

The upwardly extending portion B1512 is a portion for preventing an unexpected entry of the ball into the second specific winning hole B1002. That is, when the second guide plate B1510 is closed, the upwardly extending portion B1512 is arranged inside the opening forming the second specific winning opening B1002 when viewed in the opening direction of the second specific winning opening B1002. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second specific winning hole B1002.

On the other hand, in the open state of the second guide plate B1510, it is arranged outside the opening that constitutes the second specific winning hole B1002, so that it is possible to avoid obstructing the ball entering the second specific winning hole B1002. can.

In addition, the upwardly extending portion B1512 is formed to have a dimension that abuts on the body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 when the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state. Thereby, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, it is possible to increase the frictional resistance generated between the front side surface of the upper extending portion B1512 and the main body member B1210.

As a result, the vertical position of the downstream end of the guide member B1510 can be stabilized. That is, it is possible to prevent the downstream end of the guide member B1510 from being displaced downward (sinking displacement) or displaced upward (for example, upward displacement caused by the impact of the bounce of the ball).

In this embodiment, the upwardly extending portion B1512 is formed to protrude toward the front side from the front end portions of the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521. It stops at a position where the gap between B1200 and body member B1210 is less than the radius of the sphere. As a result, while maintaining the effect of stabilizing the vertical position of the guide member B1510 as described above, it is possible to shorten the formation width of the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 and reduce the material cost. In addition, since the clearance is less than the radius of the sphere, the lower end of the sphere can be placed on the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 when the second guide plate B1500 is opened. It is possible to facilitate the meandering of the ball rolling on the B1521 back and forth.

Further, the upwardly extending portion B1512 is formed with an inclined surface B1512a on the opposite side of the second detection sensor B1250. The inclined surface B1512a functions to guide the ball toward the second detection sensor B1250 by being formed so as to move the contacting ball toward the back side when the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state.

In addition, the inclined surface B1512a is formed so that when the second guide plate B1500 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the contacting ball can be moved to the left-right direction opposite side of the second detection sensor B1250. moves the ball away from the second detection sensor B1250 and functions to prevent (cut off) the ball from entering excessively.

As a result, the inclined surface B1512a can make it difficult for a ball to enter the second detection sensor B1250 in a smooth manner while exceeding the prescribed number of balls.

The shape of the sliding portion B1513 is such that the side surfaces facing the lower left side surface B1216 and the left middle inclined surface B1218 of the extended support portion B1212 are planar parallel to the opposing side surfaces. In addition, the relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

The connecting extension portion B1514 is arranged on the left side (on the opposite side of the upstream member B1520) from the longitudinal middle position of the guide member B1510.

The upstream member B1520 is a member including a left-right long plate-like portion, and has a width in the lateral direction approximately equal to the diameter of a sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction reaches a position below the ridge portion B1224. A rolling surface B1521 formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the ball rolls; A connecting extension portion B1524 that extends to the rear side and is connected to the connecting fixing member B1530, and a formation portion that is formed so that the front side portion is removed while leaving the rear side end portion on the upper end side of the rolling surface B1521. B1525. Details of the inclination of the rolling surface B1521 will be described later.

The shape of the sliding portion B1523 is such that the side surface facing the upper right inclined surface B1213 of the extended support portion B1212 is a plane parallel to the opposing side surface. In addition, the relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

The connecting extension portion B1524 is arranged on the right side (on the opposite side of the guide member B1510) from the longitudinal middle position of the upstream member B1520.

The forming portion B1525 is a portion cut for the purpose of avoiding collision with the upwardly extending portion B1312 of the first guide plate B1300 when the second guide plate B1500 is displaced. That is, the forming portion B1525 is formed with a sufficient lateral width to avoid collision with the upwardly extending portion B1312.

On the other hand, the rear end portion of the notch of the forming portion B1525 (the portion facing the upper extending portion B1312) can contact when the second guide plate B1500 is arranged at the front position (open state). It is formed. As a result, frictional resistance can be generated between the upstream member B1520 and the upwardly extending portion B1312 in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, so the positional stability of the upstream member B1520 can be improved. .

The connection fixing member B1530 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with a thin top and bottom thickness, and includes a plurality of receiving portions B1531 formed so as to receive the connecting extension portions B1514 and B1524.

In this embodiment, the receiving portion B1531 is formed as a recess that is recessed in a shape corresponding to the rear ends of the connecting extensions B1514 and B1524. By engaging with the ends, the connecting extensions B1514 and B1524 are prevented from being dislocated with respect to the connecting fixing member B1530.

In addition, a fastening screw is inserted through an insertion hole (not shown) vertically drilled in the connecting extensions B1514 and B1524, and the inserted fastening screw is formed in the connecting fixing member B1530 in the vertical direction. By being screwed into the female thread provided therein, the connecting extension portions B1514 and B1524 are configured to be fastened and fixed to the connecting fixing member B1530.

The transmission hole B1540 includes a straight portion B1541 that extends linearly in the left-right direction, and a curved portion B1542 that extends from the right end of the straight portion B1541 along an arc centered on the projecting shaft B1632 of the second driving device B1600. Although it is configured as a through hole, its function will be described later.

As described above, the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 have substantially the same configuration, but there are portions that differ in shape and arrangement. In particular, the shape and arrangement of the connecting fixing member B1330 of the first guide plate B1300 and the shape and arrangement of the connecting fixing member B1530 of the second guide plate B1500 are different. The arrangement and extension length of B1314 and B1324 are different from the arrangement and extension length of the coupling extension portions B1514 and B1524 of the second guide plate B1500.

Specifically, the connecting fixing member B1330 is formed to have a shorter lateral length than the connecting fixing member B1530, and is arranged on the front side. Along with this, the connecting extensions B1314 and B1324 are shorter in length in the front-rear direction than the connecting extensions B1514 and B1524, and are arranged on the left and right inner sides. As a result, collision between the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 can be avoided, the details of which will be described later.

The second drive device B1600 includes a second solenoid B1610 that linearly operates a movable member by switching excitation, a linear motion member B1620 fixed to the tip of a plunger (linear motion rod) of the second solenoid B1610, and a linear motion member B1620. A rotation member B1630 is provided, in which a short projecting portion B1634 is connected to the moving member B1620 and is rotatably supported around the projecting shaft portion B1632.

The direct-acting member B1620 has a through hole B1621 formed on the side opposite to the side fixed to the second solenoid B1610. The through hole B1621 is formed as a longitudinally elongated hole so as to receive the displacement of the short projecting portion B1634 of the rotating member B1630.

The rotary member B1630 includes a bent rod-shaped main body B1631, a projecting shaft B1632 projecting in the vertical direction from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body B1631, and an end of the main body B1631 projecting. A longitudinal projecting portion B1633 projecting in a columnar shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft portion B1632 from an end portion (first end portion) disposed on the left side of the shaft portion B1632, and an end portion of the main body portion B1631. a short projecting portion B1634 projecting in a columnar shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft B1632 from an end (second end) that can be arranged on the right side of the projecting shaft B1632; Prepare.

The projecting shaft portion B1632 is supported by the rear cover member B1700, the details of which will be described later.

Since the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is inserted through the transmission hole B1540, the rotational movement of the rotating member B1630 displaces the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 along an arc trajectory centered on the projecting shaft portion B1632. Accordingly, the second guide plate B1500 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The short protruding portion B1634 is inserted into the through hole B1621, and is displaced as the through hole B1621 is displaced by the linear motion member B1620 being linearly displaced by switching the excitation state of the second solenoid B1610. .

The displacement of the short projecting portion B1634 is rotational displacement about the projecting shaft portion B1632. Since the short projecting portion B1634 and the long projecting portion B1633 are integrally formed via the body portion B1631, the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is also rotationally displaced in correspondence with the displacement of the short projecting portion B1634.

In this embodiment, the shape of the curved portion B1542 of the transmission hole B1540 is an arc centered on the protruding shaft portion B1632, the radius of which is equal to the distance between the protruding shaft portion B1632 and the longitudinal protruding portion B1633. It has a shape that conforms to

As a result, the accuracy required for the amount of displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 for causing displacement of the second guide plate B1500 can be reduced. This effect is obtained by shifting the amount of displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 and the amount of displacement of the second guide plate B1500 accompanying the displacement of the transmission hole B1540.

More specifically, the second guide plate B1500 is displaced when the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 displaces the linear portion B1541. On the other hand, when the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is arranged on the curved portion B1542, the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is only displaced along the curved portion B1542, and the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 moves along the inner wall of the transmission hole B1540. in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the second guide plate B1500 does not occur.

Therefore, as long as the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is arranged in the curved portion B1542, the displacement amount of the second guide plate B1500 is can be kept constant.

In other words, the curved portion B1542 can be used as a portion that absorbs the error in the amount of displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B1633. Therefore, even if the amount of displacement of the rotating member B1630 is insufficient due to, for example, the shape of the through hole B1621 being deformed due to deterioration over time, or the amount of displacement of the plunger of the second solenoid B1610 in the excited state being insufficient, the amount of displacement of the rotary member B1630 is insufficient. can be absorbed by the curved portion B1542, and the amount of displacement of the second guide plate B1500 can be kept constant.

The distance between the longitudinal protrusion B1633 and the protrusion shaft B1632 is designed to be longer than the distance between the short protrusion B1634 and the protrusion shaft B1632. As a result, the displacement amount of the second guide plate B1500 can be ensured while suppressing the displacement amount of the linear motion member B1620 (the displacement amount of the plunger of the second solenoid B1610).

The rear cover member B1700 includes a main body portion B1710 having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of left and right connecting plate portions B1720 extending from the front end portion of the main body portion B1710 to the left and right outer sides and constituting a connecting surface with the thin plate member B1110, and a main body. A first support plate B1730 disposed at the left and right inner lower ends of the portion B1710 and capable of supporting the first solenoid B1410 on the upper surface side, and a first guide plate B1300 disposed above the first support plate B1730 are connected. A second support plate B1740 arranged such that its upper surface contacts the lower surface of the fixing member B1330, and the lower surface contacts the upper surface of the connection fixing member B1530 of the second guide plate B1500 arranged above the second support plate B1740. A third support plate B1750 arranged to be in contact with the third support plate B1750, and a second solenoid B1610 arranged above the third support plate B1750 and at the left and right inner upper end positions of the main body B1710 so that the second solenoid B1610 can be supported on the lower surface side. and a fourth support plate B1760.

The main body B1710 is configured so that the first support plate B1730 can be disassembled downward and the fourth support plate B1760 can be disassembled upward. That is, the first driving device B1400 including the first solenoid B1410 supported by the first supporting plate B1730 and the second driving device B1600 including the second solenoid B1610 supported by the fourth supporting plate B1760 are connected to the main body B1710. can be removed in the vertical direction from the

The coupling plate portion B1720 includes a receiving portion B1721 through which the screw portion of the fastening screw can be inserted. The rear cover member B1700 is fastened and fixed to the thin plate member B1110 by screwing the fastening screw inserted through the receiving portion B1721 into the female threaded portion of the thin plate member B1110.

The first support plate B1730 is arranged rearward of the front end position of the coupling plate portion B1720, and has a discharge portion B1731 for forming a gap between the first support plate B1730 and the thin plate member B1110.

The ejection part B1731 forms a through hole with the thin plate member B1110 through which the ball ejected from the ejection port B1150 passes. Balls discharged from this through hole (balls discharged from the discharge port B1150 or the detour B1170) are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The second support plate B1740 has a concave portion B1741 for allowing the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 of the first driving device B1400 to pass through in the vertical direction. The formation range of the recessed portion B1741 is formed to be as small as possible on the premise that it is a range that includes the movement trajectory of the longitudinal projecting portion B1433. As a result, a flat portion other than the recessed portion B1741 can be secured, and the connecting fixing member B1330 of the first guide plate B1300 can be stably supported.

The third support plate B1750 has a concave portion B1751 for allowing the longitudinal protrusion B1633 of the second driving device B1600 to pass through in the vertical direction. The formation range of the recessed portion B1751 is formed to be as small as possible on the premise that it is a range that includes the movement trajectory of the longitudinal projecting portion B1633. As a result, a flat portion other than the recessed portion B1751 can be secured, and the connecting fixing member B1530 of the second guide plate B1500 can be stably surface-supported from the upper surface side.

Here, an example of a method of assembling the variable winning device B1000 and a method of assembling it to the base plate 60 will be described. Only the covering member B1200, the guide members B1310 and B1510 of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 are assembled from the front side to the thin plate member B1110, and the others are assembled from the rear side.

In assembling the variable prize winning device B1000, first, the guide members B1310, B1510 and the upstream members B1320, B1520 are inserted from the front side of the thin plate member B1110 into the through formation portion B1120, and the connection fixing member is attached to the back side of the thin plate member B1110. Fasten and fix with B1330 and B1530.

Next, the rear cover member B1700 from which the first support plate B1730 and the fourth support plate B1760 are removed is fastened and fixed to the thin plate member B1110. At this time, the connection fixing members B1330 and B1530 are accommodated inside the second support plate B1740 and the third support plate B1750 in the vertical direction.

Next, the first support plate B1730 to which the first driving device B1400 is assembled is assembled to the main body portion B1710 while the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is inserted into the transmission hole B1340 of the first guide plate B1300. Similarly, the fourth support plate B1760 to which the second driving device B1600 is assembled is assembled to the main body portion B1710 while the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is inserted through the transmission hole B1540 of the second guide plate B1500.

After fastening and fixing the covering member B1200 to the thin plate member B1110, the variable winning device B1000 can be assembled to the base plate 60 by assembling the variable winning device B1000 to the base plate 60 from the front side and fastening and fixing.

The closed state of the second guide plate B1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. FIG. 130 is a front view of the variable winning device B1000, and FIG. 131 is a sectional view of the variable winning device B1000 along line CXXXI-CXXXI of FIG. 130 and 131, the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are in a closed state, and in FIG. The shape is made visible.

In FIG. 130, in the pre-entering range, at least a portion of the range through which the ball cannot pass is supplementarily marked with polka dots (dots). 130, the extended support part B1212 is formed over the range between the base member B1100 and the covering member B1200, so that the sphere is formed. The upper extending portions B1312 and B1512 are configured to be unable to pass through, and are configured to be unable to pass the sphere by being arranged at a substantially intermediate position between the base member B1100 and the covering member B1200.

As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, when the second guide plate B1500 is closed, the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are guided by the through formation portion B1120 and are closer to the rear side than the front plate surface of the thin plate member B1110. By arranging the base member B1100 at the top, the gap between the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100 and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 can be maintained without narrowing.

The thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100 and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 are arranged side by side with a space that allows a ball to pass through. It is possible to drop the ball that has reached between the installation portion B1240 and the variable winning device B1000.

As shown in FIG. 131, in the closed state of the second guide plate B1500, the upward extending portion B1512 is arranged to partially close the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the second specific winning hole B1002.

Therefore, irregular prize winning (for example, even if it is not guided by the second guide plate B1500, the ball that collides with other components is thrown laterally and enters the second special prize opening B1002) and cheating (For example, the act of attracting a ball with a magnet to win a prize, or the act of winning a prize by manipulating the position of the ball by pulling or shaking the end of the string on the opposite side of the ball launched with the string glued) It is possible to prevent winning by

The open state of the second guide plate B1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. FIG. 132(a) is a front view of the variable winning device B1000, FIG. 132(b) is a partially enlarged front view of the variable winning device B1000 in range CXXXIIb of FIG. 132(a), and FIG. 132(a) is a cross-sectional view of variable prize winning device B1000 taken along line CXXXIII-CXXXIII of FIG.

132(a), 132(b) and 133, the first guide plate B1300 is closed, the second guide plate B1500 is opened, and FIGS. 132(a) and 132(b) ), the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is illustrated transparently, and the shape of the rear side thereof can be visually recognized. Also, in FIG. 132(a), a ball passing through the second detection sensor B1250 is illustrated as an example of a falling ball, and in FIG. illustrated.

In FIGS. 132(a) and 132(b), at least a part of the range where the ball cannot pass is supplementarily marked with polka dots (dots) in the pre-ball entry range. 132(a) and 132(b), the plate-like portions of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are added to the range described above in FIG. On the other hand, the polka dot pattern (dots) is erased from the upper extending portion B1512.

That is, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the second guide plate B1500 is slid to the front side, so that the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510, the upstream member B1520, and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 are separated. The gap between is set to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the sphere is configured to be unable to pass downward on the front side of the second guide plate B1500.

On the other hand, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the upwardly extending portion B1512 is arranged close to the covering member B1200 so as not to interfere with the entry of the ball into the second specific winning hole B1002.

As shown in FIGS. 132(a), 132(b), and 133, when the second guide plate B1500 is opened, the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are guided to the through formation portion B1120, and the thin plate member B1110 overhangs the front plate surface to the front side, and the distance between the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 and the body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is set to be less than the diameter of the sphere, thereby extending to the right side. A ball reaching between the portion B1220 and the left extending portion B1240 is prevented from falling.

In this embodiment, since the distance between the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 and the body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is less than the radius of the sphere, the lower end of the sphere is the rolling surface. Take B1311, B1321. As a result, the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 can be easily meandered in the longitudinal direction of the rolling ball.

As shown in FIG. 133, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the upwardly extending portion B1512 is arranged at a position not blocking the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. Specifically, it is moved to a position overlapping the frame forming the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. Therefore, the ball can pass through the second specific winning opening B1002.

In the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the ball that reaches between the right extended portion B1220 and the left extended portion B1240 rolls on the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 of the second guide plate B1500 along the inclination, It passes through the second detection sensor B1250 from the left end.

In the open state of the second guide plate B1500, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 and the body member B1210 of the covering member B1200. As a result, compared to the case where the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are formed to be large enough to abut against the main body member B1210, the required material can be reduced, and compared to the case where they abut. Since the occurrence of load can be prevented, an advantageous effect such as improving the durability of the second guide plate B1500 can be obtained.

Here, with reference to FIG. 132(b), the action of the extended support portion B1212 on the longitudinal slide displacement of the second guide plate B1500 will be described. As described above, the extension support portion B1212 extends to the rear of the through formation portion B1120, and can abut on the second guide plate B1500 in the vertical direction regardless of the arrangement of the second guide plate B1500.

As shown in FIG. 132(b), the extended support portion B1212 has a main body portion having a laterally elongated diamond-shaped cross section and a lower end portion of the main body portion, and has a horizontally long rectangular cross section. A lower support portion formed in a pentagonal shape with a triangle on the upper side is provided, and a space between the main body portion and the lower support portion is configured to be constricted left and right inward.

The main body portion of the extended support portion B1212 has an upper right inclined surface formed on the upper surface thereof as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the left and right outer sides with the horizontal center position that coincides with the horizontal direction center of the projecting portion B1211 as the vertex. B1213, an upper left inclined surface B1214, and a lower right side surface B1215 and a lower left side surface B1216 that constitute the upper side surface of the constriction formed between the lower support portion.

The lower support portion of the extended support portion B1212 is formed on its upper surface as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the left and right outer sides with the left-right center position corresponding to the left-right center of the projecting portion B1211 as the vertex. It has an arrangement inclined surface B1217 and a left central arrangement inclined surface B1218.

The upper right inclined surface B1213 is arranged to face the lower surface of the sliding portion B1523, and has a shape corresponding to the lower surface of the sliding portion B1523 (in the present embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the lower surface of the sliding portion B1523). and configured to allow surface contact. As a result, it is possible to stably guide the longitudinal displacement of the sliding portion B1523 while suppressing the downward displacement of the sliding portion B1523.

The upper left inclined surface B1214 is arranged to face the lower surface of the sliding portion B1323, and has a shape corresponding to the lower surface of the sliding portion B1323 (in the present embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the lower surface of the sliding portion B1323). and configured to allow surface contact. As a result, it is possible to stably guide the longitudinal displacement of the sliding portion B1323 while suppressing the downward displacement of the sliding portion B1523.

The lower right side surface B1215 is arranged to face the upper side surface of the sliding portion B1313, and has a shape corresponding to the upper side surface of the sliding portion B1313 (in this embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the upper plane of the sliding portion B1313). and configured to allow surface contact. In addition, the right central inclined surface B1217 is arranged to face the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1313, and has a shape corresponding to the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1313 (in this embodiment, it is parallel to the lower side plane of the sliding portion B1313). planar) and configured to allow surface contact. As a result, it is possible to stably guide the longitudinal displacement of the sliding portion B1313 while suppressing the vertical displacement of the sliding portion B1313.

The lower left side surface B1216 is arranged to face the upper side surface of the sliding portion B1513, and has a shape corresponding to the upper side surface of the sliding portion B1513 (in this embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the upper plane of the sliding portion B1513). It is configured so that surface contact is possible. In addition, the left central inclined surface B1218 is arranged to face the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1513, and has a shape corresponding to the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1513 (in this embodiment, it is parallel to the lower side plane of the sliding portion B1513). planar) and configured to allow surface contact. As a result, it is possible to stably guide the longitudinal displacement of the sliding portion B1513 while suppressing the vertical displacement of the sliding portion B1513.

In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, as shown in FIG. It is formed on the same plane as the plane on which the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 are arranged, and the lower right arranged side surface B1215 and the left middle arranged inclined surface B1218 are arranged on the same plane as the lower surfaces of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520. , and the lower left side surface B1216 and the right middle inclined surface B1217 are designed to be formed on the same plane as the lower surfaces of the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320.

On the other hand, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is naturally conceivable that each surface formed on the extended support portion B1212 is not only flat, but also has a shape including other shapes (curved surface shape, uneven shape, saw blade shape, etc.).

In particular, it is functionally significant that the upper right inclined surface B1213 and the upper left inclined surface B1214, which function as rolling surfaces of spheres, are planar. By matching the shapes of the moving parts B1313, B1323, B1513, and B1523, the above-described effects can be produced.

In that case, as a design concept, it is considered that, compared to line contact, surface contact improves the function of guiding displacement, but also increases frictional resistance. In this embodiment, the lateral width of the extended support portion B1212 is designed so as to reduce the frictional resistance while ensuring the action of guiding the displacement.

In addition, the sliding portions B1313, B1323, B1513, and B1523 are shaped so as to be able to guide the ball even in a configuration in which the extended support portion B1212 is omitted. That is, both the sliding portions B1313 and B1323 of the first guide plate B1300 and the sliding portions B1513 and B1523 of the second guide plate B1500 protrude left and right inward so as to narrow the gap in the left and right direction. As a result, regardless of the state of the extended support portion B1212 (for example, even if it is damaged), by rolling the ball on the upper surface of the guide plate B1300, B1500, to the specific winning openings B1001, B1002 You can guide the ball.

134 to 136 are top views of the variable winning device B1000. FIG. 134 shows the case where the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are in the closed state, and FIG. 135 shows the first guide plate B1300 in the open state and the second guide plate B1500 in the closed state. FIG. 136 shows a case where the first guide plate B1300 is closed and the second guide plate B1500 is opened.

Switching of excitation of the solenoid will be described below. In FIG. 134, neither the first solenoid B1410 nor the second solenoid B1610 is energized and is in a non-excited state. This is the standby state of the variable winning device B1000, which is maintained before the start of the game or in the normal state, and the variable winning device B1000 is maintained in this state for most of its operating time.

Mainly in the special game state, as shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the first solenoid B1410 or the second solenoid B1610 is energized and excited to change the state of the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500. can be switched.

As shown in FIG. 135, the second solenoid B1610 is kept de-energized, and when the first solenoid B1410 is energized, the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, and the first detection sensor B1230 first specific winning It becomes possible to guide the ball to the mouth B1001.

The state of the first guide plate B1300 is switched by longitudinal sliding displacement, but the longitudinal displacement of the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320 of the first guide plate B1300 is smoothly supported by the covering member B1200. done.

The downstream end (right end) of the guide member B1310 is supported by the ridge support portion B1225, and the upstream end (left end) of the guide member B1310 is arranged to the lower right of the extended support portion B1212. It is sandwiched and supported from above and below by the side surface B1215 and the right central inclined surface B1217 (see FIG. 132(b)).

As a result, firstly, even when a plurality of balls ride on the guide member B1310, the guide member B1310 can be prevented from sinking and displacing, and the ball enters the first specific winning hole B1001. You can make the ball go smoothly.

Secondly, since positional deviation between the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 and the upper surface of the guide member B1310 can be suppressed, the balls flow smoothly from the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 to the upper surface of the guide member B1310. be able to.

The ridge support portion B1225 and the extended support portion B1212 can be formed along the length direction (horizontal direction) of the guide member B1310. only form. Thereby, the displacement resistance (frictional resistance) of the first guide plate B1300 can be reduced.

A downstream end (right end) of the upstream member B1320 is supported by an extended support portion B1212. As a result, even when a plurality of balls ride on the upstream member B1320, it is possible to avoid the sinking displacement of the upstream member B1320, and the balls enter the extended support portion B1212 smoothly. can be done.

In this embodiment, the rolling surface B1321 of the upstream member B1320, the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 inclined downward to the right, and the rolling surface B1311 of the guide member B1310 are flush with each other and have the same inclination angle. is designed to be As a result, steps in the vertical direction can be removed from the ball's flow-down path, and the ball can smoothly flow down to the first specific winning hole B1001.

As shown in FIG. 136, the first solenoid B1410 is kept de-energized, and when the second solenoid B1610 is energized, the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state, and the second detection sensor B1250 second specific winning It becomes possible to guide the ball to the mouth B1002.

The state of the second guide plate B1500 is switched by longitudinal sliding displacement, but the longitudinal displacement of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 of the second guide plate B1500 is smoothly supported by the covering member B1200. done.

The downstream end (left end) of the guide member B1510 is supported by the ridge support portion B1245, and the upstream end (right end) of the guide member B1510 is located on the lower left side surface of the extended support portion B1212. It is sandwiched and supported from above and below by the B1216 and the left central inclined surface B1218 (see FIG. 132(b)).

As a result, firstly, even if a plurality of balls ride on the guide member B1510, it is possible to avoid the guide member B1510 from sinking and being displaced, so that the ball enters the second specific winning hole B1002. You can make the ball go smoothly.

Secondly, since positional deviation between the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 and the upper surface of the guide member B1510 can be suppressed, the balls flow smoothly from the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 to the upper surface of the guide member B1510. be able to.

The ridge support portion B1245 and the extended support portion B1212 can be formed along the length direction (horizontal direction) of the guide member B1510. only form. Thereby, the displacement resistance (frictional resistance) of the second guide plate B1500 can be reduced.

A downstream end (left end) of the upstream member B1520 is supported by an extended support portion B1212. As a result, even when a plurality of balls ride on the upstream member B1520, it is possible to avoid the sinking displacement of the upstream member B1520, and the balls smoothly flow down to the extended support portion B1212. can be done.

In this embodiment, the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520, the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 inclined downward to the right, and the rolling surface B1511 of the guide member B1510 are flush with each other and have the same inclination angle. is designed to be As a result, steps in the vertical direction can be removed from the ball's flow-down path, and the ball can smoothly flow down to the second specific winning hole B1002.

Next, an example of how the ball flows down will be described. FIG. 137(a) is a front view of the variable winning device B1000, FIG. 137(b) is a top view of the variable winning device B1000 viewed from the direction of arrow CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137(a), and FIG. 138(a). 137(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B1000 along line CXXXVIIIa-CXXXVIIIa, and FIG. 138(b) is a cross-sectional view of variable winning device B1000 along line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of FIG. 137(a). .

137 and 138, the first guide plate B1300 is closed, the second guide plate B1500 is open, and a plurality of balls are rolling on the upper surface of the first guide plate B1500. illustrated.

FIG. 137 shows a state in which three balls are placed on the upper surface of the second guide plate B1500. It is For ease of understanding, the spheres connected on the upstream side are a cross section passing through the center of the protruding portion B1140 (see FIG. 138(b)) or a cross section passing through the center of the protruding portion B1211 (see FIG. 138 ( a) see) is positioned so that the center of the sphere is located.

The projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are formed on the base member B1100 or on the covering member B1200. designed with the common purpose of influencing

In this embodiment, the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 do not affect the balls rolling on the downstream side with reference to the lateral center position of the extended support portion B1212, while the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 roll on the upstream side. The sphere is designed to affect.

That is, the downstream side (left side in the open state of the second guide plate B1500) of the protruding portion B1211 formed right above the left-right center position of the extended support portion B1212, hereinafter simply referred to as "lower part of the range before ball entry" ) are arranged above the rolling locus of the ball. Therefore, when the ball rolls on the second guide plate B1500, the ball does not collide with the protrusions B1140 and B1211 arranged in the lower part of the pre-ball entry range.

On the other hand, the upstream side (right side in the open state of the second guide plate B1500) of the projecting portion B1211 formed right above the left-right center position of the extended support portion B1212, hereinafter simply referred to as "upper part of the range before entering the ball" ) are arranged at least partially inside the rolling trajectory of the ball.

Arrangement of the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 with respect to the ball that reaches the ball-entering range and flows down will be described. In this embodiment, when the ball is shot with a right-hand shot, when the ball that did not enter the second winning hole 640 (see FIG. 124) reaches the inclined surface B1223 of the variable winning device B1000, along the inclination It will flow down to the left and reach the range before entering the ball.

In this case, it is unknown whether the ball flows down the side close to the base plate 60 (the rear side of the flow-down path) or the side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) (the front side of the flow-down path). However, the ball is configured to hit the protrusions B1140 and B1211 at least twice.

For example, when the ball flows down the front side of the flow-down path, as shown in FIG. 138(a), the ball abuts on the projecting portion B1211 and flows down while being displaced to the rear side of the flow-down path. After that, since the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 are arranged alternately in the front and rear directions, the ball comes into contact with the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 three times before reaching the lower part of the pre-entering range, and the falling velocity of the ball is reduced. be done.

Further, for example, when the ball flows down the rear side of the flow-down path, although it does not abut on the protruding portion B1211 arranged most upstream, as shown in FIG. , and flows down while being displaced to the front side of the flow-down path. After that, it comes into contact with the protruding part B1211 arranged right above the extended support part B1212, so it has to contact the protruding parts B1140 and B1211 twice before reaching the lower part of the range before entering the ball. , and the velocity of the sphere is decelerated.

Here, since the projection B1140 and the left and right projections B1211 are arranged outside the movement locus of the ball rolling on the rolling surface B1311 of the first guide plate B1300, their lower end positions are Due to the different design, the position of the abutting ball (abutting height) is different. Therefore, without countermeasures, the ball may escape from the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 by the amount of curvature of the ball, and the deceleration effect may be weakened.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the projecting length of the projecting portion B1140 is made longer than the projecting length of the projecting portion B1211 arranged on the left and right, thereby reducing the deceleration that the projecting portion B1140 gives to the ball. The action and the action of deceleration given to the ball by the projecting portions B1211 arranged on the left and right sides can be maintained at the same level. A detailed description will be given below.

As shown in FIG. 138(a), the position (abutment height) of the sphere BP2 that abuts on the projecting portion B1211 on the right end in the front-rear direction is a position separated by a length BH1 above the center BCP of the sphere. . On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138(b), the position (contact height) of the sphere BP1 that abuts on the protruding portion B1140 in the front-rear direction is a position separated by a length BH2 above the center BCP of the sphere. becomes.

Here, since the length BH2 is longer than the length BH1 (BH2>BH1), if the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 have the same projecting length, the balls BP1 and BP2 are equal to the projecting portions B1140 and B1140. When rolling on the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520 in contact with the plate member (thin plate member B1110 or main body member B1210) on the base end side of B1211, the ball Regarding the amount of longitudinal displacement required for BP1 and BP2, the amount of displacement when avoiding the projecting portion B1211 on the right end is larger than the amount of displacement when avoiding the projecting portion B1140.

In other words, the longitudinal displacements of the spheres BP1 and BP2 caused by the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are not uniform in the longitudinal direction, and the rearward displacement is greater than the forward displacement, causing the spheres to flow down. Since the path is a curved (curved) line that is asymmetrical in the front-rear direction, the positions (contact heights) of the spheres BP1 and BP2 contacting the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 in the front-rear direction are the center BCP of the spheres. As a result, the action of decelerating the balls BP1 and BP2 is slightly weakened.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the projecting length of the projecting portion B1140 is formed longer than the projecting length of the left and right projecting portions B1211, and the balls BP1 and BP2 are located on the proximal side of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211. When rolling on the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520 in contact with the plate member (the thin plate member B1110 or the main body member B1210), the balls BP1 and BP2 are required to avoid the projecting portions B1140 and B1211. It is configured such that the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction that is applied is the same. As a result, the deceleration effect due to the contact between the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 and the rolling balls can be fully exhibited.

Although the projecting length of the projecting portion B1140 is increased, this design change is to change the rolling path of the balls BP1 and BP2 to the balls BP1 and BP2 that abut the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 in the front-rear direction. (contact height) is the center BCP of the sphere. This is not a design change that narrows the gap widths BCL1 and BCL2 between the balls BP1 and BP2 and the protrusions B1140 and B1211 when they are in contact with the body member B1210).

That is, the gap width BCL1 (see FIG. 138(a)) between the ball BP2 rolling on the upstream member B1520 and the projecting portion B1211 in contact with the thin plate member B1110 and the ball BP2 rolling on the upstream member B1520. It is equivalent to the gap width BCL2 (see FIG. 138(b)) between the ball BP1 and the projecting portion B1140 in the state of contact with the main body member B1210 (BCL1=BCL2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent clogging of the ball BP1 while increasing the length of the projecting portion B1140.

As described above, the present embodiment adopts a design concept that the range of formation of the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 is limited to the positions where deceleration of the ball is desired to occur in the flow path. As a result, the falling speed of the ball flowing down the upper part of the pre-entering range and the falling speed of the ball flowing down the lower part of the pre-entering range can be made different.

In this embodiment, the projecting length of the projecting portion B1211 is designed to be the same at three locations on the left and right. That is, the projecting length of the projecting portions B1211 arranged on the left and right is made equal to the projecting length of the projecting portion B1211 arranged directly above the extended support portion B1212.

Since the formation height of the projecting portion B1211 arranged in the center of the left and right extends over the entire vertical width of the rolling trajectory of the ball, the position of the ball contacting the projecting portion B1211 arranged in the center of the left and right (contact height ) is equivalent to the center BCP of the sphere.

Therefore, when the balls BP1 and BP2 roll on the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520 while being in contact with the plate member (main body member B1210) on the base end side of the projecting portion B1211, The amount of longitudinal displacement of the balls BP1 and BP2 required to avoid the protruding portion B1211 on the right side is greater than the amount of displacement required to avoid the protruding portion B1211 on the right end.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the decelerating action of the ball by the projecting portion B1211 arranged in the center of the left and right is configured to be greater than the decelerating effect of the ball by the other projecting portions B1140 and B1211 (maximum ). As a result, the balls rolling on the upper surfaces of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be easily separated (divided) using the projecting portion B1211 at the center of the left and right as a boundary.

As shown in FIG. 138(b), the gap between the projecting portion B1140 and the main body member B1210 is less than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, if the ball flows down vertically from above the protruding portion B1140, the center of the ball cannot pass between the protruding portion B1140 and the main body member B1210, and the ball flows down toward the left or right side. If another ball is arranged on the closer side, the arranged ball may hinder the downward flow of the ball, and the flow of the ball may deteriorate. In addition, when the balls are clogged and do not flow (remaining state), the game cannot be continued, which is a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball guide receiving portion B1260 is arranged at a position where the ball can be prevented from flowing down from vertically above the projecting portion B1140. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down from vertically above the protruding portion B1140, so it is possible to easily keep the flow of the ball in good condition.

Regarding the flow speed of the ball, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that it takes about 0.5 seconds (approximately 60 [mm/sec. ]), it takes about 0.5 seconds to flow down the distance from the extended support portion B1212 to the center of the second detection sensor B1250 (assuming the position where the passage of the ball is detected) in the lower part of the pre-entering range. (approximately 22 [mm/sec]). That is, the flow velocity in the lower part of the pre-ball-entering range is about three times as high as the flow-down velocity in the upper part of the pre-ball-entering range.

This speed setting is also set for the purpose of reducing the number of balls staying in the lower part of the pre-entering range. According to this speed setting, for example, when a plurality of balls BP1 and BP2 flowing down in a row ride on the first guide plate B1300 and roll (see FIG. 137(a)), the ball BP1 on the downstream side is extended. The ball BP2 on the upstream side is arranged directly above the extended support portion B1212 until it passes through the projecting portion B1212 arranged immediately above the support portion B1212 and is detected by the second detection sensor B1250. It does not pass through the projecting portion B1212.

That is, even when a plurality of balls BP1 and BP2 flow down the upper part of the pre-ball-entering range in a row, the number of balls staying in the lower part of the pre-ball-entering range can be limited to one. As a result, when the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the closed state as the prescribed number of balls enter the second specific winning hole B1002, the balls will not fall from the rolling surface B1511 of the guide member B1510. can be avoided from occurring.

In this way, the upper pre-entering range can be said to be an advantageous section in the sense that at least the frequency of occurrence of falling balls can be reduced compared to the lower pre-entering range. In this embodiment, when the ball rolling on the first guide plate B1300 is arranged in the upper part of the pre-entering range and in the case where it is arranged in the lower part of the pre-entering range, the falling velocity of the ball is configured differently.

As a result, compared to the case where the ball flows down at a constant speed, the effect is that it is easier to attract the attention of the player who is visually recognizing the ball, and the ball is arranged in the upper part of the range before entering the ball (advantageous side section). Therefore, it is possible to easily distinguish whether it is arranged in the lower part of the range before entering the ball.

In addition, it is possible to make it easier to place the ball on the upper surface side of the first guide plate B1300, which is switched to the open state in place of the second guide plate B1500.

FIG. 139 is a front view of the variable winning device B1000. In FIG. 139, the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state, while the second guide plate B1500 is in the closed state. Also, the spheres BP1 and BP2 illustrated in FIG. 137(a) are used for illustration. Note that FIG. 137(a) will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG.

From the state shown in FIG. 137(a), the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the closed state and the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state as the ball BP1 is detected as the specified number of incoming balls. (see FIG. 139), as long as the ball BP2 is on the inclined upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 before the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state (for example, the interval between rounds is set at 0.04 seconds). ), the ball BP2 rides on the rolling surface B1321 of the upstream member B1320 of the first guide plate B1300.

More specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 137(a), the ball BP2 moves to the left side of the extended support portion B1212 after the ball BP1 passes through the projecting portion B1211 arranged directly above the extended support portion B1212. It can flow down the inclined upper surface, but if the first guide plate B1300 is opened before it flows down completely, the upstream member B1320 gets under the center of the sphere BP2 and supports the sphere BP2 from below.

As a result, the ball BP2 rolls on the rolling surface B1311 of the first guide plate B1300 and can pass through the first specific winning hole B1001. As described above, in the present embodiment, the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the closed state before the ball BP2, which has been guided halfway to the second guide plate B1500 in the open state, passes through the second specific winning port B1002. Even in this case, the ball BP2 is configured to easily ride on the first guide plate B1300.

Therefore, although the ball BP2 is different from the second specific winning hole B1002 initially guided, it enters the first specific winning hole B1001. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a ball (hereinafter also referred to as a “lost ball”) heading toward the out port 66 (see FIG. 124).

In addition, the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state while the ball falling from the inclined surface B1223 after the ball BP2 is positioned above the ball BP2 (upper part of the range before ball entry). It is easier to be saved by the first guide plate B1300 than by the ball BP2. This reduces the possibility of the ball falling below the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 when switching between the state of the first guide plate B1300 and the state of the second guide plate B1500. can be done.

Various aspects are exemplified for the definition of the interval between rounds. For example, the period from when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 in the open state are switched to the closed state to when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are next switched to the open state, or the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are driven. Focusing on the solenoids B1400 and B1600 for energizing, the period from when the energized solenoids B1400 and B1600 are switched to de-energized to when the solenoids B1400 and B1600 are switched to the energized state may be set.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the inter-round interval is set to a length that can suppress the falling ball. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference in the number of loose balls between the game mode in which shooting of balls is stopped in accordance with the interval between rounds and the game mode in which shooting of balls is continued without stopping. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the equality of profits that the players can obtain.

In FIG. 139, in addition to the ball BP2, balls that arrive later fall from the inclined surface B1223 onto the first guide plate B1300. Here, the projections B1140 and B1211 are designed so as not to come into contact with the balls rolling on the upper surface of the first guide plate B1300 as described above, but until they reach the first guide plate B1300 ( During falling), the ball may collide with the projections B1140 and B1211.

The action caused by the collision between the falling ball and the protrusions B1140 and B1211 will be described. It is unknown whether the falling ball is arranged on the side close to the base plate 60 (rear side of the flow-down path) or on the side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) (front side of the flow-down path). However, it is easier to abut on the protruding portion B1211 arranged close to the inclined surface B1223 when arranged on the front side portion of the flow-down path.

On the other hand, when the ball is arranged at the rear side of the flow-down path, there is a possibility that it will come into contact with the projecting portion B1140. For example, if the spheres collide with each other on the inclined surface B1223 and fall with an increased left-right component of the velocity of the spheres, the spheres will also come into contact with the protruding portion B1140 located slightly away from the inclined surface B1223. obtain.

In this way, the ball can collide with protrusions B1140 and B1211 regardless of the front-to-back arrangement of the falling ball. The balls that have collided with the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 are displaced in the front-rear direction along the curvature of the tips of the protruding portions B1140 and B1211, collide with the wall surface on the opposite side, bounce off, and collide with the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 again. , the front and rear collisions are repeated multiple times.

Due to this collision, the velocity of the ball in the horizontal direction decreases, and the component of the velocity of the ball in the falling direction is the main component. Therefore, even if the ball rolls on the rolling surface B1311 of the guide member B1310 or the rolling surface B1321 of the upstream member B1320, the direction of inclination of which is opposite to the direction of inclination of the inclined surface B1223, the first It is possible to shorten the time until the ball enters the specific winning hole B1001.

More specifically, when the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are omitted, the ball passing through the inclined surface B1223 and riding on the first guide plate B1300 rolls along the rolling surface B1311 or the inclination of the rolling surface B1321. After decelerating in the process, it flows down to the opposite side (first specific winning port B1001 side).

In this case, after the ball lands on the rolling surface B1311 or rolling surface B1321 and is completely decelerated, it moves away from the first specific winning hole B1001. It will pass through 1 specific prize winning opening B1001. Therefore, the period until the ball dropped from the inclined surface B1223 passes through the first specific winning hole B1001 tends to be long, and it is difficult to complete the special game state in a short time.

In addition, while the ball that first landed on the rolling surface B1311 or rolling surface B1321 rolls toward the first specific winning hole B1001, the ball that falls from the inclined surface B1223 after that ball first A landed ball is likely to land between the first specific prize winning opening B1001, the balls collide with each other and are easily guided to the first specific prize winning opening B1001 in a row, so excessive winning is likely to occur.

On the other hand, the protrusions B1140 and B1211 can reduce the velocity component in the horizontal direction of the ball by coming into contact with the ball before it lands on the first guide plate B1300. It is possible to shorten the flow-down path to the winning opening B1001, suppress the occurrence of collision between balls, and suppress the occurrence of excessive winning.

In this way, the projections B1140 and B1211 have different effects depending on the state of the variable winning device B1000. That is, on the premise that the ball flows down from the side of the inclined surface B1223, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500 having the same inclination on the left and right sides as the inclination of the inclined surface B1223, it rides on the second guide plate B1500 and rolls. On the other hand, in the open state of the first guide plate B1300 having an inclination on the left and right opposite side to the inclination of the inclined surface B1223, the ball rides on the first guide plate B1300. It functions as falling direction adjusting means for reducing the left-right direction component of the falling speed of the previous ball and moving the falling direction of the ball toward the vertical direction.

With reference to FIG. 140, the flow-down mode of the ball that reaches the ball-entering range and rolls on the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521 will be described.

FIGS. 140(a) and 140(b) schematically show rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521, an upper right inclined surface B1213, and an upper left inclined surface, which schematically show the trajectory of a ball rolling in the pre-entering range. It is a front schematic diagram of surface B1214.

The rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521 are arranged to extend in the pre-entering range and are capable of receiving a ball, which is illustrated by a solid line. An unacceptable state is illustrated in phantom lines.

140(a) shows the open state of the second guide plate B1500 (see FIG. 137), and FIG. 140(b) shows the open state of the first guide plate B1300 (see FIG. 139). .

In FIGS. 140(a) and 140(b), the movement trajectory of the center BCP of the sphere is illustrated for explanation of the movement trajectory of the ball rolling on the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, B1521. That is, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the locus of movement of the center BCP of the ball rolling on the rolling surfaces B1511, B1521 and the upper left inclined surface B1214 is illustrated as a left inclined locus BKL1 by a straight line sloping to the left (FIG. 140). (a)), the locus of movement of the center BCP of the ball rolling on the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 and the upper right inclined surface B1213 in the open state of the first guide plate B1300 is shown as a right inclined locus BKL2 by a straight line sloping to the right. (See FIG. 140(b)).

Here, when the second guide plate B1500 in the open state is switched to the closed state, and the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state after an inter-round interval (0.04 seconds in this embodiment), The center BCP of the sphere can be displaced downwards. If the center BCP after the downward displacement is above the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 and the upper right inclined surface B1213, the front side ends of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 of the first guide plate B1300 that are switched to the open state. The ball can be rescued by slipping into the lower hemisphere part of the ball. Therefore, the arrangement of the center BCP of the ball after downward displacement and the vertical relationship between the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 are important.

The downward displacement of the ball in the interval between rounds (0.04 seconds in this embodiment) is calculated as a free fall (approximately 7.84 mm in this embodiment). A trajectory on which the center BCP can be arranged is illustrated as a post-descent trajectory BKD1 (see FIG. 140(a)). Similarly, the trajectory on which the center BCP of the ball displaced downward from the right-inclined trajectory BKL2 can be arranged is shown as a post-descent trajectory BKD2.

The post-descent trajectories BKD1 and BKD2 are illustrated as lines connecting points where the center BCP of the sphere after free fall can be located. Therefore, the form of the line is different between the upper right inclined surface B1213 or the upper left inclined surface B1214, which is the range in which the free fall is hindered, and the other range.

That is, the trajectories BKD1 and BKD2 after descent are shown parallel to the upper right inclined surface B1213 or the upper left inclined surface B1214 above the upper right inclined surface B1213 or the upper left inclined surface B1214. The left and right outer sides of the inclined plane B1214 are illustrated as lines (in this embodiment, parallel straight lines) that are offset downward from the left inclined locus BKL1 or the right inclined locus BKL2 across a small connecting range.

When the second guide plate B1500 is closed and the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 are arranged below the ball center BCP. If the switching is performed, the front side ends of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 can be made to slip into the lower hemispherical portion of the ball, and the ball can be rescued.

In other words, in the left-right direction arrangement in which the trajectory BKD1 after descent is arranged above the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321, the balls falling from the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 can be saved by the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321. .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ball placed in the upper part of the pre-entering range (the right side of the vertex position of the upper right inclined surface B1213 and the upper left inclined surface B1214 in FIG. 140(a)) can be rescued without omission. On the other hand, among the balls arranged in the lower part of the pre-entering range (the left side of the vertex position of the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 and the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 in FIG. 140(a)), the trajectory after descending BKD1 and A ball arranged on the left side of the intersection with the rolling surface B1321 is likely to become a loose ball.

In particular, since the ball rolling in the range before ball entry has a velocity component in the left-right direction, the fall mode after the second guide plate B1500 is in the closed state is displacement in the vertical direction, not in the vertical direction. and the displacement in the left-right direction are combined, resulting in a fall along a parabola. Therefore, even if the amount of downward displacement in the interval between rounds is as described above (approximately 7.84 mm in this embodiment), the position in the horizontal direction does not correspond to the inclination of the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 on which the balls were rolling. As compared with the case of free fall in the vertical direction, the arrangement of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 with respect to the center BCP of the sphere is shifted upward, It becomes easier for spilled balls to occur.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is configured to prevent a plurality of balls from being placed in the lower part of the pre-entering range, thereby suppressing the occurrence of balls falling from the lower part of the pre-entering range. can do. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of stray balls.

It should be noted that the post-descent trajectories BKD1 and BKD2 that are displaced downward by about 7.84 mm described in FIG. be.

Also, in the present embodiment, the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 are configured to be arranged on the same straight line when viewed from the front, but this is not necessarily the case. By changing the design of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 based on the post-descent trajectory changed in accordance with the inter-round interval, a variable winning device with fewer loose balls can be manufactured.

For example, when the inter-round interval is longer than the value (0.04 seconds) in this embodiment, the lower line is arranged below the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1511 of the guide members B1310 and B1510. Although there is a possibility, the design is changed so that the arrangement of the guide members B1310 and B1510 with respect to the upstream members B1320 and B1520 is shifted downward (the downstream ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the upstream of the guide members B1310 and B1510 By forming a step between the side ends, it is possible to obtain a structure that has the effect of preventing a spilled ball as in the present embodiment.

Although the guide members B1300 and B1500 are illustrated so that the projecting side tip portions are formed thick, the contact area between the projecting side tip portion and the ball when the guide members B1300 and B1500 are projected and displaced toward the front side is may be configured to be smaller. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being stuck between the guide members B1300, B1500 and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 and stopping. In this case, the arrangement of the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521 shown in FIG. 14-2 corresponds to the upper edge of the overhanging tip.

In the present embodiment, the interval between rounds is set short for the purpose of preventing a lost ball, but the interval between rounds may be set longer (for example, 2 seconds) to allow for the occurrence of a lost ball. Moreover, between rounds with a long inter-round interval and between rounds with a short inter-round interval may be arbitrarily set.

FIG. 141 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 showing the vicinity of the variable winning device B1000. As shown in FIG. 141, above the variable winning device B1000, a sorting device B1800 configured to be operable in conjunction with the variable winning device B1000 is arranged. Due to the effects resulting from the configuration of the variable winning device B1000, the arrangement range of the sorting device B1800 is expanded.

That is, even in the past, a plurality of variable prize winning devices were arranged below the second prize winning port 640 . However, in this case, the range required for arranging a plurality of variable prize winning devices tends to be large in the vertical direction, and it is difficult to create a range for arranging a movable mechanism that acts on the flow of the ball, such as the sorting device B1800. rice field. Although it is conceivable to arrange the second winning port 640 upward to increase the range, this would lead to a decrease in the degree of freedom in arranging the configuration of the through gate 67 and the nail on the upstream side thereof. Therefore, I did not like it.

On the other hand, the variable prize winning device B1000 of the present embodiment employs a configuration in which the first specific prize winning port B1001 and the second specific prize winning port B1002 are not stacked vertically but are arranged on the left and right, and the first specific prize winning port B1000 By adopting a configuration in which the vertical height of the right inclined locus BKL2 that guides the ball to B1001 and the vertical height of the left inclined locus BKL1 that guides the ball to the second specific winning opening B1002 are equal, a plurality of specific winning openings B1001. , B1002, the vertical dimension of the variable winning device B1000 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the right-tilt locus BKL2 and the left-tilt locus BKL1 intersect, and the sphere locus partially overlaps, so that the base plate 60 (see FIG. 124) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) Even in the case where at least a part of the game area is limited to the width of the gap between the front and back, which is about 19 mm in this embodiment, to the extent that one ball can pass through, the right tilt locus BKL2 and the left tilt locus BKL2 and the left tilt locus It is possible to sufficiently secure both lateral lengths of BKL1.

In the present embodiment, the vertical height of the right-inclined locus BKL2 and the vertical height of the left-inclined locus BKL1 are equal over the entire area, so that the variable winning device B1000 having a plurality of specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 Although the case where the vertical dimension can be suppressed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical height of at least a portion of the right tilt locus BKL2 and the vertical height of at least a portion of the left tilt locus BKL1 may be configured to be the same. That is, the right tilting locus BKL2 and the left tilting locus BKL1 may intersect at a laterally asymmetrical position, or the length of the right tilting locus BKL2 and the length of the left tilting locus BKL1 may be different. .

The sorting device B1800 includes a plate-like member whose left end is rotatably supported by the base plate 60, and the posture is changed by a mechanism (not shown) in conjunction with the state switching of the second driving device B1600 (see FIG. 134). configured to change. That is, when the second solenoid B1610 of the second driving device B1600 is energized, it assumes the posture of tilting downward to the right (see the imaginary line portion in FIG. 141), and when the second solenoid B1610 is de-energized, it assumes the posture of tilting downward to the left. (See the solid line portion in FIG. 141).

Various aspects are exemplified as a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the second driving device B1600 to the distribution device B1800. A rod-shaped portion protrudes beyond the base plate 60, and an engaging member that engages with the rod-shaped portion is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 so as to be displaceable in the left-right direction. B1620 may be connected. In this case, as the engaging member is displaced to the right, the engaging position with the rod-shaped portion is formed to be displaced downward (for example, formed to have a shape that slopes downward to the left when viewed from the front). , the attitude of the sorting device B1800 can be changed by the driving force generated by the second driving device B1600.

The downstream paths BL1 and BL2 of the spheres branched by the sorting device B1800 will be described. When the second driving device B1600 (see FIG. 134) is in a non-excited state, the sorting device B1800 is maintained in an attitude inclined downward to the left, so the balls tend to flow down along the left flow path BL1.

The ball flowing down the left flow path BL1 flows leftward along the nail planted in the range on the left side of the sorting device B1800, and enters the ball guide receiving portion B1260 at the branch point set by the nail. It branches into a sphere-capable flow path and a flow path that reaches the inclined surface B1243.

Therefore, it is possible to set the ease with which the ball is directed toward the ball guide receiving portion B1260 depending on the layout of the nail implanted on the left side of the sorting device B1800. In this embodiment, the ball branched to the flow path reaching the inclined surface B1243 and the ball branched to the flow path that can enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260 are distributed at a ratio of about 2:1. The layout of the nails is set so that

Therefore, as exemplified in the present embodiment, when the ball guide receiving portion B1260 is configured as the general winning opening 63 and the number of prize balls is set to three, the distribution device B1800 Every time 3 balls flow down on the left flow path BL1, one of them enters the ball guide receiving part B1260 and 3 balls are paid out as prize balls, so during time saving or It is possible to suppress the ball loss during the probability variation.

On the other hand, when the second driving device B1600 is excited, the sorting device B1800 is inclined downward to the right, so the balls tend to flow down along the right downflow path BL2. The ball flowing down along the right downflow route BL2 reaches the inclined surface B1223.

Here, the progress of the special game state using the variable winning device B1000 will be described. In the special game state, as described above, the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds, or 10 balls (the specified number ) Until winning) The opening operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), but in each round, which of the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened is set in various ways. be able to. In the following description, the state in which the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened is also simply referred to as "round".

For example, it is possible to set the first specific winning opening B1001 to be open in all rounds, or to open the second specific winning opening B1002 to all rounds. However, it is also possible to interweave the round in which the first specific prize winning opening B1001 is opened and the round in which the second specific prize winning opening B1002 is opened. In addition, in this embodiment, the relationship between the round and the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 to be opened is set in advance for each jackpot type to be described later.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, or jackpot a, which will be described later, the second specific prize winning port B1002 is opened in odd-numbered rounds, and the first specific prize winning port B1001 is opened in even-numbered rounds. (first operation pattern). That is, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 to be opened are alternately switched each time the round progresses.

In this case, as a first feature, when the game state shifts to the special game state, the second solenoid B1610 is energized to switch the second guide plate B1500 to the open state, and the sorting device B1800 is tilted and displaced. do.

Therefore, even if the second guide plate B1500 is displaced in a displacement mode in which the state change in the front view of the front-rear slide displacement is scarce and it is easy to miss the switching of the state, the sorting device B1800 changes the state in the front view. By displacing simultaneously with the displacement of the second guide plate B1500 in a large displacement mode, by visually recognizing the switching of the state of the sorting device B1800, it is possible to miss the timing when the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state. It can be made easy to prevent occurrence.

As a second feature, by switching the route in which the ball is guided to the variable winning device B1000, it is arranged upstream of the open state of the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500. A ball can be landed on the inclined surfaces B1223 and B1243. As a result, a mechanism (see FIGS. 137 and 139) for suppressing the falling of the ball when switching between the open and closed states of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 can be produced in each round.

In other words, for example, when a ball lands on one of the inclined surface B1223 or the inclined surface B1243 (for example, the inclined surface B1223) in a plurality of consecutive rounds, the guide that receives the ball at the upper part of the range before the ball enters the ball. A board (equivalent to the second guide plate B1500) is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the opposite guide plate (equivalent to the first guide plate B1300) is switched from the closed state to the open state to start the jackpot round. Sometimes it is easy to prevent the ball from falling.

On the other hand, in the next round, the guide plate (equivalent to the first guide plate B1300) that receives the ball at the lower part of the range before entering the ball is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the guide plate on the opposite side (the second guide plate B1500) equivalent) is switched from the closed state to the open state and is started, but since the guide plate that is switched to the open state is not arranged below the ball, it is difficult to prevent the ball from falling. Therefore, it is difficult to produce the effect of suppressing the fall of the ball every round.

On the other hand, in the later-described jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, or jackpot a, by alternately switching the ball downflow path between the left side downflow path BL1 and the right side downflow path BL2 for each round, the ball lands on an inclined surface. B1223 and B1243 can be alternately switched for each round, and the effect of suppressing the falling of the ball can be produced in each round.

As a third feature, rounds in which the ball can be guided to the ball guide receiving portion B1260 and rounds in which the ball is not guided to the ball guide receiving portion B1260 are alternately generated, and although it tends to take a long time, it is possible to enter the specific winning opening B1001. Rounds in which payout of prize balls can be expected due to balls entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260 in addition to balls are alternated with rounds in which the time tends to be short but payout of prize balls due to entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260 cannot be expected. can be generated in

Here, the round game ends when a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls enter the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002. The shortest time between shots of balls is limited (0.6 second interval in this embodiment), and the shortest time in which a specified number of balls can reach the variable winning device B1000 is also limited.

When the ball flows down the right flow path BL2 and reaches the variable winning device B1000, all the balls that flow downstream from the sorting device B1800 reach the variable winning device B1000, so all the fired balls are second specified. It is possible to enter the ball into the winning hole B1002. Therefore, the time required from the launch of the ball to the end of the round game is the time when the tenth ball enters the second specific winning port B1002 from the start of the first ball that can enter the second specific winning port B1002. It will be time to hit the ball.

On the other hand, when the ball flows down the left flow path BL1 and reaches the variable winning device B1000, not all the balls that flow downstream from the sorting device B1800 reach the variable winning device B1000, but one in three The ball enters the ball guide receiving portion B1260 at a rate of 1, and does not reach the first specific winning hole B1001 of the variable winning device B1000.

In this case, it is not possible to make all the shot balls enter the first specific prize winning port B1001. need to do Specifically, it is necessary to shoot 1.5 times as many balls as the specified number.

Therefore, the time required from the launch of the ball to the end of the round game is that the 15th ball that can enter the first specific winning hole B1001 enters the first specific winning hole B1001 from the start of the first ball being launched. It will be time to hit the ball.

In this way, the number of shot balls required to reach the variable prize winning device B1000 of the specified number can be changed by 1.5 times between consecutive rounds, so the time required for the round game is short. A round that takes a long time to play can be generated. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the control for adjusting the time required for execution (digestion) of the jackpot game.

In addition, rounds requiring a short time for the round game and rounds requiring a long time for the round game alternately occur, so that it is possible to easily avoid giving the player the impression that the big winning game is slow.

The ball entry probability into the ball guide receiving portion B1260 can be easily changed by changing the design of the arrangement position of the nail. For example, if one out of two balls is designed to be guided to the ball guide receiving portion B1260, the time required for the round game in which the balls flow down the left flow path BL1 can be further extended. Also, for example, if one ball is designed to be guided to the ball guide receiving portion B1260 for 10 or more balls, the time required for the round game in which the ball flows down the left flow path BL1 and the round in which the ball flows down the right flow path BL2 The difference from the time required for the game can be reduced.

As a fourth feature, the ball entry interval is changed between the state of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 while the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in the open state, and the state of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500. can be easily changed with the timing of . As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball-entering mode in the jackpot game from becoming monotonous, and to facilitate increasing the number of prize balls to be paid out before and after the interval between rounds (immediately in this embodiment) where the ball is likely to be interrupted. can be configured to allow

Regarding this, the state in which the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in an open state and the ball is guided to the second specific winning hole B1002 will be described as an example. In this case, the ball that reaches the distribution device B1800 lands on the inclined surface B1223 of the variable winning device B1000 along the inclination of the distribution device B1800, and along the inclination of the inclined surface B1223 toward the second specific winning opening B1002 to roll.

As shown in FIG. 141, balls shot one after another land on the upper surface of the second guide plate B1500 along the slope of the slope B1223. As described above, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, even though the ball passes through the flow-down path of the lower part of the pre-ball entry range (the downstream side with respect to the extended support portion B1212) in the pre-ball entry range, It takes 0.5 seconds, and it takes 0.5 seconds to pass between the protruding parts when passing through the upper part of the range before entering the ball (upstream side with respect to the extended support part B1212). It takes 1.0 second because there are three set portions B1140 and B1211.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 141, after the ball BP3 rides on the second guide plate B1500 and reaches the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 (about 1.5 seconds), the two balls fired later BP4 and BP5 can easily ride on the second guide plate B1500 (it takes about 1.2 seconds to shoot the three balls BP3, BP4 and BP5 because the shooting interval is 0.6 seconds). There is also a ball BP6 that reaches the inclined surface B1223 over the sorting device B1800 even if it does not reach the second guide plate B1500.

When the ball BP3 shown in FIG. 141 is detected by the second detection sensor B1250 as the specified number of balls entering the jackpot round formed by the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the second guide plate B1500 is closed. After that, after an inter-round interval (about 0.04 seconds in this embodiment), the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state.

In this case, since the centers BCP of the balls BP4 and BP5 are both arranged above the first guide plate B1300, they drop below the first guide plate B1300 before the first guide plate B1300 constitutes the open state. can be avoided (see FIGS. 140(a) and 140(b)).

When the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, the balls BP4 and BP5 flow down along the slope of the first guide plate B1300 toward the first specific winning opening B1001. As described above, in the pre-entering range, in the relationship with the ball rolling in the lower part of the pre-entering range (downstream of the extended support part B1212), the projecting part B1140 and the projecting parts arranged on the left and right Since the portion B1211 is configured so as not to contact the ball, the balls BP4 and BP5 are guided to the first specific winning opening B1001 without being decelerated by the projecting portion B1140 and the projecting portions B1211 arranged on the left and right. be done.

At that time, the ball BP5 and the ball BP4 pass through the first specific winning hole B1001 in that order. That is, the ball BP4 closer to the second specific winning opening B1002 passes through the first specific winning opening B1001 later than the ball BP5 arranged away from the second specific winning opening B1002.

In addition, since the ball BP6 also contacts the projecting portion B1140 and the projecting portions B1211 arranged on the left and right sides, the velocity component in the left-right direction is reduced. The ball enters the specific winning hole B1001.

In this way, immediately after the state is switched from the open state of the second guide plate B1500 to the open state of the first guide plate B1300, the balls BP4, BP5, and BP6 are consecutively placed in the first specific winning hole B1001 for a short period of time. , and a large amount of prize balls are paid out.

That is, while the second guide plate B1500 was maintained in the open state, a ball entered at intervals of about 0.5 seconds, but the second guide plate B1500 was switched to the closed state, Immediately after the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, three balls BP4, BP5, and BP6 enter the first specific winning hole within about 0.5 seconds. As a result, the manner of entering a ball due to the fact that the interval between entering balls is constant in the jackpot game, and the effect associated with entering a ball (for example, the number of payout balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is notified. It is possible to reduce the monotony of the display effect to be played and the sound output effect output for the same purpose), and improve the player's attention to the ball entry mode and effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the state of the first guide plate B1300 is switched, the attitude of the sorting device B1800 is switched, and the flow path of the ball is switched to the left flow path BL1, so the state of the first guide plate B1300 is It is a configuration in which it takes time for the ball that has reached the sorting device B1800 to reach the first guide plate B1300 after being switched.

Therefore, without countermeasures, the payout of prize balls is likely to be interrupted, and the player tends to feel that the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game is small, or that the jackpot game is delayed, and the player's interest is reduced. There is a risk of causing

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, a plurality of balls BP4, BP5, and BP6 enter the first specific winning hole B1001 immediately after the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state. By doing so, the number of prize balls scheduled (reserved) to be paid out is secured.

Therefore, after the state of the first guide plate B1300 is switched, the ball that reaches the sorting device B1800 enters the first specific winning hole B1001. Since it can be covered by the prize balls that accompany the entry into the specific prize winning port B1001, even if the ball flow path is long as in the present embodiment, the interruption of the prize ball payout is prevented. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the number of prize balls obtained in the big winning game is small or that the big winning game is slow.

In addition, when the first guide plate B1300 is in an open state and the ball flows down the left flow path BL1, some of the balls enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260, and as a result, the upper surface of the first guide plate B1300 is formed. Since the number of balls arranged in the upper part of the pre-entering range of the balls to be drawn is often less than two, after the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the closed state, the second guide plate B1500 is opened. The degree of increase in payout associated with the ball entering the second specific winning port B1002 that can occur immediately after switching to the second special prize winning port B1002 is the same as described above for balls BP4, BP5, BP6, etc. (that is, the second opening and closing plate B1500 is switched to the closed After the first opening/closing plate B1300 is switched to the open state, the increase in payout associated with the entry of the ball into the first specific winning hole B1001, which may occur immediately after the first opening/closing plate B1300 is switched to the open state, becomes gentler.

On the other hand, regardless of whether the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are opened or closed, the ball can enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260. Since this ball entry also causes the ball to be put out, it is less likely that the problems of the original problem, such as the monotony of the put out and the interruption of the put out of the ball at intervals between rounds, will occur.

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 142(b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special design. FIG. 142(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 142(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the above fixed value data. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec). When the value of the first winning random number counter obtained based on the start winning coincides with one of the determination values defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is won.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 142 (b)) is a data table that stores the determination value for determining the jackpot type, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , And it is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 142(b)).

In the case of jackpot A, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern (details of which will be described later) of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2170 prize balls as an increase after subtracting the number of balls fired.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 49" in association with the jackpot B (see 202b2 in FIG. 142(b)).

In the case of a jackpot B, 8 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of approximately 1160 prize balls as an increase after subtracting the number of balls fired.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with the jackpot C (see 202b3 in FIG. 142(b)).

In the case of a jackpot C, four rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operating pattern of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 580 prize balls as an increase after subtracting the number of balls fired.

As described above, if the lottery for the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64) results in a big win, the variable winning device B1000 operates in the first operation pattern in any case. do. Therefore, the difference in the number of paid-out prize balls that a player can acquire appears as a difference due to the number of rounds, and the larger the number of rounds, the larger the number of paid-out prize balls and the longer the time required for the jackpot game.

In the jackpot based on the special pattern 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the jackpot of 15 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 20%, while the jackpot of 4 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 50%. So basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, the launching of the ball for the subsequent jackpot win can be started early.

On the other hand, when the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79". A jackpot a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 142(b)).

In the case of a jackpot a, similarly to the jackpot A, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2170 prize balls as an increase after subtracting the number of balls fired.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 89" in association with the jackpot b (see 202b5 in FIG. 142(b)).

In the case of a jackpot b, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the second operating pattern (details of which will be described later) of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is about 2100 as an increase after deducting the number of balls to be shot, and the time required for the big win game tends to be shorter than the time required for the big win a.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with the jackpot c (see 202b6 in FIG. 142(b)).

In the case of a jackpot c, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the third operating pattern (details of which will be described later) of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is about 2250 as an increase after deducting the number of balls to be shot, and the time required for the big win game tends to be longer than the time required for the big win a.

As described above, when the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) results in a big win, the operation pattern of the variable winning device B1000 changes according to the type of the big win. Due to this difference in operation pattern, while the number of jackpot rounds remains unchanged, the number of payouts and the number of balls that reach the variable winning device B1000 do not enter either the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002. A difference can be provided between the occurrence frequency of balls heading for the out port 66 (hereinafter also referred to as "lost balls") and the time required for the big win game.

In detail, in addition to providing a difference in the number of prize balls depending on the presence or absence of balls entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260, and forcibly lengthening the time required for the jackpot game, the number of lost balls during the interval between rounds Since it is possible to provide a difference in occurrence probability, it is possible to provide a difference in profit per unit time (the number of payouts including time efficiency, game efficiency) obtained by the player through the jackpot game depending on the type of jackpot.

As a result, the breakdown of the jackpot in the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) includes the jackpot (jackpot a) that allows a large amount of payouts to be received in a time efficient manner, and the time efficient or payout. A jackpot (jackpot b, jackpot c) in which at least one of the numbers is degraded can be provided, and the profit balance of the player obtained when the jackpot a is obtained can be improved. As a result, even if the probability of winning the jackpot a is maintained high, the jackpots b and c with a degraded profit balance will be won with a small probability, so that the profit balance is changed when the game is continued for a predetermined time. A gaming machine with a large width can be configured.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 becomes easier. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols, the variable probability state of the special symbols is likely to become a jackpot of the special symbols, and when it becomes a jackpot, it is easy to become a jackpot a (a jackpot with a good profit balance). This makes it easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while strongly anticipating that the special symbols will shift to the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 142(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal symbols (see 202c1 in FIG. 142(c)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 142(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is displayed. It is determined whether it is a hit or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, opening patterns of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 in the first control example of the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 143(a) is a diagram showing the opening/closing pattern of the first specific winning hole B1001 and the second specific winning hole B1002 corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the gaming efficiency of the first operation pattern. 143(b) is a diagram showing the opening/closing pattern of the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the game efficiency of the second operation pattern. FIG. 143(c) is a diagram showing the opening/closing pattern of the first specific winning hole B1001 and the second specific winning hole B1002 corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the gaming efficiency of the third operation pattern. is.

As shown in FIG. 143(a), in the first operation pattern, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 that are opened each time the round is switched are alternately switched. That is, rounds in which the second solenoid B1610 is energized and rounds in which the first solenoid B1410 is energized alternately occur, and there are rounds in which the ball flows down the right flow path BL2 and rounds in which the ball flows down the left flow path BL1. occur alternately.

The number of prize balls expected to increase due to the payout in the 15-round jackpot will be described. In addition, the number of payouts due to excess winning in the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 (excess payout when more than 10 balls enter) is not considered.

First, 15 prize balls are paid out by entering the first specific prize winning port B1001 or the second specific prize winning port B1002. Or, regarding the ball entering the second specific winning hole B1002, the increased number after deducting the number of fired balls is 2100 (= (number of rounds x specified number x (number of payouts - 1)) = (15 x 10 x (15 - 1))).

Next, in even-numbered rounds, 3 prize balls are paid out by entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260, and 10 balls, which are the prescribed number of each round, are used in the first specific prize winning opening B1001 or the second specific prize winning. Five balls can be expected to enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260 for entering the mouth B1002. , 70 (=(number of rounds×expected number×(payout number−1))=(7×5×(3−1))).

Therefore, in the jackpot of 15 rounds in which the first specific prize winning port B1001 or the second specific prize winning port B1002 opens and closes in the first operation pattern, the number of prize balls expected to increase due to the payout is 2170.

The game time required to complete the 15-round jackpot will be explained based on the number of shot balls. It is assumed that the game mode is one in which balls are continuously shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In odd-numbered rounds, all the shot balls can be expected to enter the second specific winning hole B1002, so the jackpot game can be ended by shooting the prescribed number of balls (10 balls in this embodiment). . Therefore, the game time required based on the number of shot balls is 6 seconds (=number of balls×shot interval=10×0.6).

On the other hand, in even-numbered rounds, 2 out of 3 balls can be expected to enter the first special prize-winning hole B1001, so 15 (= specified number x 3/2 = 10 x 3/2) ) can end the jackpot game. Therefore, the game time required based on the number of shot balls is 9 seconds (=number of balls×shot interval=15×0.6).

From this, the game time required to complete the jackpot of 15 rounds is calculated as 111 seconds (=number of odd rounds×6+number of even rounds×9=8×6+7×9).

According to the first operation pattern, as described above, the number of lost balls is suppressed to 0, so the gaming efficiency is reduced to about 19.5 [pieces/second] (=(number of prize balls-number of lost balls). /Playing time=(2170-0)/111).

As shown in FIG. 143(b), in the second operation pattern, the opening in the round game is fixed to the second specific winning opening B1002. That is, since the second solenoid B1610 is composed only of the rounds in which it is energized and the first solenoid B1410 is maintained in a non-excited state, only the round in which the ball flows down the right downflow path BL2 occurs, and the ball flows down the left downflow path BL1. There is no round that flows down.

The number of prize balls expected to increase due to the payout in the 15-round jackpot will be described. In addition, the number of payouts due to excess winning in the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 (excess payout when more than 10 balls enter) is not considered.

First, 15 prize balls are paid out by entering the second specific prize winning port B1002, and the prescribed number of each round is 10, so regarding entering the second specific prize winning port B1002, launch The increased number after deducting the number of balls is 2100 (=(number of rounds×prescribed number×(number of payouts−1))=(15×10×(15−1))).

Next, the ball does not enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260 because the ball only flows down the right-side flow path BL2. Therefore, the number of balls to be added to the ball entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260 is zero.

Therefore, in the jackpot of 15 rounds in which the second specific winning hole B1002 opens and closes in the second operation pattern, the number of prize balls expected to increase due to the payout is 2100 pieces.

The game time required to complete the 15-round jackpot will be explained based on the number of shot balls. It is assumed that the game mode is one in which balls are continuously shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In the second operation pattern, since the ball does not enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260, it can be expected that all the launched balls enter the second specific winning hole B1002. The jackpot game can be ended by shooting the ball of (pieces). Therefore, the game time required based on the number of shot balls is 6 seconds (=number of balls×shot interval=10×0.6).

From this, the game time required to complete the jackpot of 15 rounds is calculated as 90 seconds (=number of rounds×6=15×6).

According to the second actuation pattern, it is difficult to eliminate the occurrence of loose balls. Assuming that an average of 2 lost balls occur between rounds, the total number of lost balls is 28 [pieces] (=2×14). In this case, the game efficiency can be calculated as approximately 23.0 [pieces/second] (=(number of prized balls-number of lost balls)/game time=(2100-28)/90).

As shown in FIG. 143(c), in the third operation pattern, the first specific winning hole B1001 is fixed to be opened by the round game. That is, since the first solenoid B1410 is composed only of the rounds in which it is energized and the second solenoid B1610 is maintained in a non-excited state, only the round in which the ball flows down the left downflow path BL1 occurs, and the ball flows down the right downflow path BL2. There is no round that flows down.

The number of prize balls expected to increase due to the payout in the 15-round jackpot will be described. In addition, the number of payouts due to excess winning in the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 (excess payout when more than 10 balls enter) is not considered.

First, 15 prize balls are paid out by entering the first specific prize winning port B1001, and the prescribed number of each round is 10, so regarding entering the first specific prize winning port B1001, launch The increased number after deducting the number of balls is 2100 (=(number of rounds×prescribed number×(number of payouts−1))=(15×10×(15−1))).

Next, 3 prize balls are paid out by entering the ball guide receiving part B1260, and 10 balls, which is the prescribed number of each round, enter the first special prize winning hole B1001, Since 5 balls can be expected to enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260, the increase in the number of balls entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260 after deducting the number of fired balls is 150 (=(number of rounds x expected number x (number of payouts - 1)) = (15 x 5 x (3-1))).

Therefore, in the jackpot of 15 rounds in which the first specific winning hole B1001 opens and closes in the third operation pattern, the number of prize balls expected to increase due to the payout is 2250 pieces.

The game time required to complete the 15-round jackpot will be explained based on the number of shot balls. It is assumed that the game mode is one in which balls are continuously shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In each round, out of the 3 balls fired, 2 balls can be expected to enter the 1st Special Winning Port B1001, so 15 (= specified number x 3/2 = 10 x 3/2) The jackpot game can be terminated by shooting the ball. Therefore, the game time required based on the number of shot balls is 9 seconds (=number of balls×shot interval=15×0.6).

From this, the game time required to complete the 15-round jackpot is calculated as 135 seconds (=number of rounds×9=15×9).

According to the third actuation pattern, it is difficult to eliminate the occurrence of loose balls. Assuming that an average of 2 lost balls occur between rounds, the total number of lost balls is 28 [pieces] (=2×14). In this case, the game efficiency can be calculated as approximately 16.5 [pieces/second] (=(number of prized balls-number of lost balls)/game time=(2250-28)/135).

Therefore, even when a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed, the time required for it and the number of paid-out prize balls are different. That is, when the jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern, the game time required for the jackpot game is longer than in the case where the jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern, and the game is executed in the first operation pattern. In this case, the game time required for the jackpot game is longer than when it is executed in the second operation pattern.

In addition, when the jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern, the number of prize balls to be paid out is larger than in the case where the jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out is greater than in the second operation pattern.

Furthermore, focusing on the game efficiency in the above definition, the game efficiency is higher when the jackpot game is executed with the second operation pattern than when it is executed with the first operation pattern (23.0>19 .5), the game efficiency is higher when executed with the first operation pattern than when executed with the third operation pattern (19.5>16.5).

Thus, according to the present embodiment, while the number of rounds of the special symbol 2 jackpot is the same, the number of prize balls and the game time can be set to be different. According to a comparison including game efficiency, the first actuation pattern can be said to be a well-balanced actuation pattern that always exhibits a medium performance in comparison with the second and third actuation patterns.

According to this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 jackpot, the variable winning device B1000 is controlled in the first operation pattern regardless of the jackpot type, so that the occurrence of loose balls can be suppressed as much as possible. When the special pattern 1 is a big win, the player has few balls, and the player wants to increase the number of balls even by one. Since the spilled ball is a ball that will definitely become a useless ball, the occurrence of the dropped ball in the special symbol 1 jackpot especially disappoints the player. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a ball falling out in the special symbol 1 jackpot as much as possible, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the special symbol 2 jackpot, in addition to the first operation pattern, a second operation pattern in which the time required for the big win game is shorter than that of the first operation pattern, and a second operation pattern that is shorter than the first operation pattern. A third operation pattern in which the number of prize balls is increased is added.

As a result, it is possible to slightly change the profit obtained for each jackpot type obtained, thus avoiding the monotony of the jackpot game compared to the case where the operation pattern does not change regardless of the jackpot type. can.

In the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, it is difficult to suppress the occurrence of falling balls. I'm getting a payout of prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the degree of disappointment with respect to the occurrence of the lost ball, and reduce the degree to which the player loses interest due to the occurrence of the lost ball.

The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 157. FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 of the variable winning device B1000 are slid forward and backward to form an open state. The opening/closing bar B2500 can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis to constitute an open state. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 144 is a front view of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, the constituent parts of the game area are bilaterally symmetrical, and the player can always arbitrarily select whether to play the left-handed game or the right-handed game. It is designed to minimize disadvantages. The variable winning device B2000 is arranged in the left and right central lower part of the game area.

145, 146 and 147 are front perspective views of the variable winning device B2000. 145 illustrates the closed state of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing bar B2500, FIG. 146 illustrates the closed state of the opening/closing bar B2500 and the open state of the opening/closing plate B2300, and FIG. A closed state of the opening/closing plate B2300 is illustrated.

In FIGS. 145, 146 and 147, the main body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 is shown transparently except for the outer shape, in order to improve visibility and facilitate understanding. illustrated as possible.

The variable winning device B2000, among the balls that are shot and flow down the left and right sides of the variable time device unit 80, almost all of the balls that have reached the inclined surfaces B1223 and B1243 provided on the upper surface are the first specified winning opening B1001 and the second specified It is constructed so as to be able to be guided to the range (flow path configuration range, pre-ball entry range) between the winning opening B1002.

FIG. 148 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device B2000, and FIG. 149 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device B2000. The variable winning device B2000 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and includes a base member B2100 fixed to the base plate 60, and a flow path configuration range (range before entering the ball) that is fastened and fixed to the base member B2100 from the front side. an opening/closing plate B2300 pivotally supported by being sandwiched between the body member B2100 and the covering member B2200; a first driving device B2400 that drives the opening/closing plate B2300; An opening/closing rod B2500 pivotally supported by being sandwiched between B2100 and a covering member B2200, a second driving device B2600 for driving the opening/closing rod B2500, and a first driving device assembled to the base member B2100 from the rear side. and a rear cover member (not shown) configured to cover the B2400 and the second driving device B2600 from the rear side. The rear cover member has a discharge portion which is a through hole through which the ball discharged from the discharge port B1150 passes, and the ball discharged from the discharge portion is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

Compared to the base member B1100 described in the first embodiment, the base member B2100 does not have the penetration forming portion B1120 and the guide opening B1160, but has other components. That is, the base member B2100 includes a pair of holding holes B1130, a plurality of protruding portions B1140, and a pair of discharge ports B1150 as portions described above in detail.

In addition, the base member B2100 includes a thin plate member B2110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, and a recessed portion extending from the front to the back side of the thin plate member B2110. A first accommodation portion B2111 formed partially through the opening and closing plate B2300 to accommodate the shaft portion B2320, and a recess formed in the thin plate member B2110 from the front toward the rear side to accommodate the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 of the opening and closing bar B2500. a second accommodation portion B2115 partially penetrating therethrough; a rotation support portion B2170 protruding toward the rear side of the thin plate member B2110 and supporting the power transmission member B2430 of the first driving device B2400; and a guide support portion B2180 for guiding the displacement of the driven rotation member B2630 and the transmission downstream member B2640 of the second driving device B2600.

The first accommodating portion B2111 includes a pair of left and right support recesses B2112 in which the shaft portion B2320 of the opening/closing plate B2300 is accommodated, and a rectangular recess B2113 recessed in a rectangular shape below the straight line connecting the support recesses B2112. , a rectangular shape along the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the pair of support recesses B2112 in order to move the load receiving portion B2330 of the opening/closing plate B2300 that operates along the right end of the rectangular recess B2113 to the front and back of the thin plate member B2110. and a through hole B2114 formed through.

The left and right support recesses B2112 have different structures. The support recess B2112 on the right side has a width slightly larger than the shaft portion B2320 of the opening/closing plate B2300 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side. The back of member B2200 closes the recessed opening. That is, the opening/closing plate B2300 is pivotally supported by the support recess B2112 and the rear surface of the covering member B2200.

On the other hand, the left support recess B2112 is recessed from the back side to the front side with a width slightly larger than the shaft portion B2320 of the opening/closing plate B2300. is inserted obliquely from the side of the rectangular recess B2113. That is, the opening/closing plate B2300 is pivotally supported by the front bottom portion of the support recess B2112 and the end portion of the rectangular recess B2113.

The rectangular recess B2113 has a larger surface area than the plate portion B2310 of the opening/closing plate B2300, and the length of the recess is slightly longer than the thickness of the plate portion B2310. As a result, when the opening/closing plate B2300 tilts (closed state), the plate portion B2310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular concave portion B2113, and the opening/closing plate B2300 can be prevented from protruding toward the front side of the thin plate member B2110.

The second housing portion B2115 includes a pair of left and right support recesses B2116 in which the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 of the opening/closing rod B2500 are housed, and the left and right inner sides of the support recess portions B2116 which are perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 of the opening/closing rod B2500. and an opening B2117 that is formed in an elongated shape along a plane that extends along the plane.

The support recess B2116 is formed as a non-penetrating recess, and has a width slightly larger than the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 of the opening/closing rod B2500. The recessed opening is closed by the back of the B2200. That is, the opening/closing bar B2500 is pivotally supported by the support recess B2116 and the rear surface of the covering member B2200.

Specifically, the shaft portion B2511 of the left arm portion B2510 is pivotally supported by the back surface of the left extension portion B1240 and the support recess B2116, and the shaft portion B2521 of the right arm portion B2520 is disposed in the right extension portion B1220. It is pivotally supported by the back side surface of the eaves portion B2271 and the support recess B2116.

The width of the opening B2117 is slightly longer than the width of the opening/closing portion B2513 of the opening/closing rod B2500, and is configured so that the opening/closing portion B2513 can enter when the opening/closing rod B2500 is open. In this embodiment, when the opening/closing rod B2500 is in the open state (lowered position state), the opening/closing portion B2513 can be completely accommodated in the opening portion B2117, thereby making it easy to ensure a large rotation angle of the opening/closing rod B2500. A notch extending from the middle position of the vertically long opening to the opposite side of the support recess B2116 functions as an opening through which the action portion B2512 of the left arm portion B2510 is passed to the rear side.

The rotation support portion B2170 includes a shaft portion B2171 that rotatably supports the power transmission member B2430, and a circular shape or an arc shape that is coaxial with the shaft portion B2171 and has a uniform protrusion height toward the back side of the thin plate member B2110. and a circular rib B2172 formed in the shape of a rib.

The circular rib B2172 maintains the distance between the rotating tip portion B2436 of the power transmission member B2430 and the rear surface of the thin plate member B2110 at a certain distance or more. That is, the circular rib B2172 is formed in the entire angle range where the power transmission member B2430 is in contact with the rotation tip B2436 during operation.

The guide support portion B2180 is parallel to the shaft portion B2171 and protrudes in the same shape as the shaft portion B2181 for rotatably supporting the driven rotating member B2630 of the second driving device B2600, and vertically extends on the left side of the shaft portion B22181. and a pair of guide ridges B2182 formed as elongated ridges. A pair of guide ridges B2182 are arranged in parallel, and are configured to be able to guide the vertical displacement of a downstream transmission member B2640, which will be described later.

Unlike the covering member B1200 described in the first embodiment, the covering member B2200 does not have the ball guide receiving portion B1260, but has other components. That is, the covering member B2200 includes a right extension portion B1220, a first detection sensor B1230, a left extension portion B1240, and a second detection sensor B1250 as the parts described above in detail.

In addition, the covering member B2200 includes, as parts to be newly explained, a plate-like main body member B2210 disposed at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100 on the front side, and a right extending portion B1220 extending from the base member B2100. and a cover plate portion B2270 that extends like a ridge from the tip portion toward the left extension portion B1240.

A range surrounded by the main body member B2210, the front view left side wall portion of the right side extension portion B1220, the front view right side wall portion of the left side extension portion B1240, and the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100 (pre-entering range) A sphere is configured so that it can flow down.

The main body member B2210 has a plurality of projecting portions B2211 projecting toward the downstream path of the ball on the back side, and a long rectangular opening along the inclination of the rotation axis of the opening/closing bar B2500. A shaku opening B2215 is provided.

The projecting portion B2211 has the same function as the projecting portion B1211 described in each of the above embodiments, but in the present embodiment, it cannot be formed to project from the long opening B2215, and the opening/closing bar The shape is different due to the need to avoid collision with the B2500.

That is, the projecting part B2211 faces the long opening B2215 side while maintaining the effect of decelerating the ball by making the outer shape of the side surface facing the downstream path side of the ball equivalent to the shape of the projecting part B1140. A curved surface B2212 is formed on the side surface at a distance from the displacement trajectory of the connecting portion B2530, and a downward extending portion B2213 extending downward from a portion above the long opening B2215 is formed.

The projecting length of the projecting portion B2211 is the same as the projecting length of the projecting portion B1140. In addition, the height position of the lower end portion from the center of the ball rolling on the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing rod B2500 in the open state is the same between the projecting portion B1140 and the projecting portion B2211. Therefore, the degree of meandering of the ball rolling on the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing rod B2500 in the front-rear direction can be made approximately the same, so that a high deceleration effect can be produced.

In this way, by shifting the contact position from the center of the sphere, lengthening the projection length in the front-rear direction of the projecting portion B2211 and shortening the formation length in the vertical direction, the outside of the displacement trajectory of the connecting portion B2530 can be made easy to form the projecting portion B2211.

In this embodiment, the curved surface B2212 is configured as a relief for separating from the displacement trajectory of the connecting portion B2530, and a slight gap is provided. good. That is, the design may be such that the curved surface B2212 is formed along the trailing edge of the displacement trajectory of the connecting portion B2530.

In this case, the curved surface B2212 can guide the displacement of the connecting portion B2530, stabilize the displacement of the connecting portion B2530, and bend the rearward displacement of the connecting portion B2530 in the closed state of the opening/closing rod B2500. It can be regulated by the surface B2212.

Therefore, for example, even if the opening/closing rod B2500 is placed in an unstable position due to a large gap at the support position, the connection portion B2530 is displaced rearward when the opening/closing rod B2500 is in the closed state, and the range before ball entry It is possible to prevent it from sticking out. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being obstructed.

The downward extending portion B2213 functions as a portion for forming the base end portion of the projecting portion B2211 outside the long opening B2215. It can be made to protrude to the inside of long opening B2215.

The downwardly extending portion B2213 has a shape that hangs down from above the elongated opening B2215, and is configured to partially block the upper and rear portions of the connecting portion B2530 in the closed state of the opening/closing rod B2500. Therefore, even if the ball flows down to the connecting portion B2530, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the connecting portion B2530 by causing the ball to collide with the downward extending portion B2213 before colliding with the connecting portion B2530. .

In addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 145, only the shaped portion of the downwardly extending portion B2213 may be arranged so as to be closely aligned in the left and right direction above the elongated opening B2215. As a result, while maintaining the degree of deceleration, it is possible to widen the formation range of the downward extending portion B2213 for preventing the ball from colliding with the connecting portion B2530. can be prevented with certainty.

The elongated opening B2215 is formed into a shape that allows the connecting portion B2530 of the opening/closing rod B2500 to enter. That is, the shape of the opening is designed so as to avoid the locus of movement of the connecting portion B2530 of the opening/closing rod B2500.

Body member B2210 is formed from a light transmissive material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the pre-entering range. The form of the main body member B2210 is not limited to this, and may be partially impermeable, or may be devised in the same manner as the above-described main body member B1210.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the back side of the main body member B2210 can be visually recognized through the elongated opening B2215, even if the main body member B2210 is configured to be opaque, the range before entering the ball flows down. It is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the ball.

The right extended portion B1220 has substantially the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, but the ridge support portion B1225 is not formed (omitted) in order to realize the operation of the opening/closing plate B2300. The left extending portion B1240 has substantially the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, but the ridge support portion B1245 is not formed (omitted).

The cover plate portion B2270 is formed at a position that can close the support recess B2116 of the base member B2100 from the front side, and is a portion that prevents the shaft portion B2521 of the opening/closing rod B2500 from falling off. That is, the shaft portion B2521 of the opening/closing rod B2500 is supported by the support recess B2116 and the cover member B2270.

The opening/closing plate B2300 is a member that switches between the case where the ball rolls toward the first detection sensor B1230 and the case where the ball falls downward without coming into contact with the ball, depending on the difference in posture, and is a horizontally long rectangular plate. A portion B2310, a pair of shaft portions B2320 protruding along the longitudinal direction from the lateral ends of the plate portion B2310, and a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion B2320 at the base of the shaft portion B2320 on the right side in front view. and a load-bearing portion B2330 extending along the length of the main body.

The plate portion B2310 is provided with a rolling surface B2311 on which the ball rolls in the raised posture (open state, see FIG. 146), and the length of the short direction is the raised posture (open state, see FIG. ), the distance from the covering member B2200 is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction is set to approach the first detection sensor B1230.

In addition, the plate portion B2310 has a chamfered portion B2312 chamfered into an arcuate cross-section at the upper corner portion of the opposite end portion of the shaft portion B2320 in the raised posture (open state).

The plate portion B2310 is formed in a flat plate shape elongated in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

The load receiving portion B2330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry prevention portion B2331 extending from the front side of the rolling surface B2311, and an intervening transmission portion B2332 extending from the end of the ball entry prevention portion B2331 on the shaft portion B2320 side. and an engaging portion B2333 projecting from the intermediate transmission portion B2332 to the right side in rear view (the side on which the power transmission member B2430 is arranged).

The engagement portion B2333 extends to a position where it enters the motion locus of the power transmission member B2430, and has a chamfered portion B2333a chamfered in an arc shape on the upper surface portion. When the power transmission member B2430 abuts, the chamfered portion B2333a, not the corner portion, abuts the power transmission member B2430, so stress concentration can be avoided when the engaging portion B2333 abuts the power transmission member B2430. .

The first driving device B2400 includes a first solenoid B2410 that linearly operates a movable member by switching excitation, and an H-shaped front view (a shape with concave portions at the top and bottom) disposed at the tip of the movable member of the first solenoid B2410. ), and a power transmission member B2430 which is rotatably supported by the shaft portion B2171 of the base member B2100 and which rotates to apply a load to the opening/closing plate B2300.

The tip member B2420 is configured such that the concave portion on the upper side thereof can accommodate the protruding pin B2433 of the power transmission member B2430. Specifically, a recess is formed in such a shape that the protruding pin B2433 is accommodated inside while the power transmission member B2430 rotates (see FIG. 151(c)).

The power transmission member B2430 mainly includes a disk-shaped body portion B2431 and an extension portion B2435 extending from the body portion B2431 in the axial radial direction.

The body portion B2431 mainly includes a support hole B2432 through which the shaft portion B2171 is inserted, and a projecting pin B2433 projecting from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the drilling direction of the support hole B2432.

The protruding pin B2433 is a portion that engages with the tip member B2420. As the tip member B2420 linearly moves by switching the excitation of the first solenoid B2410, the protruding pin B2433 is displaced and the power transmission member B2430 is displaced. rotates.

The extension portion B2435 has a rotation tip portion B2436 formed in an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole B2432 at the extension tip portion, and a pushing portion B2437 projecting from the rotation tip portion B2436 toward the front side. Prepare.

The opening/closing bar B2500 has a pair of left and right arm portions B2510 and B2520 which are swingably supported at one end with respect to the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100 and which are spaced apart in the left and right direction on the front side, and the pair of arm portions. It has a connecting portion B2530 that connects the pivotal support end portions of B2510 and B2520 and the other end portion located on the opposite side, and is formed in a substantially U-shape.

The opening/closing bar B2500 is configured such that when the arm portions B2510 and B2520 swing, the connecting portion B2530 approaches and separates from the thin plate member B2110 on the front side of the thin plate member B2110. Left and right shaft portions B2511 and B2521 are formed so as to protrude in directions away from each other at the upper end portion (one end portion) located on the thin plate member B2110 side in the open state of the opening/closing rod B2500, and the axis line descends to the left when viewed from the front. The left and right shaft portions B2511 and B2521 are supported by the support recesses B2116 (see FIG. 148) of the thin plate member B2110 in a posture inclined to the right.

The connecting portion B2530 is provided so as to extend along the longitudinal direction on the surface of the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 facing the side of the pivoted end portion (one end portion side pivotally supported by the thin plate member B2110). It has a moving surface B2531.

In the following description, the left arm portion may be referred to as the left arm portion B2510 and the right arm portion may be referred to as the right arm portion B2520 for distinction.

As shown in FIG. 145, the left arm portion B2510 is provided so as to be positioned adjacent to the opening edge of the second special prize winning opening B1002, and the rear end portion of the left arm portion B2510 passes through the opening B2117 of the thin plate member B2110. It is configured to protrude to the rear side of the thin plate member B2110.

An acting portion B2512 is provided in the left arm portion B2510 at a position protruding to the rear side of the thin plate member B2110, and the acting portion B2512 is configured to be insertable from the front side into the transmission downstream member B2640 of the second driving device B2600. .

As a result, the opening/closing rod B2500 is configured to be displaceable (swingable) between the open state and the closed state as the second solenoid B2610 is driven (excited). Details of the open state and the open/closed state of the opening/closing bar B2500 will be described later.

Here, when the opening/closing rod B2500 swings from the closed state to the open state, the connecting portion B2530 moves downward around the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 to approach the thin plate member B2110, and conversely, from the open state. When swinging to the closed state, the connecting portion B2530 moves upward while separating from the thin plate member B2110 around the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 (see FIGS. 154 and 155). That is, the opening/closing rod B2500 is configured to swing so as to pass the ball riding on the rolling surface B2531 downward when it is displaced from the open state to the closed state.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 151(b) and 152(b), the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 allows the sphere to pass through the region surrounded by the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 and the connecting portion B2530. Thus, the connecting portion B2530 is formed with a length dimension that allows the connecting portion B2530 to be separated from the thin plate member B2110.

In the closed state, the connection portion B2530 is spaced forward from the thin plate member B2110 so that the ball can pass through the thin plate member B2110, while in the open state, the ball cannot pass through the thin plate member B2110. The connecting portion B2530 is configured to be closer to the front of the thin plate member B2110 than in the closed state.

That is, the opening/closing rod B2500 is switched between the closed state and the open state by moving the connecting portion B2530 back and forth on the front side of the thin plate member B2110 as the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 swing. The connecting portion B2530 is spaced in front of the thin plate member B2110 so that the ball can pass between it and the thin plate member B2110, and the ball passes downward through the area surrounded by the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 and the connecting portion B2530. On the other hand, the connection portion B2530 is positioned in front of the thin plate member B2110 to receive the ball so that the ball cannot pass between the thin plate member B2110 and the thin plate member B2110 in the open state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 145, when the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the closed state, a part of the left arm portion B2510 is positioned on the right side of the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002, and the opening to the second specific winning opening B1002 While preventing the ball from entering, when the opening/closing bar B2530 is in the open state, the left arm portion B2510 retreats backward from the right side of the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002 to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning opening B1002. It is configured to allow the entry of

That is, as the opening/closing bar B2500 is switched between the closed state and the open state, the second specific prize winning opening B1002 is opened and closed by the left arm portion B2510. Therefore, in the following description, the portion of the left arm portion B2510 that opens and closes the second specific winning opening B1002 will be referred to as an opening/closing portion B2513.

That is, the opening/closing bar B2500 is provided with an opening/closing portion B2513 that closes the second specific winning hole B1002 so as not to allow the ball to enter, on the inclined lower end side of the rolling surface B2531 in the horizontal direction, and the opening/closing bar B2500 is arranged at the raised position. In the closed state, the opening/closing part B2513 closes the second specific winning hole B1002, and in the open state in which the opening/closing bar B2500 is arranged at the lowered position, the opening/closing part B2513 opens the second specific winning hole B1002. .

In this embodiment, the opening and closing part B2513 is formed in a curved shape (cross-sectional J-shape) that is concave toward the rear, so that the left arm part B2510 does not overlap the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002 in the open state. is configured to retract backwards.

In addition, when the second specific winning opening B1002 is closed by the opening/closing part B2513, a part of the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened (not hidden from the opening direction) with an opening width that does not allow the ball to enter. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening right side of the second specific winning opening B1002 may be completely closed by the opening/closing part B2513.

In addition, the opening/closing portion B2513 is formed in an inclined surface shape in which the right side facing the side opposite to the second specific winning opening B1002 is inclined toward the second specific winning opening B1002 as it approaches the front edge side, and the opening/closing bar B2500 is in an open state. When the state is switched from to the closed state, at a position close to the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002, the opening and closing part B2513 can be inserted between the second specific winning opening B1002 and the ball on the rolling surface B2531 It has become.

That is, by forming the opening/closing portion B2513 in the shape of an inclined surface, the ball just before entering the second specific winning hole B1002 (the ball detected by the second detection sensor B1250) is moved to the second specific winning hole B1002. can be pushed back from

Further, when the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the open state, a part of the opening/closing portion B2513 protrudes forward from the thin plate member B2110 and is positioned above the rolling surface B2531 (Fig. 153(d)). ), the ball rolling on the rolling surface B2531 in contact with the thin plate member B2110 contacts the opening/closing portion B2513.

Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling surface B2531 while in contact with the thin plate member B2110 contacts the opening/closing portion B2513 at the inclined lower end portion of the rolling surface B2531 in the left-right direction. By separating the ball from the thin plate member B2110, the ball can be guided to the center of the opening of the second specific prize winning opening B1002.

In this way, the opening/closing part B2513 functions to push back the ball that is about to enter the second specific winning hole B1002, while separating the ball rolling on the rolling surface B2531 from the thin plate member B2110. It also functions as a guide surface that leads to the second specific winning opening B1002.

The right arm portion B2520 is formed in a curved shape (J-shape) that is substantially the same as the left arm portion B2510. It is configured to bias the opening/closing bar B2500 from the closed state toward the open state.

That is, in the opening/closing rod B2500, by providing the weight portion B2522 on the end side apart from the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 pivotally supported by the thin plate member B2110, the opening/closing rod B2500 can be rapidly displaced from the closed state to the open state. At the same time, the stability of the opening/closing rod B2500 in the open state is enhanced by the weight portion B2522 to prevent the opening/closing rod B2500 from being displaced from the open state to the closed state due to the impact when the reaching ball contacts the rolling surface B2531. It is configured to prevent (suppress).

As shown in FIG. 148, the weight portion B2522 is formed by fitting and fixing a metal weight member B2523 from a side opening of a cylindrical weight fixing portion B2522a that opens rightward.

The weight B2522 is arranged below the upper edge of the long opening B2215 of the covering member B2200 in the closed state of the opening/closing bar B2500, and is positioned forward of the rear side surface of the main body member B2210. It is provided so as to be positioned below the eaves portion B2271 of the cover plate portion B2270, and prevents the falling ball from contacting the weight portion B2522.

That is, the covering member B2200 is provided with a canopy B2271 that prevents the ball from contacting the weight B2522 on the front side of the thin plate member B2110 and above the moving range of the weight B2522. It contacts the portion B2522 to prevent the opening/closing bar B2500 from being biased from the closed state to the open state.

The connecting portion B2530 is formed in a bar shape extending parallel to the axis of the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 (see FIG. 148). is positioned below the right end and is configured to incline downward to the left.

In the connection portion B2530, a rolling surface B2531 is formed on a surface facing the pivot end side of the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 (a surface facing upward in the open state), and is connected when the opening/closing rod B2500 is in the open state. The ball received by the bar B2530 can be rolled toward the left end, which is the lower end of the inclination in the left-right direction.

Here, the left end of the rolling surface B2531 in the open state of the opening/closing bar B2500 is configured to be positioned at a height position substantially aligned with the lower end of the opening of the second specific winning hole B1002, and is on the rolling surface B2531. ball can be rolled toward the second specific winning opening B1002.

That is, the rolling surface B2531 is provided on the opening/closing rod B2500 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side of the flow path of the ball toward the second specific winning opening B1002 in the open state of the opening/closing rod B2500, and connects the downward passage. The ball regulated by the part B2530 is rolled toward the second specific winning opening B1002.

Further, in the open state, the connecting portion B2530 is configured to be separated from the front side of the thin plate member B2110 by a distance narrower than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 152(b)), displacing the opening/closing rod B2500 toward the closed state. As a result, the space between the connecting rod B2530 and the thin plate member B2110 can be rapidly expanded to a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the ball, and the ball on the rolling surface B2531 can drop downward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145, when the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the closed state, the connecting portion B2530 is configured to contact the upper edge portion B2216 forming the upper edge of the elongated opening B2215 of the covering member B2200. At least part of the rolling surface B2531 in the closed state faces the upper edge B2216.

In this embodiment, the entire length of the connecting portion B2530 is configured to contact the upper edge portion B2216 in the closed state. That is, it is configured so that the ball flowing down from above does not come into contact with the rolling surface B2531 in the closed state, thereby preventing the opening/closing rod B2500 from being displaced from the closed state to the open state due to contact with the ball. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 152(a), the rolling surface B2531 is configured so as to be inclined downward toward the second specific winning opening B1002 in the open state, while being horizontal in the front-rear direction (front-rear direction). direction is non-tilted). As a result, the ball rolling on the rolling surface B2531 can be easily displaced back and forth, so that the deceleration effect due to contact with the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 can be effectively generated.

Further, the rolling surface B2531 is formed so that the width dimension is different between the inclined upper end side and the inclined lower end side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the rolling surface B2531 includes a strip-shaped first rolling surface portion B2532 positioned on the upper end side of the horizontal inclination, and a lower end of the horizontal inclination of the first rolling surface portion B2532. A second rolling surface portion B2533 having a width dimension larger than that of the first rolling surface portion B2532 is provided.

The first rolling surface portion B2532 and the second rolling surface portion B2533 are formed such that the rear end portion facing the thin plate member B2110 in the open state is formed in a continuous linear shape over the formation portions of both the rolling surface portions B2532 and B2533. ing.

On the other hand, the front end portion of the second rolling surface portion B2533 located on the side of the body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 is positioned forward of the front end portion of the first rolling surface portion B2532 located on the side of the body member B2210. is formed in

That is, the opening/closing rod B2500 is formed with a stepped portion B2534 corresponding to the connecting portion of both the rolling surface portions B2532 and B2533 at the front portion of the rolling surface B2531. When the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the closed state, the stepped portion B2534 is engaged from below with an engagement recess B2217 recessed upward from the left upper edge of the long opening B2215 of the covering member B2200. and prevents (corrects) the positional deviation of the opening/closing rod B2500 in the axial direction.

In this way, in the rolling surface B2531, by widening the second rolling surface portion B2533 corresponding to the inclined lower end portion where the opening/closing portion B2513 is formed, the rolling surface B2531 can extend along the inclination of the opening/closing portion B2513. Even if the rolling ball is guided forward, it can roll on the second rolling surface B2533, so the ball can be stably rolled on the rolling surface B2531. In addition, the second rolling surface portion B2533 is formed with a lateral width exceeding the diameter of the sphere from the right end portion of the opening/closing portion B2513 (the right side surface of the left arm portion B2510).

The second driving device B2600 includes a second solenoid B2610 that linearly moves a movable member by switching excitation, and an H-shaped front view (a shape with concave portions at the top and bottom) disposed at the tip of the movable member of the second solenoid B2610. ), a driven rotating member B2630 that is pivotally supported (pivotally supported) by a shaft portion B2181 so as to be rotatable as the distal end member B2620 is displaced in the lateral direction, and the rotational displacement of the driven rotating member B2630 and a transmission downstream member B2640 that can be displaced along with it and guided in the vertical direction by the guide ridge B2182.

The distal end member B2620 is configured such that the concave portion on the lower side thereof can accommodate the protruding pin B2633 of the driven rotating member B2630. Specifically, a recess is formed in a shape that keeps the projecting pin B2633 accommodated inside while the driven rotating member B2630 rotates (see FIGS. 150(c) and 152(c)).

The driven rotating member B2630 includes a disk-shaped main body B2631, a support hole B2632 having a diameter (slightly larger diameter) that allows the shaft B2181 to be inserted through the main body B2631, and an outer diameter side from the main body B2631. A protruding pin B2633 protruding in a cylindrical shape parallel to the drilling direction of the support hole B2632 from the extended arm portion extending to the main body portion B2631, and an extending portion B2635 extending in the axial radial direction from the main body portion B2631. , and a protruding pin B2636 protruding in a columnar shape parallel to the drilling direction of the support hole B2632 at the extending tip portion of the extending portion B2635.

The protruding pin B2633 is a portion that engages with the tip member B2620. As the tip member B2620 linearly moves by switching the excitation of the second solenoid B2610, the protruding pin B2633 is displaced, and the driven rotating member B2630 rotates. rotates.

The protruding pin B2636 protrudes toward the body plate portion B2641 side of the downstream transmission member B2640, and can be inserted through the long hole B2643. The distance between the projecting pin B2636 and the support hole B2632 is configured to be longer than the distance between the projecting pin B2633 and the support hole B2632. At the tip of the projecting pin B2636, a retaining projecting portion is formed in a direction perpendicular to the projecting direction.

The retaining projecting portion is formed in a shape that can be inserted into the long hole B2643 when the longitudinal direction is aligned, and can be inserted during assembly, while the retaining projecting portion can be removed after assembly is completed. It is configured such that the longitudinal direction and the longitudinal direction of the long hole B2643 are not aligned. Thereby, when the transmission downstream member B2640 is displaced in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent it from coming off the projecting pin B2636.

The downstream transmission member B2640 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion B2641 arranged opposite to the back side of the thin plate member B2110, and a vertically elongated projection protruding from the left side of the main body plate portion B2641 toward the front side. A guided ridge B2642, a long hole B2643 drilled in the main body plate portion B2641 in a laterally elongated shape, and a pair of plates vertically arranged side by side as a plate portion wide in the front-rear direction on the left side of the main body plate portion B2641. and a part B2644.

The guided protrusion B2642 is formed with a width slightly shorter than the gap between the pair of guide protrusions B2182. As a result, the guided protrusion B2642 can be guided by the guide protrusion B2182, so that the posture of the downstream transmission member B2640 can be stabilized, and the displacement direction of the downstream transmission member B2640 can be stabilized in the vertical direction. can.

The elongated hole B2643 is a through hole through which the protruding pin B2636 of the driven rotating member B2630 is inserted. It is possible to improve the followability of the transmission downstream member B2640 to the displacement of . Further, the elongated hole B2643 is formed so that the horizontal width is longer than the vertical width, so that the projecting pin B2636 can be allowed to be displaced in the horizontal direction.

The plate portion B2644 is arranged so as to vertically sandwich the acting portion B2512 of the opening/closing rod B2500. As a result, as the downstream transmission member B2640 is displaced in the vertical direction, a vertical load is generated from the plate portion B2644 to the acting portion B2512, thereby displacing the opening/closing rod B2500.

As described above, the displacement of the opening/closing rod B2500 is a rotational displacement centered on the shafts B2511 and B2521, so the acting portion B2512 is displaced not only in the vertical direction but also in the front-rear direction. The front-to-rear length of the plate portion B2644 is set so that the plate portion B2644 sandwiches the action portion B2512 in the vertical direction no matter where the action portion B2512 is arranged in the front-rear direction. Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the opening/closing rod B2500, the allowable width of displacement of the opening/closing rod B2500 can be restricted by the arrangement of the plate portion B2644.

The allowable width will be explained in more detail. First, if only the plate portion B2644 is to switch the state of the opening/closing bar B2500 between the open state and the closed state, only the upper plate portion B2644 may be used. As long as the upper plate portion B2644a exists, the second solenoid B2610 is de-energized and the tip member B2620 is displaced to the left, and the action portion B2512 is pushed down by the plate portion B2644a, thereby closing the opening/closing bar B2500. (see FIGS. 150(a) and 150(c)).

In this closed state, the center of gravity of the opening/closing bar B2500 is located on the side of the weight B2522 (the front side of the shafts B2511 and B2521). (also referred to as the front-down direction).

The plate portion B2644a applies a load to the opening/closing rod B2500 in a rotational direction (also referred to as forward upward direction) that is opposite to the forward downward direction. By exceeding the load, the switching bar B2500 is maintained in the closed state.

When the second solenoid B2610 is energized and the tip member B2620 is displaced rightward, the plate portion B2644a is displaced upward, thereby temporarily weakening the load in the direction of pushing down the action portion B2512 from the plate portion B2644a. In this embodiment, the load on the action portion B2512 is eliminated by retracting the plate portion B2644a above the arrangement range of the action portion B2512.

As a result, the opening/closing bar B2500 can be displaced forward and downward by the biasing force of the weight portion B2522, and is switched to the open state. If the second solenoid B2610 is de-energized from this state, the plate portion B2644a pushes down the action portion B2512 again, and the closed state can be configured. Thus, if only switching the state of the opening/closing bar B2500 between the open state and the closed state is considered, only the plate portion B2644a is essential, and the lower plate portion B2644b is unnecessary.

On the other hand, with only the plate portion B2644a, there is a possibility that a problem may arise in the stability of the posture of the opening/closing rod B2500 in the open state of the opening/closing rod B2500. For example, in the open state of the opening/closing rod B2500, it is easily conceivable that the opening/closing rod B2500 will be displaced by a ball colliding with the opening/closing rod B2500. cannot be regulated.

Therefore, even though the second solenoid B2610 is energized and controlled to maintain the open/close bar B2500 in the open state, the impact of the impact of the ball displaces the open/close bar B2500 forward and upward, resulting in the closed state. It can cause trouble to configure.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the plate portion B2644b is arranged below the plate portion B2644a to restrict the upward and forward displacement of the open/close bar B2500 in the open state. As a result, the opening and closing bar B2500 in the open state is affected by the impact of the ball, other disturbances (for example, the player applying a load to the pachinko machine 10 and moving it, the load caused by the displacement of the movable role, and the inside and outside of the game area). It is possible to avoid the problem of being displaced due to a load applied from, etc.) and constituting a closed state.

Next, state switching of the variable winning device B2000 will be described. FIG. 150(a) is a front view of the variable winning device B2000, FIG. 150(b) is a top view of the variable winning device B2000 viewed in the direction of arrow CLb in FIG. 150(a), and FIG. 150(c). [Fig. 150] is a rear view of the variable prize winning device B2000 viewed in the direction of arrow CLc in Fig. 150(b).

151(a) is a front view of the variable winning device B2000, FIG. 151(b) is a top view of the variable winning device B2000 viewed in the direction of the arrow CLIb in FIG. 151(a), and FIG. 151(c). [Fig. 151B] is a rear view of the variable winning device B2000 viewed in the direction of arrow CLIc in Fig. 151(b).

152(a) is a front view of the variable winning device B2000, FIG. 152(b) is a top view of the variable winning device B2000 viewed in the direction of the arrow CLIIb in FIG. 152(a), and FIG. 152(c). [Fig. 152B] is a rear view of the variable winning device B2000 viewed in the direction of arrow CLIIc in Fig. 152(b).

FIG. 153(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 along the CLIIIa-CLIIIa line in FIG. 150(a), and FIG. 153(b) is a variable winning device B2000 along the CLIIIb-CLIIIb line in FIG. 150(a). 153(c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 taken along line CLIIIc-CLIIIc of FIG. 151(a), and FIG. 153(d) is a cross-sectional view of CLIIId-CLIIId of FIG. 152(a). It is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 along the line.

150 shows the closed state of the switch plate B2300 and the closed state of the switch bar B2500, FIG. 151 shows the open state of the switch plate B2300 and the closed state of the switch bar B2500, and FIG. The closed state of B2300 and the open state of open/close bar B2500 are shown. 150 to 152, the main body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 is illustrated transparently so that the shape of the rear side thereof can be visually recognized.

In FIGS. 150(a), 151(a), and 152(a), in the pre-ball entry range, at least a portion of the range through which the ball cannot pass is additionally marked with polka dots (dots).

As shown in FIG. 150(a) with polka dots (dots), in the closed state of the opening/closing plate B2300, the ball entry preventing portion B2331 is arranged on the left side of the opening of the first specific winning hole B1001, and FIG. As shown in a), the entry of a ball is prevented by partially closing the first specific winning hole B1001. Also, in the closed state of the opening/closing bar B2500, the opening/closing portion B2513 is arranged on the right side of the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002, and as shown in FIG. 153(b), the second specific winning opening B1002 is partially closed. The entry of the ball is prevented by being

In this way, in the state shown in FIG. 150(a), the ball flowing down the pre-entering range falls downward without entering either the first specific winning hole B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1002. Become. That is, when the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the closed state, the ball-entering preventing portion B2331 is arranged so as to partially close the opening of the first detection sensor B1230, and when the opening/closing rod B2500 is in the closed state, the opening/closing portion B2513 is positioned so as to cover the second detection sensor B1250. It is arranged so as to partially block the opening of the Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the first specific winning hole B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1002.

Therefore, irregular winning (for example, even if the ball is not guided by the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing bar B2500, the ball that collides with other components is thrown laterally into the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002. entering the ball), cheating (for example, attracting the ball with a magnet to win a prize, or pulling or shaking the end of the string on the opposite side of the ball that is hit with the string glued to the ball) It is possible to prevent the winning of a prize by an act of manipulating the position to win a prize.

150(a), the plate portion B2310 of the opening/closing plate B2300 is added to the range described above in FIG. The polka dot pattern (dots) is erased from part B2331.

That is, by energizing the first solenoid B2410 and switching the opening/closing plate B2300 to the open state, the gap between the plate portion B2310 and the body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 is made less than the diameter of the ball, and the ball opens and closes. It is configured such that the front side of the plate B2300 cannot be passed downward.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153(c), in the open state of the opening/closing plate B2300, the ball-entering preventing portion B2331 enters the through hole B2114 and passes through the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110 (at least the first specific winning hole B1001). By retreating to the rear side (than the opening range), it is arranged at a position that does not block the opening of the first detection sensor B1230, and is configured not to interfere with the ball entering the first specific winning hole B1001.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 151(a), the ball flowing down the pre-entering range is guided toward the first specific winning opening B1001, and is configured to be able to enter the first specific winning opening B1001.

152(a), the range with polka dots (dots) has a connecting portion B2530 of the opening/closing bar B2500 added to the range described above in FIG. The polka dot pattern (dots) has been erased from.

That is, by energizing the second solenoid B2610 and switching the opening/closing bar B2500 to the open state, the gap between the connecting portion B2530 and the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the connecting portion By setting the gap between B2530 and the main body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 to be less than the diameter of the ball, the ball cannot pass downward in front and behind the opening/closing bar B2500.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153(d), when the opening/closing bar B2500 is open, the opening/closing portion B2513 enters the opening portion B2117 and is closer to the rear side than the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110 (at least the second specific winning opening B1002). By retreating to the outside of the opening range), it is arranged at a position that does not block the opening of the second detection sensor B1250, and is configured not to interfere with the ball entering the second specific winning hole B1002.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 152(a), the ball flowing down the pre-entering range is guided toward the second specific winning opening B1002, and configured to be able to enter the second specific winning opening B1002. When a ball enters the first specific winning hole B1001, the first specific winning hole B1001 is blocked by the ball entry prevention part B2331 of the opening/closing plate B2300, and the right arm part B2520 and the connecting part B2530 of the opening/closing bar B2500 It is prevented by being arranged in the opening direction of the 1 specific winning hole B1001.

Switching of excitation of the solenoid will be described below. In FIG. 150(c), neither the first solenoid B2410 nor the second solenoid B2610 is energized and is in a non-excited state. This is the standby state of the variable winning device B2000, which is maintained before the start of the game or in the normal state, and the variable winning device B2000 is maintained in this state for most of its operating time.

Mainly in the special game state, as shown in FIG. 151 (c) and FIG. 152 (c), the first solenoid B2410 or the second solenoid B2610 is energized and excited, and the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing bar B2500 state can be switched.

As shown in FIG. 151(c), the second solenoid B2610 is maintained in a non-excited state, and when the first solenoid B2410 is energized, the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state, and the first detection sensor B1230 is first specified. It becomes possible to guide the ball to the winning opening B1001.

The opening/closing plate B2300 is rotated around the axis of the shaft portion B2320 (see FIG. 153(a)) by pushing down the engaging portion B2333 from the power transmission member B2430 when switching to the open state. Details of state switching and open state of the opening/closing plate B2300 will be described. That is, it is rotationally displaced about an axis perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 153(a).

When the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the open state, the first solenoid B2410 is in an energized state, the rotating tip portion B2436 of the power transmission member B2430 is displaced counterclockwise in rear view, and the engaging portion B2333 of the opening/closing plate B2300 is pushed. It is pushed into part B2437 (see FIG. 148).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 153(a) and 153(c), the engagement portion B2333 of the opening/closing plate B2300 is set so that the power transmission member B2430 is operated when the opening/closing plate B2300 starts to operate from the closed state. While arranged on the locus BE1, when the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state, it is pushed outward (toward the front side) of the operation locus BE1 along the rotation axis direction of the power transmission member B2430. Note that the motion trajectory BE1 is illustrated as the outline of the movement trajectory of the portion including the pushing portion B2437.

Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening/closing plate B2300 to the power transmission member B2430 after the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state is not the operating direction (rotational direction) of the power transmission member B2430, but the surface that forms the rotation direction. is multiplied in the axial direction which is perpendicular to . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft portion B2320 (see FIG. 153(a)) applied to the opening/closing plate B2300 from being transmitted to the first solenoid B2410 via the power transmission member B2430.

As a result, once the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state, the driving force of the first solenoid B2410 for maintaining the opening state of the opening/closing plate B2300 is prevented from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening/closing plate B2300. can be done. Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the first solenoid B2410 to the opening/closing plate B2300 at the maximum value.

In this way, even if a varying load is applied to the opening/closing plate B2300, the opening/closing plate B2300 can be maintained in the open state without being affected by the load. An example of the varying load applied to the opening/closing plate B2300 is the load applied by the weight of the sphere. That is, for example, since the opening/closing plate B2300 is configured so that balls land on the rolling surface B2311, the load due to the weight of the balls is received when the balls land. , the load applied to the switching plate B2300 can be varied.

When the first solenoid B2410 is de-energized, the extended portion B2435 of the power transmission member B2430 is displaced upward, the load on the opening/closing plate B2300 is released, and the opening/closing plate B2300 rotates in such a manner that the plate portion B2310 is displaced downward. dynamic displacement. Due to this rotational displacement, the ball entry preventing portion B2331 protrudes so as to block the first specific winning opening B1001 (see FIG. 153(a)).

That is, the ball-entering prevention part B2331 closes the opening of the first specific winning hole B1001 in such a manner as to narrow it from the rear side edge. In this embodiment, since the inner surface of the back side of the first specific winning opening B1001 is flush with the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100, the first specific winning opening is formed simultaneously with the start of displacement of the ball entry preventing portion B2331. The opening of mouth B1001 can begin to narrow. As a result, the first specific winning opening B1001 can be quickly closed.

As shown in FIG. 152(c), the first solenoid B2410 is maintained in a non-excited state, and when the second solenoid B2610 is energized, the opening/closing bar B2500 is switched to the open state, and the second detection sensor B1250 detects the second detection sensor B1250. It becomes possible to guide the ball to the winning opening B1002.

When the opening/closing rod B2500 is switched to the open state, the plate portion B2644 is displaced upward and the downward load applied to the action portion B2512 of the opening/closing rod B2500 is released. 153(b)). That is, it is rotationally displaced about an axis perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 153(b). Details of state switching and open state of the opening/closing bar B2500 will be described.

When the opening/closing bar B2500 is in an open state, the second solenoid B2610 is in an excited state. That is, when the second solenoid B2610 is energized to be in an excited state, the driven rotating member B2630 is displaced counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, and the downstream transmission member B2640 is displaced upward, thereby applying force to the opening/closing rod B2500. The load is released, and the opening/closing rod B2500 is switched to the open state.

In the energized state of the second solenoid B2610, the plate portion B2644b is arranged below the acting portion B2512 of the opening/closing rod B2500, and restricts the forward and upward rotation of the opening/closing rod B2500. As a result, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing rod B2500 from changing its state toward the closed state due to an impact that may occur when a ball collides with the opening/closing rod B2500.

The displacement of the opening/closing rod B2500 from the closed state to the open state is downward displacement, and the displacement restricting projection B2514 (see FIG. 149) projecting parallel to the axial direction from the left arm portion B2510 is attached to the base member B2100. An open state is formed at the abutting position. Therefore, it is less likely that the opening/closing rod B2500 will be switched to the closed state due to an increase in the load due to the weight of the ball that rides on the rolling surface B2531 of the opening/closing rod B2500, and the opening/closing rod B2500 will rather likely be maintained in the open state.

Therefore, once the opening/closing rod B2500 is switched to the open state, it is possible to prevent the driving force of the second solenoid B2610 for maintaining the opening/closing rod B2500 in the open state from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening/closing rod B2500. (In the first place, the opening/closing bar B2500 is not maintained in the open state by the driving force). Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the second solenoid B2610 at the maximum value.

In this way, even if a varying load is applied to the opening/closing rod B2500, the opening/closing rod B2500 can be maintained in the open state without being affected by the load. An example of the varying load applied to the opening/closing rod B2500 is the load applied by the weight of the ball. That is, for example, since the opening/closing bar B2500 is configured so that the balls land on the rolling surface B2531, when the balls land, the load due to the weight of the balls is received. , the load applied to the switching bar B2500 can be varied.

When the second solenoid B2610 is de-energized, the plate portion B2644 of the downstream transmission member B2640 is displaced downward, and a load is generated in the direction of pushing down the operating portion B2512 of the opening/closing rod B2500. The B2520 and the connecting portion B2530 are rotationally displaced in an upward displacement manner. Due to this rotational displacement, the opening/closing portion B2513 protrudes so as to block the second specific winning opening B1002 (see FIG. 153(b)).

That is, the opening/closing part B2513 closes the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002 in such a manner as to narrow it from the rear side edge. In this embodiment, since the inner surface of the back side of the second specific winning opening B1002 is flush with the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100, the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened simultaneously with the start of displacement of the opening/closing part B2513. You can begin to narrow the opening of the As a result, the second specific winning opening B1002 can be quickly closed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, the action of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing bar B2500 on the falling ball will be described.

FIG. 154(a) is a sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 along the CLIVa-CLIVa line in FIG. 151(a), and FIG. 154(b) is a variable winning device B2000 along the CLIVb-CLIVb line in FIG. 151(a). 154(c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 along line CLIVc-CLIVc of FIG. 151(a).

Also, FIG. 155(a) is a sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 along the CLVa-CLVa line in FIG. 152(a), and FIG. 155(b) is a variable winning device along the CLVb-CLVb line in FIG. 152(a). It is a sectional view of the device B2000, and FIG. 155(c) is a sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 taken along line CLVc-CLVc of FIG. 152(a).

In addition, in FIGS. 154 and 155, the outer diameter of the sphere is illustrated with imaginary lines for easy understanding. Also, in FIGS. 154 and 155, description of the first driving device B2400 and the second driving device B2600 is omitted.

In the special game state, the state shown in FIG. 154 and the state shown in FIG. 155 are alternately switched. At that time, after switching the side of the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing bar B2500 that is in the open state to the closed state, the side that is in the closed state is opened after an interval between rounds whose length of time is defined in advance. By setting the switching interval to be shorter than the time the ball falls (for example, 0.04 seconds), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of loose balls.

Here, of the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing rod B2500, the case where the ball on the side that is switched from the open state to the closed state is arranged above the side that is switched from the closed state to the open state. As described in each of the above-described embodiments, it is easy to prevent the occurrence of stray balls. On the other hand, the present embodiment adopts another effective configuration for preventing the occurrence of loose balls. This will be explained in order.

First, the displacement of the opening/closing plate B2300 from the open state to the closed state is a forward-downward rotational displacement around the rear end, so the ball on the opening/closing plate B2300 flows down while being drawn forward. However, when the opening/closing bar B2500 moves from the closed state to the open state, the connecting portion B2530 is displaced along the arc direction with the rear end portion as the central axis, in which the connecting portion B2530 slides downward on the back side. That is, the direction of displacement of the connecting portion B2530 is opposed to the downward direction of the ball in the longitudinal direction.

Similarly, the displacement of the connecting portion B2530 of the opening/closing rod B2500 from the open state to the closed state is along the arc direction with the rear end portion as the center axis in the manner of rising upward on the front side, so that it was riding on the connecting portion B2530. When the ball flows down while being gathered to the rear side, the direction of displacement of the opening/closing plate B2300 when moving from the closed state to the open state becomes forward upward rotational displacement about the rear end portion as an axis. That is, the direction of displacement of the opening/closing plate B2300 is opposite to the downward direction of the ball in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to the case where the ball flows vertically downward, the amount of displacement of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the connecting portion B2530 from when the ball is switched to the open/closed state to when the ball starts to be received can be reduced, thus avoiding the spilled ball. can be made easier.

Secondly, as shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, at least a part of the displacement trajectory BE11 of the plate portion B2310 of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the displacement trajectory BE12 of the connection portion B2530 of the opening/closing bar B2500 are It is located below the center of the ball on the plate B2300 or the opening/closing bar B2500). Therefore, even if the mating member is switched to the closed state and the ball starts falling, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a loose ball by forming the open state while the ball is in the displacement trajectory BE11, BE12. .

In particular, as shown in FIG. 154(c), the ball that is on the lower part of the pre-entering range of the ball rolling on the opening/closing plate B2300 protrudes below the displacement trajectory BE12, and a loose ball is likely to occur. In terms of form, the ball is easily rescued by the anti-drop portion B2524 extending from the vicinity of the right arm portion B2520 of the connecting portion B2530.

The anti-spill portion B2524 extends in the shape of a thin plate that curves downward when the opening/closing rod B2500 is in the closed state from the tip of the rotation of the right arm portion B2520. The thin plate has a constant cross-sectional shape in the axial direction, and the radius of curvature of the curved shape is configured to be larger than the radius of the sphere when viewed in the axial direction. As a result, the contact between the spill prevention portion B2524 and the ball can be made to be a contact at a single point.

The extended distal end of the spill prevention portion B2524 is formed so as to taper in the axial cross-sectional shape. As a result, the area of contact with the ball when the anti-spill portion B2524 is displaced closer to the sphere can be suppressed, so the anti-spill portion B2524 can be easily slipped into the lower hemispherical portion of the sphere.

Here, if an attempt is made to rescue the ball by attaching a front-hanging portion to the tip of the member that is displaced in the front-rear direction, as in the guide plates B1300 and B1500, the area of the portion to be rescued expands when viewed from the front. In addition, since the direction of the load is orthogonal to the front side surface, there is likely to be no place for the load to escape through the ball, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are likely to stop.

On the other hand, the displacement of the anti-spill portion B2524 includes displacement in the vertical direction, so even if the tip is made thinner, the surface that contacts the sphere can be increased. In addition, since the direction of the load is inclined with respect to the front and rear side surfaces, the load can be released favorably. This makes it easier to avoid the situation where the opening/closing rod B2500 stops.

In this embodiment, the anti-spill portion B2524 is formed from the downstream end with a width half the axial length of the connecting portion B2530. Even if the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state when the ball is on the ball, the opening/closing bar B2500 is opened after that, so that the ball can be easily rescued by the spill prevention portion B2524. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a lost ball.

On the other hand, focusing on the ball rolling on the opening/closing rod B2500, the ball is arranged above the lower edge of the displacement trajectory BE11 throughout the flow path of the ball flowing down on the opening/closing rod B2500. Therefore, even if a portion corresponding to the spill prevention portion B2524 is not formed on the opening/closing plate B2300, the width of the plate portion B2310 in the lateral direction can be used to facilitate the recovery of the ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a lost ball.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, when the opening/closing plate B2300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the opening/closing plate B2300 is displaced upward. do. Therefore, if no countermeasures are taken, the ball will be fixed between the opening/closing plate B2300 and the projecting portions B1140 and B2211, which may hinder the operation of the opening/closing plate B2300.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 are displaced to the left and right, and the length of each projecting portion is shorter than the radius of the sphere (2.7 mm in the present embodiment). When the ball abuts against the protruding portions B1140 and B2211 during operation of the opening/closing plate B2300, the ball can be displaced in the horizontal direction by utilizing the curvature of the ball. In addition, since the lower ends of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 are arranged above the center position of the ball rolling on the opening/closing plate B2300, the ball can be displaced in the front-rear direction using the curvature of the ball. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from being fixed, so that the operation of the opening/closing plate B2300 can be maintained well.

When the opening/closing rod B2500 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, it is displaced upward, so that it vertically faces the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 with the ball interposed therebetween. Therefore, if no countermeasure is taken, the ball will be fixed between the opening/closing rod B2500 and the projecting portions B1140 and B2211, which may hinder the operation of the opening/closing rod B2500.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the radius of the displacement trajectory of the connecting portion B2530 is set larger than the radius of the sphere, so that the connecting portion B2530 can be configured to move around the outside of the sphere. This makes it easier to avoid the situation where the ball is fixed between the connection portion B2530 of the opening/closing rod B2500 and the projecting portions B1140 and B2211.

Further, when the opening/closing rod B2500 is displaced toward the closed state, the connecting portion B2530 is displaced toward the covering member B2200 (front side), while the ball on the connecting portion B2530 moves along with the displacement of the opening/closing rod B2500. As the rolling contact surface B2531 inclines in the rearward downward direction, it is displaced to the base member B2100 side (rear side).

That is, the ball riding on the connecting portion B2530 is configured to move the upper side of the connecting portion B2530 toward the side that does not interfere with the displacement of the connecting portion B2530. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid obstruction of the displacement of the connecting portion B2530 by the ball, so that the ball is fixed between the connecting portion B2530 of the opening/closing rod B2500 and the projecting portions B1140 and B2211. It can be made easier to avoid the occurrence.

With reference to FIG. 156, the manner in which a ball enters the variable winning device B2000 will be described. Figures 156(a) and 156(b) are front views of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640 and the variable winning device B2000.

In FIG. 156(a), the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the open state and the opening/closing rod B2500 is in the closed state. In FIG. 156(b), the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the closed state and the opening/closing rod B2500 is opened. state.

In this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 144, the variable winning device B2000 is arranged in the lower left and right center of the game area (below the first winning opening 64). A ball can be made to reach the variable winning device B2000. In addition, since the game area is configured in a substantially bilaterally symmetrical shape, there is not much difference in the time it takes for the shot ball to reach the variable winning device B2000 depending on whether it is a left-handed game or a right-handed game.

In such a game machine, for example, the opening/closing plate of the variable winning device is configured to be opened by tilting and displacing toward the player's side with the lower side as an axis. If the balls are arranged symmetrically, it is considered that there is not much difference in the time from when the ball reaches the variable winning device to when the ball passes the detection sensor in either the left-handed game or the right-handed game.

On the other hand, in the variable winning device B2000 of the present embodiment, there is a large difference between the left-handed game and the right-handed game in the time it takes for the ball to pass through the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 after reaching the pre-entering range. occur.

First, the difference in the time from arrival to ball entry will be described. For example, when a game is played left-handed, many balls are left-handed and left-handed, except for the ball that deviates to the right from the top of the first winning port 64 due to the strong firing intensity, before entering the variable winning device B2000. Go to range.

In this case, when the opening/closing plate B2300 is opened (see FIG. 156(a)), the ball rides on the left side (upstream side) of the opening/closing plate B2300 and flows down toward the first specific winning opening B1001. do. Therefore, after the ball rides on the opening/closing plate B2300, it takes longer than the time required for the ball to flow down the half of the left/right length of the opening/closing plate B2300 until it passes through the first specific winning hole B1001.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing bar B2500 is opened (see FIG. 156(b)), the ball rides on the left side (downstream side) of the opening/closing bar B2500 and flows down toward the second specific winning opening B1002. do. Therefore, the time required from when the ball rides on the opening/closing bar B2500 until it passes through the second specific prize winning opening B1002 is less than the time required for the ball to flow down half of the left/right length of the opening/closing bar B2500.

Also, for example, when a game is played with a right-handed player, most of the balls, excluding the ball that deviates to the left from above the first winning hole 64, are moved along the right-handed downflow path BL22 to the pre-entering range of the variable winning device B2000. Head.

In this case, when the opening/closing plate B2300 is opened (see FIG. 156(a)), the ball rides on the right side (downstream side) of the opening/closing plate B2300 and flows down toward the first specific winning opening B1001. do. Therefore, the time required for the ball to ride on the opening/closing plate B2300 until it passes through the first specific prize winning opening B1001 is less than the time required for the ball to flow down half of the lateral length of the opening/closing plate B2300.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing bar B2500 is opened (see FIG. 156(b)), the ball rides on the right side (upstream side) of the opening/closing bar B2500 and flows down toward the second specific winning opening B1002. do. Therefore, after the ball rides on the opening/closing bar B2500, it takes longer than the time required for the ball to flow down half of the left/right length of the opening/closing bar B2500 until it passes through the second specific prize winning opening B1002.

In this way, in the variable winning device B2000, the distance from the left-handed downstream path BL21 (or right-handed downstream path BL22) to the first detection sensor B1230, and the distance from the left-handed downstream path BL21 (or right-handed downstream path BL22) to the second Since the distance to the detection sensor B1250 is arranged to be different, the period until the ball that has reached the pre-entering range passes through the first specific winning hole B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1002 It can be changed by striking games.

Therefore, since the selection of the ball shooting mode (selection of left-handed game or right-handed game) can be associated with the digestion speed of the jackpot game, the player is requested to switch the ball shooting mode in the jackpot game. be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the jackpot game.

A display device or a voice output may be used to provide a notification suggesting a shooting mode in which the speed of digestion of the jackpot game is advantageous to the player (for example, it becomes faster). For example, in accordance with the execution of the round game in which the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the open state, "Right shot" is displayed or voice output is performed, while in accordance with the execution of the round game in which the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the open state, " Left-handed" may be displayed or voice output may be performed. In this case, the player can speed up the progress of the jackpot game by switching the shooting mode of the ball according to the notification.

Secondly, the difference in the susceptibility to the occurrence of loose balls will be explained. For example, in a round in which the opening and closing plate B2300 is in an open state (see FIG. 156(a)), when performing a left-handed game, the ball rolling on the rolling surface B2311 by the action of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 Among them, the number of balls arranged on the downstream side (the right side in FIG. 156(a), the lower part of the pre-entering range) of the projecting portion B2211 at the center of the left and right can be limited to one.

Therefore, even if the specified number of balls from the lower part of the pre-entering range enter the first specific prize winning hole B1001 and the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state, the balls rolling on the rolling surface B2311 are not left and right. Since it is arranged only on the upstream side (left side in FIG. 156(a), upper part of the pre-entering range) from the center projecting portion B2211, it can be saved by the opening/closing bar B2500 which is immediately switched to the open state. As a result, the number of loose balls generated can be reduced.

On the other hand, in a round in which the opening/closing plate B2300 is in an open state (see FIG. 156(a)), when a right-handed game is played, the ball reaching the rolling surface B2311 is Although the ball is promptly guided to the first specific winning hole B1001, the number of balls arranged in the lower part of the pre-ball entry range is not limited to one.

Therefore, when the specified number of balls from the lower part of the pre-entering range enter the first special winning hole B1001 and the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state, the ball is released from the opening/closing plate B2300 in the lower part of the pre-entering range. can slide down. Since the connecting portion B2530 of the opening/closing bar B2500, which is immediately switched to the open state, is not arranged below the ball, a loose ball may occur. Therefore, in the round in which the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the open state, it is easier to reduce the number of loose balls in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game.

Further, for example, in a round in which the opening and closing bar B2500 is in an open state (see FIG. 156(b)), when performing a right-handed game, the action of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 causes the rolling surface B2531 to roll. Among the spheres to be played, the sphere arranged on the downstream side (the left side in FIG. 156(b), the lower part of the pre-entering range) of the projecting portion B2211 at the center of the left and right can be limited to one.

Therefore, even if the specified number of balls from the lower part of the pre-entering range enter the second specific prize winning hole B1002 and the opening/closing bar B2500 is switched to the closed state, the balls rolling on the rolling surface B2531 are not left and right. Since it is arranged only on the upstream side (the right side in FIG. 156(b), the upper part of the range before entering the ball) from the center projecting portion B2211, it can be saved by the opening/closing plate B2300 that is immediately switched to the open state. As a result, the number of loose balls generated can be reduced.

On the other hand, in a round in which the opening/closing bar B2500 is in an open state (see FIG. 156(b)), when a left-handed game is played, the ball that reaches the rolling surface B2531 is Although the ball is quickly guided to the second specific winning hole B1002, the number of balls arranged in the lower part of the pre-ball entry range is not limited to one.

Therefore, when the specified number of balls from the lower part of the pre-entering range enter the second special winning hole B1002 and the opening/closing bar B2500 is switched to the closed state, the ball is released from the opening/closing bar B2500 in the lower part of the pre-entering range. can slide down. Although the displacement trajectory BE11 (see FIG. 155(a)) of the opening/closing plate B2300, which is immediately switched to the open state, extends to the lower side of the ball on the opening/closing rod B2500 in the lower part of the range before entering the ball, the opening/closing plate B2300 and the ball are arranged in positions where they overlap in the front and rear, so a spilled ball may occur. Therefore, in the round in which the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the open state, it is easier to reduce the number of loose balls in the right-handed game than in the left-handed game.

Thus, in the present embodiment, depending on whether the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the open state or the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the open state, the right-hand shot is advantageous for the purpose of reducing the number of loose balls. or left-handed. Therefore, control may be performed so as to notify an advantageous launching direction according to whether the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the open state or the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the open state.

For example, the third symbol display device 81 may inform the player of the launching direction by displaying "Aim right", "Aim left", or the like. In this case, for example, "Aim left" may be displayed during the round in which the opening/closing plate B2300 is opened, and "Aim right" may be displayed during the round in which the opening/closing bar B2500 is opened. The player shoots the ball in accordance with the notification so that the ball can be shot in a launching direction in which the number of falling balls is reduced.

A similar notification may be made by outputting sound or emitting light to the game area. For example, in the case of light emission, the player can be notified of the direction in which the ball is launched by illuminating the traveling path of the shot ball with light emitting means such as an LED that illuminates the game area.

The variable winning device B2000 has been described above on the assumption that the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing bar B2500 alternately open and close, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, only the opening/closing plate B2300 may be opened/closed, or only the opening/closing bar B2500 may be opened/closed. A round section in which the plate B2300 and the opening/closing bar B2500 alternately open and close may be mixed.

By providing a round section in which the same member of the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing bar B2500 repeatedly opens and closes, the effect of suppressing the falling ball is weakened. It still has the effect of being able to achieve both the case where the ball enters the first specific prize winning port B1001 and the case where the ball enters the second specific prize winning port B1002.

FIG. 157 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the performance of the variable winning device B2000 in the first control example of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157, the first specific winning hole B1001 and the second specific winning hole B1002 are set so that the number of awarded balls to be paid out is different, and furthermore, the specified number in the round game in the special game state is set to be different. be done.

In this embodiment, the range before ball entry includes the path for the ball rolling on the opening/closing plate B2300 and the path for the ball rolling on the opening/closing bar B2500. Regardless of whether the B2500 is in the open state, the jackpot game can be progressed by shooting the ball in a common shooting mode (for example, hitting to the right).

In other words, in the jackpot game, even when the opening/closing plate B2300 is opened and the first specific winning opening B1001 is opened, the opening/closing bar B2500 is opened and the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened. Even in the case where the ball is in the ball, the game can be played by shooting the ball aiming at the common range (range before entering the ball), so that the player does not feel the difference between the types of jackpots. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the player playing the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 157, the performance of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the performance of the second specific winning opening B1002 are set to be different. As a result, it is possible to cause a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the difference in the jackpot type.

For example, even if the number of rounds is the same (for example, 15 rounds), in one type of jackpot, only the opening/closing plate B2300 is repeatedly opened, and the first specific winning hole B1001 is set to be able to enter. (The number of prize balls to be paid out is 2250 (=15×10×15)). In the other jackpot type jackpot, only the opening/closing rod B2500 is repeatedly opened to allow the ball to enter the second specific prize opening B1002. (the number of paid-out prize balls is 375 (=5×5×15)), the difference in the number of paid-out prize balls is about 1875. Furthermore, by setting many types of jackpots and also setting jackpots of different numbers of rounds, it is possible to increase the number of types of prize balls to be paid out.

This makes it possible to increase the difference in the number of prize balls between the jackpot with the smallest number of prize balls and the jackpot with the largest number of prize balls. In addition, it is possible to realize such an improvement in the ball-putting performance in a small space.

That is, even in the past, it was possible to improve the performance of putting out balls by arranging a plurality of variable winning devices in the game area and setting the number of prize balls and the prescribed number of them differently. However, in this case, the range required for arranging the plurality of variable winning devices tends to be large.

In particular, when the game area is left-right symmetrical as in the present embodiment, if a plurality of variable winning devices are arranged on the left and right, not only does the arrangement range increase, The player is required to play either a hitting game or a right-handed game, whichever is more appropriate, which hinders the advantage of the symmetrical game area in which the player can freely split between the left and right sides.

In addition, when a plurality of variable prize winning devices are arranged vertically, the heights of the plurality of specific prize winning ports are stacked vertically, and the vertical width of the variable prize winning devices becomes longer, which not only widens the arrangement range, but also , the third symbol display device 81, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are likely to have a lower degree of freedom in arrangement.

On the other hand, the variable winning device B2000 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 are arranged on the left and right, thereby suppressing the vertical dimension of the variable winning device B2000. By forming a plurality of paths in the pre-ball-entering range that partially overlap to suppress the vertical width, it is possible to eliminate the need to separate the left and right shots.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that one of the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 is continuously opened in the special game state, but the first operation pattern (see FIG. 143(a)) is described. Alternatively, control may be performed so that the left and right sides are alternately opened.

In this case, an inter-round interval transitioning from an odd round to an even round (hereinafter also referred to as "inter-round interval A") and an inter-round interval transitioning from an even round to an odd round (hereinafter also referred to as "inter-round interval B" ) may be set to have different lengths.

For example, a case will be described in which the inter-round interval A is set short (for example, 0.04 seconds) and the inter-round interval B is set long (for example, 2 seconds). In this case, in the inter-round interval B, the ball that was on the range before entering the ball becomes a lost ball. can increase the profit of

Immediately before the interval B between rounds, the first specific prize winning opening B1001 is open, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained, so the player shoots a large number of balls aiming at entering a ball of a prescribed number or more. tend to be easy. On the other hand, in the setting of the length of the inter-round interval B in this embodiment, all the balls that are shot in excess may become loose balls, so the profit that the player can obtain can be thinned out. In other words, it is configured to increase the possibility that a large number of balls shot with the aim of winning an over prize will become a lost ball.

A loose ball during the transition from odd-numbered rounds (rounds in which the ball is guided downward to the left in the area before entering the ball) to even-numbered rounds (rounds in which the ball is guided downward to the right in the area before entering the ball) In order to reduce it, it is sufficient to shoot the ball toward the right side, which is the upstream side (upper part of the range before entering the ball) in odd-numbered rounds. can be done.

Immediately before the inter-round interval A, it is possible to enter the second specific winning hole B1002, but since the number of winning balls is small in the first place, it is common to shoot a large number of balls with the aim of over-winning. At that time, if all the extra balls are discarded, the loss of the player is large, and there is a possibility that the player's interest will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the inter-round interval A is set short so as not to discard a ball that is fired in large numbers aiming to enter the second specific winning hole B1002.

In this way, by setting the length of the interval between rounds differently, for example, it is possible to create a variable winning device that tends to cause over winning. That is, as described above, in the mechanism that sets the interval between rounds short and reduces the number of lost balls, a large number of balls tend to enter the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 immediately after the interval between rounds. For example, when the specified number of the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 is set to 1, the second and subsequent balls are all over-winning (the number of balls exceeding the specified number of the round game is to enter B1002). Therefore, depending on the setting of the prescribed number, it is possible to generate many over-wins.

It should be noted that the length of the interval between rounds can be arbitrarily set. The lengths of the inter-round intervals A and B may be set in the reverse of the above, or only some of the round intervals are set long and short, and the other round intervals are fixed regardless of the inter-round intervals A and B. or all intervals between rounds may be of different lengths.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 162. FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the open state of the variable winning device B1000 is configured by the guide plates B1300 and B1500 sliding forward and backward. A plurality of members constitute the open state by . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the variable winning device B3000 in the thirteenth embodiment. In FIG. 158, the illustration of the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is omitted so that the rear side of the cover member B1200 can be visually recognized so that the range before entering the ball can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 158, the variable winning device B3000 includes a covering member B1200 in a state where the projecting portion B1211 and the extended supporting portion B1212 are omitted, and the base member B3100 is arranged on the back side of the covering member B1200. a first guide plate B3300; a second guide plate B3500; and a second rotating member B3900 that configures a ball guide path by rotatingly displacing so as to approach the guide plate B3500.

Like the base member B1100 (see FIG. 128), the base member B3100 includes a thin plate member B1100, a holding hole B1130, and a discharge port B1150. A through-formed portion B3120 is formed through (with a slightly larger shape) along the shape of the upstream member B3320 and the upstream member B3520 at a substantially central portion of the thin plate member B1110, and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are formed in a circle so as to be pivotally supported. A pair of left and right projecting shafts B3171 projecting in a columnar shape, an arc-shaped hole B3172 drilled along an arc centering on the projecting shaft B3171 and guiding the displacement of the projecting parts B3711 and B3911, Prepare.

The through-formed portion B3120 is formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front, and the vertical width of the central portion is slightly longer than the vertical width of the left and right ends.

The first guide plate B3300 includes an upstream member B3320 that is inserted into the left half of the through-formed portion B3120 and is slidably displaceable back and forth. The upstream member B3320 is formed in a plate shape that slopes down toward the left and right center side (right side) of the range before entering the ball, and the rolling surface B3321 formed on the upper surface side so that the game ball can be placed, and the right lower end and an extension receiving portion B3322 that extends rightward from the portion and is configured to be able to abut against the first rotating member B3700.

The rolling surface B3321 is formed with an inclination angle of 3 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. That is, it is formed at an inclination angle smaller than the inclination angle (7 degrees) of the rolling surface B1321 of the first guide plate B1300 (see FIG. 139) described in the above embodiment. As a result, even in this embodiment in which the formation of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 is omitted, a deceleration effect can be produced by reducing the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3321.

In the present embodiment, the upstream member B3320 is formed in a plate shape with a uniform thickness on the left and right sides, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a wedge shape in which the lower surface is horizontal and only the upper surface is inclined. Even in this case, the inclined state of the rolling surface B3321 can be maintained.

The first rotating member B3700 is rotated and displaced so as to fill the gap between the closed state (see FIG. 158) that prevents the ball from entering the first specific winning opening B1001 and the first guide plate B3300. A body portion B3710 configured to be switchable between an open state in which a ball can be guided to a specific winning opening B1001, and a main body portion B3710 pivotally supported by a projecting shaft portion B3171 on the right side so as to be rotatably displaceable. and an extended plate portion B3720 extending along the radial direction of the.

The main body portion B3710 includes a protruding portion B3711 that protrudes toward the back side in parallel with the rotation axis from a left-right inner (left) position than the protruding shaft portion B3171. The projecting portion B3711 protrudes toward the rear side of the thin plate member B1110 through the arc-shaped hole B3172.

The extension plate portion B3720 has the same cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to taper toward the extension tip side in a front view. A curved portion B3722 chamfered into a curved shape is provided on the opposite side of the moving surface B3721.

The rolling surface B3721 has an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane in the open state for guiding the balls. That is, the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3321 is larger than the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3321, and the balls rolling on the rolling surfaces B3321 and B3721 are It is configured such that the degree of deceleration weakens as the boundary position enters the first specific winning opening B1001 side.

The curved portion B3722 has a shape that matches the shape of the upper right surface of the extension receiving portion B3322 of the first guide plate B3300. That is, by forming the shape of the curved portion B3722 in accordance with the shape of the upper right surface of the extension receiving portion B3322, the first rotating member B3700 can be positioned on the curved surface of the extension receiving portion B3322 in the open state of the first rotating member B3700. , the posture of the first rotating member B3700 can be stabilized.

The second guide plate B3500 includes an upstream member B3520 that is inserted through the right half of the through-formed portion B3120 and that is slidably displaceable back and forth. The upstream member B3520 is symmetrical with the upstream member B3320 and is formed in a plate shape that slopes down toward the left and right central side (left side) of the range before entering the ball, and is formed on the upper surface side so that the game ball can be placed. and an extension receiving portion B3522 extending leftward from the left lower end portion and configured to contact the second rotating member B3900.

The rolling surface B3521 is formed with an inclination angle of 3 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. That is, it is formed at an inclination angle smaller than the inclination angle (7 degrees) of the rolling surface B1521 of the second guide plate B1500 (see FIG. 137) described in the above embodiment. As a result, even in this embodiment in which the formation of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 is omitted, a deceleration effect can be produced by reducing the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3521.

In the present embodiment, the upstream member B3520 is formed in a plate shape with a uniform thickness on the left and right sides, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a wedge shape in which the lower surface is horizontal and only the upper surface is inclined. Even in this case, the inclined state of the rolling surface B3521 can be maintained.

The second rotating member B3900 is rotated and displaced so as to fill the gap between the closed state (see FIG. 158) that prevents the ball from entering the second specific winning opening B1002 and the second guide plate B3500. A body portion B3910 configured to be switchable between an open state in which a ball can be guided to a specific winning opening B1002, and pivotally supported by a projecting shaft portion B3171 on the left side so as to be rotatably displaceable, and its body portion B3910. and an extended plate portion B3920 extending along the radial direction of the.

The body portion B3910 includes a protruding portion B3911 that protrudes toward the back side in parallel with the rotation axis from a left and right inside (right side) position relative to the protruding shaft portion B3171. The projecting portion B3911 protrudes toward the rear side of the thin plate member B1110 through the arc-shaped hole B3172.

The extension plate portion B3920 has the same cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction, and is formed to taper toward the extension tip side in a front view. A curved portion B3922 chamfered into a curved shape is provided on the opposite side of the moving surface B3921.

The rolling surface B3921 has an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane in the open state for guiding the balls. That is, the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3921 is larger than the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3521, and the balls rolling on the rolling surfaces B3521 and B3921 It is configured such that the degree of deceleration weakens as the boundary position enters the second specific winning opening B1002 side.

The curved portion B3922 has a shape that matches the shape of the upper left surface of the extension receiving portion B3522 of the second guide plate B3500. That is, by forming the shape of the curved portion B3922 in accordance with the shape of the upper left surface of the extension receiving portion B3522, the second rotating member B3900 can be positioned on the curved surface of the extension receiving portion B3522 in the open state of the second rotating member B3900. , the posture of the second rotating member B3900 can be stabilized.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first guide plate B3300 and the first rotating member B3700 or the second guide plate B3500 and the second rotating member B3900 act on each other to switch between the closed state and the open state. Configure. In this case, the first guide plate B3300 and the first rotating member B3700 are driven by the first driving device B1400, and the second guide plate B3500 and the second rotating member B3900 are driven by the second driving device B1600.

FIG. 159 is a top view of the variable winning device B3000, FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the second rotating member B3900 and transmission member B3640, and FIGS. is a right side view of the second rotating member B3900 and the transmission member B3640 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLXIa.

In addition, in FIGS. 161(a) and 161(b), only the second rotating member B3900, the transmission member B3640, and the transmission extension B3550 are illustrated for easy understanding, and these members are held. Illustrations of other configurations are omitted. 161(a) shows the closed state of the second rotating member B3900 (the second solenoid B1610 is de-energized), and FIG. 161(b) shows the open state of the second rotating member B3900 ( A state in which the second solenoid B1610 is energized) is illustrated.

That is, when the second solenoid B1610 is de-energized and the transmission extension B3550 is arranged on the back side, the second rotating member B3900 is in the rising posture (see FIG. 161(a)), and the When the second solenoid B1610 is energized and the transmission extension B3550 is arranged on the front side, the second rotating member B3900 is in an inclined posture (see FIG. 161(b)).

As shown in FIG. 159, in this embodiment, driving devices B1400 and B1600 similar to the variable winning device B1000 are employed, while transmission members B3440 and B3640 capable of transmitting driving force to the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are installed. By interposing between the guide plates B3300, B3500 and the rotating members B3700, B3900, the guide plates B3300, B3500 and the rotating members B3700, B3900 can be displaced at once.

That is, a pair of support claw portions B3111 projecting in a U-shape toward the back side of the thin plate member B1110 are arranged on both left and right sides, and the transmission members B3440 and B3640 are rotatably supported by the respective support claw portions B3111. be.

Transmission members B3440 and B3640 are configured to be able to change their own rotational displacement to displacement of rotating members B3700 and B3900. The transmission members B3440 and B3640 can contact the transmission extension portions B3350 and B3550 integrally formed with the guide plates B3300 and B3500. B3440 and B3640 are configured to be rotationally displaced.

More specifically, the first guide plate B3300 includes the above-described upstream member B3320, a connecting fixing member B1330 that supports the upstream member B3320, and a transmission hole B1340. It has a transmission extension part B3350 extending from the lower part to the front side to a position where it can come into contact with the transmission member B3440.

In addition, the second guide plate B3500 includes the upstream member B3520 described above, a connecting fixing member B1530 that supports the upstream member B3520, and a transmission hole B1540. It has a transmission extension portion B3550 that extends to the front side to a position where it can come into contact with the transmission member B3640.

160 and 161 illustrate the mechanism of driving force transmission to the second rotating member B3900. Since the mechanism of driving force transmission to the left and right rotating members B3700 and B3900 is the same, the driving force transmission to the second rotating member B3900 will be explained first, and the driving force transmission to the first rotating member B3700 will be explained. omitted.

The transmission member B3640 is a member that is rotatably pivotally supported on the back side of the thin plate member B1110 and engages with the transmission extension portion B3550. are configured to engage. As a result, the state (open state or closed state) of the second rotating member B3900 is changed in accordance with the change in the posture of the transmission member B3640.

The transmission member B3640 is formed of a flexible resin material and includes a rotating arm B3641 composed of a plate-like portion that intersects (perpendicularly) with the rotation axis BJ1, and a C-shaped tip of the rotating arm B3641. A claw-shaped portion B3642 formed in a claw shape, a pair of protruding shaft portions B3643 projecting from the rotating arm portion B3641 in a cylindrical shape centered on the rotating shaft BJ1, and from the rotation proximal end side of the rotating arm portion B3641 A proximal side extending portion B3644 extending in the radial direction, and a distal side extending portion B3645 extending in a direction parallel to the proximal side extending portion B3644 from the rotation distal end side of the rotating arm B3641. Prepare.

The transmission member B3640 is supported by the thin plate member B1110 by fitting the projecting shaft portion B3643 into the support claw portion B3111 from the tip side. At this time, the supporting claw portion B3111 is elastically deformed and fitted into the supporting claw portion B3111. It is intended to prevent it from falling off from the part B3111.

The driving force transmission to the second rotating member B3900 will be described. As shown in FIG. 161(a), in the non-excited state of the second solenoid B1610 of the second drive device B1600, the distal end side lower end portion of the transmission extension portion B3550 is aligned with the base end side extension portion of the transmission member B3640. It is in contact with B3644. The transmission extension B3550 is urged toward the back side by the return spring of the second solenoid B1610, and the posture of the transmission member B3640 is maintained in such a manner that it is pushed toward the back side by this urging force. This maintains the closed state of the second rotating member B3900.

As shown in FIG. 161(b), when the second solenoid B1610 of the second drive device B1600 is in an energized state, the tip-side lower end of the transmission extension B3550 abuts the tip-side extension B3645 of the transmission member B3640. ing. The transmission extension B3550 is biased toward the front side by the driving force of the second solenoid B1610, and the transmission member B3640 maintains its posture in a state of being pushed toward the back side by this driving force. Thereby, the open state of the second rotating member B3900 is maintained.

FIGS. 162(a) to 162(c) are front views of the pre-entering range in the range CLXIIa of FIG. 158. FIG. FIGS. 162(a) to 162(c) show how the state of the second specific prize winning opening B1002 is switched from the closed state to the open state in chronological order.

That is, in the variable winning device B3000, after the front-to-rear distance between the front end of the upstream member B3520 and the covering member B1200 becomes less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 162(b)), the second rotating member B3900 The transmission extension portion B3550, the transmission member B3640, and the second rotation member B3900 are designed so that the displacement occurs in the order of displacing until the end of rotation.

In addition, when switching from the open state to the closed state, the gap between the transmission extension portion B3550 and the base end side extension portion B3644 is made as small as possible so that the second rotating member B3900 starts displacing without delay. (see FIG. 161(b)), and is configured to be able to release the abutment between the second rotating member B3900 and the upstream member B3520 before the upstream member B3520 starts sliding displacement. Thereby, the occurrence of rubbing between the second rotating member B3900 and the upstream member B3520 can be suppressed.

In this way, when the state is switched to the open state, the second rotating member B3900 is displaced in a direction (non-parallel direction) that intersects perpendicularly with the front-rear direction, which is the displacement direction of the upstream member B3520 of the second guide plate B3500. Therefore, the gap between the second rotating member B3900 and the upstream member B3520 can be narrowed by displacement.

The switching from the open state to the closed state of the second specific winning hole B1002 occurs in reverse order from FIG. 162(a) to FIG. 162(c). In this case, since the rolling surface B3921 is displaced upward so as to approach the second specific winning opening B1002, when the ball is on the rolling surface B3921, the ball is guided to the second specific winning opening B1002. It becomes the structure that it is easy to do. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to easily generate an over-winning (a number of balls exceeding the prescribed number of the round game entering the second specific winning port B1002).

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 171. FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the open state of the variable winning device B1000 is configured by displacing the guide plates B1300 and B1500 to the front side. The open state is constituted by the displaced guide plate B4300 and the opening/closing bar B2500 displaced toward the rear side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 163, in the game area in this embodiment, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 64 which were arranged between the variable winning device B2000 and the third symbol display device 81 in the game area described above in FIG. The winning port 640 is omitted, and these functions are supplemented by the configuration provided in the variable winning device B4000.

163, the function of the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 144) is transferred to the guide port B4160, and the function of the second winning port 640 (see FIG. 144) is the second The function of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 144) is transferred to the opening/closing rod B2500. The first detection sensor B1230 is used as the first specific winning hole B1001 as described above.

By configuring in this way, the degree of freedom in designing the area surrounded by the rails 61 and 62 (the area including the game area) can be improved. For example, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 may be expanded by utilizing the range generated by omitting the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640, or the first winning hole 64 and the second winning port 640, another distribution mechanism (for example, a mechanism that alternately distributes the balls that arrive to the left and right, or a drive that is always driven in a constant motion and changes the flow path of the balls) mechanism, etc.) may be arranged to increase the variation of the flow-down mode of the ball.

164, 165 and 166 are front perspective views of the variable winning device B4000. 164 shows the closed state of the guide plate B4300 and the opening/closing bar B2500, FIG. 165 shows the open state of the guide plate B4300 and the closed state of the opening/closing bar B2500, and FIG. An open state of the opening/closing bar B2500 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, in the variable winning device B4000, the front and rear width of the driving device can be reduced more than the variable winning device B1000, and the arrangement space can be suppressed, and the range before ball entry is greater than that of the variable winning device B2000. Since the area below the guide path of the ball can be vacated, the ball guide receiving portion B4260 can be arranged.

FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device B4000, and FIG. 168 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device B4000. As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, each configuration of the variable winning device B4000 is partially diverted from and combined with the configurations of the variable winning devices B1000 and B2000 described above. This will be explained below.

The variable winning device B4000 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and includes a base member B4100 fixed to the base plate 60, and a flow path configuration range (range before entering the ball) that is fastened and fixed to the base member B4100 from the front side. a guide plate B4300 configured to be slidable forward from the back side of the base member B4100; the above-described first driving device B1400 that drives the guide plate B4300; and the above-described opening/closing rod B2500 , the above-mentioned second driving device B2600, and a rear cover member B4700 assembled to the base member B4100 from the back side and configured to cover the guide plate B4300 and the first driving device B1400 from the back side. .

The base member B4100 includes a thin plate member B1110, a holding hole B1130, a projecting portion B1140, and a discharge port B1150 in the same manner as the base member B1100 described above. and a guide support portion B2180.

Further, the base member B4100 includes a through-formed portion B4120 whose design is changed to a shape suitable for the guide plate B4300 through which the through-formed portion B1120 is inserted, and the projecting portion B1140 extending outward from the upper end of the projecting portion B1140. Auxiliary protrusion B4141, a guide opening B4160 drilled below the penetration forming part B4120 so as to guide the ball from the front side to the back side, a detour B4170 for guiding the ball passing through the guide opening B4160, and a thin plate An overhanging portion B4190 is formed so as to overhang the right side portion of the member B1110 toward the front side so as to cover the right extending portion B1220 of the covering member B4200. The penetration formation part B4120 is formed as an elongated rectangular opening inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front.

The auxiliary projection B4141 has a cross-sectional shape similar to that of the projecting portion B1140 and extends in an upwardly inclined direction toward the left and right outer sides. Due to this configuration, the auxiliary protrusion B4141 has a function as a part that assists the ball falling down, which will be described later in detail.

The protruding portion B4190 is formed to incline downward to the left when viewed from the front at the same angle as the inclined surface B1223 of the right extending portion B1220. It is configured to come into surface contact with the surface B1223. The rolling contact surface B4191 forming the upper side surface is formed as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front side.

The rolling surface B4191 is formed in a planar shape on which a ball can roll. A ball that rolls on the rolling surface B4191 flows into the pre-ball-entering range along its inclination while being pulled toward the front side. As a result, the ball that rolls on the rolling surface B4191 and flows into the ball-entering range can easily flow down avoiding the projecting portion B1140, so that the deceleration effect applied to the ball can be weakened.

The covering member B4200 includes a body member B2210, a right extending portion B1220, a first detection sensor B1230, a left extending portion B1240, a second detection sensor B1250, and a cover plate portion B2270, similarly to the covering member B2200 described above. In addition, a ball guide receiving portion B4260 is provided in the main body member B2210 and guides the ball to the guide port B4160.

The projecting portion B2211 provided on the main body member B2210 is omitted from the covering member B4200. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball flowing down toward the ball guide receiving portion B4260, which will be described later, collides with the projecting portion B2211 and deviates from the ball guide receiving portion B4260. In addition, it is possible to avoid the situation where the ball is decelerated by the projecting portions B2211 on the left and right sides.

The right extended portion B1220 is formed with a ridge support portion B1225 in the same manner as the variable winning device B1000 described above, and guides the longitudinal displacement of the guide member B1310 of the guide plate B4300. Further, the left extending portion B1240 does not have the protrusion supporting portion B1245, as in the variable winning device B2000 described above.

The guide plate B4300 has the same configuration as the first guide plate B1300 described above, and is formed so as to eliminate the gap between the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320, and connects the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 so that they are flush with each other. and a front projecting portion B4360 projecting upward from the front end portion located between the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320.

The front projecting portion B4360 is formed in a triangular shape in which the front side surface B4361 has an upper vertex vertically above the center position of the guide opening B4160 in a front view and is symmetrically inclined, and the upper side surface B4362 is directed toward the front side. It is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward.

With this configuration, the front projecting portion B4360 causes the ball rolling on the rolling surface B1321 in the open state of the guide plate B4300 to flow down toward the body member B2210 side (front side) of the covering member B4200. In this case, by contacting the sphere, the flow path of the sphere can be made closer to the back side. That is, the front protruding portion B4360 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the ball flowing down in the range before entering the ball while the guide plate B4300 is open, and the ball comes into contact with the thin plate member B1110. The contact side, ie, the inner surface of the opening of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 is flush with the ball, so that the ball can be guided to the side with less resistance (see FIG. 126).

Further, in the closed state of the guide plate B4300, the front protruding portion B4360 is configured to enter the penetration forming portion B4120 and not protrude from the front side surface of the thin plate member B1110. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front projecting portion B4360 from coming into contact with the ball when the guide plate B4300 is closed.

Note that when the guide plate B4300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the front projecting portion B4360 can come into contact with the ball. This abutment is intended to prevent the ball from entering the ball guide receiving portion B4260, the details of which will be described later.

It should be noted that the aspect of the front projecting portion B4360 is not limited to the aspect of the present embodiment. For example, in the closed state of the guide plate B4300, the thin plate member B1110 may be configured to protrude from the front side surface to the front side. In this case, when the guide plate B4300 is closed, the front protruding portion B4360 can contact the ball, so that the ball flows differently.

The rear cover member B4700 omits the formation of the third support plate B1750 and the fourth support plate B1760, which are unnecessary due to the omission of the second driving device B1600 from the rear cover member B1700 described above, and replaces the main body portion B1710. It is formed so that the vertical dimension and the front-rear dimension are reduced.

That is, since the rear cover member B4700 is formed to be smaller than the rear cover member B1700, the variable winning device B4000 includes a guide plate B4300 that slides back and forth like the variable winning device B1000. On the other hand, it is possible to reduce the space (particularly in the front and rear) required on the back side of the game area for arranging the driving devices B1400 and B2600.

Switching of the state of the variable winning device B4000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 171. FIG. 169, 170 and 171 are front views of the variable winning device B4000. 169, the guide plate B4300 and the opening/closing rod B2500 are in the closed state, in FIG. 170, the guide plate B4300 is in the open state and the opening/closing rod B2500 is in the closed state, and in FIG. 171, the guide plate B4300 is in the closed state. Then, the opening/closing bar B2500 is opened.

In addition, in FIGS. 169 to 171, the body member B2210 of the covering member B4200 is illustrated transparently so that the shape on the back side thereof can be visually recognized. In addition, in the pre-entering range, at least a part of the range through which the ball cannot pass is supplementarily marked with polka dots (dots). Also, FIG. 163 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 169 to 171 as appropriate.

First, the outline of the game progress of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. The progress of the game is based on the contents explained in the eleventh embodiment. That is, during the normal period, the ball is entered into the guide port B4160 by hitting to the left, aiming for a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 1. - 特許庁

As an added value after the end of the jackpot, a variable state (high probability state) of the special pattern is given until the lottery of the special pattern is completed 100 times after the special game state is finished, and there is a state where it is easy to receive the lottery of the special pattern 2. After the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times, the normal state is set.

Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, the ball is shot aiming to enter the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 from the end of the special game state until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times. In the special game state, prize balls are paid out by making the balls enter the opening of the first detection sensor B1230.

Next, each part of the game progress will be described in detail. The game area in this embodiment is basically bilaterally symmetrical, and is configured so that the ball hit to either the left or the right can reach the variable winning device B4000. On the other hand, due to the effect of the added configuration, it is recommended to play left-handed in the normal state aiming to win the special symbol 1 jackpot.

A projecting wall B4010 that is fixed to the game board 13 so as to project to the front side of the base plate 60 on the lower side of the center frame 86 as a portion that is not configured bilaterally symmetrically and that obstructs the passage of the ball, A sphere collecting wall B4020 is added above the through gate 67 on the left side so as to be fixed to the front side of the base plate 60 so as to protrude in an inverted V shape.

The projecting wall B4010 is a wall portion that extends vertically at a position to the right of the center frame 86 in the left-right direction, and obstructs passage of the ball to the left and right. As a result, it is possible to limit the balls that can be guided to just below the center of the center frame 86 in the left-right direction by the dowels arranged just below the center frame 86 to left-handed balls.

In other words, the left-handed ball is guided to just below the left-right center of the center frame 86 by the road spike, and then falls along the downflow path BL41 extending vertically along the left-right center of the center frame 86 to enter the guide port B4160. Since a ball is possible, it is easy to obtain the lottery of the special symbol 1.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, since the projecting portions B1140 are arranged on the left and right sides of the flow-down path BL41, even if the ball deviates left and right from the flow-down path BL41, the projecting portions B1140 come into contact with the ball, thereby moving the ball. It can be returned to the downstream path BL41 side. As a result, it is possible to improve the probability of a ball entering the guide hole B4160.

On the other hand, the ball hit to the right is prevented from passing to the left and right by the projecting wall B4010, so it is not guided by the road nail to the center of the left and right of the center frame 86, and reaches the variable winning device B4000. Also in this case, it lands on the rolling surface B4191 and flows down along the rolling surface B4191 along the downflow path BL42.

Since the rolling surface B4191 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front side, the ball that rolls on the rolling surface B4191 in the flow-down path BL42 passes through a path closer to the front. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the degree of deceleration due to contact with the projecting portion B1140.

A ball that has passed the left end of the rolling surface B4191 is configured to pass from right to left above the guide port B4160 along the upper surface of the auxiliary protrusion B4141. In particular, the cover plate portion B2270 is arranged on the right extending portion B1220, and the rolling surface B4191 that guides the ball protrudes more toward the center than the left side, so that the ball can easily be placed on the upper surface of the auxiliary protrusion B4141. can be put on As a result, it is possible to reduce the probability of the ball entering the guide hole B4160.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, a ball hit to either the left or right side is configured to reach the variable winning device B4000. A ball is configured to have a higher probability of entering the guide port B4160. Therefore, in the normal state aiming at the acquisition of the special symbol 1 jackpot, it is recommended to play with the left hand.

In the variable probability state, it is configured to allow the player to choose whether to play left-handed or right-handed. At this time, the player considers the advantages and disadvantages that can be obtained, and selects whether to play the game with the left hand or with the right hand. This will be explained below.

In the variable probability state, the ball is passed through the through gate 67, and the opening/closing bar B2500 is switched to the open state according to the result of the lottery, so that the ball can enter the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. Since the through gates 67 are arranged on the left and right, a ball hit to either the left or right can pass through the through gates 67, but the ball entry probability to the left and right through gates 67 is differentiated by the ball gathering wall B4020. .

That is, at the through gate 67 on the right side, the path is changed by the collision with the nail arranged on the upstream side, and only the ball that reaches the through gate 67 passes through the through gate 67, while the through gate 67 on the left side changes the path. In addition to the ball whose path has been changed due to the collision with the nail, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the ball collecting wall B4020 can pass through the through gate 67 .

The sphere collecting wall B4020 is composed of a pair of plate-like wall portions arranged above the through gate 67 with a gap of about the diameter of the sphere. The left plate-like wall has a gap with the inner rail 61 that is less than the radius of the sphere, and the right plate-like wall has a gap with the center frame 86 that is slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere.

A gap slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the lower ends of the pair of plate-like walls, and the center of the gap is positioned vertically above the center of the through gate 67 . Therefore, the ball passing through the gap of the ball gathering wall B4020 passes through the through gate 67 with a higher probability (than the probability that a ball hit to the right passes through the right through gate 67). Therefore, focusing on passing the ball through the through gate 67, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the ball left-handed.

On the other hand, as described above, a left-handed ball enters the guidance port B4160 where the special symbol 1 lottery is performed with a higher probability than a right-handed ball. If the special symbol 1 lottery is set so that the player's profit is lower than the special symbol 2 lottery if the lottery result is a big hit (for example, FIG. 142 ( See b)), in a situation where the lottery for the special symbol 2 is likely to be performed, the player's profit may increase if the game proceeds so that the lottery for the special symbol 1 is not performed.

Therefore, focusing on progressing the game so as not to let the ball enter the guide port B4160 (so that the special symbol 1 lottery is not performed), it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball with the right hand. .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the variable probability state game is advantageous in that the ball easily passes through the through gate 67, but is disadvantageous in that the ball is likely to enter the guide opening B4160. It is left to the player's choice whether to hit the ball right-handed, which is disadvantageous in that the probability of the ball passing through the through gate 67 is inferior, but is advantageous in that it is difficult for the ball to enter the guide port B4160. .

In the special game state (jackpot state), the guide plate B4300 is controlled to open in accordance with the round progress. In this case, a right-handed game is recommended for the purpose of lowering the probability of a ball entering the guide port B4160.

That is, in the left-handed game, if the ball flows down the flow-down path BL41 when the opening/closing plate B4300 is closed, the ball will enter the guide port B4160, so the right-handed game is recommended to avoid this. . A ball hit to the right flows into the range before ball entry along the flow-down path BL42 even when the opening/closing plate B4300 is closed. It is difficult to enter the ball.

On the other hand, a ball hit to the right flows into the range before ball entry along the flow-down path BL42, so it passes directly above the guide opening B4160 before heading to the first detection opening B1230. Therefore, without countermeasures, a ball that has slid down from the opening/closing plate B4300 may enter the guide opening B4160. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the guide opening B4160 by the action of the front projecting portion B4360.

That is, the ball slides down from the opening/closing plate B4300 when the opening/closing plate B4300 is switched from the open state to the closed state. Pass the bottom to the back side. Therefore, when a ball is placed behind the front projecting portion B4360, the ball is pushed by the upper side surface B4362 of the front projecting portion B4360, and is moved to the left and right outside due to the shape of the front side surface B4361. slide down. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the ball enters the guide hole B4160.

Here, it is possible to control the flow-down path of the ball after switching to the closed state by providing a portion of the same shape in the opening/closing plate B2300. , and the falling direction of the ball are both downwards, so it is easy for the ball to be left behind. Therefore, the degree of pushing the ball tends to be weak. Also, if the ball is left overhanging in the pre-entering range even in the closed state, there is a risk of adversely affecting the ball flowing down the pre-entering range.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the falling direction of the ball intersects (perpendicularly) with the moving direction of the front projecting portion B4360. Since the ball slides down from the guide plate B4300 only after the B4300 is displaced rearward, the front projecting portion B4360 can easily push the ball strongly. As a result, the ball can be moved to the left and right outside significantly compared to the case where the opening/closing plate B2300 is used, and it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the ball enters the guide opening B4160.

With such a configuration, the guide port B4160 can be arranged at a position directly below the guide plate B4300 and close to the guide port B4160 while maintaining the above-described playability. In this case, the guide port B4160 may be arranged higher than in this embodiment. For example, the vertical position of the upper edge of the guide port B4160 may be higher than the vertical position of the lower end of the guide plate B4300 (and the vertical position of the lower end of the opening/closing rod B2500). . In this case, the vertical width for arranging the openings of the guide opening B4160 and the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 as the ball entrance can be narrowed.

For this configuration, the guide plate B4300 is more advantageous than the opening/closing plate B2300. That is, in the opening/closing plate B2300, the guide port B4160 cannot be arranged in the range where the plate portion B2310 (see FIG. 150(a)) hangs downward in the closed state, but according to this embodiment, Since the guide plate B4300 does not hang down in the closed state, the guide port B4160 can be arranged at a higher position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the ball-entering openings corresponding to the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640 and the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 2) can be collectively arranged in the variable winning device B4000. . On top of that, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal state, right-handed hitting is recommended in the special game state (jackpot state), and in the variable probability state, the player selects left-handed or right-handed depending on the player's preference. can be configured.

In addition, while the guide port B4160 corresponding to the first winning port 64 is arranged below the rolling path in the range before entering the ball, the probability of entering the guide port B4160 in either the left-handed game or the right-handed game are different, the game can be progressed so as not to perform the lottery for the special symbol 1.例文帳に追加

Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 to 176. FIG. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the opening/closing plate B2300 is arranged on the back side of the range before entering the ball has been described. The open state is constituted by the second opening/closing plate B5500 that displaces to the rear side with the same displacement as B2300. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 172 is a front view of the variable winning device B5000 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 173 is a rear view of the variable winning device B5000. In FIG. 172, the opening/closing plate B2300 and the second opening/closing plate B5500 are in the closed state, and the body member B1210 of the covering member B5200 is shown transparently so that the shape of the rear side thereof can be visually recognized. . In addition, in the pre-entering range, at least a part of the range through which the ball cannot pass is supplementarily marked with polka dots (dots).

Further, in FIG. 173, while the first driving device B2400 is illustrated, the second driving device B5600 that generates driving force for opening and closing the second opening/closing plate B5500 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

The variable winning device B5000 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and includes a base member B5100 fixed to the base plate 60, and a flow path configuration range (range before entering a ball) that is fastened and fixed to the base member B5100 from the front side. a covering member B5200 covering from the outside, the above-described opening/closing plate B2300, the above-described first driving device B2400, a second opening/closing plate B5500 rotatably supported by the covering member B5200, and driving the second opening/closing plate B5500. and a rear cover member (not shown) assembled to the base member B5100 from the rear side and configured to cover the first driving device B2400 and the second driving device B5600 from the rear side. ) and The rear cover member has a discharge portion which is a through hole through which the ball discharged from the discharge port B1150 passes, and the ball discharged from the discharge portion is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

As with the base member B2100 described above, the base member B5100 includes a thin plate member B2110, a holding hole B1130, a projecting portion B1140, an outlet B1150, and a rotation support portion B2170. A slide guide hole B5180 is provided through which a slide rod B5610 of the driving device B5600 can be inserted.

The slide guide hole B5180 is formed in a gap between the through hole B2114 and the power transmission member B2430 (the motion locus BE1 thereof). In addition, in this embodiment, compared with the power transmission member B2430 described above in the twelfth embodiment, the extended portion B2435 is formed slightly shorter, and a gap forming the slide guide hole B5180 is created.

The covering member B5200 includes a body member B1210, a right extending portion B1220, a first detection sensor B1230, a left extending portion B1240, and a second detection sensor B1250, similarly to the covering member B1200 described above. The portion B1212, the ridge support portions B1225 and B1245, and the ball guide receiving portion B1260 are omitted.

Further, the covering member B5200 includes a housing portion B5270 recessed from the rear surface to the front side of the main body member B1210 to partially penetrate the shaft portion B5520 of the second opening/closing plate B5500.

The accommodation portion B5270 includes a pair of left and right support recesses in which the shaft portion B5520 of the second opening/closing plate B5500 is accommodated, and a rectangular recess B5272 that is recessed (formed through) in a rectangular shape below the straight line that connects the support recesses. Then, in order to move the small load-bearing portion B5530 of the second opening/closing plate B5500 that operates along the right end of the rectangular recess B5272 so as to enter the inside of the front-rear width of the main body member B1210, the straight line connecting the pair of support recesses and a through hole B5273 that is formed in a rectangular shape along the direction perpendicular to the through hole B5273.

The support recess has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft portion B5520 of the second opening/closing plate B5500 and is recessed from the front side to the back side, and accommodates the shaft portion B5520 of the second opening/closing plate B5500 in the assembled state. A rectangular cover plate B5273 (see FIG. 174) is fixed from the front side so as to cover the support recess, thereby preventing the shaft portion B5520 from falling out of the support recess.

The rectangular recess B5273 has a larger surface area than the plate portion B5510 of the second opening/closing plate B5500, and the length of the recess is slightly longer than the thickness of the plate portion B5510. As a result, when the second opening/closing plate B5500 tilts (closed state), the plate portion B5510 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular concave portion B5272, and the opening/closing plate B5500 can be prevented from protruding to the rear side of the main body member B1210.

The second opening/closing plate B5500 is a member that switches between the case where the ball rolls toward the second detection sensor B1250 and the case where the ball falls downward without coming into contact with the ball, depending on the difference in posture. A horizontally long rectangular plate portion B5510 formed in the same size as the plate B2300 and a pair of shaft portions B5520 protruding along the longitudinal direction from the lateral direction end portions of the plate portion B5510 are newly described. As the portions to be loaded, a small load receiving portion B5530 extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion B5520 at the base of the shaft portion B5520 on the right side in front view, and a small load receiving portion B5530 at the base of the shaft portion B5520 on the left side in front view and perpendicular to the shaft portion 5520 and a ball entry prevention portion B5540 that extends along a horizontal plane and that (partially) blocks the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 in the closed state so as to prevent the ball from entering the opening.

The plate portion B5510 has a rolling surface B5511 on which the ball rolls in the raised posture (open state), and the length of the short direction is the base member in the raised posture (open state) in which the short direction extends along the front and back direction. The distance from B5100 is set to a length that is equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the left end in the longitudinal direction is set to be close to the second detection sensor B1250.

In addition, the plate portion B5510 includes a chamfered portion B5512 chamfered into an arcuate cross-sectional shape at the upper corner of the opposite end of the shaft portion B5520 in the raised posture (open state).

The plate portion B5510 is formed in the shape of a flat plate elongated in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

The small load-bearing portion B5530 protrudes on the opposite side of the rolling surface B5511 with respect to the shaft portion B5520, and has a shape in which the cross section in the axial direction constitutes a part of a circular shape. This is the part that receives driving force transmission.

The ball entry prevention portion B5540 extends on the front side of the rolling surface B5511 with a parallelogram cross section in an axial direction, and extends to a position that blocks at least a portion of the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. This is a portion configured to prevent the ball from entering the second specific winning hole B1002.

174(a) and 174(b) are sectional views of the variable winning device B5000 taken along line CLXXIVa-CLXXIVa in FIG. FIG. 174(a) illustrates the closed state of the second opening/closing plate B5500, and FIG. 174(b) illustrates the opening state of the second opening/closing plate B5500.

The second drive device B5600 includes a slide rod B5610 that is inserted through the slide guide hole B5180 and configured to be displaced back and forth in accordance with the operation of a second solenoid (not shown). When the second solenoid is not energized, the slide rod B5610 is retracted toward the rear side of the thin plate member B2110 rather than the front side surface (see FIG. 174(a)). It projects to the front side of the thin plate member B2110 and is configured to be able to push the small load receiving portion B5530 (see FIG. 174(b)).

As shown in FIG. 174(b), in the open state of the second opening/closing plate B5500, the slide rod B5610 enters between the upper edge of the through hole B5273 and the small loaded portion B5530. In this state, when a ball rides on the rolling surface B5511 of the second opening/closing plate B5500, the weight of the ball urges the second opening/closing plate B5500 to the closed state (tilted state). On the other hand, since the slide rod B5610 is in the displacement trajectory of the small load receiving portion B5530, the slide rod B5610 is pushed toward the small load receiving portion B5530 when the second opening/closing plate B5500 is displaced toward the closed state. However, the upward displacement of the slide rod B5610 is restricted by the upper side surface of the through hole B5273. As a result, displacement of the small load-bearing portion B5530 can be restricted, so that the second opening/closing plate B5500 can be maintained in an open state.

In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the slide rod B5610 protrudes into the pre-ball-entering range when the second opening/closing plate B5500 is open. Therefore, if no countermeasures are taken, there is a possibility that the slide rod B5610 will hinder the flow of the ball flowing down the pre-entering range. For example, if the slide rod B5610 is placed on the right side of the opening of the second detection sensor B1250, it prevents the ball from flowing down. there's a possibility that.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the slide bar B5610 is arranged near the shaft B5520 on the right side of the second opening/closing plate B5500, that is, on the opposite side of the second detection sensor B1250. This makes it possible to prevent the slide rod B5610 from interfering with the flow of the ball toward the opening of the second detection sensor B1250.

FIG. 175(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 along the line corresponding to line CLXXVa-CLXXVa in FIG. 172, and FIG. 175(b) is a variable winning device along the line corresponding to line CLXXVb-CLXXVb in FIG. 175(c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 along the line corresponding to the line CLXXVc-CLXXVc in FIG. 175(a) to 175(c) illustrate the open state of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the closed state of the second opening/closing plate B5500.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 along the line corresponding to line CLXXVa-CLXXVa in FIG. 172, and FIG. 176(b) is a line corresponding to line CLXXVb-CLXXVb in FIG. 176(c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 along the line corresponding to line CLXXVc-CLXXVc in FIG. 172. FIG. 176(a) to 176(c) illustrate the closed state of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the open state of the second opening/closing plate B5500.

As shown in FIGS. 176(a) to 176(c), regardless of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate B2300 in the left-right direction, when the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state, the ball riding on the opening/closing plate B2300 The second opening/closing plate B5500 is configured to be displaced toward the open state so as to pass below the slide-down start position. The same applies to the displacement of the opening/closing plate B2300 when the second opening/closing plate B5500 is switched to the closed state.

As a result, in opening and closing the opening/closing plate B2300 and the second opening/closing plate B5500, the effect of reducing the number of loose balls generated can be produced regardless of the order of opening/closing and the arrangement of the balls with respect to the opening/closing plates B2300 and B5500.

This effect becomes particularly large when the ball placed in the upper part of the pre-entering range slides down (see FIG. 176(a)). That is, when the ball slides down from the opening/closing plate B2300, in addition to the vertical distance between the rolling surfaces B2311 and B5511 in the open state, the width of the plate portion B5510 of the second opening/closing plate B5500 in the lateral direction from below Since the rolling surface B5511 can be displaced upward (rotated upward), the ball can be easily rescued.

In this embodiment, for example, in the special game state, after the round in which the opening/closing plate B2300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 175) ends and the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state, the second opening/closing plate B5500 is opened. When switching from the closed state to the open state (see FIG. 176), the second opening/closing plate B5500 can be configured to easily rescue a ball that is about to slide down from the opening/closing plate B2300.

Therefore, in the special game state, by controlling the opening/closing plate B2300 and the second opening/closing plate B5500 so as to alternately open and close in accordance with the progress of the round, as in the above-described first operation pattern, all inter-round intervals It is possible to produce an effect of suppressing the occurrence of spilled balls.

In order to suppress the occurrence of loose balls, it is required to shorten the interval between rounds. , B2300 vertically face each other, and the displacement trajectories partially overlap each other. Therefore, if the displacement of the opening/closing plates B2300 and B5500 to the closed state is delayed, there is a risk of collision with the opening/closing plates B5500 and B2300 that are displaced toward the open state.

Here, for example, when the direction of displacement to the closed state is the direction in which the ball is lifted up, as in the first rotating member B3700 described above, the displacement resistance to the closed state varies depending on the number of balls. may be delayed.

On the other hand, the direction of displacement of the opening/closing plates B2300 and B5500 to the closed state in this embodiment is the direction of tilting downward, so the displacement resistance does not change depending on the number of balls. Furthermore, as the number of balls increases, the self-weight of the balls increases the degree of biasing toward the displacement direction of the opening/closing plates B2300 and B5500, so that the speed of displacement to the closed state can be improved.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent delays in displacing the opening/closing plates B2300 and B5500 to the closed state. Collision with B2300 can be avoided.

Next, a 16th embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the first specific prize winning port B1001 and the second specific prize winning port B1002 are arranged with an interval of about 60 mm has been described. The interval between the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 is lengthened. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 177 is a front view of the game board 13 and variable winning device B6000 in the sixteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 177, the layout of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 are shifted outward to the left and right, and the interval is increased.

In this embodiment, the first specific prize winning port B1001 is arranged at a position with a lateral distance of 65 mm from the electric role product 640a, and the second specific prize winning port B1002 has a lateral distance of 65 mm from the electric role product 640a. placed in position. Since the outer width of the electric accessory 640a in the closed state is about 30 mm, the distance between the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 is set to about 160 mm. In this case, the left-right length in which the ball can flow into the pre-entering range is approximately 130 mm after subtracting the outer width of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, the electric accessory 640a configures an open state by tilting in a direction away from each other about the rotation shaft arranged at the lower end, and configures a closed state by rising in a direction approaching each other.

As for the configuration of the members that open and close in the pre-ball-entering range, the above-described configuration can be used by changing the design. For example, the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 are extended in the longitudinal direction to match the distance between the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002. With this configuration, the variable winning device B6000 can be configured to cause the ball that has reached the pre-entering range to enter the first specific winning hole B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1002.

The inclination angles of the guide members B1310, B1510 and the upstream members B1320, B1520 are 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane as described above. In this case, the vertical length between the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged below them is about 19.6 mm (=160×tan (7 degrees)). Become. Therefore, even if the interval between rounds is set longer than the above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loose balls.

In this embodiment, the guide members B1310, B1510 and the upstream members B1320, B1520 have been described as having an inclination angle of 7 degrees, but the inclination angle is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tilt angle may be set at 45 degrees. In this case, the vertical length between the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged therebelow can be further increased, so the interval between rounds can be further increased. Even if it is set, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loose balls.

Further, a space is formed between the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged therebelow so that the ball can enter from the side. Therefore, the ball that is not guided by the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and flows down to the left and right outside thereof collides with other members (nails and resin members) on the downstream side, and then passes through the above-mentioned space and passes through the guide member. A situation can be caused to reach B1510 and B1310.

This serves as a basis for the player's decision as to whether to aim for the lower part of the pre-entering range to hit right or left, or to aim for the upper part of the pre-entering range to hit left or right. In addition, in a situation where the ball can be guided to the first specific winning hole B1001, the upper part of the pre-entering range can be aimed by hitting left, and the lower part of the pre-entering range can be aimed by hitting to the right. On the other hand, in a situation where the ball can be guided to the second special winning hole B1002, the upper part of the range before entry can be aimed by hitting to the right, and the lower part of the range before entry can be aimed by hitting to the left. Since the relationship between the mode and the aim is reversed when the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 capable of guiding the ball are changed, the player can concentrate on the game.

When hitting a ball aiming at the upper part of the pre-entering range, it is possible to avoid placing a plurality of balls in the lower part of the pre-entering range due to the deceleration effect of the projecting portion B1140 and the like described in each of the above embodiments. , the number of loose balls can be reduced. On the other hand, even if a ball enters the pre-entering range from the space between the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged below, the ball will be out. It is disadvantageous in that it tends to flow down toward the mouth 71 .

On the other hand, when hitting a ball aiming at the lower part of the range before entering the ball, the deceleration effect cannot be expected, so multiple balls will be placed in the lower part of the range before entering the ball, and the number of loose balls will increase. The disadvantage is that it is easy. On the other hand, a ball that has entered the pre-ball-entering range from the space between the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged below them will enter the lower part of the pre-ball-entering range. It is advantageous in that it can be reached and guided to the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

To put it briefly, when hitting a ball aiming at the upper part of the range before entering the ball, the possibility that the ball after falling from above the variable winning device B6000 will become a spilled ball is low, but it entered the range before entering the ball from the side. There is a high possibility that the ball will become a dead ball. On the other hand, when hitting the ball aiming at the lower part of the pre-entering range, it is fully conceivable that even the ball after falling from above the variable winning device B6000 will become a falling ball, but from the side before entering the ball. Even if the ball enters the range, there is a possibility that it will be guided to the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 without becoming a lost ball.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the balance is set for the profit that the player can obtain when the ball flowing down to the variable prize winning device B6000 is different, the player can select the desired profit balance. , it is possible to select the shooting mode of the ball.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the same driving mode as the variable winning device B6000, the state is switched between a state in which the ball is guided downward to the right, a state in which the ball is guided downward to the left, and a state in which the ball is not guided. Variable devices B6001 and B6002 that can be configured are arranged in the game area. The timing of the state switching is not limited at all, but in the present embodiment, the state is switched in a fixed pattern after the power is turned on (a fixed state switching pattern is repeatedly executed, or the state is switched at a fixed interval). state can be switched).

The first variable device B6001 is arranged directly below the through gate 67 on the left. When the ball is guided downward to the left, the ball is temporarily retained because the distance between the lower end of the plate that guides the ball and the inner rail 61 is less than the diameter of the ball. As a result, it is possible to intentionally vary the arrangement intervals of the balls that are shot at equal intervals.

Also, in the state where the ball is guided downward to the right, the guided ball is guided to the internal flow path 86 a of the center frame 86 . A ball entering the internal flow path 86a passes through the inside of the center frame 86 and is guided toward the base plate 60 side (front side) from the vicinity of the position directly above the first prize winning port 64. The base plate 60 and the glass unit 16 ( (See Figure 1). Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64 .

Note that the first variable device B6001 is not arranged on the right side of the game area. Therefore, the easiness of entering the internal flow path 86a can be changed depending on whether the ball is hit toward the left side of the center frame 86 or the right side of the center frame 86. It is possible to change the ease of entering the ball into 64.

The second variable device B6002 is arranged directly above the center frame 86, and is arranged so that the crossing position of the guide path coincides with the center position of the center frame 86 in the left and right direction. Spaced out enough to allow passage.

With the second variable device B6002, it is possible to switch between a state in which the ball that is shot with strength enough to land on the upper end of the center frame 86 is flowed to the left side of the game area and a state to be flowed to the right side of the game area. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the balls flow down evenly to the left and right, and to cause a large number of balls to flow down to the left or right.

As a result, by grasping the state of the second variable device B6002 and shooting the ball, it is possible to easily guide the ball to the target range of the game area. You can improve your strength.

Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are driven by separate driving devices B1400 and B1600 has been described. A dual-purpose driving device B7700 that is also used to displace the B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 178 is a top view of the variable winning device B7000 in the seventeenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178, the variable winning device B7000 includes, in addition to the configuration of the above-described variable winning device B1000, a shared driving device B7700 disposed on the rear side, and a direct-acting member B1420 toward the shared driving device B7700. A transmission rod B7422 that extends from the linear motion member B1620 to the back side, bends at the extension tip and extends upward, and a transmission rod B7622 that extends from the linear motion member B1620 to the back side, bends at the extension tip and extends downward. And prepare.

The driving force generated by the combined driving device B7700 is transmitted to the linear motion members B1420 and B1620 through the transmission rods B7422 and B7622, so that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be displaced.

The dual-purpose driving device B7700 rotates about a shaft fixed in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) by a driving motor B7710 that is rotationally driven and the rotational force of the driving motor B7710. and a transmission rotating body B7720 configured to be capable of transmitting driving force to B7622.

The transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are extended along the vertical direction of the axis of the transmission rotor B7720 at the extension tip side. The extended ends of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are configured to engage with the transmission rotator B7720 at the vertical position of the transmission rotator B7720 (the position separated by 180 degrees from the axis, see FIG. 179(a)). there is Hereinafter, the configuration of the transmission rotor B7720 will be described in detail, and the mode of driving force transmission to the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 will be described.

Fig. 179(a) is a front view of the transmission rotator B7720, Fig. 179(b) is a side view of the transmission rotator B7720 viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIXb in Fig. 179(a), and Fig. 179(c) [Fig. 4] is a developed view of a circumferential surface of a transmission rotating body B7720.

As shown in FIGS. 179(a) to 179(c), the transmission rotor B7720 is a circular plate-shaped member having a central hole B7721 to which the shaft of the drive motor B7710 is fixed, and an outer peripheral hole B7721. and a recessed groove portion B7730 that is recessed radially inward from the surface and continuously formed along the circumferential direction.

As shown in FIG. 179(a), the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged so as to enter the groove portion B7730 to be entered. The groove portion to be entered B7730 is configured such that the minimum groove width Wmin is slightly longer than the tip thickness of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622. It is possible to rotate the rotating body B7720 more than 360 degrees.

The entered groove portion B7730 is formed with a groove width Wmin in most of the angular range, and is expanded to the maximum groove width Wmax in a specific angular range. The groove width Wmax is set as a sufficiently long width that does not limit the displacement of the transmission rods B7422, B7622 allowed by the solenoids B1410, B1610.

The groove portion B7730 to be entered has a range formed with a groove width Wmin extending along one of two planes BS71 and BS72 perpendicular to the rotation axis, and a section extending along one of the two planes BS71 and BS72 perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a section connected along a sloping line.

Two planes BS71 and BS72 correspond to the left and right positions of transmission rods B7422 and B7622. In this embodiment, the distance between the two planes BS71 and BS72 is set to correspond to the displacement width of the linear motion members B1420 and B1620 of the solenoids B1410 and B1610.

That is, when the transmission rod B7422 is arranged on the first plane BS71, the direct-acting member B1420 is arranged at the position where the first solenoid B1410 is in the non-excited state, so the first guide plate B1300 is closed. state. On the other hand, when the transmission rod B7422 is arranged on the second plane BS72, the linear motion member B1420 is arranged at the position in which the first solenoid B1410 is excited, so the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state. be done.

Further, when the transmission rod B7622 is arranged on the first plane BS71, the linear motion member B1620 is arranged at the position in which the second solenoid B1610 is in the non-excited state, so the second guide plate B1500 is closed. state. On the other hand, when the transmission rod B7622 is arranged on the second plane BS72, the linear motion member B1620 is arranged at the position in which the second solenoid B1610 is excited, so that the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state. be done.

Therefore, by appropriately designing the entry groove portion B7730, the states of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be switched in synchronization with the rotation of the transmission rotor B7720. Details of the shape of the groove portion to be entered B7730 will be described below.

With the boundary position BCL71 as a reference, the groove to be entered B7730 is configured such that the transmission rod B7622 is guided in the upper groove and the transmission rod B7422 is guided in the lower groove. The non-driving section B7731, the driving sections B7740 and B7750, and the performance section B7760 are configured in the same angular range and order.

The non-driving section B7731 has two sections of approximately 30 degrees arranged at intervals of 180 degrees, and the central portion in the angular direction has a groove width Wmax. In the state where the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the groove width Wmax, the displacement of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 is not limited to the groove portion B7730 to be entered. Therefore, by controlling the driving of the solenoids B1410 and B1610, the state of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be switched between the closed state and the open state.

The drive sections B7740 and B7750 are continuously formed in a section of 105 degrees from the end of the non-drive section B7731, but have different shapes across the boundary position BCL71.

The first drive section B7740 arranged below the boundary position BCL71 in FIG. , a second groove portion B7742 continuously formed over approximately 45 degrees from the first groove portion B7741, and a third groove portion B7743 continuously formed over approximately 45 degrees from the second groove portion B7742.

The first groove portion B7741 and the second groove portion B7742 are arranged on the first plane BS71, and the arrangement of the third groove portion B7743 is shifted from the first plane BS71 to the second plane BS72.

The second drive section B7750, which is arranged above the boundary position BCL71 in FIG. 179(c), is a section related to the displacement of the transmission rod B7622. A second groove portion B7752 continuously formed over approximately 45 degrees from the first groove portion B7751, and a third groove portion B7753 continuously formed over approximately 45 degrees from the second groove portion B7752.

The first groove B7751 and the third groove B7753 are arranged on the first plane BS71, and the second groove B7752 is shifted from the first plane BS71 to the second plane BS72.

Therefore, when the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the driving sections B7740 and B7750, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are displaced along the shape of the groove portion B7730 to be entered. Therefore, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be switched between the closed state and the open state by rotating the transmission rotor B7720.

FIG. 179(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between the rotation direction of the transmission rotor B7720 and the states of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500. In FIG. 179(d), it is assumed that the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are entering the driving sections B7740 and B7750.

According to FIG. 179(d), by appropriately switching the rotation direction of the drive motor B7710, both the operation pattern of opening and closing only the first guide plate B1300 and the operation pattern of opening and closing only the second guide plate B1500 can be changed. An actuation pattern that alternately opens and closes B1300 and B1500 is also feasible.

When the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged in the first grooves B7741 and B7751 in the standby state, the second guide plate B1500 is opened even when the operation pattern of opening and closing only the second guide plate B1500 is started. Although it is necessary to go through the open state of the first guide plate B1300 before configuring the state, it is possible to immediately switch the first guide plate B1300 to the closed state by increasing the rotation speed of the drive motor B7710. , is unlikely to pose a problem in practice.

Further, when the second guide plate B1500 is opened in the final round, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are returned to the first grooves B7741 and B7751 at the end of the round via the second grooves B7742 and B7752. Therefore, it is thought that there will be a problem that the first guide plate B1300 will be opened.

On the other hand, in practice, as described above, the rotation speed of the drive motor B7710 is increased, or the transmission rods B7422, B7622 are arranged at the boundary positions between the second grooves B7742, B7752 and the third grooves B7743, B7753. This can be dealt with by closing both of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, so that this problem is unlikely to occur in practice.

By arranging the transmission rods B7422, B7622 at the boundary positions between the second grooves B7742, B7752 and the third grooves B7743, B7753, even if both the guide plates B1300, B1500 are closed and the special game state is finished. , If the arrangement of the transmission rods B7422, B7622 is stored until the start of the next special game state, ), it is possible to cope with both the case of opening the first guide plate B1300 and the case of opening the second guide plate B1500 in the first round.

An advantage of displacing the guide plates B1300 and B1500 by rotating the transmission rotor B7720 is that the operation order of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be mechanically defined simply by rotating the transmission rotor B7720. be done.

Therefore, the complicated control program required when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are driven by separate driving devices is not required, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are interlocked in an appropriate order regardless of the speed of the transmission rotor B7720. can be made

In this case, the interval between rounds can be shortened by increasing the rotation speed of the drive motor B7710 and rotating the transmission rotor B7720 at high speed. In addition, when the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are driven to switch between the closed state and the open state, there is no need to reverse the rotation direction of the drive motor B7710, shortening the interval between rounds. can be made easier.

The effect section B7760 has two sections of about 45 degrees arranged at intervals of 180 degrees so as to connect between the non-driving section B7731 and the driving sections B7740 and B7750. It is formed so that the arrangement can be shifted on the BS72. That is, when the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the effect section B7760, both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched to the open state.

FIG. 180 is a front view of the variable winning device B7000. FIG. 180 shows a state in which the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 have entered the effect section B7760. That is, the drawing shows a state in which both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 180, when both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are opened, the ball entering the first specific winning hole B1001 is blocked by the upstream member B1520 and enters the second specific winning hole B1002. The ball is blocked by the upstream member B1320. Also, the balls that have reached the pre-entering range are collected at the intersection of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, and drop downward as the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced to the closed state.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 180, while both guide plates B1300 and B1500 are in the open state, it is possible to prevent balls from entering both specific winning holes B1001 and B1002. Therefore, by opening and closing the guide plates B1300 and B1500, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the balls from entering the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002.

Strictly speaking, the state shown in FIG. 180 is not an open state because the balls are prevented from entering the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 although the states of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are changed. Therefore, for example, the output from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to rotate the drive motor B7710, and control is performed to configure the state shown in FIG. 180 as the performance operation in the normal state. can be In addition, when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 constitute the open state without the start of the big winning game (for example, a small winning), the mode shown in FIG. 180 may be used.

As the closed state of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, both the state in which both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are arranged on the back side and the state in which both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are arranged on the front side are It may be configurable. In a state where both are arranged on the front side, by displacing one of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 to the back side, a ball can be entered into either of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, and the open state is maintained. Configurable.

In this embodiment, a discharge port B7160 is formed through which the ball can be discharged from the crossing position of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 to the rear side. As a result, it is possible to prevent balls from accumulating at the intersection of the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

In addition, the ball that has passed through the outlet B7160 may be treated as an out ball, or it may be configured to return to the game area again via a detour passage communicating from the outlet B7160, and the return ball will enter the ball entrance. It may be configured so that it can be entered.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor B7710 is provided in addition to the solenoids B1410 and B1610, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the solenoids B1410 and B1610 may be omitted and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 may be driven only by the drive motor B7710.

In the special game state, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are driven by the driving force of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 in the first state, and by the driving force of the drive motor B7710 in the second state different from the first state. You can make it work.

Also, the special game state may be executed by the driving force of the solenoids B1410 and B1610, and the drive motor B7710 may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, in the special game state, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 may enter the non-driving section B7731.

Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described. This embodiment corresponds to another control example of the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the first detection sensor B1230 and the second detection sensor B1250 both constitute the special winning openings B1001 and B1002. The plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are allowed to be displaced at the same time, and the first detection sensor B1230 constitutes the first specific winning opening B1001, while the second detection sensor B1250 is configured to function as a specific area. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 181(a) is a diagram showing changes over time of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 181(b) is the first guide plate in the fifth operation pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time of a plate B1300 and a second guide plate B1500; 130, 132 and 137 are referred to in the description of FIG.

In this embodiment, the second guide plate B1500 and the second detection sensor B1250 function as a probability variation determination unit. That is, the second detection sensor B1250 functions as a sensor that detects passage of the sphere through the specific area.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the second detection sensor B1250 in the special game state, it is controlled to shift to the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends.

The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main control device 110 makes a determination regarding the acquisition of the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol in a special round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, the first round ) only. The operating pattern of this special round is described in detail below.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot D and jackpot E are provided as jackpot types of special symbols. Depending on the type of jackpot, the operation patterns of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are configured differently, and the number of payout prize balls accompanying the ball entry and the transition to the variable state (high probability state) of special symbols. is configured to vary the probability of obtaining the right to

When the jackpot D is reached, the jackpot game of the first round is executed in the fourth operation pattern. In this case, the player can almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state), but is configured so that he or she can hardly receive the payout of prize balls.

When the jackpot E is obtained, the jackpot game of the first round is executed in the fifth operating pattern. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 150 prize balls, and in most cases cannot obtain the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure winning determination, after the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, it starts controlling the determined kind of big winning game. Operation control of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be described below.

<When operating with the fourth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot D, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids B1410 and B1610 so that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 activates the solenoid to keep the guide plates B1300 and B1500 closed until the timer means (not shown) passes a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the round game R of the first round is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and displaces the first guide plate B1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole B1001. B1410 is driven and controlled. The driving of the first solenoid B1410 is controlled to be switched at intervals of three seconds, and the first guide plate B1300 is switched between the open state and the closed state at intervals of three seconds.

The second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state by controlling the driving of the second solenoid B1610 two seconds after the timing at which the first solenoid B1410 is first driven. The second solenoid B1610 continues to be driven for 28 seconds thereafter. Therefore, the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in an open state.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the win) is satisfied, the first guide plate B1300 is displaced to the closed state and the first solenoid B1410 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning port B1001, and the first round round game R ends. do.

According to the above-described fourth operation pattern, it is possible to enter the ball into the first specific winning hole B1001 for 2 seconds after the first guide plate B1300 is opened. , By opening the second guide plate B1500, the ball can enter the specific area of the second detection sensor B1250. It is not possible to achieve the number of balls entered.

As a result, in the first round special game, the player can acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but is controlled so that it is necessary to wait for the lapse of the specified time. be able to.

<When operating with the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids B1410 and B1610 so that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 operate based on the fifth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 activates the solenoid to keep the guide plates B1300 and B1500 closed until the timer means (not shown) passes a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the round game R of the first round is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and displaces the first guide plate B1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole B1001. B1410 is driven and controlled. The driving of the first solenoid B1410 is controlled so that the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state, and the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state until the end of the round.

The second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state by controlling the driving of the second solenoid B1610 two seconds after the timing at which the first solenoid B1410 is first driven. The second solenoid B1610 is deactivated after 0.5 seconds, so the second guide plate B1500 returns to the closed state.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the win) is satisfied, the first guide plate B1300 is displaced to the closed state and the first solenoid B1410 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning port B1001, and the first round round game R ends. do.

According to the fifth operation pattern described above, it is possible to enter the ball into the first specific winning hole B1001 after the first guide plate B1300 constitutes the open state. Although the second guide plate B1500 is opened after 2 seconds have passed, it is immediately switched to the closed state, so it does not hinder the entry of the ball into the first specific winning hole B1001. On the other hand, since the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state over the period in which the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state, the second detection sensor B1250 is blocked by the first guide plate B1300. Therefore, the ball will not pass through the specified area.

As a result, in the special game of the first round, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but the first specific winning without waiting for the lapse of the specified time. The special game of the first round can be finished by entering a specified number of balls into the mouth B1001.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the variable winning device B1000 is provided with different operation patterns as the control of the first round. A round can be configured to acquire the right to transition to a high-probability state).

Here, unlike the prior art, in the fourth operation pattern and the fifth operation pattern, while the second guide plate B1500 is closed before the operation in the first round game, the first guide plate B1300 is not required to be in the closed state, it is possible to easily prevent the ball reaching the first guide plate B1300 from spilling. This will be explained below.

In the prior art, when a specified number of balls enter the first specific winning opening B1001 and the round game ends before the action member for opening and closing the specific area starts to operate, the action member is in an open state. However, there is a risk that the ball will not enter the first specific winning hole B1001 and the player will not be able to acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In order to prevent this, the opening/closing member for opening/closing the first specific winning hole B1001 is controlled to remain closed for several seconds after the start of the round.

Therefore, the ball that flows down after the start of the round and reaches the opening/closing member at the timing when the ball can enter the first specific winning hole B1001 spills because the opening/closing member is maintained in the closed state, and the player feels disappointed. I was afraid it would increase.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second detection sensor B1250 is not arranged downstream of the first specific winning opening B1001, so the first guide plate B1300 constitutes a closed state and the first specific winning opening B1001 is closed. Even if the ball cannot enter the ball, as long as the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special pattern probability change state (high probability state) without any problem. can do.

In addition, by setting the time to start driving to 2 seconds, the second guide plate B1500 is opened before the specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) enter the first specific winning hole B1001. I am trying to switch.

Therefore, in this operation pattern, even while the second guide plate B1500 is in the closed state before the operation in the first round game, the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state. While preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the operation of B1300, there is a problem that the player can not acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol due to the winning mode. can be prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, in the fifth operation pattern, the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state and does not change to the closed state, so compared to the case where the opening/closing member is maintained in the closed state for several seconds as described above in the prior art. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of loose balls generated during the game in the first round.

In addition, the aspect of a special round is not restricted to said description. For example, it may be configured in the second round instead of the first round, or may be configured in the final round, and the number of rounds in which it is configured is arbitrary. Also, a plurality of special rounds may be configured.

In addition, although the operation pattern after the second round of the big win D and the big win E will not be particularly described, it may be configured in common. For example, the first opening/closing plate B1300 maintains an open state during a round, and the second opening/closing plate B1500 maintains a closed state at all times.

Next, a 19th embodiment will be described. In the fourteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball rolling on the guide plate B4300 is configured to be difficult to enter the ball guide receiving portion B4260. It is configured so that the ball can be easily entered into the receiving portion B4260. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Further, it is possible to arbitrarily set what kind of profit is given to the player by entering the ball into the ball guide receiving portion B4260. For example, it may be an advantageous one such as a special symbol lottery, a prize ball payout, or a variable probability state, or a disadvantageous one such as a drop lottery.

FIG. 182 is a front view of the variable winning device B9000 in the nineteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 182, in the variable winning device B9000, the formation of the left extension portion B1240 is omitted, and the penetration formation portion B9120 drilled in the base member B9100 is inclined from the left end portion of the penetration formation portion B4120. Similarly, the front-rear direction is switched between an open state in which the ball can be guided to the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 and a closed state in which the ball cannot be guided. A guide plate B9300 configured to be slidably displaceable has a shape extending leftward from the left end portion of the above-described guide plate B4300 while maintaining an inclination.

That is, the variable prize winning device B9000 forms only a guide path that descends to the right to guide the ball toward the opening of the first detection sensor B1230, and unlike each of the above embodiments, the formation of the guide path that descends to the left is omitted. ing.

When the guide plate B9300 is in the open state, various aspects are exemplified as aspects of how the ball reaches the guide plate B9300. For example, the base plate 60 (see FIG. 124) can be arranged in such a manner that the ball falls from above the guide plate B9300 or can be guided to the guide plate B9300 on the left side (upstream side) of the guide plate B9300 (inclination mode). ) in which the ball that collides with the nail BKG91 implanted in the guide plate B9300 reaches the left side of the guide plate B9300.

The base member B9100 includes a plurality of projections B9140 acting on balls rolling on the rolling surface 9311 of the guide plate B9300 in the open state. The plurality of protruding portions B9140 are formed in a columnar shape elongated in the vertical direction, and are protrusively formed with a length that allows contact with the ball rolling on the guide plate B9300. different.

That is, the first projecting portion B9141 disposed at the left end is disposed with a space approximately equal to the diameter of the sphere from the rolling contact surface B9311, and is located to the right of the first projecting portion B9141 with a distance of approximately the diameter of the sphere. The second protruding portions B9142, which are arranged at a lateral interval of about double the length, are arranged at a interval of about 5/6 of the diameter of the ball from the rolling surface B9311.

The third projecting portion B9143, which is arranged on the right side of the second projecting portion B9142 at a horizontal interval of about the diameter of the sphere, has a diameter of about 4/6 (= 2/3) of the diameter of the ball with the rolling surface B9311. The fourth projecting portion B9144, which is spaced apart from the third projecting portion B9143 and is located on the right side of the third projecting portion B9143 at a horizontal interval approximately equal to the diameter of the sphere, is located approximately the radius of the ball from the rolling surface B9311. They are spaced apart. The fourth projecting portion B9144 is formed at a position slightly shifted to the left from directly above the ball guide receiving portion B4260.

That is, as the protruding portion B9140 moves from the first protruding portion B9141 to the fourth protruding portion B9144, the contact position with the ball rolling on the rolling surface B9311 approaches the center of the ball. The effect of slowing the ball gradually increases. Therefore, the protrusion B9140 can increase the degree of deceleration of the ball rolling on the rolling surface B9311 toward the downstream.

As a result, the residence time of the rolling ball can be differentiated for each position on the rolling surface B9311. In particular, since the residence time of the ball in the vicinity of the fourth projecting portion B9141 can be relatively lengthened, the probability of the ball flowing down toward the ball guide receiving portion B4260 when the guide plate B9300 is switched to the closed state is reduced. can be raised.

The fifth projecting portion B9145, which is arranged on the right side of the fourth projecting portion B9144 at a lateral interval of about 1.5 times the diameter of the ball, is formed between the rolling surface B9311 and 4/6 (=2) the diameter of the ball. /3), and the sixth projecting portion B9146, which is disposed on the right side of the fifth projecting portion B9145 at a lateral interval of about the diameter of a ball, is the rolling contact surface B9311. They are arranged at intervals of about 5/6 of the diameter of the spheres.

That is, as the projecting portion B9140 moves from the fourth projecting portion B9144 toward the sixth projecting portion B9146, the contact position with the ball rolling on the rolling surface B9311 becomes farther from the center of the ball. The effect of slowing the ball is gradually reduced. Therefore, the protrusion B9140 can increase the degree of acceleration of the ball rolling on the rolling surface B9311 toward the downstream.

As a result, the residence time of the rolling ball can be differentiated for each position on the rolling surface B9311. In particular, since the residence time of the ball at the position immediately before the first detection sensor B1230 can be relatively shortened, the ball is allowed to enter the first detection sensor B1230 before the guide plate B9300 is switched to the closed state. can be made easier. As a result, the efficiency of ball entry into the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 can be improved, and the number of loose balls can be reduced.

Further, by making the contact positions with the ball different between the upper and lower sides as in the present embodiment, the load in the vertical direction is easily applied to the ball. Therefore, not only the case where the ball always adheres to the rolling surface B9311 and rolls, but also the case where it bounces down (randomly) may occur. As a result, it is possible to give variety to the flow-down manner of the ball guided by the guide plate B9300, so that the player who pays attention to the ball is not bored.

Although the projecting portion B9140 has been described as being elongated in the vertical direction, the projecting portion B9140 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the longitudinal direction may be inclined with respect to the vertical direction. For example, the longitudinal direction may coincide with the direction of downward inclination toward the left side. In this case, the speed of the ball rolling on the rolling surface B9311 can make a difference in the degree of deceleration of the ball. For example, when the ball rolls at high speed, it is easy to ride on the slope of the projecting portion B9140, and the degree of deceleration is small. can be decelerated to In this case, the degree of deceleration of the ball approaching the projecting portion B9140 can be varied depending on the difference in the rolling speed of the ball.

In addition, in the section where the degree of deceleration gradually increases in the present embodiment (the section from the first protruding portion B9141 to the fourth protruding portion B9144), a gradually accelerating section may be provided, or the gradual acceleration may be provided. A section in which the speed is gradually decelerated may be provided in the section where the degree of is increased (the section from the fourth protrusion B9144 to the sixth protrusion B9146).

Note that the configuration of this embodiment may be employed in a device in which the guide routes described in each of the above embodiments intersect. Moreover, the projecting portion B9140 is not limited to being fixed to the base member B9100.

For example, through an opening formed integrally with the guide plate B9300 and formed in the base member B9100, switching between a state of protruding into the range before ball entry in conjunction with the guide plate B9300 and a state of being buried from the range before ball entry It may be configured as possible. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from colliding with the projecting portion B9140 in the closed state. In this case, all the projecting portions B9140 may be configured to interlock with the guide plate B9300, or some of the projecting portions B9140 may be interlocked with the guide plate B9300, and the other projecting portions B9140 may be the base member. It may be fixed to the B9100.

It should be noted that the ball guide receiving portion B4260 is not limited to being arranged below the lower end of the guide plate B9300. For example, it may be arranged close to the guide plate B9300, and may be arranged above the lower end portion of the guide plate B9300 (the portion in contact with the ridge support portion B1225). In this case, by narrowing the vertical distance between the guide plate B9300 and the ball guide receiving portion B4260, it is possible to make it easier for the ball that has slid down from the guide plate B9300 to enter the ball guide receiving portion B4260.

Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are configured to be in the open state by rotating downward. It is configured to be in an open state by rotationally displacing. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

183(a) and 183(b) are partial front views of the variable winning device B20000 in the twentieth embodiment in the range corresponding to the range CLXIIa of FIG. ) is a partial top view of the variable prize winning device B20000 as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXXIIIc.

183(a) and 183(c) illustrate the closed state of the variable winning device B20000, and FIG. 183(b) illustrates the open state of the second rotating member B20900. As shown in FIG. 183, the variable winning device B20000 includes a first rotating member B20700 that configures the ball guide path by rotating and displacing, and a second rotating member B20700 that configures the ball guide path by rotating and displacing. and a moving member B20900.

The support member that supports the rotating members B20700 and B20900 includes the above-mentioned protruding shaft B3171 and a guide for displacement of the protruding portions B20711 and B20911 that are drilled along an arc centered on the protruding shaft B3171. An arcuate hole B20172 is formed.

Since the first rotating member B20700 and the second rotating member B20900 are formed in substantially symmetrical shapes, the first rotating member B20700 will be described, and the description of the second rotating member B20900 will be omitted.

The first rotating member B20700 has a closed state (see FIG. 183(a)) that prevents the ball from entering the first specific winning hole B1001, and a rotating displacement in the rising direction to move the ball to the first specific winning hole B1001. can be guided between the open state (see FIG. 183(b) for the second rotating member B20900). and an extended plate portion B20720 extending along the radial direction of the main body portion B20710.

The body portion B20710 includes a protruding portion B20711 that protrudes toward the back side in parallel with the rotation axis from a position on the inner side (left side) of the protruding shaft portion B3171. The protruding portion B20711 protrudes toward the rear side through the arc-shaped hole B20172.

In addition, the body portion B20710 includes a plate portion B20712 projecting along the radial direction. The plate portion B20712 protrudes toward the opening of the first detection sensor B1230, and can prevent a ball from entering the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 in the closed state. On the other hand, in the open state (state in which the tip is raised), the plate portion B20712 and the lower edge of the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 are in a shape that gently connects to the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 in the open state. You can enter the ball.

The extension plate portion B20720 is formed so as to taper toward the extension tip side in a front view, and is recessed along a rolling surface B20721 on which a game ball can be placed and a plane perpendicular to the direction of the rotation axis. A concave portion B20722 is provided.

The recessed portion B20722 is a recessed portion formed up to a retracted position from the locus of movement of the second rotating member B20900 in front view in order to avoid interference with the second rotating member B20900. B20922 is also formed on the second rotating member B20900.

The recessed portions B20722 and the recessed portions B20922 are alternately formed in the axial direction. Thereby, while avoiding the collision of the first rotating member B20700 and the second rotating member B20900, the formation area of the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 is ensured.

Balls can contact the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 regardless of the state of the rotating members B20700 and B20900. Therefore, for example, immediately after reaching the vicinity of the central position guided by the closed rolling surface B20721, the rolling surface B20921 opens and guides the ball to the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. . That is, both rotating members B20700 and B20900 may function to bring the ball closer to the opening of the same detection sensor (eg, second detection sensor B1250).

In the closed state shown in FIG. 183(a), the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 of the rotating members B20700 and B20900 intersect, and the spheres will accumulate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a discharge port B20001 is formed for discharging the ball reaching the intersection position of the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 to the rear side. As a result, it is possible to prevent balls from accumulating at the position where the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 intersect in the closed state.

The profit given to the player by the ball entering the outlet B20001 is not limited at all. For example, the discharge port B20001 may be configured as an out port so as not to give any profit, or the ball entering the discharge port B20001 may cause a prize ball to be paid out, or the discharge port B20001 The entered ball may return to the game area again, and in that case, the return position may be a position where the ball can easily enter one of the winning holes.

Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the ball guide receiving portion B1260 is fixed has been described, but in the variable winning device B21000 in the twenty-first embodiment, the ball guide receiving portion B21260 is configured to be rotatably displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 184 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the 21st embodiment. As shown in FIG. 184, in the variable winning device B21000 of this embodiment, a ball guide receiving portion B21260 is formed so as to have a concave portion capable of receiving one ball vertically above the intersection position of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. is arranged.

The ball guide receiving portion B21260 can receive one ball in a receiving posture in which the recess faces upward, and the received ball is held by the ball guide receiving portion B21260 as long as the receiving posture is maintained. If another ball reaches the ball guide receiving portion B21260 while the ball is received by the ball guide receiving portion B21260, the ball collides with the ball held by the ball guide receiving portion B21260 and is guided by the ball. It flows down the left and right outer sides of the receiving portion B21260.

The ball guide receiving portion B21260 can be switched to a discharge posture in which the concave portion faces diagonally downward to the right by rotating clockwise around the rotation axis B21261. It is configured to be able to discharge the ball that has been held downward. The ball guide receiving portion B21260 is configured to return to the receiving posture by being rotationally displaced counterclockwise from the ejection posture.

As a result, up to one ball flowing down the left flow path BL1 can be held by the ball guide receiving portion B21260. It is possible to vary the period until the reaching ball hits the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 by means of the ball guide receiving portion B21260.

In addition, the timing at which the posture of the ball guide receiving portion B21260 changes is not limited at all. For example, the posture may be changed at regular intervals after the power is turned on, or the posture may be changed to the discharge posture by the load of the collision of the ball, and the posture may be returned to the receiving posture by an urging means such as a spring. Alternatively, the posture may be changed in conjunction with solenoids that drive the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

When interlocking with the solenoid, each time the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched to the open state, the ball guide receiving portion B21260 is switched from the receiving posture to the discharge posture, and at the timing to be switched to the closed state, the ball guide receiving portion B21260 is switched. By making B21260 return to the receiving posture, balls that may pass through the pre-ball entry range in the closed state can be temporarily retained in the ball guide receiving portion B21260, so the number of out balls generated can be reduced. can be reduced.

Further, although the displacement of the ball guide receiving portion B21260 has been described as the displacement in which the concave portion reciprocates on the right side of the rotating shaft B21261, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by displacing the ball guide receiving portion B21260 in the same direction by one rotation or more, it may be configured to return from the receiving posture to the ejecting posture and then to the receiving posture again.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the projecting portion 154 decelerates the ball flowing down the ball falling unit 150, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow resistance of the sphere may be increased by placing an adhesive member on the inner surface, air may be sent into the flow path, or the flow speed of the sphere may be adjusted by magnetic force. You can

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is disposed on the rear case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement restricting device 180 may be arranged on the side of the movable accessory. A displacement regulating device 180 may be provided on the back side of the effect member 700 so that the extension width to the back side can be changed by a pushing operation.

In this case, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the effect member 700 by configuring the body portion 183a of the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 to be inserted through the rear case 510 in a state in which the overhang width is long. can. On the other hand, the production member 700 can be displaced by disengaging the operation member 183 from being inserted into the rear case 510 in a state in which the operation member 183 is operated to shorten the overhang width. Along with the displacement, the displacement restricting device 180 is also displaced. Therefore, by adding a designed shape to the displacement regulating device 180 or arranging a light emitting device such as an LED, the displacement regulating device 180 can be visually recognized by the player.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the state change of the displacement restricting device 180 is caused by manual operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement restricting device 180 may include a driving device, and the arrangement of the operating member 183 may be electrically switched. In this case, by controlling the displacement restricting device 180 to be in the restricted state prior to the initial operation after power-on, it is possible to prevent the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from starting displacement while the displacement restricting device 180 remains in the restricted state. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation member 183 from being overloaded.

Further, a cushioning material having a high cushioning property may be arranged around the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183. FIG. Further, when a detection sensor capable of detecting the arrangement of the operation member 183 is provided without driving the displacement restricting device 180, and the detecting sensor determines that the displacement restricting device 180 is in the restricting state. Alternatively, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 may be controlled not to start driving.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is arranged on the back side of the back case 510 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the rear case 510, may be arranged on at least one of the left and right sides of the rear case 510, or may be a combination thereof.

For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the production member 700, it is sufficient to prevent the arrangement change of the lower arm member 630. Therefore, a recess is provided in the upper surface of the lower arm member 630 in the production standby state, and from the upper side of the back case 510 By constructing the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 to engage with a recess provided in the lower arm member 630 when the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 protrudes, the lower arm member 630 is prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction. can be done.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is provided as an example of a device for restricting the displacement of the scaling unit 600 arranged above the game area has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, by disposing a device for regulating (restricting) the displacement of the granular member 320 (a member capable of freely displacing the internal space IE1) of the injection device 400, the granular member 320 displaces the internal space IE1 at the time of shipment. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the partition member 310 from rubbing against the wall surface of the partition member 310 , cracking the granular member 320 , and scratching the partition member 310 .

For example, the granular member 320 can be prevented from exceeding the lid member 480 and displacing the internal space IE1 by shipping the lid member 480 in the state of being placed at the displacement end position on the entrance side (indicator standby state). Therefore, it is possible to limit the range of the partitioning member 310 with which the granular members 320 can come into contact at the time of shipment. can.

Further, as another example, a granular member 320 is disposed on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate rendering means 160, configured to be able to protrude into the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310, and arranged in the internal space IE1 in the protruding state. A protruding member configured to limit the displacement of is also provided.

The projecting member can be pushed from the front side of the lower support member 163 (the front side of the game board 13), and can be switched between the projecting state and the non-projecting state each time the pushing operation is performed. After the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game machine parlor, the projecting member can be operated from the front side by opening the front frame 14, so that the operability of the projecting member can be improved.

In addition, the aspect of the state change of the projecting member is not limited at all. For example, like the displacement restricting device 180, the state may be changed by a latch mechanism, or the state may be changed by engaging and disengaging claws.

As another example, the arrangement of the granular members 320 may be maintained by shipping the partitioning member 310 in a state where the internal air pressure is increased. In this case, by installing the pachinko machine 10 in the amusement machine parlor and lowering the air pressure inside the partitioning member 310 before starting operation, the granular members 320 can be arranged freely.

As another example, the granular member 320 may be formed by mixing ferromagnetic metal powder with the resin material of the granular member 320, and the magnet may be arranged near the lower end of the partition member 310 at the time of shipment. Accordingly, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be maintained by the magnetic force of the magnet during shipment. On the other hand, during operation, the granular member 320 can be freely arranged by removing the magnet.

Note that the magnet is not limited to one that needs to be removed during operation. For example, a magnet may be arranged on a part of another movable accessory, and as an example, a magnet may be arranged on the lid member 480 .

In addition, in a mode in which ferromagnetic metal powder is mixed in the granular member 320, for example, after execution of the shooting effect, an operation is performed so as to generate a magnetic force near the partitioning member 310 (for example, to bring the magnet closer to the partitioning member 310). By arranging the performance accessories that operate, it is possible to include a performance mode in which the granular member 320 is stopped in the air (visible as if it is floating) in the shooting performance.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 that restricts the displacement of the scaling unit 600 is fixed to the back case 510 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an insertion hole is formed in the rear case 510 so as to be aligned with the central axis of the regulated hole 657 when the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is located at the predetermined end position. A metal rod or resin rod is inserted through the insertion hole into the regulated hole 657 and fixed with a tape or the like. The scaling unit 600 may be configured to be displaceable.

On the other hand, with this method, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may become dirty with the tape for fixing, and it is not possible to throw away the metal rod or resin rod for delivery of the pachinko machine 10 to another store, so storage is not possible. It may be necessary to do so.

Also, if the storage of the metal sticks or resin sticks is entrusted to each game machine store, the possibility of loss increases. may not be possible. It can also be recognized that the displacement restricting device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the back case 510 is an improvement on this point of view.

In the first embodiment described above, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 and the front-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear section lower portion 314 are approximately the same, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, the front-to-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b and the rear section lower portion 314 may be configured to be as narrow as the front-to-rear width between the left and right portions 312a and the rear section lower portion 314. FIG. In this case, since the movement resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased in the lower side of the internal space IE1 regardless of the lateral position, the momentum of the injected granular member 320 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the probability that the granular member 320 will be damaged or damaged due to collision.

Also, for example, the front-to-rear width between the left and right portions 312a and the rear section lower portion 314 may be widened to the same extent as the front-to-rear width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can enter the internal space IE1 without reducing the momentum of the granular member 320 to be injected.

Also, the front-to-rear width of the internal space IE1 does not have to be constant. For example, it may be tapered toward the moving direction (upper side) of the ejected granular member 320 . In this case, the momentum of the granular members 320 can be gradually reduced, so that localized excessive loads on the partitioning members 310 can be easily avoided. Furthermore, by bringing the tapering direction to the front side, the scattering granular members 320 can be easily brought to the front side.

Further, for example, a bump-shaped portion projecting toward the rear side in a manner of protruding toward the rear side may be provided at a portion of the front plate portion 311 where it is expected that the injected granular members 320 will collectively arrive. good. This hump-like portion may be formed by fixing a separate member to the rear surface of the front plate portion 311, or by forming a metal plate so that a portion of the front plate portion 311 protrudes toward the rear surface side. The mold may be configured to have a convex portion.

In the above-described first embodiment, the granular member 320 is configured in the shape of a soccer ball, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may have a spherical shape, a rugby ball shape, or a star shape (a shape in which protrusions are formed three-dimensionally). By configuring the members with a certain size, gaps can be generated between the members, so that the granular members 320 can be violently scattered when the shooting effect is executed.

In the first embodiment, the ejection device 400 is arranged below the back side of the light guide plate 161 and is configured to eject the granular members 320 obliquely forward and upward, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the injection device 400 may be arranged on the left and right sides of the light guide plate 161 or on the upper side. Even in this case, an effect of shooting the granular member 320 obliquely forward can be executed. When the injection device 400 is arranged at the upper position, it is preferable to add a device for lifting the granular member 320 to the presentation standby position.

In the first embodiment described above, the granular member 320 is formed of a single-color (red in this embodiment) resin member, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one granular member 320 may be configured by two-color molding or combining two members of different colors. In this case, the appearance at the time of deposition can be devised by color-coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity. For example, by changing the color at the horizontal position in the stable posture of the granular member 320 in consideration of the position of the center of gravity, it is possible to visually recognize the layer of color when the granular member 320 is deposited.

Also, the number of granular members 320 is not limited, and may be one. For example, a member having approximately the same size as the collision member 420 may be employed as the granular member 320 , and the outer surface may be configured to have a concave curved shape approximately the same as the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 . As a result, how the granular member 320 flies and how it looks changes depending on whether the shooting effect is executed in a state where the curved shape fits well or when the firing effect is executed in a state where the curved shape does not fit. be able to.

In the above-described first embodiment, the granular members 320 are disposed in the internal space IE1 so as to be able to scatter, and gather on the collision member 420 due to gravity, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an urging means for urging the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (position side of the standby state for the effect) is provided, and the granular member 320 is returned to the initial position side by the urging force of the urging means. can be In this case, it is possible to avoid limiting the initial position side of the granular member 320 to the lower side.

Examples of the urging means include a spring, an elastic rubber-like member, a net-like member whose ends are fixedly arranged, an elastic sheet that partially covers the path of the granular member 320, and the like.

The relationship between the biasing means and the granular member 320 is not limited at all. For example, the granular member 320 and the urging means may be adhered to each other, or they may not be adhered but are not separated, and a part of the urging means is arranged inside the granular member 320 and integrated. Alternatively, the urging means may be supported in the internal space IE1 while being able to be arranged apart from the granular member 320 .

Also, the biasing means is not limited to an object that can come into contact with the granular member 320 . For example, in the same way as the gravitational force acting on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment, air pressure adjusting means for adjusting the air pressure in the internal space IE1 may be employed. In this case, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be affected by increasing or decreasing the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1.

For example, when the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 is increased by injecting gas into the internal space IE1 from above, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1, and conversely, above the internal space IE1. When the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 is lowered in a manner in which gas is extracted from the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 can be displaced (displaced to float) toward the upper side of the internal space IE1. Further, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, and can be set to any side of up, down, left, right, front and back.

It should be noted that it is preferable to close the deformed through portion 315 when the air pressure is to be changed. It is easily possible to provide the lid member 480 with the function of closing the deformed through portion 315 . For example, when a soft, thin, deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low-friction rubber-like member) is attached to the lid member 480 and the lid member 480 enters the deformed through portion 315, the lid The gap between the member 480 and the deformed through portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. As a result, the deformed penetrating portion 315 can be closed or opened according to the displacement of the cover member 480 with respect to the deformed penetrating portion 315 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ridge portion 414 of the direct-acting member 410 is formed along a straight line has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the surface of the right distal end facing the transmission projection 446 may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement locus of the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 . In this case, the direct-acting member 410 can be maintained at the displacement lower end position while the transmission projection 446 is in contact with the curved surface. It is possible to shift to the firing state while maintaining the maximum biasing force.

In the above-described first embodiment, the collision member 420 has a curved shape in which the left-right center portion of the collision member 420 protrudes upward, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be shaped like a slope that descends in the left-right direction with a sharp central portion, or it may be shaped like a hipped roof. In this case, compared to a curved shape, it is possible to make it more difficult for the granular member 320 to pass through the central sharp point in the left-right direction. Therefore, the left-right arrangement bias of the granular members 320 can be increased.

Further, for example, a planar shape orthogonal to the displacement direction may be used, or a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward may be used. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to configure a displacement mode in which the granular members 320 are displaced as a lump until they collide with the inner wall of the partitioning member 310, and are separated by the collision.

When changing the shape of the collision member 420, it is preferable to change the shape of the lid member 480 accordingly. For example, when the upper surface of the collision member 420 is configured to have a curved shape in which the central portion of the left and right sides are concave downward, the retractable portion 481 of the cover member 480 preferably has a curved shape in which the central portion of the left and right portions is convex upward. Therefore, collision between the granular member 320 and the lid member 480 can be easily avoided.

In the first embodiment, the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 has a flat shape when viewed from the side, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the lower half may protrude and be bent when viewed from the side. In this case, the dense position of the granular members 320 can be shifted to the upper half side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the size of the partitioning member 310 in front view is approximately the same as the size of the light guide plate 161 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the size of the partitioning member 310 when viewed from the front is designed to be about the size of, or larger than, the visual recognition area in which the player can visually recognize the display in the display area of the third pattern display device 81. You can do it. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation where the edges of the partitioning member 310 are superimposed on the display of the third pattern display device 81 and visually recognized, so that the visibility of the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be improved. can.

In the above-described first embodiment, the single collision member 420 is used as the member that applies the load to the granular member 320, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 arranged to apply a load to the granular member 320 may be employed and may be operated in concert or individually by separate driving devices.

In the above-described first embodiment, the linear motion member 410 is in contact with the collision member 420 and the front transmission member 440 is not in contact with the collision member 420, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a pillar portion projecting from the plate portion 422 to the rear side may pass through the intermediate member 401 and may contact the front transmission member 440 . In this case, the abutting portion of the front transmission member 440 with the pillar is unevenly formed in such a manner that the length in the radial direction changes according to the angular arrangement. can be changed. By utilizing this, the collision member 420 may be slightly displaced up and down to cause the granular member 320 to vibrate (slightly displace).

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the cover member 480 enters the partition member 310 by rotational displacement has been described, but the displacement mode of the cover member 480 is not limited in any way, and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be entered by sliding displacement along a straight line. In this case, the shape of the deformed through portion 315 can be easily formed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the extension plate portions 485 arranged on the left and right sides of the lid member 480 are formed in a shape recessed toward the back side has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the granular members 320 from flowing into the collision member 420 from the left and right.

In the above-described first embodiment, the granular member 320 is separated and stored under the cover member 480 in the waiting state of the injection device 400, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a protruding portion may be formed from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side, and the protruding portion may contact the granular member 320 . In this case, when the granular members 320 are locally deposited, the accumulation of the granular members 320 can be broken as the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side by pushing the granular members 320 with the projecting portion. . Thereby, uniformity of the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be achieved.

The shape of the projecting portion of the lid member 480 is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured such that a plurality of protrusions are scattered. In this case, regardless of the position where the particulate members 320 are deposited, the protrusions can be brought into contact with the deposited particulate members 320, and the deposition of the particulate members 320 can be broken.

Alternatively, the projections may be configured as a pair of protrusions that are arranged so as to incline left and right outward toward the retraction side tip portion of the advancing/retracting portion 481 from the left-right central portion of the leading end portion of the projecting portion 482 as a starting point. . In this case, as the cover member 480 is displaced on the approach side, a load can be applied to the granular member 320 in a direction that pushes the granular member 320 outward in the left and right directions.

Also, the direction of the protrusions is not limited to this. For example, the inclination may be reversed, the ridge may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of a pair of inclination directions, or a combination of ridges with different degrees of inclination may be used. A ridge (a ridge extending on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis or a ridge extending on a plane parallel to (or overlapping) the rotation axis) may be used. Also, the number of protrusions is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.

In addition, the projecting length of the projecting portion is not limited at all. For example, the projecting tip may project until it reaches a circle having the same diameter and coaxial with the rotating shaft of the lid member 480, or the projecting length of the lid member 480 from the advancing/retracting portion 481 may be constant. Also good. In the latter case, the surface connecting the projecting tips of the projecting portions has a shape along the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing/retreating portion 481, so that the same effect as the above-described effect obtained from the shape of the lid member 480 can be obtained from the projecting portion. It can be played by the department.

When the protrusion is formed on the lid member 480, the action timing of the protrusion is not limited to when the granular member 320 stops and the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is accommodated under the lid member 480, the drive motor MT1 is rotated in small increments in the forward and reverse directions when the front side transmission member 440 rotates 66 degrees in the forward rotation direction with reference to the effect standby state. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be vertically displaced in small steps, and the granular member 320 on the collision member 420 can be displaced in small increments. can be vertically displaced.

Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420 , the vertical displacement of the collision member 420 causes the granular member 320 to bounce up and collide with the projecting portion of the lid member 480 . Due to this collision, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be changed, and the stacking of the granular members 320 can be collapsed.

Further, when the collision member 420 flips up the granular member 320 (when displaced upward), the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side, so that the load is easily applied to the granular member 320 via the projecting portion. be able to.

The execution of the forward and reverse rotation of the driving motor MT1 in small increments may be controlled so that the driving force is reversed in the forward and reverse directions, or may be rotated in the forward direction at short time intervals. In this case, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 displaces the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 in the reverse rotation direction via the linear motion member 410, thereby causing the drive motor MT1 to rotate in the reverse direction.

In the above-described first embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane across the left and right. Although the case where the interval between 480 and curved plate portion 312 changes has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the lid member 480 is not flat but has an uneven (wavy shape) shape, and the relative relationship between the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312 causes the lid member to It may be configured such that the interval between 480 and the curved plate portion 312 is changed. Alternatively, the entrance-side end of the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 may be formed parallel to the axis of the rotation shaft O1.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the contact area between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is secured by changing the inclination angles of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489 has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, a roller member whose posture can be changed may be provided on the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be secured by changing the posture of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

In the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and the plurality of members (the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430, the transmission arm In the situation in which the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, the displacement timing is devised so that all the members are not displaced at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, there may be a timing for displacing all of the plurality of members by the driving force of the drive motor MT1. In this case, the size of the drive motor MT1 to be employed should be slightly increased.

In the above-described first embodiment, the front transmission member 440 contacts the linear motion member 410 to transmit the driving force, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when at least part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material and the projection 414 of the direct-acting member 410 is made of a magnetic material, and a repulsive force is generated therebetween, the front side A load can be transmitted to the direct-acting member 410 when the transmission member 440 and the direct-acting member 410 are not in contact with each other.

For example, the half of the transmission projection 446 in the circumferential direction facing the projection 414 of the direct-acting member 410 is provided with a magnetic material having a magnetic pole that generates an attractive force between itself and the projection 414 . On the other hand, on the opposite half of the circumference, a magnetic material having a magnetic pole that generates a repulsive force with respect to the protrusion 414 is disposed, so that the repulsive force moves the direct-acting member 410 to the lower end position. Since it can be configured to be generated on the side to be maintained at , the load at the start of contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 can be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted at two positions, the grooved portion 442 formed on the front surface of the front transmission member 440 and the grooved portion 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear transmission member 460. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a groove may be formed in the circumferential surface of at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and driving force may be transmitted through this groove to increase the number of driving force transmission targets.

In the first embodiment described above, there is a possibility that it may become unclear whether or not it is time to reversely rotate the front transmission member 440 based on detection by the detection sensor SC4, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor that detects the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is provided, and the detection result of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 determines whether the front side transmission member 440 reversely rotates. You may judge whether it is possible or not. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the firing state has been passed by driving in the forward rotation direction. It can be determined that it is possible.

Although the case where the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by displacement other than rotation (for example, direct sliding).

In the above-described first embodiment, by making the shape of the extension claw portion 734 of the effect member 700 different between the upper and lower sides, problems related to the displacement of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 toward the collective arrangement state can be prevented. Although the case where it is configured has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, by varying the shape of the extension claw portion 734, the start timing of the radial expansion displacement can be adjusted to the upper expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 compared to the lower expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. As a result, the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 on the lower side are balanced with the acceleration of the start of displacement due to their own weight. You can make it look like the displacement is starting.

In the above-described first embodiment, by bringing the rotating plate 730 into contact with the telescopic displacement member 740, a load is generated in the radial direction of a circle about the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730. However, this does not necessarily apply to this case. It is not limited. For example, a spring member that applies a biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740 may be disposed to apply the biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740, or a magnet may be disposed to apply a magnetic force to the telescopic displacement member 740. good.

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotating plate 730 is used both as means for transmitting the load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and as means for displacing the telescopic displacement member 740, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, means for applying a load to the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and means for displacing the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 may be provided separately.

In the first embodiment, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced toward the collective arrangement state, the first guided protrusion 743b receives the load first, and the first guided protrusion 743b receives the load radially outward from the first guided protrusion 743b. Although the case where the arranged second guided protrusion 744b receives a load later has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730 may be configured so that the order is reversed, and load transmission to the first guided projection 743b and the second guided projection 744b occur simultaneously. It may be configured as follows.

In the first embodiment described above, the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 has two protrusions, the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one protrusion may be configured to protrude obliquely with respect to the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 730 . In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 , the function of generating a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760 can be generated in one protrusion.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the outer side of the circumference is configured to assist the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 toward the collective arrangement state, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, a protruding portion is formed on the outer circumference of the rotating plate 730, and the protruding portion can push the first guided projection 743b radially outward. It can assist with directed displacement.

In the above-described first embodiment, the lower arm member 630 suppresses the change in posture of the effect member 700 at the lower end position of the displacement, and the degree of change in the posture of the effect member 700 permitted at the upper and lower intermediate positions is reduced. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the degree of allowable change in the posture of the effect member 700 increases toward the displacement lower end position.

Also, although the degree of posture change is configured by increasing or decreasing the position where the force acting on the effect member 700 is generated, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured by increasing or decreasing the area where the acting force is generated.

That is, the contact area between the arc-shaped hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 may be configured to be variable. For example, the thickness (hole depth) of the arcuate hole 634 can be changed by changing the thickness of the tip of the lower arm member 630 for each part, so that the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 can be changed. contact area can be changed.

The degree of posture change of the effect member 700 is not specified only by the connecting position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 . For example, the front surface of the body member 601 facing the pressing member PC1 of the lower arm member 630 or the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 may be provided with unevenness to change the distance from the pressing member PC1. good. In this case, in the process of displacing the lower arm member 630, it is easy to allow the attitude change of the effect member 700 in the front surface of the main body member 601 and in the portion where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is wide. This makes it easier to suppress posture changes in portions where the distance is narrow. Alternatively, the interval may be gradually narrowed as the effect member 700 approaches the end of the descent.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is configured so as not to change, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, a resistance increasing/decreasing device capable of increasing/decreasing the displacement resistance of the relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be arranged. The resistance increasing/decreasing device may be a brake device capable of increasing/decreasing frictional resistance, a device increasing/decreasing displacement resistance by magnetic force, or a device projecting to a position where the displacement of the lower arm member 630 can be mechanically regulated. . In the case of a device using magnetic force, it can be easily configured by arranging a magnetic material in a portion (for example, an auxiliary arm portion in which an arc-shaped hole 634 is formed) that is arranged close to the tip side portion of the lower arm member 630 . be able to.

In the above-described first embodiment, the effect member 700 is permitted to undergo a large displacement as a displacement in the expansion direction as the arrangement position moves downward. Although the case in which displacement occurs has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the effect member 700 may be controlled to be displaced in the expanding direction while being displaced in the vertical direction. In this case, by displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in the direction of contracting the effect member 700 (displaced radially inward) while the effect member 700 is displaced downward, the lower arm member 630 moves left and right. It is possible to cancel the influence of the change from the extremely long posture to the vertically long posture, and suppress the change in the posture of the production member 700 in the forward tilting direction.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the effect member 700 is vertically displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided in the central portion of the center frame 86, and the effect members 700 project to the front side of the center frame 86 in a collectively arranged state, and change the state to a discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86, thereby opening. It may be configured to change to a larger state than .

In this case, in order to avoid collision between the glass unit 16 and the effect member 700, it is preferable to form an opening in the front side portion of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second layer of glass unit covering the front side of the glass unit 16 separately from the glass unit 16 covering the front surface of the game area. In addition, from the viewpoint of maintaining the size of the upper tray 17, the glass unit of the second layer is inclined from the same front-rear position as the lower end of the glass unit 16 toward the front as it goes upward. preferred from

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the shielding design member 760 and the tip adjustment member 744 tend to tilt due to the positional relationship of the second elongated member 743 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an urging means such as a spring that generates an urging force is provided between the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744, and the orientation of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is adjusted by the urging force. It may be configured to change. In this case, since the attitude inclination of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be intentionally formed, the effect of the attitude inclination of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily exhibited.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a cable tube may be wound around the electrical wiring DK1. In particular, by winding the cable tube around the portion arranged above the base-end through-hole 635a, it is possible to prevent the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 from rubbing against the electrical wiring DK1.

In the first embodiment described above, in the displacing/rotating unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide recess 886, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a driving device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By controlling the operation of the driving device based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be appropriately changed.

In the above-described first embodiment, the electric wiring DK2 is tentatively fastened by being sandwiched between the narrowed portions 871a of the wiring arm members 870, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the electrical wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 with a fixture such as a binding band, or the displacement direction of the electrical wiring DK2 may be restricted.

Moreover, the fastening position of the electrical wiring DK2 can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the electrical wiring DK2 arranged through the connection position between the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a fastening position (for example, a narrowed portion 871a) may be provided on the wiring arm member 870 side of the connection position. , the fastening position may be provided on the vertical slide member 820 side of the connecting position.

Further, the means for fastening the electrical wiring DK2 is not limited to use for the electrical wiring DK2. For example, it may be used to fasten the electric wiring DK1 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. FIG. That is, by narrowing the width of a portion of the placement portion 635 in which the electrical wiring DK1 is arranged, the electrical wiring DK1 may be sandwiched to limit the displacement. Alternatively, the electrical wiring DK1 may be temporarily fixed with a fastener such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the placement portion 635 as the wiring path of the electrical wiring DK1.

In this case, the target to which the electrical wiring DK1 is temporarily fastened may be the lower arm member 630 including the arrangement portion 635, or the effect member 700 arranged on the tip side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. However, the body member 601 or the front cover member 610 disposed on the base end side (other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the rear case 510 to which the body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

In the first embodiment, in the displacement/rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in the direction (front-rear direction) toward and away from the up-down, left-right plane in association with the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 on the up-down, left-right, plane. Although the case where it does is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the lateral slide member 840 is displaced on the front, rear, left, and right plane, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the vertical direction. It is good also as the direction which inclines and is displaced.

Although the relationship between the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b in the displacement/rotation unit 800 has been described in the first embodiment, the relationship is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may be configured to have the same diameter.

In the first embodiment described above, in the displacement/rotation unit 800, the electric wiring DK2 is spirally displaced at the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of arm members whose posture can be changed along with the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b, and electrical wiring is passed through the plurality of arm members. Thus, the arrangement of the electrical wiring may be changed by changing the posture of the arm member.

In the above-described first embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced in the displacing/rotating unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be arranged apart from each other.

In this case, by disposing a driving device such as a solenoid for displacing the wiring arm member 870, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Therefore, for example, by further separating the wiring arm member 870 from the vertical slide member 820 during rotational displacement of the feather-shaped member 854, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced if necessary even while the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. It can be driven and controlled as follows.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 changes its state to the extended state or enlarged state while the displacing/rotating unit 800 is in the effect waiting state. do not have. For example, when the vane-shaped member 854 of the displacing/rotating unit 800, which has the same position in the longitudinal direction with respect to the effect member 700, is arranged in the gap between the shielding design members 760 of the effect member 700 in the discrete state, the effect member 700 can be changed to the expanded state.

In this case, collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be avoided, and it is possible to avoid predicting a state change of the effect member 700 from the arrangement of the displacement/rotation unit 800 . In this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical arrangement of the vane member 854 of the displacement/rotation unit 800 .

In the first embodiment described above, the intermediate flow path LM1 has the same shape as the guide path DL1, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a flow path that bends with a longer lateral width than the guide path DL1, may bend in the front-rear direction, or may be formed as a flow path that extends vertically without bending. .

In the above-described first embodiment, the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured as a path through which the ball that enters the second winning hole 640 flows down, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be used as a path for a ball entering the general winning opening 63, may be used as a path for a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, or may be used in combination. good. Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be configured as a sphere path passing through the out port 71 .

Further, since the winning openings 63, 64, 640, 65 are set at arbitrary positions within the game area, the middle flow path LM1 can also be set arbitrarily. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be arranged on the left side of the game area.

Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 is not limited to being arranged on the back side of the game area. For example, they may be arranged side by side on the left and right of the game area, or may be arranged on the front side of the game area (inside the glass unit 16, etc.). Also in this case, it is preferable that the intermediate flow path LM1 has a section that flows down along the path in the front view of the ball that flows down the game area.

Further, for the purpose of bringing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 into the field of view of the player, it is sufficient that the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be closer to the left-right center side of the game area. Therefore, a route that does not reach the inside of the center frame 86 when viewed from the front may be used.

In the above-described first embodiment, a description has been given of the case where the electrical boards of the horizontal board unit 166 are arranged in a posture in which the thickness direction coincides with the vertical direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, like the hemispherical lighting device 613, the illumination board may be arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

Also, the entire range of the electrical board is not limited to that covered by the first decorative member 171 . For example, a part of the electrical board may not be shielded, and the light emitted from the light emitting means such as an LED may be directly visible.

In the above-described third embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement start timing of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is changed by changing the shape of the guide hole 733, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the shape of the guide hole 733 in a stepped shape, it may be configured such that a section in which the elastic displacement member 740 is displaced and a section in which it stops alternately occur.

Further, by fixing the stepped guide holes 733 to some of the guide holes 733, the shielding design member 760 can be displaced so as to approach or abut on different displacement trajectories or different displacement timings.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 arranged on the left and right sides of the firing effect unit 6300 are provided with a plurality of decorative substrates has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, the horizontally placed board unit 166 and the vertically placed board unit 167 of the light guide plate rendering means 160 may employ a configuration of a plurality of decorative boards. In addition, the portion corresponding to the oblong groove portion 171a of the decoration means 170 (the left and right long portion) is configured so as to have good light transmission, and the oblong groove portion 171a is adopted as an intersection position of a plurality of electrical decoration substrates. By arranging a light emitting means such as an LED, it may be configured such that light can be visually recognized through the oblong groove portion 171a.

In addition, from the viewpoint of increasing the irradiation direction of light, it is not limited to the case of using a plurality of rigid electrical boards. For example, a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board) may be provided with light emitting means such as an LED. In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions by winding the flexible substrate or fixing it at parts. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the surface of the flexible substrate can be directed in various directions, and the number of light irradiation directions can be increased. Also, in this case, it can be configured with a single substrate.

In each of the above-described embodiments, regardless of whether the number of configurations is singular or plural, the configuration may be omitted (if there are multiple configurations, the number of configurations may be reduced). Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the key device A130 has two protrusions A133b, but the number of protrusions A133b may be reduced to one. Similarly, in each of the above embodiments, the case where one key device A130 is arranged in the main control device A110 has been described, but the number of such key devices A130 (the number of arrangement) may be increased to two or more. .

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the arrangement position of each configuration with respect to other configurations, the arrangement direction (orientation, posture, phase) of each configuration with respect to other configurations, or the arrangement based on the other configuration of each configuration You can change the order of The order of arrangement may be changed for all configurations, or only some configurations may be exchanged. That is, the arrangement position, arrangement direction, and order of arrangement of each component are arbitrary.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (key device A130) is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the center in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall A210 (second region). However, the opening A260 (key device A130) may be arranged in the longitudinal center of the operation wall A210 (second area). It may be arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the side of the third connecting wall portion A240).

Further, for example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the key device A130 (coating portion A270) connects the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusion A271b) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L , R direction), but the direction connecting the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusions A271b) is the operation wall A210 ( The arrangement direction (posture, phase) parallel to the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L, R) of the second region), and the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L, R) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) and a predetermined The key device A130 (coating part A270) may be arranged in an arrangement direction (posture, phase) having an angle of (larger than 0° and smaller than 90°).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (coating portion A270), the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening AOP1 are arranged in order from the side closer to the first connecting wall portion A220. For example, the order of arranging the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (the covering portion A270) in order from the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 is opposite to the order of arrangement in each of the above embodiments. ), and the order of arrangement of only a part may be changed (for example, the order of arrangement in which the opening AOP1 is positioned between the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) is exemplified. is done).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 protrudes from the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height position as the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is provided. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

In the above embodiments, the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall A210, and the opening A260 is formed in the covering portion A270 (end wall portion A272). may be formed at the site of That is, it does not need to be formed on the lowered portion of the outer surface of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100. Other parts include, for example, the parts forming the outer surfaces of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100 and A4100, that is, the front wall A201, upper wall A202, lower wall A203 and left wall of the box covers A200 and A3200. Examples include A204 or right wall A205, back wall A301, upper wall A302, lower wall A303, left wall A304 or right wall A305 of box base A300. Moreover, similarly, as another part, the 1st connection wall part A220, the 2nd connection wall part A230, or the 3rd connection wall part A240 is illustrated, for example.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 protrudes from the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height position as the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is provided. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

In this case, the switch device A120 may extend the length dimension of the operation portion A122 to a position protruding from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. In addition, it is preferable to provide the guide wall A251 also on the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 along with the extension of the length dimension of the operation portion A122.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a recess is formed in the outer surface (front face) of the box covers A200 and A3200, and the portion forming the recessed bottom surface of the recess is the operation wall A210 (that is, the front wall A201 (when the operation wall A210 is positioned at the lower position (on the side of the main controller A110)), but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer surface (for example, the front) of the box covers A200 and A3200 A projecting portion may be formed, and the portion forming the projecting tip surface of the projecting portion may be used as the operation wall portion A210 (that is, the operation is performed at a position one step higher than the front wall portion A201 (on the side opposite to the main controller A110). position the wall A210).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the main controller 100 is housed in the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and at least the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 Any item can be stored as long as the manipulator can be operated through the opening. For example, it may be one that does not have an electrical configuration. For example, such a storage item has a connecting portion connected to an open/close lid that opens and closes a discharge port for discharging balls from the ball flow path, and the open/close lid is operated by operating the connecting portion as an operator. A member (structure, device) that opens and closes is exemplified.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation means (the switch device A120, the key device A130) has been described as a case where a push button switch or a key-operated selector switch is employed. You may adopt the operation means of. Other types of operating means include, for example, tactile switches, rocker switches, dip switches, thumb rotary switches, toggle switches, and the like.

In each of the above embodiments, the operating mode of the operator (operation unit A122, key A140) is described as pushing and rotating. Any operation mode may be employed as long as it is arranged so as to be operable through the openings (the openings A250 and A260 in each of the above-described embodiments). Other modes of operation include pull-out, slide, seesaw displacement (for example, a mode in which the operation button is displaced like a seesaw by alternately pressing both ends like the operation button of a rocker switch), tilting (for example, toggle A mode in which the operation lever is displaced so as to fall to one side with the base end side as a fulcrum, like an operation lever of a switch, is exemplified.

In this case, the sliding direction of the manipulator, the direction connecting both ends of the seesaw-displaced manipulator, and the tilting direction of the tilting manipulator are in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). It is preferable to dispose the operating means in a parallel posture. This is because the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second area) can be effectively used to improve the operability of the operation means.

In any of the operation modes described above, the front view shape of the openings A250 and A260 is assumed to be a shape formed only in a region corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the manipulator (a region necessary for allowing displacement). Also good.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case where a predetermined gap is formed between the surface and end surface of the key A140 gripped by fingers and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b) has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. In a state where no external force is applied to the key A140 or the key device A130, at least one of the surface or the end surface of the key A140 gripped by fingers and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (annular The outer edge of the portion A272a or the rectangular portion A272b may be in contact. That is, at least one of the finger gripped surface and the end surface of the key A140 in the OFF position or ON position is brought into contact with the end wall portions A272, A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a or the square portion A272b), and the key A140 is operated. When (rotated), the end surface of the key A140 may slide against the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a).

The gap between the surface and end surface of the key A140 gripped by fingers and the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b), and the gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the covering portion A270. The gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the erected wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is such that the inclination of the key device A130 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 is a specified angle (an angle that allows the inclination of the key device A130 That is, it is set to a value at which at least one of the gaps disappears (the key A140 or the key device A130 abuts) before reaching the angle at which the leg A131 is unlikely to come off, be damaged, or the solder peels off. . The specified angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, and even more preferably 5 degrees or less. In this embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two locations in the circumferential direction. , A133b may be formed at only one position, or at three or more positions. Moreover, when forming in two or more places, those circumferential directions positions (phase) are arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as in each of the above embodiments, or may be formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed intermittently in the circumferential direction. , A133b may be formed continuously in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the projection A271b of the covering portion A270 and the projection A133b of the key device A130 project radially outward, and the projection A133b of the device A130 is arranged in the space formed by the projection A271b. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which a concave recess is provided, and the projection of the covering portion A270 is arranged in the internal space of the recess of the key device A130. In this case, if the recess is continued to the end surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) of the base A133a (the projection It is only necessary to form an opening in the end face for inserting the part into the recess).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. may be concatenated.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where two protrusions (the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212) are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but the number of protrusions formed is not necessarily limited to this. , may be one, or three or more. When forming a plurality of wires, the connection position between one end thereof and the covering portion A270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect other protrusions at positions that are substantially 180 degrees out of phase with the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. This is because the load input from the key A140 in the off position/on position to the covering portion A270 can be efficiently received.

In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212, the other protrusions, the height dimension of the cross-sectional shape (the standing dimension from the front surface of the operation wall A210 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) ) and the width dimension (the dimension in the direction perpendicular to the height direction of the vanishing cross section) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the shape of the end surface include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, and a combination of these shapes. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and either one may have a larger value.

In each of the above embodiments, the height dimension of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (standing dimension from the front of the operation wall portion A210 (surface on the arrow F direction side)) is along the extension direction Although a case has been described in which the width is constant along the extending direction, the width is not necessarily limited to this, and may be varied along the extending direction.

It should be noted that the height dimension may be configured to gradually decrease as the distance from the one end connected to the covering portion A270 increases. In this case, the rigidity of the covering portion A270 can be efficiently increased while reducing the material cost.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the rotation angle (phase difference between the ON position and the OFF position) of the key A140 is set to 90° has been described. phase difference). That is, the rotation angle of the key A140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90° or may be set to an angle larger than 90°.

In this case, the shape of the opening A260 (the shape of the edge of the end wall portion A272) corresponds to the displacement trajectory of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is preferably formed only in (regions necessary to allow displacement). That is, when the rotation angle of the key A140 is θ, the opening A260 is a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, A second fan-shaped opening having a center angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of the portion on the other side (the side opposite to the one side) of the rotation center of the key A140 is coupled with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees. It is formed into a shape.

In each of the above embodiments, the key A140 has a radius of rotation (distance from the center of rotation to the end face (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by fingers)) on one side of the center of rotation, and Although the description has been given of the case where the radius of rotation of the other side is different, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The distance to the narrow surface) along the outer edge of the surface) may be substantially the same. That is, the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening of the opening A260 may have substantially the same size (radius).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the front view shape of the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a substantially horizontally elongated rectangle (rectangular shape) has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and other front view shapes may be used. good. Other shapes in front view include, for example, a substantially square shape, a substantially circular shape, a substantially elliptical shape, a substantially triangular shape, a substantially polygonal shape with five or more sides, and a shape combining these shapes.

In each of the above embodiments, the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (box covers A200, A3200). It is not limited and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, they may be substantially orthogonal (that is, the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 may be along the directions of arrows U and D).

In each of the above embodiments, part of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 (three sides in each of the above embodiments) is connected to the connection walls (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230 and the third connection wall). A240) and the remaining portion of the outer edge (one side in each of the above embodiments) is not surrounded (opened), but this is not necessarily the case. The entire outer edge of the operation wall A210 may be surrounded by the connection wall.

That is, in the front view of the box covers A200 and A3200, in each of the above-described embodiments, the operation wall A210 is positioned at a position where a part of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 coincides with a part of the outer edge of the box covers A200 and A3200. is arranged (formed), the operation wall A210 may be arranged (formed) at a position where the outer edges of the operation wall A210 do not match the outer edges of the box covers A200 and A3200.

In each of the above embodiments, the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (the covering portion A270) are arranged substantially in series (substantially in one row). Other arrangements may be used. Examples of other arrangements include a staggered arrangement, an arrangement distributed to positions having no regularity, and a grid arrangement (arrangement at intersections of a plurality of mutually orthogonal straight lines). When they are arranged substantially in series (substantially in one row), the direction of the series may be non-parallel to the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (box covers A200 and A3200), or may be substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. can be

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front surfaces of the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (surfaces in the direction of the arrow F) are formed as flat surfaces has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the end wall portions A272 and A2272 One or a plurality of protrusions or ribs may be erected from the front surface of (the surface on the arrow F direction side).

In this case, the ridge (rib) (for example, a portion formed by extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular or substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape) is, when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B), the end wall It is preferable to extend radially outward from the center of the portions A272 and A2272 (the axis of the peripheral wall portion A271). Moreover, it is preferable that a plurality of such ridges (ribs) are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. As a result, when the key A140 is pulled out, the key A140 engages with the edges of the end wall portions A272 and A2272, and even if the end wall portions A272 and A2272 are lifted in the direction in which the key A140 is pulled out (direction of arrow F), This is because damage to the end wall portions A272 and A2272 can be suppressed by utilizing the rigidity of the ridges (ribs).

Alternatively, the ridges (ribs) may be formed in an annular shape continuous in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front. A plurality of such protrusions (ribs) may be arranged with different diameters (that is, at predetermined intervals in the radial direction). In addition, it may be intermittent (non-continuous) in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the height position of the upright end face of the upright wall A209 is set back from the height position of the upright end face of the upright walls A208, A280, and A290 (that is, from the printed circuit board A119). However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the other standing walls A208, A280, A290 may be retreated.

Further, the amount of retreat of each standing wall A208, A209, A280 and A290 from the reference plane may be different from the amount of retreat from the reference plane of the other standing walls A208, A209, A280 and A290. Furthermore, in one standing wall A208, A209, A280, A290, the retreat amount may be changed.

In this case, it is preferable that the farther the erected wall is from the fastening hole A206a, the smaller the receding amount of the erected tip surface from the reference plane. In the printed circuit board A119, the area farther from the fastening hole A206a is less regulated by the screw ASC than the area closer to the fastening hole A206a. It becomes easy to deform (displace) in the direction to move toward the front of the printed circuit board A119, and the degree of adhesion to the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 is weakened. This is because it is possible to easily ensure close contact between the upright end surface of the upright wall and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 in all the upright walls.

For example, in the present embodiment, assuming that the standing tip surface of the standing wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is the reference plane, the fastening hole A206a ( Since the distance from the erected wall A209) increases, the amount of retreat from the above-described reference plane is decreased in this order according to the distance from the fastening hole A206a (that is, the erected tip surface of the erected wall A208 is preferably minimized from the reference plane).

Further, each standing wall A208, A209, A280, and A290 may be changed so that the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above decreases as the distance from the fastening hole A206a increases. That is, the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may be inclined with respect to the front wall portions A201 of the box covers A200 and A3200, respectively.

In each of the above-described embodiments, in the setting change mode, the case where the set value is displayed on at least one of the third pattern display device 81 or the 7-segment display has been described, but this is not necessarily the case, and instead Alternatively, or in addition, it may be displayed on another display device. Other display devices include, for example, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the like.

Moreover, the configuration may be such that the set value is not displayed on either the third pattern display device 81 or the 7-segment display.

In this case, when the setting change mode is activated, the set value is updated to a predetermined initial value (for example, the first value) regardless of the set value before activation, and the operation portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed. A configuration may be adopted in which the operator recognizes the set value based on the number of times. Unauthorized acquisition of setting values by unauthorized means (for example, means for photographing the display of the third pattern display device 81 with a hidden camera installed in the hall) can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the setting value when changing the setting during the game. In this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

Although not described in each of the above embodiments, a first detection sensor is provided to detect the relative position of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 (rotational position about the hinge 18). When the first detection sensor detects that the frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the setting change described above is permitted, and the inner frame 12 is opened by a predetermined angle or more with respect to the outer frame 11. If the opening (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, the setting change may be prohibited (for example, input from the switch device A120 or the key device A130 may be disabled). . This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes.

A second detection sensor is provided to detect the relative positions of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 (rotational positions about the rotation axis A410). , A2100, A3100, and A4100 are opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-described setting change is prohibited (for example, switch device A120 or key device input from A130 is invalidated) and opening (rotation) of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 by a predetermined angle or more is not detected by the second detection sensor, the setting change is performed. It may be configured to allow. This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes.

Both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one of them may be provided (the other may be omitted). When both are provided, the opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle or more is detected by the first detection sensor, and the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 are detected by the predetermined angle. The above-described setting change may be allowed when the second detection sensor does not detect the opening (rotation) beyond the angle. Examples of the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor include a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle and a limit switch whose mechanical detection portion is displaced when opened or closed.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) is connected to the main controller A110, the switch device A120 and the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110), but this is not necessarily the case. , and the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 to the main controller A110. That is, as long as at least the power supply device 115 is connected to the main controller A110 by an electrical connection line, regardless of the connection state of the other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected or disconnected) , connection and disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be permitted. In this case, the set value associated with the setting change cannot be confirmed on the third pattern display device 81, but can be confirmed on the 7-segment display of the main controller A110.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) is connected to the main controller A110, the switch device A120 and the case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, if a predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the main control device A110, the setting change is prohibited), but this is not necessarily the case. However, if a predetermined electrical connection line is not disconnected from the main controller A110, regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, even if it is connected, it is disconnected) (Even if connection and disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not permitted (that is, if a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110 setting change is prohibited). Also in this case, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the predetermined electrical connection line. According to this, since the power supply of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 from operating illegally and the game balls from being paid out.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the projecting ridges A2273 extend in a stripe shape has been described as the form of the portion protruding from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end wall portion A2272, but this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to For example, a plurality of protrusions may be arranged side by side at predetermined intervals between positions AP1 to AP6 including positions AP2 to AP5. Alternatively, the protrusion A2273 may be intermittently formed between positions AP1 to AP6 including positions AP2 to AP5.

The range in which the ridge A2273 or the plurality of protrusions are formed is not limited to the range from the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the positions AP2 to AP5, and the range may be reduced or expanded. . Such a range may be the entire outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the rectangular portion A272b.

In the ninth embodiment, the board box A3100 rotates around the rotation axis A410 to move to the second position (the position where the front of the operation wall A210 faces the front of the pachinko machine A3010, as shown in FIG. 122 ( Although the case where it is arranged in b) is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is of course possible to adopt other displacement forms.

As another form of displacement, for example, the substrate box is arranged so as to be slidable in the width direction (directions of arrows L and R) with respect to the inner frame 12, and is slidably displaced in the direction opposite to the hinge 18 (direction of arrow L). By doing so, the board box is arranged at the second position, the rotation axis A410 is formed as an axis along the front-rear direction (arrow F, B direction) of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12), and the rotation axis A mode in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position by being displaced (rotated) around A410 is exemplified.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A4410 is formed in each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 has been described. It may be formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. In this case, each of the box covers A200 and A3200 and the box base A300 is provided with a division of the rotation axis A4410. A4410 may be formed.

The seventh to ninth embodiments are the same, and the case where the rotation axis A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400 has been described. can be Further, as in the case described above, in a state where the box covers A200 and A3200 are connected to the box base A300, one rotary shaft A410 may be formed from divisions formed respectively.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 rubs against the upper extending portions B1312 and B1512 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an opening may be provided on the side of the covering member B1200, and the front side surfaces of the upper extending portions B1312 and B1512 may protrude forward to a dimension that allows entry into the opening. In this case, it is possible to stabilize the vertical positions of the downstream ends of the guide members B1310 and B1510 by engagement (fitting) instead of frictional resistance.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are partially assembled from the front side of the thin plate member B1110, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the shape of the penetrating portion B1120 is such that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 including the upwardly extending portions B1312 and B1512 can be inserted forward and backward, so that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be assembled on the back surface of the thin plate member B1110. can be completed on the side.

Also, the upper extending portions B1312 and B1512 may be configured to be disassembled from the guide members B1310 and B1510. As a result, the portions that require assembly from the front side of the thin plate member B1110 are limited to the upwardly extending portions B1312 and B1512, which are likely to be subjected to a collision load from the ball and are more likely to be damaged than other portions. can do. In this way, by assembling only the parts that are likely to be damaged from the front side, maintainability can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the opening order of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is alternated and the case where one of them is opened is explained, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, other variations may be prepared in which the ratio of the round sections to be opened alternately and the round section to which one side is continuously opened is changed.

For example, the 1st to 8th rounds may be alternately opened, and the 9th to 15th rounds may be opened only by the first guide plate B1300. In this case, an operation pattern having half of the characteristics of each operation pattern (the number of balls paid out, the round game time, the number of loose balls, etc.) can be used.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the protrusions B1140 and B1211 are equally spaced horizontally and the length of the protrusions is changed, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the projection length may be the same, but a section may be provided in which the arrangement interval is changed, or the projection length may be the same and the arrangement interval may be equal. The protrusions B1140 and B1211 may be designed according to the desired deceleration mode.

In the eleventh embodiment, the projections B1140 and B1211 are arranged at a height that does not come into contact with the ball rolling in the lower part of the pre-entering range, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the height may be such that it grazes the vicinity of the upper end of the sphere. In this case, the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 are made to function as protruding portions that have a large deceleration effect on the ball when tilted on one side (for example, when tilted toward the lower right), and when tilted on the other side (for example, when tilted toward the lower left). ), it can function as a protrusion that has a small decelerating effect on the ball.

The deceleration section is configured by the shape of the portion that abuts the game ball (addition of a protrusion projecting inward of the guide path or change in inclination of the guide path). In that respect, the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 are not limited to protruding in the front-rear direction. For example, the upper end portion of the extended support portion B1212 may protrude upward from the lower end positions of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521.

The preferable configuration of the deceleration section differs depending on the displacement mode of the member that guides the ball. For example, in the case of a member that is linearly displaceable, it is easy to add a projecting portion and change the inclination of the rolling surface. Further, for example, if the member is rotationally displaced so as to protrude from the width direction of the guide path, it is easy to add a protrusion, but the change in inclination reduces the degree of freedom in design due to the relationship with the rotation axis. Further, for example, in the case of a member that is rotationally displaced so as to protrude from the longitudinal direction of the guide path, the degree of freedom tends to be low because it is necessary to avoid the displacement trajectory of the displaced member when adding the protrusion. However, the degree of freedom in designing changes in inclination is high.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where a plurality of detection sensors are arranged in one variable prize winning device B1000 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, part of the configuration of the variable winning device B1000 may be used to configure a variable winning device that guides the ball to a single detection sensor.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, both guide plates B1300 and B1500 have a structure in which there is a gap in the middle, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a gap may be formed only on one side, and the other side may be composed of a single plate without forming a gap.

In the eleventh embodiment, both the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 have the connection fixing members B1330 and B1530 formed in a block shape, and a space is provided between the front and rear portions. However, this is not necessarily the case. Not. For example, by removing the portion overlapping the connecting fixing member B1330 in the front view from the connecting fixing member B1530 and configuring the connecting fixing member B1530 as an L-shaped member in the front view, the connecting fixing member B1530 can be replaced with the connecting fixing member B1330. It may be possible to arrange it directly above.

That is, in the standby state, the connecting fixing members B1330 and B1530 may be arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction. In this case, the front-to-rear width required for arranging the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be shortened.

In the eleventh embodiment, the extended support portion B1212 fills the gap between the guide members B1310, B1510 and the upstream members B1320, B1520. Formation of the extended support portion B1212 may be omitted. In this case, the gaps between the guide members B1310, B1510 and the upstream members B1320, B1520 become steps, and although the flow of the ball is slightly disturbed, the ball can be guided to the detection sensors B1230, B1250 without any problem. In addition, by omitting the formation of the extended support portion B1212 and utilizing the empty space, the ends of the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 are extended to narrow the gap. flow turbulence can be minimized.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, in the guide plates B1300 and B1500, the relative positions of the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 do not change, and only forward and backward movement occurs, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, the upstream members B1320 and B1520 may be connected to the connection fixing members B1330 and B1530 so as to be displaceable in the left-right direction. In this case, the upstream members B1320 and B1520 can be configured to be displaced so as to approach the guide members B1310 and B1510 according to the longitudinal displacement of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. As a result, even though the guide plates B1300 and B1500 intersect when viewed from the front, the gap generated at the intersecting position can be closed by laterally displacing the upstream members B1320 and B1520, so the formation of the extended support portion B1212 is omitted. be able to.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched from the open state to the closed state, the upwardly extending portions B1312 and B1512 are arranged upstream of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 to prevent the ball from entering. Cut off. In this case, the upper extending portions B1312 and B1512 are configured to be displaced from the front side to the back side of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. Therefore, since the direction of the load applied to the sphere from the upwardly extending portions B1312 and B1512 is toward the rear side, the sphere to which the load is applied from the upwardly extending portions B1312 and B1512 that are being displaced first moves toward the thin plate of the base member B1100. The ball collides with the member B1110, and the ball whose momentum is reduced by the bounce collides with the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 that constitutes the design surface.

Therefore, the load applied to the main body member B1210 can be reduced, and problems such as cracking of the design surface can be easily avoided, but the displacement of the upwardly extending portions B1312 and B1512 is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, when the upwardly extending portions B1312 and B1512 block entry of a ball, they may be configured to be displaced from the back side to the front side. In this case, when the inner edges of the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 are configured to be flush with the plate surface of the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100, the ball can be blocked early.

It should be noted that the manner in which the member blocking the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 is displaced from the back side to the front side is not limited at all. For example, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 may be configured to be displaced to the front side when switching to the closed state, or the upward extending portions B1312 and B1512 may be configured separately from the guide plates B1300 and B1500. However, the upper extending portions B1312 and B1512 may be configured to be displaced to the front side as the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced to the back side when switching to the closed state.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the extended support portion B1212 and the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521 are flush with each other has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the lower ends of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521 may be positioned lower than the upper end of the extended support portion B1212. In this case, the upper end portion of the extended support portion B1212 forms a step (step) with respect to the ball rolling on the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521, and this step can reduce the falling velocity of the ball.

That is, the protrusions such as the protrusions B1140 and B1211 that decelerate the flow velocity of the ball by contact with the ball are not limited to those projecting from the front-rear direction of the flow-down path. It may be configured to protrude upward from the lower surface. In addition, projecting parts B1140 and B1211 are described as an example of a mode projecting downward from the upper side of the flow-down path of the ball.

For example, the lower ends of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521 may be positioned higher than the upper end of the extended support portion B1212. In this case, the upstream members B1320 and B1520 form a step (step) with respect to the extended support portion B1212, and this step causes the balls to flow backward from the downstream side of the lower ends of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521. It is possible to prevent running on the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521. Therefore, the ball can be smoothly guided to the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002.

In this way, the extended support part B1212 is always arranged in the range before the ball enters the ball even when the first opening/closing plate B1300 and the second opening/closing plate B1500 are closed. Depending on the design of the arrangement with respect to the surfaces B1321 and B1521, it can be used as a means for slowing down the downflow of the spheres or as a means for preventing the backflow of the spheres.

In the twelfth embodiment, the rolling surface B2531 is configured to be horizontal with respect to the front-rear direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface B2531 may be inclined forward and backward. At this time, for example, by inclining downward toward the back side, the ball can be dropped smoothly when switching to the closed state, so that the opening/closing rod B2500 can be smoothly displaced.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the balls are sorted to the left and right by the sorting device B1800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mechanism for alternately distributing balls to the left and right may be provided on the upstream side of the variable prize winning device B1000, or may be configured such that the balls are distributed by a movable body that performs a constant operation when the power is turned on. Also, the sorting mechanism on the upstream side of the variable winning device B1000 may be omitted.

Moreover, although the example in which the ball can enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260 only when the solenoid is de-energized and the sorting device B1800 is raised has been described, the reverse is also possible. For example, the sorting device B1800 is configured to rise when any solenoid is energized. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from winning the ball guidance receiving portion B1260 during normal operation or during time saving.

The ball guide receiving portion B1260 may be arranged upstream of the sorting device B1800. Also, the ball guide receiving portion B1260 may be omitted. In this case, the time efficiency of progress of the special game state can be improved. In addition, it may be constructed so that the ball can enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260 in either direction of the sorting device B1800 in the downstream path. The distribution device B1800 is not limited to cutting 100% of the paths of the spheres. For example, the nail may have a similar function, such as 80% splitting.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the extended support portion B1212 is fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the extended support portion B1212 may be movable. In this case, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 may be configured to operate in conjunction with each other (for example, by being pushed).

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the pre-entering range is about the same as the game area is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured long in the front-rear direction (it may be configured with a length that is twice or more the diameter of the sphere). In this case, even if they cross each other when viewed from the front, they can be separated in the front and rear directions when viewed from the top. Therefore, it does not need to be placed directly above. In other words, by intersecting, even in a game area with a front-to-rear width of 19 mm, it is possible to lengthen both the left and right lengths of the guide flow paths to the ball entrances arranged on the left and right sides. On the other hand, if the front-rear width is such that two balls can be arranged in the front-rear direction, it is possible to arrange a plurality of specific winning holes with small vertical widths without crossing each other.

In the eleventh embodiment, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 both protrude from the back side to the front side. You can do it.

In the eleventh embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball aimed at the upper part of the pre-entering range is decelerated more than a ball aimed at the lower part of the pre-entering range, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, by omitting the formation of the protruding portion B1140, etc., the ball hit in the upper part of the pre-entering range (tilt upstream side) is accelerated, and the ball hit in the lower part of the pre-entering range (tilt downstream side) is accelerated. , may be configured to slow down due to reversal of the horizontal direction.

In the twelfth embodiment, the design is based on the assumption that the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing rod B2500 operate independently, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, since the displacement trajectory BE11 and the displacement trajectory BE12 partially overlap, when the interval between rounds is shortened in order to prevent a loose ball, the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing bar B2500 come into contact and operate in relation to each other. It may be designed in consideration of the possibility that there is a case where it is (interlocked).

For example, when the connecting portion B2530 is displaced toward the open state before the switching of the open/close plate B2300 from the open state to the closed state is completed, the connecting portion B2530 is engaged with the lower side portion of the plate portion B2310. This may cause malfunction of the opening/closing plate B2300.

On the other hand, the opening/closing plate B2300 is provided with a hemispherically protruding preceding collision portion that protrudes toward the opening/closing rod B2500 from the left/right central portion of the pivot tip side of the plate portion B2310. A hemispherical preceding collision portion projecting from the left-right central portion of B2530 toward the opening/closing plate B2300 may be formed, and these preceding collision portions may be arranged so as to collide with each other.

By configuring each preceding collision portion as a portion that approaches the mating member ahead of other constituent members, the preceding collision portions collide with each other before the connecting portion B2530 engages with the lower side portion of the plate portion B2310. be able to.

If the load due to the collision between the preceding collision parts is generated in the direction of displacing the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing rod B2500 toward the closed state, the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing rod B2500 is switched to the closed state. Even if the opening/closing rod B2500 or the opening/closing plate B2300 starts to be displaced toward the open state, the opening/closing rod B2500 or the opening/closing plate B2300 that is switched toward the open state does not apply a load to the opening/closing plate B2300 or B2500 that is displaced toward the closed state. By giving it, you can promote state switching.

As a result, the interval between rounds becomes too short, and before one of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing rod B2500 forms the closed state, the other member starts to be displaced toward the open state. Even if a collision occurs, the load due to the collision acts only to push one member toward the closed state, and malfunction of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing rod B2500 can be avoided.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of problems occurring when the inter-round interval is set short, and it is possible to facilitate the execution of control to set the inter-round interval short enough to avoid a falling ball. can. The shape and arrangement of the preceding collision portion can be arbitrarily set. For example, the spill prevention section B2524 may function as a preceding collision section.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the opening/closing plate B2300 is displaced toward the open state is upward displacement (raising displacement) about the upper side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the open state may be obtained by downward displacement (tilting displacement) about the lower side from the upright closed state, and the upper surface in the open state may be used as the falling surface (rolling surface) of the ball.

In this case, it is preferable to form a recess large enough to allow the ball to enter in the back side of the opening/closing plate in the closed state, and to dispose the detection sensor downstream of the recessed portion. When the opening/closing plate is switched to the closed state when the ball is on the upper side surface of the opening/closing plate in the open state, the ball on the opening/closing plate can be drawn into the recessed part without spilling.

In the twelfth embodiment, the opening/closing plate B2300 that is displaced to the front side when switching to the open state and the opening/closing bar B2500 that is displaced to the back side when switching to the open state are used to move the ball in the pre-entry range. Although the case where the flow mode can be switched has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the member displaced to the front side may be configured as a member having the same configuration as the opening/closing bar B2500.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the rolling surfaces B2311 of the opening/closing plate B2300 are formed in a planar shape with the same inclination has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the rolling surface may be formed in a mountain shape, and the inclination angle may change along the way. In this case, depending on the shape of the rolling surface, the degree of deceleration of the ball can be varied.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the right arm portion B2520 is formed in the same shape as the left arm portion B2510 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the shape of the right arm portion B2520 can be set arbitrarily. . For example, the right arm portion B2520 may be formed in the shape of a straight bar, or may be in a J-shape that curves in the opposite direction to the curve of the left arm portion B2510. In this case, in the closed state of the opening/closing rod B2500, the right arm portion B2520 can be separated from the downflow path of the ball rolling toward the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. This can reduce the possibility of hindering the flow of the ball flowing down along the rolling surface B2311 of the opening/closing plate B2300.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the flow path branches to the left and right with the center frame 86 as a boundary has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, on either the left or right side of the center frame 86 (for example, on the right side), a partition may be provided to divide the flow path of the balls. In this case, on either the left or right side of the center frame 86, a plurality of flow-down paths for the balls can be configured.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the first guide plate B3300 and the first rotating member B3700 are driven by the single first driving device B1400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a driving device for driving the first guide plate B3300 and a driving device for driving the first rotating member B3700 may be provided separately, and the displacement timings may be matched by control.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the guide plates B3300 and B3500 guide the ball in the upper part of the pre-entering range, and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 guide the ball in the lower part of the pre-entering range. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide plate and the rotating member are configured with a length that spans the left and right of the range before entering the ball, the guide plate guides the first detection sensor B1230 to the opening, and the guide plate guides the second detection sensor B1250 to the opening. It may be configured to be performed by a rotating member.

In this case, the rotating member may be configured to tilt further by switching to the closed state. In this case, switching to the open state causes the rotating member to move in the direction of displacement in which the balls are rescued, so that the number of loose balls can be reduced.

Also, the rotating members arranged on the left and right may be configured to have a length covering the left and right of the pre-entering range. In this case, in order to prevent a collision near the crossing position, it is configured to have a recessed portion that is recessed from the rotation distal end side toward the rotation proximal end side (for example, the width in the axial direction is increased). or in a comb-like shape with radially extending teeth), and the positional relationship is such that the non-recessed portion of one rotating member can enter the recessed portion of the other rotating member. It is preferable to design As a result, even if the left and right rotating members overlap each other in front view during displacement, collision between the members can be prevented.

In this case, the rotating member may be configured to tilt further by switching to the closed state. In this case, switching to the open state causes the rotating member to move in the direction of displacement in which the ball is rescued. The number of dead balls can be reduced.

Moreover, although the rolling surfaces B3721 and B3921 of the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are configured to be planar, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be composed of a plurality of flat surfaces with varying inclinations, or may be composed of curved surfaces. This makes it possible to complicate the flow-down mode of the balls rolling on the rolling surface.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the guide plates B3300 and B3500 are slid to the front side to form the open state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the open state may be configured by sliding the guide plates B3300 and B3500 toward the rear side.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane of the rolling surfaces B3721 and B3921 that form the lower part of the pre-entering range is greater than the inclination angle of the rolling surfaces B3321 and B3521 that form the upper part of the pre-entering range with respect to the horizontal plane. Although the case in which one is larger has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower part of the pre-entering range may have a smaller inclination angle. That is, the lower part of the pre-entering range may be configured so that the degree of deceleration is higher.

In this case, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which a plurality of balls are arranged on the rolling surfaces B3721 and B3921 in the lower part of the pre-ball entry range. It is possible to increase the number of balls pushed by the members B3700, B3900 and caught in the detection sensors B1230, B1250.

It should be noted that the change in the degree of deceleration does not necessarily have to be caused by the difference in the inclination of the rolling surface. For example, by arbitrarily setting the formation width, projection length, and formation interval (density) of projections projecting into the pre-ball-entering range, such as the projecting portion B1140, it is possible to provide a difference in the degree of deceleration. .

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the ball guide path is configured by the rotating members B3700, B3900 and the guide plates B3300, B3500 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the guide plates B3300 and B3500 that are slidably displaced, rotating members that are displaced in the same manner as the opening/closing plate B2300 may be configured to have the same horizontal width as the guide plates B3300 and B3500.

In this case, since the rotational directions of the rotating member as a substitute product and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are opposed to each other, the load can be offset when they come into contact with each other, so that they can be stopped early. Furthermore, since they are displaced so as to approach each other in the vertical direction, it is easy to fill the gap.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the guide plates B3300 and B3500 and the rotating members B3700 and B3900, both of which are displaceable, are displaced closer to each other to close the gap, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, a fixed member is interposed between the guide plates B3300, B3500 and the rotating members B3700, B3900 so that the guide plates B3300, B3500 and the rotating members B3700, B3900 do not come into direct contact with each other, and a gap is formed. You can block it.

Further, when both the guide plates B3300, B3500 and the rotating members B3700, B3900 are displaced and contact each other to close the gap, one is formed more flexibly than the other so that it bends when contacted. can be For example, the guide plates B3300 and B3500 may be configured to be harder than the rotating members B3700 and B3900. Thereby, the gap can be easily filled by the bending of the rotating members B3700 and B3900.

Further, for example, if the guide plates B3300 and B3500 are configured more flexibly than the rotating members B3700 and B3900, damage to the guide plates B3300 and B3500 can be avoided. The plates B3300 and B3500 can be made thin easily.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are arranged at a distance of about five balls, but the spacing between the rotating members B3700 and B3900 is arbitrary. For example, the rotating members B3700 and B3900 may be arranged separately at the left and right ends of the game area.

Also, a canopy may be formed above the rotating members B3700 and B3900 to prevent collision of the balls in the closed state.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the case where the rolling surface B2531 of the opening/closing rod B2500 is not tilted in the front-rear direction has been described, but it may be tilted in the front-rear direction. In particular, since deceleration of the ball rolling on the opening/closing rod B2500 is not intended, ease of contact with the projecting portion B1140 is not a problem. For example, by configuring the rolling surface B2531 to be inclined downward toward the front side, the ball can be rolled on a path away from the projecting portion B1140.

Using the configuration of the sixteenth embodiment, the guide port B4160 may be arranged below the crossing position of the guide route. In this case, since a sufficient space can be provided inside the vertical width of the guide route, the guide port B4160 can be easily arranged inside the vertical width of the guide route.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the opening/closing bar B2500 projecting toward the rear side is rotationally displaced, and the guide plate B4300 projecting toward the front side is slidably displaced, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the member protruding to the back side may be slidably displaced, and the member protruding to the front side may be configured to be rotationally displaced.

In the fourteenth embodiment described above, there is a possibility that the ball will not be sufficiently decelerated due to the configuration in which collision with the projecting portion B1140 is avoided when guided by the opening/closing rod B2500, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, the opening/closing bar B2500 may be bent at an intermediate position, and in the open state, the ball guide path may be bent (the vertical inclination of the guide path may be changed in the middle). This allows the deceleration of the sphere to occur due to the change in the tilt angle.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the ball flowing from the eaves B2271 is configured to pass through the ball guide receiving portion B4260, thereby changing the frequency of ball entry into the ball guide receiving portion B4260 on the left and right. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting portion B1140 may be added to an intermediate position of the projecting portion B1140, and the lower edge of the center frame 86 may be configured to protrude forward from the projecting tip of the added projecting portion B1140. .

In this case, the ball falling from the lower edge of the center frame 86 can be made difficult to abut on the protruding portion B1140, and can be configured not to hinder the ball from entering the ball guide receiving portion B4260. A ball that slides down from the opening/closing bar B2500 when switching to the state (a ball that is pulled toward the back side) can be brought into contact with the projecting portion B1140, and the trajectory of the ball can be deflected to the left and right of the ball guide receiving portion B4260. As a result, only the frequency of ball entry from the opening/closing rod B2500 to the ball guide receiving portion B4260 can be reduced.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the sphere gathering wall B4020 facilitates the entry of the spheres into the through gate 67, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an alternate sorting device may be provided upstream of the through gate 67 so that the balls pass through the through gate 67 at a rate of one ball out of two (alternately), or the through gate 67 may be placed on the left side. A plurality of them may be arranged.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, a case was described in which a single drive motor B7710 drives a plurality of guide plates B1300 and B1500 based on the configuration of the variable winning device B1000, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, driving by the combined drive device B7700 may be added to the configuration of the variable winning device B2000. It should be noted that it is necessary to redesign the entry groove portion B7730.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the variable winning device B4000 is provided with the ball guide receiving portion B4260, and the variable winning device B4000 is unitized in the same manner as the guide opening B4160. do not have. For example, the ball guide receiving portion B4260 and the guide opening B4160 may be arranged on the base plate 60, and a concave portion may be formed in the base member B4100 to avoid interference with the ball guide receiving portion B4260. In this case, a nail can be implanted in the base plate 60 in the gap between the ball guide receiving portion B4260 and the recessed portion of the base member B4100. As a result, when the ball guide receiving portion B4260 is used instead of the first prize winning opening 64, the life nail can be easily implanted.

Also, the ball guide receiving portion B4260 may function as a substitute for the general winning opening 63 instead of the first winning opening 64 . The number of paid-out prize balls can be increased. Also, since it is located below the guide path, it is possible to prevent the special game state from prolonging as compared with the case of arranging it on the upstream side.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the case where the front projecting portion B4260 is integrally formed with the guide plate B4300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be fixed to the covering member B4200 as a member independent of the guide plate B4300. According to this, even in the closed state of the guide plate B4300, the front projecting portion B4260 can collide with the ball. Further, the front projecting portion B4260 may have a block shape, or may be formed in a columnar shape extending to the rear side.

In the nineteenth embodiment, the difference in function of the projecting portion B9140 was explained by the difference in arrangement height, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projection length may be changed. In addition, although the case where the guidance route for the ball is only the downward-sloping route has been described, the route may be configured in both directions, as in the above-described embodiments.

In addition, the structure which makes it easy for the game ball to stay is not limited at all. For example, the game ball may be decelerated by a protrusion protruding toward the inside of the flow-down path of the game ball so that the game ball can be easily retained, or the game ball can be easily retained by switching the degree of inclination of the guide path. It is also possible to make it easier for the game ball to stay by decelerating the speed.

In addition, it is also possible to form an uneven shape (wavy shape) on the rolling surface of the path forming means so that the game ball can be decelerated, thereby making it easier for the game ball to stay. The kinetic energy of is used for the rotation of the windmill to decelerate the game ball, thereby making it easier for the game ball to stay.

It should be noted that, for example, in a mode in which the path construction means are displaced corresponding to a predetermined number of rounds in a special game, a plurality of path construction means are provided, and a game ball spilled from one of the path construction means is displaced by the other path construction means. If it is configured to be able to be rescued, it is preferable to arrange the second ball entrance below the position where the game ball tends to stay in the path configuration means on the side that configures the guide path in the final round of the special game.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guiding path of the intersecting spheres is bilaterally symmetrical has been described, but it may be bilaterally asymmetrical. In each of the above-described embodiments, it is described that the player who loses from the intersecting path loses money.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the protruding portion B1140 and the like that can come into contact with the ball rolling on the guide path have been described, but the arrangement of the protruding portion is not limited to this. For example, on the left and right of the crossing position of the guide route, protrusions may be provided at positions where the ball falls. In this case, the speed of the ball in the vertical direction can be decelerated, and the falling speed can be reduced, so the degree of freedom in setting the interval between rounds is improved. That is, it is possible to set a value longer than 0.04 seconds.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the degree of deceleration of the ball is switched using the boundary between the left and right intermediate positions of the pre-entering range, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the degree of deceleration may be switched over three or more sections, or the degree of deceleration may be changed with a boundary at a position closer to the left or right from the middle position in the left or right direction.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a member that guides the ball to the opening of the pair of detection sensors B1230 and B1250 overhanging the range before the ball enters the ball is individually arranged for each of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250, but it is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, a rotator having an axial length approximately equal to the left-right width of the pre-entering range is arranged on the back side of the pre-entering range, and the rotator can guide the ball to both detection sensors B1230 and B1250. You can

That is, for example, in the case where the rotating body is configured in the shape of a quadrangular prism elongated in the left-right direction, the outer surface facing the pre-entering range is switched from the first outer surface to the fourth outer surface each time the rotation angle changes by 90 degrees. configured to be A rolling surface capable of guiding the ball to the first detection sensor B1230 is formed on the first outer surface so as to project radially outward, and a rolling surface capable of guiding the ball to the second detection sensor B1250 is formed on the third outer surface. A moving surface is formed to protrude radially outward. Further, the second outer surface and the fourth outer surface are not formed with an overhanging portion, and are arranged outside the pre-ball-entering range when they are arranged to face the ball-entering range. Further, a drive motor is provided to rotate the rotating body, and the rotating body is configured to be rotatable in both forward and reverse directions.

In this case, the rotating body is rotated by the drive motor, and the ball can be guided to the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 by setting any one of the first outer surface to the fourth outer surface to face the pre-entering range. State (first outer surface facing, first open state), state in which the ball can be guided to the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 (third outer surface facing, second open state), and detection sensors B1230, B1250 The state can be switched between a state in which the ball is not guided (the second outer surface or the fourth outer surface faces each other, closed state). Therefore, the members for guiding the balls to the openings of the pair of detection sensors B1230 and B1250 can be constructed with a single member and a single driving device.

Further, the direction of displacement of the rotating body when switching from the closed state to the open state (first open state or second open state) can be forward or reverse. That is, when switching to the open state (the first open state or the second open state), the rolling surface is displaced upward in the range before the ball enters, and the rolling surface descends in the range before the ball enters. It is possible to construct a case in which they are displaced and arranged.

For the purpose of reducing the number of loose balls from the pre-entering range, it is easier to rescue the balls when the rolling surface is displaced upward, which is advantageous. Therefore, by configuring the rotation direction of the rotating body to be controllable in different directions, it is possible to configure an opening mode that is advantageous to the player and an opening mode that is disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, when employing a rotating body, there is no need to consider interference between members unlike in the case of configuring with individual members, so the degree of freedom in design can be improved. For example, the first detection sensor B1230 and the second detection sensor B1250 are arranged on the same side (for example, the right side) with different vertical positions, and the guide route is configured to be inclined in the same direction, and the upper side of one of the guide routes on the upstream side. By arranging the other guide route, which has been arranged at the bottom, below the one guide route on the downstream side (for example, providing a step), it is possible to easily configure a structure that crosses the guide routes.

It should be noted that such a structure (structure inclined in the same direction) may be replaced with the guide members (guide plates B1300, B1500, B3300, B3500, B4300, opening/closing plates B2300, B5500, opening/closing rods B2500, and rotating members B3700, B3900) may be configured by changing the shape.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the variable winning device B1000 and the like is arranged near the bottom of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variable winning device B1000 or the like may be arranged in the upper part of the game area (for example, above the center frame 86 or above the center frame 86 above and below the center frame 86).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the structure for intersecting the rolling paths of the balls has been described as the structure of the member that opens and closes the prize winning opening, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be used without the winning opening (separately from the winning opening) as a means for changing the flow-down path of the ball in one range of the game area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, by varying the flow path on the upstream side of the variable winning device B1000 or the like, or by arranging another winning opening, a round in which the opening of the first detection opening B1230 is opened and a second Although the case where the round digestion time differs between the round in which the opening of the detection port B1250 is opened has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the degree of deceleration is varied so that the flow speed of the ball guided toward the opening of the first detection port B1230 and the flow speed of the ball guided toward the opening of the second detection port B1250 are different. By doing so, the round digestion time may be differentiated.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Production incorporating randomness>
A game machine comprising: an action means; a displacement means configured to be displaceable by receiving action from the action means; A1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine that is displaceably arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display area and includes displacement means that is displaced according to the driving of a driving device such as a motor (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). ). However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that the operation pattern of the displacement means is poor, and the effect on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the attention of the player gradually decreases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the displacement of the displacement means can be made complicated by the function of the auxiliary means of making the displacement mode of the displacement means into a plurality of modes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, and to keep the player's attention at a high level.

A specific example of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a box-shaped space forming means that forms a space in which the displacement means can be displaced, or it may be displaced by a driving device separate from the action means and pushed to change the displacement mode of the displacement means. Any means is fine. Further, the driving device for the pushing means may also be used as the driving device for driving the action means.

In the gaming machine A1, the action means can be configured to have a first state in which a first action portion can act on the displacement means, and a second state in which a second action portion can act on the displacement means. A gaming machine A2 characterized by:

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, it is possible to change the part when the action means acts on the displacement means. The means can be displaced differently.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the action means comprises contact means for contacting and applying a load to the displacement means, and is configured to be capable of generating loads in a plurality of modes via the contact means. A gaming machine A3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, there are multiple types of load modes generated via the abutting means, so that multiple types of displacement modes of the displacement means can be provided.

In the game machine A3, the abutment means includes a first abutment portion configured to be displaceable and configured to abut against the displacement means, and a first abutment portion configured to be abuttable to the displacement means. and a second contact portion different from the portion, and the angle between the displacement direction of the contact means and the first contact portion (or the tangential line of the first contact portion) when viewed in a predetermined direction is A game machine A4, characterized in that the angle between the displacement direction of the abutment means and the second abutment portion (or a tangent to the second abutment portion) is different from the angle when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the direction of the load applied to the displacement means can be varied without changing the displacement direction of the contact means. can be generated in the direction of

In the gaming machine A4, the contact means is configured such that tangent lines drawn to the first contact portion and the second contact portion and parallel to each other are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the contact means. A gaming machine A5 characterized by:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, a load can be applied to the displacement means in a direction parallel to the plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement means can be displaced with little energy loss. can be made Thereby, a large amount of displacement of the displacement means can be ensured.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, load generating means configured to generate a load for displacing the action means is provided, and the load generating means generates the load at a position where the displacing means are densely arranged. A game machine A6 characterized in that it is configured to generate

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the load can be efficiently transmitted to the displacement means.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the action means is supported in a support manner that allows a change in posture, and the change in posture occurs on the side of the displacement means that facilitates maintaining a balance of arrangement with respect to the action means. A gaming machine A7 characterized by:

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, it is possible to maintain the balance of the arrangement of the displacement means by changing the posture of the action means. can be avoided from occurring.

In addition, the cause of the attitude change of the action means is not limited at all. For example, it may be caused by balancing the load from the displacement means, or a drive device may be provided to change the posture of the action means. When the attitude of the action means is caused to change by balancing the load from the displacement means, the attitude of the action means can be easily changed by providing a plurality of lengths from the portion facing the displacement means to the support position of the action means. can be produced in multiple types.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes guide means configured to be able to guide displacement of the displacement means, and the guide means can guide displacement of the displacement means in one direction. and a second guide portion capable of guiding displacement of the displacement means in another direction, wherein the first guide portion and the second guide portion face the displacement means. A game machine A8 characterized in that the formation mode of is different.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be varied according to the displacement direction of the displacement means.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the action means is configured to be displaceable, configured to change the easiness of keeping the balance of the displacement means depending on its arrangement, and the position where the balance of the displacement means is easy to keep. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being constructed so as to be able to act on the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, it is possible to easily maintain the balance of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

A game machine A10 in any one of the game machines A1 to A9, wherein the displacement means comprises one or more members, which are configured so as not to be coupled with each other.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A9, when the displacement means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from joining together to form a lump. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a plurality of members scatter.

A gaming machine A11 characterized in that in the gaming machine A10, the center of gravity of the one or more members is arranged at a position different from the center of the member.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, it is possible to stabilize the attitude of the displacement means when the displacement means is arranged in the action means.

Note that the method of forming the center of gravity is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the member or a method of partially forming holes in the member may be used.

<Change due to advancing/retreating means moving forward/backward within the displacement range of the displacement means>
Arranging means configured to be arranged in a predetermined range, and advance/retreat means configured to be displaceable in a forward/retreat direction with respect to the range, the advancing/retreating means moving into a predetermined portion of the range, A game machine B1 is characterized by being configured to be able to change the width of the width of the game machine B1 so that the width can be changed in a plurality of ways.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine comprising a first movable member that displaces to the left and right, and a second movable member that enters a range generated between the first movable members as the first movable member displaces. There is (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is only one type of displacement when the second movable member enters the range, and there is room for improvement in the displacement of the second movable member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the advance/retreat means is configured with a plurality of types of change modes of the width of the range when entering the range, it is possible to configure with a plurality of types of displacement modes of the placement means, and the placement means can can be improved.

In addition, the mode of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a granular performance member made of a resin material, a powdery member, a liquid, or a game ball.

In addition, the method of configuring a plurality of types of change modes of the width of the range due to the displacement of the advance/retreat means is not limited at all. For example, the entrance side portion of the advancing/retreating means may be formed with an inclined surface, and the width of the range may be changed by providing a portion with a different width to enter the range, or the displacement width of the advancing/retreating means may be changed to change the range. may be made variable.

In the game machine B1, the range is formed inside a box-shaped means configured to prevent entry and exit of the arrangement means, and is configured to be changeable, and the advancing/retreating means enters the range in a non-changing state. The game machine B2 is characterized in that the box-shaped means has an opening through which the advance/retreat means can be inserted and the arrangement means cannot be inserted.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the advance/retreat means can enter the range through the opening portion, while the arrangement means can be prevented from falling out of the range.

In addition, the arrangement of the open portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be placed in a location that is difficult for the placement means to reach. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the arranging means will fall out of the range by mistake. Also, the open portion may be arranged at a location where the load from the arrangement means is less likely to occur (for example, the upper side opposite to the direction of gravity). In this case, it is possible to prevent a load from the arranging means from being applied to the advancing/retreating means during displacement, hindering the displacement of the advancing/retreating means, or causing damage to the advancing/retreating means or the arranging means.

A gaming machine B3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the advance/retreat means is configured such that the direction of guiding the placement means is different corresponding to the direction of contact with the placement means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the arrangement means are guided in different directions by the same advancing/retreating means. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of types of presentations, thereby improving the presentation effect of presentations using the arrangement means and the advance/retreat means.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the advancing/retreating means is configured such that, when entering the range, the gap between the opposing surface of the range and the opposing surface is shorter than the width of the arrangement means. A gaming machine B4 characterized by:

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, even if the arrangement means is arranged on the far side from the advance/retreat means, the advance/retreat means can be moved to the arrangement means in the entered state. can work.

In addition, it is also possible to configure so that there is no gap between the advance/retreat means and the facing surface of the range. Also, it may be configured such that there is a gap in one part and no gap in the other part.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the advance/retreat means is configured to enter the range by rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and at the tip on the entry side, the representative tip farthest from the axis is the A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is configured so that the gap between the range and the range is the shortest.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, by making the representative tip portion, which is most likely to be displaced from the axis, first enter the range, Misalignment can be addressed early, and the resistance of the subsequent entry motion can be reduced.

In the game machine B5, the representative tip portion is provided with a predetermined projecting portion, and is formed so as to be inclined away from the range as the distance from the projecting portion along the axial direction increases. Game machine B6 to play.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the arrangement means can be displaced away from the predetermined projecting portion in the process of entering the advance/retreat means.

In the gaming machine B6, the advancing/retreating means has a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the projecting portion in the axial direction.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the shape of the advance/retreat means is a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging part, so that the arrangement means pushed away by the overhanging part can be secured.

Various modes are exemplified as the shape in which the range side is open. For example, it may have a shape in which the range side is opened before the advance/retreat means enters, or a shape in which the range side is opened in a state in which the advance/retreat means has entered.

In any one of the game machines B5 to B7, it comprises a drive means capable of generating a driving force, and a transmission means capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the advance/retreat means, wherein the transmission means and the advance/retreat means means that a driving force is transmitted by abutment, and the contact area of the abutment surface between the transmission means and the advancing/retreating means is configured to be variable, and the contact area varies depending on whether the advancing/retreating means enters the range. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it is configured so that it becomes maximum at the beginning and then decreases.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B5 to B7, the contact area is maximized at the initial stage of entry when a large load is likely to occur due to the advance and retreat means starting to contact the arrangement means. By doing so, the load per unit area of the contact surface can be reduced. As a result, the durability of the advance/retreat means and the transmission means can be improved.

In addition, the mode of the advance/retreat means is not limited at all. For example, means for displacing outside the game area or means for displacing inside the game area may be used.

<Synchronize two members with a transmission cam>
driving means; displacement means configured to be displaceable and composed of one or more members; and transmission means configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement means, the transmission means comprising: In a first aspect, a first transmission portion configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to a first target portion of the displacement means; and in a second aspect, different from the first aspect, the displacement means. A gaming machine C1 comprising a second transmission section configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second target section.

A driving device used for displacing displacement means in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, comprising a first driving device for vertically displacing the displacing means and a second driving device for rotationally displacing the displacing means. There is a game machine (see, for example, JP-A-2016-202210). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, even if the first driving device and the second driving device are synchronized to displace a plurality of displacement means in order to execute the motion presentation of the displacement means, the driving timing is shifted. There is a problem that the possibility cannot be excluded and the displacement of the displacement means tends to be unstable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission means is provided with the first transmission portion and the second transmission portion, and the driving force is transmitted to the first target portion or the second target portion of the displacement means, respectively. With this configuration, the transmission of the driving force to the first target portion and the second target portion can be automatically synchronized, and the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.

In addition, the timing at which the driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, the driving force may be transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion at the same time, the driving force may be transmitted at different times, or a combination thereof (partially simultaneous transmission) may be used.

Further, when the driving force is transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion at the same time, it is preferable that the direction in which at least part of the driving force is generated is along the direction of gravity. As a result, its own weight can be used for driving force transmission.

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the transmission of the driving force to the first target part and the transmission of the driving force to the second target part occur at different times.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the driving force required for the driving means can be suppressed by keeping the maximum value of the driving resistance low.

Here, the term "driving force transmission" may refer to a load in the direction of travel in which the transmission means is displaced by the driving force. Also good.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first target portion and a second member having the second target portion, and the displacement trajectory of the first member and the second member The first member is configured to partially intersect with the displacement trajectory of, the first member is configured to be able to contact the second member in a predetermined arrangement, and in the contacting state, the A gaming machine C3 characterized by being configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the second member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means. In other words, it is possible to configure a case where the driving force is directly transmitted from the transmission means to the second member and a case where the driving force is indirectly transmitted through the first member.

In the game machine C3, the second member is configured to be retractable to a position where it does not come into contact with the first member in a state in which the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement. .

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, it is possible to avoid contact between the displacing first member and the second member. As a result, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs when the first member reaches the predetermined position and stops, so that the mode of driving force transmission to the second member can be switched smoothly. can be facilitated.

A game machine C5 characterized in that, in the game machine C3 or C4, the state of the first member is associated with the arrangement of the transmission means.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3 or C4, the switching of the transmission mode of the driving force can be performed by changing the arrangement of the transmission means, so that the displacement of the first member and the second member can be stabilized. and avoid unintended collision or contact of each member.

In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, an urging means configured to urge the second member in a predetermined direction is provided, and the driving force is transmitted to the second member in a direction opposing the urging force. The game machine C6 is characterized in that the first member is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C3 to C5, the first member is arranged in a predetermined manner while the second member is arranged on the opposite side of the first member in a predetermined direction. can be done. Thereby, it is possible to form the timing for displacing the second member against the biasing force and the timing for stopping the second member against the biasing force as the transmission means is displaced.

The game machine C7, wherein the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmission portion of the transmission means is displaced in the predetermined direction in the game machine C6. .

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, part of the load necessary for displacing the first member can be generated by the biasing force of the biasing means. That is, the urging force can be used in an auxiliary manner.

In any one of game machines C3 to C7, the second transmission section is capable of forming a non-contact state in which the second member is not in contact, and in the non-contact state, the second member displaces. A gaming machine C8 characterized in that the second member is configured so that the second transmission section does not interfere with the.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C3 to C7, the displacement state of the second member includes a displacement state of being pushed by the second transmission section and a displacement state of being separated from the second transmission section. and can be configured.

In any one of game machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending in parallel with the predetermined direction from a point of contact between the first member arranged in the predetermined manner and the transmission means controls the displacement of the transmission means in a predetermined manner. A game machine C9 characterized by passing through a regulating part that regulates.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the urging force transmitted to the transmission means via the first member is cut off by the restricting section, so that the drive means can be reached. can be prevented (to a lesser degree).

In addition, the aspect of a regulation part is not limited at all. For example, it may be a guide portion that limits the displacement mode to sliding displacement by restricting the displacement, or a shaft support portion that limits the displacement to rotational displacement.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C9, the first target portion of the displacement means receives the driving force of the drive means and is displaced or stopped, and receives the load from the second target portion. A gaming machine C10 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state between a second state in which it is displaced or stopped.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target part can be complicated.

<By limiting the generation of load when the user is away from the vehicle, load transmission is cut off>
A game machine comprising a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a transmission means configured to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means, the contact contacting the displacement means and a non-contact state in which the displacement means is not in contact with the displacement means. A gaming machine D1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is provided a game machine in which displacement means composed of one movable body displaced by the driving force of a drive means contacts another movable body at a displacement end position (upper end position) and receives a load. There is (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-028623). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a risk that a load from another movable body may be transmitted to the driving means via the displacement means, and the state of the driving means (for example, the rotation angle of the motor) and the There is room for improvement from the standpoint of stabilizing the drive state, since there is a possibility that the actual state of the drive means may differ.

Moreover, it is conceivable that the operating resistance of the driving means may increase or decrease unstably due to the load applied to the driving means, accelerating the deterioration of the driving means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, the driving state of the driving means can be stabilized. In addition, by suppressing unstable increases and decreases in the operating resistance of the driving means, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

Note that the method of suppressing load transmission in the contact state is not limited at all. For example, a member capable of absorbing the load may be interposed at the contact portion, and the displacement of the first means that causes the load (for example, the first means receiving an external force) may cause the first means to It may be configured so that it occurs only in the non-contact state.

In the game machine D1, the load received by the displacement means from the first means and the driving force received by the displacement means via the transmission means face the same side.

According to the gaming machine D2, the load received by the displacement means can be reduced compared to the case where the load from the first means and the driving force are directed to opposite sides.

The game machine D1 or D2 is provided with an arrangement means arranged to collide with the first means, and the collision of the arrangement means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other. A gaming machine D3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the collision of the arranging means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other. can be blocked.

Incidentally, the collision of the arranging means may occur in the contact state of the first means, or may occur in the non-contact state. If the locating means collides in a non-contact state, load transmission between the first means and the displacing means can be interrupted. ), load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the transmission means includes a contact portion configured to be able to contact the displacement means, and the contact portion bends in the direction of the load caused by the contact ( A gaming machine D4 characterized by being flexibly constructed to such an extent that it can be deformed.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the load is absorbed by the bending (deformation) of the contact portion, thereby suppressing the load transmission between the displacement means and the transmission means. can do.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacement means are provided with a second abutment portion configured to be able to abut against the second contact portion of at least one of the first means and the displacement means. The gaming machine D5, wherein the abutting portion is made of a material capable of absorbing impact.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the second contact portion can absorb the impact, so that the load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5 is characterized by comprising biasing means for biasing the displacement means, wherein the standby position of the displacement means is set at the end of the biasing direction displacement range of the biasing means. A game machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D5, it is possible to avoid deviation of the standby position of the displacement means (the position where the load is generated from the transmission means). It is easy to arrange the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means in an appropriate position for controlling the transmission means to operate at high speed until the position where the 1 means and the displacement means are separated from each other. This makes it possible to easily and appropriately control the driving means.

In addition, by reducing the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to avoid accidental contact between the first means and the displacement means.

In any one of game machines D3 to D6, the game machine D7 is characterized in that the first means permits a change in posture due to a collision of the arrangement means.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D3 to D6, the load from the arrangement means can be used for the change in the posture of the first means, so the load transmission to the drive means is suppressed. be able to.

In the game machine D6 or D7, the first means and the displacement means are in contact with each other, and the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the first means exerts the biasing force of the biasing means. a receiving biasing state, wherein the transmission means abuts against the displacement means and displaces the displacement means in a direction opposite to the direction of the biasing force of the biasing means; A gaming machine D8 characterized by being capable of changing states between an ineffective contact state in which transmission to means is disabled and a non-contact state in which said first means and said displacement means are separated from each other.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machine D6 or D7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of ease with which the placement means changes its posture with respect to collision).

<Conditionally regulate one of forward and reverse rotation>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable along a path including a predetermined position is provided, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position serving as a reference point for changing the displacement mode. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is constructed so as to be displaceable to the predetermined position in the manner of .

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that control the same movable accessory to perform different actions in a plurality of effects (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73517). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, different actions correspond to the presence or absence of switching of the driving direction of the driving device. Since the player can predict about, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate the performance to be executed from now on by the discriminating means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, the displacement mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, the winning effect and the losing effect may be different effects involving displacement of the displacement means. In this case, if there is only one way of displacing the displacing means to a predetermined position, it will be known whether or not it is correct by the displacement from the predetermined position (for example, the generation of driving sound). On the other hand, by providing a plurality of displacement modes, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the displacement is correct or not even if displacement occurs (for example, driving sound occurs).

Moreover, the mode of displacement is not limited at all. For example, it may be a path, a displacement speed, or a displacement speed pattern.

The game machine E1 comprises driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and regulation means for regulating the displacement of the displacement means. A gaming machine E2, characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be regulated in a non-operating state.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the driving sound of the driving means can be eliminated when the displacement means is restricted. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the direction is reverse.

Further, unlike the case where the driving means continues to generate driving force when performing a long performance (Long Reach, etc.) with the displacement of the displacement means restricted, it is possible to suppress heat generation by the driving means.

A gaming machine E3 in the gaming machine E1 or E2, wherein the restricting means is displaced to a position where it can act on the displacing means by the driving force of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of driving means to be arranged can be reduced compared to the case where the driving means for driving the restricting means is provided separately.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the game machine is characterized by comprising a discrimination participating means configured to have a section that makes it difficult to discriminate in which form among the plurality of types of modes the displacement is made. E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the determination participating means can be configured to make it difficult to determine the displacement mode of the displacement means in a predetermined section. Compared to the case where it is difficult to determine the displacement mode only in the case where it is difficult to determine the displacement mode, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the displacement of the displacement means while it is difficult to determine the displacement mode.

A gaming machine E5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E4, the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained in the section.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, it is possible to switch the driving direction of the driving means while maintaining the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of displacement mode of the displacement means from being detected from the driving sound. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform drive control such as starting the driving of the driving means before notification of acceptance or rejection.

Any one of the game machines E1 to E5 is provided with detection means capable of detecting the position of the displacement means, and the detection means determines switching of executable displacement among the displacements in the plurality of types of displacement modes. A game machine E6, which is also used as a determination means.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E5, the sensor for detecting the position of the displacement means and the sensor for judging the switching of the displacement mode can be used together. It is possible to reduce the number of devices to be arranged.

<Sense of unity of multiple members>
A gaming machine configured such that a first member and a second member are displaceable, wherein the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is different between the first member and the second member. A game machine F1 characterized by being configured as follows.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a first member and a second member configured to be displaceable are controlled to be vertically displaced while maintaining an adjacent state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the first member and the second member are displaced on the same straight line, so depending on the approaching speed, the first member and the second member may return after contact. Yes, it can look bad. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintaining the effect mode regardless of the displacement speed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is made different. For example, the displacement mode of the first member and the second member is not made to approach on the same straight line, but after approaching on another straight line, the direction is changed and the first member and the second member approach each other. It is possible to avoid reversal and make it easier to maintain the presentation mode.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement of the first member and the second member is divided into at least a first section for approaching each other and a second section as a preparatory section for coming into contact with each other. The game machine F2 is characterized in that the second member is configured such that the attitudes of the first section and the second section are different.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed according to the purpose of displacement.

A gaming machine F3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F1 or F2, it comprises a load generating means capable of generating a load directed to the side maintaining the close arrangement of the first member and the second member.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generating means.

It should be noted that the load generated by the load generating means is not limited to a load in a fixed direction or a load of a fixed magnitude. For example, if the load that is likely to be received (eg, a performance mode that generates an external force) changes depending on the situation (eg, game state), the direction and magnitude of the load generated by the load generating means may be changed accordingly.

Moreover, the load generated by the load generating means does not need to be generated all the time. For example, it may be possible to switch between load generation and load cancellation in accordance with the above-described change in the situation. Incidentally, the load generating means may be external.

In the game machine F3, displacement generating means is configured to displace at least one of the first member and the second member, and a predetermined state can be configured by the displacement, and the load generating means is configured to displace the displacement. A game machine F4 characterized in that it is configured integrally with a generating means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, it is possible to appropriately maintain the relationship between the load generation timing by the load generating means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member. It is possible to prevent the load from occurring at

Also, the action of the load generating means and the action of the displacement generating means can complement each other. For example, the load of the load generating means can be used to assist the displacement of the first member or the second member caused by the displacement generating means.

In the game machine F4, the predetermined state is a contact state in which at least part of the first member contacts the second member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the mode of filling the gap between the first member and the second member.

In the game machine F4 or F5, the game machine F6 is characterized in that the load generating means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4 or F5, it is possible to prevent the load of the load generation means from affecting the first member and the second member even in states other than the predetermined state.

The game machine F7 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F3 to F6, the load generating means is configured to generate loads at a plurality of locations on the first member or the second member.

According to the game machine F7, in any one of the game machines F3 to F6, since the load generating means generates a load on the first member or the second member at a plurality of locations, it is possible not only to maintain the state against displacement in one direction, but also to It is also possible to maintain the state of the first member or the second member against changes in posture. Thereby, even when the first member and the second member are configured three-dimensionally, it is possible to avoid conspicuous displacement of the arrangement.

In the gaming machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of load receiving portions that receive a load from the load generating means, and the plurality of load receiving portions are the first load receiving portion and the first load receiving portion. and a second loaded portion having a larger displacement amount with respect to the load generating means than the loaded portion, wherein the load generating means applies the load to the first loaded portion before the second loaded portion. A gaming machine F8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be applied to the first member or the second member in stages. Also, the role of the load applied to the first load receiving portion and the second load receiving portion can be divided. For example, it is possible to use the first load receiving part for positioning at a predetermined position and the second load receiving part for attitude adjustment.

In any one of the game machines F3 to F8, the load generating means may be such that the portion that applies the load directed to the side facing gravity to the first member or the second member is greater than the other portions. Alternatively, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the facing surface facing the second member has a long facing length.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the sagging due to the weight of the first member or the second member. On the other hand, for other portions, the facing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, so that the degree of freedom in designing the load generating means can be improved and the facing surface can be easily hidden.

A game machine F10 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F3 to F9, the assembly of the first member and the second member is possible in a state in which the first member and the second member are separated. .

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily avoid cracking or chipping of the first member or the second member due to the load caused by the assembly work. That is, compared to the case where the assembling work is performed in the abutting state, it is easier to avoid the occurrence of load transmission between the first member and the second member, so that the first member and the second member can be assembled without damage. can.

As a result, it is possible to provide the contact surfaces as designed on the first member and the second member, thereby preventing a situation in which the load generated by the load generating means, such as when there is a gap, is likely to cause misalignment. can do.

<Construction of multiple types of wobble states of the displacement means>
A gaming machine G0 comprising displacement means and action means for displacing the displacement means, wherein the action means is configured to suppress a change in posture of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes displacement means configured to enable displacement composed of position change and rotation (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, although the portion supporting the displacement means disposed at the tip of the arm is formed to have a large diameter, it is necessary to provide a gap in order to ensure the displacement, so that the posture of the displacement means is limited. There is a problem that the countermeasure against the change is not sufficient and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the change in the attitude of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G0, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the displacement means by the configuration of the action means. Accordingly, even if the space in which the displacement of the displacement means is allowed is narrow, it is possible to easily avoid collision between the wall member forming the space and the displacement means.

It should be noted that the direction in which the displacement means changes its posture is not limited at all. For example, it may be tilted about a straight line along the lateral direction (horizontal direction, etc.), or may be swung laterally about a straight line along the vertical direction (vertical direction, etc.).

In the game machine G0, the action means is configured to be able to increase or decrease the action force for suppressing the posture change of the displacement means in accordance with the arrangement position of the displacement means.

According to the game machine G1, in addition to the effects of the game machine G0, it is possible to change the degree of suppression of the posture change of the displacement means according to the arrangement of the displacement means. As a result, the arrangement space of the displacement means can be narrowed while maintaining a high degree of freedom in the performance of the displacement means.

For example, when the displacement means is reciprocatingly displaced, the attitude of the displacement means tends to collapse at the displacement end where the displacement direction is switched. By increasing it, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

Further, for example, even when the displacement means itself is enlarged, reduced, or rotated by the driving force mounted on the displacement means, the attitude of the displacement means tends to be easily lost. By increasing the acting force generation positions in (1), it is possible to suppress collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

In game machine G0 or G1, game machine G2 is characterized in that said action means is configured to support said displacement means with a plurality of main support means arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the center of gravity of said displacement means.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G0 or G1, the action means supports the displacement means by a plurality of main support means on the horizontal plane at the position of the center of gravity of the displacement means, thereby preventing the displacement means from tilting. can be made easier.

In the game machine G2, the action means includes auxiliary support means for supporting the displacement means at a position different from the horizontal plane on which the main support means is arranged.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, the main support means and the auxiliary support means support the displacement means at three or more support points that are not arranged on a straight line, so that the displacement means Attitude change can be suppressed in all directions.

In the game machine G3, the auxiliary support means also functions as guide means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, the auxiliary support means can be added not only as a supporting force generating position but also as a position for guiding displacement.

In the gaming machine G1, the displacement means can be displaced in such a manner that its area when viewed in a predetermined direction increases or decreases, and the action means is configured such that the acting force generation position is maximized at the end position of displacement of the displacement means. A gaming machine G5 characterized by:

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, it is possible to generate acting forces on the displacement means at a plurality of points at the displacement end position where the effect of increasing the area of the displacement means is most effective. , the change in posture of the displacing means can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, by relatively reducing the acting force generating positions during the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement resistance of the displacement means can be reduced and the displacement can be smoothed. That is, during the displacement of the displacement means, it is easy to maintain the posture due to the inertia associated with the displacement. Therefore, if the acting force generation position is increased recklessly, the acting force becomes excessive and the displacement resistance of the displacement means rises. , the problem that the driving device becomes large is assumed.

On the other hand, by reducing the acting force generation positions at positions other than the displacement end position, it is possible to avoid the displacement resistance of the displacement means from becoming excessive and to avoid an increase in the size of the driving device.

<Wiring Guide for Propeller Unit>
Displacement means, electric wiring connected to the displacement means, and electric wiring displacement means configured to be capable of displacing a predetermined portion of the electric wiring, wherein the electric wiring displacement means is such that the displacement means is the predetermined portion. The game machine H1 is characterized in that the predetermined portion can be displaced to the side avoiding the displacing means when the game machine H1 is displaced to the side approaching the .

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which electrical wiring connected to the displacement means is aligned with a long member interlocking with the displacement means to limit the arrangement of the electrical wiring (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). (see Gazette). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, in order to avoid contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring, it is difficult to configure the displacement means to continue to displace beyond the electric wiring. Since a space is required for arranging the electrical wiring on the outside, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging the displacing means is low.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the electric wire displacing means can displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring to the side avoiding the displacing means. so that the displacement means can be arranged to displace over the electrical wiring. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means.

It should be noted that the case where the displacement means approaches the predetermined portion is not limited at all. For example, if the predetermined portion is stopped, there is a danger of contact between the displacement means and the predetermined portion, or the distance between the predetermined portion and the displacement means is shorter than the reference length.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in at least a first direction and a second direction, and the predetermined portion is displaceable in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, it is possible to avoid the electric wiring from limiting the amount of displacement of the displacement means in the predetermined plane defined by the first direction and the second direction.

In the game machine H2, the game machine H3 is characterized in that the first direction and the second direction are directions parallel to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined direction view.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the displacement direction of the predetermined portion can be set along the predetermined direction view. It is possible to reduce the effect on appearance.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H3, it comprises a stopping means for stopping a second predetermined portion of the electrical wiring arranged on the opposite side of the displacing means with respect to the predetermined portion, wherein the electrical wiring displacing means A gaming machine H4 characterized in that the second predetermined portion is configured to be easily displaceable with respect to the stopping means.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electrical wiring arranged in the stopping means can be improved.

In addition, the configuration in which the second predetermined portion is easily displaced with respect to the stopping means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is spirally arranged in the retaining means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed in along the tangential direction of the outer peripheral portion of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be attached to the movable member. When guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed so as to displace the movable member.

In the game machine H4, the game machine H5 is characterized in that the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machine H4, the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement terminal of the displacement means in the first direction, so that the stopping means is projected to the plane side where the displacement means is displaced. can be configured As a result, it is possible to increase the storage capacity of the electric wiring of the stopping means, so that the amount of displacement of the displacement means that compensates for the separation from the stopping means by the second predetermined portion can be increased.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the electrical wiring displacing means is integrated with the displacing means, and includes correspondence changing means for changing the arrangement of the electrical wiring displacing means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacing means. A gaming machine H6 characterized by:

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the correspondence changing means can appropriately manage the relative arrangement between the electric wiring and the displacement means.

<Flow path of sphere with electric tube>
It comprises a game area and a flow-down means for causing the game balls discharged from the game area to flow down, and the flow-down means has a section configured so that the game balls discharged from the game area can be visually recognized. gaming machine I0 to play.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a base plate forming a game area is made of a plywood board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-80178). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the game ball discharged from the game area flows to the back side of the base plate, it is hidden by the base plate, and the player cannot see the game ball. Therefore, the player is likely to lose sight of the game ball, and if the player does not pay attention to the ejection timing, the player may get the impression that the game ball suddenly disappears from the game area.

Also, even if you pay attention to the ejection timing, in recent pachinko machines, the winning hole and the out hole are often arranged close to each other, and even though the ball actually entered the out hole, the ball did not reach the winning hole. There is a possibility that it may be mistaken for the one that entered the ball. In this case, there is a possibility that players will feel distrustful of the fact that no prize balls are paid out. In other words, the conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in discharging the game balls from the game area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, since the flowing-down means is configured to have a section in which the game balls discharged from the game area can be visually recognized, the player can visually observe the game balls flowing down in the section. By doing so, it is possible to confirm how the game balls are arranged from the game area. As a result, ejection of game balls from the game area can be improved.

It should be noted that the discharge of the game ball from the game area means the overall manner in which the game ball is discharged from the game area. For example, the balls may be discharged through a prize ball opening, or may be discharged through an outlet without prize balls.

In the gaming machine I0, the game ball that has flowed down in the game area is disposed so as to pass through, and the game ball is provided with a profit giving means configured to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the passage of the game ball. The means comprises a first constituent part configured to be able to guide a game ball toward the profit imparting means above the profit imparting means, and a first constituent part disposed downstream of the first constituent part. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising a second component configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side away from the profit giving means above the giving means.

According to the game machine I1, in addition to the effects of the game machine I0, the player can grasp how the game ball is discharged from the game area by visually recognizing the game ball flowing down the flowing-down means. It is possible to avoid the game ball from approaching the profit giving means on the lower side. As a result, game balls that have already been discharged from the game area and game balls that are still flowing down the game area can be clearly distinguished in the vicinity of the profit giving means, so that the player can comfortably play the game. We can try to make it possible.

Note that the predetermined profit is not limited at all. For example, it may be a payout of prize balls, a lottery of symbols such as a first symbol or a second symbol, or other profit.

The game machine I0 or I1 includes attention means formed inside the game area, and frame means arranged in a frame shape around the attention means, and the flow-down means is the frame when viewed from the front. A game machine I2 characterized by being constructed so as to cause game balls to flow down to the inner side of means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0 or I1, the flowing-down means can cause the game balls discharged from the game area to enter the visual field of the player who pays attention to the attention means. As a result, even in a situation where the player is paying attention to the attention means, it is possible to let the player know that the game ball has been ejected from the game area.

Note that the attention means is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate (illumination plate), a liquid crystal display means for changing and displaying a pattern, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable by a driving means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED. good.

The game machine I3 is characterized in that in the game machine I2, the flow-down means comprises deceleration means for decelerating the game ball on the inner side of the attention means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the game ball stays in the field of view of the player who pays attention to the attention means.

<Ingenuity around the board surface design part and light guide plate>
A predetermined substrate provided with a light emitting means, and an arranged means arranged in front of at least a part of the predetermined substrate when viewed from a predetermined direction, wherein the predetermined substrate has an area visually recognized when viewed from the predetermined direction of A gaming machine J0 characterized in that it is arranged so as to be smaller than an area where the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an illumination board having light emitting means such as LEDs is arranged on the back side of a base plate having a game area on the front side, and the plate surface of the illumination board and the plate surface of the base plate are arranged. There is a gaming machine in which are arranged substantially parallel (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-333887). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the area of the decorative board that is visually recognized when viewed from the front is large, when the decorative member arranged on the front side of the decorative board is irradiated with the LED light, the field of view of the decorative board is covered with electric lights. There is a possibility that the decorative board may enter and be visually recognized as if the decorative member and the decorative board are overlapped in the front and back.

On the surface of the decorative board, only functionally necessary components such as circuits and resistors are arranged, and usually the board does not have a high degree of design. Therefore, when the decorative member and the decorative board are visually superimposed in the front and rear, the appearance is poor, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player is lowered. In other words, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the presentation effect of the predetermined board.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J0, since the predetermined substrate is arranged such that the area of the predetermined substrate that is visually recognized when viewed in the predetermined direction is smaller than the area of the irradiated light, at least the predetermined A region in which only light can be visually recognized can be configured without overlapping with the substrate. As a result, it is possible to improve the rendering effect of the predetermined substrate.

In addition, the arrangement of the predetermined substrate is not limited at all. For example, the visible area may be reduced by partially hiding, or the visible area may be eliminated by completely shielding.

Incidentally, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means arranged on the predetermined substrate can be arbitrarily set. For example, the optical axis may be directed in the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, the optical axis may be directed in the direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, or the optical axis may be directed at an angle between them. Anything that can be done is fine.

The optical transparency of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to have good light transmittance, may be configured to have low transmittance, or may have a different degree of light transmittance for each portion.

In the gaming machine J0, the arranged means includes a plurality of direction changing means arranged on both surface sides of the predetermined substrate for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means. and a low transmission means having a lower light transmittance than the direction changing means is disposed, and when viewed from a predetermined direction, at least a part of the predetermined substrate is arranged inside the low transmission means. Gaming machine J1.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate can be hidden by the low transmission means. Thereby, the range in which the predetermined substrate is visible can be narrowed.

In addition, the direction changing means is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate or an illumination plate, a movable accessory that can be displaced by a driving device, a game area or flow path where game balls flow down, a case member or a decorative member that is fixedly arranged. But it's okay.

A gaming machine J2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1, the low-transmittance means is at least part of a shape portion forming a shape of a predetermined pattern or figure.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1, the low-transmittance means can be blended into the shape of a predetermined pattern or figure, so that it is possible to avoid making the player feel uncomfortable.

Note that the shape of the predetermined pattern or figure is not limited at all. For example, it may be a frame-shaped frame such as a window frame, a frame connecting the shaft of a rotating body such as a tire and the rotating outer peripheral portion, or a series of meanings and contents composed of arbitrary character strings and patterns. It may be part of the design to be expressed (for example, a title logo).

A game machine J3 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines J0 to J2, the predetermined board is arranged with the end face of the board facing the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J3, it is possible to minimize the area of the predetermined substrate when viewed in a predetermined direction.

The gaming machine J3 includes display means for executing display effects that can be visually recognized when viewed from a predetermined direction, and a game area arranged in front of the display means. A game machine J4 characterized in that it is arranged at a boundary with a game area when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J4, the predetermined board is arranged at the boundary, so that the light is emitted from the back of the game area to the front side, unlike the case where the light effect is performed as a whole, only the display area side from the predetermined board. It is possible to execute an effect of irradiating light on the side of the game area or an effect of irradiating light only on the game area side.

A gaming machine J5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine J4, the predetermined substrate is fixedly arranged on a gaming board forming the gaming area on the front side.

According to the gaming machine J5, since the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the game board, the arrangement of the light-emitting means is reduced compared to, for example, the case where it is fixedly arranged on the inner surface of the back case in which the movable accessory or the like is arranged. degree of freedom can be improved.

In addition, since the electric wiring for supplying electricity to the light emitting means can be guided along the back surface of the game board to the outside of the back case, even if the back case side is visible through the window part of the game board, Also, since it is impossible to see the back side of the game board without looking around with a particularly wide field of view, it is possible to easily prevent the electric wiring from being seen by the player.

Furthermore, when the liquid crystal display device is arranged in the center of the rear case, the space for arranging the predetermined substrate is limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device. If so, the predetermined substrate can be arranged at an arbitrary position without being restricted by the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the predetermined substrate.

<Locking member to prevent misalignment of accessories during shipment>
Displacement means and limitation means capable of limiting the displacement of the displacement means are provided, and the limitation means has a first state that can act on the displacement means and a second state that cannot act on the displacement means. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state in the first state, and is configured to suppress the movement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction in the first state.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine provided with a movable accessory (displacement means) that is displaced downward from a standby position to the front of a liquid crystal display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of fixing and releasing the displacing means.

That is, while the game machine is configured so as to be able to operate normally after being installed, it is difficult to fix movable accessories even in a situation where a large vibration or external force may be applied to the game machine such as during shipment. Not configured to work.

Therefore, as a countermeasure for fixing the movable accessory at the time of shipment, the displacement of the movable accessory is suppressed by stuffing cushioning materials in the range where the movable accessory is displaced, and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. However, if the opening in the center of the game board is closed, the cushioning material cannot be easily removed, and the burden on the game hall may be increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, by changing the state of the restricting means, the restriction on the displacement of the displacing means can be released, so that the displacing means can be fixed and released satisfactorily.

On the other hand, unlike the case where the cushioning material is pulled out, the limiting means is not pulled out, so it is difficult to continue the game if an external force that may occur during the game causes a change in state easily. On the other hand, by configuring the restricting means to suppress unintended state changes in the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles during the game.

In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the limiting means is configured to be able to change between the first state and the second state when the power is not supplied.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the state change of the limiting means can be caused when the gaming machine is not energized, so that the occurrence of malfunction of the limiting means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the worker's work from becoming difficult in the state of power failure and in the restoration work from the state of power failure.

In the game machine K1 or K2, an urging means for urging the operation portion of the restriction means in a predetermined direction is provided, and the restriction means displaces the operation portion from a reference position by a predetermined amount in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. the operating portion is displaceable away from the reference position in the predetermined direction by the biasing force of the biasing means; A game machine K3 characterized in that it is arranged at a spaced position away from.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1 or K2, since the operation unit is arranged at the spaced position away from the reference position in the second state, opening and closing of the door, etc., are provided to the gaming machine after installation. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change of the limiter due to an external force that may be applied, and it is possible to easily prevent the state of the limiter from changing from the second state.

In any one of game machines K1 to K3, game machine K4 is characterized in that the operating portion of the restriction means is arranged outside area forming means for forming an area in which the displacement means can be displaced.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K1 to K3, since the operation section is arranged outside the area forming means, even if the displacement means is displaced due to the operation of the operation means, Contact of the displacement means with the operator can be avoided.

In any one of game machines K1 to K4, biasing means for biasing the operating portion of the limiting means in a predetermined direction is provided, and the limiting means moves the operating portion from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction by a predetermined amount. The restricting means includes guiding means for guiding displacement of the operating portion in the predetermined direction, and the guiding means is configured to change the state along with the displacement. A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it is configured to ensure an allowable displacement width (orientation change width) of the part.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K1 to K4, the operation means can be displaced in a direction intersecting with the predetermined direction. When an unknown load is applied, it is possible to easily prevent displacement in a predetermined direction, and it is possible to easily prevent the operation portion from being displaced by a predetermined amount. As a result, it is possible to avoid changing the state of the restricting means due to an unintended external force caused by opening or closing the door or the like.

In the gaming machine K5, the operating section includes an engaging section configured to be engageable with the guiding means, the biasing means is arranged at the center of the operating section, and the engaging section is connected to the operating section. A game machine K6 characterized in that it is arranged at a position away from the center of the part.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5, even if an external force of unknown direction is applied to the limiting means in the first state of the limiting means, the operating portion is displaced about the engaging portion as a fulcrum. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change, which is limited to (posture change). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the limiting means from changing from the first state to the second state due to external forces such as opening and closing of the door, vibrations during shipping, and the like.

In the game machine K6, the restricting means is arranged on the back side of the area forming means configured to be rotatable on the support shaft on the left and right side, and the engaging portion is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft. A gaming machine K7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K6, the state of the restricting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging portion of the restricting means. It is possible to facilitate the operation when operating the control means. That is, when the front door is opened, the engaging portion is arranged on the side where the opening width is large (opposite side of the support shaft), so that the operating position of the restricting means can be further forward.

A gaming machine K8 characterized in that, in the gaming machine K7, the limiting means is arranged on the support shaft side of the area configuring means.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, the restricting means is arranged on the support shaft side, so that the operator who opens the front door for work is prevented from accidentally touching the restricting means. can do.

In addition, since the load applied to the restricting means when the front door is opened and closed can be reduced compared to the case where the restricting means is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft, the restricting means can be displaced by the impact caused by the opening and closing of the front door. change can be prevented.

A gaming machine K9 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the displacement means guides the displacement of the limiting means in the first state.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the displacement guidance accuracy when the restriction means acts on the displacement means in a state where the displacement guidance accuracy of the restriction means alone is reduced is can be improved.

A gaming machine K10 characterized in that any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9 is provided with prevention notification means for notifying to prevent continuation of the energized state when energized in the first state.

According to the game machine K10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K1 to K9, the prevention notification means can notify to switch the state of the restriction means from the first state.

In addition, the mode of notification is not limited at all. For example, the error display may be notified by displaying it on a liquid crystal display device, or by outputting a notification sound from a speaker, or by illuminating a predetermined lighting means (or keeping it off). You can notify us by

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine comprising a container for containing an object, comprising an operation means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, and an opening formed in the container at a position corresponding to the operation means. A gaming machine L0 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). The board box is sealed to prevent tampering with the control board.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operating means is provided on the control board, it is necessary to open the board box in order to operate the operating means. Therefore, there was a problem that it took time and effort.

According to the game machine L0, the operation means arranged on the object and formed to be operable is provided, and the container has an opening at a position corresponding to the operation means, so that the operation means can be operated through the opening. can be manipulated. That is, it is unnecessary to open the container when operating the operating means. Therefore, labor can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Board Boxes A100 and A2100 (Coating Parts A270 and A2270) as Examples>
In the game machine L0, the operation means has a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container has a facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. M1.

According to the game machine M1, in addition to the effects of the game machine L0, the operation means has the first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container has the facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the container through the opening.

In the game machine M1, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and the opposing portion is at least a range of the first surface of the operating means excluding the displacement trajectory of the operator. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that it is arranged facing a part of it.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, the facing portion is arranged to face at least a part of the range excluding the displacement trajectory of the manipulator in the first surface of the manipulator. In addition, the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing portion while suppressing the insertion of the operating element into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operating element. Insertion can be suppressed.

In the game machine M1 or M2, the game machine M3 is characterized in that the facing portion is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end, so that the shape is simplified and moldability is improved. can be secured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

A game machine M4 characterized in that, in the game machine M3, a projection is provided in the facing portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M3, the opposing portion is provided with a projecting portion, so that the rigidity of the opposing portion can be increased and damage thereof can be suppressed.

In addition, the protrusion may be formed as a ridge extending in a streak shape.

In the game machine M4, the game machine M5 is characterized in that the projecting portion projects from a surface of the facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machine M4, the protrusion is provided so as to protrude from the surface of the opposing portion facing the first surface of the operation means, so that the first surface of the operation means and the opposing portion It is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the inside of the container through the gap by reducing the gap between the surfaces.

A gaming machine M6, wherein the protrusion is brought into contact with the first surface of the operating means in the gaming machine M5.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M5, the protrusion abuts against the first surface of the operation means, so that the contact portion and the first surface of the operation means are in contact with each other. It is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container by eliminating the gap between them.

In addition, since the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, even if the facing part is pushed by the operating element in the insertion direction when the operating element is inserted into the operating means, the facing part moves in the insertion direction. deformation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress damage to the base end side of the opposing portion.

In addition, since the facing portion is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end, the elastic deformation of the facing portion is used to form and maintain the state in which the protrusion is in contact ( That is, it is possible to increase the degree of close contact and suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire.

A game machine M7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a ridge extending in a stripe shape.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a ridge extending in a stripe shape, so that the rigidity of the facing part can be further increased. At the same time, it is possible to easily suppress insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the container.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the operating means is operated by being displaced by inserting an operator, and the facing portion has an edge that abuts against the operator inserted into the operating means. A gaming machine M8 characterized in that it is formed in such a way that:

Here, if the manipulator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly manipulates the manipulator in the lateral direction or carelessly opens and closes the member in which the container is arranged) , and when the manipulator collides with another member and is pushed laterally, the manipulating means is also tilted, and the load on the base of the manipulating means (the part connected to the object) increases. In addition, when the displacement (for example, rotation) of the operator inserted into the operation means becomes excessive, the operation means is also displaced in the direction of the displacement, and the load on the base of the operation means (the part connected to the object) becomes large. Become. In these cases, there is a risk that the operating means will fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion that connects the operating means and the object will break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the opposing portion is formed such that the edge portion can abut against the operator inserted into the operating means. The manipulator (that is, the position farther from the fulcrum when the manipulator tilts) is brought into contact with the edge of the facing portion, thereby suppressing tilting and excessive displacement of the manipulator. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

A gaming machine M9 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the containing body comprises a covering portion covering one end side of the operating means.

According to the game machine M9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M1 to M8, the containing body is provided with the covering portion covering one end side of the operating means, so that the gap between the operating means and the covering portion is eliminated. It can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

Here, in the case where the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, if the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly When the operator is pushed laterally by colliding with another member by accidentally opening or closing the member in which the container is arranged, the operating means is also tilted, and the operating means is also tilted. The load on the base of the means (the part connected to the object) increases. In this case, there is a risk that the operating means will fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion that connects the operating means and the object will break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, since the covering portion covers one end side of the operating means, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion, thereby suppressing the tilting of the operating means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

A game machine M10 characterized in that in the game machine M9, the outer shape of the base end side opposite to the one end side of the operating means is larger than the inner shape of the covering portion.

According to the game machine M10, in addition to the effects of the game machine M9, the outer shape of the operation means on the base end side opposite to the one end side is made larger than the inner shape of the cover, so that the operation means on the base end side and the covering portion can be curved. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion and the operation means has a bulging portion formed by swelling, and the other of the covering portion and the operation means has a receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion. A gaming machine M11 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effects of either the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion and the operation means has a bulging portion, and the other of the covering portion and the operation means Since the receiving portion is provided for receiving the bulging portion, the gap between the bulging portion and the receiving portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

A gaming machine M12 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction.

According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction. Excessive displacement (in particular, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In any one of game machines M1 to M12, game machine M13 is characterized in that the container has an erected wall erected from the inner surface thereof and whose erected end abuts against the object.

According to the game machine M13, in addition to the effects of the game machines M1 to M12, the container is provided with an erected wall erected from the inner surface of the container, the erected tip of which contacts the object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

A gaming machine M14 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M13, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means.

According to the game machine M14, in addition to the effects of the game machine M13, the erected wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means, so that it is possible to block the path for entering the container. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic parts are mounted, and the side on which the electronic parts are connected to the circuit of the control board by soldering is the side on which the operation means is arranged. is set on the opposite side of the gaming machine M15.

According to the game machine M15, in addition to the effects of the game machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic parts are mounted, and the surface of the control board for connecting the electronic parts to the circuit by soldering serves as the operation means. is set on the side opposite to the side on which the is arranged, so that the erected end of the erected wall can be easily brought into close contact with the object (control board), and the object (control board) and the erected wall It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between Therefore, the erected wall can reliably function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts, thereby suppressing the insertion of the foreign object such as a wire into the container.

A game machine M16 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines M13 to M15, the erected wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the erected tip is reduced.

According to the game machine M16, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M13 to M15, the standing wall is formed in a plate shape and the thickness dimension of the tip of the standing wall is reduced, so that the wall is brought into contact with the object. In addition, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire from between the object and the erected tip by increasing the surface pressure at the erected tip. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

A gaming machine M17 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M16, the erected tip of the erected wall has a tapered surface formed on the surface on the operation means side, thereby reducing the thickness dimension of the erected tip.

According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M16, the thickness dimension of the standing tip of the standing wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operating means side of the standing wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign matter such as a wire into the container while improving the moldability. That is, by forming the tapered surface, it is possible to moderate the shape change and ensure the fluidity of the resin in the mold. On the other hand, when the standing tip of the standing wall is brought into contact with the object, a groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening can be moved (guided) along the groove described above. That is, it can be made difficult to pass between the standing wall and the object. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In any one of the game machines M9 to M12, the container has one outer surface formed of a first region and a second region positioned closer to the object than the first region. A gaming machine M18 characterized in that the covering portion is protruded from two areas.

According to the game machine M18, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M9 to M12, the container is one of the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region. Since the side outer surface is formed and the covering portion protrudes from the second region, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased. Therefore, the area in which the covering portion covers the operating means (the area that suppresses the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire, and the area that contacts the operating means to suppress tilting and displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container and to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

The gaming machine M19 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, and the opening is formed on the projecting tip side of the covering portion.

According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion projects from the outer surface of the container, and an opening is formed on the projecting tip side of the covering portion, so that wires and the like can be removed. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a foreign object to reach the opening.

For example, when the opening cannot be visually recognized due to a shield, etc., and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening, the tip of the foreign object such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container to reach the opening. method is done. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M19, when the tip of a foreign object such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container, the tip of the foreign object such as the wire is caused to hit the outer surface of the covering portion, progress can be stopped. In other words, the outer surface of the covering portion can be made to function as a wall that restricts the sliding of foreign objects such as wires. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate box A100 (standing walls A280, A290) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and the containing body is formed so as to be able to abut against the operating means or the outer surface of the operator. Game machine N1 to play.

Here, if the manipulator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly manipulates the manipulator in the lateral direction or carelessly opens and closes the member in which the container is arranged) , and when the manipulator collides with another member and is pressed laterally), the manipulator is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, there is a risk that the displaced (tilted) operation means will be damaged (for example, the connecting part that connects the operation means and the object will come off or break).

On the other hand, according to the game machine N1, in addition to the effects of the game machine L0, the container is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the outer surface of the operation means or the operation element, so that the operation means or the operation element can be placed in the container. It is possible to receive and suppress the displacement of the operating means. As a result, damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

In game machine N1, game machine N2 is characterized in that the container has an erected wall erected from the inner surface thereof and whose erected end abuts against the object.

If the container receives the displaced (tilted) operating means, the container may be deformed and damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine N2, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1, the containing body is provided with an erected wall erected from the inner surface of the container and whose erected end contacts the object. serves as a support, and deformation of the container can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

At the same time, the deformation of the container is suppressed by the support of the erected wall, so that tilting of the operation means can be suppressed more reliably. As a result, damage to the operating means can be easily suppressed.

The game machine N3 is characterized in that, in the game machine N2, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2, the erected wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means, so that the erected wall is prevented from tilting in any direction of the operation means. As a support, deformation of the container can be suppressed. Therefore, breakage of the container can be suppressed.

In addition, the standing wall can block the path for entering the inside of the container. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the game machine N3, the erected wall is connected to an inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the erected wall is erected.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N3, the erected wall is connected to the inner surface of the container different from the inner surface of the container on which the erected wall is erected, so that the rigidity of the container is increased. can be used to increase the rigidity of the erected walls, and the connection between the inner surfaces can increase the rigidity of the entire container. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the function of the standing wall as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) for suppressing deformation of the container when the operation means is tilted. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

A gaming machine N5 in any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, wherein the containing body comprises a covering portion covering one end side of the operating means.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines N1 to N4, the containing body has a covering portion covering one end side of the operating means, so that the operating means is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion. Therefore, tilting of the operation means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

Further, according to the gaming machine N5, the one end side of the operating means is covered with the covering part, so that the gap between the operating means and the covering part can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, the container has a ridge protruding from the outer surface and extending in a streak shape, and one end of the ridge extends from the outer surface of the container. A gaming machine N6, characterized by being connected to the cover.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the housing body, and the housing body is provided with ridges that protrude from the outer surface and extend in a stripe shape. Since one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion, the ridge functions as a rib and the covering portion can be supported by the ridge. Therefore, the operation means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion, and tilting of the operation means can be suppressed, and breakage of the covering portion at that time can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In addition, since the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the area in which the covering portion covers the operating means (the area that suppresses the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire, and the area that contacts the operating means to suppress tilting and displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container and to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the game machine N6, the container has a display portion formed on its outer surface to display predetermined information, and the display portion is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effects of the game machine N6, the container has a display portion formed on its outer surface to display predetermined information, and the display portion is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion. Therefore, the protrusion can also function as an indication line for indicating the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machine N6 or N7, the operation means has a first surface facing the opening of the housing body, and the operation means is operated by inserting the operator into the first surface and displacing the housing body. A game characterized in that the body is provided with a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means, and the facing portion is formed such that an edge portion can come into contact with the manipulator inserted into the operating means. Machine N8.

According to the game machine N8, in addition to the effects of the game machine N6 or N7, the operation means has a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container has a facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. Since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the container through the opening.

In addition, since the edge of the opposing portion is formed so as to be able to abut against the operation element inserted into the operation means, the operation element (that is, the position farther from the fulcrum when the operation means tilts) can be brought into contact with the part to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the manipulator. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

In the game machine N8, the facing portion is arranged to face at least part of a range of the first surface of the operation means excluding the displacement trajectory of the manipulator.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N8, the opposing portion is arranged in at least a part of the range excluding the displacement trajectory of the operator in the first surface of the operator. The area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing portion while suppressing interference with the insertion into the operation means and the displacement of the inserted operation element, so that a foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the container through the opening. can be suppressed.

Also, by increasing the area of the facing portion that abuts the displaced manipulator, it is possible to easily suppress excessive displacement of the manipulator (in particular, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction). As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive displacement of the operating means and prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the gaming machine N9, the operating means is formed so as to be able to displace the operator to a first position, and the position at which one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is displaced to the first position. A gaming machine N10 characterized in that the child and the facing portion are positioned at abutting positions.

In the game machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed so as to be able to displace the operator to a second position different from the first position, and the position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is the first position. A gaming machine N11 characterized in that the operating element displaced to position 2 and the facing portion are positioned to abut against each other.

According to the game machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effects of the game machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed so that the operation element can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion. is a position where the manipulator displaced to the first position or the second position contacts the facing portion, so that the manipulator displaced to the first position or the second position contacts the facing portion. The ridges can be used to effectively prevent the facing portion and the covering portion from being damaged when they come into contact with each other.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (operation wall A210) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the container has one outer surface formed by a first region and a second region positioned closer to the object than the first region, and the opening is formed in the second region. is formed.

Here, since the operation means can be operated through the opening, it is unnecessary to open the container when operating the operation means. Therefore, labor can be suppressed. However, there is a risk that a foreign object such as a wire may be inserted through the opening.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, the container has one outer surface formed of the first region and the second region positioned closer to the object than the first region. Since the opening is formed in the container, the opening can be arranged at a position recessed from the outer surface of the container, and a step (connection surface) connecting the first area and the second area can be arranged around the opening. As a result, the distance to the opening can be increased and the position of the opening can be made difficult to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container through the opening. That is, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activity.

In the gaming machine O1, at least part of a connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area. O2.

Here, considering heat radiation from the object (control board), the container (board box) needs to secure a distance (internal space) between the object (control board) and the inner surface. On the other hand, if the opening is too far from the operating means, operability will deteriorate. Therefore, by forming the opening in the second region, it is possible to easily ensure the operability of the operating means, and as described above, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container through the opening. . However, when operating the operating means, the operator's hand interferes with the step (connecting surface) between the first area and the second area, which interferes with the operation. Therefore, there is a possibility that the operability of operating the operating means may deteriorate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, since at least a part of the connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, the gaming machine In addition to the effect of O1, the downward slope expands the space connected to the second area, thereby improving the operability when operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine O2, the second area is formed as a generally rectangular area in a front view, the length dimension along one direction being larger than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction, and the operation means includes an operation A game machine O3 characterized in that the operation element is operated by being inserted and displaced, and the attitude of the operation element when the operation element is inserted into the operation means or pulled out from the operation means is the attitude along the other direction. .

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, the second area is a generally rectangular area in a front view whose length dimension along one direction is greater than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction. , and the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing the operation element, and the attitude of the operation element when the operation element is inserted into or pulled out from the operation means is the attitude along the other direction. A space can be secured on the opposite side of the gripping surface by directing the surface for gripping the child in the longitudinal direction of the second region. Therefore, when the manipulator is inserted into or pulled out from the manipulator, it is possible to prevent the fingers holding the manipulator from interfering with the container. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the longitudinal center of the second area, and the connection surface located on one longitudinal side of the second area extends from the first area to the second area. A gaming machine O4 characterized by being inclined downward toward an area.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effects of the game machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the longitudinal center of the second area, and the connecting surface located on the one longitudinal side of the second area is the second area. Since it is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, it is possible to suppress interference of fingers other than the gripping fingers with the container when gripping and displacing the manipulator. For example, when the manipulator is gripped with the index finger and thumb and the manipulator is displaced (for example, rotated), the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface and the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region are A space for moving the little finger side can be secured, and interference between the little finger side and the container can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

A game machine O5 characterized in that, in the game machine O4, the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second area.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O4, the connecting surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second area. Means can be protected. For example, it is possible to suppress damage to the operating means by suppressing interference with other members during manufacturing. In addition, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container through the opening by making it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening.

In addition, since the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be expanded accordingly. The volume of the internal space of the container can be increased.

In any one of the game machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction of the second area, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the short direction of the second area. A gaming machine O6 characterized by:

According to the game machine O6, in any one of the game machines O3 to O5, a connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction in the second area, and no connection surface is formed on the other side in the short direction in the second area. , the other side of the second region in the short direction can be opened. Therefore, when the manipulator is gripped with fingers and operated (insertion into the operating means, withdrawal from the manipulating means, or displacement (eg, rotation) of the manipulator), the gripped fingers (eg, thumb and forefinger) The above-described open space can be used as a space for arranging or displacing a finger different from the finger. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

In any one of game machines O3 to O6, the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, and the other connecting surfaces are inclined downward from the first area. A gaming machine O7 characterized by being substantially orthogonal to the area and the second area.

According to the game machine O7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, and the other Since the connection surface of is substantially perpendicular to the first region and the second region, it is possible to secure the effect of downwardly sloping the connection surface while coping with heat dissipation from the object (control board). The volume of the internal space can be secured. That is, it is possible to minimize the reduction in the volume of the internal space of the container due to the downward inclination of the connection surface.

The game machine O4 or O5 comprises a base body on which the container is disposed, and a rotating shaft that rotatably supports the base body, and the longitudinal direction of the second region is the axial direction of the rotating shaft. It is characterized by being substantially orthogonal and having a lateral direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal side of the second region being arranged farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal side. game machine O8.

According to the game machine O8, in addition to the effects of the game machine O4 or O5, the base body on which the container is arranged and the rotation shaft rotatably supporting the base body are provided, and the longitudinal direction in the second region is provided. The direction is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, the lateral direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal side of the second region is arranged farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal side. Therefore, when the operating means is operated in the space formed by rotating the base body around the rotation axis, the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface can be effectively utilized. That is, it is possible to secure a space for allowing a worker's (operator's) hand to access the operation means by the amount of the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A game machine having a container for containing an object, comprising: a display device arranged in a game area; A gaming machine P1 characterized in that information can be displayed on the display device.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operating means are arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the operating state of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine P1, it is provided with a display device arranged in a game area and operation means arranged on an object and formed to be operable, and information regarding operation of the operation means can be displayed on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the operation means based on the display of the display device. In addition, by arranging the display means in the game area, the display means can also be used as a device for displaying information about the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

A game machine P2, wherein the container is formed to be displaceable in the game machine P1.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, since the container is formed displaceable, the container is arranged (displaced) at a position where the operation means can operate while viewing the display device. be able to. As a result, it is possible to operate while confirming the display (information), so that operability can be improved and operation errors can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the operation means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

In the game machine P2, the containing body can be displaced to a position where the surface of the containing body on which the operating means is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be viewed at the same time. P3.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P2, the container can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the container are arranged and the display surface of the display device can be viewed simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of operating the operating means while checking the display on the display device. As a result, improvement in operability and suppression of erroneous operations can be achieved more reliably.

In the game machine P3, the container is rotatably pivotally supported, and the operation means is arranged farther from the center of the container than the center of the container.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P3, the container is rotatably pivotally supported, and the operation means is arranged farther from the center of the container than the center of the container. In a state in which the container is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the container are arranged and the display surface of the display device are visible at the same time, the operation means is moved to a position farther from the outer edge of the main body of the game machine. can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the operation means from interfering with the outer edge of the game machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

In the gaming machine P4, the operation means is composed of a plurality of means, and the second operation means, which is operated more frequently than the first operation means, is farther from the pivotally supported position than the first operation means. A gaming machine P5 characterized in that it is arranged in the .

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects of the game machine P4, the operation means are composed of a plurality of means, and the second operation means, which has a higher frequency of operation than the first operation means, is operated more frequently than the first operation means. Since it is arranged on the far side from the pivotally supported position, the frequently operated operating means (first operating means) can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the main body of the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the finger from interfering with the outer edge of the main body of the game machine when operating the operating means (first operating means) with high operating frequency. As a result, operability can be improved.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A game machine comprising a container for containing an object, comprising an operating means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, wherein one or more electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the A game machine Q1 characterized in that whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the state of connection of an electrical connection line to the object.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operation means is provided on the control board (object), there is room for improvement in terms of whether or not the operation means can be operated. That is, if operation is permitted regardless of the state of connection of one or more electrical connection lines to an object, there is a risk that the operation means will be more likely to be operated illegally. If the operation is prohibited regardless of the state, there is a risk that the workability of the operation associated with the operation of the operation means will be deteriorated.

According to the gaming machine Q1, an operation means is provided on an object and formed to be operable, one or a plurality of electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the electrical connection line is connected to the object. Since whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the state, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

A gaming machine Q2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine Q1, the container is formed to be displaceable.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q1, the container is displaceable, so that the container can be arranged (displaced) at a position where the operation means can be easily operated. As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, when the operation means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that it is possible to suppress fraud. In this case, when displacing the container, at least one electrical connection wire is released (pulled out) from the object, so whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection wire. This configuration is particularly effective in suppressing fraud and improving workability.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state in which at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected to the object. Q3.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected. It is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability. That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, the operation of the operation means is prohibited, so that fraud can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the connection of a predetermined electrical connection line to the object is secured and fraud can be suppressed, the operation means can be used even if other electrical connection lines are released (pulled out) from the object. By permitting the operation, it is possible to improve workability (ensuring versatility).

In particular, in a configuration in which the container is made displaceable, another electrical connection line released (unplugged) from the object in order to displace the container (i.e., arrange it for easy operation) can be connected to the container. After displacing the other electrical connection line that has been released (pulled out), for example, by interposing an extension line between the object and the other electrical connection line in order to allow the operation of the operation means avoids the trouble of reconnecting to the object.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, when at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object, the operation of the operating means is prohibited. Q4.

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q1 or Q2, when at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object (that is, all electrical connections If the line is not connected to the object), the operation of the operating means is prohibited, so that the illegal operation of the operating means can be suppressed.

In addition, in a configuration in which the container is formed to be displaceable, another electrical connection line released (pulled out) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, to arrange it so that it is easy to operate) is connected to the container. After displacing , for example, by interposing an extension wire between the object and another electrical connection line and reconnecting the released (disconnected) other electrical connection line to the object, the operation Since it is possible to allow the operation of the means, it is possible to perform work by operating the operation means.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A3100 and A4100 as examples>
A game machine having a container for containing an object, comprising an operating means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, the container being formed to be displaceable and arranged during a game. The game machine R1 is characterized in that it can be displaced to a position where the operation means is easier to operate than the position.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that the operability of the operating means is insufficient.

According to the game machine R1, the operation means arranged on the object and formed to be operable is provided, and the container is formed to be displaceable, and the operation means is easier to operate than the position where it is arranged during the game. Since the position can be displaced, the operability of the operating means can be improved.

In the game machine R1, the container is rotatably pivotally supported and is displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1, the container is rotatably pivotally supported and displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion, so that the container is displaced. Structure can be simplified. As a result, product costs can be reduced.

In the game machine R1 or R2, the game machine R3 is characterized in that, in the position where the container is disposed during the game, a separate member faces the operation means.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1 or R2, the container faces the operation means at the position where the container is arranged during the game, so that the operation means is illegally operated. can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and in a state in which the operator is inserted, the operator is brought into contact with the separate member to operate the operating means. The game machine R4 is characterized in that the container cannot be displaced to the position where it is disposed during the game.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effects of the game machine R3, the operation means is operated by inserting the operator and displacing it, and when the operator is inserted, the operator contacts another member. By being in contact, the containing body cannot be displaced to the position where it is disposed during a game, so that it is possible to prevent forgetting to pull out the manipulator. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegal use of the operator.

<One guide route has a portion located higher than the other guide route>
A game machine comprising a game area in which game balls flow down, a first state that constitutes a guide route capable of guiding game balls, and a route configuration means that can be switched between a second state that does not configure the guide route, The route configuration means can configure a first guide route and a second guide route different from the first guide route as the guide routes, and the first guide route is more suitable than the second guide route. A game machine XA1, characterized by comprising an upper arrangement portion arranged on the upper side of the game machine XA1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the detecting means is arranged so that the detection opening of the big winning opening is oriented sideways, and the operation member for rolling the balls toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. A game in which a predetermined number or more of balls are prevented from passing through the detection opening of the detection means by dropping the balls that have been on the guide path on the operation member at the time of the operation, triggered by passing through the opening. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the ball dropped from the guide path is directed toward the out port. There is a problem that there is a risk of causing a difference in game efficiency.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, even if the game ball falls from the first guide path, if the game ball falls from the upper arrangement portion, the game ball is rescued to the second position. 2 It can be put on the guidance route. Since the rescued game balls are guided to a predetermined ball entry area, compared to the structure in which many balls that have fallen from the guide path go to the out hole as spilled balls, the game can be played according to the way of playing. Efficiency changes can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine XA1, the ball-entering area includes a first ball-entering area and a second ball-entering area different from the first ball-entering area, and the first guide path leads to the first ball-entering area. A game ball is configured to be guided, the second guide path is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the second ball entry area, and the second guide path is arranged above the first guide path. A game machine XA2 characterized by comprising an upper arrangement portion that

According to the gaming machine XA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XA1, even if the game ball falls from the second guide path, if the game ball falls from the upper arrangement portion of the second guide path , the game ball can be put on the first guide route by rescuing it. That is, it is possible to achieve the effect of suppressing the change in game efficiency not only for the game ball falling from the first guide path but also for the game ball falling from the second guide path.

A game machine XA3, wherein in the game machine XA1 or XA2, the first guide route and the second guide route are configured to intersect when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine XA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XA1 or XA2, the upper arrangement portion of one guide route can be arranged above (directly above) the other guide route.

Note that the crossing position is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the center of the first guide route and the center of the second guide route may intersect. In this case, the easiness of rescue becomes equal between the left and right sides.

For example, the lower side of the first guide route and the lower side of the second guide route may intersect. In this case, the distance from the crossing position to the first and second ball entry areas is shortened, which has the advantage of shortening the period in which the game ball flows down the opponent's path, and it can be placed above the crossing position. There is an advantage that the number of game balls can be increased.

For example, the first guide route above the center and the second guide route above the center may intersect.

For example, the first guide route below the center and the second guide route above the center may intersect. In this case, it is easier to save the game ball when it falls from the first guide path side to the second guide path side than in the opposite case.

In this case, the movable member that constitutes the first guide path is composed of a feather member that rotates and displaces upward so as to rescue the ball, thereby facilitating the rescue of the game ball falling from the second guide path. Also good.

In any one of the gaming machines XA1 to XA3, a first route forming means for forming the first guide route and a second route forming means for forming the second guide route are provided, and the first route forming means is configured to form the second guide route. The game machine XA4 is characterized by comprising a relief part projecting through the lower side of the path constructing means.

It should be noted that there are cases in which the first path configuring means can achieve the same effect without going through the lower side than the second path configuring means. For example, even when projecting above the second path constructing means, if the vertical difference is less than the radius of the game ball, the first path constructing means is made to slip below the center of the game ball. is possible, and the game ball can be easily placed on the first path forming means.

Furthermore, in the description of crawling below the center of the game ball, at least the point where contact with the game ball starts should be below the center of the ball. That is, for example, even if the part other than the point where the game ball starts contacting is arranged above the center of the ball, the game ball is pushed upward after contact with the game ball. It can be placed on the first route constructing means.

The game machine XA5, wherein the relief part constitutes the lower flow path of the first guide path in the game machine XA4.

According to the gaming machine XA5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XA4, it is possible to save a game ball that is about to enter the first ball entry area.

A game machine XA6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines XA3 to XA5, the inclination of the first guide path and the inclination of the second guide path are horizontally opposite to each other.

According to the game machine XA6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines XA3 to XA5, the vertical width in which the first guide path and the second guide path are arranged can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines XA3 to XA6, it is arranged on the first guide route or the second guide route on the lower side (disadvantage side) of the intersection position between the first guide route and the second guide route. The game machine XA7 is characterized in that it is configured so that the number of game balls is one.

According to the game machine XA7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines XA3 to XA6, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of loose balls.

In the gaming machine XA7, the game machine XA8 is characterized in that decelerating means for decelerating a game ball is arranged above the intersection position (advantageous side) than below the intersection position.

According to the gaming machine XA8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XA7, by decelerating the game ball by the decelerating means, the interval between the game balls before and after passing through the decelerating means can be adjusted.

In addition, since the position of the game ball can be notified to the player by the change in the speed of the game ball, the player's attention to the game ball can be improved. That is, it is possible to easily grasp whether the game ball is arranged on the advantageous side or the disadvantageous side of the crossing position, depending on the flowing speed of the game ball.

<Guidance route configuration means for obtaining a feeling of hitting the ball>
A first state comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a predetermined ball entry area into which the game ball that has flowed down the game area can enter, and a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the ball entry area; In a gaming machine comprising path construction means capable of switching between a second state in which the guide path is not constructed and a second state in which the guide path is not constructed, the path construction means determines whether a game ball that has reached the guide path enters the ball entry area. The game machine XB1 is characterized in that the period can be changed in a plurality of types.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the detecting means is arranged so that the detection opening of the big winning opening is oriented sideways, and the operation member for rolling the balls toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. A game in which a predetermined number or more of balls are prevented from passing through the detection opening of the detection means by dropping the balls that have been on the guide path on the operation member at the time of the operation, triggered by passing through the opening. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the flow-down path to the operating member is almost the same, the game balls are spaced apart in a normal shooting mode (a mode in which game balls are continuously shot at specified intervals). Since the game ball is easily reached and is guided to the detection port along the upper surface of the operating member (operating member 100), the flow speed of the game ball is easily suppressed, so that the game ball is continuously delivered to the detection port without a gap. It was difficult for the situation to pass through. Therefore, there is a problem that it is easy to have a gap between payouts, and it is difficult to give the player a feeling of hitting the ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XB1, since the path construction means is configured to be able to change the period until the game ball passes through the ball entry area, the intervals at which the game ball reaches the path construction means are equal. Even if there is an interval, since the interval between the game balls can be changed in the path constructing means, by reducing the interval between the two specific game balls, the game balls continuously pass through the ball entry area. can be generated. As a result, even when the game is played in the above-described normal shooting mode, it is possible to intentionally cause the game balls to be paid out at short intervals, thereby giving the player a feeling of hitting the ball.

Note that various modes are exemplified for the means for changing the period. For example, a mode in which the ball-entering area to which the game ball is guided may be switched midway, or a mode in which the game ball can reach different positions in the guide path of the ball-entering area may be employed.

In the game machine XB1, a plurality of flow-down routes to the guide route are configured so that the distance between one flow-down route and the ball-entering area is different from the distance between the other flow-down route and the ball-entering area. A gaming machine XB2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine XB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XB1, it is possible to easily shift the arrival timing of the game balls to the ball entry area even when the game balls are shot at equal intervals. As a result, it is possible to change the interval between the game balls entering the ball entering area.

A gaming machine XB3, in the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, wherein the ball-entering area comprises a first ball-entering area and a second ball-entering area.

According to the gaming machine XB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the game balls entering the ball entering area are changed or switched by changing or switching the ball entering area guided by the path configuration means. can be varied.

In the gaming machine XB3, the path construction means can change between a first guide state for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering area and a second guide state for guiding the game ball to the second ball entering area. A gaming machine XB4 characterized by comprising a state changing means configured as:

According to the gaming machine XB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XB3, it is possible to easily change the interval between the game balls entering the ball entry area by changing the state of the state changing means.

In addition, the mode of the state changing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one that is electrically controlled, or one whose state is changed by contact with a ball (a pendulum member or a seesaw-like member).

The gaming machine XB5 in the gaming machine XB4 is characterized in that the state changing means is electrically controlled so as to be capable of shortening the ball entry interval of the game ball into the ball entry area in a predetermined period after the state change.

According to the gaming machine XB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XB4, it is possible to facilitate the continuous ball-entering in the predetermined period after the state change. As a result, it is possible to generate unevenness in payout of prize balls by entering the ball entering area, and to suppress over-winning as compared to the case of shortening the ball entering interval in a predetermined period before the state change. can be done.

In any one of the gaming machines XB3 to XB5, the guide path includes a first guide path configured to guide the game ball to the first ball entering area and a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the second ball entering area. and a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball in the advantageous side range of the first guide path in which the game ball placed can reach the second guide path. A game machine XB6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine XB6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines XB3 to XB5, the game balls are decelerated by the decelerating means on the first guide path, and in a state where the interval between the game balls is narrowed, the second When the game ball reaches the guide path, it is possible to narrow the ball-entering interval to the second ball-entering area.

<Two plates play the role of an opening and closing plate>
A game machine comprising a game area in which game balls flow down, a first state that constitutes a guide route capable of guiding game balls, and a route configuration means that can be switched between a second state that does not configure the guide route, The path forming means comprises first and second forming means configured to be displaceable to form the guide path, and a guide path for reducing a gap between the first and second forming means. A game machine XC1 comprising: gap reducing means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a pair of movable members that are rotated and opened and closed by a rotating shaft extending on the front side of the game board form a guide path that guides game balls toward the same detection opening. There are gaming machines that

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, a gap is provided between the movable members in order to prevent the game ball from being caught. There is a problem that there is a risk of adverse effects such as slippage or game balls getting caught in the gaps.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XC1, the clearance reducing means reduces the gap between the first constituting means and the second constituting means, so that when the game ball rolls, the first constituting means or the second constituting means It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the is displaced or the game ball is caught in the gap.

Incidentally, the mode of the gap reducing means is not limited at all. For example, the first and second constituent means may be configured to be displaceable, and arranged to face each other so as to be in contact with each other in the displacement direction. In this case, the gap can be filled in the contact state. Further, for example, the first and second constituent means may be configured to be displaceable, arranged opposite to each other on the side orthogonal to the displacement direction, and configured to gradually narrow the gap (the gap is eliminated). It may be made to slide afterwards). In this case, the load applied to the first and second constituent means can be reduced.

In addition, the mode of the gap reducing means is not limited at all. For example, when the first forming means and the second forming means form the same straight guide path, the means may be formed so as to narrow the gap generated in a part of the straight line, or the first forming means may form the guide path. If the guide route and the guide route formed by the second composing means are different (for example, if they are not on the same straight line), the means configured to narrow the interval between the different guide routes may be used.

In addition, the displacement direction of the first component and the second component is not limited at all. For example, they may be parallel to each other or non-parallel to each other.

In the game machine XC1, the game machine XC2 is characterized in that the gap reducing means is arranged in a partitioning member that partitions the guide path.

According to the gaming machine XC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XC1, the gap reducing means can be easily arranged. In addition, the mode of the gap reducing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a fixed portion or a movable portion.

In addition, when the gap reducing means is a fixed part, it may be arranged, for example, on the design member arranged on the front side of the guide path, or it may be arranged on the opposite side (back side) of the design member. It may be arranged on a member.

In the game machine XC1 or XC2, the gap reducing means suppresses displacement of the first or second constituting means in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first or second constituting means. A gaming machine XC3 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine XC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XC1 or XC2, the gap reducing means improves the stability of the arrangement of the first or second constituting means in the direction intersecting the displacement direction. can be done. The mode of intersection of the displacement directions is not limited at all, and may be any direction that is non-parallel to the displacement direction of the first component or the second component.

In any one of the game machines XC1 to XC3, the clearance reducing means reduces the first or second constituent means at least partly while the first or second constituent means is stopped or displaced. A game machine XC4 characterized in that it is configured to support.

According to the gaming machine XC4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines XC1 to XC3, the member supporting the first constituent means or the second constituent means can also serve as the gap reducing means, so that the number of members can be increased. It is possible to achieve functionalization and a reduction in the arrangement space of members.

In any one of the game machines XC1 to XC5, the game machine XC6 is characterized in that the gap reducing means is configured integrally with the first component means or the second component means.

According to the game machine XC6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines XC1 to XC5, the gap reduction means can be displaced by displacing the first component means or the second component means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid reduction in the degree of freedom in designing the guide route.

A gaming machine XC7 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines XC1 to XC6, the displacement direction of the first constituent means and the displacement direction of the second constituent means are non-parallel.

According to the game machine XC7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines XC1 to XC6, the gap after the displacement is made non-parallel in the displacement direction compared to the gaps before the displacement of the first constituent means and the second constituent means. It can be narrowed down by using

Note that the oblique displacement mode means an oblique direction with respect to the front, rear, left, and right directions as the normal displacement direction of the path forming means, but is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement directions of both the first and second structuring means may be oblique, or one of the first structuring means and the second structuring means may be oblique.

In the former case, the displacement directions of both the first and second constituent means are arranged obliquely, and the case where the displacement directions are parallel to each other is excluded. That is, the displacement direction of the first component and the displacement direction of the second component are required to be relatively oblique (non-parallel). This non-parallel may not be parallel, and the relative angle of the displacement direction may be 90 degrees.

The direction of oblique displacement of the route forming means is not limited at all. The effect of rubbing the game ball can be expected due to the frictional resistance of the As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the game ball entering the ball entering area.

Also, in the first configuration means or the second configuration means, the displacement directions do not have to be non-parallel to each other throughout the displacement. That is, for example, it may be composed of both a section with parallel displacement directions and a section with non-parallel displacement directions.

<Auxiliary Means Constituting Guidance Route Together with Variable Means>
A game machine comprising a game area in which game balls flow down, a first state that constitutes a guide route capable of guiding game balls, and a route configuration means that can be switched between a second state that does not configure the guide route, The game machine XD1 is characterized in that the route constructing means comprises displaceable variable means and auxiliary means for assisting the guide route.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine configured so that a game ball is guided along the upper surfaces of the opening/closing members 30a and 31a (variable means) (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-159997). reference). Originally, the opening and closing members 30a and 31a should be free-form in design. , 31a need to be thickly designed, and the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing members 30a, 31a is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine XD1, since the guide route is composed of not only the variable means but also the variable means and the auxiliary means, it is possible to eliminate the need to receive the load from the game ball only by the variable means. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the variable means, for example, it is possible to form the variable means to be thin.

Furthermore, as another effect of configuring the variable means with a thin wall, the weight of the variable means can be reduced, so that the displacement speed of the variable means can be improved and the size of the drive means for driving the variable means can be reduced. .

A gaming machine XD2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine XD1, it comprises collision suppression means configured to suppress collision of the game ball against the auxiliary means.

According to the game machine XD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine XD1, it is possible to prevent damage to the auxiliary means. In addition, the mode of the collision suppression means is not limited at all. For example, by forming a pocket-shaped portion that allows a ball to enter above the auxiliary means, the ball falling above the auxiliary means may be discharged from the game area through the pocket-shaped portion. You may make it form the roof-shaped part which prevents the fall of.

A gaming machine XD3, wherein in the gaming machine XD1 or XD2, the auxiliary means is configured to be able to guide the displacement of the variable means.

According to the game machine XD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XD1 or XD2, the auxiliary means can be used not only as means for constructing the guide path of the game ball, but also as means for guiding the displacement of the variable means. .

Note that the variable means and the auxiliary means may be configured separately or integrally. In the case of an integral configuration, for example, the variable means may be the rolling surface forming portion, and the auxiliary means may be the forming portion that is displaced integrally with the rolling surface forming portion.

In the game machine XD3, the auxiliary means is configured to suppress displacement of the variable means in a direction non-parallel to the displacement direction.

According to the game machine XD4, in addition to the effects of the game machine XD3, the arrangement of the variable means after being displaced can be stabilized by the auxiliary means.

A game machine XD5, wherein in the game machine XD3 or XD4, the auxiliary means is configured to be interlockable with the variable means.

According to the game machine XD5, in addition to the effects of the game machine XD3 or XD4, the degree of freedom in setting the action of the auxiliary means can be improved compared to the case where the auxiliary means are fixedly arranged.

For example, by arranging the variable means at a position where the variable means avoids the play area while the auxiliary means closes the ball entry area, it is possible to reduce the arrangement space within the game area for the path construction means when the ball entry area is closed. can. As a result, it is possible to widen the game ball flow down range of the game area in the closed state of the entering ball area, and to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game area.

In addition, for example, as an auxiliary means, fixed ridges are arranged from the width direction of the guide path, and when trying to produce a deceleration action of the game ball, a plurality of guide paths are formed, and only a specific guide path is decelerated. Attempting to produce an effect can be difficult when multiple guide paths are closely spaced. On the other hand, by constructing the auxiliary means so as to be interlocked with the variable means, it is possible to easily cause a deceleration action to occur in a specific guide route.

In any one of game machines XD1 to XD5, game machine XD6 is characterized in that the auxiliary means is configured to be able to change the flowing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine XD6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines XD1 to XD5, it is possible to set the flow-down path of the game ball on the guide path independently (separately) from the arrangement of the variable means.

In the game machine XD6, the game machine XD7 is characterized in that the auxiliary means changes the flow direction of the game ball by changing the arrangement of the variable means.

According to the game machine XD7, in addition to the effects of the game machine XD6, it is possible to cause a plurality of types of changes in the flow-down mode of the game ball by the same auxiliary means. In addition, the cause of the change in the action of the auxiliary means on the game ball due to the different arrangement of the variable means is not limited at all. For example, it may be caused by the fact that the game ball and the auxiliary means are blocked due to the different arrangement of the variable means, and the game ball does not reach the auxiliary means, or the arrangement of the variable means is different. Therefore, the falling state of the game ball when contacting the auxiliary means may be different depending on whether it is a rolling state or a falling state.

<Guidance from the middle position of the guide route>
A game machine comprising a game area in which game balls flow down, a first state that constitutes a guide route capable of guiding game balls, and a route configuration means that can be switched between a second state that does not configure the guide route, A predetermined ball entry area is provided in which game balls deviating from the guide path are arranged so as to be able to enter the ball entry area, and the ball entry area includes at least part of the game balls deviating from the guide path from a midway position of the guide path. A game machine XE1 characterized in that it is configured so that a ball can be entered.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game in which a first start prize winning port and a second start prize winning port are arranged above a special variable prize winning ball device 7 that guides a game ball to a ball entering area. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). In this case, there is an advantage that the game can be easily understood by the player because the game ball can be shot and aimed at the same position. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, a plurality of winning openings (ball-entering areas) are arranged vertically, and the lower winning opening is hidden by the upper winning opening. There is a high possibility that the ball deviated from the mouth will also deviate from the lower winning mouth, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the player's interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XE1, since it is configured so that a game ball deviating from the guide route can easily enter the ball entry area, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine XE1, the gaming machine XE2 is characterized in that at least part of the ball entry area is arranged at a height between the lower end position and the upper end position of the path constructing means.

According to the gaming machine XE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XE1, by arranging the ball entry area at a height position inside the vertical width of the path construction means, the vertical distance between the path construction means and the ball entry area is reduced. can be shortened, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the game ball deviates to the left and right of the ball entry area.

In addition, even when a plurality of ball-entering areas are arranged so as to overlap vertically, the extent to which the vertical width increases can be reduced, and the plurality of ball-entering areas can be freely arranged in a limited-sized game area. degree can be improved.

In the gaming machine XE1 or XE2, the path construction means constructs a second guide path along which a game ball is guided to the ball entry area, and a game ball deviating from the second guide path enters the second ball entry area. A gaming machine XE3 characterized by being configured so that a ball can be played.

According to the gaming machine XE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XE1 or XE2, the path configuration means includes a second guide path for guiding the game ball to the ball-entering area and a path for guiding the game ball to the second ball-entering area. can be configured, and a game ball deviated from one path can be placed on the other path. As a result, the attention of the path construction means can be improved as compared with the case where the path construction means guides the game ball to a single ball entry area.

In the game machine XE3, the guide route and the second guide route are configured to intersect at a predetermined position, and the downward inclination direction of the guide route and the downward inclination direction of the second guide route are opposite to each other. A gaming machine XE4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine XE4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XE3, on the side where one guidance route is arranged downward with respect to a predetermined position as a boundary, the other guidance route is arranged upward. The vertical width required for arrangement can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the guide route, the second guide route, the (first) ball-entering area, and the second ball-entering area.

In the gaming machine XE1, the gaming machine XE5 is characterized in that the ball entry area is arranged at a vertical position of the path constructing means.

According to the gaming machine XE5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XE1, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball that has deviated from the guide path or the ball-entering area to reach the ball-entering area or the guide path.

It should be noted that the placement of the ball entry area is not limited at all. For example, the ball entry area may be arranged above or below the path forming means.

Also, the form of the ball entry area is not limited at all. For example, the ball entry area may be configured as a starting opening, may be configured as a general winning opening, may be configured as a normal winning opening, or may be configured as a special winning opening, It may be configured as a discharge port (out port).

In any one of the game machines XE1 to XE5, a control means is provided, and the route configuration means is switchable between a first state that configures the guide route and a second state that configures the second guide route. The game machine XE6 is characterized in that the control means is configured to be able to execute control for switching the path construction means between the first state and the second state based on a predetermined pattern.

According to the gaming machine XE6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines XE1 to XE5, by selecting a pattern for switching the state of the path configuration means, the game ball deviating from the (first) ball entering area is the second entering ball. It is possible to configure a case where it is easy to guide the area and a case where it is difficult to guide the game ball that has deviated from the (first) ball-entering area to the second ball-entering area.

<Displacement directions of a plurality of opening/closing plates arranged in the flow-down path face each other>
A first state comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a predetermined ball entry area into which the game ball that has flowed down the game area can enter, and a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the ball entry area; In a gaming machine comprising a path configuration means capable of switching between a second state in which the guide path is not configured and a second state in which the guide path is not configured, the ball-entering area includes a first ball-entering area and a second ball-entering area. The configuration means includes first path configuration means configured to be displaceable so as to configure a first guide path configured to guide the game ball to the first ball entry area, and a game ball to the second ball entry area. a second route configuring means configured to be displaceable so as to configure a second guide route configured to be guided to the direction of displacement of the first route configuring means and the displacement direction of the second route configuring means; and are directed toward each other.

Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which the opening/closing members 30a and 31a (path configuring means) are configured to be displaced to the same side (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-159997). . However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is expected that a game ball that deviates from one opening and closing member (flows down the right side of the opening and closing member) will also deviate from other opening members in the same way. There is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of attracting the player's attention.

That is, when the game ball continues to flow down the game area without being rescued by the opening/closing member 31a on the upstream side, if it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the next opening/closing member 30a will rescue the game ball, the vertical width of the game area can be increased. It is easy to maintain the player's willingness to play by making use of the entire area to show the player the falling game balls. This makes the player feel that there is a low possibility of being rescued by the player, and it is difficult to guide the player's line of sight to the downstream side.

On the other hand, according to the game machine XF1, the direction of opening displacement of the first path configuring means faces the opposite side of the direction of opening displacement of the second path configuring means, so that the game ball deviates from the path configuring means on the upstream side. becomes easier to go to the downstream route constructing means. As a result, a game ball that deviates from the path constructing means on the upstream side can be easily rescued (picked up) on the downstream side, so that the player can handle the game ball that deviates from the path constructing means on the upstream side. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the ball may be picked up by other path constructing means, and to easily attract the player's attention to the game ball.

In the game machine XF1, one of the first guide route and the second guide route is arranged above the other of the game machine XF2.

According to the gaming machine XF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XF1, it is possible to make it easier to prevent (easily save) game balls from falling out by utilizing the vertical difference.

In the game machine XF1 or XF2, the game machine XF3 is characterized in that the first route construction means and the second route construction means are constructed so as to intersect when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine XF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XF1 or XF2, by setting the displacement direction along a predetermined direction, one path construction means is divided into the other path construction means at the crossing position. configuration can be made unnecessary. Therefore, both path forming means can be formed non-divided.

In any one of the gaming machines XF1 to XF3, the gaming machine XF4 is characterized in that the first path configuring means is arranged on the same side with respect to the second path configuring means before and after displacement. .

According to the game machine XF4, in any of the game machines XF1 to XF3, since the first path construction means does not pass through the second path construction means before and after displacement, both path construction means are formed in a non-divided manner. be able to.

In any one of the gaming machines XF1 to XF4, the first path constructing means is arranged on the same side as the second path constructing means in a predetermined first direction, and is located on a predetermined line crossing the first direction. A gaming machine XF5 characterized in that it is arranged on the opposite side to the second path constructing means in two directions.

According to the gaming machine XF5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines XF1 to XF4, the first path configuring means and the second path configuring means can be configured in a non-divided manner. Thus, it is possible to visually recognize that the first path constructing means is displaced past the second path constructing means. This makes it possible to enhance the unexpectedness of the displacement.

In any one of game machines XF1 to XF5, game machine XF6 is characterized in that the first route construction means or the second route construction means is configured to be displaceable along the width direction of the guide path.

According to the game machine XF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines XF1 to XF5, the load applied to the game ball by the path construction means during displacement is reduced compared to the case of displacement along the direction perpendicular to the width of the guide path. The degree can be easily reduced, and the influence of the displacement of the path constructing means on the game ball can be minimized. For example, when the path construction means is displaced obliquely downward, it is possible to avoid the game ball from flowing obliquely downward following the displacement.

<Points about the action part that affects the flow of the ball>
A game machine comprising a game area in which game balls flow down, a first state that constitutes a guide route capable of guiding game balls, and a route configuration means that can be switched between a second state that does not configure the guide route, An action part configured to be able to act in contact with the game ball flowing down the guide path is provided, and the action part increases in degree of action on the game ball in accordance with the displacement of the game ball on the guide path. A gaming machine XG1 characterized by being configured as follows.

Here, among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured to slow down the flow speed of balls by providing ribs on the game area side (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-016095). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the same deceleration of the ball flowing down the range of rib formation may interfere with the game regardless of the situation.

For example, when the variable winning device is arranged on the downstream side of the rib, when the variable winning device is in a closed state (a state unfavorable to the player), the flow of the ball is delayed until the variable winning device is in an open state. However, if the variable prize winning device is in an open state (a state advantageous to the player), delaying the flow of the ball may be disadvantageous to the player. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the design of the game area because the action of the ribs on the game ball may disadvantage the player.

On the other hand, according to the game machine XG1, the degree of action of the action portion exemplified by the rib is configured to increase corresponding to the displacement of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to easily connect the behavior of the game ball with the increase or decrease in the profit given to the player, so that the attention to the game ball can be improved.

In the game machine XG1, the action parts are arranged differently with respect to the guide path, and the degree of difference increases as the displacement of the game ball increases.

According to the game machine XG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine XG1, by gradually changing the arrangement of the action portion, the action on the game ball can be gradually changed.

In the game machine XG1 or XG2, the game machine XG3 is characterized in that the action given to the game ball by the action section is deceleration of the flow velocity.

According to the gaming machine XG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XG1 or XG2, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to stay at a predetermined position. As a result, even in a game mode in which game balls are shot at regular intervals, it is possible to easily improve attention to the predetermined position.

A game machine comprising a game area in which game balls flow down, a first state that constitutes a guide route capable of guiding game balls, and a route configuration means that can be switched between a second state that does not configure the guide route, An action part configured to be able to act in contact with the game ball flowing down the guide path is provided, and the action part has different actions on the game ball in accordance with the arrangement of the game ball on the guide path. A gaming machine XG4 characterized by:

Any one of the game machines XG1 to XG4, comprising a predetermined ball entry area and other ball entry areas, comprising an opening/closing displacement means configured to be displaceable so as to open and close the predetermined ball entry areas, and the action portion is different in the first action on the game ball flowing down the guide path in the open state of the predetermined ball-entering area and the second action on the game ball flowing down the guide path in the closed state of the predetermined ball-entering area. A gaming machine XG5 characterized by:

According to the game machine XG5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines XG1 to XG4, the action of the action part is changed in response to the switching of the state of the opening/closing displacement means. Even if the arrangement space is limited, the degree of freedom in designing the flow-down mode of the game ball can be improved.

Note that the relationship between the first action and the second action is not limited at all. For example, when a load is applied to a game ball, the direction of the load may change, or the magnitude of the load may change.

Also, the relationship between the first action and the second action may be specified as the action on the flow-down mode of the game ball. For example, there may be a contradictory working relationship such as a first action that delays the arrival of the game ball to the ball-entering area and a second action that hastens the arrival of the game ball to the ball-entering area.

A game machine XG6 characterized in that, in the game machine XG4 or XG5, the change in action caused by the action part is caused by a difference in arrangement of the game ball with respect to the path forming means.

According to the game machine XG6, in addition to the effects of the game machine XG4 or XG5, the action of the action part is caused by the positional relationship of the game ball with respect to the path construction means. Making it movable can be made unnecessary.

In addition, specification of the aspect of arrangement|positioning relationship with respect to a path|route structure means of a game ball is not limited at all. For example, it may be specified by the arrangement interval of the game ball from a predetermined portion of the path construction means, or it may be specified by whether the game ball is in contact with the path construction means or not yet in contact with the path construction means.

In any one of gaming machines XG4 to XG6, the guide route includes a first section and a second section arranged away from the ball-entering area with respect to the first section, wherein the first section and the A game machine XG7 characterized in that it is configured to change the degree of action of the action section on the game ball in the second section.

According to the gaming machine XG7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines XG4 to XG6, even if the game balls are shot at a constant interval, the intervals between the game balls can be shortened or separated on the guide path. By setting the first section and the second section, it is possible to set a place where the game balls tend to accumulate on the guide route.

In addition, the method of changing the degree of deceleration is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to decelerate the game ball by constructing a protruding part projecting toward the guide path and bringing it into contact with the game ball. In this case, the degree of deceleration can be changed according to the length of the protrusions and the density of the protrusions arranged in the predetermined section.

In this case, the degree of deceleration can also be changed depending on which height position of the game ball the projecting portion abuts. For example, when the projecting part hits above the center of the game ball, in addition to the load in the projecting direction, the load in the vertical direction is also generated. In this case, a load is generated in the direction of pressing down the rolling game ball, and the deceleration action tends to be large. Therefore, even if the arrangement intervals of the projecting portions are the same, the deceleration action can be made different by the projecting portions that hit the game ball at different positions.

In the gaming machine XG7, the game machine XG8 is characterized in that the action on the game ball in the first section is set smaller than the action on the game ball flowing down the second section.

According to the gaming machine XG8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XG7, by increasing the flow speed of the game ball in the section closer to the ball entering area, the situation where the game balls enter the ball entering area in a row is prevented. can be easily avoided.

In any one of the gaming machines XG5 to XG8, the predetermined ball-entering area and the second ball-entering area are provided, and the guide path includes a first guide path capable of guiding a game ball to the predetermined ball-entering area; and a second guide route capable of guiding the game ball to the second ball entry area, wherein the first guide route and the second guide route are configured to intersect near a predetermined position and can occur due to crossing. A game ball flowing down a downstream section arranged on the downstream side of the predetermined position as a reference has a higher flow rate than a game ball flowing down the upstream section arranged on the upstream side. A gaming machine XG9 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine XG9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines XG5 to XG8, by avoiding the situation where the game balls accumulate downstream of the intersection position as the predetermined position, the first guide route and the second guide It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the game ball falls from the downstream side of the crossing position when switching between paths. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of stray balls.

Note that the boundary between the upstream section and the downstream section is not limited to the crossing position. For example, even if the predetermined position is set on the upstream side of the crossing position, it is possible to make it difficult for game balls to accumulate on the downstream side of the crossing position. Also, for example, even if the predetermined position is set downstream of the crossing position, it is possible to prevent the game balls from accumulating between the predetermined position and the ball entry area, so if the predetermined position is not set. It is possible to reduce the number of loose balls generated compared to .

In the gaming machine XG9, when a game ball flows down along a predetermined straight line toward the ball entry area, the time required for the game ball to pass through the downstream section is equal to the time required for the game ball to pass through the upstream section. A gaming machine XG10 characterized by being shorter than the time required for the diameter to flow down.

According to the game machine XG10, in addition to the effects of the game machine XG9, while the game ball flowing down earlier passes through the downstream section, the game ball flowing later does not enter the downstream section. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from accumulating in the downstream section by setting the time required for the flow down.

In the game machine XG9 or XG10, the game machine XG11 is characterized in that the action section is configured to maximize the degree of action on the game ball at the crossing position.

According to the gaming machine XG11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XG9 or XG10, the flow speed of the game ball is increased at the point where the game ball enters from the upstream section (advantageous anti-spill section) to the downstream section (unfavorable anti-drop section). is maximized to maximize the change in the flow of the game ball, thereby improving the player's attention to the game ball.

In any one of the game machines XG9 to XG11, the action section is configured to act on the game ball flowing down along the first guide path, but does not act on the game ball flowing down along the second guide path or is different. A gaming machine XG12 characterized by comprising an action selection unit configured to act in a manner.

According to the game machine XG12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines XG9 to XG11, the action part can be designed on the premise of a specific path, so that the action part can be easily designed. In addition, the design of the action portion is not limited at all. For example, the action of the action part on the game ball can be arbitrarily set by designing the arrangement of the action part in the direction intersecting the guide path, the formation length, the formation length of the action part on the guide path side, etc. can be done.

In the game machine XG12, the action section is configured to be able to act on the game ball before it reaches the path construction means, and its action is configured to be different from the action that occurs on the game ball after it reaches the path construction means. A gaming machine XG13 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine XG13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XG12, the acting portion can cause some kind of action on the game ball regardless of the state of the path constructing means. can increase

<Relationship between the arrangement interval of the pair of driving devices and the arrangement interval of the pair of opening/closing plates>
A first state comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a predetermined ball entry area into which the game ball that has flowed down the game area can enter, and a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the ball entry area; In a gaming machine provided with route construction means capable of switching between a second state in which the guidance route is not constructed, the route construction means comprises a first route construction means and a second route different from the first route construction means. and a first driving means for driving the first path configuring means and a second driving means for driving the second path configuring means, the first path configuring means being compared with the arrangement interval of the first driving means for driving the first path configuring means and the second driving means for driving the second path configuring means. and the second path forming means are arranged so as to narrow the distance between them.

Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of opening/closing members 30a and 31a are configured to be independently openable and closable by a plurality of different drive means (equivalent to solenoids) (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 159997). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, a plurality of driving means are arranged in the same manner on each of the opening/closing members 30a and 31a, and the arrangement intervals of the plurality of driving means are set equal to the arrangement intervals of the opening/closing members 30a and 31a. be done. In this case, there is a problem that the size and arrangement of the opening/closing members 30a and 31a may be restricted by the size of the driving means. In other words, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the flow-down path forming means to the ball-entering area is limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine XH1, the arrangement interval between the first route constructing means and the second route constructing means is narrower than the arrangement interval between the first driving means and the second driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the first route constructing means and the second route constructing means can be improved.

In addition, the aspect which narrows an arrangement|positioning space|interval is not limited at all. For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-159997, the arrangement of the driving means with respect to the opening/closing members 30a and 31a is different for each of the opening/closing members 30a and 31a, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the size and arrangement of the opening/closing members 30a and 31a. can be made

In the gaming machine XH1, at least one of the first path constructing means and the second path constructing means is configured to be displaced closer to the other second path constructing means or the first path constructing means by driving. Characterized game machine XH2.

According to the game machine XH2, in addition to the effects of the game machine XH1, it is possible to keep the range required for the displacement of the first path constructing means and the second path constructing means narrow.

A gaming machine XH3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine XH1 or XH2, the first path constructing means and the second path constructing means are constructed so as to intersect when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine XH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XH1 or XH2, the crossing range can be shared by the first route construction means and the second route construction means. As a result, the range required for arranging the first path configuring means and the second path configuring means can be narrowed.

The game machine XH4 is characterized in that the game machine XH3 is provided with suppressing means capable of suppressing displacement of the first path constructing means and the second path constructing means at the intersecting position.

According to the gaming machine XH4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XH3, one of the first path configuring means and the second path configuring means can easily interfere with the displacement of the other. By suppressing the displacement of the second path configuring means, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the first path configuring means and the second path configuring means from being hindered.

A game machine XH5 characterized in that in the game machine XH3 or XH4, the intersecting position is arranged outside the game area.

According to the gaming machine XH5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XH3 or XH4, it is possible to narrow the range required for arranging the first path configuring means and the second path configuring means outside the game area (for example, on the back side). can.

In any one of the gaming machines XH1 to XH5, the first driving means is arranged on one side of the route forming means, and the second driving means is arranged on the other side of the route forming means. Gaming machine XH6.

According to the gaming machine XH6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines XH1 to XH5, by reversing the arrangement of the first driving means and the second driving means with respect to the path configuring means, the first driving means and the second driving means can be spaced apart.

<Points that eliminate the need for short opening to prevent false V>
A first state comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a predetermined ball entry area into which the game ball that has flowed down the game area can enter, and a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the ball entry area; In a gaming machine provided with route construction means capable of switching between a second state in which the guide route is not constructed, profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to a player when a game ball enters, and profit giving means for the profit giving means. a profit switching means for switching between a first state in which the game ball can be guided to the second state and a second state in which the game ball cannot be guided to the profit giving means; The gaming machine XI1 is characterized in that the profit switching means is switched to the first state.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a big winning hole is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by a distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. There are gaming machines that However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate of the big prize opening during the period in which the distribution unit is in a state where the ball can be distributed to the advantageous route is the operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into a mode and an operation mode for when the ball does not flow down the advantageous route. Since the opening/closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain attention to the ball heading for the big prize opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of making the player pay attention to the behavior of the ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine XI1, while the path constructing means is maintained in the first state, switching between the case where the ball can pass through the profit giving means and the case where the ball cannot pass through the profit giving means is performed. Therefore, the path constructing means does not block the entry of the ball into the entry area. As a result, it is possible to maintain attention to the ball heading toward the ball entry area.

In the game machine XI1, the game machine XI2 is characterized in that the first state of the path constructing means prevents a ball from entering the profit imparting means.

According to the game machine XI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine XI1, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the profit imparting means by the path construction means.

A game machine XI3 is characterized in that in the game machine XI1 or XI2, a game ball can be entered into the profit imparting means in the second state of the path constructing means.

According to the gaming machine XI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XI1 or XI2, it is possible to increase the profit that the player can obtain from the game balls flowing down when the path forming means is in the second state.

In any one of gaming machines XI1 to XI3, gaming machine XI4 is characterized in that the profit giving means can be arranged on the upstream side of the ball-entering area.

According to the game machine XI4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines XI1 to XI3, the state of the path construction means and the execution of the ball entry to the profit giving means can be made non-correspondence.

In the gaming machine XI4, the profit switching means is set to the first state when the path forming means is in the first state, and the ball is prevented from entering the ball entering area when the profit switching means is in the first state. A gaming machine XI5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine XI5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XI4, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball-entering area while allowing the ball to enter the profit imparting means. As a result, for example, it is possible to construct a round game in which the payout of prize balls associated with entering the ball entering area is extremely small, while the player can obtain a profit associated with entering the profit giving means.

Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R4, XA1 to XA8, XB1 to XB6, XC1 to XC7, XD1 to XD7, XE1 to XE6, XF1 to XF6, XG1 to XG13, A game machine Z1 in any one of XH1 to XH6 and XI1 to XI5, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R4, XA1 to XA8, XB1 to XB6, XC1 to XC7, XD1 to XD7, XE1 to XE6, XF1 to XF6, XG1 to XG13, A game machine Z2 in any one of XH1 to XH6 and XI1 to XI5, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R4, XA1 to XA8, XB1 to XB6, XC1 to XC7, XD1 to XD7, XE1 to XE6, XF1 to XF6, XG1 to XG13, A game machine Z3 in any one of XH1 to XH6 and XI1 to XI5, wherein the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board (a part of the area configuration means)
18 hinge (part of support shaft)
19 hinge (part of support shaft)
65a Specific winning slot (part of profit granting means)
81 Third pattern display device (part of attention means, display means)
86 center frame (frame means)
150 spherical flow down unit (part of flow down means)
152 first receiving channel (first component, second component)
153 second receiving channel member (second component)
154 ridge portion (part of reduction means)
161 light guide plate (part of attention means)
166 horizontal board unit (predetermined board)
170 decoration means (located means)
171a horizontally long groove (low transmission means)
171b reflection shape part (direction changing means)
180 Displacement restricting device (limiting means)
181 contact member (part of guide means)
181b Cylindrical holding portion (part of guide means)
183 operation member (operation part)
183f engaging portion 184 coil spring (biasing means)
221 MPU (prevention notification means)
310 partition member (part of auxiliary means, guide means, box-shaped means)
312 curved plate portion (first guide portion)
314 rear section lower part (second guide part)
315 Irregular shape through part (open part)
320 Particulate member (part of displacement means, part of placement means)
362 Axle (Regulator)
410 Linear motion member (part of displacement means, second member)
413 Trapezoidal projecting portion (second contact portion)
414 ridge portion (second target portion)
420 Collision member (part of action means, contact means, first means)
424 buffer member (second contact portion)
430 contact member (part of displacement means, first member, restricting means)
432 projecting portion (first target portion)
440 front transmission member (part of transmission means)
442 Groove forming part (second transmission part, determination participating means)
446 transmission projection (first transmission portion, contact portion)
470 transmission arm member (transmission means)
480 Lid member (a part of action means, abutment means, advance/retreat means)
482 overhang (representative tip)
489a first contact surface (contact surface)
489b second contact surface (contact surface)
489c Third contact surface (contact surface)
510 rear case (part of area configuring means)
630 lower arm member (part of action means)
633 support hole (main support means)
634 arc-shaped hole (auxiliary support means, guide means)
700 production member (displacement means)
730 Rotating plate (load generating means, displacement generating means)
740 telescopic displacement member (part of first member, part of second member)
743b first guided projection (first loaded portion)
744b Second guided projection (second loaded portion)
760 Shielding design member (part of first member, part of second member)
820 Vertical slide member (part of displacement means)
840 Lateral slide member (part of displacement means)
870 long arm member (electric wiring displacement means)
882a wall (part of stopping means)
886 guide recess (corresponding change means)
887 Cylindrical projecting part (part of stopping means)
DK2 Electric wiring DK2b Lower winding portion (second predetermined portion)
LM1 intermediate flow path (part of flow-down means, first component)
MT1 drive motor (driving means)
IE1 internal space (range)
SC4 detection sensor (detection means)
SP1 coil spring (part of load generating means, biasing means)
A10, A3010, A4010 Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 outer frame 12 inner frame (base body)
18 Hinge (rotating shaft)
A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 Substrate box (container)
A110 Main controller (object)
A119 Printed circuit board (object, control board)
A120 Switch Device (Operating Means)
A122 Operation unit (operator)
A123b Projection (first surface)
A130 Key device (operating means)
A133b Protrusion (receiving part)
A133c end (first surface)
A140 key (operator)
A200, A3200 Box cover (container)
A203 Lower wall (standing wall)
A210 Operation wall (facing part)
A211 First ridge (ridge)
A212 Second ridge (ridge)
A220 First connection wall (connection surface)
A230 Second connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A240 Third connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A250 opening A260 opening A270, A2270 covering part A271 peripheral wall part (covering part)
A271a base (coating)
A271b Projection (bulge)
A272, A2272 End wall portion (covering portion, facing portion)
A272a Annular part (opposing part)
A272b square part (opposing part)
A2273 Protrusions (protrusions)
A280, A290 Upright walls A280a, A290a Tapered surfaces A281, A291 First upright wall (upright wall)
A282, A292 Second standing wall (standing wall)
A283, A293 Third standing wall (standing wall)
A284 4th standing wall (standing wall)
A300 box base (container)
A410, A4410 Rotating shaft 110 Main controller (control means)
B1000 variable winning means (part of route configuration means, part of state change means)
B1140 projecting part (reduction means, part of action part, part of action selection part)
B1200 cover member (part of partition member)
B1211 projecting portion (reduction means, part of action part, part of action selection part)
B1212 Extended Support Part (Gap Reduction Means, Part of Auxiliary Means)
B1230 first detection sensor (part of ball entry area, first ball entry area)
B1250 Second detection sensor (part of ball entry area, second ball entry area)
B1260 Ball Guide Receiving Part (Collision Suppression Means)
B1300 First Guide Plate (Part of Path Constructing Means, Part of State Changing Means, First (Path) Constructing Means, Part of Variable Means, Part of Opening/Closing Displacement Means)
B1310 guide section (rescue section)
B1311 rolling surface (part of guide path)
B1313 sliding portion (gap reduction means)
B1323 sliding portion (gap reduction means)
B1500 Second guide plate (part of route construction means, part of state change means, second (route) construction means, part of variable means)
B1510 guide section (rescue section)
B1511 Rolling surface (part of guide path)
B1513 sliding portion (gap reduction means)
B1523 sliding portion (gap reduction means)
B2300 opening/closing plate (part of path configuration means, first path configuration means, part of opening/closing displacement means)
B2500 Open/close bar (part of path configuration means, second path configuration means)
B4260 ball guide receiving part (part of ball entry area)
B4360 Front Projection (Part of Auxiliary Means)
B9140 projecting part (part of action part)
BKL1 Left tilt trajectory (part of guidance route, second guidance route)
BKL2 right tilt trajectory (part of guidance route, first guidance route)
BL1 left flow path (part of flow path)
BL2 right flow route (part of flow route)
BL21 left-handed downflow route (part of downflow route)
BL22 right-handed downstream route (part of downstream route)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

There is a game machine configured so that the path configuring means are displaced to the same side (Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-159997 A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of attracting the player's attention. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the player's attention.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises: a game area in which a game ball flows down; A game machine comprising a route configuration means capable of switching between a first state that configures a guide route that can be guided to a ball area and a second state that does not configure the guide route, wherein the ball entry area is a second state. A first ball-entering area and a second ball-entering area are provided, and the path configuring means is configured to be displaceable so as to configure a first guide path capable of guiding a game ball to the first ball-entering area. and a second path configuration means configured to be displaceable so as to configure a second guide path configured to guide the game ball to the second ball entry area, wherein the The displacement direction of the first path constructing means and the displacement direction of the second path constructing means are directions in which they approach each other.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to improve the player's attention.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the action unit along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 10(a) and 10(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the action unit taken along line XIIIa-XIIIa in FIG. 9. FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and action units taken along line XIV-XIV in FIG. 9; (a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device, (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device, and (c) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a displacement restricting device. (a) is a rear view of a contact member, (b) is a front view of a guide member, and (c) is a front view of an operating member. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. 21(a) and 21(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board and the action unit taken along line XXIa-XXIa of FIG. 20; It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the firing effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board and the firing effect unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the firing effect unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing effect unit. (a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device as viewed in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and (b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the firing unit taken along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 2; It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an injection device. 34(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34(b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34(a); and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc of FIG. 34(b). (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35(a); and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b). 36(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a); and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXVIc-XXXVIc of FIG. 36(b). (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; 29(a) to (f) are plan views of the linear motion member, the collision member, the contact member, and the front side transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29(a) to (e) are plan views of the linear motion member, the collision member, the contact member, and the front side transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28. FIG. 29(a) to (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member, the transmission arm member, and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. FIG. FIG. 29 is a plan view of the injection device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28; The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting part of the abutment member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical projection of the transmission arm member in accordance with the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member It is a diagram showing a time-measurement change of. Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the scaling unit; Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of the enlarging/reducing unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the enlarging/reducing unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a rotating plate. It is a side view of a rotating plate. (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member. (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member and the shielding design member. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; It is a front view of a scaling unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; It is a front view of a scaling unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the scaling unit; (a) and (b) are rear views of the production member. It is a rear view of a production|presentation member. (a) is a back view of the production member, and (b) is a top view of the production member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a). (a) is a back view of the production member, and (b) is a top view of the production member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75(a). FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. 75; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a displacement rotation unit; FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit; FIG. 3 is a front exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement/rotation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a lateral slide member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a lateral slide member; FIG. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII of FIG. 7; It is a perspective view of a wiring arm member. 4 is a perspective view of a path forming member of the wiring guide member; FIG. 86(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb of FIG. 86(a). 87(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87(a). 88(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88(a). 89(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit taken along line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 89(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame, light guide plate rendering means, and decoration means; FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the action unit along line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 2; 3 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member in the range XCVII of FIG. 2; FIG. It is a front view of the game board in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view of an enlarging/reducing unit in the third embodiment; It is a front view of a rotating plate. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruded portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member according to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fourth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the chronological change of arrangement|positioning of a columnar protrusion. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member accompanying the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fifth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the chronological change of arrangement|positioning of a columnar protrusion. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the game board and the shooting unit in the sixth embodiment taken along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 2; It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of a board box in a seventh embodiment; Fig. 2 is a rear perspective view of the board box; (a) is a front view of a board box, and (b) is a side view of the board box. Fig. 4 is a front perspective view of a box cover; It is a back perspective view of a box cover. 109. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 108, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of a box base, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base. (a) is a front perspective view of a main controller, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the main controller. FIG. 113 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the main controller in section CXIII of FIG. 112(a); (a) is a front view of the main controller viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112(a), and (b) is a side view of the main controller viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114(a); 114(c) is a side view of the main controller viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114(a). (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box with the key operated to the off position, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box with the key operated to the on position. 115(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIb in FIG. 115(b). be. 115(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 115(a); It is a diagram. 115(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 115(a); It is a diagram. 116(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb of FIG. 116(a); It is a diagram. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 121(a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the board box in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box taken along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. 121(a). (a) is a front view of a board box in a ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine. (a) is a front view of a board box in a tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board in 11th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a front view of a variable winning device. FIG. 131 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device taken along line CXXXI-CXXXI of FIG. 130; (a) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the variable winning device in range CXXXIIb of FIG. 132(a). FIG. 132(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device taken along line CXXXIII-CXXXIII. It is a top view of a variable winning device. It is a top view of a variable winning device. It is a top view of a variable winning device. (a) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (b) is a top view of the variable winning device as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137(a). 137(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line CXXXVIIIa-CXXXVIIIa of FIG. 137(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of FIG. 137(a). It is a front view of a variable winning device. (a) and (b) are schematic front views of a rolling surface, an upper-right inclined surface, and an upper-left inclined surface, schematically showing the movement trajectory of a rolling ball in the pre-entering range. It is a partial front enlarged view of the game board showing the vicinity of the variable winning device. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. (a) is a diagram showing the opening/closing pattern of the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the gaming efficiency of the first operation pattern; (c) is a diagram showing the opening/closing pattern of the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the gaming efficiency of the second operation pattern; 3 is a diagram showing the opening/closing pattern of the first specific prize winning port and the second specific prize winning port corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the game efficiency of the operation patterns No. 3. FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 12th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. (a) is a front view of the variable winning device, (b) is a top view of the variable winning device viewed in the direction of arrow CLb in FIG. 150(a), and (c) is a view of FIG. It is a rear view of the variable winning device viewed in the direction of arrow CLc. (a) is a front view of the variable winning device, (b) is a top view of the variable winning device viewed in the direction of arrow CLIb in FIG. 151(a), and (c) is a view of FIG. It is a rear view of the variable winning device viewed in the direction of an arrow CLIc. (a) is a front view of the variable winning device, (b) is a top view of the variable winning device viewed in the direction of arrow CLIIb in FIG. 152(a), and (c) is a view of FIG. It is a rear view of the variable winning device viewed in the direction of arrow CLIIc. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line CLIIIa-CLIIIa in FIG. 150(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line CLIIIb-CLIIIb in FIG. (c) is a sectional view of the variable winning device along line CLIIIc-CLIIIc in FIG. 151(a), and (d) is a sectional view of the variable winning device along line CLIIId-CLIIId in FIG. 152(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line CLIVa-CLIVa in FIG. 151(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line CLIVb-CLIVb in FIG. 151(a), (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device taken along line CLIVc-CLIVc of FIG. 151(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the CLVa-CLVa line in FIG. 152(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the CLVb-CLVb line in FIG. 152(a), (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the CLVc-CLVc line in FIG. 152(a). (a) and (b) are front views of the first winning opening, the second winning opening and the variable winning device. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the performance of the variable winning device in the first control example of the twelfth embodiment; It is a front view of the variable winning device in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a top view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd rotation member and a transmission member. 159(a) and 159(b) are right side views of the second rotating member and the transmission member as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLXIa in FIG. 158. FIG. 159(a) to (c) are front views of the pre-entering range in the range CLXIIa of FIG. 158. FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 14th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a front view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of the variable winning device in 15th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the variable winning device. 173(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the variable winning device taken along line CLXXIVa-CLXXIVa in FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the line corresponding to line CLXXVa-CLXXVa in FIG. 172, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the line corresponding to line CLXXVb-CLXXVb in FIG. 172. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the line corresponding to the CLXXVc-CLXXVc line in FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the line corresponding to line CLXXVa-CLXXVa in FIG. 172, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the line corresponding to line CLXXVb-CLXXVb in FIG. 172. (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the line corresponding to the CLXXVc-CLXXVc line in FIG. It is a front view of the game board and the variable winning device in the sixteenth embodiment. It is a top view of the variable prize-winning device in 17th Embodiment. 179(a) is a front view of the transmission rotor, (b) is a side view of the transmission rotor as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIXb in FIG. 179(a), and (c) is the circumference of the transmission rotor. It is a developed view of a developed surface, and (d) is a schematic view schematically showing the relationship between the rotation direction of the transmission rotor and the states of the first guide plate and the second guide plate. It is a front view of a variable winning device. (a) is a diagram showing changes over time of the first guide plate and the second guide plate in the fourth operation pattern, and (b) is the first guide plate and the second guide plate in the fifth operation pattern. It is a diagram showing a time-measurement change of. It is a front view of the variable winning device in the nineteenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the variable winning device in the twentieth embodiment in the range corresponding to range CLXIIa in FIG. 158, and (c) is a view in the direction of arrow CLXXXIIIc in FIG. It is a partial top view of the variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the game board in the twenty-first embodiment.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 97. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the paper is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper is defined as the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 62, a general prize-winning port 63, a first prize-winning port 64, a second prize-winning port 640, a variable prize-winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. 1) is attached to the back side (or front side).

The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes (for example, see FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of 13 . Note that the base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate which has a rotating shaft at the lower end and is rotationally displaced in a manner of tilting or standing toward the game area. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second winning port 640 along the upper surface of the opening/closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening/closing plate separates the game area and the second prize winning port 640. By closing the space between the second prize winning port 640 and the second prize winning port 640, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time are not changed. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position (behind the window portion of the base plate 60) that can be viewed through the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display with a size of about 9 inches to 19 inches. Three symbol rows, middle and bottom, are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 .

Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be, for example, two.

Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, or the lower side. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. It should be noted that the arrangement of the second winning openings 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be below the first prize winning opening 64 in a front view, or it may be on the left side of the left-right center of the game area.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a like the second prize winning port 640, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a , so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by winning in the first prize opening 64, there are many chances of winning a big lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim to be.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and opens the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640 while setting the state.

It should be noted that, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, aiming at the first winning hole 64 with "right-handed hitting" or "left-handed hitting" at the second It is also possible to aim at the winning opening 640 . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that it is not possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 in a "right-handed" manner, and a ball shot in a "left-handed" manner does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). can be requested to be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming sluggish by adding the playability of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. For example, it may be the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, the lower left side of the first prize winning port 64, the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the upper side.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a are arranged in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205. .

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5, and the like.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be described. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500. FIG. 5 and 6, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side can be seen through the opening 511a. Further, FIG. 2 will be referred to as needed in the description of FIGS.

The operation unit 500 includes a box-shaped rear case 510 whose front side is opened from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . A rectangular opening 511 a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 , so that the rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided when viewed from the front).

The back case 510 extends as a plane plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that protrudes toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted into a fitting concave portion (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. and a plurality of insertion holes 513b through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning projections 513a into the fitting recesses of the base plate 60, and the fastening screws are inserted through the insertion holes 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the action unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the protrusion may have an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is also formed in a rectangular shape correspondingly.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a pinwheel (not shown), and rails 61 and 62. , a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a through gate 67, a variable winning device 65, and a window portion 60a (see FIG. 90) opened in the base plate 60, which can be fitted from the front side. A center frame 86 configured with a shape, a ball flow-down unit 150 configured so that the ball discharged from the game area can flow down, and a granular member 320 (see FIG. 54) is launched toward the front side of the third pattern display device 81. The firing effect unit 300 or the like that can be configured is assembled, and is attached to the inner frame 12 in such a manner that the peripheral portion thereof is arranged opposite to the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1) and fixed.

The base plate 60 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be easily viewed by the player from the front side. As a result, regardless of the shape and arrangement of the base plate 60, the structure arranged on the back side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects.

For example, even if the ball flow down unit 150 is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, the back side can be seen through the base plate 60, so the ball flowing down the ball flow down unit 150 can be visually recognized. . In the present embodiment, the ball flow downward unit 150 is designed in consideration of the effects produced by the visually recognized ball, details of which will be described later.

If there is a part that the player does not want to see, it may be dealt with by attaching a seal member with low light transmittance (or non-light transmittance).

The center frame 86 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The shooting effect unit 300 receives the granular member 320 (see FIG. 54), and the partitioning member 310 that partitions the range in which the granular member 320 can scatter is arranged inside the center frame 86, so that the granular member 320 is placed inside the center frame. It is made possible to shoot toward the inside of 86 . Therefore, the granular members 320 scattered on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively recognized by the player who visually recognizes the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window portion of the center frame 86. can. Details of the shooting effect unit 300 will be described later.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, an enlargement/reduction unit 600 arranged inside the upper part of the rear case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 arranged symmetrically on the left and right sides inside the rear case 510. Prepare.

Specifically, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is arranged above the opening 511a, and the displacement/rotation unit 800 is arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 511a on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, respectively. First, an overview of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of operation control of the operation unit 500 in chronological order. 7 shows the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the waiting state for effect, and FIG. FIG. 9 shows the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the enlargement state and the displacement/rotation unit 800 in the waiting state for rendering.

10 shows the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the waiting state for rendering, and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the top rendering state. In FIG. The unit 800 is in the lower end state of the production.

As illustrated in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement trajectory of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, when the displacement/rotation unit 800 is in the rendering upper end state (see FIG. 10), if the enlargement/reduction unit 600 changes state from the rendering standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the effect standby state is controlled to be executable on the condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state. By controlling the state change from the presentation standby state to be executable on the condition that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the presentation standby state, it is possible to prevent the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 from overlapping in front view. can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is configured such that it can be displaced downward while the effect members 700 are collectively arranged in one place. The components of the production member 700 are separated from each other in the state of being arranged in the state of being arranged, and the operation is controlled so that the area visually recognized in the front view becomes large (see FIG. 9).

After that, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is controlled so that the production members 700 are assembled again (see FIG. 8), displaced upward while being collectively arranged in one place, and returned to the production standby state shown in FIG.

The state changes shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are executed when the scaling unit 600 is in the rendering standby state. As shown in FIGS. 7, 10 and 11, the displacement/rotation unit 800 is configured such that the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced from the waiting state for rendering in a direction having not only a vertical component but also a horizontal component.

In this embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced along a route curve S1 set by a mechanism described later. The route curve S1 includes a common circular arc portion S1a having a circular arc shape centering on each center point C1, and an advancing/retreating route portion S1b extending from the lower end of the common circular arc portion S1a to the left, right, and downward.

In FIG. 10, a pair of left and right horizontal slide members 840 are arranged at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, and in FIG. The lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position above the lower end position of the common circular arc portion S1a.

11, the left lateral slide member 840 is displaced downward and the right lateral slide member 840 is displaced upward. It is possible for the player to visually recognize as if it were rotationally displaced around a center point C1 arranged near the center.

In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of the rotating performance body having the same size as the display area of the third pattern display device 81, and the degree of freedom in performance using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

12(a) and 12(b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 7, and FIGS. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 along the XIIIa-XIIIa line, and FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 along the XIV-XIV line in FIG.

7 and 9 do not show the game board 13, but FIGS. 12 to 14 show the state where the game board 13 is attached to the front side of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 2).

12(a) and 13(a) show an example of a state in which the granular member 320 stays downward, and in FIGS. 12(b) and 13(b), the granular member 320 is shot and scattered. An example of such a state is illustrated.

The effect member 700 of the scaling unit 600 is arranged such that the central part of the collective arrangement is arranged above the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300 in the effect standby state shown in FIGS. Most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be visible through 310 .

On the other hand, in the enlarged state shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b), the effect member 700 is arranged close behind the partition member 310 of the firing effect unit 300, and is hidden by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9). ), most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is blocked invisibly.

Since the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 does not interfere with the partitioning member 310, regardless of the arrangement of the scaling unit 600, the firing effect unit 300 is operated to execute the action effect of shooting the granular member 320 at the partitioning member 310. It is possible to control

As shown in FIG. 12( a ), the granular member 320 is arranged below the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 , and is fired along a route that slopes upward toward the front. , is struck against the front wall portion of the partitioning member 310 and rises while rebounding within the range formed by the partitioning member 310 .

As a result, the granular member 320 can be made to appear to the player as if it is coming toward him or her, so that the player's attention to the presentation using the granular member 320 can be improved.

In addition, by configuring in this way, the range in which the granular members 320 are scattered can be brought closer to the player side, and the configuration members arranged in the game area such as the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2) can be reduced. It is possible to avoid lowering the degree of freedom of arrangement.

In other words, as a standby position for the granular members 320 fired toward the partitioning member 310 of this embodiment, a position directly below the partitioning member 310 or a position closer to the front can be adopted. However, in this case, since the shooting effect unit 300 is arranged in the space on the back side of the first prize winning port 64, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the guide path for the ball that has entered the first prize winning port 64. It becomes difficult, and it may be necessary to move the position of the first winning hole 64 to deal with it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the dividing member 310 is arranged at the frontmost position, and the standby position of the granular member 320 is arranged at an oblique rear side. The guide path for the ball can be arranged without any problem, and the situation in which the first prize winning opening 64 cannot be arranged freely can be prevented.

In the state shown in FIG. 12(a), when control is performed to shoot the granular members 320, as shown in FIG. It can be shown to the player together with the display in the display area. As a result, the player can visually recognize a combination of the two-dimensional display and the movement of the granular member 320 that displaces three-dimensionally.

In the state shown in FIG. 13(a), when control is performed to shoot the granular members 320, as shown in FIG. It can be shown to the player together with the change. In this case, for example, by synchronizing the timing of scattering of the granular members 320 with the timing of displacing the rendering members 700 of the scaling unit 600 in a discrete manner, the granular members 320 can be displaced on the front side of the scaling unit 600 whose state changes. Scattering can be visually recognized, and the impact of the state change of the scaling unit 600 can be enhanced.

Here, a method of switching the display of the third pattern display device 81 together with the state change of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is also conceivable as a method of producing effects in conjunction with the state change of the enlarging/reducing unit 600 .

However, in a situation where the third pattern display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the scaling unit 600 and most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is shielded by the scaling unit 600, as in the present embodiment. , even if the display of the third pattern display device 81 is switched, it is difficult to show the display, and it is difficult to produce an effective effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the division member 310 that forms the range in which the granular members 320 that produce motion effects scatter along with the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is provided on the front side of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. Therefore, even in a situation where the enlargement/reduction unit 600 blocks most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the granular member 320 is not difficult for the player to see.

Furthermore, by configuring the granular member 320 with a small member, it is possible to prevent the enlarging/reducing unit 600 from becoming difficult to see as compared with the configuration of the granular member 320 with a large member.

Therefore, even in a state where most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is blocked by the scaling unit 600, the effect of the scaling unit 600 can be improved.

Also, the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular members 320 in combination with the scaling unit 600 can be used as it is for the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular members 320 in combination with the displacement/rotation unit 800 .

That is, the displacement/rotation unit 800, similarly to the enlargement/reduction unit 600, has a state in which the horizontal slide member 840 is retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (drawing standby state, see FIG. 7), and a horizontal state. Since the slide member 840 can be changed between the state where the slide member 840 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (lower end state of production, upper end state of production, see FIGS. 10 and 11), , an effect of visually recognizing the combination of the scattering granular members 320 and the display of the third pattern display device 81, and an effect of visually recognizing the combination of the scattering granular members 320 and the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800. be able to.

In this case, it has been explained that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can effectively produce an effect by scattering the granular members 320 in accordance with the dispersing mode of the production member 700, but the displacement/rotation unit 800 can rotate By scattering the particulate members 320 in accordance with the rotation of the wing-like members 854 disposed in the wing-like members 854, an air flow is generated by the rotation of the wing-like members 854. It can be visually recognized as if it is rotating at high speed), and the presentation effect of the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the scattering of the granular members 320 is visually recognized in combination with the display area of the third pattern display device 81, and is visually recognized in combination with the scaling unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800. can be used in combination with

As shown in FIG. 14, the rear end line BL1 of the first light irradiation device 330, which is part of the shooting effect unit 300 and is arranged directly above the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800, is shown in FIG. It is arranged on the rear side of the front end line FL1 of the displacement/rotation unit 800 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement trajectory of the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement/rotation unit 800 (for example, when the lateral slide member 840 continues to displace directly upward from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 may collide.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the advancing/retreating path portion S1b is set as a path that can avoid the collision between the firing effect unit 300 and the displacement/rotation unit 800. FIG. That is, by setting the advancing/retreating path portion S1b as a path passing through a gap provided in an oblique direction between the ejection device 400 of the firing effect unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 are separated. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of setting, and it is configured to be capable of upward displacement beyond the first light irradiation device 330 that sets the trailing edge line BL1, so that a large displacement width of the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be ensured. .

As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, the effect member 700 and the partitioning member 310 are arranged to the extent that the space can be secured, but the space between the effect member 700 and the partitioning member 310 must be secured until the time of transportation. Nothing to consider. Therefore, during transport, it is desirable to maintain the effect member 700 at the upper end position of the displacement range, and to restrict the partition member 310 and the effect member 700 from being arranged close to each other.

Returning to FIG. 6, description will be made. The motion unit 500 includes a displacement restricting device 180 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 . The displacement restricting device 180 is configured to be able to change its state by manual operation from the back side of the rear case 510, and in the restricting state, restricts the downward displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the presentation standby state.

By adopting the displacement restricting device 180, it is possible to facilitate shipment and transportation of the pachinko machine 10 even when the center opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment.

In detail, conventionally, a means of suppressing the displacement of the movable role by stuffing a cushioning material (cushion member such as cotton) in the range where the movable role is displaced, and removing the cushioning material after arriving at the game hall. This sometimes prevents displacement of the movable accessories during shipment or transportation. However, if the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 12(a)), there is no through-hole for extracting the cushioning material. The cushioning material cannot be removed without disassembling, which may impose a heavy burden on the game hall.

As a countermeasure against this, the displacement forming device 180 is employed in this embodiment. As a result, the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be changed between a regulated state in which the upward/downward displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is regulated without releasing the fixation of the game board 13 and the rear case 510, and a regulated state in which the regulation is released. You can switch. Hereinafter, the details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be described first, and then the details of the state change will be described.

15(a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, FIG. 15(b) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 15(c) is a front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180. It is a diagram.

15(a) and 15(b) illustrate the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state, and FIG. 15(c) illustrates the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state. As shown in FIGS. 15(a) to 15(c), the displacement restricting device 180 is switched between the restricted state and the restricted state by the cylindrical portion 183d protruding from the contact member 181. As shown in FIG. In the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes to the inside of the back case 510 and is configured to engage with the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, details of which will be described later.

16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 18(b) is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18(c) is a front view of the operation member 183. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement restricting device 180 includes an abutting member 181 arranged to abut on the rear case 510 (see FIG. 6), and a abutting member 181 arranged on the rear side of the abutting member 181. A guide member 182 that is fastened and fixed to 181 and guides the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction; an operation member 183 that is guided in displacement by the guide member 182; It is mainly provided with a coil spring 184 configured to be able to apply an urging force directed toward the back side to the operating member 181 .

As the operation member 183 is formed in a substantially elliptical shape elongated in the left and right direction when viewed from the rear, the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182 which accommodate the operation member 183 also have a substantially elliptical shape elongated in the left and right direction when viewed from the rear. Since it is formed, the external shape of the displacement restricting device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape elongated left and right when viewed from the rear.

The abutment member 181 is mainly designed in a plate shape so as to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the rear case 510. The plate end of the abutment member 181 extends toward the rear side to hold the guide member 182. The wall portion is extended, and insertion holes 181a are drilled at the left and right ends and through which the fastening portions protruding from the back case 510 are inserted. It has a cylindrical holding portion 181b protruding to the side, and an engaged portion 181c that forms a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the operating member 183 and is configured to be engageable with the operating member 183. As shown in FIG.

The guide member 182 includes a body portion 182a extending in the front-rear direction in an elliptical ring along the outer periphery of the contact member 181, and a screw through which a fastening screw is inserted into a fastening portion that is inserted through the insertion hole 181a. An insertion portion 182b, a fastening portion 182c into which a fastening screw to be inserted through the contact member 181 is screwed, a retainer portion 182d projecting radially inward at the back side end portion of the main body portion 182a, and the main body portion 182a. The upper and lower inner portions are provided with projections 182e projecting radially inward in the front-rear direction.

From this configuration, by fastening and fixing the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182, the operation member 183 can be arranged between the abutment member 181 and the guide member 182 and held so as not to fall off. In the embodiment, the conditions in which the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled are limited by setting the fastening direction.

In other words, in this embodiment, the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 is inserted from the front side of the contact member 182 (the side covered by the rear case 510). Therefore, when the displacement restricting device 180 is attached to the rear case 510, the fastening screws cannot be touched. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only when the displacement restricting device 180 is removed from the rear case 510 .

The fastening screws for fastening and fixing the displacement restricting device 180 to the back case 510 are inserted through the screw insertion portions 182b from the back side of the guide member 182, so that the back side of the back case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19). ) can be easily touched, and the displacement restricting device 180 can be easily removed from the rear case 510 .

The operation member 183 has a main body portion 183a formed in a cup shape with an elliptical shape slightly smaller than the retainer portion 182d of the guide member 182 when viewed from the rear, the front side being open, and a front edge portion of the main body portion 183a. a flange portion 183b projecting radially outward from the flange portion 183b; a groove portion 183c recessed in the flange portion 183b; An arc-shaped protrusion 183e projecting toward the front side in an arc shape having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 centered on the portion 183d and a position where it can be engaged with the engaged portion 181c of the contact member 181. and an engaging portion 183f that can constitute a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

An elliptical seal is attached to the rear surface of the operation member 183 . This seal has a concave shape formed on one of the ends in the short direction (see FIG. 15(a)), and by arranging this concave shape upward, it is possible to easily prevent vertical orientation errors during assembly. can do.

By making the main body portion 183a oval, it is possible to easily prevent the operation member 183 from being rotationally displaced. That is, even if the operating member 183 is about to be rotationally displaced, the rotation is regulated by coming into contact with the main body portion 182a of the guide member 182 .

The flange portion 183b is larger than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182 when viewed from the rear, thereby preventing the operation member 183 from falling off the guide member 182. As shown in FIG. That is, the operating member 183 can be displaced in the front-rear direction while the flange portion 183b is held between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182. As shown in FIG.

The groove portion 183c is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182, and has a function of smoothly moving the operating member 183 back and forth. In the present embodiment, the grooves 183c are also formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side as the ridges 182e are formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side. As a result, it is possible to prevent erroneous assembly in which the operation member 183 is mistakenly placed upside down.

The cylindrical portion 183 d is a portion that is inserted through the center of the coil spring 184 , and is configured to be able to be inserted through the central opening of the cylindrical holding portion 181 b of the contact member 181 . When the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes from the central opening of the abutment member 181, the cylindrical portion 183d engages with the restricted hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 to restrict the up-and-down displacement of the effect member 700, as will be described later.

That is, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183d can be used both as a portion that regulates the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and as a portion that supports the coil spring 184. FIG.

The arc-shaped ridge portion 183e is arranged so as to face the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184, and faces the large diameter side cylindrical portion of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction. When the operation member 183 is pushed, the arc-shaped ridge 183e and the cylindrical holding portion 181b come into contact with each other before other parts, so that the load generating area can be increased, and the load is locally increased. It is possible to prevent the load from occurring.

The arc-shaped protrusion 183e is not circular, but is formed in an arc-like shape where the circle is interrupted, and the engaging portion 183f is arranged at the interrupted position. As a result, it is possible to avoid excessive separation between the engaging portion 183f and the cylindrical portion 183d and the coil spring 184. FIG.

State changes of the operating member 183 will be described. The operating member 183 is biased toward the rear side by the coil spring 184. When the operating member 183 is pushed forward against the biasing force, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c are formed. The latch mechanism is activated, and each time it is pushed in by a stroke greater than the minimum stroke for which the latch mechanism acts, the restriction state and the restriction release state are alternately switched.

In this way, since the state can be changed by the latch mechanism, the operation member 183 is not limited to the case where the operation member 183 is intentionally operated. If it is displaced by the stroke, there is a possibility that the state of the displacement restricting device 180 will change unintentionally.

For example, in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180, if the state of the displacement regulating device 180 unintentionally changes due to an impact during shipping or vibration during transportation, the scaling unit 600 will be placed in an effect standby state (effect member 700 is located at the upper displacement end). When the effect member 700 displaced from the effect standby state is placed close to the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 13), the effect member 700 receives the impact during shipment or the vibration during transportation, and the effect member 700 becomes the partitioning member of the firing effect unit 300. 310, and the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 may be damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 183f is arranged at a position (position eccentric to the right) away from the position (central position) where the biasing force is applied to the operating member 183, and the operating member 183f The gap dimension between the groove portion 183c of the guide member 183 and the projection 182e of the guide member 182 is set large, and the posture maintenance capability of the operation member 183 is intentionally lowered.

As a result, the attitude of the operation member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be tilted in advance, so that the displacement resistance of the operation member 183 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of displacement of the operating member 183 in the front-rear direction due to an unintended external force.

A relationship between the displacement restricting device 180 and the operation unit 500 will be described. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 opened, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b). 20] is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along line XXIa-XXIa of FIG.

21(a) illustrates the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 21(b) illustrates the released state of the displacement restricting device 180. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement regulating device 180 is arranged on the opening/closing base end side (left side) of the inner frame 12, and by opening the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12, the operator can extend his hand. configured to be touchable. Since this position is opposite to the side (opening/closing front end side, right side) where a worker who works with the inner frame 12 open enters, the worker may unintentionally move the displacement restricting device when the inner frame 12 is opened. Touching 180 can be avoided.

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c that constitute the latch mechanism are formed on the right side of the displacement restricting device 180. As shown in FIGS. Since the operating member 183 is loosely supported, not all of the load pushing the operating member 183 is used to move the operating member 183 back and forth, but is also used to change the posture of the operating member 183 .

For example, when the right side of the operating member 183 is pushed, even if the right side moves back and forth sufficiently, the posture of the operating member 183 may change and the left side may not be pushed sufficiently.

Therefore, for the purpose of pushing the displacement restricting device 180 to switch the state, it is easier for the operator to cause the necessary displacement of the displacement restricting device 180 by pinpointing the forming portion of the latch mechanism. It can be said that it is easy to succeed in switching the state of the regulation device 180 .

In this embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c, which constitute the latch mechanism, are formed on the right side of the displacement restricting device 180, and the operator enters from the right side to displace the displacement restricting device. Since the operator operates the device 180, the operator can reach the displacement restricting device 180 with a minimum of movement. Therefore, the operator can easily perform an operation of pinpointing the forming portion of the latch mechanism.

Also, the posture change when the operation member 183 is pushed occurs in such a manner that the pressing surface (the surface formed on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) faces the pushed side. Therefore, the pressing load of the operator can be easily transmitted to the operating member 183 as the amount of pressing increases.

In the regulated state shown in FIG. 21( a ), the cylindrical portion 183 d of the operating member 183 is inserted through the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to restrict displacement of the transmission gear 650 . This can prevent the state of the scaling unit 600 from changing.

Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (the rotation direction about the longitudinal axis) and the displacement direction of the operation member 183 (the front-rear direction) are perpendicular to each other, the operation member 183 receives the load from the transmission gear 650 in the displacement direction. can be prevented from receiving As a result, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively restricted without making the formation portion of the latch mechanism rigid.

Since the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be maintained by placing the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state, the application of the displacement restricting device 180 is not limited to transportation. For example, after installation in a game machine store, the displacement regulation device 180 is set in the regulation state to maintain the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 during maintenance, so that maintenance of the displacement/rotation unit 800, which will be described later, can be performed safely and easily.

That is, when the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement trajectory of the displacement/rotation unit 800 partially overlap as in the present embodiment, the drive motor of the scaling unit 600 is operated during maintenance work on the displacement/rotation unit 800. Even if the MT2 malfunctions, the state (arrangement) of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be maintained by the displacement regulation device 180, so that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be prevented from colliding. can be done.

When the displacement restricting device 180 is in the restricting state before the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the displacement restricting device 180 is switched to the deregulation state by pushing the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180. (See FIG. 21(b)). As a result, the transmission gear 650 can be displaced, and the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be caused to perform an effect operation accompanied by a state change.

Here, before the power is turned on, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and the displacement restricting device 180 is released from restriction by looking in from the open tip side (right side). It will be described that it is configured to be able to confirm whether or not

As shown in FIG. 21(a), in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the operation member 183 is arranged in front of the shape of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, so that when viewed from the right side, , the operation member 183 is hidden by the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21(b), when the displacement restricting device 180 is in the released state, the operation member 183 is arranged to protrude toward the back side from the shape of the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510. When viewed from the right side, the operation member 183 is visible at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511 .

Therefore, even if the operator does not fully open the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 as confirmation work before turning on the power, the operator can slightly open the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. By visually confirming that the operation member 183 protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 when viewed from the right side, it is possible to confirm that the displacement restricting device 180 is in the released state.

In this embodiment, the rear case 510 is made of a colorless transparent resin material, and the operation member 183 is made of a red transparent resin material, so that the visibility of the operation member 183 can be improved.

Here, a case will be described where the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted through the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180 (see FIG. 21(a)). . In this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state, the detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52) detects that the enlargement/reduction unit 600 has not changed in the power-on operation. is determined from the output of , and the position detection error display associated with this determination is displayed by the third pattern display device 81 .

By showing this position detection error display to the store clerk of the game machine store, it is possible to make the store clerk notice that the state of the displacement control device 180 may not have been changed. It should be noted that this error display is displayed by detecting whether or not there is a change in the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, not by detecting the state of the displacement restricting device 180. FIG.

That is, in the present embodiment, an alarm regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is issued using the position detection error display normally provided in the enlargement/reduction unit 600 without preparing an additional error display program or display material. can be output. As a result, the design cost can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted through the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the regulated state of the displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 21(a)). In this case, the pressing operation of the operation member 183 is disabled while the power is on, and it is required to turn off the power once, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the operating member 183 may be configured to be operable even during power-on.

In addition, the configuration for disabling the pushing operation of the operating member 183 can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be configured such that the pushing operation is disabled due to friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operation member 183, or a large-diameter portion is provided on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 to displace the transmission gear 650. Inside, the back surface of the transmission gear 650 and the large-diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183d may be engaged with each other to limit the displacement of the operating member 183. As shown in FIG.

As a different situation, an example in which the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 is pressed during maintenance at a game machine store will be described. In this embodiment, the pushing operation of the operation member 183 is not possible only when the regulated hole 657 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is aligned with the cylindrical portion 183d in the front and rear.

For example, during maintenance, even if the operation member 183 is pushed while the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 8), the displacement restricting device 180 changes its state to the restricting state. In this case, the cylindrical portion 183d is arranged on the displacement trajectory of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. Therefore, when the transmission gear 650 is displaced by the driving force after the maintenance is completed, the displacement is caused by the cylindrical portion 183d. is limited to

In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to determine that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is restricted, and by performing an error display (notification of abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement restricting device 180 remains in the restricted state. This can be notified to the clerk of the game machine store, the details of which will be described later.

As a result, the state of the displacement restricting device 180 can be determined by using the device for detecting the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 without providing a separate device for detecting the state of the displacement restricting device 180 .

It should be noted that the displacement control device 180 can be operated before or after the game board 13 and the motion unit 500 are assembled to the inner frame 12 . After assembly to the inner frame 12, it is necessary not only to open the inner frame 12, but also to open the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12. Therefore, if possible, before assembling to the inner frame 12, the displacement regulation is performed. Preferably, the device 180 has been operated.

Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, description will be made. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described shooting effect unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement/rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for livening up the game. These rendering devices will be described in order from the firing rendering unit 300. FIG.

22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 , the partitioning member 310 is arranged to face the light guide plate 161 in the assembled state of the shooting effect unit 300 . That is, it is possible to execute an effect in which the light guide plate 161 and the partitioning member 310 are superimposed and visually recognized by the player.

Since the partitioning member 310 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the granular member 320 scattered inside can be visually recognized by the player. Thus, an effect can be executed in which the light guide plate 161 and the scattering granular members 320 are superimposed and visually recognized.

24 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing effect unit 300. FIG. 24 and 25, the partition member 310 is shown exploded.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the firing effect unit 300 includes a partitioning member 310 arranged inside the center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and forming a box shape with an open bottom, and a partitioning member 310 for the partition. A plurality of granular members 320 displaceably arranged inside the member 310, an injection device 400 arranged in such a manner as to close the lower open portion so that the granular members 320 do not drop out of the partitioning member 310, and the partitioning member. A first light irradiation device 330 arranged on the right side of the partition member 310 and a second light irradiation device 340 arranged on the left side of the partition member 310 are provided.

The partitioning member 310 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a front plate portion 311 that is a plate-like portion arranged on the forefront, and a curved plate portion 312 that is integrally formed below the front plate portion 311 . A bottom plate portion parallel to the front plate portion 311 is arranged on the rear side of the front plate portion 311, and blocking walls extending from the left, right, and top of the bottom plate portion toward the front side so as to block the gap are provided. Communicates with a back partition 313 and an internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12(a)) integrally formed below the back partition 313 and configured between the front panel 311 and the back partition 313. It has a rear section lower part 314 that allows a path to be configured between the curved plate part 312 and a deformed penetrating part 315 penetrating through the rear section lower part 314 .

Although the size of the partitioning member 310 is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, the size of the window surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 and the size of the partitioning member 310 when viewed from the front are about the same. is formed to be That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate portion 311 are formed to have substantially the same shape.

Thereby, the component for hiding the edge of the light guide plate 161 can also be used for hiding the edge of the partition member 310 . A dedicated component for hiding the edge of the partitioning member 310 is not required, and the number of members is reduced, while the edge of the partitioning member 310 is displayed by being superimposed on the display by the third pattern display device 81 and visually recognized. can be avoided, the visibility of the display by the third pattern display device 81 can be maintained.

The internal space IE1 serves as a range in which the granular members 320 can scatter. need to do more. Therefore, forming a space narrower to some extent makes it possible to perform a powerful presentation by visually recognizing a small number of granular members 320 with a high density.

On the other hand, if the space is made too narrow, there is a risk that the granular member 320 will be clogged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 is ensured to be approximately the same as the front-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear section lower portion 314 . Therefore, compared to the case where the front-to-rear width is shortened, it is possible to avoid clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and rapid deceleration during injection.

Furthermore, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are arranged closer to the rear section lower portion 314 than the left and right central portions 312b, the movement path of the granular member 320 near the left and right central portions 312b is relatively large. can be narrowed.

That is, when the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the movement path of the granular member 320 can be concentrated near the left-right central portion 312b, and the granular member 320 can be positioned in the internal space IE1. It is possible to make it easier to reach the vicinity of the central part. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the granular member 320 .

In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and scatters in the internal space IE1. As a result, the player can visually recognize as if the granular members 320 explode from the vicinity of the center of the internal space IE1 and scatter in all directions. can be improved.

The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion that receives the granular member 320 when the granular member 320 injected into the internal space IE1 falls. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed to be inclined downward toward the rear surface side and inclined downward toward the left-right center.

As a result, regardless of where in the internal space IE1 the granular member 320 is arranged, the granular member 320, which is displaced downward by its own weight, can be displaced toward the lower side of the rear side while being moved toward the left-right center.

Further, the degree of downward inclination of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 is configured so that the downward inclination toward the left and right central side is steeper than the downward inclination toward the rear side. As a result, as the downward displacement tendency of the granular member 320, it is possible to cause displacement toward the left-right central side with priority over displacement toward the rear surface side. Therefore, due to the configuration of the injection device 400, which will be described later, at the right and left end positions where the granular members 320 are likely to be densely packed, the granular members 320 tend to be displaced to the rear side all at once, and the granular members 320 stay (clog) in the middle of downward displacement. can be avoided.

In addition, the degree of downward inclination toward the rear side of the left and right central portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 is steeper than the degree of downward inclination toward the left and right central portions of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312. is configured as This makes it easier to avoid the granular members 320 from crowding together while flowing down.

On the other hand, in the rear section lower part 314, the plate portion arranged to face the rear side of the curved plate portion 312 is approximately the same as the left and right central portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 12A) in a side view (see FIG. 12A). It is formed in a flat plate shape with an inclination angle such that the distance from the left and right center portions 312b is slightly widened toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is large.

In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the rear section lower portion 314 with respect to the vertical direction is the same (slightly larger angle) than the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction of the displacement direction of the collision member 420 that ejects the granular member 320 .

Therefore, the incident angle of the granular members 320 with respect to the rear section lower portion 314 is the same regardless of the ejection direction of the granular members 320 that can change to the left and right, so that the resistance given to the granular members 320 from the rear section lower portion 314 is substantially uniform. can do.

The deformed penetrating portion 315 is formed into a shape into which the lid member 480 can be inserted. Prepare. The penetrating direction is inclined upward from the back side toward the front side with respect to the plate surface of the back section lower portion 314 (see FIG. 12(a)). As a result, the acute-angled portion of the rear section lower portion 314 that constitutes the deformed through portion 315 (the lower portion of the deformed through portion 315 in FIG. 12A ) is not arranged to face the ejection direction of the granular member 320 .

This can reduce the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with the sharp-angled portion when the granular member 320 is injected, thereby avoiding the occurrence of local load on the granular member 320 and the rear section lower part 314, and the granular member 320. It is possible to prevent the member 320 and the rear section lower part 314 from being cracked or chipped.

24 and 25, the granular member 320 is made of a relatively soft resin material (at least softer than the resin material forming the partition member 310) and formed into a substantially soccer ball shape (12 regular pentagons). and 20 regular hexagons formed into a quasi-regular polyhedron) and provided with non-penetrating concave portions 321 formed non-penetratingly along a plurality of mutually parallel straight lines.

The non-penetrating concave portion 321 can reduce the weight of the granular member 320 and deviate the center of gravity of the granular member 320 from the central position of the shape. That is, in the linear direction in which the non-penetrating recesses 321 are formed, the meat portion remains on the side where the non-penetrating recesses 321 are not formed, so the center of gravity can be biased toward the side where the non-penetrating recesses 321 are not formed. .

Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to a posture in which the non-penetrating concave portion 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

In this case, the load from the injection device 400 can be received by the surface (see FIG. 25) on the side where the non-penetrating concave portion 321 is not formed. . Furthermore, since the non-penetrating concave portion 321 is directed toward the injection direction side when being injected with a load from the injection device 400, the surface on which the non-penetrating concave portion 321 is formed should collide with the front plate portion 311. can be done. As a result, the deformation of the granular member 320 can easily absorb the load upon collision with the front plate portion 311, and the possibility of damaging the front plate portion 311 can be reduced.

The first light irradiation unit 330 includes a fixed plate portion 331 fastened and fixed to the back side of the rear partition portion 313, an electrical board 332 fastened and fixed to the right side of the fixed plate portion 331, and the electrical board 332. A lid portion 333 is provided on the right side, is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 331 , and is formed so as to accommodate the electrical board 332 between the fixing plate portion 331 and the fixing plate portion 331 .

Light irradiation units 332a such as LEDs are arranged on both left and right sides of the electrical board 332, and light having an optical axis is emitted from the light irradiation units 332a in the left-right direction. The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are made of a resin material with low light transmittance, and are provided with through holes 331a and 333a at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. Thereby, it can be visually recognized as light divided into particles.

Of the light emitted from the illumination board 332, the light emitted to the right side often illuminates the right side path (right-handed path) of the game area where the through gate 67 and the like (see FIG. 2) are arranged. one purpose. The light emitted to the left will be described later.

The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are made of a resin material with low light transmittance (or no light transmittance), and are provided with through holes 331a and 333a at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation section 332a can be visually recognized as light divided into granules. It is possible to avoid being shielded by and visually recognized.

The second light irradiation unit 340 includes a fixed plate portion 341 fastened and fixed to the back side of the rear partition portion 313, an electrical board 342 fastened and fixed to the left side of the fixed plate portion 341, and the electrical board 342. A lid portion 343 is provided on the left side, is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 341 , and is formed so as to accommodate the electrical board 342 between the fixed plate portion 341 and the fixed plate portion 341 .

The fixing plate portion 341 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance (or non-light transmittance), while the lid portion 343 is made of a colorless and light transmittance resin material. Therefore, the electrical board 342 is visible when viewed from the left, but in the present embodiment, the left side of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) protrudes leftward. As a result, the field of view of the player can be narrowed in advance, and the left side of the decorative board 342 can be prevented from being seen when viewed from the front.

As a result, light can be emitted through the transparent lid portion 343 while avoiding the decorative electrical substrate 342 from being visually recognized.

Light irradiation units 342a such as LEDs are arranged on both the left and right sides of the electrical board 342 . Light having an optical axis directed forward is emitted from the light emitting portion 342a arranged on the left side surface. One purpose of this light is to illuminate the left side of the center frame 86 while not illuminating the left path of the game area.

Here, the reason for adopting a configuration different from the configuration in which the light emitted from the light emitting portion 342a of the electric decoration board 332 on the right side is positively directed to the game area is the playability of the pachinko machine 10 (normally It is considered that the game is played with the left hand, and the game is played with the right hand during the probability variation, the time reduction, and the jackpot game). This is explained below.

Since the game area of the pachinko machine 10 has a high degree of freedom in the ball flow path on the left side of the game area, during normal play, the shooting intensity of the ball is adjusted so that the ball will flow down the desired path. The operation of doing is performed by the player. Therefore, if the light emission intensity on the left side of the game area is increased too much, the visibility of the ball becomes poor, which hinders the adjustment of the shooting intensity of the ball and may cause dissatisfaction of the player.

On the other hand, when shooting the ball to the right side of the playing area, basically, the player launches the ball with maximum shooting strength. The momentum of the shot ball is restrained by the return rubber 69, and the degree of freedom of selection of the downstream path of the ball on the downstream side is remarkably reduced, and the same path is exclusively passed.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, a single guide path DL1 (see FIG. 2) is formed downstream of the second prize winning port 640 and has a width through which one ball can pass. All the balls that did not hit go through the guide path DL1 and go to the variable winning device 65 and the general winning opening 63 arranged on the downstream side.

As described above, since there is little need to adjust the shooting intensity of the ball, even if the visibility of the ball becomes poor in the right side of the game area (especially the part where the guide path DL1 is formed), the game will not be hindered. Since the possibility of causing this is low, it is possible to perform an effect with a high emission intensity in this range.

For this reason, in the present embodiment, the illumination board 332 arranged on the right side is provided with the light irradiation part 332a so as to direct the light to the game area, while the illumination board 342 arranged on the left side Then, the light irradiation part 342a is arranged so as not to direct the light to the game area. As a result, it is possible to execute an effective light emitting effect while suppressing the dissatisfaction of the player.

Light having an optical axis directed to the right is emitted from the light emitting portion 342a arranged on the right side. A through hole 341a is formed in the fixed plate portion 341 at a position corresponding to the light irradiation portion 342a. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a can be visually recognized as light divided into granules, and the decorative substrate 342 is shielded by the fixed plate portion 341 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 342a. You can avoid being seen. The object illuminated by the light irradiation section 342a arranged on the right side will be described later.

26(a) is a side view of the first light irradiation device 330 viewed in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and FIG. 26(b) is a side view of the second light irradiation device 340 viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), the outer shape of the partition member 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 26( a ), the light irradiation unit 332 a arranged on the left side of the first light irradiation device 330 includes an LED whose optical axis passes through the partitioning member 310 and an LED whose optical axis passes through the partitioning member 310 . an LED through which the axis passes.

As a result, not only is the effect of irradiating light onto the granular member 320 inside the partitioning member 310 , but also other movable means (enlargement/reduction unit 600 and displacement/rotation unit 800 ) arranged on the rear side of the partitioning member 310 are illuminated with light. It is possible to execute the effect to irradiate.

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the light irradiation unit 342a arranged on the right side of the second light irradiation device 340 has no LED whose optical axis passes through the partitioning member 310, and the rear side of the partitioning member 310. It consists only of LEDs through which the optical axis passes.

As a result, while suppressing the light emission intensity into the partitioning member 310, the illumination intensity of the light directed to the other movable means (the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800) arranged on the rear side of the partitioning member 310 is reduced. can be improved.

In the second irradiation device 340, by suppressing the emission intensity to the inside of the partitioning member 310, it is possible to improve the comfort of the game in the normal state. That is, in the game in the normal state, the player's line of sight is not fixed, but is mainly directed to the left side of the game area, the display of the third symbol display device 81, or the vicinity of the first winning hole 64, In many cases, the player is looking at the area to the left of the center of the game area.

In this case, when the interior of the partitioning member 310 is irradiated with light from the second irradiation device 340, it shines at a position near the front to the same extent as the game area. As a result, there is a possibility that the visibility of the game area may be deteriorated for the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 is arranged toward the back side, and the light irradiation unit 342a is separated from the game area. can weaken the degree of influence on the visibility of the game area.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 emits light that illuminates the inner side of the center frame 86 in front view with high intensity while reducing the degree of lighting the game area. can perform the performance. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of lighting up the enlargement/reduction unit 600 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) without lowering the visibility of the game area.

27 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the shooting unit 300 along line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the shooting unit 300 are illustrated, and the illustration of the operation unit 500 is omitted. Also, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are schematically indicated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is arranged on the left side and the rear side of the vertically placed substrate unit 167, avoiding the later-described vertically placed substrate unit 167 that irradiates the light guide plate 161 with light. As a result, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 342a can be prevented from entering the light guide plate 161, and the light emission effect can be performed. It can be separated from performance.

When the light guide plate 161 is employed as in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 161 may unintentionally emit light depending on the light irradiation path, which may reduce the presentation effect. In particular, since the light irradiated around the light guide plate 161 (for example, the front side of the center frame 86) tends to illuminate the light guide plate 161, it may be necessary to suppress the light emission intensity, which may reduce the degree of freedom in rendering. was

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is configured to travel while avoiding the light guide plate 161, so that the degree of freedom in setting the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is improved. be able to. As a result, the degree of freedom of the lighting effect around the light guide plate 161 can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, description will be made. The injection device 400 is disposed below the partition member 310, and is a device on which the granular member 320 that has flowed downward from the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12(a)) of the partition member 310 rides.

28, 29 and 30 are front exploded perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32 and 33 are rear exploded perspective views of the injection device 400. FIG. 28 and 31 show an outline of the configuration of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 29 and 32 show details of a part of the configuration of the injection device 400 arranged near the front side. 30 and 33 show details of the configuration of a portion of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the rear side. 24 and 25 will be referred to as necessary in the description of FIGS. 28 to 33. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 33, the injection device 400 includes, as fixed members, a fixing member 350 fastened and fixed to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 24), and a fixed member 350 fastened and fixed on the rear side of the fixed member 350. A space forming member 360 configured to be able to form a space capable of accommodating other movable members between itself and the fixed member 350, and an electric wiring and transmission arm member 470 which are fastened and fixed on the back side of the space forming member 360 and which will be described later. and an intermediate member 401 disposed between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and having a keyhole-shaped opening 402 at its center.

A fastening screw used to fasten and fix the fixing member 350 to the partitioning member 310 is inserted through the partitioning member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, it is necessary to loosen this fastening screw with a screwdriver and remove it, but the game board 13 and the shooting unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12(a)). , the base plate 60 is arranged on the front side of the fixing member 350, and is configured so that a screwdriver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw.

Therefore, as a preparation before removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, the operation of removing the shooting unit 300 from the game board 13 can be performed. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the fixing member 350 is mistakenly removed from the partitioning member 310 and the granular member 320 is ejected from the fixing member 310 while the shooting unit 300 is attached to the game board 13.例文帳に追加be able to.

Injection device 400 is configured such that a plurality of metal rods MB1 fixed to the front side of intermediate member 401 are inserted as members displaceably arranged between intermediate member 401 and fixed member 350 so as to be linearly displaceable. a linear motion member 410 arranged above the linear motion member 410 and supported so as to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410; A contact member 430 is provided below the motion member 410 and configured to be capable of changing its state between a contactable state and a non-contactable state in the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410 .

The injection device 400 is a member disposed between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 so as to be displaceable. and a drive shaft of a driving motor MT1 fastened and fixed to a fixing member 350 and engaged with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440. A gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460 disposed on the side opposite to the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440 are provided.

The injection device 400 is a member arranged displaceably on the back side of the space forming member 360 and is pivotally supported so as to be rotationally displaceable about a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440 . A transmission arm member 470 configured to be displaceable by action, and a cover member 480 that is rotatably displaceable about a horizontal straight line as a rotation axis and is displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470 .

A design concept of the injection device 400 having the above configuration will be described. In the injection device 400 , the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 divide the arrangement range of the constituent members into three along the projecting direction of the shaft portion 362 projecting from the space forming member 360 . Among the arrangement ranges divided in this way, the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is generated in the intermediate range where the driving gear 450 rotated by the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is arranged, and the driving force is distributed between the front range and the rear range. are respectively transmitted to the range of , displacement of each component occurs in the front range and the rear range.

Based on this design concept, the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 are each provided with openings for transmitting driving force. That is, the intermediate portion 401 has a keyhole-shaped opening 402 , and the space forming member 360 has a lemon-shaped (substantially elliptical) opening 361 .

Since the transmission of the driving force is completed in the front range of the intermediate portion 401 and the rear range of the space forming member 360, the details of the configuration will be described in the order of the front range and the rear range. , the details of the construction of the intermediate range are described, and the mode of operation is described.

First, description will be made focusing on the front range. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 includes the opening 402 described above, a plurality of cylindrical projections 403 projecting from the upper end to the front side, and the cylindrical projections 403 a plurality of coil springs SP1 whose upper ends are supported by the base, a plurality of rod fixing portions 404 arranged in left-right symmetrical positions so as to be able to fix a plurality of metal rods MB1, and a columnar projection protruding toward the front side near the lower end. The lower end of the coil spring SP1 is hooked on each of a plurality of claws 411 formed on the lower end of the direct-acting member 410 .

The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed to be shorter than the distance between the cylindrical projection 403 and the claw 411 when the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. Therefore, the linear motion member 410 is always biased by the coil spring SP1, and the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the upper end position by the biasing force before the driving force is transmitted from the intermediate range. The coil spring SP1 is arranged obliquely below the direct-acting member 410. This is also intended to concentrate the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 on the side where the granular members 320 tend to accumulate.

The direct-acting member 410 includes the claw portion 411 described above, a plurality of insertion portions 412 formed so that the metal rod MB1 can be inserted therethrough, a trapezoidal projecting portion 413 projecting in a trapezoidal shape from the upper end portion in the left-right center, A linear protrusion 414 extending in the left-right direction at a substantially central position in the vertical width direction on the back side, and a lower protrusion formed as a shorter protrusion than the protrusion 414 on the lower side of the protrusion 414. 415, and a displacement restricting portion 416 protruding from the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction toward the front side.

Trapezoidal protruding portion 413 is formed so as to be able to abut on collision member 420 in a state in which direct-acting member 410 is arranged at the upper end position. In other words, the direct-acting member 410 is formed such that only the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 can come into contact with the collision member 420, and the portion other than the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 does not come into contact with the collision member 420. be.

The ridge portion 414 and the lower ridge portion 415 are portions that receive loads from other constituent members during load transmission, and the details will be described later.

The displacement restricting portion 416 is a portion of the fixed member 350 that abuts against the cushioning member 352 in the displacement direction, and this abutment restricts displacement of the direct-acting member 410 (upward-side displacement end is set).

The collision member 420 includes a curved plate portion 421 forming an arch-shaped collision surface, and a flat plate-shaped portion extending from the back side end portion of the curved plate portion 421 parallel to the plane in which the linear motion member 410 displaces. A plate portion 422, a plurality of elongated guide holes 423 extending along the extension direction of the plate portion 422, and a trapezoidal projecting portion 413 at the lower end of the left and right central portion of the plate portion 422 in the displacement direction. A cushioning member 424 is fixed at a position facing each other and arranged so as to be able to abut against the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 .

The cylindrical protrusion 403 is inserted through the guide hole 423 . That is, the columnar protrusion 403 is used both as a portion that supports the upper end portion of the coil spring SP1 and as a portion that guides the displacement of the collision member 420 .

The cushioning member 424 is formed as a small piece with a square outer shape from a highly durable and flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 424 and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 of the direct-acting member 410 come into contact can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 can be prevented from being damaged or chipped. can be suppressed.

The contact member 430 is formed in a substantially triangular elongated plate shape, and has a support hole 431 formed as a circular opening through which the support column portion 405 can be inserted at one end of the elongated plate, and the other end of the elongated plate. and a hook-shaped protrusion 433 having a hook-shaped cross section and protruding toward the front side at a position between the support hole 431 and the protrusion 432. Prepare.

The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support column portion 405 is inserted, whereby the contact member 430 is pivotally supported by the support column portion 405 so as to be rotatably displaceable.

The protruding portion 432 and the hook-shaped protruding portion 433 are portions that receive loads from other constituent members during load transmission, the details of which will be described later.

The fixing member 350 includes a motor fixing portion 351 to which the above-described drive motor MT1 is arranged and fixed, a buffer member 352 arranged so as to be able to abut against the displacement restricting portion 416, and a tip end of the circular protrusion 403 which can be received. a plurality of fastening recesses 353 formed as recesses configured so that a fastening screw inserted from the front side through a through-hole inside the recess can be screwed into a female thread formed in the circular protrusion 403 to be fastened and fixed; and a guide portion 354 which is formed of an inclined surface tapered from the front side and the left and right directions and guides the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24).

The cushioning member 352 is formed as a small piece having a square outer shape from a highly durable and flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the cushioning member 352 and the displacement restricting portion 416 of the linear motion member 410 come into contact can be softened by the characteristics of the resin material, and the occurrence of breakage and chipping of the displacement restricting portion 416 can be suppressed. be able to.

As described above, in this embodiment, the buffer members 352 and 424 are arranged at a plurality of locations with which the linear motion member 410 abuts at the end of displacement in the biasing direction. As a result, as will be described later, the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward at high speed by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. can be absorbed by the deformation of the cushioning members 352 and 424, and the load can be distributed to a plurality of locations.

The columnar protrusion 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected via the fastening recess 353, and in order to release this connection, the fastening screw inserted through the coupling recess 353 needs to be turned and removed. On the other hand, since the fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, it is possible to insert a screwdriver into the fastening screw when the game board 13 and the shooting effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12). configured to prevent

As a result, in a state where the game board 13 and the shooting performance unit 300 are assembled, the tightening screws are erroneously loosened to prevent loosening of the tightening between the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401. - 特許庁can be done.

Next, description will be made focusing on the rear range. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-described opening 361, a shaft portion 362 projecting in a columnar shape toward the front side from approximately the center position of the rear plate portion, and a rear plate portion. A pair of left and right guide inclined surfaces 363 formed as inclined surfaces on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion extending toward the front side at the left and right ends of the upper end position of the face plate portion, and arranged below the left and right inner side of the guide inclined surfaces 363 A pair of left and right protruding support portions 364 protruding from the back plate portion toward the front side, and both left and right end portions are formed in a cylindrical shape and arranged on the same line, and are formed in a size capable of pivotally supporting the lid member 480 . A plurality of support column portions 365, a torsion spring SP2 that is wound around the left support column portion 364 and generates a biasing force toward the retracting side of the lid member 480, and a columnar projection on the back side at the upper left portion of the opening 361. and a cylindrical projection 366 that is

The shaft portion 362 is a portion that rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as will be described later. Correspondingly, a wall portion having an arc-shaped inner surface centered on the shaft portion 362 extends from the rear plate portion of the space forming member 360 toward the front side. This wall portion can cover the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 inside.

The guide inclined surface 363 is configured so that the inclination of the left and right inner side surfaces is flush with the left and right inner gully surfaces of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and the granular member 320 flowing down is directed to the collision member 420 side (left and right central side). It is formed so as to be able to be guided toward.

The protruding support part 364 is formed so that the protruding tip contacts the back surface of the intermediate member 401 and the upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401 . This flush upper surface supports the left and right ends of the curved plate portion 421 in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position.

The support column portion 365 has different shapes on the left and right. That is, the right side is formed in a small-diameter cylindrical shape that protrudes outward to the left and right, and the left side is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter capable of receiving the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 .

The cylindrical protrusion 366 is a portion that rotatably supports the transmission arm 470 by being inserted through the transmission arm 470 . A screw having a large head diameter is fixed to a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 366, thereby supporting the transmission arm 470 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission arm member 470 is an elongated member having an approximately V-shape in appearance, and is a support that is bored with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 366 and through which the cylindrical projection 366 is inserted. A hole 471, a columnar protrusion 472 projecting from one end in the longitudinal direction toward the front side in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 471, and the other end in the longitudinal direction perpendicular to the axis of the support hole 471. and a transmission protrusion 473 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape along the plane.

The columnar protrusion 472 extends through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 toward the front side and is formed to be engageable with the rear transmission member 460 . In the present embodiment, the position of the transmission arm member 470 is changed by changing the arrangement of the cylindrical projection 472 as the rear transmission member 460 changes its position, which will be described later in detail.

A restricting member 370 is provided on the rear side of the columnar protrusion 472 . That is, the restricting member 370 is a plate-like member that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the space forming member 360, and includes a covering plate portion 371 that covers the movement path of the cylindrical protrusion 472 from the back side and an electrical wiring. Alternatively, a plurality of pressing claw portions 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling are provided.

The covering plate portion 371 is arranged close to the back side of the transmission arm member 470, and restricts the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 toward the back side (the back side in the rotation axis direction of the transmission arm member 470). As a result, it is possible to prevent the columnar protrusion 472 from separating from the rear transmission member 460 , thereby preventing the release of the engagement between the columnar protrusion 472 and the rear transmission member 460 . can.

The pressing claw portion 372 is a portion that temporarily fastens the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 and the detection sensor SC4 to the rear side plate of the space forming member 360 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the electrical wiring from shaking (for example, the arrangement of the electrical wiring changes due to vibration, etc.), and secure the approach path for other components. It can be configured to displace lateral slide member 840 and wings 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of displacement rotary unit 800 in a path that includes positions proximate device 400 .

The transmission protrusion 473 is a portion that is inserted through the lid member 480 to transmit driving force to the lid member 480 .

The lid member 480 is a member configured to be movable forward and backward in and out of the partitioning member 310 through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 12A) of the partitioning member 310, and is formed in a curved plate shape. 481, a plurality of extension plate portions 485 extending in the same direction from both left and right ends of the advancing/retracting portion 481, and a plurality of extension plate portions 485 coaxially received at the extending end portions of the extension plate portions 485. , a transmission hole 487 formed in the left extension plate portion 485 in a curved elongated hole shape and through which the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted, and a cylindrical shape surrounding the right reception portion 486 and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support column portion 365 can be inserted while surrounding the receiving portion 486 . a left cover member 489 having a cylindrical portion inserted into the left receiving portion 486 and an elongated hole-shaped portion continuously connected to the transmission hole 487 .

The left cover member 489 is provided with abutment surfaces 489a to 489c that are functionally formed rather than drilled along the axial direction, details of which will be described later.

The cross-sectional shape of the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is arc-shaped around the rotation axis assumed for the receiving portion 486, so that the load from the outer diameter side (the load applied from the granular member 320) can be rotated. Although it is configured to face the axis, it is not a simple pipe divided shape, but the radius of the arc and the length of formation are changed according to the left and right positions. This design intent will be explained.

First, the advance/retreat portion 481 has an overhang portion 482 projecting toward the entrance side at the lateral center position. The projecting portion 482 is formed so that the projecting width becomes shorter toward the left and right outer sides, and the end surface on the entry side is formed to be inclined toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, when the overhanging portion 482 and another component (in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed) come into contact with each other, the load directed to the left and right outer sides of the component is reduced. can be provided, and the component can be driven to the left and right outside.

Secondly, as described above, the advancing/retracting portion 481 is configured to be able to enter the partitioning member 310 through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the partitioning member 310. Since it enters the member 310, the arc radius of the advance/retreat portion 481 is shortened at the lateral center position where the overhang portion 482 is formed.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation that may occur at the point where it starts to enter the deformed penetrating portion 315 (the center of the projecting portion 482 in the left and right direction). can be suppressed.

Third, the radius of the arc is increased near the left and right outer sides of the retractable portion 481 , as opposed to the center position of the projecting portion 482 . The main purpose of this is to avoid contact with the particulate material 320 . That is, in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 12A) arranged on the upper surface of the collision member 420 stays on the left and right outer sides due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421 .

This retention method is not completely uniform on the left and right, and may become non-uniform on the left and right. For example, there is a possibility that an extremely large number of granular members 320 will stay on the right side, and if sufficient space is not secured, there is a possibility that the unevenly accumulated granular members 320 and the advancing/retreating portion 481 will collide. .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advance/retreat portion 481 is increased near the left and right outer portions where a large amount of the granular members 320 tend to stay. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficiently long distance between the advancing/retreating portion 481 and the curved plate portion 421 in advance. Collisions can be avoided.

Another design concept will be described. The extension plate portion 485 is formed on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, and the end face on the entrance side is recessed toward the retraction side. As a result, the extended plate portion 485 can be prevented from colliding with the staying granular member 320 .

In addition, even if the cover member 480 is arranged at the end of displacement on the entrance side before the granular member 320 completely flows down, the granular member 320 is positioned between the recess forming portion of the extension plate portion 485 and the curved portion of the partition member 310 . The particle members 320 can be collected above the collision member 420 by configuring the particle members 320 to be large enough to pass through the gap between the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25).

The right and left receiving portions 486 have different shapes. That is, the left receiving portion 486a on the left side is formed in a circular cylinder shape, and the right receiving portion 486b on the right side is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape (half-pipe shape).

Returning to FIG. 28 and FIG. 31, description will be made. The support column portion 365 that supports the lid member 480 extends laterally outward, particularly on the right side. It is necessary to divide the advance/retreat portion 481 in order to assemble it to the column portion 365 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the lid member 480 moves forward and backward through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The deformed penetrating part 315 needs to be configured to allow the lid member 480 to move back and forth with respect to the partitioning member 310 , and to be configured to prevent the particulate member 320 from being ejected from the partitioning member 310 . In other words, the deformed through portion 315 cannot be increased indefinitely, and the degree of freedom in designing the deformed through portion 315 is limited.

Here, if the lid member 480 loses its shape to such an extent that it cannot pass through the deformed through portion 315, it becomes impossible to move forward and backward. On the other hand, when the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured by coupling a plurality of members, there is a possibility that the shape may be lost due to factors such as assembly errors.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the receiving portion 486 is made different on the left and right, so that the moving portion 481 does not need to be divided. As an assembly process, first, the left receiving portion 486a is arranged on the axially outer side (left side) of the support column portion 365, and the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 is inserted into the support column portion 365 while being inserted into the left receiving portion 486a. Thus, the left receiving portion 486a can be arranged coaxially with the support column portion 365. As shown in FIG.

At this time, the right receiving portion 486b is arranged to face the support column portion 365 on the open side of the half cylinder. The left cover member 489 is fastened and fixed to the extended plate portion 485 by inserting fastening screws through the plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489 and screwing them into the extended plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480 . can do.

After that, the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction, and the screw head of the fastening screw that is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the right support column portion 365 is used to support the lid member 480 into a space. It can be rotatably supported relative to the forming member 360 .

The design concept of the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 to 36 show the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in chronological order.

34(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34(b) is a transmission arm member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34(a). 34(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc of FIG. 34(b).

35(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as seen in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35(b) is a plan view of the transmission arm member as seen in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35(a). 35(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b).

36(a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 36(b) is a transmission arm member viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). 36(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. 36(b).

35 and 36 illustrate a process in which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 34, and the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. Specifically, FIG. 36 illustrates a state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at the entry-side end of the displacement range, and FIG. The arranged state is shown, and FIG. 35 shows the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the intermediate position of the displacement range.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in this embodiment, the rotation axis of transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of cover member 480 are not parallel. Specifically, a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 (a plane shown in FIG. 34(a)) and a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (a plane shown in FIG. 34(b)) ) are orthogonal to each other.

Therefore, without countermeasures, the contact area of the transmission protrusion 473 that contacts the left cover member 489 normally changes as the posture changes. For example, when the inner surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending parallel to the axial direction of the lid member 480, the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 extends in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 34(a). On the other hand, in the inclined state, the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 is considered to abut on the left cover member 489 at a rightward position (near the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36( a ), when the longitudinal direction of the transmission projection 473 extends along the left-right direction, the upper side surface of the transmission projection 473 is considered to be in contact with the left cover member 489 across the width direction. be done.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34(c), 35(c) and 36(c), the upper surface of the transmission projection 473 changes in accordance with the posture change of the transmission projection 473. The left cover member 489 is designed in such a shape that the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 can abut across the lateral width direction.

That is, the left cover member 489 has a first contact surface 489a that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side, and the first contact surface 489a is relatively small. A second contact surface 489b formed with a small inclination in the left-right direction, and a lid member 480 formed with a small inclination in the left-right direction compared to the second contact surface 489b are arranged at the displacement end position on the entrance side. and a third contact surface 489c that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in a state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the inclination of the shape of the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 with respect to the left-right direction is maximized at the first contact surface 489a and gradually decreases toward the rotation axis of the lid member 480. designed to

More specifically, as the transmission arm member 470 rotates, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the upper side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the cover member 480 . The inclination at the contact position of the left cover member 489 with the upper side surface of the opening is designed at an inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 in the contact state.

As a result, when the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are in contact with each other, the contact area between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can always be ensured regardless of the posture of the transmission arm member 470 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a local load (overload) from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 from the left cover member 489 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, at the timing when a large load is generated, that is, the timing at which the cover member 480 starts to be displaced against gravity, the inclination angle of the transmission projection 473 is set with respect to the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489). Therefore, the contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

As a result, the area that bears the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the durability of the transmission protrusion 473 can be improved.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the entry side, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489). In addition to the reduced contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is maximized, and there is a possibility that the transmission protrusion 473 will be overloaded. be.

As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, when the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, the proportion of the weight of the cover member 480 that is applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is reduced. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entrance side, the advance/retreat portion 481, which accounts for most of the weight of the lid member 480, is the rotational axis of the lid member 480. It is arranged on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-rear direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated in the direction of displacing the lid member 480 toward the entrance side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

In this case, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is the maximum, but since most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, the biasing force is at least Part of this can be offset by the weight of the lid member 480 itself.

As a result, the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is greater than that in the case where most of the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 473 in the state where the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side. can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480 . More specifically, the distance between the abutment position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the cover member 480 in the process of displacing the cover member 480 from the retreating position to the entering position is The member 480 is configured to be the longest when it is arranged at the displacement end position on the withdrawal side.

In addition, the first contact surface 489a has a normal line at the contact position with the transmission protrusion 473 on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480, which is an arc centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed so as to follow (the inclination angle becomes small), the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is shifted to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can occur along an arc.

This lengthens the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 when the load starts to be transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480, thereby reducing the load required to rotate the lid member 480. can do.

As a contrivance of the shape of the transmission projection 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34(c), the transmission projection 473 has a groove 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, the transmission protrusion 473 is formed with a groove 473a extending in the longitudinal direction from the front side to the rear side to a position beyond the center in the width direction.

As a result, the transmission protrusion 473 can be compressed and deformed in the direction of contact with the left cover member 489, so that the load applied during contact can be relieved by deformation, and the contact area can be easily increased by deformation. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 34(b), 35(b), and 36(b), the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane across the left and right. be done. Therefore, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 becomes shorter toward the center in the left-right direction due to the shape of the retractable portion 481 and the projecting portion 482 .

The radius of the projecting portion 482 of the lid member 480 at the center position in the left-right direction is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotation axis O1 to the curved plate portion 312 . As a result, the projecting portion 482 having the maximum approach width can be prevented from colliding with the curved plate portion 312, so that the lid member 480 is slightly over-rotated (caused by the design error of each member). In this case, the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 can be prevented from colliding and being damaged.

Returning to FIGS. 28 and 31, description will be made focusing on the intermediate range. The drive gear 450 is meshed with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, as the drive gear 450 rotates, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 440 rotate. The transmission member 460 integrally rotates about the shaft portion 362 of the space forming member 360 . In the following description, rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (viewed from the side of the front transmission member 440) is defined as forward rotation.

The front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 have a configuration for ensuring mutual relative position and rigidity on the side arranged opposite to each other, and the opposite side surface is used for driving force transmission. A shape is formed. The details of the shape portion used for this driving force transmission will be described below.

37(a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 37(b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. . The arrow XXXVIIa direction and the arrow XXXVIIb direction are set as directions parallel to the rotation axes of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 .

As shown in FIG. 37( a ), the front transmission member 440 includes a substantially disk-shaped body plate portion 441 and an axially protruding center portion of the body plate portion 441 from the edge of the body plate portion 441 . A groove forming portion 442 that is recessed, a support hole 443 that is a circular opening that is drilled in the central portion of the main body plate portion 441 and has a size that allows the shaft portion 362 to pass through, and a gear that is formed in the main body plate portion 441. A flange portion 444 covering the teeth, a detected portion 445 extending radially outward from the flange portion 444 and formed so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32), and groove formation. a transmission protrusion 446 protruding parallel to the rotation shaft from a position eccentric to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side of the groove formed in the portion 442 .

The groove forming portion 442 is recessed with a groove having a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the projecting portion 432 so that the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The groove is a first groove portion 442a formed along a first circular arc shape, and the front transmission member 440 rotates forward in a state in which the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged in the first groove portion 442a. A second groove portion 442b in which the protruding portion 432 is guided, and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 442a with respect to the second groove portion 442b and having a larger diameter than the arc serving as the reference of the first groove portion 442a. and a fourth groove portion 442d connecting the third groove portion 442c and the first groove portion 442a.

While the second groove portion 442b and the fourth groove portion 442d have a common role of connecting between the first groove portion 442a and the third groove portion 442c, their forming angle range is not common. That is, the formation angle range of the fourth groove portion 442d is smaller than that of the second groove portion 442b. designed to be

The transmission projection 446 does not have a simple cylindrical shape, but has a groove 446a formed in a straight line connecting the central portion and a point on the outer diameter side along the projecting direction. Thereby, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 with respect to the load input from the radial direction can be changed according to the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when a load is input in a direction perpendicular to the straight line that serves as a reference for the groove 446a.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), the rear transmission member 460 includes a body plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disk shape with a diameter approximately equal to that of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440, and and a groove forming portion 462 projecting in the axial direction of the body plate portion 461 and having a groove recessed therein; and a non-contact opening 463 formed to avoid contact with the

The main body plate portion 461 includes a weight portion 461a that is enlarged in the radial direction in a range in which a recessed groove portion is not formed in the groove forming portion 462 and does not function as a groove. The weight portion 461a is an adjustment portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of deviation of the center of gravity of the rotationally displaced rear transmission member 460 from the rotation axis.

In the present embodiment, the center of gravity is calculated when the rear transmission member 460 and the front transmission member 440, which are integrally rotationally displaced, are viewed as an integrated body, and the weight 461a is arranged and arranged for the purpose of correcting the center of gravity to the shape of the rotation axis. It is weighted and formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460 . As a result, the center of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be aligned with the rotation axis, so that the posture change of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation axis can be suppressed. .

The groove forming portion 462 is formed with a groove having a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the cylindrical projection 472 so that the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter. , the groove includes a first groove portion 462a formed along a first circular arc shape, and the rear transmission member 460 in a state where the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged in the first groove portion 462a. A second groove portion 462b in which the cylindrical protrusion 472 is guided by forward rotation (rotation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back), and a second groove portion 462b formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 462a with respect to the second groove portion 462b. A third groove 462c formed along an arc having a larger diameter than the reference arc of 462a, and a fourth groove 462d connecting the third groove 462c and the first groove 462a.

While the second groove portion 462b and the fourth groove portion 462d have a common role of connecting between the first groove portion 462a and the third groove portion 462c, their forming angle range is not common. That is, compared to the second groove portion 462b, the formation angle range of the fourth groove portion 462d is remarkably large (approximately 180 degrees). It is designed so that the change in the distance between is slow.

An example of a displacement mode enabled by the injection device 400 will be described below. First, an overview of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be described.

38, 39, 40 and 41 are plan views of the injection device 400 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 38, 39, 40 and 41, the illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted so that the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized. In order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring SP1 is shown in phantom lines as a schematic diagram to the extent that changes in length can be grasped.

38 to 41 illustrate the displacement of the injection device 400 in chronological order. 38 shows the state immediately after the granular member 320 flows down toward the collision member 420 and stops, FIG. 39 shows the waiting state of the injection device 400 for effect, and FIG. A shooting standby state, which is a state of waiting for the shooting timing of the device 400, is illustrated, and FIG. 41 illustrates a shooting state, which is a state immediately after the ejection device 400 executes the shooting effect. 41 shows a state in which the granular member 320 is still riding on the collision member 420, the granular member 320 scatters in the normal direction of the curved plate portion 421 immediately after this.

In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported by the direct-acting member 410, and the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreating side. A state in which the cover member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the end of displacement on the entrance side will be described as the effect waiting state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 39).

In the effect waiting state shown in FIG. 39, the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, so that the player's line of sight to the granular member 320 can be partially blocked by the cover member 480 . As a result, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be reduced, so that the player's eyes can be taken away from the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 arranged therebelow.

In the firing standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is suspended in such a manner that the cylindrical projection 403 abuts against the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreat side. . In addition, as will be described later, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430, and the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

In the firing state shown in FIG. 41, the placement of the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retreating side, the collision member 420 is bounced by the linear motion member 410 and rises, and the cylindrical protrusion 403 is pushed up into the guide hole. It stops at a position where it abuts against the lower inner surface of 423 . After that, the collision member 420 is displaced downward by its own weight or the weight of the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG.

The flowing down of the granular members 320 splashed and scattered by the collision member 420 is guided toward the collision member 420 after being gathered to the left-right central side due to the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310. (See arrows schematically shown in FIG. 38).

In the present embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided toward the collision member 420, the collision member 420 is arranged relatively upward. and the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 is set shallow.

Therefore, due to the shape, there is a possibility that the plurality of granular members 320 cannot be received unevenly. In this embodiment, the partitioning member 310 accommodates the number of granular members 320 that cannot be received unevenly.

As a result, for example, even if a large number of the granular members 320 begin to return to the right side of the collision member 420, when the granular members 320 return after that, the granular members 320 that have returned first will cause the collision member 420 to move. Since a slope that slopes downward toward the left side is formed on the right side, the granular material 320 that returns later flows along the slope to the left. That is, it flows to the left while riding on the granular member 320 .

As a result, the left and right bias of the granular members 320 accumulated on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 can be reduced, so that the bias in the arrangement of the granular members 320 (differences in the scattering mode) in each firing performance can be reduced. can do.

Further, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is arranged in the middle position of the displacement section, and the lower direct-acting member 410 and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 are located at one point. They are only in contact with each other. Therefore, the collision member 420 is allowed to change its posture by the gap generated between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423 . In other words, it is allowed to change its posture in a manner of rotating around an axis parallel to the axis of one cylindrical protrusion 403 .

As described above, for example, when a large number of granular members 320 begin to return to the right side of the collision member 420, the collision member 420 changes its posture so that the right side descends compared to the left side. However, in this case, the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is relatively displaced to the right.

Therefore, it becomes easier to guide the granular member 320, which flows down near the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) and returns to the collision member 420 side, to the left side. For example, before the collision member 420 changes its posture, the left-right center position of the guide portion 354 and the uppermost position of the curved plate portion 421 match when viewed from the front. As to which direction the granular members 320 flow down, it is considered that the granular members 320 and the curved plate portion 421 are distributed almost evenly to the left and right depending on the difference in contact points between the granular members 320 and the curved plate portion 421 .

On the other hand, when the collision member 420 changes its posture, the position of the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is shifted to the right with respect to the left-right center position of the guide portion 354, and the guide portion 354 flows downward at the left-right center position. It is considered that the granular member 320 is guided leftward along the slope of the curved plate portion 421 . As a result, it becomes easier for the granular members 320 that have returned later to flow down to the side where there are fewer staying granular members 320, so that the granular members 320 can be distributed substantially evenly to the left and right.

It should be noted that the attitude change of the collision member 420 is not always permitted. For example, in the firing standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), the cylindrical projections 403 are arranged at the upper end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is suspended at two symmetrical points. Therefore, compared with the effect waiting state of the injection device 400, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed.

Further, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), the cylindrical projections 403 are arranged at the lower end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 moves upward at two symmetrical points. is restricted, the change in posture of the collision member 420 is suppressed compared to the effect standby state of the injection device 400 .

In addition, when the collision member 420 receives the load from the linear motion member 410, the load is the biasing force generated by the pair of coil springs SP1 that expand and contract in the direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the pair of guide holes 423. The posture of the collision member 420 is easily stabilized.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the attitude change of the collision member 420 from the firing standby state to the firing state. This makes it possible to stabilize how the granular members 320 scatter under the load from the collision member 420 when the staying state of the granular members 320 (left-right imbalance in the number of particles) is the same.

As described above, when the injection device 400 executes the shooting effect, the granular members 320 scatter, flow down along the internal shape of the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 , and return to the production standby state again. That is, in the present embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes of FIGS. 38 to 41 . The relationship between the structures of injection device 400 to enable this state change is described in detail below.

FIGS. 42(a) to 42(f) and FIGS. 43(a) to 43(e) show the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430 and the front transmission member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 440 is a plan view of FIG.

42(a) to 42(f) and FIGS. 43(a) to 43(e), the outlines of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420 and the contact member 430 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 414 and 415 of the linear motion member 410, the cushioning member 424 of the collision member 420, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 and the hook-shaped The outer shape of the protrusion 433 is illustrated by a solid line, the interior thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the rear side thereof is illustrated without being hidden.

Also, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical projection 403 is shown in solid lines, and the inside thereof is shown transparently. is illustrated without being hidden.

In addition, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated by imaginary lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with drive control.

42 and 43, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 (hereinafter also referred to as "each component member" in the description of FIGS. ) are shown in chronological order. They will be described in order below.

FIG. 42(a) shows the layout of each component in the injection device 400 in the waiting state for the effect. As shown in FIG. 42(a), when the ejection device 400 is in the presentation standby state, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 begins to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled to rotate forward. By detecting a change from a state in which the portion 445 is not arranged to a state in which the portion 445 to be detected is inserted, it can be determined that the ejection device 400 is in the effect standby state.

FIG. 42(b) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 abuts on the projection 414 of the linear motion member 410 and starts pushing down the linear motion member 410. FIG. From the state shown in FIG. 42(b), the front transmission member 440 starts pushing down the linear motion member 410 against the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, from FIG. 42(a) to FIG. 42(b), since the linear motion member 410 and the front side transmission member 440 are not in contact with each other, direct load transmission between the members is interrupted. Therefore, for example, even if the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420 and the collision member 420 vibrates slightly, the vibration and load are directly transmitted to the front transmission member 440. is configured to be interruptible.

FIG. 42(c) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the collision member 420 is arranged at the lower end position of the displacement range and the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 begins to be released.

From the state shown in FIG. 42(b) to the state shown in FIG. 42(c), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are integrally displaced downward. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other, and the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are in contact with each other. , indirectly to the front transmission member 440 .

On the other hand, the load generated when the granular member 320 collides with the collision member 420 is a load in the direction of pushing down the linear motion member 410. This is the direction away from the protrusion 446 . Therefore, the influence of the load and vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the positive rotational displacement of the transmission member 440 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the influence on forward rotation displacement is not limited at all. For example, there are influences such as the difference between the speed that is driven and controlled as rotational displacement and the actual speed, and the influence that hinders the rotational displacement and causes the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat.

FIG. 42(d) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the first groove portion 442a of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 begins to tilt. be done.

The abutting member 430 is a member that does not receive an urging force from other urging means and changes its posture according to the shape of the grooved portion 442 . From FIG. 42D, the number of members displaced by the front transmission member 440 is increased to two, namely, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430. Since it is the same, substantially, the state of the load received by the front transmission member 440 is little changed from the state before FIG.

FIG. 42(e) illustrates the arrangement of each structural member in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the lower terminal position of the displacement range. As shown in FIG. 42(e), when the linear motion member 410 is located at the lower end position, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still separated from each other.

After the state shown in FIG. 42(e), the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to be displaced upward. Therefore, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction of pushing the transmission projection 446. The load required for posture change can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. As a result, the load on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

FIG. 42(f) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the second groove portion 442b of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 has finished tilting. be done.

As shown in FIG. 42(f), the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still arranged apart from each other, but after the state shown in FIG. is arranged in the third groove portion 442c, the posture of the contact member 430 is maintained (posture change is prevented).

Therefore, regarding the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 after this, compared to the case where the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are brought into contact with each other at a speed in the direction facing each other, the speed of contact is greater. Aspects can be softened.

In order to facilitate understanding, FIG. 43(a) shows the same state as FIG. 42(f). In FIG. 43(b), as the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced upward, the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward. The arrangement of each component is illustrated in a state where the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of 430 starts to abut.

The state shown in FIG. 43(a) to the state immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43(d) corresponds to the firing standby state (for example, see FIG. 40).

The lower protrusion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433 are provided with projecting portions projecting toward the mutually opposing sides at the tip portions on the mutually opposing sides. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slippage at the contact position between the lower protruding portion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433, so that the lower protruding portion 415 and the hook-shaped protruding portion 433 can stably contact each other. can be brought into contact.

In the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the end position of the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front transmission member 440 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 43B, the detected portion 445 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 to be detected by the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state in which the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled to rotate forward. Control is performed to determine that the injection device 400 has transitioned to the firing standby state by detecting a change from the state in which the portion 445 is arranged to the state in which the detected portion 445 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. A coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) exerts a biasing force on the direct-acting member 410, and a load is applied to the contact member 430 in a direction that causes the contact member 430 to stand up. The displacement of the setting portion 432 is restricted by being blocked by the groove forming portion 442 .

The contact between the protruding portion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is the contact between the circularly curved surface (the outer side surface of the protruding portion 432) and the arcuate surface (the inner side surface of the third groove portion 442c). The resulting load is directed towards the center of the circle.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the grooved portion 442 is directed toward the rotating shaft of the front transmission member 440, so the load applied from the projecting portion 432 is applied to the front side. It is possible to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 440 from being affected, and to restrict the displacement of the projecting portion 432 regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440 .

Therefore, in the firing standby state shown in FIG. 43(b), the state shown in FIG. 43(b) can be maintained even after the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized. As a result, the heat generation of the drive motor MT1 can be suppressed, for example, compared to a configuration in which the drive motor MT1 must be constantly energized in the firing standby state, so the degree of freedom in setting the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be increased. can be improved.

For example, when the injection device 400 is driven and controlled in conjunction with the display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the setting of the length of the display effect from the firing standby state to the firing state is restricted. does not occur from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

FIG. 43(c) shows the arrangement of the constituent members in a state where the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the third groove portion 442c of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 begins to stand up. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43(c), the position of the grooved portion 442 in contact with the projecting portion 432 changes from the third grooved portion 442c. The axis of rotation of the member 440 is displaced.

Therefore, in order to deenergize the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 must be turned off before the state shown in FIG. 43(b) changes to the state shown in FIG. must be de-energized.

In FIG. 43(d), the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of the contact member 430 retreats from the displacement trajectory of the lower projection 415 of the linear motion member 410, so that the upward displacement restriction of the linear motion member 410 is released. , and coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), the linear motion member 410 is displaced upward by the biasing force accumulated, and the collision member 420 is bounced upward. The state shown in FIG. 43(d) corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

Since the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction is basically generated along the shape of the grooved portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, the driving force is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). . On the other hand, since the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not restricted by the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the contact member 430 via the linear motion member 410 The urging force (see FIG. 38) also acts to assist the displacement of the contact member 430 in the upright direction.

In this embodiment, both the direction of displacement of the contact member 430 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the direction of displacement of the contact member 430 caused by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 given via the linear motion member 410 are Since they are configured to be the same in the erecting direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the contact member 430 can be generated in a mutually assisting manner.

FIG. 43(e) shows the arrangement of each component in a state where the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 442d of the front transmission member 440, and the contact member 430 finishes standing. be done.

After the state shown in FIG. 43( e ), the position of the grooved portion 442 that contacts the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is the first grooved portion 442 a. As a result, the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the grooved portion 442 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440 , so that the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the grooved portion 442 is applied to the front transmission member 440 . The influence on rotation can be reduced.

For example, in the present embodiment, the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) was applied to the contact member 430 until immediately before the state shown in FIG. ) It is expected that the load generated in the direction in which the contact member 430 is erected in subsequent displacements will also increase. Therefore, without countermeasures, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 may be hindered due to the standing displacement of the contact member 430 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the contact member 430 finishes standing up, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is arranged in the first groove portion 442 a, and the contact member 430 moves through the projecting portion 432 . The load applied to the front transmission member 440 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440 . This makes it easier to avoid hindrance to the rotation of the front transmission member 440 due to the standing displacement of the contact member 430 .

43(e), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction to rotate the front transmission member 440 forward, and when it is detected that the detected portion 445 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. , the injection device 400 can be returned to the effect standby state by controlling the drive motor MT1 to stop, and the MPU 221 ( 4) is designed.

In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as an example of the control of the ejection device 400, the ejection execution control of making one rotation of the front transmission member 440 in the forward rotation direction from the standby state of the ejection device 400 for rendering has been described. In the shooting execution control, in the shooting state, the collision member 420 is bounced off by the linear motion member 410 which is lifted by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, and the granular member 320 scatters.

This effect is flashy because the granular members 320 are scattered in the field of view of the player, and can improve the attention of the player. At the timing near the end of the following long reach, if a big hit is achieved, the player's amusement can be improved by shifting to a shooting state and scattering the granular members 320 for presentation.

On the other hand, if it is not a big win (if it is a miss), executing the effect of scattering the granular members 320 may mislead the player into thinking that it is a big win, which is not preferable.

Further, if the driving motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all when the ejection state does not shift (in the case of a miss), the driving sound of the driving motor MT1 indicates that the long reach during execution results in a jackpot. The player will be able to ascertain whether it will be or will be lost, and there is a risk that the player's interest will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of misalignment, after the injection device 400 is placed in the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 is controlled to rotate the front transmission member 440 in the reverse direction. It is configured to be able to return to the performance standby state of the injection device 400 without going through the firing state.

That is, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 43(c), by driving and controlling the driving motor MT1 in the direction of rotating the front side transmission member 440 in the reverse direction (clockwise), each constituent member is displaced in the reverse direction of the time series. can be made

In this case, before the contact member 430 starts to be displaced in the upright direction (see FIG. 42(e)), the linear motion member 410 is pushed down to bring the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 into contact with each other. is released (see FIG. 42(f)), it is possible to avoid rubbing between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 when the contact is released.

42(e) onward, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission projection 440 via the linear motion member 410 causes the front transmission projection 440 to rotate. Since it works in the assisting direction, it is possible to reduce the magnitude of the drive force required for the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

In this case, the upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not instantaneous due to the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is configured as a gradual displacement accompanying the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446. FIG.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the linear motion member 410 from knocking off the collision member 420, so that the injection device 400 is placed in the effect waiting state (see FIG. 42(a)) without executing the effect in which the granular member 320 scatters. can be returned to

In order to achieve the state shown in FIG. 42(a) after the front transmission member 440 reversely rotates, the detection sensor SC4 is rotated after detecting that the detected portion 445 has retreated from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be driven and controlled so as to rotate the front side transmission member 440 forward until it is detected that the groove 445 to be detected has again entered the detection groove of .

As a result, both the effect control to scatter the granular members 320 and the effect control not to scatter the granular members 320 can be executed with the same preparatory motion associated with the driving of the drive motor MT1. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible for the player to easily understand whether the game is a big win or not, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the result of winning or losing due to the difference in the driving sound.

In particular, according to this embodiment, in the firing standby state (see FIG. 43(c)), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized, and the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 can be temporarily eliminated. . As a result, compared to the case where control is performed to switch the driving direction from a state in which the driving of the driving motor MT1 is continued, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize from the driving sound whether the driving direction is the same or the opposite direction. .

Therefore, even if the driving motor MT1 is driven and controlled prior to the winning/failure notification timing in the performance, and the driving sound is generated, it is difficult to determine the driving direction, thereby avoiding a situation in which the player grasps the winning/failing result. be able to.

As a result, the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started prior to the timing of the success/fail notification without running the risk of the player grasping the win/fail result by the driving sound. It is possible to give width to the stop timing. In other words, it is possible to eliminate the need to stop the driving motor MT1 in a state immediately before the firing state, and even if the driving motor MT1 is stopped in a state sufficiently before the firing state, there is no hindrance to the performance thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor MT1 overrotates against the control and unintentionally enters a firing state.

FIGS. 44(a) to 44(f) are plan views of the rear transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470, and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIb in FIG.

In FIG. 44, the change in arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter also referred to as “each constituent member” in the description of FIG. 44) associated with forward rotation (clockwise rotation) of the rear transmission member 460 is Illustrated in chronological order. They will be described in order below.

FIG. 44(a) illustrates the arrangement of each component in the injection device 400 in the effect standby state (see FIG. 42(a)). As shown in FIG. 44( a ), when the ejection device 400 is in the performance standby state, the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the third groove 462 c of the rear transmission member 460 , and the cover member 480 is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side.

Since the cover member 480 receives a biasing force directed toward the retreating side from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), a load is generated through the cover member 480 in the direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and this load is reduced. The transmission to the rear transmission member 460 may affect the rotation of the rear transmission member 460 without countermeasures.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state after FIG. 44(a), the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 contacts the third groove 462c of the groove forming portion 462, and When a load is applied to the rear transmission member 460, the contact between the circular curved surface and the arc-shaped surface causes the load generated by the contact to move toward the center of the circle.

Therefore, the load applied to the grooved portion 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the rear transmission member 460, so the load applied to the grooved portion 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is transferred to the rear side. The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

In FIG. 44(b), the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the terminal position of the third groove 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the cover member 480 is still arranged at the displacement terminal position on the entrance side. The placement of each component in the state is illustrated.

In FIG. 44(c), the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the middle position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is arranged at substantially the middle position of the displacement range. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

Since the posture change of the transmission arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the grooved portion 462 of the rear side transmission member 460, the driving force for the posture change drives the rear side transmission member 460 to rotate. It is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) works in the direction of pushing down the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the cover member 480, and at the same time, this biasing force pushes the cylindrical projection 472 upward. Since the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 also acts to assist the posture change of the transmission arm member 470, it acts in the direction of displacement.

In this embodiment, the direction in which the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes due to the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the direction in which the posture of the transmission arm member 470 changes due to the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied via the lid member 480 are Since both are configured identically in the clockwise direction, the driving force and the biasing force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in a mutually supportive manner.

In FIG. 44(d), the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the end position of the fourth groove portion 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the withdrawal side. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 44(d), the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end on the retreating side by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are arranged without contact.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 even when it is not necessary to displace the cover member 480 toward the entrance side, and it is possible to reduce the degree of accumulation of fatigue in the transmission arm member 470. .

In FIG. 44(e), the columnar projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged in the middle of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement end on the retreat side. The arrangement of each component in is illustrated.

After the state shown in FIG. 44(e), the firing standby state (see FIG. 43(b)) is configured. From the firing standby state to the firing state, the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end on the retracting side, and is configured to be able to avoid collision with the ejected granular member 320 (see FIG. 41).

In FIG. 44(f), the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is arranged at the terminal position of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still arranged at the displacement terminal position on the retreating side. The placement of each component in the state is illustrated.

From the state shown in FIG. 44(e) to the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the injection device 400 goes through the firing state (see FIG. 41). Then, by continuing forward rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the cover member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, and returns to the effect standby state (see FIG. 44(a)).

Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44(f) is the state after execution of the shooting effect, there is no load transmission from the linear motion member 410 or the contact member 430 to the front side transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. 43 ( e) see). Therefore, the amount of the drive force of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) that is distributed to the front transmission member 440 side can be greatly reduced.

As a result, even if a large driving force is required because the lid member 480 is displaced in a direction opposing the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is maintained. can be used as a driving force for rotating other components that abut on the rear transmission member 460, a sufficient driving force can be ensured.

FIG. 45 is a plan view of the injection device 400 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 45, illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted so that the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 45, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420 and the contact member 430 are illustrated in a manner similar to that described in FIGS. Also, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical projection 403 is shown in solid lines, and the inside thereof is shown transparently. is illustrated without being hidden.

45, in a state where the linear motion member 410 is arranged at the displacement end position on the rising side (for example, the waiting state for the effect, see FIG. 42(a)), the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction, and the front transmission The figure shows a state in which the transmission projection 446 of the member 440 contacts the lower projection 415 of the direct-acting member 410 from below, and further rotational displacement is restricted.

Thus, in the present embodiment, a limit is set for the displacement mode that is allowed for the front transmission member 440 . That is, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, in forward rotation, the front transmission member 440 can be continuously driven without being restricted in displacement. When the displacement angle exceeds the allowable angle, the displacement of the transmission projection 446 is restricted by the linear motion member 410, and further continuous driving is restricted.

If the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven while the displacement is restricted, the drive motor MT1 may generate heat and may be damaged. is provided to avoid damage to the drive motor MT1, the details of which will be described later.

FIG. 46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the arrangement of the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate. and a change over time of the arrangement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470. FIG.

It should be noted that FIG. 46 does not describe the relative relationship between the variation widths of the layout changes of the respective configurations, but shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the layout changes occur. Also, the change in the arrangement of the direct-acting member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

In addition, in FIG. 46, the standard rotation angle of forward rotation from the effect standby state (FIGS. 42(a) and 44(a)) is shown on the horizontal axis. That is, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(a), 66 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(b), 125 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(c), 162 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(d), 202 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42(e), 219 degrees corresponds to FIGS. 42(f) and 43(a), 228 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(b), and 266 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(c). , 287 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(d), and 295 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43(e).

46, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(c), and 173 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(d). , 304 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(e), and 360 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44(f).

In FIG. 46 , the forward rotation angle of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is shown on the horizontal axis with the production standby state as a reference (the angle is 0 degrees), and each of the above-described constituent members corresponding to the angle State changes in are described. The change in arrangement of each component due to drive control in forward rotation corresponds to the change toward the right in FIG. 46, and the change in placement of each component due to drive control in reverse rotation corresponds to the change toward the left in FIG. respond to changes.

As shown in FIG. 46, the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is upwardly displaced by rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the reverse direction before entering the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) is It becomes slower than the displacement speed when the collision member 420 reaches the firing state and is displaced upward. That is, in the present embodiment, the speed of upward displacement of the collision member 420 can be configured in a plurality of ways.

In addition, since the collision member 420 has already been raised after the firing state is exceeded, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted halfway (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, whether the arrangement of the front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect waiting state (angle of 360 degrees) is determined only from the output state of the detection sensor SC4. Can not.

For example, when the arrangement of the front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the presentation standby state (angle of 360 degrees), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Even so, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) cannot determine whether the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on again, the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is suspected to be between the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle of 360 degrees). , that is, when the detected portion 445 is not arranged in the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is OFF), the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven in the forward rotation direction. Motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

Due to this rotation, the injection device 400 is temporarily returned to the production standby state, and then the execution control of each production is performed. As a result, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is unintentionally restricted after the control is interrupted such as when the power is turned on again, thereby preventing the drive motor MT1 from generating heat. can be done.

In this embodiment, the position of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) is changed from the firing state (angle of 287 degrees) to the state (angle of 304 degrees) where the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 begins to change its position. The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at a rotational speed at which is stabilized.

For example, if the arrangement is stabilized 2 seconds after the launch, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven and controlled to rotate at 8 degrees per second (45 seconds/rotation), so that the particles in the middle of the flow are controlled. It is possible to prevent the member 320 from being caught in the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

Note that the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be rotated at a quadruple speed. In this case, the lid member 480 can start to be displaced to the entrance side at the timing when the granular member 320 starts to flow down. In this case, the displacement of the lid member 480 can be completed before the granular members 320 are arranged in the traveling direction of the lid member 480 .

In this state, by stopping the drive in the performance standby state, the granular members 320 can be deposited above the lid member 480, so that the granular members 320 can be gathered to the left-right central side along the shape of the lid member 480. can be done. After that, by driving and controlling the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the granular member 320 falls from the lid member 480 as the lid member 480 is displaced toward the retreat side, and the impact member 420 is moved. ride on.

In this way, by controlling the rotation speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 differently, it is possible to configure a plurality of modes until the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 .

Thereby, the relative position of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) with respect to the collision member 420 can be changed for each firing execution control. Therefore, for example, by configuring the granular members 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, it is possible to change the appearance of the fired granular members 320 (arrangement and displacement direction of each granular member 320). , the performance effect can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, description will be made. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described shooting effect unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement/rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for livening up the game. Next, the scaling unit 600 will be described.

47 and 48 are front perspective views of the scaling unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are rear perspective views of the scaling unit 600. FIG. FIGS. 47 and 49 show the rendering standby state of the scaling unit 600, and FIGS. 48 and 50 show the extended state of the scaling unit 600. FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the enlarging/reducing unit 600 includes an effect member 700 which can move up and down at the central position in the left-right direction and which is capable of emitting light, and a hemispherical lighting unit fixedly arranged apart from the right and left sides of the effect member 700. a device 613;

By performing a light emission effect with the effect member 700 and the hemispherical lighting device 613, the light is emitted from the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 7) to the player, and the effect is executed to make the player visually glamorous. be able to.

51 is a front exploded perspective view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 52 is a rear exploded perspective view of the scaling unit 600. FIG. 51 and 52, the effect member 700 is illustrated in an assembled state. As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, in the assembled state, the tip of the lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is arranged on the front side of the rear plate portion 611, but in FIGS. , are arranged on the rear side of the rear plate portion 611 for convenience.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 includes a left and right elongated body member 601 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 (see FIG. 5), and a front surface of the body member 601. A front cover member 610 arranged on the side and having a design surface, a pair of upper arm members 620 rotatably supported by the columnar shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and interlocked in a meshing relationship, and the upper arm member 620 and the middle. A pair of lower arm members 630 that are connected by a joint and change in posture as the upper arm member 620 rotates, a drive motor MT2 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601, and a drive gear and teeth of the drive motor MT2. A transmission gear 650 is engaged with the left upper arm member 620 so as to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT2, and is rotatably supported on the body member 601; A torsion spring SP3 that applies a biasing force in the upward direction to the upper arm member 620, and an effect member 700 that is connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630 are provided.

The main body member 601 is formed in the shape of an elongated left and right plate, and includes a pair of guide holes 602, which are elongated left and right holes arranged in a straight line from left to right, and a pair of cylindrical guide holes 602 projecting in both front and rear directions from left and right symmetrical positions. A columnar shaft portion 603, a pair of arcuate holes 604 formed in an arc with the columnar shaft portion 603 as the center axis, a columnar shaft portion 605 projecting from the left side to the rear side in a columnar shape, An arc-shaped hole 606 is drilled in an arc with the cylindrical shaft portion 605 as the center axis, and a detection groove in a circular shape centered on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 is directed toward the cylindrical shaft portion 605 side and is placed on the back side. and a detection sensor 607 that is fastened and fixed.

The guide hole 602 is formed with a vertical width that is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630 . The guide hole 602 functions as an elongated hole that guides the displacement of the lower arm member 630 by inserting the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630 .

A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes toward the front side is inserted through the support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620 to rotatably support the upper arm member 620 . A screw with a large head diameter is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the columnar shaft portion 603 to support the upper arm member 620 so that it cannot fall off.

A portion of the columnar shaft portion 603 protruding toward the rear side is inserted through the wound main body portion of the torsion spring SP3, thereby stabilizing the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3.

One arm of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from above by a protruding portion 601a that protrudes in a V-shape from the back side of the main body member 601, and the other arm is pressed against the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620. engaged. As a result, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions in the direction of pushing down the urged portion 625, so the upper arm member 620 is urged in the direction in which the connecting portion 623 is displaced upward.

The arcuate hole 604 is a through hole for passing the urged portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the rear side of the body member 601 . Thereby, the urged portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 and the torsion spring SP3 can be configured to be engaged.

The cylindrical shaft portion 605 is inserted through the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650 to rotatably support the transmission gear 650 . A screw having a large head diameter is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605 to support the transmission gear 650 so that it cannot fall off.

The arcuate hole 606 is a through hole for passing the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 to the front side of the main body member 601 . Thereby, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engaged. A screw having a large head diameter is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 , so that the upper arm member 620 is supported by the transmission gear 650 so as not to fall off.

The detection sensor 607 has a detection groove into which the plate portion 655 to be detected of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and is arranged at a position where the transmission gear 650 puts the enlargement/reduction unit 600 in the rendering standby state, or at another position. It is configured to be able to determine whether the

The front cover member 610 is a thin-walled member made of a resin material with low light transmittance and fastened to the main body member 601. The front cover member 610 includes a rear plate portion 611 formed in the left-right central portion, and the rear plate portion 611. A front plate portion 612 is formed on the left and right outside from the connection position with the left and right upper end portions and is formed to protrude toward the front side from the rear plate portion 611, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate portion 612 so as to be capable of emitting light. and a hemispherical illumination device 613 .

The rear plate portion 611 is arranged on the front side of the columnar shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and shields the field of view so that the columnar shaft portion 603 is not visible. On the rear side of the rear plate portion 611, avoiding the movement locus of the gear portion 622 of the upper arm member 620, the rear plate portion 611 protrudes toward the rear side by a dimension slightly longer than the front-to-rear width of the gear portion 622, and contacts the main body member 601 with a surface. It has an overhanging abutting portion 611a that makes contact.

As a result, the fastening state of the rear plate portion 611 to the main body member 601 can be stabilized, and the upper arm member 620 can be displaced in the space divided by the rear plate portion 611 and the main body member 601 . can. In other words, a change in posture of the upper arm member 620 (for example, a change in posture such that it bends with respect to the rotation shaft) can be suppressed on both sides in the axial direction, so the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. .

The front plate portion 612 is a plate-like portion that is arranged on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 and is configured so as not to allow the players to visually recognize the structural parts of these members. A sliding surface 612a formed as a pair of left and right planes parallel to the front plate portion, and a wiring passage formed as a recess opening to the back side in the plate portion projecting from the left upper end toward the back and a recess 612b.

The sliding surface 612a is assembled to the lower arm member 630 from the front side and fastened and fixed, and is configured as a flat surface on which the pressing member PC1, which is formed with low friction due to its shape and material, can slide. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed in the middle of the lower arm member 630 in the longitudinal direction is a planar plate surface formed along a trajectory that is displaced as the lower arm member 630 is displaced.

The shape of the side of the pressing member PC1 facing the sliding surface 612a is a substantially semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a. is configured to be Thereby, the resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be smoothly displaced easily.

The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, and a gap is provided between them. On the other hand, before the amount of frontward displacement of the lower arm member 630 exceeds the permissible amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 contact each other to limit the frontward displacement of the lower arm member 630. be.

In this embodiment, the permissible amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set according to the dimensional relationship between the rear side plate portion of the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 13A) and the effect member 700 . That is, the permissible amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set to such a degree that the effect member 700 arranged as expected from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not come into contact with the partitioning member 310 .

That is, according to the present embodiment, the sliding surface 612a abuts against the pressing member PC1 to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side. Contact can be prevented.

The sliding portion 612a arranged on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the trajectory of the pressing member PC1, but the sliding portion 612a arranged on the left side includes an arc shape as the trajectory of the pressing member PC1. Although formed as a large flat surface, the functions of the left and right sliding portions 612a are common. That is, at least the circular arc shape as the trajectory of the pressing member PC1 should be formed in a plane shape, and the shape of other portions can be set arbitrarily. For example, as in the right side portion of the present embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed in a limited circular arc shape as the trajectory of the pressing member PC1, and other portions protrude toward the rear side (the design portion on the front side is It may be configured such that it protrudes toward the back side due to the effect of being arranged closer to the back side), or like the left side portion of the present embodiment, the periphery of the sliding portion 612a may also be configured in a similar planar shape. good.

The forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is restricted by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a. Forward displacement is regulated by the fixed fastening screw. That is, in addition to limiting the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630, by limiting the displacement of the upper arm member 620, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a large local load.

The wiring recess 612b is a recess that functions as a path for the electrical wiring to be passed through the base-end-side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630. As shown in FIG. That is, the electric wiring reaching between the rear case 510 and the enlargement/reduction unit 600 passes through the wiring passage recess 612b, passes through the base end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630, and then reaches the tip side of the lower arm member 630. It is guided and passed through the production member 700. - 特許庁

In this way, by setting the path for the electrical wiring to be inserted into the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from the upper side, the long lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is displaced significantly in the left-right direction as it is displaced. (In this embodiment, the displacement is about half the width of the rear case 510), it is possible to easily prevent the electric wiring from loosening and hanging downward.

The hemispherical lighting device 613 has a hemispherical lens member, and is a device for irradiating the front side through the hemispherical lens member with light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the back side thereof. . In this embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to incline downward toward the center in the left-right direction.

As a result, compared to the case where the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 is oriented in the front-rear direction, the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 can be easily improved. can. For example, it is possible to make it easier for the player who is visually recognizing the center of the third pattern display device 81 to enter the light, or to make the player notice the light by irradiating the production member 700 in the overhanging state or the enlarged state with the light. can be

The upper arm member 620 is formed in the shape of an elongated plate, and has a support hole 621 formed as a circular hole having a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 can be inserted therethrough. , a gear portion 622 which is formed on a circular arc centering on the support hole 621 and is configured to be meshable with a pair of upper arm members 620, and a lower arm member 630 which is circularly drilled at the end portion in the longitudinal direction. and a long hole formed only in the left upper arm member 620 and having a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 654 of the transmission gear 650. A transmission hole 624 is formed, and a biased portion 625 protrudes from the back side of the upper arm member 620 and has a hook-shaped tip.

The transmission hole 624 has a transmission portion 624a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621 and a margin continuously extending from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. and a portion 624b.

The transmission portion 624a functions as a portion for receiving the driving force transmitted through the transmission gear 650, and the allowance portion 624b functions as a portion for blocking the transmission of the driving force, details of which will be described later.

The urged portion 625 is a portion to which one end of the arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is engaged. Arm member 620 receives.

In addition, the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted by the engagement between the hooked end of the biased portion 625 and the torsion spring SP3 (see FIG. 49).

The lower arm member 630 is composed of a long plate member in a substantially bilaterally symmetrical manner, except that the left arm has a path through which electrical wiring is passed. A columnar protrusion 631, a columnar protrusion 632 projecting from the left and right outer sides of the columnar protrusion 631 to the rear side in a columnar shape, and a left and right inner position of the columnar protrusion 631 in the front-rear direction. and a plurality of arc-shaped holes 634 penetrating along a pair of arcs centered on the support hole 633 .

The columnar protrusion 631 is inserted through the connecting portion 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a screw with a large head diameter is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 631 from the rear side. A lower arm member 630 is non-droppably supported on the upper arm member 620 .

The columnar protrusion 632 is inserted through the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 through the collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for resistance reduction, and is attached to the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 632 on the rear side. The lower arm member 630 is supported by the main body member 601 so as not to fall off by screwing a screw having a large head diameter through the lower arm member 630 .

The support hole 633 and the arc-shaped hole 634 are used for connection with the effect member 700 . Due to the relationship with the placement portion 635, which will be described later, the thickness of the portion where the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed is thicker in the lower portion than in the upper portion. Thereby, when the production member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the production member 700 can be supported so as to be held from the left and right at the thick part, so that the production member 700 can be effectively changed to the forward leaning posture. can be regulated.

In addition, the left lower arm member 630 has a placement portion 635 that is formed open to the rear side in order to form a space for passing electrical wiring over the longitudinal direction of the arm body, and the rear side of the placement portion 635 . and a thin lid portion 636 disposed on the side and functioning as a lid for the placement portion 635 .

The arranging portion 635 includes a base-side through-hole 635a drilled in the front-rear direction at the end portion on the side of the cylindrical projection 632 .

The proximal side through-hole 635a is a through-hole for passing the electrical wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 in the front-rear direction. That is, the electrical wiring arranged in the placement portion 635 passes through the base end side through hole 635 a from the front side, is guided to the placement portion 635 , and exits from the placement portion 635 to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630 .

The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630, and a lower meat portion 637 arranged below the boundary in the waiting state for presentation is formed recessed on the back side. be done. In other words, the upper side of the tangent line is formed as a thin plate.

This lower meat portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the lateral direction in the right lower arm member 630 . In addition, the lower meat portion 637 constitutes the upper wall portion of the placement portion 635 in the left lower arm member 630, is configured to be able to guide the electric wiring inside, and is arranged as a lid on the guide path. It is reinforced by fastening and fixing the thin-walled lid portion 636 that is attached to the frame.

Since the electric wiring is guided to the direction member 700 side through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the placement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636), members arranged in front and behind the lower arm member 630 (for example, It is possible to prevent the contact between the upper arm member 620) and the electrical wiring. As a result, it is possible to avoid damage to the electrical wiring due to tangling or rubbing of the electrical wiring with these members.

The lower arm member 630 includes, in addition to the above-described pressing member PC1 assembled from the front side, a pressing member PC1 composed of the same members and assembled from the rear side. Through this pressing member PC1, the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to abut on the body plate-like portion of the body member 601 in the front and rear. The main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, but have a slight gap, so that when the lower arm member 630 is displaced to the back side, they come into contact with each other to limit the displacement. function is the same as in the case of the front pressing member PC1.

That is, the lower arm member 630 has the pressing members PC1 attached to both front and rear sides thereof, and is configured to be able to contact the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing members PC1. It is possible to facilitate the restriction of displacement and to reduce the resistance generated against the up-and-down displacement during the restriction of displacement.

The tip of the pressing member PC1 assembled from the back side, which projects toward the back side, is arranged closer to the back side than the end portion of the upper arm member 620 on the back side. As a result, even when the tip of the pressing member PC1 is displaced to the rear side to such an extent that it abuts on the body member 601, the upper arm member 620 can be prevented from abutting on the body member 601. FIG. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the body member 601 or the front cover member 610 arranged in the front-rear direction.

This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is likely to be unintentionally displaced in the front-rear direction. For example, in the present embodiment, the tip of the lower arm member 630 is arranged near the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connection position between the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 Since the lower arm member 630 is displaced in the direction, it can be said that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, due to the displacement mode of the lower arm member 630 and the driving displacement of the effect member 700 itself, the lower arm member 630 is configured to easily cause displacement in the front-rear direction.

The transmission gear 650 includes a semicircular main body portion 651 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape, a gear portion 652 carved radially outward of the semicircular main body portion 651, and a semicircular main body portion. A support hole 653 is formed as a circular hole through which the cylindrical shaft portion 605 can be inserted through the central axis of the semicircular shape of 651, and a cylindrical shape projecting from the outer diameter end portion of the semicircular main body portion 651 toward the front side. a cylindrical projecting portion 654, a plate portion 655 to be detected formed in a thin plate shape that can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 at the circumferential end portion of the semicircular body portion 651, and the plate portion to be detected An increased thickness portion 656 is formed between 655 and the support hole 653, and a regulated hole 657 is formed through the increased thickness portion 656 on the support hole 653 side in the front-rear direction.

The gear portion 652 is arranged in mesh with the driving gear of the driving motor MT2, and the driving force of the driving motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

The cylindrical protrusion 654 passes through the arc-shaped hole 606 of the main body member 601 and is arranged inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 . Accordingly, as the transmission gear 650 rotates, the driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 via the cylindrical protrusion 654 . The columnar protrusion 654 is inserted through a collar member whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a female threaded portion formed at the projecting tip of the columnar protrusion 654 has a fastening screw with a large head diameter. By being screwed in, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so as not to fall off, and the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

The thickened portion 656 and the restricted hole 657 are configured to be engageable with the displacement restricting device 180 (see FIG. 6). By disposing the regulated hole 657 on the side of the support hole 653 (position close to the support hole 653), when the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state (see FIG. 21A), the displacement from the transmission gear 650 to the displacement regulating device 180 It is configured such that the transmitted load (moment) is reduced.

Further, as a design concept for the thickness of the transmission gear 650 , a thickened portion 656 is set as a portion where it is necessary to withstand the load caused by engagement with the displacement restricting device 180 . That is, by forming thin parts where engagement with the displacement restricting device 180 cannot occur, the material cost required for the transmission gear 650 can be reduced.

53 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 700, and FIG. 54 is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect member 700. FIG. 51 and 52 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 53 and 54 as needed.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the effect member 700 includes a plate-like main body 710 connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630, and a functional plate portion 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-like main body 710. , a rotating plate 730 arranged between the function plate portion 720 and the plate-like main body 710 and supported so as to be rotatably displaceable with respect to the function plate portion 720 , and between the rotating plate 730 and the function plate portion 720 A telescopic displacement member 740 is provided and configured to be displaceable in the same manner as a magic hand in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating plate 730, and a driving gear MG3 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the function plate portion 720. A drive motor MT3 arranged on the back side, a light emitting effect device 750 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the function plate portion 720 and executes the light emitting effect, and a plurality of extensible displacement members 740 that are respectively fastened and fixed to the end portions of the extensible displacement members 740 to wait for the effect. and a plurality of shielding design members 760 combined so as to shield the passage of light on the front side of the light emitting effect device 750.

The plate-shaped main body 710 has a pair of cylindrical protrusions 711 projecting from a symmetrical position toward the rear side in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630, and the cylindrical protrusions. A plurality of auxiliary protrusions 712 projecting in a columnar shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the arcuate upper hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 and a pair of columnar protrusions projecting from an arcuate upper position centered on 711 toward the rear side. A through hole 713 drilled in the front-rear direction at a position between 711, a wiring guide member 714 arranged below the through hole 713 and opened only at the front side, and a pressing member arranged on the back surface of the plate. and a member PC1.

The through hole 713 is a through hole for passing the electrical wiring DK1, which passes through the lower arm member 630 and is guided to the tip side of the lower arm member 630 between the placement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636, to the front side. . A wire guide member 714 guides the electric wire DK1 in a section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713 . As a result, even in a limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through-hole 713, the electric wiring DK1 can be prevented from coming into contact with other members or being visually recognized by the player.

The wiring guide member 714 has a function of guiding the electric wiring DK1, and is formed with an inclined surface that slopes down toward the rear surface side. It also has the function of softening the contact of the

That is, when the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714 is arranged to face the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 when the effect member 700 is displaced upward, the effect member 700 is displaced toward the back side. Even so, the wire guide member 714 abuts on the rear plate portion 611 , so that the effect member 700 can be returned to the front side in the middle of the upward displacement along the slope of the upper surface of the wire guide member 714 .

Like the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is also disposed slidably on the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. As shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the pressing member PC1 arranged at the upper end portion and the wiring guide member 714 arranged at the lower portion can come into contact with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 during the upward displacement process of the effect member 700. , the position where the load for maintaining the attitude of the effect member 700 is generated can be divided.

55 is a front view of the function plate portion 720. FIG. In the description of FIG. 55, FIGS. 53 and 54 are referred to as appropriate.

The functional plate portion 720 is made of a resin material and has a substantially plate-like shape. An arc-shaped hole 722 drilled along the coaxial arc shape, a sensor placement portion 723 formed at one end of the arc-shaped hole 722 so that the detection sensor SC7 can be arranged, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted. a motor fixing portion 724 having an opening and capable of fastening and fixing the drive motor MT3; A plurality of (in this embodiment, five) guide holes 725 each including a pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b that intersect perpendicularly with each other, and radially outwardly extending on extension lines of the radially elongated holes 725a. A plurality of (in this embodiment, five) extension plate portions 726, and the rear side end portion of the planar portion disposed at the extension base end of the extension plate portion 726 and the width direction both ends of the extension plate portion 726 A pair of auxiliary protrusions 727 (in this embodiment, a pair for each of the extended plate portions 726) protruding from the support, and a pair of columnar protrusions protruding from the vicinity of the radially outward end toward the back side in a columnar shape. 728;

The tubular portion 721 is arranged so that the back side end abuts on the plate-like main body 710 , and is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710 in a state in which the internal through-hole communicates with the through-hole 713 of the plate-like main body 710 . be done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted through the plate-like main body 710 from the rear side of the plate-like main body 710 , and the threaded portion is screwed into the female screw formed at the rear-side end portion of the cylindrical portion 721 .

As a result, the functional plate portion 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710, and a through hole is formed in the central portion thereof. In this embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through this through hole. .

The electric wiring DK1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC7 fastened and fixed to the sensor placement portion 723 and the drive motor MT3 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing portion 724. FIG. As a result, the detection sensor SC7 and the drive motor MT3 can be energized.

The circular arc-shaped hole 722 is a through hole for allowing the detection target portion 731a of the rotating plate 730 to extend toward the front side. It is possible to determine the posture.

The guide holes 725 are a group of through holes formed with a width that allows the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 to be arranged. A long hole-shaped radial long hole 725a is formed, and on both sides of the outer diameter side end of the long hole-shaped long hole 725a, a long hole-shaped hole is formed along a straight line orthogonal to the straight line that is the reference of the radial long hole 725a. and a pair of cross slots 725b formed in the .

The radially elongated holes 725a and the intersecting elongated holes 725b function to limit the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the extension plate portion 726 and the auxiliary protrusions 727 correct the posture of the telescopic displacement member 740 in the collective arrangement state. function as described below in detail.

The columnar projecting portion 728 is configured such that the rear end thereof can come into contact with the plate-like main body 710 . In the abutting state, a fastening screw that is inserted through the plate-like body 710 from the rear side is screwed into a female thread formed on the distal end side of the columnar projecting portion 728, so that the function plate portion 720 is connected to the plate-like body. 710 is fastened and fixed.

In the assembled state, the columnar projecting portion 728 is inserted through the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730 to limit the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 . That is, the columnar projecting portion 728 is used both as a portion for fastening and fixing the function plate portion 720 to the plate-like main body 710 and as a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 .

56 is a front view of rotating plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of rotating plate 730. FIG. 53 and 54 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 56 and 57 as appropriate.

The rotary plate 730 is made of a resin material and has a substantially disk shape. A plurality of arc-shaped holes 732 drilled along the coaxial arc shape and long through-holes formed at positions on the outer diameter side of the cylindrical portion 731 and on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 732 . and a plurality of guide holes 733 (five in this embodiment), and extended hook portions 734 extending radially outward in a hook shape at positions corresponding to the guide holes 733 .

The cylindrical portion 731 is designed to have an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 721 of the function plate portion 720, and extends from the front end to the front side so that the detection sensor SC7 passes through the arc-shaped hole 722 of the function plate portion 720. and a gear portion 731b formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape that can mesh with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

The arc-shaped hole 732 is an opening in which the columnar projecting portion 728 of the function plate portion 720 is arranged, and is formed with a length that can ensure the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 at approximately 120 degrees or less.

The guide holes 733 are formed in the same shape. A large-diameter arc portion 733b having a long length from the axis and a connecting portion 733c connecting the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the small-diameter arc portion 733a are provided.

Although the aspect of the connecting portion 733c is not limited in any way, in the present embodiment, it is formed so that the change in the length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle changes according to the position. be. In particular, in the present embodiment, the change in length from the central axis of the tubular portion 731 per unit angle near the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b is designed to be relatively small.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the resistance generated when the load is transmitted to the telescopic displacement member 740, and to improve the performance effect by making the displacement speed of the telescopic displacement member 740 non-uniform.

The extended claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape that protrudes clockwise in a front view, is configured to be able to engage with the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the front side, and is formed closer to the rear side in the thickness direction. It has a rear side claw portion 734a and a front side claw portion 734b formed on the front side of the rear side claw portion 734a. In the present embodiment, the extended claw portion 734 is divided into the rear claw portion 734a and the front claw portion 734b at a substantially intermediate position in the thickness dimension.

The extended claw portion 734 functions as a portion that engages with the first guided protrusion 743 b and the second guided protrusion 744 b of the telescopic displacement member 740 . The front-side claw portion 734b and the rear-side claw portion 734a respectively correspond to the second guided projection portion 744b and the first guided projection portion 743b, which have different tip positions from the extensible and displaceable member 740, respectively. It is guided radially inward, the details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the extension claw portion 734 is arranged such that the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side has a longer extension length than the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side. formed in In this embodiment, the extension length is increased in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. Thereby, the influence of gravity can be mitigated.

That is, even if the telescopic displacement members 740 are configured to have the same shape, the displacement caused by the action of gravity is different for each telescopic displacement member 740 because the relationship between the displaceable direction and the direction of gravity is different. For example, the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side hangs down due to its own weight and is displaced in the direction away from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730 . There is a possibility that the first guided projection 743b of 740 will be arranged, and the radially inward guidance by the extended claw 734 will fail.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the extension length of the extension claw portion 734 arranged on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the sagging of the telescopic displacement member 740. The radially inward guidance by the portion 734 can be stably performed.

On the other hand, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the upper side is displaced due to its own weight, the displacement is in the direction of approaching the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730, so the extension claw 734 is guided radially inward. is unlikely to fail. Therefore, the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side should not be extended longer than necessary, and should be formed short, thereby reducing the material cost and miniaturizing the rotating plate 730. can be done.

The elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. 53 and 54 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 58 and 59 as appropriate.

58(a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, FIG. 58(b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. ) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG.

In FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b), of the five sets of telescopic displacement members 740 and shielding design members 760, one set arranged at the top is illustrated in a state in which it is collectively arranged. In 59(a) and 59(b), the same set is illustrated as if it were to be discrete.

The telescopic displacement member 740 is a member that constitutes a link mechanism composed of a plurality of long members arranged in two layers, front and rear. The plane in which the first elongate member can be displaced is also called a front layer plane, and the plane in which a plurality of elongate members arranged on the rear side can be displaced is also called a rear layer plane.

The telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged in two layers, front and rear, and is supported relatively rotatably at the upper end of a pair of proximal side members 741 , which are supported at the lower end so as to be relatively rotatable. A pair of first long members 742, a pair of second long members 743 pivotally supported at the upper ends of the first long members 742, and the upper ends of the second long members 742 are and a distal adjustment member 744 having a guide slot 744a extending linearly to allow guidance.

The proximal side member 741, the first elongated member 742, and the second elongated member 743, which are configured as a pair of front and rear members, are designed to have the same length in the longitudinal direction and the same support position.

The base end member 741 includes a transmission target projection 741a projecting from the lower end of the member on the rear plane side toward the rear surface side in a cylindrical shape, and a circular transmission receiving projection 741a projecting from the rear surface toward the front surface where the cylindrical projection 741a projects. A guided protrusion 741b that protrudes in a columnar shape and is inserted into the member on the front layer plane side, and a lower end portion of a first elongated member 742 that protrudes in a columnar shape from the upper end portion of the member on the rear layer plane side toward the front side. and a guided protrusion 741c that is inserted into a through hole that is drilled in.

The transmitted projection 741a is arranged in a guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotating plate 730 and configured to be displaced in the radial direction as the rotating plate 730 rotates.

The guided projection 741b and the guided projection 741c are arranged in the guide hole 725 of the function plate portion 725 and guided in the longitudinal direction thereof. The guided protrusion 741b is arranged in the radially elongated hole 725a, and the guided protrusion 741c is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

The first elongated member 742 is rotatably supported about a front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction. A guided protrusion 742a is provided to be inserted through the upper end of the base end member 741 on the side.

The guided protrusion 742a is arranged in the intersecting elongated hole 725b of the function plate portion 725 and guided in its longitudinal direction (see FIG. 55).

The second elongated member 743 is rotatably supported about a front-rear axis at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction. From the upper end of the member on the floor plane side, a diameter of about the width of the member is projected flush with the front end surface of the member on the front layer plane side, and a pair of cylindrical projections are projected from the projecting tip to the front side. It has a support protrusion 743a and a first guided protrusion 743b that protrudes in a columnar shape toward the back side from a substantially intermediate position of the member on the rear plane side.

The first guided protrusion 743b is guided by the rear side claw portion 734a of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730, and receives a radially inward load due to this guidance (see FIG. 56).

The front end adjustment member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed on the front side, and has a length that extends along the straight direction with a width that allows the support protrusion 743a of the second long member 743 to be inserted. It is provided with a pair of guide long holes 744a drilled in a hole shape, and a second guided projection 744b projecting from the central position in the longitudinal direction to the back side in a cylindrical shape.

The projecting tip of the second guided projection 744b is disposed forward of the projecting tip of the first guided projection 743b, and is guided by the front claw 734b of the extended claw 734 of the rotary plate 730, This guide receives a radially inward load (see FIG. 57).

The second guided projection 744b does not have a circular shape at the tip of the projecting part, and has an inclination that approaches as the rotating plate 730, which has the center of rotation on the side of the transmitted projection 741a, is rotationally displaced in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear. The surface on the side opposite to the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) (the left surface in FIG. 59(b)) has a chamfered inclined surface.

Due to this inclined surface, even if the arrangement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is slightly deviated in the front-rear direction, it is possible to avoid excessive resistance when the rotating plate 730 abuts against the extended claw portion 734. can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 58(b) and 59(b), when the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged and when they are separated, the telescopic displacement members 740 are arranged at the tips of the second elongated members 743. The support protrusions 743a are arranged at both outer and inner ends of the guide elongated hole 744a of the tip adjustment member 744. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the arrangement (arrangement in the longitudinal direction) of the distal end adjusting member 744 with respect to the pair of support protrusions 743a can be stabilized.

The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the distal end adjustment member 744, extends toward the front side from the fastening portion as an end, and extends toward the front side from the extended distal end toward the side covering the telescopic displacement member 740. It is a substantially triangular member in front view and has a shape portion extending in parallel with a plane (front layer plane or rear layer plane) in which the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is displaced from the extension end thereof. be.

The shielding design member 760 is configured to shield the decorative member 752 on the back side invisibly by attaching a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet to the front and back sides of the shielding design member 760. It has an extended plate portion 761 extending in a plate shape to the right side in such a manner that a plate surface is formed on the top.

The extended plate portion 761 has colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheets attached to its front and back surfaces in the same manner as the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, and is arranged to the right (clockwise direction) in front view. It is arranged to face the rear side of the left end portion of the design member 760, and when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the rear side, it abuts and is configured to be able to suppress the displacement.

The arrangement of the extended plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the plate may be arranged so as to be shifted toward the rear surface side from the rear surface of the main body of the shielding design member 760 . In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 are aligned in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 . abutment (collision) can be avoided along the

This effect becomes more pronounced as the extension plate portion 761 is placed farther from the body portion of the shielding design member 760. However, at least the positional deviation of the shielding design member 760 in the front-rear direction is allowed for the shielding design member 760. By arranging the extension plate portion 761 apart, the extension plate portion 761 and the body portion of the shielding design member 760 abut along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. (collision) can be avoided.

Further, the shape of the front surface of the extension plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface, or may be formed as a flat surface whose normal is oriented in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, it is configured as an inclined surface that approaches the back side as the distance from the shielding design member 760 increases.

As a result, for example, the shielding design member 760 is assembled in a state in which the shielding design member 760 adjacent to the top shielding design member 760 on the right side in the front view is slightly displaced toward the rear side with respect to the top shielding design member 760. Even if it is displaced to the arrangement (see FIG. 63) position, along the front inclination of the extended plate portion 761 of the uppermost shielding design member 760, the front-rear position of the shielding design member 760 adjacent to the right in the front view. Deviations can be corrected. This makes it easier to align the relative longitudinal positions of the adjacent shielding design members 760 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the second elongated member 743 of the elastic displacement member 740 supporting the shielding design member 760 has a member supporting the right side of the shielding design member 760 arranged on the rear layer plane. , the member supporting the left side of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the front layer plane, and the middle portions of the pair of second elongated members 743 intersect so that they are overlapped back and forth, so that the left side becomes the right side. It is configured so that the shielding design member 760 can be easily tilted toward the forward side in comparison.

Since the configuration of the extensible displacement members 740 that support the shielding design members 760 is common to all five sets, each shielding design member 760 is common, and the left side is the right side (the side where the extended plate portion 761 is formed). It is configured so that it can be easily tilted to a posture that is arranged on the front side in comparison.

Due to the inclination of the attitude of the shielding design member 760, the extension plate portion 761 can be positioned away from the rear side of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face the extension plate portion 761 side. In this state, the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the collective arrangement position, so that the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extension plate portion 761 move in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. ) can be avoided.

In the state where the five sets of shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 53), the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a circle, and all the shielding design members 760 are adjacent to the left side (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The extended plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 suppresses positional deviation to the rear side.

According to this configuration, the shielding design member 760 is prevented from being displaced to the front side by the extension plate portion 761 coming into contact with the shielding design member 760 on the right side (adjacent in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). Therefore, by arranging the five sets of shielding design members 760 to face each other in the front-rear direction, it is possible to suppress displacement in the front-rear direction for each of the five sets of shielding design members 760 .

Interlocking between the rotating plate 730 and the telescopic displacement member 740 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. 60 and 61 are front views of the function plate portion 720. FIG. 60 and 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotating plate 730 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and an example of the outer shape arrangement of the transmitted projection 741a, the guided projections 741b, 741c, and 742a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is illustrated. be.

FIG. 60 shows a state in which the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 58), and in FIG. 61, the rotary plate 730 rotates about 120 degrees counterclockwise in front view, and the telescopic displacement members 740 are dispersed. A state (see FIG. 59) is illustrated.

In this embodiment, the guided projections 741b, 741c, and 742a are guided along the guide hole 725, and the transmitted projection 741a is arranged in the guide hole 733 as the rotary plate 730 rotates. The state of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes by displacing it in a direction approaching the rotating shaft side of 730 .

In this state change, since the guided projections 741c and 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the function plate portion 720, the shielding design member 760 is stretched to the outer diameter side with reference to the positions of the guided projections 741c and 742a. It is configured to be displaceable so that it can be pulled out, the details of which will be described later.

Returning to FIGS. 53 and 54, description will be made. The light emitting device 750 includes an electrical board 751 having an opening in the center, and a decorative member 752 arranged on the front side of the electrical board 751 and made of a light-transmitting resin material. An opening is formed in the central portion of the electrical decoration substrate 751, and the decorative member 752 is formed in a dome shape projecting toward the front side, so that an area for arranging the drive motor MT3 can be secured.

The illumination board 751 has an opening 751a formed in the center. Inside the opening 751a, the drive motor MT3 and electrical wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are arranged. The larger the opening 751a, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and the electrical wiring, but the area for arranging the LED as the light emitting means is limited. desirable.

Since an LED cannot be arranged in the opening 751a, the front side thereof is dark and easily visible. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the decorative member 752 is divided into two.

That is, the decorative member 752 is composed of a light-transmitting member 752a formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and a light-transmitting member 752a assembled from the front side to the light-transmitting member 752a and having a mirror surface (for example, silver-plated coating). ) and a mirror member 752b.

An opening is formed in the central portion of the light transmitting member 752a, and the central portion of the mirror surface member 752b is closed, so that the mirror surface member 752b can be arranged at a position where the drive motor MT3 is arranged in a front view. . As a result, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, the reflected light by light irradiation from another direction (for example, light irradiation from the hemispherical lighting device 613) can be visually recognized by the player. , the front side portion of the opening 751a can be prevented from being viewed darkly.

The vertical displacement of the rendering member 700 of the scaling unit 600 will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. 62 to 64, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

FIG. 62 shows the effect waiting state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, FIG. 63 shows the effect member 700 descending from the effect standby state, and FIG. illustrated.

63 is illustrated as a state in which the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is half the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the presentation standby state to the extended state. In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is also halved.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the rendering standby state of the scaling unit 600, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged at the boundary between the transmission portion 624a and the allowance portion 624b of the upper arm member 620. As shown in FIG. That is, the state in which the cylindrical projection 654 immediately enters the transmission portion 624a and the effect member 700 is placed at a position where the downward displacement can be started is the effect standby state of the scaling unit 600.

This effect standby state suggests that the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is displaced downward by the effect member including the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 7) disposed in the pachinko machine 10, for example. Before the suggestive effect is executed, the columnar protrusion 654 is arranged on the margin 624b side.

As described above, the clearance portion 624b is a shaped portion continuously extending from one end of the transmission portion 624a along the arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. In the state shown in FIG. 606 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 through the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 650 and does not function as a load to rotate the transmission gear 650 . Therefore, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted regardless of whether or not the driving motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is energized, whereby the upper arm member 620 is connected to the lower arm member 630 which is connected to the upper arm member 620. Displacement of the production member 700 can be regulated.

Note that even if the effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is the effect mode in which the effect member 700 is not finally displaced downward, in the present embodiment, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is placed in the effect standby state. is controlled to change state to

In this case, immediately after the player is notified that the effect member 700 will not be displaced downward, the transmission gear 650 rotates counterclockwise in front view in order to return the cylindrical protrusion 654 to the margin 624b side. The drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

As a result, when an effect suggesting downward displacement of the effect member 700 is executed, it is possible to avoid predicting the subsequent effect regarding the effect member 700 due to the difference in the driving sound of the drive motor MT2. .

The margin portion 624b also has a function of lowering the accuracy required for the drive stop position when the drive motor MT2 is rotationally driven in the direction in which the effect member 700 is lifted. 62, the effect member 700 has already been placed at the displacement end position on the upper end side, and the subsequent displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 654 is limited to the allowance portion. 624b is a displacement that only slides.

Further, the function of restricting the displacement of the upper arm member 620 does not differ regardless of the position of the columnar projection 654 in the margin 624b. Therefore, it is allowed that the setting accuracy of the stop position of the columnar protrusion 654 is lowered, so that the transmission gear 650 can be stopped immediately when the plate portion 655 to be detected enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). The rotation speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) can be set to be large when the effect member 700 is displaced upward without being limited to the speed. Thereby, the rising speed of the production member 700 can be set to be large.

In addition, even if the rising speed is excessive, when the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the columnar protrusion 654 , the load applied to the columnar protrusion 654 is directed in the radial direction of the transmission gear 650 . Therefore, it does not function to displace the cylindrical projection 654 in the rotational direction. Therefore, even if the rising speed is excessive, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted at the position where it abuts on the columnar protrusion 654 .

Furthermore, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the upward displacement of the lower arm member 630 is restricted by the upper arm member 620, which will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the lateral distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the lateral distance between the ends arranged in the guide holes 602 of the main body member 601) changes from the effect standby state. It is set larger from the halfway down state to the overhanging state compared to the halfway down state.

In this way, by increasing the displacement speed between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 accompanying the downward displacement of the effect member 700, the lower arm member 630 supporting the effect member 700 is violently displaced in the width direction. It is possible to make the player visually recognize as if the displacement speed of the production member 700 is rapidly increasing, and the production effect of the up-and-down displacement of the production member 700 can be visually recognized. can be improved.

65 to 67 are rear views of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 65, FIG. 65(b) is also shown as a diagram in which illustration of the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

65(a) and 65(b) show the production standby state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, FIG. 66 shows the lowering state in which the production member 700 descends from the production standby state, and FIG. The expanded state of the scaling unit 600 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 65( a ), when the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the rendering standby state, the detection target plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 . That is, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT2 is stopped in a state in which the detection plate portion 655 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 before execution of the effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward. At this point, the driving motor MT2 is driven and controlled in accordance with the execution of the above-described suggestive effect, and the driving motor MT2 is temporarily stopped at a position where it is determined that the plate portion 655 to be detected has retreated from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. It is controlled to change the state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 to the presentation standby state.

Conversely, when the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven to the side of upwardly displacing the effect member 700, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive motor MT2 is energized. is released, the transmission gear 650 can be stopped at a position slightly entering the margin 624b from the position of the cylindrical projection 654 in the standby state for the effect, and as described above, the upper arm member 620 , the displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be regulated.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the plate portion 655 to be detected has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the driving of the driving motor MT2 is not stopped immediately, but regardless of whether the driving speed is maintained or decelerated, The drive motor MT2 is controlled to stop driving after a time delay sufficient for the cylindrical protrusion 654 to be positioned at the end of the margin 624b.

As a result, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a position where the cylindrical projection 654 is located at the end of the margin 624b. At this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 can be inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21(a)). Even if the stop position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly deviated, the tapered surface is formed at the tip of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15(c)), so that the cylindrical portion 183 can be easily inserted into the restricted hole 657. can do.

The position of the regulated hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position slightly rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. It is set at a position that partially overlaps with the regulation hole 657 .

Therefore, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 66 or FIG. 67, the operation member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 is pushed to set the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricting state (see FIG. 15(c)), and then the transmission gear 650 is disengaged. Even if the transmission gear 650 is rotationally controlled in the direction of driving and displacing the effect member 700 upward, the cylindrical portion 183 interferes with the displacement of the transmission gear 650, and the state shown in FIG. 65(a) is not reached.

The plate portion 655 to be detected does not enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 even though the drive motor MT2 continues to be driven, so that the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) determines that the transmission gear 650 is defective in displacement. can be done.

Based on this determination, the abnormality can be notified by a method such as displaying an error indicating the displacement failure of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 4). store clerk to understand that the displacement restricting device 180 may remain in the restricting state.

As a result, the error display or the like regarding the displacement of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be used to convey information regarding the state of the displacement restricting device 180 to the store clerk of the gaming machine shop. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to separately provide a device for detecting the state of the displacement restricting device 180 .

Here, since the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin corresponding to the length of the margin 624b of the transmission hole 624, the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a large value. If the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 is excessive when the transmission gear 700 is displaced upward, the upward speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 will be excessive, and the lower arm member 630 will move to the upper arm member 620. There is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the direction in which the effect member 700 is displaced toward the effect standby state is set in the direction opposite to the direction of gravity (upward direction), downward acceleration is always applied to the lower arm member 630. It is possible to reduce the vertical load at the contact position when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 65(b), since the upper side surface shape of the lower meat portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side surface shape of the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 can increase the contact area in the case of collision with the upper arm member 620 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 from being locally subjected to a large load, and prevent the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 from being damaged or broken.

In this way, since the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to contact the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently wide contact area, the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 is excessive when the effect member 700 is displaced upward. Even if the rising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, the upper arm member 620 whose displacement is restricted by the columnar projection 654 as described above allows the lower arm The upward displacement of the member 630 can be restricted. Thereby, the production member 700 can be prevented from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the production standby state.

In the state shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are displaced downward from the effect standby state against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 by the driving force of the drive motor MT2. corresponds to the state

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary protrusion 712 of the effect member 700 is arranged at the intermediate position of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. An auxiliary protrusion 712 of 700 is located at the end of the arcuate hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 .

Thereby, the extent to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 (the extent to which the posture is stabilized) can be changed. That is, the lower arm member 630 can hold the effect member 700 to a higher extent in the effect standby state or the overhanging state than in the mid-descent state.

In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the direction of rotation about the cylindrical protrusion 711 . For example, when the auxiliary projection 712 is arranged in the middle position of the arc-shaped hole 732 and the displacement in the rotational direction is not restricted (see FIG. 66), the effect member 700 rotates in the rotational direction around the right cylindrical projection 711. Attitude may change.

In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is supported by the pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the left cylindrical projection 711, but it rotates around the right cylindrical projection 711. The displacement direction of the left columnar protrusion 711 when the performance member 700 changes its posture is the lateral direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, there is a possibility that the change in posture of the effect member 700 will be visibly caused without being restricted by the lower arm member 630, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the overhanging state, the direction of displacement of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 when the direction of the production member 700 changes in the direction of rotation around the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is downward. Lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of arm member 630 . As a result, the lower arm member 630 can effectively limit the change in the posture of the effect member 700, and the change in the posture of the effect member 700 to the extent that the effect member 700 can be identified can be prevented.

In addition, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the right side is arranged at the end position of the arc-shaped hole 732, so that the contact between the auxiliary protrusions 712 and the arc-shaped hole 732 causes the right side It is possible to prevent the attitude of the effect member 700 from changing in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back around the cylindrical protrusion 711 of . As described above, the change in posture in the counterclockwise direction in rear view is restricted by the displacement direction of the left cylindrical projection 711 along the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm member 630 .

Similarly, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary projections 712 arranged on the left side are arranged at the terminal positions of the arc-shaped holes 732, so that the contact between the auxiliary projections 712 and the arc-shaped holes 732 causes the left side It is possible to prevent the attitude of the effect member 700 from changing in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear around the cylindrical protrusion 711 . As described above, the change in posture in the clockwise direction in the rear view is restricted by the fact that the displacement direction of the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is along the longitudinal direction of the right lower arm member 630 .

Furthermore, the auxiliary protrusion 712 not only changes the attitude of the production member 700 in the direction of rotation (the direction of rotation about the axis extending in the front-rear direction), but also in the direction of tilting (the direction of rotation about the axis extending in the left-right direction). It functions to suppress posture changes and posture changes in the lateral swing direction (rotation direction around an axis extending in the vertical direction).

For example, the lower arm member 630 and the directing member 700 are not connected only by the pair of left and right cylindrical projections 711, but the auxiliary projections 712 arranged above the cylindrical projections 711, or the cylindrical projections 711. Since the lower arm member 630 and the production member 700 can be connected at three upper and lower positions by being connected also by the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the lower left and right outer sides, the posture change of the production member 700 in the tilting direction can be controlled. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the auxiliary projection 712 arranged above the cylindrical projection 711 is arranged in the middle of the elongated body portion of the lower arm member 630 (the root side of the arc-shaped hole 634), the effect member 700 tilts. The long main body of the lower arm member 630 can withstand the load caused by the change in orientation.

Further, the pressing member PC1 is disposed on the elongated body portion of the lower arm member 630 as described above (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and the body member 601 or the front cover member 610 is moved downward by the pressing member PC1. The longitudinal displacement of the arm member 630 is restricted.

In this way, when the load due to the change in posture of the effect member 700 is applied to the long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives the load in the bending direction along the lengthwise direction, the lower arm member 630 By using the configuration that regulates the displacement, it is possible to strongly prevent the attitude change of the effect member 700 .

In addition, as described above, the auxiliary projections 712 arranged on the left and right outer sides (below) of the cylindrical projections 711 can increase the number of connection positions between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, and the effect member 700 can move downward. It is possible to suppress the posture change in the lateral swing direction with respect to the arm member 630 .

In this embodiment, the connecting position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the vertical center of the plate-shaped main body 710 of the effect member 700 . In addition, in this embodiment, the center of gravity of the production member 700 is arranged on the same horizontal plane.

As a result, it is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the posture of the effect member 700 is changed in such a manner that the effect member 700 falls forward about the connecting portion with the lower arm member 630 . It is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the posture of the effect member 700 is changed in such a manner that the effect member 700 falls backward about the connecting portion.

That is, even if there is a possibility that a plurality of types of posture changes occur in the effect member 700, the front-rear direction displacement of the effect member 700 is suppressed even if any one of the plurality of posture changes occurs. Therefore, any posture change can be dealt with.

As a result, even when the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13(a)) are arranged with a narrow front-to-rear space, the effect member 700 is prevented from rubbing against or colliding with the partition member 310. Since this can be avoided, it is possible to make it difficult for the performance member 700 to be damaged, the design portion to be deteriorated, and visibility deterioration (transparency deterioration) due to damage or abrasion to the partitioning member 310 to occur.

In a state where the effect member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 abuts on the shape portion of the main body member 601 in the rotational direction and is restricted from further rotation. Therefore, even if the drive motor MT2 continues to drive, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 from being excessively displaced simply by accumulating the driving force in the transmission gear 650.

In this embodiment, in the overhanging state shown in FIG. 67, a driving force slightly exceeding the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied to prevent the production member 700 from rebounding upward and displacing it. controlling.

As a result, the effect member 700 can be stably stopped at the lower end position while setting the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 to a large value (for example, a magnitude that allows the effect member 700 to be lifted).

On the other hand, when the effect member 700 starts to be displaced upward, the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so it is possible to avoid excessive load on the drive motor MT2.

For example, when starting to displace upward, after releasing the driving force for stably arranging the effect member 700 at the lower end position, the upward displacement of the effect member 700 is prevented by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3. By generating the driving force of the driving motor MT2 after waiting (by providing a waiting time until the driving of the driving motor MT2 is started), the driving force can be applied to the effect member 700 after the start of displacement.

This makes it possible to reduce the load on the drive motor MT2 compared to the case where the effect member 700 in the stopped state is displaced upward.

65 to 67, imaginary lines show changes in the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 passing through the lower arm member 630, and hidden lines show the shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electric wiring DK1. be done.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), the electrical wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin lid portion 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner diameter side of the arcuate hole 634, and is guided to the inside of the wiring guide member 714. It passes through the through hole 713 to the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the tension of the electrical wiring DK1 that may occur due to the relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the effect member 700 is offset by the excess length of the electrical wiring DK1 previously arranged inside the wiring guide member 714. I am trying to As a result, the displacement of the electric wire DK1 can be completed near the wire guide member 714, so that the displacement of the electric wire DK1 on the front side of the through hole 713 and inside the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

The shape of the inner surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed in an arc shape centered on the electric wiring DK1 side. Thereby, the load that the electric wiring DK1 receives from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

In addition, the shape portion of the lower arm member 630 in which the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1. For example, when the effect member 700 is displaced upward from the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 67), the shape portion in which the arc-shaped hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed is the electrical wiring DK1. DK1 can be pushed into the wiring guide member 714 side.

As a result, the electric wiring DK1 can be stably put in and taken out of the wiring guide member 714, and the state change of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 can be stably caused.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the auxiliary projections 712 arranged in the arc-shaped holes 634 arranged on the front side of the thin lid portion 636 and mostly hidden by the thin lid portion 636 are in an overhanging state. is arranged at a position visible from the rear (see FIG. 67).

The auxiliary protrusion 712 is a portion guided by the arc-shaped hole 634 and a fastening portion used for connecting the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 . Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 , it is necessary to screw the fastening screw into (or remove) the auxiliary projection 712 .

Therefore, in this embodiment, the state in which the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or disassembled) can be limited to the extended state of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 . As a result, assembly efficiency and maintenance efficiency can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the production member 700 and other constituent members are damaged as a result of performing assembly or maintenance while the production member 700 is arranged in an incomplete position.

Next, the displacement (enlargement/reduction displacement) associated with the state change of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 of the effect member 700 will be described. In this embodiment, the degree of expansion/contraction displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled so as to be variable depending on the arrangement of the effect member 700 .

68 is a front view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the scaling unit 600. FIG. In FIGS. 68 and 69, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

FIGS. 68 and 69 illustrate a state in which the enlarging/reducing unit 600 is in the process of being lowered. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, in the midway down state of the scaling unit 600, the effect member 700 is not controlled to be enlarged and displaced until the expansion/contraction member 740 reaches its maximum diameter. It is controlled to allow expansion displacement.

In other words, the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, since it is possible to avoid the effect member 700 from becoming excessively large when viewed from the front, the allowable attitude change amount of the effect member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partitioning member 310 (see FIG. 22). can be increased.

At an intermediate position of the expansion displacement of the production member 700, the decorative member 752 is partially covered with the shielding design member 760 (the outer diameter side portion is covered). As for the arrangement of the decorative members 752 in a front view, the light transmitting member 752a is arranged at a position (gap position) not covered by the effect member 700, and the mirror surface member 752b is arranged at a position covered by the effect member 700, including the light transmitting member. 752a is arranged at a position other than the position where it is visually recognized.

As a result, it is possible to improve the visibility of the light emitted through the light transmitting member 752a from the LEDs or the like arranged on the electrical board 751 (see FIG. 53), and the light transmitting member 752a is transmitted through the light transmitting member 752a to provide a shielding design. By reflecting the light reflected on the back side of the member 760 by the mirror surface member 752b, the effect of the mirror surface member 752b can be improved.

For example, as an effect mode of the mirror surface member 752b, when light is not emitted from the LEDs of the electrical board 751 (see FIG. 53), the background color of the shielding design member 760 (red in this embodiment) is applied to the mirror surface member 752b. can be reflected and made visible to the player.

On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LEDs of the electrical board 751, the color reflected from the mirror surface member 752b is mixed with the background color of the shielding design member 760 and the color of the light emitted from the LEDs. can be any color. Therefore, the appearance of the mirror surface member 752b can be changed by the light passing through the portion other than the mirror surface member 752 (for example, the light transmitting member 752a).

Note that the control mode is not limited at all. For example, after the shielding design member 760 is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 68, it may be controlled to return to the assembled state, or the driving direction of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) may be changed from the state shown in FIG. The shielding design member 760 may be controlled to vibrate in the radial direction by switching between normal and reverse in small steps.

When controlling the shielding design member 760 to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the position of the support protrusion 743a arranged at the tip of the second elongated member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 in the state of the enlarged displacement to the intermediate position is the position of the tip adjustment member. 744 and the intermediate position of the guide slot 744a. As a result, the distal end adjusting member 744 can be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the guide long hole 744a, so that the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

While such a displacement is achievable, when the shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged or displaced to expand in the radial direction to the maximum, the support projection 743a arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 are placed at both end positions of the guide long hole 744a of the tip adjustment member 744, the circumferential arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be returned (see FIGS. 58(b) and 59(b). ).

In addition, the midway position that is allowed as the expansion displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be a position slightly shifted from the collective arrangement state, or a position slightly before the position of maximum expansion displacement.

Here, in a state in which the extended plate portion 761 is enlarged and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state (for example, a position where the extended plate portion 761 overlaps the shielding design member 760 arranged oppositely in a front view and is visually recognized), the extended plate Since the portion 761 fills the gap between the shielding design members 760, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the collective arrangement state is maintained.

In this embodiment, a red reflective sheet is attached to the extension plate portion 761 in the same manner as the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, so the red color of the extension plate portion 761 is visible in the gap between the shielding design members 760. Even if the red color is the color of the extended plate portion 761 or the color of the shielding design member 760, it can be difficult to distinguish.

It should be noted that unlike the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is expanded and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state by means of painting the extension plate portion 761 with another color (for example, gold). The extension plate portion 761 that is visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 may be conspicuous.

Although the case where the light transmitting member 752a is made of a colorless and light transmitting resin material has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a red resin material.

In this case, even if the shielding design members 760 are displaced beyond the overlapping margin with the extended plate portion 761 from the collective arrangement state, the light transmitting members 752a visible in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 are shielded. Since it is visually recognized in red like the design member 760, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the shielding design members 760 are at least partially connected to each other.

On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LEDs of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting members 752a visible in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 can be made to emit light to make them stand out. It is possible to improve the production effect of.

70 is a front view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the scaling unit 600. FIG. In FIGS. 70 and 71, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted for easy understanding.

70 and 71 show the extended state of the scaling unit 600 and the expanded state of the effect member 700. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the extended state of the scaling unit 600, the effect member 700 is controlled to be enlarged and displaceable until the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed with the maximum diameter.

Therefore, the size of the effect member 700 when viewed from the front is maximized, and the allowable posture change amount of the effect member 700 is minimized from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). In addition, the device for suppressing the posture change of the effect member 700 is as described above.

In the expanded state of the production member 700, the shielding design member 760 is arranged to retreat from the decorative member 752 in front view. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of reflection on the mirror surface member 752b when light is emitted from the LEDs of the illumination board 751 (see FIG. 53) to the case where the effect member 700 is arranged in the middle of the expansion displacement.

That is, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the background color of the shielding design member 760 and make it easier for the player to visually recognize the background color (silver in this embodiment) of the mirror surface member 752b. Therefore, even in a control mode in which light of the same color is continuously emitted from the LEDs of the decorative board 751 (see FIG. 53) when the elastic displacement member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is expanded and displaced, the decorative member 752 is visually recognized. It is possible to change the color of the light visually recognized by the player who plays the game in time series.

In more detail, for example, when white light is emitted from the electrical board 751, the background color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visible near the start of enlargement, while the shielding design member changes with the displacement of the enlargement. The color of the character 760 is weakened (the range is narrowed), and the background color (silver) of the mirror surface member 752b becomes more visible at the end position of the expansion displacement. As a result, the color of the light visually recognized by the player can be changed without changing the color of the emitted light.

68 and 69 and the expansion displacements shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 do not occur continuously in this embodiment. , is controlled to execute the expansion displacement of the effect member 700 .

That is, the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled to be executable only when the effect member 700 is collectively arranged. This can prevent the shielding design member 760 from colliding with other components such as the hemispherical front device 613 (see FIG. 47).

In addition, after considering the avoidance of collisions with other constituent members, or by configuring so as not to cause problems in displacement due to collisions with other constituent members, the production member 700 is expanded and displaced in the middle of the vertical displacement. It may be controlled as much as possible.

The radial contraction displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75 . 72(a), 72(b), 73, 74(a), and 75(a) are rear views of the effect member 700 showing contraction displacement of the effect member 700 in chronological order. 74(b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 75(b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75(a). It is a diagram.

In FIGS. 72(a), 72(b), 73, 74(a), and 75(a), illustration of the plate-like main body 710 is omitted for ease of understanding, and FIG. , the rotating plate 730 rotates counterclockwise in rear view. In FIGS. 74(b) and 75(b), the illustration of the rotating plate 730b is further omitted.

FIG. 72(a) shows a state in which the shielding design members 760 of the production member 700 are dispersed with the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and FIG. 72(b) shows the shielding design members 760 of the production member 700 A state of being expanded and displaced to the halfway position (see FIGS. 68 and 69) is illustrated.

In the state shown in FIG. 72(a), the transmitted projection 741a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary between the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the connecting portion 733c of the rotary plate 730, and in the state shown in FIG. , the transmitted projection 741 a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is arranged in the middle of the connecting portion 733 c of the rotary plate 730 .

FIG. 73 shows a state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side starts contacting the back-side claw portion 734a of the rotating plate 730, and FIG. The first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 is guided by the back-side claw 734a of the rotating plate 730 and reaches the position just before the collective arrangement state.

Due to the difference in the influence of gravity between the members arranged on the upper side and the members arranged on the lower side, the displacement modes of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged on the members arranged on the upper side and the members arranged on the lower side. It differs depending on the material.

As shown in FIG. 73, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 arranged on the upper side are arranged close to the rotating plate 730 by their own weight, and the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side is rotated by its own weight. Since it acts in the direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in the direction away from the rotating plate 730 to the extent allowed by the gap between the guide hole 733 and the transmitted projection 741a.

This hanging portion is lifted by the load from the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the collectively arranged position. Therefore, the five shielding design members 760 do not arrive at the collective arrangement state at the same time, and at least the upper three are earlier than the lower two.

As a result, the production members 700 can be stably displaced to the collective arrangement state. That is, when the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 vigorously reach the collectively arranged state, whereby the lower telescopic displacement member is arranged. 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue accumulates in the lower expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause premature failure.

On the other hand, when the upper elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first as in the present embodiment, and then the lower elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in a collective arrangement state. Since its own weight is generated in a direction against the displacement of the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, the momentum of colliding with the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of fatigue caused by collision between the elastic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 .

In FIG. 74, the transmitted protrusion 741a of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary between the large-diameter arc portion 733b of the rotating plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c. Immediately after this, the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is fully pushed by the back side claw portion 734a, and is brought into a collective arrangement state. On the other hand, the second guided projection 744b of the distal end adjusting member 744 is arranged apart from the front claw 734b.

In FIG. 75 , a collective arrangement state of the effect members 700 is illustrated. That is, the figure shows a state in which the rotary plate 730 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view to the end position where the columnar projecting portion 728 of the function plate portion 720 is arranged at the end portion of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotary plate 730 .

FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member 700 along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 76, when the production member 700 is collectively arranged, the central axis side surface of the rear claw portion 734a abuts against the first guided projection 743b of the expansion/contraction member 740, and the diameter of the expansion/contraction member 740 increases. Directionally outward displacement is restricted.

In addition, the central axis side surface of the front claw portion 734b abuts against the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the radially outward displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is restricted. At this time, the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b are brought into contact with each other in the radial direction with a front-to-rear width in the projecting direction. You can stabilize your posture.

Furthermore, the front surface of the distal end adjustment member 744 is configured to be slidable on the rear surface of the extension plate portion 726 . During this sliding process, the projecting tip of the second guided protrusion 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740 abuts on the inclined surface 734c of the rotary plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotational direction. (The closer it is to the collectively arranged state, the more it is inclined in such a manner that it protrudes toward the front side.) Therefore, the inclined surface 734c can apply a load toward the front side to the second guided projection 744b.

As a result, in the configuration in which the distal end adjusting member 744 is sandwiched between the extended plate portion 726 of the functional plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730, as the rotating plate 730 rotates and the effect members 700 approach the collective arrangement state, the leading end The distal end adjusting member 744 can be displaced toward the front side in such a manner that the adjusting member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extension plate portion 726 .

Therefore, while preventing excessive increase in the resistance caused by the rotation of the rotating plate 730, the front-rear direction position and posture of the front-rear adjustment member 744 are gradually increased. can be stabilized, the longitudinal position and posture of the shielding design member 760 can be stabilized, and the shielding design member 760 can be arranged in close contact without gaps in the collective arrangement state.

With reference to FIGS. 74(b) and 75(b), the fact that the load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b can correct the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 will be described. All of the shielding design members 760 have a common configuration, and the telescopic displacement member 740 that displaces the shielding design members 760 also has a common configuration.

As described above, the shielding design member 760 is located on the side where the extended plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59(a)) is formed in the width direction (the right side in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the top, FIG. (b)) is arranged on the rear side compared to the opposite side, so that the posture can be easily inclined.

This is due to the form of the second elongated member 743, and this attitude inclination also occurs in the distal end adjusting member 744 to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed. Due to the inclination of the attitude of the tip adjusting member 744, the tip position of the second guided protrusion 744b is located on the rear surface compared to the tip position of the first guided protrusion 743b (the protrusion direction is along the front-rear direction). The position tends to shift in the clockwise direction (to the left in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the top, see FIG. 74(b)).

On the other hand, the rotating plate 730 has the extended claw portion 734 arranged to face the second guided protrusion 744b in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and is arranged to face the second guided protrusion 744b in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view. It rotates and displaces so that a load can be applied.

That is, for example, when the inner diameter side surface of the front claw portion 734b and the front side surface of the inclined surface 734c (see FIGS. 56 and 57) come into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b, the second guided protrusion 744b Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise direction side in rear view, the degree of inclination of the postures of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be relaxed (the inclination can be eliminated). As a result, it is possible to easily eliminate the attitude inclination of the shielding design member 760 at the collective arrangement position of the effect members 700 .

The load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. Therefore, in the process of changing the state of the production member 700 shown in chronological order from FIG. 72 to FIG. 75, until the shielding design member 760 is arranged at the small diameter side end (reduction side end) of the displacement allowable range (see FIG. 74). , the posture inclinations of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 are maintained, and then the posture change to eliminate (correct) the posture inclinations of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be caused.

In other words, while the shielding design members 760 approach each other, by maintaining the attitude inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760, the body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extended plate portion 761 come into contact (collision). ), on the other hand, after the shielding design members 760 have come close to each other, the attitude inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be eliminated (corrected), so that the shielding design member The plate portion arranged in the forefront of the shielding design members 760 can be arranged flush with each other, and a sense of unity of the shielding design members 760 in the collectively arranged state can be easily produced.

The state shown in FIG. 74(b) is illustrated as a state in which the posture deviation of the shielding design member 760 is maximized. In addition, the posture deviation on the opposite side of the posture deviation shown in FIG. This makes it easier to avoid the extension plate portion 761 from colliding with the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 arranged to face it.

Further, an auxiliary protrusion 727 (see FIG. 54) arranged on the opposite side of the extended plate portion 726 is configured to be able to come into contact with the contraction side wall portion of the distal end adjustment member 744 during expansion/contraction displacement. Since a pair of auxiliary projections 727 are formed on the left and right sides of the extension plate portion 726, the tip adjustment member 744 is moved by contacting the left and right ends of the tip adjustment member 744 that have reached the contraction side ends of the displacement range. Posture deviation can be corrected.

As a result, it is possible not only to correct the posture by engaging with another shielding design member 760, but also to stabilize the posture when the distal end adjusting member 744 reaches the contraction side end of the displacement range by itself. can.

Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, description will be made. In this embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described shooting effect unit 300, enlargement/reduction unit 600, and displacement/rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices for livening up the game. Next, the displacement/rotation unit 800 will be described.

Since the displacement/rotation unit 800 is a pair of units arranged symmetrically and configured to have symmetrical shapes, the configuration of the displacement/rotation unit 800 on the left side will be described below, and the explanation of the displacement/rotation unit 800 on the right side will be described below. omitted. Note that FIG. 5 will be referred to as needed in the following description.

77 is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIG. 77 and 78 show the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIG.

79 is a front exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. FIG. 79 and 80, the lateral slide member 840 is shown in an assembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement/rotation unit 800 includes a base plate portion 810 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and a metal plate portion fixed to the base plate portion 810 with a member such as a screw. A rod MB2, a vertical slide member 820 configured to be vertically slidable through which the metal rod MB2 is inserted, and a drive fastened and fixed to the rear side of the vertical slide member 820 and fastened and fixed to the base plate portion 810. A transmission member 830 configured to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, a metal rod MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 with a member such as a screw, and a configuration in which the metal rod MB3 is inserted and slidable in the left-right direction. a transmission means 860 configured to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT4 to the horizontal slide member 840 via the vertical slide member 820 as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced in the vertical direction; A wiring arm member 870 fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member 820 so as to be rotatably displaceable at the upper end position of the vertical slide member 820 on the side of the metal rod MB2, and a wiring guide member 880 for guiding the wiring arm member 870 and the electric wiring. .

The base plate portion 810 includes a pair of both end fixing portions 811 on which the metal rod MB2 is arranged, a slide guide portion 812 formed so as to be able to guide the transmission member 830 arranged on the front side, and a long length on the back side. A transmission guide portion 813 formed in a groove shape so as to be able to guide the columnar protrusion 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed to the back side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide portion 813. and a fall prevention plate 814 arranged on the rear side to prevent the falling of the device.

The vertical slide member 820 includes a plane plate portion 821, a wall portion 822 extending from the edge of the plane plate portion 821 toward the back side, and a circular portion extending from a substantially central position of an area surrounded by the wall portion 822 toward the back side. A cylindrical protrusion 823 protruding in a columnar shape, omission portions 824a and 824b having a size that allows insertion of a connector portion of an electrical wiring and omitting the formation of a wall portion, and the left end portion of the flat plate portion 821 A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 formed in a cylindrical shape (or a cylindrical member is disposed) through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted, and a normal plate portion 821 at the upper and lower central portions of the plane plate portion 821 through which the metal rod MB3 can be inserted. A pair of left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 formed (or a cylindrical member is disposed) on the left and right, and near the ends of the metal rod insertion portions 826, are fastened and fixed to the flat plate portion 821 to prevent the metal rod MB3 from falling off. a support portion 828 formed in a columnar shape projecting from the back side of the plane plate portion 821 and capable of supporting a two-stage pinion 861; and a support protrusion 829 that protrudes cylindrically toward the left side of FIG. 79).

The wall portion 822 is a portion for ensuring the durability of the electrical wiring by structuring inside a region in which the electrical wiring disposed between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced. The omission portions 824a and 824b formed as discontinuous portions of the wall portion 822 are composed of a first omission portion 824a formed as an opening and a second omission portion 824b formed as a concave portion opened to the rear side.

The metal rod insertion portion 825 extends in a plate shape from the upper side thereof toward the rear side, and the upper detection sensor SC8 and the lower detection sensor SC8 are fastened and fixed to the base member 810 in a posture in which the detection groove faces the front side of the base member 810. A detection target plate portion 825a configured to be arranged in the detection groove of the sensor SC9 is provided.

The transmission member 830 includes a main body portion 831 formed in a plate shape elongated in the vertical direction, and a female screw formed at the tip of a columnar protrusion 823 of the vertical slide member 820 on the upper side of the main body portion 831 . An insertion hole 832 that is formed so that a fastening screw that can be screwed into it can be inserted, and a plate portion in which the insertion hole 832 is drilled. A lid-shaped portion 833 that covers from the side, and a linear gear portion 834 in which gear teeth are linearly formed in the vertical direction on the left side surface of the main body portion 831 are provided.

The columnar protrusion 823 has both a role as a portion into which the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 832 is screwed, and a role as a winding center of the electrical wiring, as will be described later.

The linear gear portion 834 meshes with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, the transmission member 830 is vertically displaced as the drive motor MT4 is controlled to rotate. As a result, the vertical slide member 820 is vertically displaced.

81 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member 840. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the horizontal slide member 840 includes a body plate member 841 formed in a substantially circular plate shape through which a metal rod MB3 is inserted and whose lateral displacement is restricted, and a rear surface of the body plate portion 841. A wiring guide member 844 that is fastened and fixed to the upper part of the side and constitutes a guide path for electric wiring, a circular member 847 arranged on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and formed in a circular plate shape when viewed from the front, and the circular member 847. and the main body plate member 841, an annular decorative member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and the circular member 847 via a cylindrical collar member C8. and an intermediate member 857 fitted from the front side into the opening of the wing-like member 854 in order to adjust the central opening diameter of the wing-like member 854 to the opening diameter of the collar member C8. , and a central design member 858 in which a columnar member having an outer diameter that can be inserted into the central opening of the intermediary member 857 protrudes from the rear side.

The main body plate member 841 has a rod arrangement portion 842 in which the drive motor MT5 is fastened and fixed on the back side, the drive gear MG5 is arranged on the front side, and the metal rod MB3 is arranged. and a rack gear portion 843 in which gear teeth are engraved along the left-right direction.

The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding lateral displacement of the electrical wiring, and is formed in a shape that allows the electrical wiring to bypass. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring from rubbing against other components, which will be described later in detail.

The circular member 847 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured such that a wing-like member 854 and the drive gear MG5 which are formed to be able to mesh with each other are assembled from front and back directions different from each other.

The circular member 847 includes a cup-shaped receiving portion 848 of a size capable of receiving the feather-shaped member 854 and recessed toward the rear side, and a cylindrically protruding portion from the center of the receiving portion 848 toward the front side. and a cylindrical protrusion 849 that is

The receiving portion 848 has a through-hole portion 848a which is formed so as to have a shape that overlaps with the cylindrical column centered on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5. Exposed to a position visible from the back.

In this manner, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 can mesh with the drive gear MG5, and the drive motor MT5 rotates, thereby transmitting the drive force and controlling the rotation of the vane member 854. FIG. Rotational driving of the vane-shaped member 854 is possible regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 . That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the path forming member 882 is designed so that it is possible even in the waiting state for the effect.

The cylindrical protrusion 849 has a linear notch 849a at its tip. This is a shaped portion for facilitating maintenance of the posture of the central design member 858 by arranging the radially protruding portion 858b of the central design member 858, the details of which will be described later.

83 is a partial cross-sectional view of displacement rotation unit 800 taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. In the description of FIG. 83, FIGS. 81 and 82 are referred to as appropriate.

The electrical decoration board 850 includes a circular opening with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, an elongated opening extending upward, and a deformed opening 851 formed by the deformed opening. A front side light emitting means 852a composed of a plurality of LEDs etc. arranged on the front side near the opening 851, and a plurality of LEDs etc. and a rear side light emitting means 852b.

The deformed opening 851 allows the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 to be arranged inside the opening, and the gear portion 855 of the feather member 854 is arranged on the rear side of the deformed opening 851 in the assembled state.

The elongated hole portion extending upward from the deformed opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotation shaft of the drive gear MG5. As a result, the driving gear MG5 can be brought closer to the electrical board 850, and the gear portion 855 of the feather-shaped member 854 can be easily meshed with the driving gear MG5.

The front side light emitting means 852a is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces the front-rear direction. As a result, the light can be emitted to the front side along the arrow D8a in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the feather member 854 .

The rear side light emitting means 852b is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces radially outward. As a result, light can be emitted toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b. By reflecting (refracting) this light to the front side by the uneven shape formed on the plate back surface of the circular member 847 , the light can travel to the front side at a position far from the rotation axis of the feather member 854 . In addition, in this embodiment, since a plurality of elongated concave-convex shapes formed along arcs concentric with the rotational axis of the feather-shaped member 854 are densely formed on the back surface of the circular member 847, the player can In contrast, arc-shaped (or circular) light can be visually recognized when viewed from the front.

That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the front side of the electrical board 850 is not arranged with an LED or the like whose optical axis is oriented in the front-rear direction at a position far from the rotation axis of the feather-shaped member 854, the player can The position at which the light is visually recognized can be moved radially outward. In other words, while using the electrical board 850 having a smaller diameter than the outermost diameter of the wing-shaped member 854, the outer side of the surface on which the electrical board 850 is formed, that is, the outermost diameter of the wing-shaped member 854, is used. , the light can be seen (see FIG. 14).

As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in which light is visually recognized radially outward of the feather-shaped member 854 without increasing the size of the electrical board 850 . In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the wing-shaped member 854 rotates at high speed, the rear side of the wing-shaped member 854 becomes a shadow, and there is a possibility that it may be difficult to effectively perform the lighting effect in this range. . In order to solve this problem, it is considered effective to irradiate the light from the outside in the radial direction of the rotational locus of the vane member 854, but this requires increasing the layout area of the LEDs and the like. In other words, it is necessary to increase the area of the electrical board, which increases the manufacturing cost of the board.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while maintaining the size of the electrical board 850 smaller than the rotational locus of the wing-shaped member 854, only the visible position of the light is positioned radially outward from the rotational trajectory of the wing-shaped member 854. can be displaced. As a result, the effect of the lighting effect can be improved without increasing the manufacturing cost.

Returning to FIGS. 81 and 82, description will be made. The decorative member 853 is a member that is formed from a light-impermeable resin material and that is coaxially fastened to the front side of the circular member 847 . Therefore, since the light passing through the circular member 847 is separated by the decorative member 853, it is possible to effectively perform an effect in which the appearance of the light is changed between the inner side and the outer side of the decorative member 853 as a boundary.

For example, blue light is emitted from the front side light emitting means 852a while red light is emitted from the rear side light emitting means 852b. can be clearly separated by the decorative member 853 .

The feather-like member 854 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a circular opening 854a formed in the central portion in the front-rear direction, and radially outwardly extending at equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the circular opening 854a. a gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back side; and a plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back side at an intermediate position between the adjacent blade portions 854b. And prepare.

The circular opening 854a is formed with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

The wing-shaped member 854 is configured to be rotatable via a drive gear MG5 that is rotationally driven by the drive motor MT5. The attitude of the vane member 854 is controlled depending on the length of the driving time. In this configuration, the wing-shaped member 854 is configured so that the rotation axis and the center of gravity are aligned, and by minimizing idling after de-energization of the drive motor MT5, the drive motor MT5 It is possible to reduce the deviation between the attitude of the wing-shaped member 854 assumed by the driving time of , and the actual attitude of the wing-shaped member 854 . It should be noted that the orientation of the vane member 854 may be detectable by configuring the drive motor MT5 with a stepping motor.

The intermediary member 857 is formed so as to be fitted into the front opening of the circular opening 854 a , and the inner diameter of the opening 857 a is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 849 of the circular member 847 . Thereby, the intermediary member 857 can be rotatable around the cylindrical protrusion 849 .

The central design member 858 includes a central projection 858a projecting from the central portion toward the back side in a cylindrical shape, a radially projecting portion 858b projecting radially outward from the central projection 858a, and a circular body portion. and a design projected streak portion 858c projecting upward from the .

The central protrusion 858a is a portion that is inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 849 in such a manner that the radial protrusion 858b is inserted into the notch 849a. The central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847 by screwing the inserted fastening screw.

In addition to functioning as a design portion, the design rib portion 858 c can also function to abut against the wing-shaped member 854 and adjust the rotation mode of the wing-shaped member 854 . That is, when the rear surface of the design projection 858c and the front surface of the wing-shaped member 854 are arranged close to each other to such an extent that they rub against each other, the stop posture of the wing-shaped member 854 is stabilized by utilizing the increase in resistance caused by this rubbing. can be planned.

As a result, the drive control mode of the feather-shaped member 854 is a drive mode in which the rotation continues for a long period of time, and a drive mode in which the rotation of about one rotation occurs intermittently (an irregular operation at the beginning of rotation is produced). drive mode), it is possible to stabilize the intermittent stop posture of the feather member 854 in the latter drive mode.

Returning to FIGS. 79 and 80, description will be made. The transmission means 860 meshes with a two-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820 and a small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861, and is supported by the vertical slide member 820 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. and a drop prevention member 863 that prevents the rack member 862 from dropping from the vertical slide member 820 .

The two-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small-diameter pinion 861a that meshes with the gear teeth of the rack member 862 and a pinion that has a longer pitch radius than the small-diameter pinion 861a. The small pinion 861a and the large pinion 861b are integrally formed.

The rack member 862 is formed to be long in the left and right direction, and has a gear portion 862a formed as a rack gear that can be meshed with the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861. and a columnar projection 862b projecting from the end portion toward the front side in a columnar shape.

In this embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are configured with gear teeth of the same shape, and the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a , and the pitch circle radius of the large-diameter pinion 861b is designed to be 9:16. Therefore, the ratio of the amount of lateral displacement of the rack member 862 and the amount of lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is maintained at 9:16.

The columnar projection 862b has an outer diameter that allows it to be placed inside the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 . In addition, the plate thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the columnar projection 862b is formed is such that when the columnar projection 862b is arranged in the transmission guide portion 813, the rear side end portion of the rack member 862 is prevented from falling off. The thickness of the plate is such that the columnar projection 862b does not drop off from the transmission guide portion 813 even if it is moved to the rear side until it abuts against the plate 814 .

This can prevent the rack member 862 from falling off from the transmission guide portion 813 when the fall prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state.

In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth of the same shape, so that the displacement amount of the rack member 862 is larger than that of the small-diameter pinion 861a. The lateral slide member 840 is laterally displaced by a displacement amount calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the radial pinion 861b.

Therefore, the amount of displacement of the lateral slide member 840 can be increased compared to the amount of displacement of the rack member 862 . As a result, it is possible to ensure a large lateral displacement width of the lateral slide member 840 while keeping the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813 small, which will be described later in detail.

84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the path forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. FIG. 79 and 80 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 84 and 85 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is a long member made of a resin material. A circular support hole 872 is drilled at one end in the longitudinal direction of the wire, and a wire placement hole 873 is placed close to the support hole 872 and drilled in the same direction so that electrical wires can be placed. , a plurality of claw portions 874 extending from one wall portion toward the other wall portion at the open side end portion of the long main body portion 871, and a resin mold for forming the claw portions 874 can be removed. and a circular projecting portion 876 projecting in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 872 from near the other end of the long body portion 871 in the longitudinal direction.

The long body portion 871 is a portion where the electric wiring guided to the open side portion through the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged, and has a constricted portion 871a having a reduced width length in the intermediate portion thereof. The electric wiring is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the elongated body portion 871 and guided to the outside from the other end portion (the end portion opposite to the side where the support hole 872 is formed) in the elongated direction.

The constricted portion 871a functions as a portion that loosely sandwiches the electrical wiring arranged on the open side of the long body portion 871 to the extent that disconnection does not occur, and prevents the arrangement of the electrical wiring from being excessively shifted. The narrowed portion 871a can prevent the electrical wiring arranged on the open side portion of the long main body portion 871 from being displaced beyond the narrowed portion 871a.

The support hole 872 is formed with a size that allows the support protrusion 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) to be inserted thereinto, so that the wiring arm member 870 is rotatably supported by the vertical slide portion 820 .

The wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through hole through which the electric wiring arranged on the wiring arm member 870 passes when passing over to the vertical slide member 820 . In the present embodiment, since the wire placement hole 873 is arranged close to the support hole 872, the positional deviation amount of the wire placement hole 873 when the wire arm member 870 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the load applied to the electrical wiring due to the rotation of the wiring arm member 870 can be reduced.

The claw portion 874 prevents the electrical wiring arranged in a mode of being housed in the open portion side of the long main body portion 871 from falling off from the long main body portion 871 . In addition, since the through-hole 875 with a minimum area secures the space for extracting the resin mold required for forming the claw portion 874, the electrical wiring can It is possible to prevent it from slipping out from the side (the side where the through hole 875 is formed in this embodiment).

The circular projecting portion 876 is formed with an outer diameter and projecting length that can be placed in the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In this embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wire guide portion 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wire arm member 870 .

As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 comprises a prevention plate 881 for preventing the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886, and the prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to form an internal path. and a passage forming member 882 that is fastened and secured to the base member 810 .

As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in a box-like shape with one side open, and a prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to the open portion so that the path forming member 882 is opened to the rear side at a position separated in the vertical direction. A path through the upper opening 883 and the lower opening 884 is formed.

That is, the path forming member 882 has a wall portion 882a projecting to one side at the edge, and an upper opening portion 883 that forms an upper opening portion of the path by missing the wall portion 882a, and the lower end of the path forming member 882. A lower opening portion 884 drilled in the wall portion 882a with a size that enables insertion of a connector of an electrical wiring, and a portion extending from the wall portion 882a toward the upper opening portion 883 within a range not overlapping the prevention plate 881 when viewed in the left-right direction. An extension part 885 that extends, a guide recess 886 that is recessed in a long groove shape in a range that does not overlap with the extension part 885 when viewed in the left-right direction, and a lower edge of the guide recess 886 A columnar projecting portion 887 is provided so as to protrude on the side of the prevention plate 881 , and into which a fastening screw inserted through the prevention plate 881 is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip.

A space in which the vertical slide member 820 can be displaced in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the path forming member 882, and the horizontal slide member 840, which is displaced in the horizontal direction along with the displacement, has a wall portion 882a that is closest to the front side. It enters the rear side of the wall portion 882a at the arranged position (position near the lower end of displacement) (see FIG. 86(a)).

That is, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged on the rear side of the wiring guide member 880 forming the route along which the electric wiring is guided at a position near the lower end of displacement. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring from coming into contact with or rubbing against the horizontal sliding member 840 while allowing the electrical wiring and the horizontal sliding member 840 to overlap each other in the front view.

In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided along the path of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper opening 883 . and is regulated by the prevention plate 881 . Furthermore, the widthwise length of the path of the wiring guide member 880 is designed to be shorter than the sum of the widthwise lengths of the long main body portion 871 of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular projecting portion 876 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from falling out of the guide recess 886 in the assembled state.

The lower open portion 884 functions as a wire through hole through which an electrical wire arranged so as to be wound around the columnar projecting portion 887 is passed to the rear side.

The guide recess 886 includes a front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, a rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, and a connecting recess 886c connecting the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. and

The columnar projecting portion 887 has a role of a restricting portion that restricts the displacement of the electrical wiring and a role of a fastening portion for fixing the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882 .

With reference to FIGS. 86 to 89, the displacement mode of displacement/rotation unit 800 will be described. FIGS. 86 to 89 show how the displacing/rotating unit 800 changes state from the waiting state for presentation to the upper end state for presentation in chronological order.

86(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 86(b) is a sectional view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 taken along line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb of FIG. 86(a). 87(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87(b) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87(a). 88(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88(b) is a displacement along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88(a). 89(a) is a side view of the displacement/rotation unit 800 viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 89(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 800 from LXXXIXb to LXXXIXb in FIG. 89(a). 8 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 along the line; FIG.

FIG. 86 shows the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800. In FIG. 87, the detection target plate portion 825a (see FIG. 80) of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at the upper detection sensor SC8, and the horizontal slide member 840 moves along the displacement path. In FIG. 88, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the middle right end state and the upper end state of the effect, and the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged between the middle right end state and the upper end state of the effect. In FIG. 89, the upper end state of the production of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

In FIGS. 86(a), 87(a), 88(a) and 89(a), for ease of understanding, the wire guide member 880 includes a wall portion 882a, a guide recess 886 and a cylindrical projecting portion. The wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized by omitting the illustration of the other shaped portions while the outer shape of the portion 887 is shown in imaginary lines. In addition, by partially breaking the shape portion near the upper end of the base plate 810, the vertical slide member 820 is prevented from being hidden during vertical displacement.

In FIGS. 86(b), 87(b), 88(b) and 89(b), the shape line of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 is illustrated by imaginary lines. A circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the body plate member 841 is shown for the purpose of showing only the horizontal displacement width.

86 to 89, imaginary lines illustrate how the electrical wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 is displaced according to the state change of the displacement/rotation unit 800. FIG. The electric wiring DK2 is guided into the wiring guide member 880 from the lower opening 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880, passes through the wiring arm member 870, and then reaches the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. It is guided through the enclosed space to the lateral slide member 840, the details of the displacement of which will be described later.

The displacement/rotation unit 800 is configured such that the vertical slide member 820 can be vertically reciprocated. First, the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be described.

In this embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at the lower end position in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86). In the effect standby state, the plate portion 825a to be detected of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, so that the displacing rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that.

In addition, in the performance standby state, the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged at the left end (left and right outer ends) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the front side. That is, by arranging the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to retreat from the displacement trajectory of the horizontal slide member 840, the horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is prevented from being restricted by the horizontal position of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Therefore, the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced fully to the left and right outer sides.

The state in which the driving motor MT4 is driven and controlled in the direction of upwardly displacing the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state, and the detection plate portion 825a is arranged in the upper detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the middle right end state (see FIG. 87). ). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the displacing/rotating unit 800 is in the middle right end state from the output of the upper detection sensor SC8.

In the intermediate right end state, while the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced upward and to the right from the effect standby state, the wiring arm member 870 is only displaced upward and the posture is maintained.

84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still arranged in the front vertical recess 886a of the guide recess 886, the wiring arm member 870 is supported as a support point. The distance in the longitudinal direction between the projecting portion 829 and the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is maintained from the effect standby state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the right along with the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state to the middle right end state without changing the posture of the wiring arm member 870. be. As a result, it is possible to avoid a collision between the members due to displacement timing deviation, which tends to occur when both the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are displaced.

As shown in FIGS. 86(b) and 87(b), as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced upward, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the horizontal direction. In this displacement, the direction of displacement is switched along the shape of the transmission guide portion 813 , but the displacement in the left-right direction exceeds the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813 .

This is because the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is transmitted via the two-stage pinion 861 . That is, it is the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 that is guided by the transmission guide portion 813, and the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are connected to the two-stage pinion 861. combined. Therefore, the ratio of the pitch circle radii of the two-stage pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio of the displacement width of the rack member 862 and the displacement width of the lateral slide member 864 .

In this embodiment, the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a and the pitch circle radius of the large diameter pinion 861b of the two-stage pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) is 9:16. is multiplied by a constant (that is, 16/9=approximately 1.78).

As shown in FIG. 88(b), in the intermediate left end state, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to the right and left outwards as much as in the effect waiting state. In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to the position where it overlaps the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

In such an arrangement, as shown in FIG. 88(a), the posture of the wiring arm member 870 changes. That is, in the process from the midway right end state to the midway left end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is connected to the connecting recess 886c formed on the rear side of the front vertical recess of the guide recess 886. The distance in the longitudinal direction between the supporting projection 829 as a supporting point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is shortened compared to the effect standby state.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 is changed after the horizontal slide member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction. In the downward displacement, the reverse is established (after the wiring arm member 870 does not change its posture, the lateral slide member 840 is arranged at a position overlapping the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction).

As a result, even if there is a deviation between the displacement timing of the lateral slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870, the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 can be prevented from colliding with each other.

The wiring arm member 870 is arranged at the left end (the outer end in the left-right direction) of the displacement/rotation unit 800, and displacement is limited to up-and-down displacement and posture change in the front-rear direction. That is, regardless of the state of the displacing/rotating unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can be continuously arranged at the left and right outer ends where the player is unlikely to notice, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 guide the wiring arm member 870. It is possible to avoid the electric wiring DK2 from entering the field of view of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), during the period until the displacing/rotating unit 800 reaches the effect upper end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is A support protrusion 829 as a support point for the wiring arm member 870 and a circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 ( 84) is maintained at a minimum.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 configured to be able to change its posture as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced vertically is used to arrange the electric wiring DK2 at different front and rear positions corresponding to the vertical position. By constructing such a structure, there is an advantageous effect that a space for arranging the constituent members can be secured.

For example, when the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged at a rearward position, lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is restricted. Specifically, in order to avoid contact with the electrical wiring DK2, the horizontal slide member 840 is set to the right side (left and right inner side) in the waiting state for the effect. In this embodiment, since the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is arranged at the right side (left and right inner side) of the horizontal slide member 840, the size of the displacement/rotation unit 800 is reduced in order to avoid contact. There is a possibility that it will be necessary to deal with That is, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement/rotation unit 800 is reduced.

Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is arranged at a position closer to the front, while the horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 can be sufficiently ensured, the game board 13 arranged on the front side of the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be displaced. The degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the is lowered.

In this embodiment, since the displacement/rotation unit 800 is arranged symmetrically, in order to drive the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second prize winning port 640 arranged in the right side area of the game board 13. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the solenoid, etc., tends to be low.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring arm member 870 is configured to displace the electrical wiring DK2 in the front-rear direction, thereby avoiding the limitation of the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840, thereby allowing the game to be played. It is possible to avoid lowering the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members on the back side of the board 13 .

That is, at the lower end position where the horizontal slide member 840 is to be retracted to the right and left outer sides, the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged forward, so that the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged in front of the horizontal slide member 840, and the horizontal slide member 840 is moved forward. is avoided from being limited by the electrical wiring DK2.

In addition, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced inward to the left and right, and in the upper position where the second winning hole 640 (see FIG. 2) is desired to be arranged, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged rearward, thereby The DK2 is placed closer to the back, leaving a space on the front side. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging members arranged on the game board 13 as components such as solenoids for driving the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second prize winning opening 640. FIG.

State changes of the electric wiring DK2 in the state changes shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. The change in the state of the electric wiring DK2 here means a change in the winding state of the electric wiring DK2 in the state where the electric wiring DK2 is wound around the pillar.

In the electrical wiring DK2, the upper portion of the lower winding portion DK2b (the side close to the wiring arm member 870) exclusively extends vertically and is not preferred to be curved. In particular, during the downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electrical wiring DK2 into the front side of the cylindrical projecting portion 887 (see FIG. 86(a)). A higher value is preferred.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a cable tube made of resin is wound around the upper portion of the lower winding portion DK2b so that the behavior is such that the rigidity is higher than that of the portion that undergoes winding displacement.

In the state shown in FIG. 89(a), the cable tube is arranged between the wall portion 882a and the electrical wiring DK2, thereby avoiding friction between the electrical wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. there is

In addition, since the opening direction of the lower end of the wiring arm member 870 is configured to face vertically downward, the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 at the start of downward displacement can be directed vertically downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid unnecessary bending deformation of the electric wiring DK2.

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the electrical wiring DK2 is arranged such that the upper winding portion DK2a is wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840, Winding portion DK2b is arranged to be wound around cylindrical projecting portion 887 below wiring arm member 870 .

Of the electrical wiring DK2, the upper winding portion DK2a arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 can be displaced in a radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion 823. configured to

Of the electrical wiring DK2, the lower winding portion DK2b arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical projecting portion 887 is displaced in a radial direction along a plane perpendicular to the central axis of the cylindrical projecting portion 887. configured as possible.

That is, the plane in which the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 is configured to be different from the plane in which the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced below the wiring arm member 870 . In this embodiment, the planes are perpendicular to each other, and the planes in which the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 are the first omission portion 824a, the second omission portion 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. 873.

Displacement of the electric wiring DK2 is suppressed by sandwiching the portion of the wiring arm member 870 that is disposed inside the long main body portion 871 between the constricted portions 871a as described above. Therefore, relative displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 with respect to the wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the displacement required for the electric wire DK2 due to the change in the state of the displacement/rotation unit 800 is completed independently in the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b. Therefore, they will be described separately below.

First, displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a will be described. The upper winding portion DK2a includes a portion that is wound counterclockwise around the columnar protrusion 823 from a portion that passes through the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870 to the right side, and is on the left side of the wiring guide member 844. It means the part up to the point guided by the tip.

The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction around the center of the cylindrical protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 as a limit, and is in the radially widest production standby state (see FIG. 86(b)). , a wall portion 822 is formed at a position (or a position with a slight gap) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load. As a result, the load applied from the wall portion 822 to the electrical wiring DK2 can be reduced in the presentation standby state.

When the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the right side from the production standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right side, thereby pulling the upper winding portion DK2a and moving it radially inward about the columnar protrusion 823. The displacement length of the horizontal slide member 840 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the lateral slide member 840 is displaced leftward, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced leftward, thereby pushing the upper winding portion DK2a and winding it radially outward around the cylindrical projection 823. The portion DK2a is displaced. At this time, a guide piece 844a is protruded from the left end of the wire guide member 844 and inclined downward toward the left, so that the upper winding portion DK2a moves outward (between the vertical slide member 820 and the wire guide member 844). ) can be prevented from protruding upward), and the upper winding portion DK2a can be appropriately pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 822.

Next, displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b will be described. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise around the columnar projecting portion 887 from a portion that hangs down from the wiring arm member 870 (as viewed from the left and right outside). 88 (see FIG. 85).

The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction around the center of the columnar projecting portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a as the limit, and the radially widest effect standby state (see FIG. 86(a)). ), a wall portion 882a is formed at a position (or a position with a slight gap) along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged without load. As a result, the load applied from the wall portion 882a to the electrical wiring DK2 can be reduced in the presentation standby state.

When the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward due to the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward, thereby pulling the lower winding portion DK2b upward. , the displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b inward in the radial direction centering on the columnar projecting portion 887 . Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side arranged on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed downward in the radial direction around the columnar projecting portion 887. The side winding portion DK2b is displaced. At this time, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is opened in the direction of inclination toward the front side as it goes downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is positioned between the cylindrical projecting portion 887 and the wall portion 882a (a cylindrical portion). (above the projecting portion 887) can be prevented, and the lower winding portion DK2b can be appropriately pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 882a.

In this embodiment, the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is arranged is arranged below the position of the lower end of the displacement range of the lateral slide member 840. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the size of the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is displaced in the radial direction from being restricted by the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840, so that the lower winding portion DK2b can be mounted on the rear case 510 (FIG. 5). See) can be displaced by using the full front-to-rear width.

Accordingly, since a large space for accommodating the lower winding portion DK2b can be secured below the wiring arm member 870, the length of the lower winding portion DK2b can be sufficiently increased, and the wiring arm member 870 can be The allowable vertical displacement amount can be lengthened.

90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 includes a center frame 86 arranged on the front side of a window 60a formed in the base plate 60, and a plurality of flow channels whose front sides are opened from resin members. and a spherical flow down unit 150 formed in a channel shape and arranged in the lower part of the back side of the base plate 60 .

The ball flow down unit 150 is formed so as to be able to receive the ball that has flowed down the flow path lower end LB1 of the game ball entering the second prize winning port 640 in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the fixed plate portion 151 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. A first receiving channel 152 and a second receiving channel, which is a long box-shaped member whose front side is open and which is connected to the downstream side of the receiving channel 151 and is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 151 from the back side. It has a channel member 153 and a plurality of ridges 154 projecting inward from the inner side portions of the left and right walls of the second receiving channel member 153 in a direction perpendicular to the flowing direction of the ball.

The plurality of ridges 154 are alternately arranged on the left and right sides of the left and right wall portions with an interval approximately equal to the diameter of a sphere. As a result, it is possible to decelerate the flow of the balls flowing down the second receiving channel member 153 .

Functions of the first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 will be described. The first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 have a function of guiding a game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 to a ball discharge channel (not shown), There is a function to improve the production effect by allowing the player to visually recognize the later game balls. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to as needed in the following description.

The second winning hole 640 is provided with a detection sensor for ball passage detection near the lower edge shown in FIG. As a result, the payout of prize balls and the pending display on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed immediately, and a comfortable game can be provided to the player. Even if the player does not see the ball entering the second prize winning port 640, the player can notice the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the first receiving channel 152. For example, it is possible to make it easy to notice a situation in which the payout is not performed due to a problem on the gaming machine side.

As will be described below, it is clear that the ball has entered the second winning port 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1. , the timing of paying out the prize balls and the timing of the pending display may be delayed.

A game ball that enters the second winning hole 640 is placed inside the guide path DL1 in the left-right direction along which the ball deviating from the second winning hole 640 can be visually recognized in the front view. 27) flows down.

Like the guiding flow path DL1, the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be able to guide the sphere vertically downward while displacing the sphere in a zigzag pattern to the left and right. That is, since the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 and the ball flowing down the guide flow path DL1 appear to flow in the same way, the ball in the right path of the third symbol display device 81 during a right-handed game , it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the ball is flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1.

Here, the information as to which path the ball is flowing down in a right-handed game is information directly linked to the profit of the player, and the number of nails (not shown) implanted in the base plate 60. This is a portion where individual differences of the pachinko machine 10 occur depending on the state.

In this embodiment, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is left near the through gate 67, and the ball before passing through the through gate 67 collides with this position, and the ball before entering the second winning hole 640 Since the nail that the ball collides with is planted, it depends on each pachinko machine 10 whether the ball tends to flow down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 during a right-handed game. different.

A ball that does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability change or the time saving during the right-handed game flows down the guide route DL1, and unless it enters the general winning hole 63 arranged on the downstream side, The ball is discharged from the game area through the out port 71 and does not benefit the player (it becomes a useless ball).

From here, whether or not the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and whether or not the ball flows down the guide path DL1 are uniquely related. Compared to the case of focusing only on the second prize winning opening 640, the degree of freedom of the attention position is higher when focusing on the guidance route DL1 because the guidance route DL1 extends in the vertical direction. Clear.

Therefore, some players check the frequency of balls flowing down the guidance path DL1, and calculate the frequency of balls entering the second winning hole 640, the frequency of waste balls in right-handed games, and the like. It is expected that they will consider whether to continue the game or not.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a ball flowing down the guide path DL1 and a ball entering the second winning hole 640 and flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1. This makes it seem as if the frequency of entering the second winning hole 640 is high, and encourages the continuation of the game.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 has already entered the second winning hole 640 and has been ejected from the game area. If the ball falls down to a position overlapping with , it is difficult to distinguish it from a ball that can actually enter the specific winning hole 65a, which may interfere with the game.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by causing the ball to flow down to the left and right inside through the first receiving channel 152 above the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching a position overlapping the specific winning opening 65a in a front view. (See Figure 2). As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish between a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a and a ball that has already entered the second winning opening 640 and cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a. .

The first receiving flow path 152 passes from the right side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 7) when viewed from the front, passes near the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front, and reaches the display area. Let the ball flow down to the left and right center position side. That is, since the ball guided to the first receiving channel 152 enters the field of view of the player who pays attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81, the player is paying attention to the display of the third symbol display device 81. , the player who does not pay attention to the right-handed path can be made to recognize whether or not the ball has entered the second winning hole 640 .

As a result, the player can recognize whether or not the ball has entered the second winning hole 640 without moving the field of view while paying attention to the third symbol display device 81 . Therefore, when the eye is averted from the third pattern display device 81 for viewing the second prize winning opening 640, the important display is executed, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the situation where the player misses the display, and the game can be played comfortably. can be provided.

The ball flowing down the second receiving flow channel member 153 flows down diagonally leftward and downward on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view. Since this ball is decelerated by the ridges 154, the staying time of the falling ball can be extended. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the number of game balls visually recognized in the game area when viewed from the front.

Further, by securing a long lateral width of the flow-down path of the ball, the line of sight directed to the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and the flow-down path of the second receiving flow path member 153 are likely to intersect. This makes it easier for the ball flowing down the inside of the second receiving channel member 153 to come into the player's field of vision.

92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effecting means 160 and the decorating means 170, and FIGS. 94 and 95 are exploded views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effecting means 160 and the decorating means 170. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 92 to 95 , the light guide plate rendering means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 and the center frame 86 from the back side, and is configured to be able to contact the front side and top side of the light guide plate 161 . An upper supporting member 162 made of an impermeable resin material for positioning the light guide plate 161, and a center frame 86 made of a light transmissive resin material to press the lower side of the light guide plate 161 from the rear side. a lower support member 163 that can be fastened and fixed; a spherical flow path forming member 164 that is fastened and fixed to the lower support member 163 and is made of a light-transmitting resin material to form a spherical flow path; and a plurality of left and right side support members 165 which are configured to be capable of being fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in such a manner as to press the left and right side portions of the light guide plate 161 from the rear side, and a plurality of left and right side support members 165 which are formed in a left and right long shape to support the upper side. A horizontal substrate unit 166 that is fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a state of extending to the front side of the center frame 86 through the upper side of the member 162, and a horizontal substrate unit 166 that is formed in a vertically elongated shape and extends from the front side of the center frame 86 to the center frame 86. and a vertical substrate unit 167 arranged along the left inner wall and fastened and fixed.

The decoration means 170 includes a first decoration member 171 made of a light-transmitting resin material and arranged in the left-right central position near the upper part of the center frame 86, and a left side of the first decoration member 171 made of a light-transmitting resin material. a second decorative member 174 arranged on the front side of the left frame portion of the center frame 86; and a third decorative member 177 arranged.

The first decorative member 171 includes a horizontally long rectangular central decorative member 172 that can be fastened and fixed to its central portion, a margin member 173 that is composed of a separate member as a margin portion such as a title representing the pachinko machine 10, Prepare.

As shown in FIG. E4, the first decorative member 171 has a laterally elongated groove portion 171a recessed on the back side. The horizontally elongated groove portion 171a is formed with a groove width that allows the electrical decoration substrate of the horizontal substrate unit 166 of the light guide plate rendering means 160 to be arranged.

The first decorative member 171 is arranged at a position slightly overlapping with the lower side of the opening 86a formed in the upper portion of the center frame 86 in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is configured to be visible through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

Thus, in this embodiment, the front position of the third pattern display device 81 is closed by the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86, while the front position of the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is open. It is opened by the portion 86a. Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the light emission effect by the effect member 700 in the effect standby state without being shielded by the light guide plate 161 .

The relationship between the oblong groove portion 171a and the horizontal substrate unit 166 will be described with reference to FIG. 96 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 taken along line XCVI--XCVI in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 96, the vicinity of the oblong groove portion 171a is illustrated as an enlarged view separately. 92 to 95 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG.

In this embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged on the front and back sides of the electrical board of the horizontal board unit 166, and light is emitted vertically along arrows D1a and D1b. 1 The light reaching the reflective shape portion 171b formed in a horizontally long wedge shape on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally long groove portion 171a on the back side of the decorative member 171 can be conspicuously recognized.

As a result, even when the arrangement of the light emitting means is concentrated on the horizontal board unit 166, the form of the light emitting effect (light emitting range or light emitting shape) visually recognized by the player depends on the forming range or forming shape of the reflective shape portion 171b. can be visually recognized differently.

In this embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the upper surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166, and light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the lower surface. They are arranged in two horizontal rows, one row corresponding to the top and bottom and another row parallel to the row and formed on the back side. Among the rows in which the LEDs as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the upper row and the lower front row are arranged inside the oblong groove 171a, and the lower rear row is arranged outside the oblong groove 171a.

With this configuration, the LEDs arranged in the row on the upper surface and the front row on the lower surface can irradiate light onto the reflective shape portion 171b, and the LEDs arranged in the rear row on the lower surface can irradiate light to another light-emitting target. Light can be applied.

In this embodiment, the light emitting means 166b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row on the bottom surface is arranged above the light guide plate 161, and the emitted LED light is incident from the edge of the light guide plate 161. FIG. That is, the light emitting means 166b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row on the lower surface of the horizontal substrate unit 166 are used to illuminate the light guide plate 161. FIG.

The upper support member 162 is arranged between the front and rear two rows of the LEDs arranged on the lower surface of the horizontal board unit 166 . Thereby, the light emitted from the LEDs in the front and rear two rows can be separated by the upper support member 162 .

The horizontal substrate unit 166 is arranged right above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in front view. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area when viewed from the front. As a result, it is possible to clearly separate the light that irradiates the display area side and the light that irradiates the game area side without irradiating the display area side.

The central decorative member 172 is arranged in the same front and rear positions as the reflective shape portion 171b, and has flat front and rear surfaces. As a result, even when light is emitted from the horizontal board unit 166, it is possible to avoid intense reflection of the light and maintain visibility.

In this embodiment, a pattern such as a star shape is drawn on the front surface of the central decorative member 172, and the number of star shapes indicates the type of performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the type of spec, so-called another spec). It is configured so that By constructing the central decorative member 172 as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, when manufacturing the pachinko machine 10 with different types of performance, the pachinko machine 10 can be manufactured by replacing only the central decorative member 172.例文帳に追加Can be configured.

The blank member 173 is configured as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, and the front and rear surfaces of the blank member 173 have a shape different from the shape formed on the reflective shape portion 171b (in this embodiment, striped grooves). ) is formed, the appearance of the reflected light is different from that of the reflective shape portion 171b.

97 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member 171 in the range XCVII of FIG. 2. FIG. In the present embodiment, when light is emitted in the vertical direction of the horizontal substrate unit 166 along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light that reaches the reflective shape portion 171b travels toward the front side by reflection and refraction, and shines. While the light that reaches the blank member 173 is not mainly reflected, it is configured so that most of the light is transmitted and proceeds as it is, so it is visually recognized slightly darker.

As a result, the shape of the blank member 173 can be visually recognized as a shadow while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontal board unit 166 travels in the vertical direction. It can be visually recognized as if In other words, it is possible to visually recognize as if LEDs are arranged on the back side and a light emission effect is performed.

The second decorative member 174 includes a shielding member 175 which is a thin plate member (sheet-shaped member) with low permeability and is colored in an arbitrary manner, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back side of the second decorative member 174. . As a result, the rear side of the second decorative member 174 can be configured to be difficult to see.

As a result, the game area formed on the front side of the base plate 60 (especially the left side) and the formation area of the light guide plate 161 in front view (including the area overlapping the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the front and rear). can be clearly separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the balls flowing down the game area from being lowered by the light accompanying the performance of the light guide plate 161 and the light emitted from the third pattern display device 81 .

The third decorative member 177 has a plurality of hexagonal decorative patterns three-dimensionally formed on the front side, and a plurality of hexagonal-shaped portions displaced back and forth on the back side thereof. It has a plurality of three-dimensional decoration members 178 which are formed in a uniform manner.

Similarly to the third decorative member 177, the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged in the space arranged between the portion of the center frame 86 where the light guide plate 161 is arranged and the guide path DL1. be.

As a result, it is possible to perform a stereoscopically visible light effect instead of a two-dimensionally visible light effect between the portion where the light guide plate 161 is arranged and the guide route DL1. That is, when viewed from the front, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect with depth.

For example, when the three-dimensional decoration member 178 is irradiated with light from the back side, depending on which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front view is irradiated with the light, which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front-rear direction is It changes whether it becomes brighter. Therefore, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the front side is illuminated and the back side is illuminated from the player's point of view.

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81, the front side light emitting means 852a of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the like (see FIG. 81) are assumed as means for irradiating the three-dimensional decoration member 178 with light from the back side. , the light emission position can be changed. Therefore, compared with the case where light is emitted toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 from light emitting means such as LEDs that are fixedly arranged, it is possible to easily increase the types of light effects.

Further, for example, when the three-dimensional decoration member 178 is irradiated with light from the left-right direction or the top-bottom direction, the position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front-rear direction depends on the position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front view where the light is irradiated. which position is brighter changes. Therefore, it is possible to perform a light effect in which the front side is illuminated and the back side is illuminated from the player's point of view.

In this embodiment, the first light irradiation device 330 of the firing effect unit 300 is assumed as means for irradiating the three-dimensional decorative member 178 with light from the left and right directions (see FIG. 27). Due to its arrangement, the first light irradiation device 330 functions to block at least part of the light directed toward the three-dimensional decorative member 178 among the light irradiated from the display area of the third pattern display device 81 .

As a result, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the form of light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 depends on the display effect form of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, when the color of the light emitted from the third pattern display device 81 is blue, even if the color of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 is red, the game is played through the three-dimensional decoration member 178. It is possible to easily avoid the color of the light visually recognized by a person becoming purple (a color in which blue light and red light are mixed). That is, the light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decoration member 178 can be easily visually recognized independently of the display of the third pattern display device 81 .

A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the ball flowing down the ball flow unit 150 is configured to be visible from the front, and the entire ball is configured to flow down the same route. However, the ball flow unit of the second embodiment At 2150, the falling sphere is configured to flow down any of a plurality of paths. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. In FIG. 98, an example of how the granular member 320 looks just after firing is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 98, the spherical flow downward unit 2150 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 toward the left, as a difference from the spherical flow downward unit 150 described in the first embodiment. A third receiving channel 2155 formed in a size that allows the ball to flow down is provided.

The third receiving channel 2155 is formed on the upstream side and has a lower inclination angle than the first receiving channel 152, and the lower end (left end) of the inclined portion 2155a is set on the left side of the first winning port 64 when viewed from the front. , and a discharge portion 2155b extending vertically downward in front view from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155a.

The flow speed of the balls flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is lower than the flow speed of the balls in the first receiving channel 152 due to the shallowness of the inclination angle. The ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is configured to be visible to the player, and the inclined portion 2155a is arranged near the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be kept in the player's field of vision for a long period of time.

As a result, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can enter the field of view of the player playing the game while viewing the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 12(a)) through the light guide plate 161. . In other words, it is possible to increase the attention to the ball flowing down the slope 2155a without causing discomfort.

Guidance of the ball to the inclined portion 2155a will be described. In this embodiment, the ball entering the second winning port 640 similarly flows down to the lower end of the first receiving channel 152, and at the lower end of the first receiving channel 152, along the second receiving channel member 153. The switching means switches between flowing down in the first direction D<b>21 and flowing down in the second direction D<b>22 along the third receiving channel 2155 .

In this embodiment, the flow resistance of the ball flowing through the second receiving channel member 153 is increased by the protrusion 154 (see FIG. 90) formed on the second receiving channel member 153 . Therefore, when the next ball reaches the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 while the ball is flowing down the second receiving channel member 153, the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155. .

Such a situation is likely to occur, for example, when a plurality of balls enter the second winning hole 640 in succession in a short period of time. Therefore, by visually recognizing the state of the balls flowing down the third receiving channel 2155, the player can understand that a plurality of balls have entered the second winning hole 640 in a row.

In addition, the aspect of a switching means is not limited at all. For example, the ball flow-down unit 2150 is provided with an opening/closing plate configured to be switchable between a state in which the ball is allowed to flow down in the first direction D21 and a state in which it is restricted using a driving means such as a solenoid. Alternatively, an electromagnet that can generate a magnetic force is disposed at the branch point between the first direction D21 and the second direction D22, and the generated magnetic force is used as a pulling force or a repulsive force to move the ball downward. The route may be switched.

According to these methods, it is possible not only to switch the flow-down route of the ball to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but also to stop the ball or reverse the ball. Unlike the ball that flows down the game area, even if the flow path of the ball that enters the second winning hole 640 is changed, it does not affect the subsequent game results. It is possible to switch the flow path of

As described above, when switching the flow path of a ball in a device using electricity, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can control whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22. can. Therefore, the result of the lottery by the ball entering the second winning hole 640 can be associated with the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22.

For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 in 60% of cases where the lottery by the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 is a jackpot, the third receiving channel It is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the big win, seeing the ball flowing down the 2155. - 特許庁

In this case, the player's line of sight is most likely to be gathered at the lower end position of the first receiving channel 152, which is the guide path to the third receiving channel 2155, and as a result, the discharge ball (game It can improve attention to the balls that have already been ejected from the area).

As described above, the ball flowing down the third receiving flow path 2155 is expected value of the lottery jackpot due to the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 when the frequency of the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 is high. is high.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting the passage of the ball is arranged in the middle of the discharge portion 2155b, and when the passage of the ball is determined, the granular member 320 is controlled to be shot. .

As described above, in order to shoot the granular member 320, it is necessary to change the state of the injection device 400 in advance from the presentation standby state (see FIG. 38) to the shooting standby state (FIG. 40). time consuming. On the other hand, at the timing when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, it is decided whether or not to execute the firing of the granular member 320, and it takes a certain amount of time for the ball to reach the ejection part 2155b. The injection device 400 is controlled to change its state by using this flow time.

As a result, it is possible to control the particulate member 320 to shoot at the same time when the detection sensor SC21 determines that the ball has passed. By controlling in this way, the granular member 320 is fired after a certain time delay expected for the ball to flow down the third receiving channel 2155 after entering the second winning hole 640. It is possible to make it easier to match the falling timing of the ball and the firing timing of the granular member 320, as compared with the case of controlling to .

For example, there is a case where the oil attached to the balls adheres to the first receiving channel 152, causing the falling velocity of the balls to decrease. If controlled in this way, the granular member 320 will be launched before the ball reaches the third receiving channel 2155, and there is a possibility that the presentation effect will be reduced.

On the other hand, at the same time when the passage of the ball is determined by the detection sensor SC21, by controlling the granular member 320 to be shot, the player can see that the ball reaches the third receiving channel 2155. After concentrating the attention on the third receiving flow path 2155, the granular member 320 is fired to execute a powerful effect that spreads over the area of the light guide plate 161, thereby improving the effect of a series of effects. can.

The arrangement of the third receiving channel 2155 through which the ball flows down and the arrangement of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 12(a)) visually recognized through the light guide plate 161 are partially different when viewed from the front. , the above-described series of effects can be visually recognized without requiring the player to change his line of sight.

It should be noted that control may also be combined so as not to shoot the granular member 320 when the ball passes through the detection sensor SC21. For example, if a big win occurs when the granular member 320 is not fired, control may be performed to increase the possibility of the variable probability big win described above.

In this case, since it is possible to increase the number of types of effects after the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155, at the stage when the ball is guided to the third receiving channel 2155 It is possible to avoid that the attention of the

In addition, when the granular member 320 is not fired, it is possible to increase attention to the subsequent display effects on the third pattern display device 81 .

A detection sensor having a function similar to that of the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged at another location. For example, it may be placed at a location through which a ball entering the specific winning hole 65a can pass. In this case, an effect of shooting the granular member 320 can be executed at the timing when the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged in a specific area where the profit given to the player becomes more advantageous as the game ball passes through.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. In the first embodiment, the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is configured to be displaced in the radial direction so as to be symmetrical and discrete, but the effect member 3700 of the third embodiment , is configured to be able to form a section that is not left-right symmetrical in the expansion/reduction displacement in the radial direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 99 is a front view of the scaling unit 3600 in the third embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment of the scaling unit 3600 is only in the rendering member 3700, and the main body member 601, the front cover member 610, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the transmission gear 650 have the same configuration. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 99 illustrates a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 3700 is arranged in the middle position (intermediate position) of the radial enlargement/reduction displacement. As shown in FIG. 99, this embodiment employs five shielding design members 760, which is the same as in the first embodiment. While the sheets are displaced radially to a similar length, the top one and the top right sheet are still in a collective arrangement (not radially displaced). A configuration for realizing this displacement will be described.

100 is a front view of rotating plate 3730. FIG. Rotating plate 3730 has the same configuration as rotating plate 730 described in the first embodiment, except that some guide holes 733 are changed to separate guide holes 3733 .

As shown in FIG. 100, the rotary plate 730 includes separate guide holes 3733 instead of the upper and upper right guide holes 733 in front view. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the above-described small-diameter arc portion 733a, large-diameter arc portion 733b, and an adjustment connecting portion 3733c that connects the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b.

The adjustment connection portion 3733c extends along the same arc shape from the connection portion with the large-diameter arc portion 733b to near the intermediate position, and on the opposite side of the large-diameter arc portion 733b (the guide hole 733 or (at a position close to the separate guide hole 3733) is formed so as to abruptly approach the small-diameter arc portion 733a side.

That is, in the displacement mode in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced from the collective arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the telescopic displacement member 740 guided by the connecting portion 733c expands and displaces in the radial direction from an early stage, while the adjusting connecting portion 3733c is displaced. The expanding and contracting displacement member 740 guided in the radial direction does not expand while being guided in the same arc shape as the large-diameter arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be shifted. The effect caused by the misalignment of the shielding design member 760 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 99, by asymmetrically disposing the shielding design member 760, the center of gravity of the effect member 3700 can be shifted from the center in the horizontal direction or the center in the vertical direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design member 760 arranged at the upper right position is still in the collective arrangement state, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 is shifted to the lower left position by that amount.

As a result, a load in the direction of correcting the deviation of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is applied to the effect member 3700 by its own weight. Due to this load, it is possible to cause the attitude of the effect member 3700 to change in the rotational direction about the longitudinal axis. can be displaced in a combination of directions.

As a result, a direction (that is, a , rotational direction).

In this embodiment, the connecting portion 733c and the adjusting connecting portion 3733c are different, and the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733 have the same shape. The arrangement of the portion 733b is the same between the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733. FIG.

Therefore, after the position of the center of gravity G31 is displaced in the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 is placed in a collective arrangement state or arranged at the end position of radial expansion displacement. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the horizontal center position and the vertical center position of the effect member 3700 again. As a result, the position of the center of gravity G31 is maintained in a displaced position, and the occurrence of problems can be prevented.

An example of effect using the return of the center of gravity G31 will be described. In the first embodiment, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 700 are not performed at the same time, but are performed separately. .

In the present embodiment, a contrivance is adopted to avoid collisions with other structures, and the vertical displacement and radial displacement of the effect member 3700 are controlled so as to be executable at the same time. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 can be expanded in the radial direction while the effect member 3700 is downwardly displaced.

In this case, in addition to the downward displacement of the effect member 3700 and the expansion displacement of the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction, the return of the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 occurs. It is possible to cause a posture change in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation assumed from the state (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

In this way, since rotational displacement in the forward and reverse directions can be added to the radial expansion displacement of the effect member 3700, a simple configuration specialized for expanding and contracting the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction is provided. while adopting, as a result, it is possible to make a complicated motion with a displacement in the rotational direction. As a result, the effect of the effect produced by the effect member 3700 can be improved.

A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the drive motor M1 is driven in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state, and the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced. The shape of the grooved portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 101 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the projection of the contact member 430 associated with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time in the placement of the installation portion 432 and the placement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470;

Note that FIG. 101 does not describe the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of the respective components, but shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs. Also, the change in the arrangement of the direct-acting member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 . Therefore, since the downward displacement of the direct-acting member 410 and the collision member 420 is started in a state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retreating side, the player can see without the lid member 480 blocking his line of sight. It is possible to visually recognize the displacement of the granular member accompanying the downward displacement of the collision member 420 (see FIGS. 12(a) and 38).

In this situation, by reciprocating the direct-acting member 410 between an angle of 66 degrees and an angle of 125 degrees shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, since the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, when the driving of the drive motor M1 is canceled, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are displaced upward by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

Therefore, by intermittently energizing the drive motor MT1, the linear motion member 410 can be reciprocated. This eliminates the need to switch the driving direction of the drive motor MT1, thereby facilitating control.

In addition, in such a manner that the granular member 320 is vibrated (micro-displaced) and visually recognized by the player, the load (fatigue) received by the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced compared to the case where the lid member 480 is displaced together. can be done.

Note that the manner in which the collision member 420 is displaced in order to vibrate (micro-displace) the granular member 320 is not limited to this. For example, vibration may be transmitted from another vibration device to the collision member 420 to cause the collision member 420 to vibrate. In this case, the other vibrating device is preferably arranged below the collision member 420 in the direction of displacement. As a result, it is possible to prevent other vibration devices from receiving a load when the collision member 420 is displaced by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the drive motor M1 is driven in the forward rotation direction from the waiting state for the effect, so that the direct-acting member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are displaced at the same time. The shape of the grooved portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and after the displacement of the direct-acting member 410 is completed, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 starts. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the projection of the contact member 430 associated with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time in the placement of the installation portion 432 and the placement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470;

Note that FIG. 102 does not describe the relative relationship between the variation widths of the layout changes of the respective components, but shows the relative relationship of the timing at which the layout changes occur. Also, the change in the arrangement of the direct-acting member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after firing the granular member 320, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed before the granular member 320 reaches the impact member 420 (see near the angle of 290 degrees).

Therefore, at least part of the granular member 320 can be put on the upper side of the lid member 480 and retained. Although it is conceivable that the particulate member 320 collides with the lid member 480 and hinders the rotation of the lid member 480, in the present embodiment, the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed toward the rotating shaft. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation of the lid member 480 from being hindered.

If the drive motor MT1 continues to rotate in the normal direction while the granular member 320 remains on the lid member 480, the transmission arm member 470 is displaced toward the retracted side (the smaller diameter side in FIG. 102), causing the granular member 320 to collide. It falls on member 420 .

On the other hand, at this timing, the contact between the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 is released, so that the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 can be prevented from being transmitted to the linear motion member 410. .

Further, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven in the reverse rotation direction from the firing standby state, if it is set to a high speed, the rising speed of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be increased, and the granular member 320 can be fired.

In this case, since the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entrance side at the time of firing, the firing of the granular member 320 is inhibited at the left-right central portion where the projecting portion 482 is arranged, and the firing in the left-right direction is prevented. It can be made visible to become the owner.

That is, the direction in which the granular member 320 is ejected can be changed between the forward rotation of the drive motor MT1 and the reverse rotation of the ejection mode. As a result, variations can be provided in the shooting direction of the granular member 320, and the performance effect can be improved.

A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 have flat substrates and irradiate light in the front-back direction and the left-right direction has been described. It has an electrical board on which the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are bent. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the launching unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment along the line corresponding to line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the shooting unit 6300 are illustrated, and the illustration of the operation unit 500 is omitted. Also, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are schematically illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 103, the first light irradiating device 6330 has a front end close to the front end of the electrical board 332 and a back end of the electrical board 332 . It has a second electrical decoration board 6334 that is tilted away from 332 .

The second electrical board 6334 has a light emitting means such as an LED arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the front side surface. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light to the partitioning member 310, and can improve the presentation effect of lighting the granular members 320 scattering in the internal space IE1 of the partitioning member 310. FIG.

In addition to the electrical board 342, the second light irradiation device 6340 is inclined in such a manner that the back side end is close to the back side end of the electrical board 342 and the front side end is away from the electrical board 342. A second electrical board 6344 is provided.

The second decorative board 6344 has a light emitting means such as an LED arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from at least the rear side surface. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light to the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600, the displacement/rotation unit 800, and the like arranged on the back side of the emission unit 6300, thereby improving the effect of the light emission effect.

It should be noted that the arrangement of the electrical board is not limited to this. For example, only the second electrical boards 6334 and 6344 may be employed and the electrical boards 332 and 342 may be omitted, or other combinations may be employed. Further, the light emitting means may be arranged on the side where the light emitting means is not arranged in the second electrical board 6334, 6344, or the light may be irradiated from both sides.

In addition, for the purpose of obliquely irradiating light, a device in which the attitude of the light emitting means can be changed may be constructed without adopting the method of increasing the number of decorative boards. Also, light emitting means may be arranged at intersections of the electrical boards 332, 342 and the second electrical boards 6334, 6344 so as to emit light.

A board box A100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 120. FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, a schematic configuration of the board box A100 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

104 is a rear view of the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the board box A100. 107(a) is a front view of the board box A100, and FIG. 107(b) is a side view of the board box A100.

Note that arrows F, B, arrows L, R, and arrows U, D in FIGS. 105 to 107 respectively indicate the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction of the board box A100. It should be noted that the same applies to each of the following figures, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Also, the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment except for the board box A100. Therefore, other descriptions are omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, the board box A100 includes a box cover A200, a box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and the box cover A200 and the box base A300 unopenably connected (caulked structure). and a sub-cover A500 disposed at the end opposite to the sealing unit A400 of the box cover A200 and the box base A300 connected by the sealing unit A400, and a main control device A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

A rotating shaft A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400. The rotation axis A410 is a shaft for rotatably supporting the board box A100 on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and extends in the lateral direction (arrows U, D direction) and orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the board box A100 (box cover A200).

Further, the rotation axis A410 is positioned on one side in the longitudinal direction of the board box A100 (box cover A200) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the arrow B) (on the side opposite to the first connection wall A220 across the coating A270, which will be described later). R direction side). Note that the rotation axis A410 may be arranged on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow L direction side) opposite to the one longitudinal direction side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

A switch device A120 and a key device A130 are arranged (mounted) in the main controller A110. The main controller A110 is configured by further disposing (mounting) a switch device A120 and a key device A130 to the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main controller A110 and the main controller 110 in the first embodiment have the same configuration except for the presence or absence of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, other descriptions are omitted.

The switch device A120 is a momentary push button that is operated (turned on) by pushing the operation part A122 from the initial position and turned off by releasing the push (the operation part A122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and used for input to main controller A110. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 correspond to some of the various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main controller A110 (main controller 110).

The switch device A120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (change in pushing force) when the operating portion A122 is pushed to the operating position (on position). The operator can detect completion of input to device A110. Therefore, it is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where the operation unit A122 cannot be visually recognized.

The key device A130 is configured such that the key A140 can be inserted and removed at the initial position (hereinafter referred to as the "off position"), and the inserted key A140 is rotated (right in this embodiment) to a predetermined position (hereinafter referred to as the "on position"). A key-operated selector switch (which is referred to as a "position") is operated (turned on) and is turned off by turning the key A140 (counterclockwise in this embodiment) to the off position (mode switch).

In addition, in this embodiment, the phase difference between the OFF position and the ON position is set to approximately 90 degrees. Further, the key device A130 allows the key A140 to be inserted and removed in the off position, while the key device A130 disables the removal of the key A140 in the on position.

Also, the function of the switch device A120 can be switched according to the ON/OFF state of the key device A130. For example, in this embodiment, when the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) for initializing the main control device A110 (executing RAM erasure). When the A130 is turned on, the switch device A120 functions as a setting change switch for changing the value of the winning probability in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "setting change"), as will be described later. .

Here, as described above, since the substrate box A100 (the box cover A200 and the box base A300) is unopenably connected, in order to operate the main control device A110 (for example, the switch device A120 and the key device A130), , it is necessary to open the board box A100, which is troublesome.

On the other hand, according to the substrate box A100 of this embodiment, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through these openings A250 and A260. That is, it is unnecessary to open the board box A100, and the labor can be reduced. Details will be described later.

Legs A121 and A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are provided on the rear side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the push direction side of the operation part A122, the insertion direction side of the key A140, and the arrow B direction side). The protruding legs A121 and A131 are inserted from the front side into holes opening in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the portions protruding to the rear side are soldered to form the switch device A120 and the key device. A130 is arranged on the front side of main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

In this case, an external force applied to the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (for example, a force that displaces the operation unit A122 or the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (insertion direction), a plane containing the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R When a force in a parallel direction is applied and tilted with respect to the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119), the legs of one side (the side lifted from the printed circuit board A119 by tilting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 While a tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, a compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed against the printed circuit board A119 due to tilting). As a result, the legs A121 and A131 may break or bend, the legs A121 and A131 may come out of the holes, and the solder may peel off, resulting in disconnection or poor contact. On the other hand, the board box A100 adopts means for solving such problems. Details will be described later.

The main controller 100 is provided with a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays (not shown), and such 7-segment displays are mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Since the box cover A200 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, the operator can visually recognize the display of the 7-segment display through the box cover A200.

Here, a method of changing settings using the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be described.

First, in a state where the pachinko machine A10 is powered off, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed in the ON position, and then the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed to the operating position, and the pachinko machine A10 is operated. power on. As a result, the setting change mode is activated, and the setting is changed each time the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed.

In the present embodiment, six values from the first to the sixth are specified as set values, and these values are circulated (for example, by pressing the operation unit A122, the set value is changed from the first value to the first value). When the operation unit A122 is pressed from the state where the sixth value is set, the set value advances to the first value).

The set value is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and when the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pressed (when the set value is changed), the third pattern display device is displayed. The setting value displayed at 81 is also changed. In this embodiment, the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display.

In addition, the information regarding the setting change displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the setting value, and may include other information. Other information includes, for example, the current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), previous set values, and the like. In this way, by using the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to secure (larger) the amount of information that can be displayed as compared with, for example, the case of using a 7-segment display. As a result, it becomes easier to grasp the operation state, and it is possible to improve the operability and suppress operation errors. Further, by also using a device (third symbol display device 81) for displaying information about games, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Moreover, the display of the setting value may be displayed only on one of the third pattern display device 81 and the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, neither the third pattern display device 81 nor the 7-segment display may be displayed.

After changing the desired set value, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed at the OFF position. As a result, the setting change mode is terminated (set values are fixed). In this case, the off-edge of the key device A 130 is detected, the detection triggers the execution of the power recovery process, and the normal mode is started with the set (changed) set value.

After changing the desired set value, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off without placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position (that is, while it is placed in the ON position). When the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on while the key A140 of the key device A130 is placed at the OFF position, the normal mode is started with the set (changed) set values.

Also, in the setting change mode, RAM erasure is executed. Such RAM erasure is confirmed by placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position. Examples of the timing for executing the RAM erasing include the timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed since that timing, and the timing when the key A140 is placed at the OFF position. That is, the timing for executing RAM erasure can be set as appropriate.

Also, during the setting change mode (that is, in a state in which the setting value can be changed by pressing the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is not placed at the OFF position ( In other words, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off while the key device A10 remains in the ON position, the key A140 is removed from the key device A130, or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 When the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on while the pachinko machine A10 is arranged in the off position, the normal mode is not started, an error state occurs, and an error display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Simultaneously with the third pattern display device 81 or instead of this, an error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

Next, to confirm the setting values set in the setting change mode, first turn off the power of the pachinko machine A10, place the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the ON position, and then turn on the power of the pachinko machine A10. to turn on. Thereby, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting value is activated, and the setting value set at that time is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

In addition, the display of the setting value in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed only on one of the third pattern display device 81 or the 7-segment display, and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, neither the third pattern display device 81 nor the 7-segment display may be displayed.

In this setting confirmation mode, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is placed at the OFF position. This terminates the setting confirmation mode. Also, the off-edge of the key device A 130 is detected, and the power recovery process is executed with the detection as a trigger, and the normal mode is started with the set value set at that time.

In the setting confirmation mode, turning off the power of the pachinko machine A10, placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the OFF position, and then turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 also Normal mode is activated with the set values.

In this embodiment, when the change of the setting value in the setting change mode is completed (confirmed), the 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined manner. As a predetermined mode, for example, a mode in which a predetermined display (for example, "7") blinks at regular time intervals is exemplified.

In addition, four 7-segment displays are arranged side by side to enable display of four digits, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (two) (for example, "01" in setting change mode). However, in the setting confirmation mode, "02" is displayed respectively), and the setting value is displayed by the latter two digits (two pieces) (for example, the first value is "01", the second value is " 02”, . . . , and the sixth value is displayed as “06”).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114, each part (box cover A200, box base A300, and main controller A110) constituting the board box A100 will be described in order. First, the box cover A200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG.

108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A200, and FIG. 110(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 110(b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 includes a front wall portion A201 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and four sides of the front wall portion A201 extending toward the rear side (in the direction of arrow B). The wall portions (upper wall portion A202, lower wall portion A203, left wall portion A204 and right wall portion A205 connecting the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203) which are erected and formed in a plate shape are mainly used. In preparation for this, these wall portions A201 to A205 form a box shape with an open back side. The box cover A200 is made of a light-transmissive resin material and molded using a resin molding die.

A two-stage step is formed on the upright end surfaces (surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, the left wall portion A204, and the right wall portion A205. The step has a first surface (first step) formed on the inner space side of the board box A100 (box cover A200), and a second surface on the outer side of the first surface (opposite side to the inner space). A face (first step) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the standing height from the front wall portion A201 is small), and is a surface on which the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is placed (hereinafter "seat surface A206"). ) is formed as

The seat surface A206 is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape in front view in which surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are continuous, and is formed as a surface parallel to the front wall portion A201. Four corner portions of the seat surface A206 (portions where the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are connected) are recessed with fastening holes A206a having internal threads threaded on the inner circumference. be done.

Therefore, main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) has the outer edge side of its front surface in contact with seat surface A206, and screw ASC (Fig. 117(b) and FIG. 118(b)) is screwed into the fastening hole A206a, so that it is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206) in a posture parallel to the front wall A201, and attached to the board box A100. be housed.

A plurality of engaging pieces A207 are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203. The engaging piece A207 has a base portion erected from the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B), and extends in one direction (in the direction of arrow R) from the erected tip of the base portion. It is formed in a substantially L-shaped bent shape from the extended portion, and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300, as will be described later.

A part of the front wall portion A201 is recessed toward the rear side (in the direction of arrow B). The recessed portion includes a plate-shaped operation wall portion A210 located backward (toward the main controller 110 side) from the front wall portion A201, and each side of the operation wall portion A210 is formed by the front wall portion. The front wall portion A201 is formed by the plate-like wall portions (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connected to A201.

That is, the outer surface on the front side of the board box A100 (surface in the direction of the arrow F) is positioned closer to the main controller A110 than the first area formed by the front wall portion A201 and the first area. and a second region formed by the wall portion A210.

The operation wall portion A210 is a portion that forms the operation surface of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and has a substantially oblong rectangular shape in front view (the length in the directions of arrows L and R is longer than the length in the directions of arrows U and D). It is formed in a rectangular shape with an elongated dimension) and arranged in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall portion A201.

Note that the operation wall portion A210 is arranged on one side (rotational axis A410 side of the sealing unit A400) of the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A200 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B).

The first connection wall portion A220 is a wall portion that connects one side of the operation wall portion A210 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) to the front wall portion A201. It is formed to incline (downward) in a direction approaching the main controller A110 as it goes. Therefore, on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall portion A220, a space can be formed that continues to the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. As a space including the space on the front side of the operation wall A210, the space as a whole (space that can be used when operating the key device A130) can be expanded.

In addition, in this embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210 is set to approximately 45 degrees. As a result, it is possible to achieve both expansion of the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 and securing of space inside the board box A100.

The second connection wall portion A230 extends along one side of the operation wall portion A210 in the short direction (arrow U direction side), and the third connection wall portion A240 extends along the other longitudinal direction side of the operation wall portion A210 (arrow R direction side). direction side) are connected to the front wall A201, and are arranged in a posture substantially perpendicular to the front wall A201 and the operation wall A210.

The operation wall portion A210 has an opening A250 for projecting the operation portion A122 to the outside of the board box A100, an opening A260 for allowing the key A140 to be inserted into and removed from the key device A130, and the main controller A110 ( Openings AOP1 to AOP8 are formed to enable connection to connectors (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119).

The opening A250 has a front view shape corresponding to the outer shape of the operation portion A122 (in this embodiment, a substantially square shape when viewed from the front), and is substantially square in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210. placed in the center. Around the opening A250, a guide wall A251 is erected from the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

The guide wall A251 guides the displacement of the operation part A122 in the pushing direction (direction of arrow B) and also displaces it in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (direction parallel to the plane containing arrows U, D and arrows L, R). It is a portion for restricting (tilting), and is formed in a substantially square frame shape surrounding the opening A250 when viewed from the front, and the inner peripheral surface thereof is formed to smoothly connect to the inner peripheral surface of the opening A250.

In this embodiment, the height of the guide wall A251 standing from the operation wall A210 is higher than the tip of the operation part A122 pushed to the operation position (turned on position) from the operation wall A210. The dimension is set so that the tip is at a low position (the tip of the operation portion A122 protrudes outward (in the direction of the arrow F) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide wall A251 from interfering with the push-in operation of the operation portion A122, thereby improving the operability of the operation portion A122.

However, the standing height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is higher than the tip of the operation part A122 pushed to the operation position (turned on position). The dimension may be set to a position (the tip of the operation portion A122 is retracted inward (arrow B direction side) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating portion A122 from being unintentionally pushed (turned on) to the operating position due to careless operation by the operator or contact (interference) with another member.

In addition, the tip of the operation part A122 pushed in to the operating position (turned-on position) of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is substantially the erection tip from the operation wall A210. The dimensions may be set at the same height position. When the operating portion A122 is pushed in, the fingers are brought into contact with the standing tip of the guide wall A251, so that the operator can recognize that the operating portion A122 has been pushed up to the operating position based on such abutment. . This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where the operation unit A122 cannot be visually recognized.

A covering portion A270 protrudes from the operation wall portion A210 from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface in the direction of the arrow F). The covering portion A270 is a portion that covers a portion of the front end side (arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 (see FIG. 112(a)), and is a peripheral wall that is erected from the operation wall portion A210 and formed in a cylindrical shape. A portion A271 and a plate-like end wall portion A272 that closes (forms an end face) the protruding tip of the peripheral wall portion A271, and a part of the tip side of the key device A130 is accommodated in the inner space thereof. be.

The peripheral wall portion A271 includes a base portion A271a formed in a cylindrical shape having a substantially circular cross section, and a pair of projections projecting radially outward from two opposing locations (positions with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees) on the base portion A271a. A part A271b. The peripheral wall portion A271 (base portion A271a and projection portion A271b) is formed to have substantially the same cross-sectional shape as a whole along the axial direction (directions of arrows F and B). Therefore, the operation wall portion A210 has a shape that is substantially the same as the cross-sectional shape of the peripheral wall portion A271 (the base portion A271a and the protrusion A271b) (that is, the shape in which two opposing portions of the circular shape protrude outward in the radial direction). is formed (see FIG. 110(b)).

The opening A260 is formed in the projecting tip surface of the covering portion A270, that is, in the end surface wall portion A272. As a result, the end wall portion A272 is formed in a plate shape extending radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the projecting tip of the peripheral wall portion A271. That is, the end wall portion A272 is formed as a plate (cantilever beam) having a base end fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (opening A260 side) being free.

Here, the opening A260 is provided only in a region corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the OFF position and the ON position (the region necessary to allow the displacement). It is formed. Specifically, the opening A260 includes a first fan-shaped opening with a center angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, and an opening on the other side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of the portion (one side and the opposite side) is formed in a shape that is combined with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

As a result, the end wall portion A272 has an annular portion A272a extending radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the projecting tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 and formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). A square portion A272b extending radially inward from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a and having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B) is formed. The rectangular portion A272b is arranged in a posture tapered radially inward when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), and is formed at two locations with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

Note that the key A140 has different dimensions for the turning radius of the portion on one side of the center of rotation and the radius of rotation of the portion on the other side of the center of rotation. Therefore, the opening A260 has a different size (radius) between the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening.

A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 protrude from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface facing the arrow F direction) of the operation wall A210. These first ridges A211 and second ridges A212 are ridges extending in a stripe shape while maintaining a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270. .

Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the OFF position. One end of the ridge A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the ON position. That is, one end of the first ridge A211 and one end of the second ridge A212 are connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at positions with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display portion is provided at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (on the extension line of the other end). are respectively formed. The display section is a part that shows information on the operation position (rotational position) of the key A140, and "OFF" and "ON" are displayed. That is, the key A140 with its edge toward one end of the first protrusion A211 is placed at the OFF position (see FIG. 115(a)), and the key with its edge toward one end of the second protrusion A212. A140 is placed in the ON position (see FIG. 115(b)).

The opening AOP1 is formed in the operation wall A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed (in parallel) in series (one line) along the edge of the front wall A201.

Standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the rear surface (inner surface, surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The erected wall A280 includes a first erected wall A281, a second erected wall A282, a third erected wall A283, and a fourth erected wall A284. A250 is surrounded (see FIG. 110(b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the switch device A120 is surrounded by the standing wall A280.

The first standing wall A281 is arranged between the opening A250 and the second connection wall A230, and formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the second connection wall A230 and the bottom wall A203. The second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are opposed to each other with the opening A250 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erected wall A281. The fourth erected wall A284 is arranged between the opening A250 and the lower wall portion A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first erected wall A281.

The second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are connected to the first erected wall A281 on one side and to the lower wall portion A203 on the other side. That is, the first erected wall A281 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283. The fourth standing wall A284 is connected to the second standing wall A282 on one side and to the third standing wall A283 on the other side.

The erected wall A290 includes a first erected wall A291, a second erected wall A292, and a third erected wall A293, and the opening A260 is surrounded by these erected walls A291, A292, and A293 (FIG. 110). (b)). Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the key device A130 is surrounded by the standing wall A290.

The first erected wall A291 is arranged between the opening A260 and the second connection wall A230, and formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the second connection wall A230 and the bottom wall A203. The second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293 are opposed to each other with the opening A260 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first erected wall A291.

The second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293 are connected to the first erected wall A291 on one side and to the lower wall portion A203 on the other side. That is, the first erected wall A291 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293. The fourth standing wall A284 is connected to the second standing wall A292 on one side and the third standing wall A293 on the other side.

The standing wall A290 is formed in a size surrounding the covering portion A270 (a position outside the covering portion A270) when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). Specifically, when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the outer surface (arc) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is aligned with the inner surface (straight line) of the second erected wall A292 and the third erected wall A293. The outer surface (circular arc) of the protrusion A271b in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is inscribed in the inner surfaces (straight lines) of the first standing wall A291 and the lower wall portion A203, respectively.

The first erected walls A281 and A291, the second erected walls A282 and A292, and the third erected walls A283 and A293 of the erected walls A280 and A290 are the rear surface (inner surface, arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The standing height from the surface) is the same, and the standing tip surfaces (surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the respective standing walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are the bearing surface A206. placed at the same height as

Therefore, the erected walls A280 and A290 are such that the erected tip surfaces of the second erected walls A282, A292 and the third erected walls A283, A293 are connected to the seat surface A206, and the seat surface A206 and the respective erected walls A281, A293 , A282, A292, A283, and A293 are located on the same plane (form the same plane). As a result, when the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat A206), the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292 and the third standing walls A282 and A292 are fixed. The upright tip surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the walls A283 and A293 are brought into contact with the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

Here, in the erected wall A280, the length dimensions of the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 (the dimensions in the directions of arrows U and D) are the length dimensions of the first erected wall A281 (the dimensions of the arrows L and R-direction dimension). Therefore, as will be described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A120 abuts against the inner surface of the erected wall A280 (the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283), the second erected wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 may be deformed and the tilting of the switch device A120 may not be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the opposing portions of the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283 are connected by the fourth erected wall A284, the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall Deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, tilting of the switch device A120 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the fourth standing wall A284 is arranged at a position close to the lower wall portion A203, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth standing wall A284 increases. This corresponds to the formation of a part with a large thickness dimension, and due to the difference in shrinkage rate from other parts, molding defects occur in the part with a large thickness dimension and its vicinity. give rise to

On the other hand, the erected height of the fourth erected wall A284 is smaller (lower) than the erected heights of the first erected wall A281, the second erected wall A282, and the third erected wall A283. As a result, while securing the function of suppressing the deformation of the second erected wall A282 and the third erected wall A283, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth erected wall A284 is reduced, and molding defects due to the difference in shrinkage rate are eliminated. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the fourth standing wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall portion A203, the switch device A120 is prevented from tilting in the direction of the arrow D, as will be described later. By bringing the outer surface of the device A120 into contact with the inner surface of the fourth standing wall A284, the tilting thereof can be suppressed within an appropriate range (that is, tilting at a smaller angle than in the case of contacting the lower wall portion A203). .

On the inner surfaces of the first erected walls A281, A291, the second erected walls A282, A292, and the third erected walls A283, A293 of the erected walls A280, A290, the erected distal end side (arrow B direction), tapered surfaces A280a and A290a, which are inclined surfaces that approach the outer surface side, are formed. As a result, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) of each of the erected walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 at the erected distal end side is gradually reduced toward the erected distal end side, and each of the erected walls A281 is reduced accordingly. , A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 are reduced in area.

Note that the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. The tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the outer surfaces of the first erected walls A281 and A291, the second erected walls A282 and A292, and the third erected walls A283 and A293 of the erected walls A280 and A290. You can set it.

An erecting wall A208 is erected on the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the front wall portion A201. In addition to the erected walls A280 and A290 described above, an erected wall A209 is erected on the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface facing the arrow B direction) of the operation wall portion A210.

The standing wall A208 is formed in a box-like shape with four sides of plate-shaped bodies connected to each other and the side opposite to the front wall portion A201 is open. 4). The standing wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1, and is formed in a box-like shape with an open side opposite to the operation wall A210. is formed at a position corresponding to Therefore, when the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the arithmetic unit (MPU201) is surrounded by the standing wall A208, and the connector is surrounded by the standing wall A209.

Here, the plurality of erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 surrounding the plurality of objects are arranged such that the height positions of the erected tip surfaces of one or more of the erected walls correspond to the height positions of the remaining erected walls. It is set at a height position different from the height position of the tip surface. In this embodiment, the height position of the upright end face of the upright wall A209 is retreated from the height position of the upright end face of the upright walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, separated from the printed circuit board A119). side). As a result, even if there are dimensional tolerances of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290, mounting tolerances of the printed circuit board A119 to the box cover A200, or dimensional tolerances of the printed circuit board A119 (for example, variations in flatness), , the standing walls A208, A280, and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the printed circuit board A119 compared to the standing wall A209. That is, it is possible to ensure that the erected wall surrounding the object of high importance is in close contact with the printed circuit board A119.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the box base A300 will be described. FIG. 111(a) is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and FIG. 111(b) is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 includes a rear wall portion A301 formed in a plate shape of a substantially horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and four sides of the rear wall portion A301 extending toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). Mainly provided and plate-shaped wall portions (upper wall portion A302, lower wall portion A303, left wall portion A304 and right wall portion A305 connecting the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303), These walls A301 to A305 form a box shape with an open front side. The box base A300 is made of a resin material and molded using a resin molding die.

A plurality of engaged portions A307 are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303. The engaged portion A307 is a portion with which the engaging piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed to protrude downward (arrow D direction side).

To connect the box base A300 and the box cover A200, first, the phase is shifted by the extension length of the extension portion on the side opposite to the extension direction of the extension portion of the engagement piece A207 (arrow L direction side). They face each other at a shifted position, and push the box cover A200 toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the space between the adjacent engaged portions A307. arrow R direction). As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the rear side (the arrow B direction side) of the engaged portion A307, and the two are engaged (displacement of the box cover A200 in the arrow F direction is restricted).

Next, main controller A110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114. FIG. FIG. 112(a) is a front perspective view of main controller A110, FIG. 112(b) is a back perspective view of main controller A110, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the control device A110;

114(a) is a front view of main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 114(b) is a front view of main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114(a). 114(c) is a side view of main controller A110 as seen in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114(a).

112 to 114, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, only the major electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A119 are illustrated, and other illustrations are omitted. .

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the main controller A110 includes a printed circuit board A119, and a switch device A120 and a key device A130 mounted on the printed circuit board A119. The printed circuit board A119 has various electronic components (IC, resistors, capacitors and transistors) mounted on a board made of an insulating resin material, and the circuits (patterns) connecting these electronic components are conductors such as copper foil. , and insertion holes A112 are formed in four corner portions.

The printed circuit board A119 is installed in the circuit board box A100 with the front surface (the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, the surface in the direction of the arrow F) facing the rear surface of the box cover A200 (front wall portion A201). stored in.

In this case, of the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, at least the areas AS1 and AS2 on which the standing walls A280 and A290 of the box cover A200 and the seat surface A206 of the lower wall A203 abut (Fig. 114 (see (a)), no electronic components are mounted or no circuits are formed, and the areas AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. It should be noted that FIG. 114(a) shows only the portion of the area where the seat surface A206 abuts, which is continuous with the erected walls A280 and A290.

The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 that holds the operation part A122 displaceably (pushing operation), and a coil spring ( an urging means (not shown), a contact (not shown) disposed inside the main body A123 and whose contact is switched in accordance with the displacement of the operating portion A122, and a leg A121 electrically connected to the contact. Prepare.

The main body A123 is formed in a substantially cubic shape and includes a base A123a mounted on the front of the printed circuit board A119, and a cylindrical protrusion A123b protruding from the front of the base A123a (surface on the arrow F direction side), The outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is made larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (the inner edge of the guide wall A251). When the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the front surface of the protrusion A123b faces the rear surface of the operation wall portion A210 (surface in the arrow B direction).

In the present embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the bottom surface of the base A123a (the portion that is part of the bottom surface of the base A123a and from which the leg A121 protrudes) abuts the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base A123a (a portion of the bottom surface of the base A123a and from which the leg A121 protrudes) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the base A123a may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A121.

Further, in this embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the protrusion A123b and the rear surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. However, the front surface of the projecting portion A123b and the back surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side) may be in contact with each other.

The legs A121 protrude from the rear surface of the base portion A123a of the main body A123 (the surface facing the arrow B direction, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119), and as described above, are inserted from the front side into the holes opening in the printed circuit board A119. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the switch device A120 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The key device A130 has a cylinder portion A132 formed as a lock that allows the rotation of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b when a suitable key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and the cylinder portion A132 is arranged inside. A main body A133 that holds the main body A133, a support A134 that supports the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the main body A133, and a contact whose contact is switched according to the state of the cylinder part A132 (rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b) (not shown) and a leg A131 electrically connected to the contact.

The main body A133 has a base portion A133a which is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and holds the cylinder portion A132 on the inner peripheral side (inside) thereof, and two positions on the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base portion A133a (positions with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees). ), and an end portion A133c forming an end face on the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the base portion A133a.

In this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the bottom surface of the main body A133 (the portion that is part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and from which the legs A131 protrude) abuts the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a portion of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and from which the leg A131 protrudes) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the main body A133 may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131.

The end surface of the protrusion A133b on the arrow F direction side is formed at a position one step lower (arrow B direction side) from the end surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) formed by the end portion A133c. The end portion A133c is formed with a circular opening in a front view at a position substantially concentric with the base portion A133a, through which the key A140 can be inserted into and removed from the cylinder portion A132 (inner cylinder A132a). .

When the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, a part of the main body A133 on the front end side (arrow F direction side) is housed in the inner space of the covering section A270.

Specifically, the outer diameter of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protruding shape of the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 The projection A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 in the portion A270 is formed to have a size equal to or slightly smaller than the recessed shape of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of the A133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271.

Further, in this case, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface (end surface, surface in the direction of arrow F) of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 and the rear surface (surface in the direction of arrow B) of the end surface wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270. It is formed. Note that the front surface of the end portion A133c and the back surface of the end wall portion A272 may be in contact with each other.

The legs A131 protrude from the rear surface of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 (the surface facing the arrow B direction, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119), and as described above, are inserted from the front side into the holes that open to the printed circuit board A119. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the key device A130 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

The support body A134 includes a base part A134a in which an opening is formed substantially in the center through which the main body A133 (a base part A133a and a projection part A133b) is inserted, and two opposite sides of the base part A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. A pair of extending portions A134b and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c extending from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119 are provided. formed in

The extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a is larger than the extension length of the reinforcement portion A134c from the base portion A134a, and the extension tip surface of the extension portion A134b (surface on the arrow B direction side) abuts on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (the surface on the arrow F direction side). In addition, a leg A134b1 is protrudingly provided on the extension tip surface of the extension portion A134b. The support A134 is arranged on the front side of the printed circuit board A119 and stands on its own by inserting the leg A134b1 from the front side into the hole opening in the printed circuit board A119 and soldering the portion projecting to the rear side. As a result, the main body A133 can be supported by the support A134, and the support A134 can prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119.

A gap may be provided between the extended end surface of the extended portion A134b (surface on the arrow B direction side) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (surface on the arrow F direction side). That is, the support A134 may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131. In this case, the heat dissipation of the key device A130 can be enhanced by the gap.

On the other hand, the extension length from the base portion A134a of the extension portion A134b and the extension length from the reinforcement portion A134c may be the same dimension. That is, the extending tip surface of the reinforcing portion A134c (surface on the arrow B direction side) may also be configured to contact the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 (surface on the arrow F direction side). In this case, the main body A133 is supported by both the extended portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and the tilting of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be suppressed more firmly. Also, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the leg A131 side of the key device A130.

Also, the soldering of the leg A134b1 is omitted, and the leg A134b1 is formed to have a substantially dogleg or S-shaped cross-sectional shape, and the leg A134b1 is inserted into the hole of the printed circuit board A119 in an elastically deformed state. It is good also as a structure to carry out. That is, the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1 may be used to elastically engage the leg A134b1 with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119. Since soldering can be omitted, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to elastic engagement of the leg A134b1 with the hole, soldering may also be performed. It is possible to more strongly prevent the leg A134b1 from coming out of the hole. Therefore, the function of the support A134 that supports the inclination of the main body A133 can be further enhanced.

The leg A134b1 has a width dimension (dimensions in the directions of arrows L and B, dimensions in the left-right direction in FIG. The hole of the printed circuit board A119 through which the leg A134b1 is inserted is formed in a rectangular shape. As a result, when the rigidity of the leg A134b1 is increased and the tilting of the main body A133 is supported by the support body A134, deformation or breakage of the base of the leg A134b1 (connected portion with the extended portion A134b) can be suppressed.

However, the width dimension of the leg A134b1 may be substantially the same as the thickness dimension. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the leg A134b1 may be square.

In addition, by forming the reinforcing portions A134c on the two opposing sides of the support A134, it is possible to restrict the bending and twisting of the base portion A134a. As a result, the rigidity of the support body A134 as a whole can be increased, and the function of supporting the main body A133 can be enhanced, so that tilting of the main body A133 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 can be more strongly restricted (suppressed).

Next, the detailed configuration of the board box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119. FIG.

FIG. 115(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the board box A100 with the key A140 operated to the off position, and FIG. 115(b) is a board box A100 with the key A140 operated to the on position. 116(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 116(b) is a partially enlarged front view of FIG. 115(b). FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged side view of the board box A100 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIb;

117(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the section line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 117(b) is a substrate taken along the section line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 115(a). 118(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of FIG. 115(a), and FIG. 118(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the box A100 of FIG. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box A100 taken along the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of a).

119(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 taken along the section line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116(a), and FIG. 119(b) is a substrate taken along the section line CXIXb-CXIXb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of Box A100;

117 to 119, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the internal structure is not shown, and the cross section is hatched by single hatching to schematically show the switch device A120 and the key device A130. diagrammatically.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the board box A100 has a covering portion A270 projecting from the front surface (the surface facing the arrow F direction) of the operation wall portion A210 of the box cover A200. An opening A260 is formed in an end wall portion A272 that forms a tip surface (a surface on the arrow F direction side). This makes it difficult for the tip of a foreign object such as a wire to reach the opening A260.

For example, if the opening A260 cannot be visually recognized by an unauthorized person due to a shield or the like, and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260, the tip of the foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the box cover A200 (for operation). A method of sliding on the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side surface) of the wall portion A210) to reach the opening A260 is performed.

On the other hand, since the covering portion A270 projects from the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire slides on the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210. , the tip of the foreign matter such as a wire can be brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) to stop further progress (sliding). That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall that restricts sliding of foreign matter such as wires. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted through the opening A260.

The covering part A270 has an internal space, and a part of the front end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is housed in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a portion of the tip side of the key device A130.

Thereby, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent. That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the route through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (the gap between the end wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c and the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b) is bent, and the wall with which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (a wire passing through the gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c A wall against which the tip of the foreign matter abuts (that is, the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)).

The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially cylindrical main body A133 into a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension of the support A134 (horizontal dimension in FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)) corresponds to the inner diameter dimension of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)). is set to a value larger than the left-right dimension of

As a result, the upper surface of the support A134 (the surface facing the arrow F direction) can face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface facing the arrow B direction). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign matter such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the path through which the foreign matter such as the wire passes (formed by the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the projection portion A133b) path) is bent to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire strikes (a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire passing through the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b strikes, that is, the support A134). In addition, for a foreign matter such as a wire that collides with the upper surface of the support A 134 and changes its traveling direction, the vertical walls A291, A292, A293 and the inner surface of the lower wall portion A203 are formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)).

A protruding portion A271b is formed on the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and a protruding portion A133b is formed on the main body A133. The protrusions A133b of the main body A133 are accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the protrusions A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271.

As a result, the circumferential outer surface of the projection A133b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) and the circumferential inner surface of the projection A271b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) can face each other. Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A260, the route through which the foreign object such as the wire passes The tip of foreign matter such as a wire that passes along the circumferential direction through the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protrusion A133b. Abutting walls, that is, the circumferential outer surface of the protrusion A133b and the circumferential inner surface of the protrusion A271b) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIG. 118(a)).

In the switch device A120, the outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (the inner edge of the guide wall A251). As a result, the upper surface of the protrusion A123b (the surface facing the arrow F direction) can face the inner surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface facing the arrow B direction). Therefore, it is possible to bend the gap between the inner surface of the guide wall A251 and the operation wall portion A210 and the outer surface of the switch device A120.

That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the board box A100 from the opening A250, the route through which the foreign object such as a wire passes path formed by the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation part A122) is bent to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire hits (a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire passing through the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation part A122 hits, that is, The upper surface of the protrusion A123b.In addition, foreign matter such as a wire that collides with the upper surface of the protrusion A123b and changes its traveling direction is routed through each of the standing walls A281, A282, A283 and the inner surface of the lower wall portion A203. can be formed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIGS. 118(a) and 118(b)).

As described above, the covering portion A270 has an internal space, in which a part of the front end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is accommodated. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a portion of the tip side of the key device A130.

As a result, the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can face each other in a direction perpendicular to the inserting direction of the key A140 (direction parallel to a plane including arrows U, D and arrows L, R). Therefore, for example, an operator's careless operation or rough operation of the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, collision of another member with the key A140 during the operation of opening the inner frame 12 from the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion 170 to suppress (regulate) tilting of the key device A130.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the leg A131 from being broken or bent, the leg A131 coming out of the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and the solder from peeling off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the disconnection or poor contact of the key device A130 (leg A131).

An end face wall portion A272 is formed at the projecting tip (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and this end face wall portion A272 faces the end portion A133c of the key device A130. As a result, the area of the opening A260 (in addition to the area of the opening A260 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the cross-sectional area of the path through which a foreign object such as a wire passes) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100 and the main controller A110 being tampered with.

In particular, the end wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270 has square portions A272b extending radially inward from two points on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, the projecting tip surface of the covering portion A270 (the surface facing the direction of arrow F) is open only in the region that allows the displacement of the key A140 (the region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A140). The rest of the tip surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) is entirely the end surface wall portion A272. Therefore, by minimizing the area of the opening A260, it is possible to make it difficult to insert a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260. In addition, since the facing area between the inner surface of the end wall portion A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c) can be maximized, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening A260, the foreign object such as the wire can pass through. It can be difficult.

In this way, in order to make the opening A260 an irregular shape (a shape in which a pair of fan shapes are opposed to each other), the end face wall portion A272 has a relatively complicated shape in which a pair of rectangular portions A272b protrude from the inner edge of an annular portion A272a. formed into a shape. In this case, the end wall portion A272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) has a plate shape with a constant thickness (a cantilever with a base end fixed to the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (extended tip) free). shape), the shape can be simplified and its formability can be ensured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, only the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed in the covering portion A270, and the end wall portion A272 is not formed. configuration), when an external force is applied to the key A140 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 to suppress the tilting of the key device A130. (regulation) can be done.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an end wall portion A272 is formed on the projecting tip side (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge of the end wall portion A272 (the portion forming the opening A260). can be abutted. That is, the position (key A140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A131) when the key device A130 tilts due to the action of the above-described external force can be brought into contact with the end wall portion A272. As a result, tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (regulated), and breakage of the box cover A200 (coating portion A270) can be suppressed.

In addition, the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 and the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271. Therefore, as described above, the circumferential outer surface of the projection A133b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) and the circumferential inner surface of the projection A271b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) face each other. (See FIG. 118(a)).

Therefore, for example, an operator's careless operation or rough operation of the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, collision of another member with the key A140 during the operation of opening the inner frame 12 from the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force in the direction of rotation is applied to the key A140, the outer circumferential surface of the projection A133b (the surface facing the arrows L and R) is aligned with the inner circumferential surface of the projection A271b (the surface facing the arrows L and R). ) to restrict the rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A130.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the leg A131 from being broken or bent, the leg A131 coming out of the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and the solder from peeling off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from falling off from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and the disconnection or poor contact of the key device A130 (leg A131).

Here, for example, the operation portion A122 of the switch device A120 or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is carelessly or violently operated by the operator, and the operation portion A122 when the inner frame 12 is opened from the outer frame 11. Or, due to a collision of another member against the key A140, an external force is applied to the operation part A122 or the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction or the insertion direction (direction parallel to the plane containing arrows U, D and arrows L, R). When this is applied, the switch device A120, the key device A130 or the key A140 tilts, and there is a risk that the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) will be deformed and damaged due to their contact. .

On the other hand, erected walls A280 and A290 are erected on the rear surface (inner surface, surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. 117(a) and 117(b).

As a result, the standing walls A280 and A290 are erected (functioning as ribs) to improve the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210. The erected walls A280 and A290 can function as means). As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and damage thereof can be suppressed.

Further, when the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the outer surfaces of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 are brought into contact with the inner surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290, thereby It is possible to suppress (regulate) the tilting of the key device A130. That is, the portion that abuts on the switch device A120 or the key device A130 and suppresses its tilting is shared not only by the operation wall portion A210 or the cover portion A270 but also by the erected walls A280 and A290, and the load is increased accordingly. can be dispersed. From this point as well, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, The erected walls A280 and A290 can function as walls against which the tips of foreign objects such as wires hit (walls that restrict further progress). Thus, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being tampered with.

The erected walls A280 and A290 are formed to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 118(b)). That is, an area AS1 where the upright end surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the erected walls A280 and A290 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 and the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the printed circuit board A119 contact each other. , AS2 are formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape, and are formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114(a)).

Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can block (divide) a path for foreign objects such as wires to enter the board box A100. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, it is restricted from advancing outside the space surrounded by the erected walls A280 and A290 and the lower wall portion A203. can be done. Thus, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) from being tampered with.

In addition, the erected walls A280 and A290 are erected (functioning as ribs) by forming the erected walls A280 and A290 together with the lower wall portion A203 so as to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130. ), not only can the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210 be further improved by function as a supporting portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be reliably exerted even when an external force acts in any direction within the plane including. As a result, deformation of the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and damage thereof can be suppressed.

Note that the first standing wall A291 is arranged in a posture perpendicular to the key A140 in the OFF position and parallel to the key A140 in the ON position. The three erected walls A293 are arranged in a posture orthogonal to the key A140 in the ON position and parallel to the key A140 in the OFF position. Therefore, the standing wall A290 can efficiently function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270.

That is, of the external forces parallel to the plane containing the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R, when the external forces in the directions of the arrows U and D or the directions of the arrows L and R are applied to the key A140, the standing wall While the load received by A290 (withstand load to be exerted by standing wall A290 as a support portion) is maximized, an external force acts in a direction inclined by a predetermined angle from arrows U and D or arrows L and R. In this case, there is a high possibility that the key A140 will be rotated due to the inclination of the acting direction of the external force, and the amount of the external force released by the rotation will be the load received by the erected wall A290 (the erected wall A290 will act as a support part). load capacity) is lower. As a result, by arranging the posture of the standing wall A290 as described above, the standing wall A290 can efficiently function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. be able to.

The erected walls A280, A290 (the second erected walls A282, A292 and the third erected walls A283, A293) are connected to the lower wall portion A203. The rigidity of A280 and A290 can be increased, and the rigidity of the entire box cover A200 can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall portion A210 and the lower wall portion A203 via the standing walls A280 and A290. Therefore, the function of the erected walls A280 and A290 as supporting portions (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

The surface of the printed circuit board A119 to which electronic components are connected by soldering is the surface facing the box base A300 (the surface opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted). , A290 and the bearing surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 114(a)), no electronic components are mounted or circuits are formed, and the area AS1 , AS2 are formed as flat surfaces.

Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can be easily brought into close contact with the front surface (the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119, so that the standing walls A280 and A290 and the standing walls A280 and A290 It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap with the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can reliably function as walls against which the tips of foreign objects such as wires inserted through the openings A250 and A260 abut.

The first erected walls A281, A291, the second erected walls A282, A292, and the third erected walls A283, A293 of the erected walls A280, A290 are formed with tapered surfaces A280a, A290a. The area of the surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). As a result, it is possible to increase the surface pressure of the upright end surface that abuts on the printed circuit board A119, thereby suppressing insertion of a foreign object such as a wire between the printed circuit board A119 and the upright walls A280 and A290.

In this case, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the inner surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 on the side of the erected tips (surfaces on the side facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130), thereby improving moldability. At the same time, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100.

That is, by decreasing the area of the upright tip surface by the inclined surfaces (tapered surfaces A280a and A290a) that gradually approach the outer surface side toward the upright tip side (in the direction of arrow B), the shape of the upright walls A280 and A290 can be changed. By making the change moderate, the fluidity of the resin in the mold can be ensured. Therefore, moldability can be improved.

Furthermore, when the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 are brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, a groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 ( See FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b)). Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the openings A250 and A260 can be moved (guided) along the groove described above. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid to pass through (into) the space between the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A100.

A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 protrude from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface facing the arrow F direction) of the operation wall A210. One end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the base portion A271a or the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 115(a) and 115( b) see).

Thereby, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can be made to function as ribs for increasing rigidity, and the covering portion A270 can be supported by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, when the outer surfaces of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A270, the rigidity of the ridges A211 and 222 is used to prevent the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from tilting. While being able to suppress reliably, damage to covering part A270 can be suppressed.

In addition, on the front surface (outer surface, arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display portion is provided at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (on the extension line of the other end). (“ON” and “OFF”) are formed respectively. As a result, the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 can also function as an indication line for indicating the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, the position where one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) corresponds to the end surface of the key A140 in the OFF position (the surface gripped with the fingers). (narrow surface along the outer edge of the key A140) and the same phase position (position facing the end surface of the key A140) (see FIG. 115(a)). The position connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A271a) is at the same phase position as the end surface of the key A140 in the ON position (see FIG. 115(b)).

As a result, an external force acts on the key A140 in the OFF position, and the key A140 covers the end face in the direction of the arrow U (the narrow face along the outer edge of the face gripped by the fingers) with the covering portion A270 (end face wall portion A272). ), the first protrusion A211 is positioned on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115(a)), and the ON position When an external force acts on the key A140 located in the key A140 and the key A140 is tilted in a direction (arrow L direction) in which the end surface of the key A140 on the arrow L direction side contacts the cover portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272), the The second ridge A212 is positioned on the extension of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115(b)).

As a result, when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the load is input from the end surface of the key A140 (the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the fingers) (the end surface of the key A140 abuts). The portion to be covered) can be efficiently reinforced by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

The second connection wall portion A230 can prevent the key A140 in the OFF position from being subjected to an external force in the direction opposite to that described above (a force displacing the key A140 in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 115(a)). )), the first connection wall portion A220 can suppress the application of an external force in the direction opposite to the above-described case (the force displacing the key A140 in the direction of arrow R) to the key A140 in the on position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

That is, as will be described later, the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the other side (arrow D direction side) is open (connection wall is not formed). Further, the key device A130 is positioned on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the center in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the third region from the key device A130. The distance to the connection wall portion A240 is increased.

Therefore, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the side of the third connection wall A240, the operator's hand or other components on the side of those spaces collide with the key A140, causing the key A140 to move toward the arrow D. An external force displacing in the direction or the arrow L direction is likely to act. Therefore, by forming the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 on the side of suppressing (receiving) the tilting of the key device A130 against such an external force, it is possible to reduce the material cost and secure the rigidity. can be done efficiently.

As described above, the square portions A272b of the end wall portion A272 are arranged at two locations with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees, and are formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). In this case, the two sides (the outer edge and the edge forming the opening A260) of the triangular portion A272b are set to different lengths (that is, the front view shape is formed as a scalene triangle).

Specifically, with respect to the key A140 in the off position, the rectangular portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 is the side (outer edge) of the side facing the gripping surface (surface gripped with fingers) of the key A140. The length of the key A140 is longer (larger), and the rectangular portion A272b on the far side (opposite side across the key A140) from the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the key A140 in the OFF position is the gripping surface of the key A140. The length of the side (outer edge) on the side facing is shortened (reduced) (see FIG. 115(a)).

Therefore, in other words, the square portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 has the length dimension of the side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface (surface gripped with fingers) of the key A140 in the ON position. is shortened (reduced), and the side (outer edge) of the rectangular portion A272b on the far side from the first connection wall A220 is long (large) on the side facing the gripping surface of the key A140 in the ON position. (See FIG. 115(b)).

As described above, due to the space on the open side and the space on the side of the third connection wall A240, the operator's hand or other components in those spaces collide with the key A140, and the key A140 is likely to be displaced in the direction of arrow D or in the direction of arrow L, according to the square portion A272b of this embodiment, the side of the side that receives the key A140 to which the external force in the direction of arrow D or arrow F is applied Since the length dimension of the (outer edge) is increased, the rigidity of the rectangular portion A272b is efficiently increased, and tilting of the key A140 (key device A130) can be reliably suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress damage to the square portion A272b by suppressing the surface pressure.

The outer surface on the front side of the board box A100 (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) includes a first area formed by the front wall portion A201 and an operation wall positioned closer to the main controller A110 than the first area. A second region formed by a portion A210, and openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region.

As a result, the openings A250 and A260 are arranged at positions recessed from the outer surface of the board box A100 (the box cover A200) (the first area formed by the front wall portion A201), and the first area and the second area are connected. Stepped portions (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) can be arranged around the openings A250 and A260. As a result, compared to the case where the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the front wall portion A201 (the first region), the distance to the openings A250 and A260 can be increased for a person who commits fraud. By making the openings A250 and A260 difficult to see, it is possible to make it difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260.

Considering heat dissipation from the main controller A110, the board box A100 has a distance from the main controller A110 (for example, a distance between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200 (internal space )) must be ensured. On the other hand, if the openings A250 and A260 are too far from the switch device A120 and the key device A130, the operability deteriorates.

In this case, by forming the openings A250 and A260 in the operation wall portion A210 (second region), it is possible to easily ensure the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and as described above, the openings A250, A260 are formed. It is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted from A260 into the board box A100. However, when the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is operated, the steps connecting the first area and the second area (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230 and the third connection wall A240) are difficult to work on. The hand of the person (operator) interferes and interferes with the operation. Therefore, operability deteriorates when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall A220 is formed to be inclined (downwardly inclined) toward the main controller A110 as it goes from the front wall A201 toward the operation wall A210. , the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be expanded by the amount of this inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall portion A220). As a result, it is possible to improve operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130.

The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a length dimension along one direction (directions of arrows L and R) that is perpendicular to the other direction (arrows U and D 115(a) and 115(b).

The key device A130 is arranged such that the posture of the key A140 in the OFF position is aligned with the above-described other directions (directions of arrows U and D) (see FIG. 115(a)). That is, the key A140 in the off position faces the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210 (the second region), and the key A140 in the front view (direction of arrow B). The longitudinal direction of is along the lateral direction (directions of arrows U and D) of the operation wall portion A210 (second area).

As a result, it is possible to secure a space on the sides (right and left sides in FIG. 115(a)) desired to be gripped with the fingers of the key A140 in the OFF position. Therefore, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 or pulled out from the key device A130, the fingers (for example, thumb and forefinger) holding the key A140 connect the first area and the second area (first connection wall). Interference with the portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the key device A130.

In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the center of the operation wall A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R). As shown, the first connection wall portion A220 is formed to be inclined downward, so that when the key A140 is gripped with fingers and operated (rotated from the OFF position to the ON position or vice versa), the key A140 is Fingers different from the gripping fingers can be prevented from interfering with the steps (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall A240) connecting the first area and the second area. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the key device A130.

For example, when holding the key A140 in the OFF position with the index finger and thumb, the little finger and the ring finger can be placed using the space secured by the downward slope of the first connection wall A220, and the key A140 can be moved from the OFF position to the ON position. When operating (rotating) the F key A140, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220.

When the key A140 in the ON position is gripped with the index finger and the thumb, the operation wall portion A210 (second area) is formed into a horizontally long rectangle in front view, and the key device A130 is used for operation. Positioned on one side of the longitudinal center of the wall portion A210 (second region), and arranged using the space on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210. When operating (rotating) the key A140 from the off position to the on position, the little finger and ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side). can.

In the switch device A120, the projecting tip surface (face in the direction of arrow F) of the operating portion A122 in the initial position (height from the operation wall portion A210) is aligned with the projecting portion of the covering portion A270. It is set at a lower position (smaller dimension) than the position of the tip surface (the front surface of the end wall portion A272, the surface in the direction of the arrow F) (standing height from the operation wall portion A210). Therefore, interference between the operation unit A122 and fingers when operating the key A140 can be suppressed.

The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has connection surfaces (first connection wall portion A220 and third connection wall A220 and portion A240) is formed, and a connection surface (second connection wall portion A230) is formed on one side in the short direction (direction of arrow U), and on the other side in the short direction (direction of arrow D) , the connection surface is non-formed.

Thereby, the other side (arrow D direction side) in the short direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) can be opened. That is, by such opening, the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 (second area) can be communicated with the outside space. Therefore, when the key A140 is gripped with fingers and operated (inserted into the key device A130, pulled out from the key device A130, rotated from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is Using the space (external space) communicated with the above-mentioned opening as a space for arranging and displacing (moving) fingers (little finger and ring finger) different from the gripping fingers (for example, thumb and index finger). can be done. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the key device A130.

Here, as described above, considering the heat radiation from the main controller A110, the substrate box A100 is located at a distance from the main controller A110 (for example, between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200). distance (internal space)) must be secured.

In this case, steps (first connection wall A220, second connection wall A230, and third connection wall A240) connecting the front wall A201 (first area) and the operation wall A210 (second area) , the first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are formed by the front wall portion A201 (first region) and the It is formed in a form substantially orthogonal to the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

That is, by inclining the first connection wall portion A220 downward, interference with the fingers is suppressed, and the operability of the key device A130 is improved, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are moved downward. By not tilting (only the first connection wall A220 is tilted downward), the volume of the internal space of the board box A100 for coping with heat dissipation from the main controller A110 can be secured.

In this way, even if only the first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward and the others (the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240) are not inclined, interference with the fingers can be suppressed. The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and one side (first connection wall portion A220 side) of the center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction ) in which the key device A 130 is placed close to the key device A 130 .

In addition, by forming the third connection wall portion A240 on the other longitudinal direction side (the side opposite to the first connection wall portion A220) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), the third connection wall portion A240 It is possible to protect the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (key A140). For example, it is possible to prevent the robot arm that handles the substrate box A100 from colliding with the switch device A120 and the key device A130 during manufacturing.

FIG. 120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 120, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of a part of the configuration (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to the main controller A110) is omitted. Symbols are illustrated only for the main components.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the pachinko machine A10, the hinges 18 (rotating shafts) for supporting the inner frame 12 to the outer frame 11 are attached to two upper and lower locations on the left side in front view. The inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side on which is provided as an opening/closing axis.

Here, when the inner frame 12 is opened toward the front side with the hinge 18 as the opening/closing axis, the opening angle can be made sufficiently large (for example, as shown in FIG. 120, approximately 90 degrees). 115 to 119), the operator can stand at a position facing the front of the board box A100 and operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated and the operability can be ensured.

On the other hand, if the release angle cannot be sufficiently increased (for example, only about 45 degrees can be secured for the release angle, and the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12 is opened, the outer frame 11 and the inner frame are separated from each other). 12), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is ensured.

That is, the substrate box A100 is configured such that the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (second region) (for example, the directions of arrows R and L in FIG. 115(a)) is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotating shaft). 115(a), the lateral direction (arrow U, D direction in FIG. 115(a)) is directed in a direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotating shaft), and the longitudinal direction one side (arrow in FIG. 115(a) L direction side) is positioned on the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall portion A220 is arranged on the side closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is arranged on the side farther from the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

As a result, when a hand is inserted between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 to the back surface of the inner frame 12 (the front surface of the board box A100) at the same height position as the operation wall portion A210 (second area), The space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall portion A240 (ie, the operation wall portion A210 (second region)) is formed in the thumb and the palm near the base of the thumb in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the key device A space on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 by positioning A130 on one side of the longitudinal direction center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region)) can be placed using

In such a state, it is possible to operate (depress) the operating portion A122 of the switch device A120 with the thumb or forefinger, and to rotate the key A140 of the key device A130. As a space for displacing (moving) the thumb and forefinger holding the key A140, the space secured by downwardly inclining the first connection wall portion A220 can be used. As a result, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured.

Note that the above-described setting change (operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed while the board box A100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410 from the state shown in FIG. Since the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be positioned closer to the front side (the front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

With the inner frame 12 opened toward the front side with the hinge 18 as the opening/closing axis, the circuit board box A100 is further opened toward the front side (the front side of the page in FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as the opening/closing axis. Also good. As a result, the operator can stand facing the front of the board box A100 at a position where it does not interfere with the outer frame 11, and the switch device A120 and The key device A130 can be operated and its operability can be ensured.

In this case, the main control device A110 (input/output port 205) has various devices (power supply device 115, payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoid 209, third The other end (connector) of the electrical connection line, one end of which is connected to the one-symbol display device 37, the second-symbol display device 83, the second-symbol holding lamp 84 (see FIG. 4), is connected.

If operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted regardless of the state of connection of these electrical connection lines to the main control device A110, there is a risk that the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be more likely to be illegally operated. On the other hand, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is uniformly prohibited regardless of the connection state of a plurality of electrical connection lines, the work (setting change) associated with the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 It may lead to sexual deterioration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A110. As a result, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the other end (connector) of the electrical connection lines, of which one end is connected to at least the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113, is connected to the main control device A110. (input/output port 205), regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, connected, disconnected, or mixedly connected and disconnected) ), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are allowed to operate. As a result, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

That is, if a predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is not connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not connected to the main control device A110. is prohibited, it is possible to prevent the switch device A120 and the key device A130 from being illegally operated.

On the other hand, if the connection to the main controller A110 of a predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) is ensured, and fraud can be suppressed , other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, and second symbol reservation lamp 84 are connected to the main controller A110 Even if the main control device A110 is disconnected (extracted) from the main control device A110, the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed, thereby improving workability (ensuring versatility). ) can be achieved.

That is, when the main controller A110 is opened to the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as the opening/closing axis, the main control The electrical connection must be released (pulled out) so that the rotation of the device A110 is not restricted).

Therefore, in a configuration in which operation (change of settings) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not permitted unless all of the electrical connection lines are connected to the main controller A110, the main controller A110 is set to a predetermined position (switch device A120 and key device A130 are rotated to a position where it is easy to operate), and then the electrical connection wire disconnected (unplugged) from the main controller A110 needs to be reconnected to the main controller A110.

In particular, when the main controller A110 is displaced (rotated) away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 and the length of the electrical connection wire is insufficient, an extension wire is interposed to release (remove) the electrical connection wire. It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line to the main controller A110, which is troublesome.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) is connected to the main controller A110, Since the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is permitted, other electrical connection lines (payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display It is unnecessary to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the electrical connection line that connects the second symbol holding lamp 84 to the main controller A110 by interposing an extension line.

As a result, it is possible to arrange the main controller A110 in a position where it is easy to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and at the same time, it is possible to reduce labor and improve workability associated with the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the board box A2100 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the entire back surface of the end wall portion A272 is formed as a flat surface, but the end wall portion A2272 in the eighth embodiment has a ridge A2273 projecting from the back surface. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

121(a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the board box A2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the board box A2100 taken along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. 121(a). is.

Note that FIG. 121(a) corresponds to FIG. 110(b). Also, in FIG. 121(b), only the cross-sectional view is shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 121, an end wall portion A2272 of the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment is provided with a ridge A2273 protruding from the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side). The protrusion A2273 is a portion (protrusion) that extends in a stripe shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and is located at the outer edge of the end wall portion A2272 (a tip in the overhanging direction that protrudes radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271). side edge) in a predetermined range.

More specifically, the range in which the ridge A2273 is formed is the position facing the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130 and the range along the outer edge of the rectangular portion A272b (position The range between the positions AP1 and AP3 including the AP2, and the range between the positions AP4 and AP6 including the position AP5) and one side of the rectangular portion A272b (radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271). (the side with a larger overhang dimension) along the inner edge of the annular portion A272a (the range between the positions AP3 and AP4), and in this range (the range between the positions AP1 and AP6) Formed continuously.

The projecting dimension from the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) of the ridge A2273 is set to a constant value in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4, The value gradually changes toward the position AP2 toward the position AP1 and gradually changes to a smaller value toward the position AP2, and is set to the same value as the position AP3 at the position AP2. Similarly, the projecting dimension gradually changes to a larger value from the position AP4 to the position AP5, and gradually changes to a smaller value from the position AP5 to the position AP6, reaching the same value as the position AP4 at the position AP6. set. Also, the position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (projection dimension).

Thus, the rigidity of the end wall portion A2272 can be increased by protruding the ridge A2273 from the end wall portion A2272. Therefore, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 receives a force in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (in a direction parallel to the plane containing the arrows U, D and the arrows L, R), and the key device A130 tilts. , the breakage of the end wall portion A2272 can be suppressed when the key A140 abuts against the inner edge of the end wall portion A2272.

Since the ridge A2273 is formed at a position facing (opposing) the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, the back surface of the end wall A2272 and the key device A130 (the end A133c of the main body A133) ) can be made smaller to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap.

Here, in the present embodiment, the projection dimension of the protrusion A2273 in the range between the positions AP3 and AP4 is the distance between the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 of the key device A130. It is set to a value approximately equal to the facing distance between the two. Therefore, the protruding tip (arrow B direction side) of the projection A2273 contacts the front of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130.

As a result, the gap between the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133) is eliminated, and a foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap. can be suppressed.

In particular, at positions AP2 and AP5, the projecting dimension of the projection A2273 is set to a large value, so that the elastic deformation of the rectangular portion A272b formed as a plate (cantilever beam) with a free outer edge side is used. As a result, the protrusion A2273 in the range from position AP1 to position AP3 and from position AP4 to position AP6 can be brought into firm contact with the front surface of the key device A130 (end A133c of main body A133). As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap between the rear surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (the end portion A133c of the main body A133). .

Also, in this way, the protruding tip (arrow B direction side) of the projection A2273 is in contact with the front of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the key device A130 Even if the end wall A2272 is accidentally pushed in the insertion direction by the key A140 when the key A140 is inserted into the key A140, deformation of the end wall A2272 in the insertion direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress damage to the base end side of the end wall portion A2272 (the side connected to the peripheral wall portion A271).

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged closer to the rotation axis A410 (arrow R direction side) than the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) center of the board box A100 (box cover A200). However, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 in the ninth embodiment are arranged farther from the rotation axis A410 than the longitudinal center of the board box A3100 (box cover A3200). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 122(a) is a front view of the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122(b) is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine A3010. Note that FIG. 122(b) shows a state in which the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range). In addition, in FIG. 122(b), only the main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the circuit board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment differs from the circuit board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in terms of the formation position of the operation wall part A210 and the opening A260 (cover part A270, key While the arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (the guide wall A251, the switch device A120) is different, the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 122, in the board box A3100 of the ninth embodiment, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the far side (arrow L direction side) from the rotation axis A410 relative to the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200. Three sides of the front wall portion A210 are connected to the front wall portion A201 by a first connection wall portion A220, a second connection wall portion A230, and a third connection wall portion A240.

An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (covering portion A270) and an opening A250 (guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through these openings A250 and A260. be done.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120 is arranged farther from the rotation axis A410 (the side closer to the first connection wall A220, the arrow L direction side) than the key device A130. That is, the arrangement is the reverse of the arrangement in the seventh embodiment.

Here, the movable range (rotatable range) when the substrate box A3100 is rotated around the rotation axis A410 is the first position (disposed during the game) that is disposed on the back side of the inner frame 12. position, see FIG. 120), the second position ( That is, it is set within a range of approximately 180° up to a position facing the same side as the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 122(b)).

As a result, the substrate box A3100 is arranged (displaced) at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated while viewing the information displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (e.g., information regarding setting changes, setting values). )be able to. As a result, it is possible to operate while confirming the display (information), so that it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 based on the display (information). As a result, operability can be improved, and operation errors can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not operated, it can be placed on the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 (inner frame 12) (that is, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside, see FIG. 120), so fraud is performed. (unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130).

In particular, in this embodiment, the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are arranged (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are oriented in the same direction (arrow The substrate box A3100 can be displaced (rotated) to a position in which the direction B) is desired (both sides are substantially parallel in this embodiment). The angle between the front surface of the operation wall A210 and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is preferably set within a range of approximately 0° to approximately 45°.

That is, the substrate is placed at a position where the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the substrate box A3100 are arranged (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized at the same time. Box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to take an unreasonable posture such as putting the hand around the back side of the pachinko machine A3010 in order to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while viewing the third pattern display device 81. .

As a result, it becomes easier to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while confirming the information displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, information about setting changes), thereby improving the operability and preventing mistakes in operation. can be achieved more reliably.

Further, as described above, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the far side (arrow L direction side) from the rotation axis A410 from the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200, and the switch device A120 and the keys are mounted on the operation wall portion A210. An apparatus A130 is provided.

As a result, the board box A3100 is placed at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged (the front face of the operation wall A210) and the display face of the third pattern display device 81 can be viewed at the same time. With the box A3100 displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122(b)), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are positioned further from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side of FIG. 122(b)). can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) and the key device A130 (key A140) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Here, in the setting change mode, it is necessary to repeatedly press the switch device A120 (operation unit A122), and the frequency of operation of the switch device A120 is higher than that of the key device A130.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120, which is operated more frequently than the key device A130, is located farther from the rotation axis A410 (that is, closer to the first connection wall A220) than the key device A130. are placed. As a result, the switch device A120, which is frequently operated, can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side in FIG. 122(b)). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the finger operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122) from interfering with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

Furthermore, since the switch device A120 is disposed adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 is also used when operating the switch device A120 (operation portion A122). It can be used as a space (a space for avoiding interference between fingers and the box cover A3200). As a result, the operability can be improved also from this point.

Here, the pachinko machine A3010 in the ninth embodiment has the board box A3100 up to the second position described above (the position where the front of the operation wall A210 faces the front of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122(b)). When displaced (rotated), it engages with the board box A3100 to restrict the displacement (rotation) of the board box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (i.e., fix the board box A3100 to the second position). ). This eliminates the need to hold the board box A3100 by hand when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130, thereby improving operability.

The restricting means uses the magnetic force (attractive force) of the magnet to fix (hold) the board box A3100 at the second position (when a force exceeding the attractive force is applied, the first a projecting member that is allowed to be displaced (rotated) in a direction toward a position), and has a projecting member that is located at the projecting position by the elastic recovery force of an elastically deformed biasing means (for example, a coil spring), and is located at the projecting position The projecting member engaged with the board box A3100 placed at the second position restricts the displacement (rotation) of the board box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (biasing means from the projecting position). When the protruding member is retracted against the urging force of , displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position is permitted).

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A410 of the board box A100 is arranged along the vertical direction (directions of arrows U and D) of the pachinko machine A10 has been described, but the rotation axis A4410 in the tenth embodiment It is arranged in a posture along the width direction (horizontal direction, arrow L, R direction) of the pachinko machine A4010. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 123(a) is a front view of the board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 123(b) is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine A4010. Note that FIG. 123(b) shows a state in which the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) within the movable range (rotatable range), and is displaced to the first position. The (rotated) board box A4100 is shown in dashed lines. In addition, in FIG. 123(b), only the main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

Here, the circuit board box A4100 in the tenth embodiment differs from the circuit board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (placement position and direction) and the number of rotation shafts A4410, but other configurations are the same. Therefore, description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 123, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotating shafts A4410 protruding in directions away from each other from the sealing unit A400 and the sub cover A500. The pair of rotating shafts A4410 are located on one side of the board box A4100 in the short direction (directions of arrows U and D) (the side opposite to the operation wall portion A210, the side of the direction of arrow U), (L, R directions) are formed in a posture protruding outward along the longitudinal direction of the board box A4100 from both ends. Also, the pair of rotation shafts A4410 are arranged coaxially.

Here, the movable range (rotatable range) when the board box A4100 is rotated about the rotation axis A4410 is the first position (disposed during game play) at which the movable range (rotatable range) is arranged on the back side of the inner frame 12 123(b)) in a direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 (direction of arrow B), and the front surface of the box cover 4200 (operation wall portion A210) is vertical. It is set within a range of approximately 90° up to the second position facing upward (in the direction of arrow U) (that is, the position where the board box A4100 protrudes most toward the rear side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123(b)). .

As a result, in the second position, the operation wall portion A210 can be directed upward, and the release side thereof (opposite side to the second connection wall portion A230) can be directed toward the side where the operator is present. And the operability of the key device A130 can be improved.

On the other hand, at the first position, the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 can face the rear surface of another component provided on the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the separate parts can face the switch device A120 and the key device A130, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be arranged at positions where it is difficult to operate. As a result, it is possible to prevent tampering (unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, even if the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the key A140 contacts another member of the inner frame 12. The contact prevents the board box A4100 from being placed at the first position. As a result, forgetting to pull out the key A140 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegal acquisition of the key A140 that has been forgotten to be pulled out.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the second position of the board box A4100 is positioned lower than the first position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction), so as described above, the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130. When the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position in this state, the board box A4100 can then be displaced (rotated) to the second position by its own weight. Therefore, the operator can easily recognize that the board box A4100 cannot be placed at the first position.

In addition, when the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, a part of the separate member is closer to the front side of the operation wall portion A210 than the front wall portion A201 of the box cover 4200. It is preferable to have a shape to enter into. As a result, the space formed on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 can be reduced, and unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be suppressed.

The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 143. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the variable winning device 65 arranged in the game area is opened in the special game state, and there is one winning hole (specific winning hole 65) that makes it easier for game balls to enter has been described. However, in the variable prize winning device B1000 of the eleventh embodiment, a plurality of prize winning openings are provided in which game balls can easily enter in the special game state. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 124 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. A pinball game is performed by causing balls (hereinafter also referred to as game balls or pachinko balls) to flow down the front of the game board 13 .

The game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, and has a large number of nails for guiding the ball, a pinwheel, rails 61 and 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, and a second winning port. The opening 640, the variable winning device B1000 normal winning opening (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device B1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 124, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member 70 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 124) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

The lottery based on prizes will be described in detail below. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are awarded prizes (some benefits for the player (for example, payout of prize balls, execution of lottery, transition to a more advantageous state) A lottery of special symbols (first symbol) is held when there is a ball that can be expected to give a profit, etc.). lottery will be held. In the lottery of the special symbols performed for the balls entering the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640, it is judged whether or not the special symbols are a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbols are a big hit. In that case, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbols are in a low probability state, for example, a special symbol jackpot is determined with a probability of 1/320. For example, with a probability of 1/60, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. For convenience of explanation, the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first winning port 64 will be referred to as "special symbol 1 lottery", and the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the second winning port 640 will be referred to as "special symbol 1 lottery". The lottery for the symbol is called "lottery for special symbol 2".

When the special pattern jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, Alternatively, the action of releasing 10 balls (prescribed number) is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the first specific winning hole B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1002, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. The payout of prize balls accompanying the entry into the first specific prize winning port B1001 and the second specific prize winning port B1002 and the number of payouts will be described later.

Six types of special symbol jackpot types are provided: "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot a", "jackpot b", and "jackpot c". Although the details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 are configured differently depending on the jackpot type.

When the special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, the lottery result is displayed. A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is a maximum of 4 for each type of the winning port. It is reserved until the second time, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first winning opening 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1), or the number of reserved balls for the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2 (number of pending balls) remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. When both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In this embodiment, when both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is preferentially executed. However, it is not limited to this, for example, the lottery may be preferentially executed in the order of acquisition of the special symbols (order of entering the ball), or the lottery may be executed alternately with the special symbols 1 and 2. Alternatively, the lottery may be executed simultaneously with the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

In the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), a determination is made as to whether or not the normal symbol wins. When the normal pattern wins, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize winning port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), so that the ball can easily enter the second prize winning port 640. become. In other words, when the normal symbol wins, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol becomes easier.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal winning opening 67 while the second pattern display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37. It is also shown in the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal prize winning opening 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. be done.

In this embodiment, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the special game state ends, and the special symbol lottery is performed. After completing 100 times, it is configured to be set to a normal state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability state of the special symbol is provided after the end of the special game state, the variable probability state of the special symbol is configured to end according to the number of special symbol lotteries. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot a, which will be described later), the pachinko machine 10 is operated during the period from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot. may shift to a special symbol high probability state (during the probability variation of the special symbol). In this case, after the jackpot games of other jackpot types (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, and jackpot c, which will be described later), the time-saving state of normal symbols may be set until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times. good.

In addition, the number of lotteries for the special symbols to which the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols described above is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

In addition, the number of lotteries for the special symbols that are in the time-saving state of the normal symbols described above is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times, 5 times, or 0 times.

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, during so-called probability fluctuation (during probability change), in other words, to a special game state. It is a game state that is easy to transition to. The high-probability state of special symbols in the present embodiment (during the probability change of special symbols) includes a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols (second symbols) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning port 640. On the other hand, the ``low probability state of special symbols'' refers to the time when the special symbols are not changing, and the probability of the big win is normal, that is, the state of the probability of big wins being lower than during the changing of the special symbols.

In addition, "time saving state of normal symbols (during time saving)" refers to a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and balls are likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . In addition, the ``normal state'' means a state of the game that is neither the probability variation of the special symbol nor the time reduction of the normal symbol (the state that neither the jackpot probability nor the normal symbol (second symbol) winning probability is increased).

During the probability change of the special pattern or during the time reduction of the normal pattern, not only the winning probability of the normal pattern is increased, but also the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize winning port 640 is changed to the normal state. A relatively long time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state, a state in which the tip of rotation moves to the right around the lower end and is in a tilted posture), the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state , the ball is more likely to enter the second prize winning port 640 than in the case where the leading end of the rotation stands toward the second prize winning port 640 (left side). Therefore, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol. That is, the lottery for the special symbols is facilitated.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, or in addition to changing the opening time, The number of openings of the electric accessory 640a in the case of winning the normal symbol may be increased more than in the normal state.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric At least one of the number of times the accessory 640a is opened may be changed.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed. 2 symbols) may be configured to be increased compared to the normal state.

A first pattern display provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 124). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

A plurality of LEDs 37a fluctuate by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery that is performed with the ball entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. display, display a special pattern (first pattern) according to the lottery result of the special pattern as a stop pattern after the end of the variation, or change the balls entered in the first winning hole 64. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is reserved up to four times for each type of winning hole, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but also indicates the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot C, A special pattern (first pattern) corresponding to the jackpot a, jackpot b, jackpot c) is displayed.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area.

In the variable display device unit 80, the variable display of the third pattern is performed while synchronizing with the variable display on the first pattern display device 37, triggered by the winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 (start winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter also simply referred to as a “display device”) that performs the above, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol with the passage of the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 as a trigger. A configured second symbol display device 83 and a second symbol retention lamp 84 indicating the number of retention balls corresponding to the number of times the game ball passes through the normal winning opening 67 by the lighting state are provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like

In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. In addition, the display device is not limited to a device having a liquid crystal display, and for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

In this embodiment, the third symbols are composed of 10 kinds of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbols are aligned (same main symbols A variable display that finally stops when all are aligned) is performed, and after the variable display is finished, a big win occurs (the transition to the special game state starts). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned (a variable display that finally stops when they are not aligned) is performed.

For example, if the lottery results of the special symbols are "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot b", and "jackpot c", even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. A variable display in which the main symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, if it is "jackpot A" or "jackpot a", any number among all numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including odd numbers A variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.

Next, a description will be given of the display (right-hand navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to prompt the player to hit the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a can be easily opened when the special symbols are in the variable probability state or the normal symbol is in the time-saving state. hitting (right hitting) makes it easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 640 . In addition, although the details will be described later, when a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbols 2) performed based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 results in a big hit, the player moves to the first winning hole 64. Compared to the case where a special pattern lottery (lottery of special pattern 1) is made based on the entry of a ball, a big win (jackpot a) that can obtain the maximum profit is likely to occur.

Therefore, in the variable probability state of the special symbols given after the end of the big hit, or in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right stroke. In other words, even if it is set to the probability variable state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, the ball cannot enter the second winning hole 640 unless the player hits to the right, so the special symbol The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the variable state of and the time-saving state of normal symbols.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the variable state of special symbols and the time-saving state of normal symbols, a specific image (right-handed navigation) is displayed, so that the player can enjoy the variable state of special symbols and the time-saving state of normal symbols. It is structured so that the benefits of becoming a company can be obtained without fail.

In the right-handed navigator, the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "Aim right!" By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 . Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely acquire the benefits of the variable probability state of the special symbols and the time-saving state of the normal symbols.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In this warning image, it is determined that the player is hitting the ball to the right even though it is not a period during which the player should hit the ball to the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 (to hit the ball to the right). This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player hits. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting to the right in the normal state (neither the probability changing state of the special symbols nor the time saving state of the normal symbols).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in the normal state (even if the ball is hit rightward, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second winning hole 640). Therefore, if the ball is hit to the right in the normal state, the chances of winning the lottery for the special symbols are reduced compared to the case of hitting the ball aiming at the first winning hole 64 by hitting to the left. That is, if the player hits right in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big win, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, the player is prevented (suppressed) from losing money by displaying a right-handed warning image to encourage left-handed hitting.

When it is determined that the player is playing right-handed in the normal state, the message "warning" and "play left-handed!" characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be reminded that he/she should not hit with the right hand (should hit with the left hand). Further, by confirming whether or not there is a right-handed hitting warning screen, the hall clerk can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of hitting right-handed in the normal state.

In this embodiment, as a method of determining whether or not a ball is hit to the right, the ball enters the normal prize-winning opening (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 124) into which the ball can flow when the ball is hit to the right. Judge whether or not you did.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered the normal winning hole (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 124) in the normal state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. is not limited to For example, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), when it is detected that the ball has entered the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002 not limited to, for example, a load is applied to the variable winning device B1000 to open the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002, and a game mode forcibly entering the game ball is performed. It may be configured to determine and display a right-handed warning image. As a result, the hall clerk can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud by simply confirming the presence or absence of the right-hand hitting warning image.

Further, for example, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), when it is detected that the ball has entered the first specific winning hole B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1002, the hall computer is fraudulent. It may be configured to output a signal indicating what is being done. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility that fraud has been committed, and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where fraud has occurred.

Also, for example, by narrowing the right channel of the variable display device unit 80, a range through which the game ball must pass is formed, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is arranged in that range. You can do it. In this case, it can be determined that the game ball is hit to the right based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection sensor.

Alternatively, for example, a detection sensor capable of detecting displacement of a movable member (for example, a windmill) arranged on the left side of the uppermost position of the variable display device unit 80 (corresponding to the left-right center position in FIG. 124) may be arranged. good. In this case, when the game ball is being hit, it can be determined that the game ball is being hit to the right based on the fact that the displacement of the movable member is not detected even after the expected operation timing has passed.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the variable winning device B1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the variable winning device B1000 is, for example, a case where a ball is detected to enter the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002 even though it is not in the special game state (jackpot state). be done.

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the variable winning device B1000, a large character "WARNING" is displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. At the bottom of the screen, the characters "Please call the gate error attendant" are displayed. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the player can quickly request repairs or the like from the pachinko hall clerk or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "x" after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric role object 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed as a predetermined symbol. It is configured to be activated (released) only for a period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (fluctuation time) is set so as to be shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state of the game state. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern is performed in a short time during the probability change of the special pattern and during the time saving of the normal pattern, so that the lottery of the normal pattern (second pattern) can be performed more often than during the normal state. can. Therefore, since the chances of winning the normal symbols increase, it is possible to give the player more chances of opening the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, during the probability change of the special pattern or during the time saving of the normal pattern, the winning probability is increased, or the opening time or number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a is increased. is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be set constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one normal symbol hit may be fixed regardless of the game state.

A normal winning hole (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and allows some of the balls that flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. It is configured.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84. Lights up. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern A part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 .

Also, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal winning hole (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (e.g., 8 times). can be Also, the number of normal winning openings (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit and displayed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. FIG.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. FIG.

The first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 are also one of the winning holes (ball holes) from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five. Also, the relationship of the number of prize balls may be reversed.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the electric accessory is displayed. 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the probability variation of the special design and during the time saving of the normal design, the probability of winning the normal design is higher than during the normal state, and the time taken to display the fluctuation of the normal design is short, so the fluctuation of the normal design In the display, the pattern of "○" becomes easy to be displayed. Therefore, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessary 640a is opened during the probability change of the special symbols and during the time saving of the normal symbols is longer than during the normal state.

Therefore, during the probability variation of the special symbol and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning port 640 than in the normal state. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning the jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot a) with which the maximum profit (ball output) is obtained for the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is the same as when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640. The value is set higher than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. - 特許庁

During normal operation, the electric accessory associated with the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. A ball is shot so as to pass through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning in the first prize-winning port 64, there are many chances for a big winning lottery, and a big win is expected. Aiming is more advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, by passing the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state. Since it is easy to win the second prize opening 640, the ball is shot toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right shot"), and a normal prize is won. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by passing through the opening (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and winning the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device B1000 is disposed on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64 (the lower left side of the second prize winning port 640), and a first specific prize winning port B1001 opened in the horizontal direction at the substantially vertical center portion thereof. And a second specific prize winning opening B1002 is provided.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a special symbol lottery performed as a result of winning a prize in the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, a big win is made. The first symbol display device 37 is lit so as to become a stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the first specific prize winning port B1001 or the second specific prize winning port B1002, which is normally closed, is closed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, or 10 balls (specified number) win. up to).

The first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closure, the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of game value (game value) than usual (in this embodiment, , 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of one ball.

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 below the first prize winning port 64 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 640, B1001 and B1002 are guided through an out hole 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Specifically, the variable winning device B1000 includes a first guide plate B1300 that constitutes an open state in which the ball is guided to the first specific winning port B1001 by sliding movement in the front-back direction, and a second guide plate B1300 that operates the first guide plate B1300. 1 solenoid B1410, a second guide plate B1500 that constitutes an open state that guides the ball to the second specific winning hole B1002 by sliding movement in the front and back direction, and a second solenoid B1610 that operates the second guide plate B1500. I have.

The first specific prize winning opening B1001 and the second specific prize winning opening B1002 are normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the case of a big hit, the first solenoid B1410 or the second solenoid B1610 is driven to slide the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 in the front-rear direction, and the ball is placed in the first specific winning hole B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1001. The winning opening B1002 is temporarily formed in an open state in which it is easy to win a prize, and the open state and the normal closed state are alternately repeated.

Next, the variable winning device B1000 will be described. 125, 126 and 127 are front perspective views of the variable winning device B1000. 125 shows the closed state of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, FIG. 126 shows the closed state of the first guide plate B1300 and the open state of the second guide plate B1500, and FIG. 127 shows the first guide plate B1300. , and the closed state of the second guide plate B1500.

In FIGS. 125, 126 and 127, the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is shown transparently except for the outer shape, and the shape of the rear side thereof can be visually recognized in order to improve visibility and facilitate understanding. illustrated as possible.

The variable winning device B1000 first identifies almost all of the balls that have reached the inclined surfaces B1223 and B1243 provided on the upper surface among the balls flowing down the right side of the variable timing device unit 80 when the player hits to the right. It is configured to be able to be guided to a range between the winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 (also referred to as flow path configuration range or pre-entering range).

FIG. 128 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device B1000, and FIG. 129 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device B1000. The variable winning device B1000 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and includes a base member B1100 fixed to the base plate 60, and a flow path configuration range (range before entering a ball) that is fastened and fixed to the base member B1100 from the front side. a first guide plate B1300 configured to be slidable forward from the back side of the base member B1100; a first drive device B1400 for driving the first guide plate B1300; and the base member B1100. a second guide plate B1500 configured to be slidable forward from the back side of the second guide plate B1500; a second driving device B1600 for driving the second guide plate B1500; B1300, the first driving device B1400, the second guide plate B1500, and a rear cover member B1700 configured to cover the second driving device B1600 from the rear side.

The base member B1100 includes a thin plate member B1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, and a first guide plate B1300 and a second guide plate B1500 formed substantially in the center of the thin plate member B1110. A through-formed portion B1120 formed through (with a slightly larger shape) along the through-formed portion B1120, a pair of holding holes B1130, which are through-holes into which a pair of detection sensors B1230 and B1250 are inserted, on both left and right sides of the through-formed portion B1120, and a thin plate. A plurality of protruding portions B1140 protruding toward the front side of the member B1110 toward the flow-down path of the ball, a pair of discharge ports B1150 for discharging the ball from the front side to the back side of the thin plate member B1110, and a pair of A guide port B1160 arranged in the thin plate member B1110 inside the holding hole B1130 in the left-right direction to guide the ball from the front side to the back side, and a detour B1170 for guiding the ball passing through the guide port B1160. .

The penetrating portion B1120 functions as guide means for guiding both the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 at different timings, and also serves as a support hole for supporting the extended support portion B1212 of the covering member B1200. Function.

The penetration formation part B1120 is formed as a symmetrical through hole, and is arranged to face the lower plane B1121 formed in a planar shape extending in a horizontal straight line in the vertical direction and toward the center of the left and right. A ceiling surface B1122 configured to be inclined downward, a pair of left and right support protrusions B1123 projecting inward from the left and right ends in a range between the lower plane B1121 and the ceiling surface B1122, and the pair of support protrusions B1123. A pair of left and right auxiliary protrusions B1124 projecting upward from the lower plane B1121 below the support protrusions B1123.

The ceiling surface B1122 is a surface that faces the rolling surface B1321 of the first guide plate B1300 and the rolling surface B1521 of the second guide plate B1500. It is formed. That is, it is formed so that the angle of inclination with respect to the horizontal plane is 7 degrees and it is inclined downward toward the center of the left and right sides.

The support protrusion B1123 is provided to protrude to a position facing the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 in the vertical direction. It is designed to be along (in this embodiment, parallel to) the plane.

That is, the upper side surface of the support protrusion B1123 is an inclined plane configured to be inclined downward toward the left-right center side of the through-formed portion B1120 at an angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. The side surface is an inclined plane configured to be inclined upward toward the left-right central portion side of the penetration forming portion B1120 at an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. As a result, the support protrusion B1123 can come into contact with the support protrusion B1123 at the left and right end portions of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, which are arranged to face the support protrusion B1123 in the vertical direction. Support stability can be improved.

The auxiliary protrusion B1124 has the same lateral width as the protrusion length of the support protrusion B1123 described above, and its function is also the same as the function of the support protrusion B1123 described above. That is, the upper surface of the auxiliary protrusion B1124 is configured as an inclined plane that is inclined upward toward the left and right central portions of the through-forming portion B1120 at an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. (downstream side end) and arranged to face each other in the vertical direction.

As a result, the left and right outer ends (downstream ends) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the auxiliary protrusions B1124 can come into contact with each other, so that the support stability of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be enhanced.

In particular, the left and right outer ends (downstream ends) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 are portions where the balls are bridged to the openings of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250, so positional stability is required. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the upward displacement of the left and right outer ends (downstream end portions) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 is suppressed by the supporting protrusions B1123, and the downward displacement thereof is suppressed by the auxiliary protrusions B1124. Therefore, the positional stability of the left and right outer ends (downstream ends) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 can be improved.

The protruding part B1140 is a protrusion extending in the vertical direction with a length approximately equal to the radius of a sphere. It is arranged along the flow-down path and protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the falling ball. As a result, the ball guided by the first guide plate B1300 in the open state or the second guide plate B1500 in the open state and flowing down is decelerated by coming into contact with the projecting portion B1140.

The detour route B1170 includes a partition wall portion B1171 extending to the rear side so as to surround the flow-down route of the ball that has passed through the guide port B1160, a closing plate portion B1172 that closes the rear side opening of the partition wall portion B1171, Prepare.

The partition wall portion B1171 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the rear, and an opening through which the ball can pass downward is formed at the downstream end of the ball flow path. The ball that has flowed down the detour route B1170 is discharged from the opening. The flow-down path formed by the partition wall B1171 is configured to merge with the flow-down path of the sphere passing from the left outlet B1150 to the rear side. Accordingly, the ball that has passed through the left discharge port B1150 to the back side is also discharged downward through the opening formed in the partition wall B1171.

In this embodiment, when the ball riding on the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 rolls upstream of the left-right center position, it can contact the projecting portion B1140. The projecting range of the projecting portion B1140 is set so as not to abut on the projecting portion B1140 when rolling on the downstream side, the details of which will be described later.

A similar protruding portion B1211 is also arranged on the covering member B1200 at a position that does not overlap the protruding portion B1140 when viewed in the front-rear direction (they are staggered in the front-rear direction with an interval of about the diameter of a sphere). is done).

The covering member B1200 is composed of a plate-like body member B1210 arranged at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100 on the front side, and a frame-shaped extension extending from the right side of the body member B1210 toward the back side. A right extension portion B1220 provided, a first detection sensor B1230 disposed and fixed to the right extension portion B1220, and a left extension extending in a frame shape from the left side of the main body member B1210 toward the back side. Mainly includes a set portion B1240, a second detection sensor B1250 arranged and fixed on the left extended portion B1240, and a ball guide receiving portion B1260 arranged on the main body member B1210 and guiding the ball to the guide opening B1160. .

In this embodiment, the right extending portion B1220 and the left extending portion B1240 are configured in a symmetrical shape, and the first detection sensor B1230 and the second detection sensor B1250 employ detection sensors having the same shape. .

The ball can flow down in the range surrounded by the main body member B1210, the front view left side wall portion of the right side extension portion B1220, the front view right side wall portion of the left side extension portion B1240, and the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100. Configured. Below, this range is also referred to as a “pre-ball-entering range”.

The main body member B1210 has a plurality of projecting portions B1211 projecting toward the downstream path of the ball on the back side, and an arrangement and a cross-sectional shape that can be inserted through the central portion of the through-formed portion B1120 of the base member B1100. and an extended support portion B1212 extending to the rear side.

In addition, the effect|action by arrangement|positioning of the projecting part B1211 and the effect|action by the shape of extended support part B1212 are mentioned later.

Body member B1210 is formed from a light transmissive material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the pre-entering range. The form of the main body member B1210 is not limited to this, and may be partially opaque.

In particular, the vicinity of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the vicinity of the second specific winning opening B1002, the vicinity of the straight path that guides the ball to the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002, and the first specific winning opening Even if the range except the vicinity of the guide portions B1222 and B1242 where the ball passing through B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1002 flows down is made impermeable, the visibility of the ball is not significantly affected. Therefore, a seal member having a shape that covers a range other than these ranges may be prepared and pasted, and a design surface with figures, patterns, etc. printed on the surface side of the seal member may be formed. You can improve your sexuality.

Further, a light emitting means such as an LED for emitting light to the front side may be arranged on the back side of the main body member B1210 so that the degree of light transmission of the main body member B1210 can be changed (for example, transmissive liquid crystal).

In the assembled state (see FIG. 125), the extended support part B1212 is inserted through the penetration formation part B1120 of the base member B1100, and the lower part thereof is arranged so as to ride on the lower plane B1121 of the penetration formation part B1120. That is, the extended support portion B1212 is supported by the through-formed portion B1120 on the extended end side, and supported by the main body member B1210 on the base end side and the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100. As a result, the positional stability of the extended support portion B1212 can be increased while the weight of the ball is applied to the extended support portion B1212.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 125), the extension support portion B1212 is not limited to the through-formed portion B1120, but is further extended rearward, and the sliding portions B1313 and B1323 of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 The sliding portions B1513 and B1523 of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are always opposed (abutted) regardless of the arrangement of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. As a result, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be stably guided in the front-rear direction.

The right extending portion B1220 has a sensor support portion B1221 formed so as to be able to support the first detection sensor B1230 at the left end, and a ball that has passed through the first detection sensor B1230 supported by the sensor support portion B1221. A guide portion B1222 formed so as to be able to guide to the discharge port B1150, an inclined surface B1223 formed so as to incline downward toward the left side in the front view of the ceiling portion, and a left side projecting from the left side. It has a ridge portion B1224 and a ridge support portion B1225 projecting leftward below the ridge portion B1224.

The protrusion B1224 protrudes from the vicinity of the upper end of the first detection sensor B1230 substantially parallel to the direction of inclination of the inclined surface B1243, thereby narrowing the entrance path of the ball to the first detection sensor B1230.

The ridge support portion B1225 projects from the vicinity of the lower end of the first detection sensor B1230 substantially parallel to the opening direction of the first specific prize winning opening B1001, thereby guiding the sliding displacement of the first guide plate B1300, which will be described later. It works.

The first detection sensor B1230 has a through hole as the first specific winning opening B1001. When the ball passes through the first specific winning hole B1001, the passage is detected by the first detection sensor B1230, a signal is transmitted to the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4), and the winning number is counted.

The left extending portion B1240 has a sensor support portion B1241 formed to be able to support the second detection sensor B1250 at the right end, and a ball passing through the second detection sensor B1250 supported by the sensor support portion B1241 on the back side. A guide portion B1242 formed so as to be able to guide to the discharge port B1150, an inclined surface B1243 formed so as to incline downward toward the right side in the front view of the ceiling portion, and a right side projecting rightward from the right side surface. It has a plurality of ridges B1244 and a ridge support B1245 projecting rightward below the ridges B1244.

The protrusion B1244 protrudes from the vicinity of the upper end of the second detection sensor B1250 substantially parallel to the direction of inclination of the inclined surface B1243, thereby narrowing the entrance path of the ball to the second detection sensor B1250.

The ridge support portion B1245 projects from the vicinity of the lower end of the second detection sensor B1250 substantially parallel to the opening direction of the second specific prize winning opening B1002, thereby guiding the sliding displacement of the second guide plate B1500, which will be described later. It works.

The second detection sensor B1250 has a through hole as the second specific winning opening B1002. When the ball passes through the second specific winning hole B1002, the passage is detected by the second detection sensor B1250, a signal is transmitted to the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4), and the winning number is counted.

The ball guide receiving portion B1260 is configured and arranged so that a ball entering inside is guided to the guide port B1160 on the back side and discharged to the back side of the thin plate member B1110.

The first guide plate B1300 is supported to be slidably displaceable forward and backward, and is in a state of protruding to the front side of the thin plate member B1110, and is capable of guiding (rolling) the ball toward the first specific winning hole B1001. and a closed state in which the ball is dropped, which is an open state and a state in which the ball is pulled to the rear side of the open state. an upstream member B1320 arranged upstream of the guide member B1310 and capable of guiding the ball to the guide member B1310; the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320 and a transmission hole B1340 formed in the coupling fixing member B1330 and involved in transmission of driving force from the first driving device B1400.

The guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320 are portions that are inserted through the base member B1100 from the front side at the time of assembly. assembled to member B1330). Details of the assembly method will be described later.

The guide member B1310 is a member that includes a left and right long plate-like portion, and has a width in the lateral direction that is about the diameter of a sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction can be arranged close to the first detection sensor B1230. A rolling surface B1311 formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the ball rolls, an upward extending portion B1312 extending obliquely upward from the front end on the right end side, and a left side It is provided with a sliding portion B1313 that is slidable on the extension support portion B1212, and a connection extension portion B1314 that extends to the back side of the plate-like portion and is connected to the connection fixing member B1330.

In addition, the rolling surface B1311 is formed as an inclined surface inclined downward to the right by 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal when viewed from the front.

The upwardly extending portion B1312 is a portion for preventing an unexpected entry of the ball into the first specific winning hole B1001. That is, when the first guide plate B1310 is closed when the first guide plate B1310 is closed, the upwardly extending portion B1312 is arranged inside the opening that constitutes the first specific winning opening B1001. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first specific winning hole B1001.

On the other hand, in the open state of the first guide plate B1310, it is arranged outside the opening that constitutes the first specific winning hole B1001, so that it is possible to avoid obstructing the entry of the ball into the first specific winning hole B1001. can.

In addition, the upwardly extending portion B1312 is formed to have a dimension that abuts on the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 when the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state. Thereby, in the open state of the first guide plate B1300, it is possible to increase the frictional resistance generated between the front side surface of the upper extending portion B1312 and the main body member B1210.

As a result, the vertical position of the downstream end of the guide member B1310 can be stabilized. That is, it is possible to prevent the downstream end portion of the guide member B1310 from being displaced downward (sinking displacement) or displaced upward (for example, upward displacement caused by the impact of the bounce of the ball).

In the present embodiment, the upper extending portion B1312 is formed to protrude toward the front side from the front end portions of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321, and the front end portions of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 are formed by the covering member. It stops at a position where the gap between B1200 and body member B1210 is less than the radius of the sphere. As a result, while maintaining the effect of stabilizing the vertical position of the guide member B1310 as described above, it is possible to shorten the formation width of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 and reduce the material cost. In addition, since the gap is less than the radius of the sphere, the lower end of the sphere can be placed on the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 when the first guide plate B1300 is opened. It is possible to facilitate the meandering of the ball rolling on B1321 back and forth.

Further, the upwardly extending portion B1312 is formed with an inclined surface B1312a on the opposite side of the first detection sensor B1230. The inclined surface B1312a functions to guide the ball toward the first detection sensor B1230 by being formed so as to move the contacting ball toward the back side when the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state.

In addition, the inclined surface B1312a is formed so that the contacting ball can be moved to the opposite side in the left-right direction of the first detection sensor B1230 when the first guide plate B1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state. to separate the ball from the first detection sensor B1230 and prevent (cut off) the ball from entering excessively.

As a result, the inclined surface B1312a makes it difficult for balls to enter the first detection sensor B1230 in a smooth manner, while making it difficult for balls to enter the first detection sensor B1230 in excess of the specified number.

The shape of the sliding portion B1313 is such that the side surfaces facing the lower right side surface B1215 and the right middle inclined surface B1217 of the extended support portion B1212 are planar parallel to the opposing side surfaces. In addition, the relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

The connecting extension portion B1314 is arranged on the left side (upstream side member B1320 side) from the longitudinal middle position of the guide member B1310.

The upstream member B1320 is a member including a left and right long plate-like portion, and is configured so that the width in the lateral direction is about the diameter of a sphere, and the left end in the longitudinal direction reaches the position below the ridge portion B1244. A rolling surface B1321 formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the ball rolls, a sliding portion B1323 on the right side that is slidable on the extended support portion B1212, and a plate-like portion. A connecting extension portion B1324 that extends to the rear side and is connected to the connecting fixing member B1330, and a formation portion that is formed so that the front side portion is removed while leaving the rear side end portion on the upper end side of the rolling surface B1321. B1325. The details of the inclination of the rolling surface B1321 will be described later.

The shape of the sliding portion B1323 is such that the side surface facing the upper left inclined surface B1214 of the extended support portion B1212 is a plane parallel to the opposing side surface. In addition, the relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

The connecting extension portion B1324 is arranged to the right side (toward the guide member B1310) from the longitudinal middle position of the upstream member B1320.

The formation portion B1325 is a portion that is cut for the purpose of avoiding collision with the upward extension portion B1512 of the second guide plate B1500 when the first guide plate B1300 is displaced. That is, the forming portion B1325 is formed with a sufficient horizontal width to avoid collision with the upwardly extending portion B1512.

On the other hand, the rear end portion of the notch of the forming portion B1325 (the portion arranged to face the upper extending portion B1512) can contact when the first guide plate B1300 is arranged at the front position (open state). It is formed. As a result, frictional resistance can be generated between the upstream member B1320 and the upward extension portion B1512 in the open state of the first guide plate B1300, so that the positional stability of the upstream member B1320 can be improved. .

The connection fixing member B1330 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with a thin upper and lower thickness, and includes a plurality of receiving portions B1331 formed so as to receive the connecting extension portions B1314 and B1324.

In this embodiment, the receiving portion B1331 is formed as a recess that is recessed in a shape corresponding to the rear ends of the connecting extensions B1314 and B1324. By engaging with the ends, the connecting extensions B1314 and B1324 are prevented from being dislocated with respect to the connecting fixing member B1330.

In addition, a fastening screw is inserted through an insertion hole (not shown) vertically drilled in the connecting extensions B1314 and B1324, and the inserted fastening screw is formed in the connecting fixing member B1330 in the vertical direction. By being screwed into the female thread provided therein, the connecting extension portions B1314 and B1324 are configured to be fastened and fixed to the connecting fixing member B1330.

The transmission hole B1340 includes a straight portion B1341 that extends linearly in the left-right direction, and a curved portion B1342 that extends from the right end of the straight portion B1341 along an arc centered on the projecting shaft portion B1432 of the first driving device B1400. Although it is configured as a through hole, its function will be described later.

The first drive device B1400 includes a first solenoid B1410 that linearly operates a movable member by switching excitation, a linear motion member B1420 fixed to the tip of a plunger (linear motion rod) of the first solenoid B1410, and a linear motion member B1420. A rotary member B1430 is provided, in which a short protruding portion B1434 is connected to the moving member B1420 and is rotatably supported about the protruding shaft portion B1432.

The direct-acting member B1420 has a through hole B1421 formed on the side opposite to the side fixed to the first solenoid B1410. The through hole B1421 is formed as a longitudinally elongated hole so as to receive the displacement of the short projecting portion B1434 of the rotating member B1430.

The rotating member B1430 includes a bent rod-shaped main body B1431, a projecting shaft B1432 projecting in the vertical direction from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body B1431, and an end of the main body B1431 projecting. A longitudinal projecting portion B1433 projecting in a columnar shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft portion B1432 from an end portion (first end portion) disposed on the left side of the shaft portion B1432, and an end portion of the main body portion B1431. a short projecting portion B1434 projecting in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft B1432 from an end (second end) that can be arranged on the right side of the projecting shaft B1432; Prepare.

The projecting shaft portion B1432 is supported by the rear cover member B1700, the details of which will be described later.

Since the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is inserted through the transmission hole B1340, the rotational movement of the rotating member B1430 displaces the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 along an arc trajectory centered on the projecting shaft portion B1432. Accordingly, the first guide plate B1300 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The short protruding portion B1434 is inserted into the through hole B1421, and is displaced as the through hole B1421 is displaced by the linear motion member B1420 being linearly displaced by switching the excitation state of the first solenoid B1410. .

The displacement of the short projecting portion B1434 is rotational displacement about the projecting shaft portion B1432. Since the short projecting portion B1434 and the long projecting portion B1433 are integrally formed via the body portion B1431, the long projecting portion B1433 is also rotationally displaced in correspondence with the displacement of the short projecting portion B1434.

In this embodiment, the shape of the curved portion B1342 of the transmission hole B1340 is an arc centered on the protruding shaft portion B1432, the radius of which is equal to the distance between the protruding shaft portion B1432 and the longitudinal protruding portion B1433. It has a shape that conforms to

As a result, the accuracy required for the amount of displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 for causing displacement of the first guide plate B1300 can be reduced. This effect is obtained by shifting the amount of displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 and the amount of displacement of the first guide plate B1300 accompanying the displacement of the transmission hole B1340.

More specifically, the first guide plate B1300 is displaced when the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 displaces the linear portion B1341. On the other hand, when the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is arranged on the curved portion B1342, the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is only displaced along the curved portion B1342, and the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 moves along the inner wall of the transmission hole B1340. is not generated in the longitudinal direction, the displacement of the first guide plate B1300 is not generated.

Therefore, as long as the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is arranged in the curved portion B1342, the displacement amount of the first guide plate B1300 is can be kept constant.

In other words, the curved portion B1342 can be used as a portion that absorbs the error in the amount of displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B1433. Therefore, for example, even if the displacement amount of the rotating member B1430 is insufficient due to deformation of the shape of the through hole B1421 due to aged deterioration, or insufficient displacement amount of the plunger of the first solenoid B1410 in the excited state, the shortage can be absorbed by the curved portion B1342, and the amount of displacement of the first guide plate B1300 can be kept constant.

The distance between the longitudinal protrusion B1433 and the protrusion shaft B1432 is designed to be longer than the distance between the short protrusion B1434 and the protrusion shaft B1432. As a result, the displacement amount of the first guide plate B1300 can be ensured while suppressing the displacement amount of the linear motion member B1420 (the displacement amount of the plunger of the first solenoid B1410).

Since the second guide plate B1500 is basically configured to have a symmetrically inverted shape of the first guide plate B1300, its functions are common except that they are opposite in the left-right direction.

That is, the second guide plate B1500 is supported so as to be slidably displaceable forward and backward, and is in a state of protruding forward from the thin plate member B1110, and guides (rolls) the ball toward the second specific winning hole B1002. and a closed state in which the ball is dropped, which is an open state in which the ball is dropped, and a second specific winning opening B1002. A guide member B1510 arranged so as to be able to guide the ball, an upstream member B1520 arranged upstream of the guide member B1510 and arranged so as to be able to guide the ball to the guide member B1510, the guide member B1510 and the upstream side A connecting fixing member B1530 to which the member B1520 is fixed, and a transmission hole B1540 formed in the connecting fixing member B1530 and involved in the transmission of the driving force from the second driving device B1600.

The guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are portions that are inserted through the base member B1100 from the front side at the time of assembly. assembled to member B1530). Details of the assembly method will be described later.

The guide member B1510 is a member that includes a left and right long plate-like portion, and has a lateral width that is approximately the diameter of a sphere. A rolling surface B1511 formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the ball rolls, an upper extending portion B1512 extending obliquely upward from the front end on the left end side, and a right side portion It is provided with a sliding portion B1513 that is slidable on the extension support portion B1212, and a connection extension portion B1514 that extends to the rear side of the plate-like portion and is connected to the connection fixing member B1530.

In addition, the rolling surface B1511 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward to the left by 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal when viewed from the front.

The upwardly extending portion B1512 is a portion for preventing an unexpected entry of the ball into the second specific winning hole B1002. That is, when the second guide plate B1510 is closed, the upwardly extending portion B1512 is arranged inside the opening forming the second specific winning opening B1002 when viewed in the opening direction of the second specific winning opening B1002. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second specific winning hole B1002.

On the other hand, in the open state of the second guide plate B1510, it is arranged outside the opening that constitutes the second specific winning hole B1002, so that it is possible to avoid obstructing the ball entering the second specific winning hole B1002. can.

In addition, the upwardly extending portion B1512 is formed to have a dimension that abuts on the body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 when the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state. Thereby, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, it is possible to increase the frictional resistance generated between the front side surface of the upper extending portion B1512 and the main body member B1210.

As a result, the vertical position of the downstream end of the guide member B1510 can be stabilized. That is, it is possible to prevent the downstream end of the guide member B1510 from being displaced downward (sinking displacement) or displaced upward (for example, upward displacement caused by the impact of the bounce of the ball).

In this embodiment, the upwardly extending portion B1512 is formed to protrude toward the front side from the front end portions of the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521. It stops at a position where the gap between B1200 and body member B1210 is less than the radius of the sphere. As a result, while maintaining the effect of stabilizing the vertical position of the guide member B1510 as described above, it is possible to shorten the formation width of the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 and reduce the material cost. In addition, since the clearance is less than the radius of the sphere, the lower end of the sphere can be placed on the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 when the second guide plate B1500 is opened. It is possible to facilitate the meandering of the ball rolling on the B1521 back and forth.

Further, the upwardly extending portion B1512 is formed with an inclined surface B1512a on the opposite side of the second detection sensor B1250. The inclined surface B1512a functions to guide the ball toward the second detection sensor B1250 by being formed so as to move the contacting ball toward the back side when the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state.

In addition, the inclined surface B1512a is formed so that when the second guide plate B1500 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the contacting ball can be moved to the left-right direction opposite side of the second detection sensor B1250. moves the ball away from the second detection sensor B1250 and functions to prevent (cut off) the ball from entering excessively.

As a result, the inclined surface B1512a can make it difficult for a ball to enter the second detection sensor B1250 in a smooth manner while exceeding the prescribed number of balls.

The shape of the sliding portion B1513 is such that the side surfaces facing the lower left side surface B1216 and the left middle inclined surface B1218 of the extended support portion B1212 are planar parallel to the opposing side surfaces. In addition, the relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

The connecting extension portion B1514 is arranged on the left side (on the opposite side of the upstream member B1520) from the longitudinal middle position of the guide member B1510.

The upstream member B1520 is a member including a left-right long plate-like portion, and has a width in the lateral direction approximately equal to the diameter of a sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction reaches a position below the ridge portion B1224. A rolling surface B1521 formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the ball rolls; A connecting extension portion B1524 that extends to the rear side and is connected to the connecting fixing member B1530, and a formation portion that is formed so that the front side portion is removed while leaving the rear side end portion on the upper end side of the rolling surface B1521. B1525. Details of the inclination of the rolling surface B1521 will be described later.

The shape of the sliding portion B1523 is such that the side surface facing the upper right inclined surface B1213 of the extended support portion B1212 is a plane parallel to the opposing side surface. In addition, the relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

The connecting extension portion B1524 is arranged on the right side (on the opposite side of the guide member B1510) from the longitudinal middle position of the upstream member B1520.

The forming portion B1525 is a portion cut for the purpose of avoiding collision with the upwardly extending portion B1312 of the first guide plate B1300 when the second guide plate B1500 is displaced. That is, the forming portion B1525 is formed with a sufficient lateral width to avoid collision with the upwardly extending portion B1312.

On the other hand, the rear end portion of the notch of the forming portion B1525 (the portion facing the upper extending portion B1312) can contact when the second guide plate B1500 is arranged at the front position (open state). It is formed. As a result, frictional resistance can be generated between the upstream member B1520 and the upwardly extending portion B1312 in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, so the positional stability of the upstream member B1520 can be improved. .

The connection fixing member B1530 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with a thin top and bottom thickness, and includes a plurality of receiving portions B1531 formed so as to receive the connecting extension portions B1514 and B1524.

In this embodiment, the receiving portion B1531 is formed as a recess that is recessed in a shape corresponding to the rear ends of the connecting extensions B1514 and B1524. By engaging with the ends, the connecting extensions B1514 and B1524 are prevented from being dislocated with respect to the connecting fixing member B1530.

In addition, a fastening screw is inserted through an insertion hole (not shown) vertically drilled in the connecting extensions B1514 and B1524, and the inserted fastening screw is formed in the connecting fixing member B1530 in the vertical direction. By being screwed into the female thread provided therein, the connecting extension portions B1514 and B1524 are configured to be fastened and fixed to the connecting fixing member B1530.

The transmission hole B1540 includes a straight portion B1541 that extends linearly in the left-right direction, and a curved portion B1542 that extends from the right end of the straight portion B1541 along an arc centered on the projecting shaft B1632 of the second driving device B1600. Although it is configured as a through hole, its function will be described later.

As described above, the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 have substantially the same configuration, but there are portions that differ in shape and arrangement. In particular, the shape and arrangement of the connecting fixing member B1330 of the first guide plate B1300 and the shape and arrangement of the connecting fixing member B1530 of the second guide plate B1500 are different. The arrangement and extension length of B1314 and B1324 are different from the arrangement and extension length of the coupling extension portions B1514 and B1524 of the second guide plate B1500.

Specifically, the connecting fixing member B1330 is formed to have a shorter lateral length than the connecting fixing member B1530, and is arranged on the front side. Along with this, the connecting extensions B1314 and B1324 are shorter in length in the front-rear direction than the connecting extensions B1514 and B1524, and are arranged on the left and right inner sides. As a result, collision between the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 can be avoided, the details of which will be described later.

The second drive device B1600 includes a second solenoid B1610 that linearly operates a movable member by switching excitation, a linear motion member B1620 fixed to the tip of a plunger (linear motion rod) of the second solenoid B1610, and a linear motion member B1620. A rotation member B1630 is provided, in which a short projecting portion B1634 is connected to the moving member B1620 and is rotatably supported around the projecting shaft portion B1632.

The direct-acting member B1620 has a through hole B1621 formed on the side opposite to the side fixed to the second solenoid B1610. The through hole B1621 is formed as a longitudinally elongated hole so as to receive the displacement of the short projecting portion B1634 of the rotating member B1630.

The rotary member B1630 includes a bent rod-shaped main body B1631, a projecting shaft B1632 projecting in the vertical direction from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body B1631, and an end of the main body B1631 projecting. A longitudinal projecting portion B1633 projecting in a columnar shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft portion B1632 from an end portion (first end portion) disposed on the left side of the shaft portion B1632, and an end portion of the main body portion B1631. a short projecting portion B1634 projecting in a columnar shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft B1632 from an end (second end) that can be arranged on the right side of the projecting shaft B1632; Prepare.

The projecting shaft portion B1632 is supported by the rear cover member B1700, the details of which will be described later.

Since the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is inserted through the transmission hole B1540, the rotational movement of the rotating member B1630 displaces the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 along an arc trajectory centered on the projecting shaft portion B1632. Accordingly, the second guide plate B1500 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The short protruding portion B1634 is inserted into the through hole B1621, and is displaced as the through hole B1621 is displaced by the linear motion member B1620 being linearly displaced by switching the excitation state of the second solenoid B1610. .

The displacement of the short projecting portion B1634 is rotational displacement about the projecting shaft portion B1632. Since the short projecting portion B1634 and the long projecting portion B1633 are integrally formed via the body portion B1631, the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is also rotationally displaced in correspondence with the displacement of the short projecting portion B1634.

In this embodiment, the shape of the curved portion B1542 of the transmission hole B1540 is an arc centered on the protruding shaft portion B1632, the radius of which is equal to the distance between the protruding shaft portion B1632 and the longitudinal protruding portion B1633. It has a shape that conforms to

As a result, the accuracy required for the amount of displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 for causing displacement of the second guide plate B1500 can be reduced. This effect is obtained by shifting the amount of displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 and the amount of displacement of the second guide plate B1500 accompanying the displacement of the transmission hole B1540.

More specifically, the second guide plate B1500 is displaced when the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 displaces the linear portion B1541. On the other hand, when the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is arranged on the curved portion B1542, the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is only displaced along the curved portion B1542, and the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 moves along the inner wall of the transmission hole B1540. in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the second guide plate B1500 does not occur.

Therefore, as long as the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is arranged in the curved portion B1542, the displacement amount of the second guide plate B1500 is can be kept constant.

In other words, the curved portion B1542 can be used as a portion that absorbs the error in the amount of displacement of the longitudinal projecting portion B1633. Therefore, even if the amount of displacement of the rotating member B1630 is insufficient due to, for example, the shape of the through hole B1621 being deformed due to deterioration over time, or the amount of displacement of the plunger of the second solenoid B1610 in the excited state being insufficient, the amount of displacement of the rotary member B1630 is insufficient. can be absorbed by the curved portion B1542, and the amount of displacement of the second guide plate B1500 can be kept constant.

The distance between the longitudinal protrusion B1633 and the protrusion shaft B1632 is designed to be longer than the distance between the short protrusion B1634 and the protrusion shaft B1632. As a result, the displacement amount of the second guide plate B1500 can be ensured while suppressing the displacement amount of the linear motion member B1620 (the displacement amount of the plunger of the second solenoid B1610).

The rear cover member B1700 includes a main body portion B1710 having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of left and right connecting plate portions B1720 extending from the front end portion of the main body portion B1710 to the left and right outer sides and constituting a connecting surface with the thin plate member B1110, and a main body. A first support plate B1730 disposed at the left and right inner lower ends of the portion B1710 and capable of supporting the first solenoid B1410 on the upper surface side, and a first guide plate B1300 disposed above the first support plate B1730 are connected. A second support plate B1740 arranged such that its upper surface contacts the lower surface of the fixing member B1330, and the lower surface contacts the upper surface of the connection fixing member B1530 of the second guide plate B1500 arranged above the second support plate B1740. A third support plate B1750 arranged to be in contact with the third support plate B1750, and a second solenoid B1610 arranged above the third support plate B1750 and at the left and right inner upper end positions of the main body B1710 so that the second solenoid B1610 can be supported on the lower surface side. and a fourth support plate B1760.

The main body B1710 is configured so that the first support plate B1730 can be disassembled downward and the fourth support plate B1760 can be disassembled upward. That is, the first driving device B1400 including the first solenoid B1410 supported by the first supporting plate B1730 and the second driving device B1600 including the second solenoid B1610 supported by the fourth supporting plate B1760 are connected to the main body B1710. can be removed in the vertical direction from the

The coupling plate portion B1720 includes a receiving portion B1721 through which the screw portion of the fastening screw can be inserted. The rear cover member B1700 is fastened and fixed to the thin plate member B1110 by screwing the fastening screw inserted through the receiving portion B1721 into the female threaded portion of the thin plate member B1110.

The first support plate B1730 is arranged rearward of the front end position of the coupling plate portion B1720, and has a discharge portion B1731 for forming a gap between the first support plate B1730 and the thin plate member B1110.

The ejection part B1731 forms a through hole with the thin plate member B1110 through which the ball ejected from the ejection port B1150 passes. Balls discharged from this through hole (balls discharged from the discharge port B1150 or the detour B1170) are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The second support plate B1740 has a concave portion B1741 for allowing the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 of the first driving device B1400 to pass through in the vertical direction. The formation range of the recessed portion B1741 is formed to be as small as possible on the premise that it is a range that includes the movement trajectory of the longitudinal projecting portion B1433. As a result, a flat portion other than the recessed portion B1741 can be secured, and the connecting fixing member B1330 of the first guide plate B1300 can be stably supported.

The third support plate B1750 has a concave portion B1751 for allowing the longitudinal protrusion B1633 of the second driving device B1600 to pass through in the vertical direction. The formation range of the recessed portion B1751 is formed to be as small as possible on the premise that it is a range that includes the movement trajectory of the longitudinal projecting portion B1633. As a result, a flat portion other than the recessed portion B1751 can be secured, and the connecting fixing member B1530 of the second guide plate B1500 can be stably surface-supported from the upper surface side.

Here, an example of a method of assembling the variable winning device B1000 and a method of assembling it to the base plate 60 will be described. Only the covering member B1200, the guide members B1310 and B1510 of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 are assembled from the front side to the thin plate member B1110, and the others are assembled from the rear side.

In assembling the variable prize winning device B1000, first, the guide members B1310, B1510 and the upstream members B1320, B1520 are inserted from the front side of the thin plate member B1110 into the through formation portion B1120, and the connection fixing member is attached to the back side of the thin plate member B1110. Fasten and fix with B1330 and B1530.

Next, the rear cover member B1700 from which the first support plate B1730 and the fourth support plate B1760 are removed is fastened and fixed to the thin plate member B1110. At this time, the connection fixing members B1330 and B1530 are accommodated inside the second support plate B1740 and the third support plate B1750 in the vertical direction.

Next, the first support plate B1730 to which the first driving device B1400 is assembled is assembled to the main body portion B1710 while the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is inserted into the transmission hole B1340 of the first guide plate B1300. Similarly, the fourth support plate B1760 to which the second driving device B1600 is assembled is assembled to the main body portion B1710 while the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is inserted through the transmission hole B1540 of the second guide plate B1500.

After fastening and fixing the covering member B1200 to the thin plate member B1110, the variable winning device B1000 can be assembled to the base plate 60 by assembling the variable winning device B1000 to the base plate 60 from the front side and fastening and fixing.

The closed state of the second guide plate B1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. FIG. 130 is a front view of the variable winning device B1000, and FIG. 131 is a sectional view of the variable winning device B1000 along line CXXXI-CXXXI of FIG. 130 and 131, the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are in a closed state, and in FIG. The shape is made visible.

In FIG. 130, in the pre-entering range, at least a part of the range through which the ball cannot pass is supplementarily marked with polka dots (dots). 130, the extended support portion B1212 is formed over the range between the base member B1100 and the covering member B1200, thereby forming a sphere. The upper extending portions B1312 and B1512 are configured to be unable to pass through, and are configured to be unable to pass the sphere by being arranged at a substantially intermediate position between the base member B1100 and the covering member B1200.

As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, when the second guide plate B1500 is closed, the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are guided by the through formation portion B1120 and are closer to the rear side than the front plate surface of the thin plate member B1110. By arranging the base member B1100 at the top, the gap between the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100 and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 can be maintained without narrowing.

The thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100 and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 are arranged side by side with a space that allows a ball to pass through. It is possible to drop the ball that has reached between the installation portion B1240 and the variable winning device B1000.

As shown in FIG. 131, in the closed state of the second guide plate B1500, the upward extending portion B1512 is arranged to partially close the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the second specific winning hole B1002.

Therefore, irregular prize winning (for example, even if the ball is not guided by the second guide plate B1500, it hits another component, etc., is thrown laterally and enters the second special prize winning opening B1002), cheating, etc. (For example, the act of attracting a ball with a magnet to win a prize, or the act of winning a prize by manipulating the position of the ball by pulling or shaking the end of the string on the opposite side of the ball launched with the string glued) It is possible to prevent winning by

The open state of the second guide plate B1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. FIG. 132(a) is a front view of the variable winning device B1000, FIG. 132(b) is a partially enlarged front view of the variable winning device B1000 in range CXXXIIb of FIG. 132(a), and FIG. 132(a) is a cross-sectional view of variable prize winning device B1000 taken along line CXXXIII-CXXXIII of FIG.

132(a), 132(b) and 133, the first guide plate B1300 is closed, the second guide plate B1500 is opened, and FIGS. 132(a) and 132(b) ), the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is illustrated transparently, and the shape of the rear side thereof can be visually recognized. Also, in FIG. 132(a), a ball passing through the second detection sensor B1250 is illustrated as an example of a falling ball, and in FIG. illustrated.

In FIGS. 132(a) and 132(b), at least a part of the range where the ball cannot pass is supplementarily marked with polka dots (dots) in the pre-ball entry range. 132(a) and 132(b), the plate-like portions of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are added to the range described above in FIG. On the other hand, the polka dot pattern (dots) is erased from the upper extending portion B1512.

That is, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the second guide plate B1500 is slid to the front side, so that the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510, the upstream member B1520, and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 are separated. The gap between is set to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the sphere is configured to be unable to pass downward on the front side of the second guide plate B1500.

On the other hand, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the upwardly extending portion B1512 is arranged close to the covering member B1200 so as not to interfere with the entry of the ball into the second specific winning hole B1002.

As shown in FIGS. 132(a), 132(b), and 133, when the second guide plate B1500 is opened, the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are guided to the through formation portion B1120, and the thin plate member B1110 overhangs the front plate surface to the front side, and the distance between the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 and the body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is set to be less than the diameter of the sphere, thereby extending to the right side. A ball reaching between the portion B1220 and the left extending portion B1240 is prevented from falling.

In this embodiment, since the distance between the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 and the body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is less than the radius of the sphere, the lower end of the sphere is the rolling surface. Take B1311, B1321. As a result, the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 can be easily meandered in the longitudinal direction of the rolling ball.

As shown in FIG. 133, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the upwardly extending portion B1512 is arranged at a position not blocking the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. Specifically, it is moved to a position overlapping the frame forming the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. Therefore, the ball can pass through the second specific winning opening B1002.

In the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the ball that reaches between the right extended portion B1220 and the left extended portion B1240 rolls on the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 of the second guide plate B1500 along the inclination, It passes through the second detection sensor B1250 from the left end.

In the open state of the second guide plate B1500, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 and the body member B1210 of the covering member B1200. As a result, compared to the case where the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are formed to be large enough to abut against the main body member B1210, the required material can be reduced, and compared to the case where they abut. Since the occurrence of load can be prevented, an advantageous effect such as improving the durability of the second guide plate B1500 can be obtained.

Here, with reference to FIG. 132(b), the action of the extended support portion B1212 on the longitudinal slide displacement of the second guide plate B1500 will be described. As described above, the extension support portion B1212 extends to the rear of the through formation portion B1120, and can abut on the second guide plate B1500 in the vertical direction regardless of the arrangement of the second guide plate B1500.

As shown in FIG. 132(b), the extended support portion B1212 has a main body portion having a laterally elongated diamond-shaped cross section and a lower end portion of the main body portion, and has a horizontally long rectangular cross section. A lower support portion formed in a pentagonal shape with a triangle on the upper side is provided, and a space between the main body portion and the lower support portion is configured to be constricted left and right inward.

The main body portion of the extended support portion B1212 has an upper right inclined surface formed on the upper surface thereof as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the left and right outer sides with the horizontal center position that coincides with the horizontal direction center of the projecting portion B1211 as the vertex. B1213, an upper left inclined surface B1214, and a lower right side surface B1215 and a lower left side surface B1216 that constitute the upper side surface of the constriction formed between the lower support portion.

The lower support portion of the extended support portion B1212 is formed on its upper surface as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the left and right outer sides with the left-right center position corresponding to the left-right center of the projecting portion B1211 as the vertex. It has an arrangement inclined surface B1217 and a left central arrangement inclined surface B1218.

The upper right inclined surface B1213 is arranged to face the lower surface of the sliding portion B1523, and has a shape corresponding to the lower surface of the sliding portion B1523 (in the present embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the lower surface of the sliding portion B1523). and configured to allow surface contact. As a result, it is possible to stably guide the longitudinal displacement of the sliding portion B1523 while suppressing the downward displacement of the sliding portion B1523.

The upper left inclined surface B1214 is arranged to face the lower surface of the sliding portion B1323, and has a shape corresponding to the lower surface of the sliding portion B1323 (in the present embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the lower surface of the sliding portion B1323). and configured to allow surface contact. As a result, it is possible to stably guide the longitudinal displacement of the sliding portion B1323 while suppressing the downward displacement of the sliding portion B1523.

The lower right side surface B1215 is arranged to face the upper side surface of the sliding portion B1313, and has a shape corresponding to the upper side surface of the sliding portion B1313 (in this embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the upper plane of the sliding portion B1313). and configured to allow surface contact. In addition, the right central inclined surface B1217 is arranged to face the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1313, and has a shape corresponding to the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1313 (in this embodiment, it is parallel to the lower side plane of the sliding portion B1313). planar) and configured to allow surface contact. As a result, it is possible to stably guide the longitudinal displacement of the sliding portion B1313 while suppressing the vertical displacement of the sliding portion B1313.

The lower left side surface B1216 is arranged to face the upper side surface of the sliding portion B1513, and has a shape corresponding to the upper side surface of the sliding portion B1513 (in this embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the upper plane of the sliding portion B1513). It is configured so that surface contact is possible. In addition, the left central inclined surface B1218 is arranged to face the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1513, and has a shape corresponding to the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1513 (in this embodiment, it is parallel to the lower side plane of the sliding portion B1513). planar) and configured to allow surface contact. As a result, it is possible to stably guide the longitudinal displacement of the sliding portion B1513 while suppressing the vertical displacement of the sliding portion B1513.

In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, as shown in FIG. It is formed on the same plane as the plane on which the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 are arranged, and the lower right arranged side surface B1215 and the left middle arranged inclined surface B1218 are arranged on the same plane as the lower surfaces of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520. , and the lower left side surface B1216 and the right middle inclined surface B1217 are designed to be formed on the same plane as the lower surfaces of the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320.

On the other hand, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is naturally conceivable that each surface formed on the extended support portion B1212 is not only flat, but also has a shape including other shapes (curved surface shape, uneven shape, saw blade shape, etc.).

In particular, it is functionally significant that the upper right inclined surface B1213 and the upper left inclined surface B1214, which function as rolling surfaces of spheres, are planar. By matching the shapes of the moving parts B1313, B1323, B1513, and B1523, the above-described effects can be produced.

In that case, as a design concept, it is considered that, compared to line contact, surface contact improves the function of guiding displacement, but also increases frictional resistance. In this embodiment, the lateral width of the extended support portion B1212 is designed so as to reduce the frictional resistance while ensuring the action of guiding the displacement.

In addition, the sliding portions B1313, B1323, B1513, and B1523 are shaped so as to be able to guide the ball even in a configuration in which the extended support portion B1212 is omitted. That is, both the sliding portions B1313 and B1323 of the first guide plate B1300 and the sliding portions B1513 and B1523 of the second guide plate B1500 protrude left and right inward so as to narrow the gap in the left and right direction. As a result, regardless of the state of the extended support portion B1212 (for example, even if it is damaged), by rolling the ball on the upper surface of the guide plate B1300, B1500, to the specific winning openings B1001, B1002 You can guide the ball.

134 to 136 are top views of the variable winning device B1000. FIG. 134 shows the case where the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are in the closed state, and FIG. 135 shows the first guide plate B1300 in the open state and the second guide plate B1500 in the closed state. FIG. 136 shows a case where the first guide plate B1300 is closed and the second guide plate B1500 is opened.

Switching of excitation of the solenoid will be described below. In FIG. 134, neither the first solenoid B1410 nor the second solenoid B1610 is energized and is in a non-excited state. This is the standby state of the variable winning device B1000, which is maintained before the start of the game or in the normal state, and the variable winning device B1000 is maintained in this state for most of its operating time.

Mainly in the special game state, as shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the first solenoid B1410 or the second solenoid B1610 is energized and excited to change the state of the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500. can be switched.

As shown in FIG. 135, the second solenoid B1610 is kept de-energized, and when the first solenoid B1410 is energized, the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, and the first detection sensor B1230 first specific winning It becomes possible to guide the ball to the mouth B1001.

The state of the first guide plate B1300 is switched by longitudinal sliding displacement, but the longitudinal displacement of the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320 of the first guide plate B1300 is smoothly supported by the covering member B1200. done.

The downstream end (right end) of the guide member B1310 is supported by the ridge support portion B1225, and the upstream end (left end) of the guide member B1310 is arranged to the lower right of the extended support portion B1212. It is sandwiched and supported from above and below by the side surface B1215 and the right central inclined surface B1217 (see FIG. 132(b)).

As a result, firstly, even when a plurality of balls ride on the guide member B1310, the guide member B1310 can be prevented from sinking and displacing, and the ball enters the first specific winning hole B1001. You can make the ball go smoothly.

Secondly, since positional deviation between the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 and the upper surface of the guide member B1310 can be suppressed, the balls flow smoothly from the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 to the upper surface of the guide member B1310. be able to.

The ridge support portion B1225 and the extended support portion B1212 can be formed along the length direction (horizontal direction) of the guide member B1310. only form. Thereby, the displacement resistance (frictional resistance) of the first guide plate B1300 can be reduced.

A downstream end (right end) of the upstream member B1320 is supported by an extended support portion B1212. As a result, even when a plurality of balls ride on the upstream member B1320, it is possible to avoid the sinking displacement of the upstream member B1320, and the balls enter the extended support portion B1212 smoothly. can be done.

In this embodiment, the rolling surface B1321 of the upstream member B1320, the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 inclined downward to the right, and the rolling surface B1311 of the guide member B1310 are flush with each other and have the same inclination angle. is designed to be As a result, steps in the vertical direction can be removed from the ball's flow-down path, and the ball can smoothly flow down to the first specific winning hole B1001.

As shown in FIG. 136, the first solenoid B1410 is kept de-energized, and when the second solenoid B1610 is energized, the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state, and the second detection sensor B1250 second specific winning It becomes possible to guide the ball to the mouth B1002.

The state of the second guide plate B1500 is switched by longitudinal sliding displacement, but the longitudinal displacement of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 of the second guide plate B1500 is smoothly supported by the covering member B1200. done.

The downstream end (left end) of the guide member B1510 is supported by the ridge support portion B1245, and the upstream end (right end) of the guide member B1510 is located on the lower left side surface of the extended support portion B1212. It is sandwiched and supported from above and below by the B1216 and the left central inclined surface B1218 (see FIG. 132(b)).

As a result, firstly, even if a plurality of balls ride on the guide member B1510, it is possible to avoid the guide member B1510 from sinking and being displaced, so that the ball enters the second specific winning hole B1002. You can make the ball go smoothly.

Secondly, since positional deviation between the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 and the upper surface of the guide member B1510 can be suppressed, the balls flow smoothly from the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 to the upper surface of the guide member B1510. be able to.

The ridge support portion B1245 and the extended support portion B1212 can be formed along the length direction (horizontal direction) of the guide member B1510. only form. Thereby, the displacement resistance (frictional resistance) of the second guide plate B1500 can be reduced.

A downstream end (left end) of the upstream member B1520 is supported by an extended support portion B1212. As a result, even when a plurality of balls ride on the upstream member B1520, it is possible to avoid the sinking displacement of the upstream member B1520, and the balls smoothly flow down to the extended support portion B1212. can be done.

In this embodiment, the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520, the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 inclined downward to the right, and the rolling surface B1511 of the guide member B1510 are flush with each other and have the same inclination angle. is designed to be As a result, steps in the vertical direction can be removed from the ball's flow-down path, and the ball can smoothly flow down to the second specific winning hole B1002.

Next, an example of how the ball flows down will be described. FIG. 137(a) is a front view of the variable winning device B1000, FIG. 137(b) is a top view of the variable winning device B1000 viewed from the direction of arrow CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137(a), and FIG. 138(a). 137(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B1000 along line CXXXVIIIa-CXXXVIIIa, and FIG. 138(b) is a cross-sectional view of variable winning device B1000 along line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of FIG. 137(a). .

137 and 138, the first guide plate B1300 is closed, the second guide plate B1500 is open, and a plurality of balls are rolling on the upper surface of the first guide plate B1500. illustrated.

FIG. 137 shows a state in which three balls are placed on the upper surface of the second guide plate B1500. It is For ease of understanding, the spheres connected on the upstream side are a cross section passing through the center of the protruding portion B1140 (see FIG. 138(b)) or a cross section passing through the center of the protruding portion B1211 (see FIG. 138 ( a) see) is positioned so that the center of the sphere is located.

The projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are formed on the base member B1100 or on the covering member B1200. designed with the common purpose of influencing

In this embodiment, the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 do not affect the balls rolling on the downstream side with reference to the lateral center position of the extended support portion B1212, while the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 roll on the upstream side. The sphere is designed to affect.

That is, the downstream side (left side in the open state of the second guide plate B1500) of the protruding portion B1211 formed right above the left-right center position of the extended support portion B1212, hereinafter simply referred to as "lower part of the range before ball entry" ) are arranged above the rolling locus of the ball. Therefore, when the ball rolls on the second guide plate B1500, the ball does not collide with the protrusions B1140 and B1211 arranged in the lower part of the pre-ball entry range.

On the other hand, the upstream side (right side in the open state of the second guide plate B1500) of the projecting portion B1211 formed right above the left-right center position of the extended support portion B1212, hereinafter simply referred to as "upper part of the range before entering the ball" ) are arranged at least partially inside the rolling trajectory of the ball.

Arrangement of the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 with respect to the ball that reaches the ball-entering range and flows down will be described. In this embodiment, when the ball is shot with a right-hand shot, when the ball that did not enter the second winning hole 640 (see FIG. 124) reaches the inclined surface B1223 of the variable winning device B1000, along the inclination It will flow down to the left and reach the range before entering the ball.

In this case, it is unknown whether the ball flows down the side close to the base plate 60 (the rear side of the flow-down path) or the side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) (the front side of the flow-down path). However, the ball is configured to hit the protrusions B1140 and B1211 at least twice.

For example, when the ball flows down the front side of the flow-down path, as shown in FIG. 138(a), the ball abuts on the projecting portion B1211 and flows down while being displaced to the rear side of the flow-down path. After that, since the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 are arranged alternately in the front and rear directions, the ball comes into contact with the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 three times before reaching the lower part of the pre-entering range, and the falling velocity of the ball is reduced. be done.

Further, for example, when the ball flows down the rear side of the flow-down path, although it does not abut on the protruding portion B1211 arranged most upstream, as shown in FIG. , and flows down while being displaced to the front side of the flow-down path. After that, it comes into contact with the protruding part B1211 arranged right above the extended support part B1212, so it has to contact the protruding parts B1140 and B1211 twice before reaching the lower part of the range before entering the ball. , and the velocity of the sphere is decelerated.

Here, since the projection B1140 and the left and right projections B1211 are arranged outside the movement locus of the ball rolling on the rolling surface B1311 of the first guide plate B1300, their lower end positions are Due to the different design, the position of the abutting ball (abutting height) is different. Therefore, without countermeasures, the ball may escape from the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 by the amount of curvature of the ball, and the deceleration effect may be weakened.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the projecting length of the projecting portion B1140 is made longer than the projecting length of the projecting portion B1211 arranged on the left and right, thereby reducing the deceleration that the projecting portion B1140 gives to the ball. The action and the action of deceleration given to the ball by the projecting portions B1211 arranged on the left and right sides can be maintained at the same level. A detailed description will be given below.

As shown in FIG. 138(a), the position (abutment height) of the sphere BP2 that abuts on the projecting portion B1211 on the right end in the front-rear direction is a position separated by a length BH1 above the center BCP of the sphere. . On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138(b), the position (contact height) of the sphere BP1 that abuts on the protruding portion B1140 in the front-rear direction is a position separated by a length BH2 above the center BCP of the sphere. becomes.

Here, since the length BH2 is longer than the length BH1 (BH2>BH1), if the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 have the same projecting length, the balls BP1 and BP2 are equal to the projecting portions B1140 and B1140. When rolling on the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520 in contact with the plate member (thin plate member B1110 or main body member B1210) on the base end side of B1211, the ball Regarding the amount of longitudinal displacement required for BP1 and BP2, the amount of displacement when avoiding the projecting portion B1211 on the right end is larger than the amount of displacement when avoiding the projecting portion B1140.

In other words, the longitudinal displacements of the spheres BP1 and BP2 caused by the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are not uniform in the longitudinal direction, and the rearward displacement is greater than the forward displacement, causing the spheres to flow down. Since the path is a curved (curved) line that is asymmetrical in the front-rear direction, the positions (contact heights) of the spheres BP1 and BP2 contacting the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 in the front-rear direction are the center BCP of the spheres. As a result, the action of decelerating the balls BP1 and BP2 is slightly weakened.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the projecting length of the projecting portion B1140 is formed longer than the projecting length of the left and right projecting portions B1211, and the balls BP1 and BP2 are located on the proximal side of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211. When rolling on the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520 in contact with the plate member (the thin plate member B1110 or the main body member B1210), the balls BP1 and BP2 are required to avoid the projecting portions B1140 and B1211. It is configured such that the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction that is applied is the same. As a result, the deceleration effect due to the contact between the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 and the rolling balls can be fully exhibited.

Although the projecting length of the projecting portion B1140 is increased, this design change is to change the rolling path of the balls BP1 and BP2 to the balls BP1 and BP2 that abut the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 in the front-rear direction. (contact height) is the center BCP of the sphere. This is not a design change that narrows the gap widths BCL1 and BCL2 between the balls BP1 and BP2 and the protrusions B1140 and B1211 when they are in contact with the body member B1210).

That is, the gap width BCL1 (see FIG. 138(a)) between the ball BP2 rolling on the upstream member B1520 and the projecting portion B1211 in contact with the thin plate member B1110 and the ball BP2 rolling on the upstream member B1520. It is equivalent to the gap width BCL2 (see FIG. 138(b)) between the ball BP1 and the projecting portion B1140 in the state of contact with the main body member B1210 (BCL1=BCL2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent clogging of the ball BP1 while increasing the length of the projecting portion B1140.

As described above, the present embodiment adopts a design concept that the range of formation of the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 is limited to the positions where deceleration of the ball is desired to occur in the flow path. As a result, the falling speed of the ball flowing down the upper part of the pre-entering range and the falling speed of the ball flowing down the lower part of the pre-entering range can be made different.

In this embodiment, the projecting length of the projecting portion B1211 is designed to be the same at three locations on the left and right. That is, the projecting length of the projecting portions B1211 arranged on the left and right is made equal to the projecting length of the projecting portion B1211 arranged directly above the extended support portion B1212.

Since the formation height of the projecting portion B1211 arranged in the center of the left and right extends over the entire vertical width of the rolling trajectory of the ball, the position of the ball contacting the projecting portion B1211 arranged in the center of the left and right (contact height ) is equivalent to the center BCP of the sphere.

Therefore, when the balls BP1 and BP2 roll on the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520 while being in contact with the plate member (main body member B1210) on the base end side of the projecting portion B1211, The amount of longitudinal displacement of the balls BP1 and BP2 required to avoid the protruding portion B1211 on the right side is greater than the amount of displacement required to avoid the protruding portion B1211 on the right end.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the decelerating action of the ball by the projecting portion B1211 arranged in the center of the left and right is configured to be greater than the decelerating effect of the ball by the other projecting portions B1140 and B1211 (maximum ). As a result, the balls rolling on the upper surfaces of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be easily separated (divided) using the projecting portion B1211 at the center of the left and right as a boundary.

As shown in FIG. 138(b), the gap between the projecting portion B1140 and the main body member B1210 is less than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, if the ball flows down vertically from above the protruding portion B1140, the center of the ball cannot pass between the protruding portion B1140 and the main body member B1210, and the ball flows down toward the left or right side. If another ball is arranged on the closer side, the arranged ball may hinder the downward flow of the ball, and the flow of the ball may deteriorate. In addition, when the balls are clogged and do not flow (remaining state), the game cannot be continued, which is a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball guide receiving portion B1260 is arranged at a position where the ball can be prevented from flowing down from vertically above the projecting portion B1140. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down from vertically above the protruding portion B1140, so it is possible to easily keep the flow of the ball in good condition.

Regarding the flow speed of the ball, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that it takes about 0.5 seconds (approximately 60 [mm/sec. ]), it takes about 0.5 seconds to flow down the distance from the extended support portion B1212 to the center of the second detection sensor B1250 (assuming the position where the passage of the ball is detected) in the lower part of the pre-entering range. (approximately 22 [mm/sec]). That is, the flow velocity in the lower part of the pre-ball-entering range is about three times as high as the flow-down velocity in the upper part of the pre-ball-entering range.

This speed setting is also set for the purpose of reducing the number of balls staying in the lower part of the pre-entering range. According to this speed setting, for example, when a plurality of balls BP1 and BP2 flowing down in a row ride on the first guide plate B1300 and roll (see FIG. 137(a)), the ball BP1 on the downstream side is extended. The ball BP2 on the upstream side is arranged directly above the extended support portion B1212 until it passes through the projecting portion B1212 arranged immediately above the support portion B1212 and is detected by the second detection sensor B1250. It does not pass through the projecting portion B1212.

That is, even when a plurality of balls BP1 and BP2 flow down the upper part of the pre-ball-entering range in a row, the number of balls staying in the lower part of the pre-ball-entering range can be limited to one. As a result, when the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the closed state as the prescribed number of balls enter the second specific winning hole B1002, the balls will not fall from the rolling surface B1511 of the guide member B1510. can be avoided from occurring.

In this way, the upper pre-entering range can be said to be an advantageous section in the sense that at least the frequency of occurrence of falling balls can be reduced compared to the lower pre-entering range. In this embodiment, when the ball rolling on the first guide plate B1300 is arranged in the upper part of the pre-entering range and in the case where it is arranged in the lower part of the pre-entering range, the falling velocity of the ball is configured differently.

As a result, compared to the case where the ball flows down at a constant speed, the effect is that it is easier to attract the attention of the player who is visually recognizing the ball, and the ball is arranged in the upper part of the range before entering the ball (advantageous side section). Therefore, it is possible to easily distinguish whether it is arranged in the lower part of the range before entering the ball.

In addition, it is possible to make it easier to place the ball on the upper surface side of the first guide plate B1300, which is switched to the open state in place of the second guide plate B1500.

FIG. 139 is a front view of the variable winning device B1000. In FIG. 139, the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state, while the second guide plate B1500 is in the closed state. Also, the spheres BP1 and BP2 illustrated in FIG. 137(a) are used for illustration. Note that FIG. 137(a) will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG.

From the state shown in FIG. 137(a), the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the closed state and the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state as the ball BP1 is detected as the specified number of incoming balls. (see FIG. 139), as long as the ball BP2 is on the inclined upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 before the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state (for example, the interval between rounds is set at 0.04 seconds). ), the ball BP2 rides on the rolling surface B1321 of the upstream member B1320 of the first guide plate B1300.

More specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 137(a), the ball BP2 moves to the left side of the extended support portion B1212 after the ball BP1 passes through the projecting portion B1211 arranged directly above the extended support portion B1212. It can flow down the inclined upper surface, but if the first guide plate B1300 is opened before it flows down completely, the upstream member B1320 gets under the center of the sphere BP2 and supports the sphere BP2 from below.

As a result, the ball BP2 rolls on the rolling surface B1311 of the first guide plate B1300 and can pass through the first specific winning hole B1001. As described above, in the present embodiment, the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the closed state before the ball BP2, which has been guided halfway to the second guide plate B1500 in the open state, passes through the second specific winning port B1002. Even in this case, the ball BP2 is configured to easily ride on the first guide plate B1300.

Therefore, although the ball BP2 is different from the second specific winning hole B1002 initially guided, it enters the first specific winning hole B1001. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a ball (hereinafter also referred to as a “lost ball”) heading toward the out port 66 (see FIG. 124).

In addition, the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state while the ball falling from the inclined surface B1223 after the ball BP2 is positioned above the ball BP2 (upper part of the range before ball entry). It is easier to be saved by the first guide plate B1300 than by the ball BP2. This reduces the possibility of the ball falling below the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 when switching between the state of the first guide plate B1300 and the state of the second guide plate B1500. can be done.

Various aspects are exemplified for the definition of the interval between rounds. For example, the period from when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 in the open state are switched to the closed state to when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are next switched to the open state, or the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are driven. Focusing on the solenoids B1400 and B1600 for energizing, the period from when the energized solenoids B1400 and B1600 are switched to de-energized to when the solenoids B1400 and B1600 are switched to the energized state may be set.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the inter-round interval is set to a length that can suppress the falling ball. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference in the number of loose balls between the game mode in which shooting of balls is stopped in accordance with the interval between rounds and the game mode in which shooting of balls is continued without stopping. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the equality of profits that the players can obtain.

In FIG. 139, in addition to the ball BP2, balls that arrive later fall from the inclined surface B1223 onto the first guide plate B1300. Here, the projections B1140 and B1211 are designed so as not to come into contact with the balls rolling on the upper surface of the first guide plate B1300 as described above, but until they reach the first guide plate B1300 ( During falling), the ball may collide with the projections B1140 and B1211.

The action caused by the collision between the falling ball and the protrusions B1140 and B1211 will be described. It is unknown whether the falling ball is arranged on the side close to the base plate 60 (rear side of the flow-down path) or on the side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) (front side of the flow-down path). However, it is easier to abut on the protruding portion B1211 arranged close to the inclined surface B1223 when arranged on the front side portion of the flow-down path.

On the other hand, when the ball is arranged at the rear side of the flow-down path, there is a possibility that it will come into contact with the projecting portion B1140. For example, if the spheres collide with each other on the inclined surface B1223 and fall with an increased left-right component of the velocity of the spheres, the spheres will also come into contact with the protruding portion B1140 located slightly away from the inclined surface B1223. obtain.

In this way, the ball can collide with protrusions B1140 and B1211 regardless of the front-to-back arrangement of the falling ball. The balls that have collided with the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 are displaced in the front-rear direction along the curvature of the tips of the protruding portions B1140 and B1211, collide with the wall surface on the opposite side, bounce off, and collide with the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 again. , the front and rear collisions are repeated multiple times.

Due to this collision, the velocity of the ball in the horizontal direction decreases, and the component of the velocity of the ball in the falling direction is the main component. Therefore, even if the ball rolls on the rolling surface B1311 of the guide member B1310 or the rolling surface B1321 of the upstream member B1320, the direction of inclination of which is opposite to the direction of inclination of the inclined surface B1223, the first It is possible to shorten the time until the ball enters the specific winning hole B1001.

More specifically, when the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are omitted, the ball passing through the inclined surface B1223 and riding on the first guide plate B1300 rolls along the rolling surface B1311 or the inclination of the rolling surface B1321. After decelerating in the process, it flows down to the opposite side (first specific winning port B1001 side).

In this case, after the ball lands on the rolling surface B1311 or rolling surface B1321 and is completely decelerated, it moves away from the first specific winning hole B1001. It will pass through 1 specific prize winning opening B1001. Therefore, the period until the ball dropped from the inclined surface B1223 passes through the first specific winning hole B1001 tends to be long, and it is difficult to complete the special game state in a short time.

In addition, while the ball that first landed on the rolling surface B1311 or rolling surface B1321 rolls toward the first specific winning hole B1001, the ball that falls from the inclined surface B1223 after that ball first A landed ball is likely to land between the first specific prize winning opening B1001, the balls collide with each other and are easily guided to the first specific prize winning opening B1001 in a row, so excessive winning is likely to occur.

On the other hand, the protrusions B1140 and B1211 can reduce the velocity component in the horizontal direction of the ball by coming into contact with the ball before it lands on the first guide plate B1300. It is possible to shorten the flow-down path to the winning opening B1001, suppress the occurrence of collision between balls, and suppress the occurrence of excessive winning.

In this way, the projections B1140 and B1211 have different effects depending on the state of the variable winning device B1000. That is, on the premise that the ball flows down from the side of the inclined surface B1223, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500 having the same inclination on the left and right sides as the inclination of the inclined surface B1223, it rides on the second guide plate B1500 and rolls. On the other hand, in the open state of the first guide plate B1300 having an inclination on the left and right opposite side to the inclination of the inclined surface B1223, the ball rides on the first guide plate B1300. It functions as falling direction adjusting means for reducing the left-right direction component of the falling speed of the previous ball and moving the falling direction of the ball toward the vertical direction.

With reference to FIG. 140, the flow-down mode of the ball that reaches the ball-entering range and rolls on the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521 will be described.

FIGS. 140(a) and 140(b) schematically show rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521, an upper right inclined surface B1213, and an upper left inclined surface, which schematically show the trajectory of a ball rolling in the pre-entering range. It is a front schematic diagram of surface B1214.

The rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521 are arranged to extend in the pre-entering range and are capable of receiving a ball, which is illustrated by a solid line. An unacceptable state is illustrated in phantom lines.

140(a) shows the open state of the second guide plate B1500 (see FIG. 137), and FIG. 140(b) shows the open state of the first guide plate B1300 (see FIG. 139). .

In FIGS. 140(a) and 140(b), the movement trajectory of the center BCP of the sphere is illustrated for explanation of the movement trajectory of the ball rolling on the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, B1521. That is, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the locus of movement of the center BCP of the ball rolling on the rolling surfaces B1511, B1521 and the upper left inclined surface B1214 is illustrated as a left inclined locus BKL1 by a straight line sloping to the left (FIG. 140). (a)), the locus of movement of the center BCP of the ball rolling on the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 and the upper right inclined surface B1213 in the open state of the first guide plate B1300 is shown as a right inclined locus BKL2 by a straight line sloping to the right. (See FIG. 140(b)).

Here, when the second guide plate B1500 in the open state is switched to the closed state, and the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state after an inter-round interval (0.04 seconds in this embodiment), The center BCP of the sphere can be displaced downwards. If the center BCP after the downward displacement is above the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 and the upper right inclined surface B1213, the front side ends of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 of the first guide plate B1300 that are switched to the open state. The ball can be rescued by slipping into the lower hemisphere part of the ball. Therefore, the arrangement of the center BCP of the ball after downward displacement and the vertical relationship between the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 are important.

The downward displacement of the ball in the interval between rounds (0.04 seconds in this embodiment) is calculated as a free fall (approximately 7.84 mm in this embodiment). A trajectory on which the center BCP can be arranged is illustrated as a post-descent trajectory BKD1 (see FIG. 140(a)). Similarly, the trajectory on which the center BCP of the ball displaced downward from the right-inclined trajectory BKL2 can be arranged is shown as a post-descent trajectory BKD2.

The post-descent trajectories BKD1 and BKD2 are illustrated as lines connecting points where the center BCP of the sphere after free fall can be located. Therefore, the form of the line is different between the upper right inclined surface B1213 or the upper left inclined surface B1214, which is the range in which the free fall is hindered, and the other range.

That is, the trajectories BKD1 and BKD2 after descent are shown parallel to the upper right inclined surface B1213 or the upper left inclined surface B1214 above the upper right inclined surface B1213 or the upper left inclined surface B1214. The left and right outer sides of the inclined plane B1214 are illustrated as lines (in this embodiment, parallel straight lines) that are offset downward from the left inclined locus BKL1 or the right inclined locus BKL2 across a small connecting range.

When the second guide plate B1500 is closed and the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 are arranged below the ball center BCP. If the switching is performed, the front side ends of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 can be made to slip into the lower hemispherical portion of the ball, and the ball can be rescued.

In other words, in the left-right direction arrangement in which the trajectory BKD1 after descent is arranged above the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321, the balls falling from the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 can be saved by the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321. .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ball placed in the upper part of the pre-entering range (the right side of the vertex position of the upper right inclined surface B1213 and the upper left inclined surface B1214 in FIG. 140(a)) can be rescued without omission. On the other hand, among the balls arranged in the lower part of the pre-entering range (the left side of the vertex position of the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 and the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 in FIG. 140(a)), the trajectory after descending BKD1 and A ball arranged on the left side of the intersection with the rolling surface B1321 is likely to become a loose ball.

In particular, since the ball rolling in the range before ball entry has a velocity component in the left-right direction, the fall mode after the second guide plate B1500 is in the closed state is displacement in the vertical direction, not in the vertical direction. and the displacement in the left-right direction are combined, resulting in a fall along a parabola. Therefore, even if the amount of downward displacement in the interval between rounds is as described above (approximately 7.84 mm in this embodiment), the position in the horizontal direction does not correspond to the inclination of the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 on which the balls were rolling. As compared with the case of free fall in the vertical direction, the arrangement of the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 with respect to the center BCP of the sphere is shifted upward, It becomes easier for spilled balls to occur.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is configured to prevent a plurality of balls from being placed in the lower part of the pre-entering range, thereby suppressing the occurrence of balls falling from the lower part of the pre-entering range. can do. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of stray balls.

It should be noted that the post-descent trajectories BKD1 and BKD2 that are displaced downward by about 7.84 mm described in FIG. be.

Also, in the present embodiment, the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 are configured to be arranged on the same straight line when viewed from the front, but this is not necessarily the case. By changing the design of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 based on the post-descent trajectory changed in accordance with the inter-round interval, a variable winning device with fewer loose balls can be manufactured.

For example, when the inter-round interval is longer than the value (0.04 seconds) in this embodiment, the lower line is arranged below the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1511 of the guide members B1310 and B1510. Although there is a possibility, the design is changed so that the arrangement of the guide members B1310 and B1510 with respect to the upstream members B1320 and B1520 is shifted downward (the downstream ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the upstream of the guide members B1310 and B1510 By forming a step between the side ends, it is possible to obtain a structure that has the effect of preventing a spilled ball as in the present embodiment.

Although the guide members B1300 and B1500 are illustrated so that the projecting side tip portions are formed thick, the contact area between the projecting side tip portion and the ball when the guide members B1300 and B1500 are projected and displaced toward the front side is may be configured to be smaller. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being stuck between the guide members B1300, B1500 and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 and stopping. In this case, the arrangement of the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521 shown in FIG. 14-2 corresponds to the upper edge of the overhanging tip.

In the present embodiment, the interval between rounds is set short for the purpose of preventing a lost ball, but the interval between rounds may be set longer (for example, 2 seconds) to allow for the occurrence of a lost ball. Moreover, between rounds with a long inter-round interval and between rounds with a short inter-round interval may be arbitrarily set.

FIG. 141 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 showing the vicinity of the variable winning device B1000. As shown in FIG. 141, above the variable winning device B1000, a sorting device B1800 configured to be operable in conjunction with the variable winning device B1000 is arranged. Due to the effects resulting from the configuration of the variable winning device B1000, the arrangement range of the sorting device B1800 is expanded.

That is, even in the past, a plurality of variable prize winning devices were arranged below the second prize winning port 640 . However, in this case, the range required for arranging a plurality of variable prize winning devices tends to be large in the vertical direction, and it is difficult to create a range for arranging a movable mechanism that acts on the flow of the ball, such as the sorting device B1800. rice field. Although it is conceivable to arrange the second winning port 640 upward to increase the range, this would lead to a decrease in the degree of freedom in arranging the configuration of the through gate 67 and the nail on the upstream side thereof. Therefore, I did not like it.

On the other hand, the variable prize winning device B1000 of the present embodiment employs a configuration in which the first specific prize winning port B1001 and the second specific prize winning port B1002 are not stacked vertically but are arranged on the left and right, and the first specific prize winning port B1000 By adopting a configuration in which the vertical height of the right inclined locus BKL2 that guides the ball to B1001 and the vertical height of the left inclined locus BKL1 that guides the ball to the second specific winning opening B1002 are equal, a plurality of specific winning openings B1001. , B1002, the vertical dimension of the variable winning device B1000 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the right-tilt locus BKL2 and the left-tilt locus BKL1 intersect, and the sphere locus partially overlaps, so that the base plate 60 (see FIG. 124) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) Even in the case where at least a part of the game area is limited to the width of the gap between the front and back, which is about 19 mm in this embodiment, to the extent that one ball can pass through, the right tilt locus BKL2 and the left tilt locus BKL2 and the left tilt locus It is possible to sufficiently secure both lateral lengths of BKL1.

In the present embodiment, the vertical height of the right-inclined locus BKL2 and the vertical height of the left-inclined locus BKL1 are equal over the entire area, so that the variable winning device B1000 having a plurality of specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 Although the case where the vertical dimension can be suppressed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical height of at least a portion of the right tilt locus BKL2 and the vertical height of at least a portion of the left tilt locus BKL1 may be configured to be the same. That is, the right tilting locus BKL2 and the left tilting locus BKL1 may intersect at a laterally asymmetrical position, or the length of the right tilting locus BKL2 and the length of the left tilting locus BKL1 may be different. .

The sorting device B1800 includes a plate-like member whose left end is rotatably supported by the base plate 60, and the posture is changed by a mechanism (not shown) in conjunction with the state switching of the second driving device B1600 (see FIG. 134). configured to change. That is, when the second solenoid B1610 of the second driving device B1600 is energized, it assumes the posture of tilting downward to the right (see the imaginary line portion in FIG. 141), and when the second solenoid B1610 is de-energized, it assumes the posture of tilting downward to the left. (See the solid line portion in FIG. 141).

Various aspects are exemplified as a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the second driving device B1600 to the distribution device B1800. A rod-shaped portion protrudes beyond the base plate 60, and an engaging member that engages with the rod-shaped portion is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 so as to be displaceable in the left-right direction. B1620 may be connected. In this case, as the engaging member is displaced to the right, the engaging position with the rod-shaped portion is formed to be displaced downward (for example, formed to have a shape that slopes downward to the left when viewed from the front). , the attitude of the sorting device B1800 can be changed by the driving force generated by the second driving device B1600.

The downstream paths BL1 and BL2 of the spheres branched by the sorting device B1800 will be described. When the second driving device B1600 (see FIG. 134) is in a non-excited state, the sorting device B1800 is maintained in an attitude inclined downward to the left, so the balls tend to flow down along the left flow path BL1.

The ball flowing down the left flow path BL1 flows leftward along the nail planted in the range on the left side of the sorting device B1800, and enters the ball guide receiving portion B1260 at the branch point set by the nail. It branches into a sphere-capable flow path and a flow path that reaches the inclined surface B1243.

Therefore, it is possible to set the ease with which the ball is directed toward the ball guide receiving portion B1260 depending on the layout of the nail implanted on the left side of the sorting device B1800. In this embodiment, the ball branched to the flow path reaching the inclined surface B1243 and the ball branched to the flow path that can enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260 are distributed at a ratio of about 2:1. The layout of the nails is set so that

Therefore, as exemplified in the present embodiment, when the ball guide receiving portion B1260 is configured as the general winning opening 63 and the number of prize balls is set to three, the distribution device B1800 Every time 3 balls flow down on the left flow path BL1, one of them enters the ball guide receiving part B1260 and 3 balls are paid out as prize balls, so during time saving or It is possible to suppress the ball loss during the probability variation.

On the other hand, when the second driving device B1600 is excited, the sorting device B1800 is inclined downward to the right, so the balls tend to flow down along the right downflow path BL2. The ball flowing down along the right downflow route BL2 reaches the inclined surface B1223.

Here, the progress of the special game state using the variable winning device B1000 will be described. In the special game state, as described above, the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds, or 10 balls (the specified number ) Until winning) The opening operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), but in each round, which of the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened is set in various ways. be able to. In the following description, the state in which the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened is also simply referred to as "round".

For example, it is possible to set the first specific winning opening B1001 to be open in all rounds, or to open the second specific winning opening B1002 to all rounds. However, it is also possible to interweave the round in which the first specific prize winning opening B1001 is opened and the round in which the second specific prize winning opening B1002 is opened. In addition, in this embodiment, the relationship between the round and the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 to be opened is set in advance for each jackpot type to be described later.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, or jackpot a, which will be described later, the second specific prize winning port B1002 is opened in odd-numbered rounds, and the first specific prize winning port B1001 is opened in even-numbered rounds. (first operation pattern). That is, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 to be opened are alternately switched each time the round progresses.

In this case, as a first feature, when the game state shifts to the special game state, the second solenoid B1610 is energized to switch the second guide plate B1500 to the open state, and the sorting device B1800 is tilted and displaced. do.

Therefore, even if the second guide plate B1500 is displaced in a displacement mode in which the state change in the front view of the front-rear slide displacement is scarce and it is easy to miss the switching of the state, the sorting device B1800 changes the state in the front view. By displacing simultaneously with the displacement of the second guide plate B1500 in a large displacement mode, by visually recognizing the switching of the state of the sorting device B1800, it is possible to miss the timing when the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state. It can be made easy to prevent occurrence.

As a second feature, by switching the route in which the ball is guided to the variable winning device B1000, it is arranged upstream of the open state of the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500. A ball can be landed on the inclined surfaces B1223 and B1243. As a result, a mechanism (see FIGS. 137 and 139) for suppressing the falling of the ball when switching between the open and closed states of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 can be produced in each round.

In other words, for example, when a ball lands on one of the inclined surface B1223 or the inclined surface B1243 (for example, the inclined surface B1223) in a plurality of consecutive rounds, the guide that receives the ball at the upper part of the range before the ball enters the ball. A board (equivalent to the second guide plate B1500) is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the opposite guide plate (equivalent to the first guide plate B1300) is switched from the closed state to the open state to start the jackpot round. Sometimes it is easy to prevent the ball from falling.

On the other hand, in the next round, the guide plate (equivalent to the first guide plate B1300) that receives the ball at the lower part of the range before entering the ball is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the guide plate on the opposite side (the second guide plate B1500) equivalent) is switched from the closed state to the open state and is started, but since the guide plate that is switched to the open state is not arranged below the ball, it is difficult to prevent the ball from falling. Therefore, it is difficult to produce the effect of suppressing the fall of the ball every round.

On the other hand, in the later-described jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, or jackpot a, by alternately switching the ball downflow path between the left side downflow path BL1 and the right side downflow path BL2 for each round, the ball lands on an inclined surface. B1223 and B1243 can be alternately switched for each round, and the effect of suppressing the falling of the ball can be produced in each round.

As a third feature, rounds in which the ball can be guided to the ball guide receiving portion B1260 and rounds in which the ball is not guided to the ball guide receiving portion B1260 are alternately generated, and although it tends to take a long time, it is possible to enter the specific winning opening B1001. Rounds in which payout of prize balls can be expected due to balls entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260 in addition to balls are alternated with rounds in which the time tends to be short but payout of prize balls due to entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260 cannot be expected. can be generated in

Here, the round game ends when a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls enter the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002. The shortest time between shots of balls is limited (0.6 second interval in this embodiment), and the shortest time in which a specified number of balls can reach the variable winning device B1000 is also limited.

When the ball flows down the right flow path BL2 and reaches the variable winning device B1000, all the balls that flow downstream from the sorting device B1800 reach the variable winning device B1000, so all the fired balls are second specified. It is possible to enter the ball into the winning hole B1002. Therefore, the time required from the launch of the ball to the end of the round game is the time when the tenth ball enters the second specific winning port B1002 from the start of the first ball that can enter the second specific winning port B1002. It will be time to hit the ball.

On the other hand, when the ball flows down the left flow path BL1 and reaches the variable winning device B1000, not all the balls that flow downstream from the sorting device B1800 reach the variable winning device B1000, but one in three The ball enters the ball guide receiving portion B1260 at a rate of 1, and does not reach the first specific winning hole B1001 of the variable winning device B1000.

In this case, it is not possible to make all the shot balls enter the first specific prize winning port B1001. need to do Specifically, it is necessary to shoot 1.5 times as many balls as the specified number.

Therefore, the time required from the launch of the ball to the end of the round game is that the 15th ball that can enter the first specific winning hole B1001 enters the first specific winning hole B1001 from the start of the first ball being launched. It will be time to hit the ball.

In this way, the number of shot balls required to reach the variable prize winning device B1000 of the specified number can be changed by 1.5 times between consecutive rounds, so the time required for the round game is short. A round that takes a long time to play can be generated. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the control for adjusting the time required for execution (digestion) of the jackpot game.

In addition, rounds requiring a short time for the round game and rounds requiring a long time for the round game alternately occur, so that it is possible to easily avoid giving the player the impression that the big winning game is slow.

The ball entry probability into the ball guide receiving portion B1260 can be easily changed by changing the design of the arrangement position of the nail. For example, if one out of two balls is designed to be guided to the ball guide receiving portion B1260, the time required for the round game in which the balls flow down the left flow path BL1 can be further extended. Also, for example, if one ball is designed to be guided to the ball guide receiving portion B1260 for 10 or more balls, the time required for the round game in which the ball flows down the left flow path BL1 and the round in which the ball flows down the right flow path BL2 The difference from the time required for the game can be reduced.

As a fourth feature, the ball entry interval is changed between the state of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 while the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in the open state, and the state of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500. can be easily changed with the timing of . As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball-entering mode in the jackpot game from becoming monotonous, and to facilitate increasing the number of prize balls to be paid out before and after the interval between rounds (immediately in this embodiment) where the ball is likely to be interrupted. can be configured to allow

Regarding this, the state in which the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in an open state and the ball is guided to the second specific winning hole B1002 will be described as an example. In this case, the ball that reaches the distribution device B1800 lands on the inclined surface B1223 of the variable winning device B1000 along the inclination of the distribution device B1800, and along the inclination of the inclined surface B1223 toward the second specific winning opening B1002 to roll.

As shown in FIG. 141, balls shot one after another land on the upper surface of the second guide plate B1500 along the slope of the slope B1223. As described above, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, even though the ball passes through the flow-down path of the lower part of the pre-ball entry range (the downstream side with respect to the extended support portion B1212) in the pre-ball entry range, It takes 0.5 seconds, and it takes 0.5 seconds to pass between the protruding parts when passing through the upper part of the range before entering the ball (upstream side with respect to the extended support part B1212). It takes 1.0 second because there are three set portions B1140 and B1211.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 141, after the ball BP3 rides on the second guide plate B1500 and reaches the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 (about 1.5 seconds), the two balls fired later BP4 and BP5 can easily ride on the second guide plate B1500 (it takes about 1.2 seconds to shoot the three balls BP3, BP4 and BP5 because the shooting interval is 0.6 seconds). There is also a ball BP6 that reaches the inclined surface B1223 over the sorting device B1800 even if it does not reach the second guide plate B1500.

When the ball BP3 shown in FIG. 141 is detected by the second detection sensor B1250 as the specified number of balls entering the jackpot round formed by the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the second guide plate B1500 is closed. After that, after an inter-round interval (about 0.04 seconds in this embodiment), the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state.

In this case, since the centers BCP of the balls BP4 and BP5 are both arranged above the first guide plate B1300, they drop below the first guide plate B1300 before the first guide plate B1300 constitutes the open state. can be avoided (see FIGS. 140(a) and 140(b)).

When the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, the balls BP4 and BP5 flow down along the slope of the first guide plate B1300 toward the first specific winning opening B1001. As described above, in the pre-entering range, in the relationship with the ball rolling in the lower part of the pre-entering range (downstream of the extended support part B1212), the projecting part B1140 and the projecting parts arranged on the left and right Since the portion B1211 is configured so as not to contact the ball, the balls BP4 and BP5 are guided to the first specific winning opening B1001 without being decelerated by the projecting portion B1140 and the projecting portions B1211 arranged on the left and right. be done.

At that time, the ball BP5 and the ball BP4 pass through the first specific winning hole B1001 in that order. That is, the ball BP4 closer to the second specific winning opening B1002 passes through the first specific winning opening B1001 later than the ball BP5 arranged away from the second specific winning opening B1002.

In addition, since the ball BP6 also contacts the projecting portion B1140 and the projecting portions B1211 arranged on the left and right sides, the velocity component in the left-right direction is reduced. The ball enters the specific winning hole B1001.

In this way, immediately after the state is switched from the open state of the second guide plate B1500 to the open state of the first guide plate B1300, the balls BP4, BP5, and BP6 are consecutively placed in the first specific winning hole B1001 for a short period of time. , and a large amount of prize balls are paid out.

That is, while the second guide plate B1500 was maintained in the open state, a ball entered at intervals of about 0.5 seconds, but the second guide plate B1500 was switched to the closed state, Immediately after the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, three balls BP4, BP5, and BP6 enter the first specific winning hole within about 0.5 seconds. As a result, the manner of entering a ball due to the fact that the interval between entering balls is constant in the jackpot game, and the effect associated with entering a ball (for example, the number of payout balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is notified. It is possible to reduce the monotony of the display effect to be played and the sound output effect output for the same purpose), and improve the player's attention to the ball entry mode and effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the state of the first guide plate B1300 is switched, the attitude of the sorting device B1800 is switched, and the flow path of the ball is switched to the left flow path BL1, so the state of the first guide plate B1300 is It is a configuration in which it takes time for the ball that has reached the sorting device B1800 to reach the first guide plate B1300 after being switched.

Therefore, without countermeasures, the payout of prize balls is likely to be interrupted, and the player tends to feel that the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game is small, or that the jackpot game is delayed, and the player's interest is reduced. There is a risk of causing

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, a plurality of balls BP4, BP5, and BP6 enter the first specific winning hole B1001 immediately after the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state. By doing so, the number of prize balls scheduled (reserved) to be paid out is secured.

Therefore, after the state of the first guide plate B1300 is switched, the ball that reaches the sorting device B1800 enters the first specific winning hole B1001. Since it can be covered by the prize balls that accompany the entry into the specific prize winning port B1001, even if the ball flow path is long as in the present embodiment, the interruption of the prize ball payout is prevented. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the number of prize balls obtained in the big winning game is small or that the big winning game is slow.

In addition, when the first guide plate B1300 is in an open state and the ball flows down the left flow path BL1, some of the balls enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260, and as a result, the upper surface of the first guide plate B1300 is formed. Since the number of balls arranged in the upper part of the pre-entering range of the balls to be drawn is often less than two, after the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the closed state, the second guide plate B1500 is opened. The degree of increase in payout associated with the ball entering the second specific winning port B1002 that can occur immediately after switching to the second special prize winning port B1002 is the same as described above for balls BP4, BP5, BP6, etc. (that is, the second opening and closing plate B1500 is switched to the closed After the first opening/closing plate B1300 is switched to the open state, the increase in payout associated with the entry of the ball into the first specific winning hole B1001, which may occur immediately after the first opening/closing plate B1300 is switched to the open state, becomes gentler.

On the other hand, regardless of whether the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are opened or closed, the ball can enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260. Since this ball entry also causes the ball to be put out, it is less likely that the problems of the original problem, such as the monotony of the put out and the interruption of the put out of the ball at intervals between rounds, will occur.

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 142(b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special design. FIG. 142(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 142(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the above fixed value data. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec). When the value of the first winning random number counter obtained based on the start winning coincides with one of the determination values defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is won.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 142 (b)) is a data table that stores the determination value for determining the jackpot type, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , And it is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 142(b)).

In the case of jackpot A, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern (details of which will be described later) of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2170 prize balls as an increase after subtracting the number of balls fired.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 49" in association with the jackpot B (see 202b2 in FIG. 142(b)).

In the case of a jackpot B, 8 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of approximately 1160 prize balls as an increase after subtracting the number of balls fired.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with the jackpot C (see 202b3 in FIG. 142(b)).

In the case of a jackpot C, four rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operating pattern of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 580 prize balls as an increase after subtracting the number of balls fired.

As described above, if the lottery for the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64) results in a big win, the variable winning device B1000 operates in the first operation pattern in any case. do. Therefore, the difference in the number of paid-out prize balls that a player can acquire appears as a difference due to the number of rounds, and the larger the number of rounds, the larger the number of paid-out prize balls and the longer the time required for the jackpot game.

In the jackpot based on the special pattern 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the jackpot of 15 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 20%, while the jackpot of 4 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 50%. So basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, the launching of the ball for the subsequent jackpot win can be started early.

On the other hand, when the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79". A jackpot a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 142(b)).

In the case of a jackpot a, similarly to the jackpot A, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2170 prize balls as an increase after subtracting the number of balls fired.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 89" in association with the jackpot b (see 202b5 in FIG. 142(b)).

In the case of a jackpot b, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the second operating pattern (details of which will be described later) of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is about 2100 as an increase after deducting the number of balls to be shot, and the time required for the big win game tends to be shorter than the time required for the big win a.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with the jackpot c (see 202b6 in FIG. 142(b)).

In the case of a jackpot c, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the third operating pattern (details of which will be described later) of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is about 2250 as an increase after deducting the number of balls to be shot, and the time required for the big win game tends to be longer than the time required for the big win a.

As described above, when the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) results in a big win, the operation pattern of the variable winning device B1000 changes according to the type of the big win. Due to this difference in operation pattern, while the number of jackpot rounds remains unchanged, the number of payouts and the number of balls that reach the variable winning device B1000 do not enter either the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002. A difference can be provided between the occurrence frequency of balls heading for the out port 66 (hereinafter also referred to as "lost balls") and the time required for the big win game.

In detail, in addition to providing a difference in the number of prize balls depending on the presence or absence of balls entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260, and forcibly lengthening the time required for the jackpot game, the number of lost balls during the interval between rounds Since it is possible to provide a difference in occurrence probability, it is possible to provide a difference in profit per unit time (the number of payouts including time efficiency, game efficiency) obtained by the player through the jackpot game depending on the type of jackpot.

As a result, the breakdown of the jackpot in the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) includes the jackpot (jackpot a) that allows a large amount of payouts to be received in a time efficient manner, and the time efficient or payout. A jackpot (jackpot b, jackpot c) in which at least one of the numbers is degraded can be provided, and the profit balance of the player obtained when the jackpot a is obtained can be improved. As a result, even if the probability of winning the jackpot a is maintained high, the jackpots b and c with a degraded profit balance will be won with a small probability, so that the profit balance is changed when the game is continued for a predetermined time. A gaming machine with a large width can be configured.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 becomes easier. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols, the variable probability state of the special symbols is likely to become a jackpot of the special symbols, and when it becomes a jackpot, it is easy to become a jackpot a (a jackpot with a good profit balance). This makes it easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while strongly anticipating that the special symbols will shift to the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 142(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal symbols (see 202c1 in FIG. 142(c)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 142(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is displayed. It is determined whether it is a hit or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, opening patterns of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 in the first control example of the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 143(a) is a diagram showing the opening/closing pattern of the first specific winning hole B1001 and the second specific winning hole B1002 corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the gaming efficiency of the first operation pattern. 143(b) is a diagram showing the opening/closing pattern of the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the game efficiency of the second operation pattern. FIG. 143(c) is a diagram showing the opening/closing pattern of the first specific winning hole B1001 and the second specific winning hole B1002 corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the gaming efficiency of the third operation pattern. is.

As shown in FIG. 143(a), in the first operation pattern, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 that are opened each time the round is switched are alternately switched. That is, rounds in which the second solenoid B1610 is energized and rounds in which the first solenoid B1410 is energized alternately occur, and there are rounds in which the ball flows down the right flow path BL2 and rounds in which the ball flows down the left flow path BL1. occur alternately.

The number of prize balls expected to increase due to the payout in the 15-round jackpot will be described. In addition, the number of payouts due to excess winning in the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 (excess payout when more than 10 balls enter) is not considered.

First, 15 prize balls are paid out by entering the first specific prize winning port B1001 or the second specific prize winning port B1002. Or, regarding the ball entering the second specific winning hole B1002, the increased number after deducting the number of fired balls is 2100 (= (number of rounds x specified number x (number of payouts - 1)) = (15 x 10 x (15 - 1))).

Next, in even-numbered rounds, 3 prize balls are paid out by entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260, and 10 balls, which are the prescribed number of each round, are used in the first specific prize winning opening B1001 or the second specific prize winning. Five balls can be expected to enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260 for entering the mouth B1002. , 70 (=(number of rounds×expected number×(payout number−1))=(7×5×(3−1))).

Therefore, in the jackpot of 15 rounds in which the first specific prize winning port B1001 or the second specific prize winning port B1002 opens and closes in the first operation pattern, the number of prize balls expected to increase due to the payout is 2170.

The game time required to complete the 15-round jackpot will be explained based on the number of shot balls. It is assumed that the game mode is one in which balls are continuously shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In odd-numbered rounds, all the shot balls can be expected to enter the second specific winning hole B1002, so the jackpot game can be ended by shooting the prescribed number of balls (10 balls in this embodiment). . Therefore, the game time required based on the number of shot balls is 6 seconds (=number of balls×shot interval=10×0.6).

On the other hand, in even-numbered rounds, 2 out of 3 balls can be expected to enter the first special prize-winning hole B1001, so 15 (= specified number x 3/2 = 10 x 3/2) ) can end the jackpot game. Therefore, the game time required based on the number of shot balls is 9 seconds (=number of balls×shot interval=15×0.6).

From this, the game time required to complete the jackpot of 15 rounds is calculated as 111 seconds (=number of odd rounds×6+number of even rounds×9=8×6+7×9).

According to the first operation pattern, as described above, the number of lost balls is suppressed to 0, so the gaming efficiency is reduced to about 19.5 [pieces/second] (=(number of prize balls-number of lost balls). /Playing time=(2170-0)/111).

As shown in FIG. 143(b), in the second operation pattern, the opening in the round game is fixed to the second specific winning opening B1002. That is, since the second solenoid B1610 is composed only of the rounds in which it is energized and the first solenoid B1410 is maintained in a non-excited state, only the round in which the ball flows down the right downflow path BL2 occurs, and the ball flows down the left downflow path BL1. There is no round that flows down.

The number of prize balls expected to increase due to the payout in the 15-round jackpot will be described. In addition, the number of payouts due to excess winning in the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 (excess payout when more than 10 balls enter) is not considered.

First, 15 prize balls are paid out by entering the second specific prize winning port B1002, and the prescribed number of each round is 10, so regarding entering the second specific prize winning port B1002, launch The increased number after deducting the number of balls is 2100 (=(number of rounds×prescribed number×(number of payouts−1))=(15×10×(15−1))).

Next, the ball does not enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260 because the ball only flows down the right-side flow path BL2. Therefore, the number of balls to be added to the ball entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260 is zero.

Therefore, in the jackpot of 15 rounds in which the second specific winning hole B1002 opens and closes in the second operation pattern, the number of prize balls expected to increase due to the payout is 2100 pieces.

The game time required to complete the 15-round jackpot will be explained based on the number of shot balls. It is assumed that the game mode is one in which balls are continuously shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In the second operation pattern, since the ball does not enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260, it can be expected that all the launched balls enter the second specific winning hole B1002. The jackpot game can be ended by shooting the ball of (pieces). Therefore, the game time required based on the number of shot balls is 6 seconds (=number of balls×shot interval=10×0.6).

From this, the game time required to complete the jackpot of 15 rounds is calculated as 90 seconds (=number of rounds×6=15×6).

According to the second actuation pattern, it is difficult to eliminate the occurrence of loose balls. Assuming that an average of 2 lost balls occur between rounds, the total number of lost balls is 28 [pieces] (=2×14). In this case, the game efficiency can be calculated as approximately 23.0 [pieces/second] (=(number of prized balls-number of lost balls)/game time=(2100-28)/90).

As shown in FIG. 143(c), in the third operation pattern, the first specific winning hole B1001 is fixed to be opened by the round game. That is, since the first solenoid B1410 is composed only of the rounds in which it is energized and the second solenoid B1610 is maintained in a non-excited state, only the round in which the ball flows down the left downflow path BL1 occurs, and the ball flows down the right downflow path BL2. There is no round that flows down.

The number of prize balls expected to increase due to the payout in the 15-round jackpot will be described. In addition, the number of payouts due to excess winning in the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 (excess payout when more than 10 balls enter) is not considered.

First, 15 prize balls are paid out by entering the first specific prize winning port B1001, and the prescribed number of each round is 10, so regarding entering the first specific prize winning port B1001, launch The increased number after deducting the number of balls is 2100 (=(number of rounds×prescribed number×(number of payouts−1))=(15×10×(15−1))).

Next, 3 prize balls are paid out by entering the ball guide receiving part B1260, and 10 balls, which is the prescribed number of each round, enter the first special prize winning hole B1001, Since 5 balls can be expected to enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260, the increase in the number of balls entering the ball guide receiving portion B1260 after deducting the number of fired balls is 150 (=(number of rounds x expected number x (number of payouts - 1)) = (15 x 5 x (3-1))).

Therefore, in the jackpot of 15 rounds in which the first specific winning hole B1001 opens and closes in the third operation pattern, the number of prize balls expected to increase due to the payout is 2250 pieces.

The game time required to complete the 15-round jackpot will be explained based on the number of shot balls. It is assumed that the game mode is one in which balls are continuously shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In each round, out of the 3 balls fired, 2 balls can be expected to enter the 1st Special Winning Port B1001, so 15 (= specified number x 3/2 = 10 x 3/2) The jackpot game can be terminated by shooting the ball. Therefore, the game time required based on the number of shot balls is 9 seconds (=number of balls×shot interval=15×0.6).

From this, the game time required to complete the 15-round jackpot is calculated as 135 seconds (=number of rounds×9=15×9).

According to the third actuation pattern, it is difficult to eliminate the occurrence of loose balls. Assuming that an average of 2 lost balls occur between rounds, the total number of lost balls is 28 [pieces] (=2×14). In this case, the game efficiency can be calculated as approximately 16.5 [pieces/second] (=(number of prized balls-number of lost balls)/game time=(2250-28)/135).

Therefore, even when a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed, the time required for it and the number of paid-out prize balls are different. That is, when the jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern, the game time required for the jackpot game is longer than in the case where the jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern, and the game is executed in the first operation pattern. In this case, the game time required for the jackpot game is longer than when it is executed in the second operation pattern.

In addition, when the jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern, the number of prize balls to be paid out is larger than in the case where the jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out is greater than in the second operation pattern.

Furthermore, focusing on the game efficiency in the above definition, the game efficiency is higher when the jackpot game is executed with the second operation pattern than when it is executed with the first operation pattern (23.0>19 .5), the game efficiency is higher when executed with the first operation pattern than when executed with the third operation pattern (19.5>16.5).

Thus, according to the present embodiment, while the number of rounds of the special symbol 2 jackpot is the same, the number of prize balls and the game time can be set to be different. According to a comparison including game efficiency, the first actuation pattern can be said to be a well-balanced actuation pattern that always exhibits a medium performance in comparison with the second and third actuation patterns.

According to this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 jackpot, the variable winning device B1000 is controlled in the first operation pattern regardless of the jackpot type, so that the occurrence of loose balls can be suppressed as much as possible. When the special pattern 1 is a big win, the player has few balls, and the player wants to increase the number of balls even by one. Since the spilled ball is a ball that will definitely become a useless ball, the occurrence of the dropped ball in the special symbol 1 jackpot especially disappoints the player. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a ball falling out in the special symbol 1 jackpot as much as possible, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the special symbol 2 jackpot, in addition to the first operation pattern, a second operation pattern in which the time required for the big win game is shorter than that of the first operation pattern, and a second operation pattern that is shorter than the first operation pattern. A third operation pattern in which the number of prize balls is increased is added.

As a result, it is possible to slightly change the profit obtained for each jackpot type obtained, thus avoiding the monotony of the jackpot game compared to the case where the operation pattern does not change regardless of the jackpot type. can.

In the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, it is difficult to suppress the occurrence of falling balls. I'm getting a payout of prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the degree of disappointment with respect to the occurrence of the lost ball, and reduce the degree to which the player loses interest due to the occurrence of the lost ball.

The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 157. FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 of the variable winning device B1000 are slid forward and backward to form an open state. The opening/closing bar B2500 can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis to constitute an open state. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 144 is a front view of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, the constituent parts of the game area are bilaterally symmetrical, and the player can always arbitrarily select whether to play the left-handed game or the right-handed game. It is designed to minimize disadvantages. The variable winning device B2000 is arranged in the left and right central lower part of the game area.

145, 146 and 147 are front perspective views of the variable winning device B2000. 145 illustrates the closed state of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing bar B2500, FIG. 146 illustrates the closed state of the opening/closing bar B2500 and the open state of the opening/closing plate B2300, and FIG. A closed state of the opening/closing plate B2300 is illustrated.

In FIGS. 145, 146 and 147, the main body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 is shown transparently except for the outer shape, in order to improve visibility and facilitate understanding. illustrated as possible.

The variable winning device B2000, among the balls that are shot and flow down the left and right sides of the variable time device unit 80, almost all of the balls that have reached the inclined surfaces B1223 and B1243 provided on the upper surface are the first specified winning opening B1001 and the second specified It is constructed so as to be able to be guided to the range (flow path configuration range, pre-ball entry range) between the winning opening B1002.

FIG. 148 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device B2000, and FIG. 149 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device B2000. The variable winning device B2000 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and includes a base member B2100 fixed to the base plate 60, and a flow path configuration range (range before entering the ball) that is fastened and fixed to the base member B2100 from the front side. an opening/closing plate B2300 pivotally supported by being sandwiched between the body member B2100 and the covering member B2200; a first driving device B2400 that drives the opening/closing plate B2300; An opening/closing rod B2500 pivotally supported by being sandwiched between B2100 and a covering member B2200, a second driving device B2600 for driving the opening/closing rod B2500, and a first driving device assembled to the base member B2100 from the rear side. and a rear cover member (not shown) configured to cover the B2400 and the second driving device B2600 from the rear side. The rear cover member has a discharge portion which is a through hole through which the ball discharged from the discharge port B1150 passes, and the ball discharged from the discharge portion is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

Compared to the base member B1100 described in the first embodiment, the base member B2100 does not have the penetration forming portion B1120 and the guide opening B1160, but has other components. That is, the base member B2100 includes a pair of holding holes B1130, a plurality of protruding portions B1140, and a pair of discharge ports B1150 as portions described above in detail.

In addition, the base member B2100 includes a thin plate member B2110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, and a recessed portion extending from the front to the back side of the thin plate member B2110. A first accommodation portion B2111 formed partially through the opening and closing plate B2300 to accommodate the shaft portion B2320, and a recess formed in the thin plate member B2110 from the front toward the rear side to accommodate the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 of the opening and closing bar B2500. a second accommodation portion B2115 partially penetrating therethrough; a rotation support portion B2170 protruding toward the rear side of the thin plate member B2110 and supporting the power transmission member B2430 of the first driving device B2400; and a guide support portion B2180 for guiding the displacement of the driven rotation member B2630 and the transmission downstream member B2640 of the second driving device B2600.

The first accommodating portion B2111 includes a pair of left and right support recesses B2112 in which the shaft portion B2320 of the opening/closing plate B2300 is accommodated, and a rectangular recess B2113 recessed in a rectangular shape below the straight line connecting the support recesses B2112. , a rectangular shape along the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the pair of support recesses B2112 in order to move the load receiving portion B2330 of the opening/closing plate B2300 that operates along the right end of the rectangular recess B2113 to the front and back of the thin plate member B2110. and a through hole B2114 formed through.

The left and right support recesses B2112 have different structures. The support recess B2112 on the right side has a width slightly larger than the shaft portion B2320 of the opening/closing plate B2300 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side. The back of member B2200 closes the recessed opening. That is, the opening/closing plate B2300 is pivotally supported by the support recess B2112 and the rear surface of the covering member B2200.

On the other hand, the left support recess B2112 is recessed from the back side to the front side with a width slightly larger than the shaft portion B2320 of the opening/closing plate B2300. is inserted obliquely from the side of the rectangular recess B2113. That is, the opening/closing plate B2300 is pivotally supported by the front bottom portion of the support recess B2112 and the end portion of the rectangular recess B2113.

The rectangular recess B2113 has a larger surface area than the plate portion B2310 of the opening/closing plate B2300, and the length of the recess is slightly longer than the thickness of the plate portion B2310. As a result, when the opening/closing plate B2300 tilts (closed state), the plate portion B2310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular concave portion B2113, and the opening/closing plate B2300 can be prevented from protruding toward the front side of the thin plate member B2110.

The second housing portion B2115 includes a pair of left and right support recesses B2116 in which the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 of the opening/closing rod B2500 are housed, and the left and right inner sides of the support recess portions B2116 which are perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 of the opening/closing rod B2500. and an opening B2117 that is formed in an elongated shape along a plane that extends along the plane.

The support recess B2116 is formed as a non-penetrating recess, and has a width slightly larger than the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 of the opening/closing rod B2500. The recessed opening is closed by the back of the B2200. That is, the opening/closing bar B2500 is pivotally supported by the support recess B2116 and the rear surface of the covering member B2200.

Specifically, the shaft portion B2511 of the left arm portion B2510 is pivotally supported by the back surface of the left extension portion B1240 and the support recess B2116, and the shaft portion B2521 of the right arm portion B2520 is disposed in the right extension portion B1220. It is pivotally supported by the back side surface of the eaves portion B2271 and the support recess B2116.

The width of the opening B2117 is slightly longer than the width of the opening/closing portion B2513 of the opening/closing rod B2500, and is configured so that the opening/closing portion B2513 can enter when the opening/closing rod B2500 is open. In this embodiment, when the opening/closing rod B2500 is in the open state (lowered position state), the opening/closing portion B2513 can be completely accommodated in the opening portion B2117, thereby making it easy to ensure a large rotation angle of the opening/closing rod B2500. A notch extending from the middle position of the vertically long opening to the opposite side of the support recess B2116 functions as an opening through which the action portion B2512 of the left arm portion B2510 is passed to the rear side.

The rotation support portion B2170 includes a shaft portion B2171 that rotatably supports the power transmission member B2430, and a circular shape or an arc shape that is coaxial with the shaft portion B2171 and has a uniform protrusion height toward the back side of the thin plate member B2110. and a circular rib B2172 formed in the shape of a rib.

The circular rib B2172 maintains the distance between the rotating tip portion B2436 of the power transmission member B2430 and the rear surface of the thin plate member B2110 at a certain distance or more. That is, the circular rib B2172 is formed in the entire angle range where the power transmission member B2430 is in contact with the rotation tip B2436 during operation.

The guide support portion B2180 is parallel to the shaft portion B2171 and protrudes in the same shape as the shaft portion B2181 for rotatably supporting the driven rotating member B2630 of the second driving device B2600, and vertically extends on the left side of the shaft portion B22181. and a pair of guide ridges B2182 formed as elongated ridges. A pair of guide ridges B2182 are arranged in parallel, and are configured to be able to guide the vertical displacement of a downstream transmission member B2640, which will be described later.

Unlike the covering member B1200 described in the first embodiment, the covering member B2200 does not have the ball guide receiving portion B1260, but has other components. That is, the covering member B2200 includes a right extension portion B1220, a first detection sensor B1230, a left extension portion B1240, and a second detection sensor B1250 as the parts described above in detail.

In addition, the covering member B2200 includes, as parts to be newly explained, a plate-like main body member B2210 disposed at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100 on the front side, and a right extending portion B1220 extending from the base member B2100. and a cover plate portion B2270 that extends like a ridge from the tip portion toward the left extension portion B1240.

A range surrounded by the main body member B2210, the front view left side wall portion of the right side extension portion B1220, the front view right side wall portion of the left side extension portion B1240, and the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100 (pre-entering range) A sphere is configured so that it can flow down.

The main body member B2210 has a plurality of projecting portions B2211 projecting toward the downstream path of the ball on the back side, and a long rectangular opening along the inclination of the rotation axis of the opening/closing bar B2500. A shaku opening B2215 is provided.

The projecting portion B2211 has the same function as the projecting portion B1211 described in each of the above embodiments, but in the present embodiment, it cannot be formed to project from the long opening B2215, and the opening/closing bar The shape is different due to the need to avoid collision with the B2500.

That is, the projecting part B2211 faces the long opening B2215 side while maintaining the effect of decelerating the ball by making the outer shape of the side surface facing the downstream path side of the ball equivalent to the shape of the projecting part B1140. A curved surface B2212 is formed on the side surface at a distance from the displacement trajectory of the connecting portion B2530, and a downward extending portion B2213 extending downward from a portion above the long opening B2215 is formed.

The projecting length of the projecting portion B2211 is the same as the projecting length of the projecting portion B1140. In addition, the height position of the lower end portion from the center of the ball rolling on the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing rod B2500 in the open state is the same between the projecting portion B1140 and the projecting portion B2211. Therefore, the degree of meandering of the ball rolling on the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing rod B2500 in the front-rear direction can be made approximately the same, so that a high deceleration effect can be produced.

In this way, by shifting the contact position from the center of the sphere, lengthening the projection length in the front-rear direction of the projecting portion B2211 and shortening the formation length in the vertical direction, the outside of the displacement trajectory of the connecting portion B2530 can be made easy to form the projecting portion B2211.

In this embodiment, the curved surface B2212 is configured as a relief for separating from the displacement trajectory of the connecting portion B2530, and a slight gap is provided. good. That is, the design may be such that the curved surface B2212 is formed along the trailing edge of the displacement trajectory of the connecting portion B2530.

In this case, the curved surface B2212 can guide the displacement of the connecting portion B2530, stabilize the displacement of the connecting portion B2530, and bend the rearward displacement of the connecting portion B2530 in the closed state of the opening/closing rod B2500. It can be regulated by the surface B2212.

Therefore, for example, even if the opening/closing rod B2500 is placed in an unstable position due to a large gap at the support position, the connection portion B2530 is displaced rearward when the opening/closing rod B2500 is in the closed state, and the range before ball entry It is possible to prevent it from sticking out. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being obstructed.

The downward extending portion B2213 functions as a portion for forming the base end portion of the projecting portion B2211 outside the long opening B2215. It can be made to protrude to the inside of long opening B2215.

The downwardly extending portion B2213 has a shape that hangs down from above the elongated opening B2215, and is configured to partially block the upper and rear portions of the connecting portion B2530 in the closed state of the opening/closing rod B2500. Therefore, even if the ball flows down to the connecting portion B2530, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the connecting portion B2530 by causing the ball to collide with the downward extending portion B2213 before colliding with the connecting portion B2530. .

In addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 145, only the shaped portion of the downwardly extending portion B2213 may be arranged so as to be closely aligned in the left and right direction above the elongated opening B2215. As a result, while maintaining the degree of deceleration, it is possible to widen the formation range of the downward extending portion B2213 for preventing the ball from colliding with the connecting portion B2530. can be prevented with certainty.

The elongated opening B2215 is formed into a shape that allows the connecting portion B2530 of the opening/closing rod B2500 to enter. That is, the shape of the opening is designed so as to avoid the locus of movement of the connecting portion B2530 of the opening/closing rod B2500.

Body member B2210 is formed from a light transmissive material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the pre-entering range. The form of the main body member B2210 is not limited to this, and may be partially impermeable, or may be devised in the same manner as the above-described main body member B1210.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the back side of the main body member B2210 can be visually recognized through the elongated opening B2215, even if the main body member B2210 is configured to be opaque, the range before entering the ball flows down. It is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the ball.

The right extended portion B1220 has substantially the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, but the ridge support portion B1225 is not formed (omitted) in order to realize the operation of the opening/closing plate B2300. The left extending portion B1240 has substantially the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, but the ridge support portion B1245 is not formed (omitted).

The cover plate portion B2270 is formed at a position that can close the support recess B2116 of the base member B2100 from the front side, and is a portion that prevents the shaft portion B2521 of the opening/closing rod B2500 from falling off. That is, the shaft portion B2521 of the opening/closing rod B2500 is supported by the support recess B2116 and the cover member B2270.

The opening/closing plate B2300 is a member that switches between the case where the ball rolls toward the first detection sensor B1230 and the case where the ball falls downward without coming into contact with the ball, depending on the difference in posture, and is a horizontally long rectangular plate. A portion B2310, a pair of shaft portions B2320 protruding along the longitudinal direction from the lateral ends of the plate portion B2310, and a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion B2320 at the base of the shaft portion B2320 on the right side in front view. and a load-bearing portion B2330 extending along the length of the main body.

The plate portion B2310 is provided with a rolling surface B2311 on which the ball rolls in the raised posture (open state, see FIG. 146), and the length of the short direction is the raised posture (open state, see FIG. ), the distance from the covering member B2200 is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction is set to approach the first detection sensor B1230.

In addition, the plate portion B2310 has a chamfered portion B2312 chamfered into an arcuate cross-section at the upper corner portion of the opposite end portion of the shaft portion B2320 in the raised posture (open state).

The plate portion B2310 is formed in a flat plate shape elongated in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

The load receiving portion B2330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry prevention portion B2331 extending from the front side of the rolling surface B2311, and an intervening transmission portion B2332 extending from the end of the ball entry prevention portion B2331 on the shaft portion B2320 side. and an engaging portion B2333 projecting from the intermediate transmission portion B2332 to the right side in rear view (the side on which the power transmission member B2430 is arranged).

The engagement portion B2333 extends to a position where it enters the motion locus of the power transmission member B2430, and has a chamfered portion B2333a chamfered in an arc shape on the upper surface portion. When the power transmission member B2430 abuts, the chamfered portion B2333a, not the corner portion, abuts the power transmission member B2430, so stress concentration can be avoided when the engaging portion B2333 abuts the power transmission member B2430. .

The first driving device B2400 includes a first solenoid B2410 that linearly operates a movable member by switching excitation, and an H-shaped front view (a shape with concave portions at the top and bottom) disposed at the tip of the movable member of the first solenoid B2410. ), and a power transmission member B2430 which is rotatably supported by the shaft portion B2171 of the base member B2100 and which rotates to apply a load to the opening/closing plate B2300.

The tip member B2420 is configured such that the concave portion on the upper side thereof can accommodate the protruding pin B2433 of the power transmission member B2430. Specifically, a recess is formed in such a shape that the protruding pin B2433 is accommodated inside while the power transmission member B2430 rotates (see FIG. 151(c)).

The power transmission member B2430 mainly includes a disk-shaped body portion B2431 and an extension portion B2435 extending from the body portion B2431 in the axial radial direction.

The body portion B2431 mainly includes a support hole B2432 through which the shaft portion B2171 is inserted, and a projecting pin B2433 projecting from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the drilling direction of the support hole B2432.

The protruding pin B2433 is a portion that engages with the tip member B2420. As the tip member B2420 linearly moves by switching the excitation of the first solenoid B2410, the protruding pin B2433 is displaced and the power transmission member B2430 is displaced. rotates.

The extension portion B2435 has a rotation tip portion B2436 formed in an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole B2432 at the extension tip portion, and a pushing portion B2437 projecting from the rotation tip portion B2436 toward the front side. Prepare.

The opening/closing bar B2500 has a pair of left and right arm portions B2510 and B2520 which are swingably supported at one end with respect to the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100 and which are spaced apart in the left and right direction on the front side, and the pair of arm portions. It has a connecting portion B2530 that connects the pivotal support end portions of B2510 and B2520 and the other end portion located on the opposite side, and is formed in a substantially U-shape.

The opening/closing bar B2500 is configured such that when the arm portions B2510 and B2520 swing, the connecting portion B2530 approaches and separates from the thin plate member B2110 on the front side of the thin plate member B2110. Left and right shaft portions B2511 and B2521 are formed so as to protrude in directions away from each other at the upper end portion (one end portion) located on the thin plate member B2110 side in the open state of the opening/closing rod B2500, and the axis line descends to the left when viewed from the front. The left and right shaft portions B2511 and B2521 are supported by the support recesses B2116 (see FIG. 148) of the thin plate member B2110 in a posture inclined to the right.

The connecting portion B2530 is provided so as to extend along the longitudinal direction on the surface of the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 facing the side of the pivoted end portion (one end portion side pivotally supported by the thin plate member B2110). It has a moving surface B2531.

In the following description, the left arm portion may be referred to as the left arm portion B2510 and the right arm portion may be referred to as the right arm portion B2520 for distinction.

As shown in FIG. 145, the left arm portion B2510 is provided so as to be positioned adjacent to the opening edge of the second special prize winning opening B1002, and the rear end portion of the left arm portion B2510 passes through the opening B2117 of the thin plate member B2110. It is configured to protrude to the rear side of the thin plate member B2110.

An acting portion B2512 is provided in the left arm portion B2510 at a position protruding to the rear side of the thin plate member B2110, and the acting portion B2512 is configured to be insertable from the front side into the transmission downstream member B2640 of the second driving device B2600. .

As a result, the opening/closing rod B2500 is configured to be displaceable (swingable) between the open state and the closed state as the second solenoid B2610 is driven (excited). Details of the open state and the open/closed state of the opening/closing bar B2500 will be described later.

Here, when the opening/closing rod B2500 swings from the closed state to the open state, the connecting portion B2530 moves downward around the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 to approach the thin plate member B2110, and conversely, from the open state. When swinging to the closed state, the connecting portion B2530 moves upward while separating from the thin plate member B2110 around the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 (see FIGS. 154 and 155). That is, the opening/closing rod B2500 is configured to swing so as to pass the ball riding on the rolling surface B2531 downward when it is displaced from the open state to the closed state.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 151(b) and 152(b), the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 allows the sphere to pass through the region surrounded by the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 and the connecting portion B2530. Thus, the connecting portion B2530 is formed with a length dimension that allows the connecting portion B2530 to be separated from the thin plate member B2110.

In the closed state, the connection portion B2530 is spaced forward from the thin plate member B2110 so that the ball can pass through the thin plate member B2110, while in the open state, the ball cannot pass through the thin plate member B2110. The connecting portion B2530 is configured to be closer to the front of the thin plate member B2110 than in the closed state.

That is, the opening/closing rod B2500 is switched between the closed state and the open state by moving the connecting portion B2530 back and forth on the front side of the thin plate member B2110 as the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 swing. The connecting portion B2530 is spaced in front of the thin plate member B2110 so that the ball can pass between it and the thin plate member B2110, and the ball passes downward through the area surrounded by the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 and the connecting portion B2530. On the other hand, the connection portion B2530 is positioned in front of the thin plate member B2110 to receive the ball so that the ball cannot pass between the thin plate member B2110 and the thin plate member B2110 in the open state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 145, when the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the closed state, a part of the left arm portion B2510 is positioned on the right side of the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002, and the opening to the second specific winning opening B1002 While preventing the ball from entering, when the opening/closing bar B2530 is in the open state, the left arm portion B2510 retreats backward from the right side of the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002 to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning opening B1002. It is configured to allow the entry of

That is, as the opening/closing bar B2500 is switched between the closed state and the open state, the second specific prize winning opening B1002 is opened and closed by the left arm portion B2510. Therefore, in the following description, the portion of the left arm portion B2510 that opens and closes the second specific winning opening B1002 will be referred to as an opening/closing portion B2513.

That is, the opening/closing bar B2500 is provided with an opening/closing portion B2513 that closes the second specific winning hole B1002 so as not to allow the ball to enter, on the inclined lower end side of the rolling surface B2531 in the horizontal direction, and the opening/closing bar B2500 is arranged at the raised position. In the closed state, the opening/closing part B2513 closes the second specific winning hole B1002, and in the open state in which the opening/closing bar B2500 is arranged at the lowered position, the opening/closing part B2513 opens the second specific winning hole B1002. .

In this embodiment, the opening and closing part B2513 is formed in a curved shape (cross-sectional J-shape) that is concave toward the rear, so that the left arm part B2510 does not overlap the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002 in the open state. is configured to retract backwards.

In addition, when the second specific winning opening B1002 is closed by the opening/closing part B2513, a part of the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened (not hidden from the opening direction) with an opening width that does not allow the ball to enter. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening right side of the second specific winning opening B1002 may be completely closed by the opening/closing part B2513.

In addition, the opening/closing portion B2513 is formed in an inclined surface shape in which the right side facing the side opposite to the second specific winning opening B1002 is inclined toward the second specific winning opening B1002 as it approaches the front edge side, and the opening/closing bar B2500 is in an open state. When the state is switched from to the closed state, at a position close to the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002, the opening and closing part B2513 can be inserted between the second specific winning opening B1002 and the ball on the rolling surface B2531 It has become.

That is, by forming the opening/closing portion B2513 in the shape of an inclined surface, the ball just before entering the second specific winning hole B1002 (the ball detected by the second detection sensor B1250) is moved to the second specific winning hole B1002. can be pushed back from

Further, when the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the open state, a part of the opening/closing portion B2513 protrudes forward from the thin plate member B2110 and is positioned above the rolling surface B2531 (Fig. 153(d)). ), the ball rolling on the rolling surface B2531 in contact with the thin plate member B2110 contacts the opening/closing portion B2513.

Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling surface B2531 while in contact with the thin plate member B2110 contacts the opening/closing portion B2513 at the inclined lower end portion of the rolling surface B2531 in the left-right direction. By separating the ball from the thin plate member B2110, the ball can be guided to the center of the opening of the second specific prize winning opening B1002.

In this way, the opening/closing part B2513 functions to push back the ball that is about to enter the second specific winning hole B1002, while separating the ball rolling on the rolling surface B2531 from the thin plate member B2110. It also functions as a guide surface that leads to the second specific winning opening B1002.

The right arm portion B2520 is formed in a curved shape (J-shape) that is substantially the same as the left arm portion B2510. It is configured to bias the opening/closing bar B2500 from the closed state toward the open state.

That is, in the opening/closing rod B2500, by providing the weight portion B2522 on the end side apart from the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 pivotally supported by the thin plate member B2110, the opening/closing rod B2500 can be rapidly displaced from the closed state to the open state. At the same time, the stability of the opening/closing rod B2500 in the open state is enhanced by the weight portion B2522 to prevent the opening/closing rod B2500 from being displaced from the open state to the closed state due to the impact when the reaching ball contacts the rolling surface B2531. It is configured to prevent (suppress).

As shown in FIG. 148, the weight portion B2522 is formed by fitting and fixing a metal weight member B2523 from a side opening of a cylindrical weight fixing portion B2522a that opens rightward.

The weight B2522 is arranged below the upper edge of the long opening B2215 of the covering member B2200 in the closed state of the opening/closing bar B2500, and is positioned forward of the rear side surface of the main body member B2210. It is provided so as to be positioned below the eaves portion B2271 of the cover plate portion B2270, and prevents the falling ball from contacting the weight portion B2522.

That is, the covering member B2200 is provided with a canopy B2271 that prevents the ball from contacting the weight B2522 on the front side of the thin plate member B2110 and above the moving range of the weight B2522. It contacts the portion B2522 to prevent the opening/closing bar B2500 from being biased from the closed state to the open state.

The connecting portion B2530 is formed in a bar shape extending parallel to the axis of the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 (see FIG. 148). is positioned below the right end and is configured to incline downward to the left.

In the connection portion B2530, a rolling surface B2531 is formed on a surface facing the pivot end side of the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 (a surface facing upward in the open state), and is connected when the opening/closing rod B2500 is in the open state. The ball received by the bar B2530 can be rolled toward the left end, which is the lower end of the inclination in the left-right direction.

Here, the left end of the rolling surface B2531 in the open state of the opening/closing bar B2500 is configured to be positioned at a height position substantially aligned with the lower end of the opening of the second specific winning hole B1002, and is on the rolling surface B2531. ball can be rolled toward the second specific winning opening B1002.

That is, the rolling surface B2531 is provided on the opening/closing rod B2500 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side of the flow path of the ball toward the second specific winning opening B1002 in the open state of the opening/closing rod B2500, and connects the downward passage. The ball regulated by the part B2530 is rolled toward the second specific winning opening B1002.

Further, in the open state, the connecting portion B2530 is configured to be separated from the front side of the thin plate member B2110 by a distance narrower than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 152(b)), displacing the opening/closing rod B2500 toward the closed state. As a result, the space between the connecting rod B2530 and the thin plate member B2110 can be rapidly expanded to a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the ball, and the ball on the rolling surface B2531 can drop downward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145, when the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the closed state, the connecting portion B2530 is configured to contact the upper edge portion B2216 forming the upper edge of the elongated opening B2215 of the covering member B2200. At least part of the rolling surface B2531 in the closed state faces the upper edge B2216.

In this embodiment, the entire length of the connecting portion B2530 is configured to contact the upper edge portion B2216 in the closed state. That is, it is configured so that the ball flowing down from above does not come into contact with the rolling surface B2531 in the closed state, thereby preventing the opening/closing rod B2500 from being displaced from the closed state to the open state due to contact with the ball. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 152(a), the rolling surface B2531 is configured so as to be inclined downward toward the second specific winning opening B1002 in the open state, while being horizontal in the front-rear direction (front-rear direction). direction is non-tilted). As a result, the ball rolling on the rolling surface B2531 can be easily displaced back and forth, so that the deceleration effect due to contact with the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 can be effectively generated.

Further, the rolling surface B2531 is formed so that the width dimension is different between the inclined upper end side and the inclined lower end side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the rolling surface B2531 includes a strip-shaped first rolling surface portion B2532 positioned on the upper end side of the horizontal inclination, and a lower end of the horizontal inclination of the first rolling surface portion B2532. A second rolling surface portion B2533 having a width dimension larger than that of the first rolling surface portion B2532 is provided.

The first rolling surface portion B2532 and the second rolling surface portion B2533 are formed such that the rear end portion facing the thin plate member B2110 in the open state is formed in a continuous linear shape over the formation portions of both the rolling surface portions B2532 and B2533. ing.

On the other hand, the front end portion of the second rolling surface portion B2533 located on the side of the body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 is positioned forward of the front end portion of the first rolling surface portion B2532 located on the side of the body member B2210. is formed in

That is, the opening/closing rod B2500 is formed with a stepped portion B2534 corresponding to the connecting portion of both the rolling surface portions B2532 and B2533 at the front portion of the rolling surface B2531. When the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the closed state, the stepped portion B2534 is engaged from below with an engagement recess B2217 recessed upward from the left upper edge of the long opening B2215 of the covering member B2200. and prevents (corrects) the positional deviation of the opening/closing rod B2500 in the axial direction.

In this way, in the rolling surface B2531, by widening the second rolling surface portion B2533 corresponding to the inclined lower end portion where the opening/closing portion B2513 is formed, the rolling surface B2531 can extend along the inclination of the opening/closing portion B2513. Even if the rolling ball is guided forward, it can roll on the second rolling surface B2533, so the ball can be stably rolled on the rolling surface B2531. In addition, the second rolling surface portion B2533 is formed with a lateral width exceeding the diameter of the sphere from the right end portion of the opening/closing portion B2513 (the right side surface of the left arm portion B2510).

The second driving device B2600 includes a second solenoid B2610 that linearly moves a movable member by switching excitation, and an H-shaped front view (a shape with concave portions at the top and bottom) disposed at the tip of the movable member of the second solenoid B2610. ), a driven rotating member B2630 that is pivotally supported (pivotally supported) by a shaft portion B2181 so as to be rotatable as the distal end member B2620 is displaced in the lateral direction, and the rotational displacement of the driven rotating member B2630 and a transmission downstream member B2640 that can be displaced along with it and guided in the vertical direction by the guide ridge B2182.

The distal end member B2620 is configured such that the concave portion on the lower side thereof can accommodate the protruding pin B2633 of the driven rotating member B2630. Specifically, a recess is formed in a shape that keeps the projecting pin B2633 accommodated inside while the driven rotating member B2630 rotates (see FIGS. 150(c) and 152(c)).

The driven rotating member B2630 includes a disk-shaped main body B2631, a support hole B2632 having a diameter (slightly larger diameter) that allows the shaft B2181 to be inserted through the main body B2631, and an outer diameter side from the main body B2631. A protruding pin B2633 protruding in a cylindrical shape parallel to the drilling direction of the support hole B2632 from the extended arm portion extending to the main body portion B2631, and an extending portion B2635 extending in the axial radial direction from the main body portion B2631. , and a protruding pin B2636 protruding in a columnar shape parallel to the drilling direction of the support hole B2632 at the extending tip portion of the extending portion B2635.

The protruding pin B2633 is a portion that engages with the tip member B2620. As the tip member B2620 linearly moves by switching the excitation of the second solenoid B2610, the protruding pin B2633 is displaced, and the driven rotating member B2630 rotates. rotates.

The protruding pin B2636 protrudes toward the body plate portion B2641 side of the downstream transmission member B2640, and can be inserted through the long hole B2643. The distance between the projecting pin B2636 and the support hole B2632 is configured to be longer than the distance between the projecting pin B2633 and the support hole B2632. At the tip of the projecting pin B2636, a retaining projecting portion is formed in a direction perpendicular to the projecting direction.

The retaining projecting portion is formed in a shape that can be inserted into the long hole B2643 when the longitudinal direction is aligned, and can be inserted during assembly, while the retaining projecting portion can be removed after assembly is completed. It is configured such that the longitudinal direction and the longitudinal direction of the long hole B2643 are not aligned. Thereby, when the transmission downstream member B2640 is displaced in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent it from coming off the projecting pin B2636.

The downstream transmission member B2640 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion B2641 arranged opposite to the back side of the thin plate member B2110, and a vertically elongated projection protruding from the left side of the main body plate portion B2641 toward the front side. A guided ridge B2642, a long hole B2643 drilled in the main body plate portion B2641 in a laterally elongated shape, and a pair of plates vertically arranged side by side as a plate portion wide in the front-rear direction on the left side of the main body plate portion B2641. and a part B2644.

The guided protrusion B2642 is formed with a width slightly shorter than the gap between the pair of guide protrusions B2182. As a result, the guided protrusion B2642 can be guided by the guide protrusion B2182, so that the posture of the downstream transmission member B2640 can be stabilized, and the displacement direction of the downstream transmission member B2640 can be stabilized in the vertical direction. can.

The elongated hole B2643 is a through hole through which the protruding pin B2636 of the driven rotating member B2630 is inserted. It is possible to improve the followability of the transmission downstream member B2640 to the displacement of . Further, the elongated hole B2643 is formed so that the horizontal width is longer than the vertical width, so that the projecting pin B2636 can be allowed to be displaced in the horizontal direction.

The plate portion B2644 is arranged so as to vertically sandwich the acting portion B2512 of the opening/closing rod B2500. As a result, as the downstream transmission member B2640 is displaced in the vertical direction, a vertical load is generated from the plate portion B2644 to the action portion B2512, thereby displacing the opening/closing rod B2500.

As described above, the displacement of the opening/closing rod B2500 is a rotational displacement centered on the shafts B2511 and B2521, so the acting portion B2512 is displaced not only in the vertical direction but also in the front-rear direction. The front-to-rear length of the plate portion B2644 is set so that the plate portion B2644 sandwiches the action portion B2512 in the vertical direction no matter where the action portion B2512 is arranged in the front-rear direction. Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the opening/closing rod B2500, the allowable width of displacement of the opening/closing rod B2500 can be restricted by the arrangement of the plate portion B2644.

The allowable width will be explained in more detail. First, if only the plate portion B2644 is to switch the state of the opening/closing bar B2500 between the open state and the closed state, only the upper plate portion B2644 may be used. As long as the upper plate portion B2644a exists, the second solenoid B2610 is de-energized and the tip member B2620 is displaced to the left, and the action portion B2512 is pushed down by the plate portion B2644a, thereby closing the opening/closing bar B2500. (see FIGS. 150(a) and 150(c)).

In this closed state, the center of gravity of the opening/closing bar B2500 is located on the side of the weight B2522 (the front side of the shafts B2511 and B2521). (also referred to as the front-down direction).

The plate portion B2644a applies a load to the opening/closing rod B2500 in a rotational direction (also referred to as forward upward direction) that is opposite to the forward downward direction. By exceeding the load, the switching bar B2500 is maintained in the closed state.

When the second solenoid B2610 is energized and the tip member B2620 is displaced rightward, the plate portion B2644a is displaced upward, thereby temporarily weakening the load in the direction of pushing down the action portion B2512 from the plate portion B2644a. In this embodiment, the load on the action portion B2512 is eliminated by retracting the plate portion B2644a above the arrangement range of the action portion B2512.

As a result, the opening/closing bar B2500 can be displaced forward and downward by the biasing force of the weight portion B2522, and is switched to the open state. If the second solenoid B2610 is de-energized from this state, the plate portion B2644a pushes down the action portion B2512 again, and the closed state can be configured. Thus, if only switching the state of the opening/closing bar B2500 between the open state and the closed state is considered, only the plate portion B2644a is essential, and the lower plate portion B2644b is unnecessary.

On the other hand, with only the plate portion B2644a, there is a possibility that a problem may arise in the stability of the posture of the opening/closing rod B2500 in the open state of the opening/closing rod B2500. For example, in the open state of the opening/closing rod B2500, it is easily conceivable that the opening/closing rod B2500 will be displaced by a ball colliding with the opening/closing rod B2500. cannot be regulated.

Therefore, even though the second solenoid B2610 is energized and controlled to maintain the open/close bar B2500 in the open state, the impact of the impact of the ball displaces the open/close bar B2500 forward and upward, resulting in the closed state. It can cause trouble to configure.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the plate portion B2644b is arranged below the plate portion B2644a to restrict the upward and forward displacement of the open/close bar B2500 in the open state. As a result, the opening and closing bar B2500 in the open state is affected by the impact of the ball, other disturbances (for example, the player applying a load to the pachinko machine 10 and moving it, the load caused by the displacement of the movable role, and the inside and outside of the game area). It is possible to avoid the problem of being displaced due to a load applied from, etc.) and constituting a closed state.

Next, state switching of the variable winning device B2000 will be described. FIG. 150(a) is a front view of the variable winning device B2000, FIG. 150(b) is a top view of the variable winning device B2000 viewed in the direction of arrow CLb in FIG. 150(a), and FIG. 150(c). [Fig. 150] is a rear view of the variable prize winning device B2000 viewed in the direction of arrow CLc in Fig. 150(b).

151(a) is a front view of the variable winning device B2000, FIG. 151(b) is a top view of the variable winning device B2000 viewed in the direction of the arrow CLIb in FIG. 151(a), and FIG. 151(c). [Fig. 151B] is a rear view of the variable winning device B2000 viewed in the direction of arrow CLIc in Fig. 151(b).

152(a) is a front view of the variable winning device B2000, FIG. 152(b) is a top view of the variable winning device B2000 viewed in the direction of the arrow CLIIb in FIG. 152(a), and FIG. 152(c). [Fig. 152B] is a rear view of the variable winning device B2000 viewed in the direction of arrow CLIIc in Fig. 152(b).

FIG. 153(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 along the CLIIIa-CLIIIa line in FIG. 150(a), and FIG. 153(b) is a variable winning device B2000 along the CLIIIb-CLIIIb line in FIG. 150(a). 153(c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 taken along line CLIIIc-CLIIIc of FIG. 151(a), and FIG. 153(d) is a cross-sectional view of CLIIId-CLIIId of FIG. 152(a). It is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 along the line.

150 shows the closed state of the switch plate B2300 and the closed state of the switch bar B2500, FIG. 151 shows the open state of the switch plate B2300 and the closed state of the switch bar B2500, and FIG. The closed state of B2300 and the open state of open/close bar B2500 are shown. 150 to 152, the main body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 is illustrated transparently so that the shape of the rear side thereof can be visually recognized.

In FIGS. 150(a), 151(a), and 152(a), in the pre-ball entry range, at least a portion of the range through which the ball cannot pass is additionally marked with polka dots (dots).

As shown in FIG. 150(a) with polka dots (dots), in the closed state of the opening/closing plate B2300, the ball entry preventing portion B2331 is arranged on the left side of the opening of the first specific winning hole B1001, and FIG. As shown in a), the entry of a ball is prevented by partially closing the first specific winning hole B1001. Also, in the closed state of the opening/closing bar B2500, the opening/closing portion B2513 is arranged on the right side of the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002, and as shown in FIG. 153(b), the second specific winning opening B1002 is partially closed. The entry of the ball is prevented by being

In this way, in the state shown in FIG. 150(a), the ball flowing down the pre-entering range falls downward without entering either the first specific winning hole B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1002. Become. That is, when the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the closed state, the ball-entering preventing portion B2331 is arranged so as to partially close the opening of the first detection sensor B1230, and when the opening/closing rod B2500 is in the closed state, the opening/closing portion B2513 is positioned so as to cover the second detection sensor B1250. It is arranged so as to partially block the opening of the Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the first specific winning hole B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1002.

Therefore, irregular winning (for example, even if the ball is not guided by the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing bar B2500, the ball that collides with other components is thrown laterally into the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002. entering the ball), cheating (for example, attracting the ball with a magnet to win a prize, or pulling or shaking the end of the string on the opposite side of the ball that is hit with the string glued to the ball) It is possible to prevent the winning of a prize by an act of manipulating the position to win a prize.

150(a), the plate portion B2310 of the opening/closing plate B2300 is added to the range described above in FIG. The polka dot pattern (dots) is erased from part B2331.

That is, by energizing the first solenoid B2410 and switching the opening/closing plate B2300 to the open state, the gap between the plate portion B2310 and the body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 is made less than the diameter of the ball, and the ball opens and closes. It is configured such that the front side of the plate B2300 cannot be passed downward.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153(c), in the open state of the opening/closing plate B2300, the ball-entering preventing portion B2331 enters the through hole B2114 and passes through the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110 (at least the first specific winning hole B1001). By retreating to the rear side (than the opening range), it is arranged at a position that does not block the opening of the first detection sensor B1230, and is configured not to interfere with the ball entering the first specific winning hole B1001.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 151(a), the ball flowing down the pre-entering range is guided toward the first specific winning opening B1001, and is configured to be able to enter the first specific winning opening B1001.

152(a), the range with polka dots (dots) has a connecting portion B2530 of the opening/closing bar B2500 added to the range described above in FIG. The polka dot pattern (dots) has been erased from.

That is, by energizing the second solenoid B2610 and switching the opening/closing bar B2500 to the open state, the gap between the connecting portion B2530 and the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the connecting portion By setting the gap between B2530 and the main body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 to be less than the diameter of the ball, the ball cannot pass downward in front and behind the opening/closing bar B2500.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153(d), when the opening/closing bar B2500 is open, the opening/closing portion B2513 enters the opening portion B2117 and is closer to the rear side than the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110 (at least the second specific winning opening B1002). By retreating to the outside of the opening range), it is arranged at a position that does not block the opening of the second detection sensor B1250, and is configured not to interfere with the ball entering the second specific winning hole B1002.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 152(a), the ball flowing down the pre-entering range is guided toward the second specific winning opening B1002, and configured to be able to enter the second specific winning opening B1002. When a ball enters the first specific winning hole B1001, the first specific winning hole B1001 is blocked by the ball entry prevention part B2331 of the opening/closing plate B2300, and the right arm part B2520 and the connecting part B2530 of the opening/closing bar B2500 It is prevented by being arranged in the opening direction of the 1 specific winning hole B1001.

Switching of excitation of the solenoid will be described below. In FIG. 150(c), neither the first solenoid B2410 nor the second solenoid B2610 is energized and is in a non-excited state. This is the standby state of the variable winning device B2000, which is maintained before the start of the game or in the normal state, and the variable winning device B2000 is maintained in this state for most of its operating time.

Mainly in the special game state, as shown in FIG. 151 (c) and FIG. 152 (c), the first solenoid B2410 or the second solenoid B2610 is energized and excited, and the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing bar B2500 state can be switched.

As shown in FIG. 151(c), the second solenoid B2610 is maintained in a non-excited state, and when the first solenoid B2410 is energized, the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state, and the first detection sensor B1230 is first specified. It becomes possible to guide the ball to the winning opening B1001.

The opening/closing plate B2300 is rotated around the axis of the shaft portion B2320 (see FIG. 153(a)) by pushing down the engaging portion B2333 from the power transmission member B2430 when switching to the open state. Details of state switching and open state of the opening/closing plate B2300 will be described. That is, it is rotationally displaced about an axis perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 153(a).

When the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the open state, the first solenoid B2410 is in an energized state, the rotating tip portion B2436 of the power transmission member B2430 is displaced counterclockwise in rear view, and the engaging portion B2333 of the opening/closing plate B2300 is pushed. It is pushed into part B2437 (see FIG. 148).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 153(a) and 153(c), the engagement portion B2333 of the opening/closing plate B2300 is set so that the power transmission member B2430 is operated when the opening/closing plate B2300 starts to operate from the closed state. While arranged on the locus BE1, when the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state, it is pushed outward (toward the front side) of the operation locus BE1 along the rotation axis direction of the power transmission member B2430. Note that the motion trajectory BE1 is illustrated as the outline of the movement trajectory of the portion including the pushing portion B2437.

Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening/closing plate B2300 to the power transmission member B2430 after the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state is not the operating direction (rotational direction) of the power transmission member B2430, but the surface that forms the rotation direction. is multiplied in the axial direction which is perpendicular to . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft portion B2320 (see FIG. 153(a)) applied to the opening/closing plate B2300 from being transmitted to the first solenoid B2410 via the power transmission member B2430.

As a result, once the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state, the driving force of the first solenoid B2410 for maintaining the opening state of the opening/closing plate B2300 is prevented from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening/closing plate B2300. can be done. Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the first solenoid B2410 to the opening/closing plate B2300 at the maximum value.

In this way, even if a varying load is applied to the opening/closing plate B2300, the opening/closing plate B2300 can be maintained in the open state without being affected by the load. An example of the varying load applied to the opening/closing plate B2300 is the load applied by the weight of the sphere. That is, for example, since the opening/closing plate B2300 is configured so that balls land on the rolling surface B2311, the load due to the weight of the balls is received when the balls land. , the load applied to the switching plate B2300 can be varied.

When the first solenoid B2410 is de-energized, the extended portion B2435 of the power transmission member B2430 is displaced upward, the load on the opening/closing plate B2300 is released, and the opening/closing plate B2300 rotates in such a manner that the plate portion B2310 is displaced downward. dynamic displacement. Due to this rotational displacement, the ball entry preventing portion B2331 protrudes so as to block the first specific winning opening B1001 (see FIG. 153(a)).

That is, the ball-entering prevention part B2331 closes the opening of the first specific winning hole B1001 in such a manner as to narrow it from the rear side edge. In this embodiment, since the inner surface of the back side of the first specific winning opening B1001 is flush with the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100, the first specific winning opening is formed simultaneously with the start of displacement of the ball entry preventing portion B2331. The opening of mouth B1001 can begin to narrow. As a result, the first specific winning opening B1001 can be quickly closed.

As shown in FIG. 152(c), the first solenoid B2410 is maintained in a non-excited state, and when the second solenoid B2610 is energized, the opening/closing bar B2500 is switched to the open state, and the second detection sensor B1250 detects the second detection sensor B1250. It becomes possible to guide the ball to the winning opening B1002.

When the opening/closing rod B2500 is switched to the open state, the plate portion B2644 is displaced upward and the downward load applied to the action portion B2512 of the opening/closing rod B2500 is released. 153(b)). That is, it is rotationally displaced about an axis perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 153(b). Details of state switching and open state of the opening/closing bar B2500 will be described.

When the opening/closing bar B2500 is in an open state, the second solenoid B2610 is in an excited state. That is, when the second solenoid B2610 is energized to be in an excited state, the driven rotating member B2630 is displaced counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, and the downstream transmission member B2640 is displaced upward, thereby applying force to the opening/closing rod B2500. The load is released, and the opening/closing rod B2500 is switched to the open state.

In the energized state of the second solenoid B2610, the plate portion B2644b is arranged below the acting portion B2512 of the opening/closing rod B2500, and restricts the forward and upward rotation of the opening/closing rod B2500. As a result, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing rod B2500 from changing its state toward the closed state due to an impact that may occur when a ball collides with the opening/closing rod B2500.

The displacement of the opening/closing rod B2500 from the closed state to the open state is downward displacement, and the displacement restricting projection B2514 (see FIG. 149) projecting parallel to the axial direction from the left arm portion B2510 is attached to the base member B2100. An open state is formed at the abutting position. Therefore, it is less likely that the opening/closing rod B2500 will be switched to the closed state due to an increase in the load due to the weight of the ball that rides on the rolling surface B2531 of the opening/closing rod B2500, and the opening/closing rod B2500 will rather likely be maintained in the open state.

Therefore, once the opening/closing rod B2500 is switched to the open state, it is possible to prevent the driving force of the second solenoid B2610 for maintaining the opening/closing rod B2500 in the open state from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening/closing rod B2500. (In the first place, the opening/closing bar B2500 is not maintained in the open state by the driving force). Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the second solenoid B2610 at the maximum value.

In this way, even if a varying load is applied to the opening/closing rod B2500, the opening/closing rod B2500 can be maintained in the open state without being affected by the load. An example of the varying load applied to the opening/closing rod B2500 is the load applied by the weight of the ball. That is, for example, since the opening/closing bar B2500 is configured so that the balls land on the rolling surface B2531, when the balls land, the load due to the weight of the balls is received. , the load applied to the switching bar B2500 can be varied.

When the second solenoid B2610 is de-energized, the plate portion B2644 of the downstream transmission member B2640 is displaced downward, and a load is generated in the direction of pushing down the operating portion B2512 of the opening/closing rod B2500. The B2520 and the connecting portion B2530 are rotationally displaced in an upward displacement manner. Due to this rotational displacement, the opening/closing portion B2513 protrudes so as to block the second specific winning opening B1002 (see FIG. 153(b)).

That is, the opening/closing part B2513 closes the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002 in such a manner as to narrow it from the rear side edge. In this embodiment, since the inner surface of the back side of the second specific winning opening B1002 is flush with the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100, the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened simultaneously with the start of displacement of the opening/closing part B2513. You can begin to narrow the opening of the As a result, the second specific winning opening B1002 can be quickly closed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, the action of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing bar B2500 on the falling ball will be described.

FIG. 154(a) is a sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 along the CLIVa-CLIVa line in FIG. 151(a), and FIG. 154(b) is a variable winning device B2000 along the CLIVb-CLIVb line in FIG. 151(a). 154(c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 along line CLIVc-CLIVc of FIG. 151(a).

Also, FIG. 155(a) is a sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 along the CLVa-CLVa line in FIG. 152(a), and FIG. 155(b) is a variable winning device along the CLVb-CLVb line in FIG. 152(a). It is a sectional view of the device B2000, and FIG. 155(c) is a sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 taken along line CLVc-CLVc of FIG. 152(a).

In addition, in FIGS. 154 and 155, the outer diameter of the sphere is illustrated with imaginary lines for easy understanding. Also, in FIGS. 154 and 155, description of the first driving device B2400 and the second driving device B2600 is omitted.

In the special game state, the state shown in FIG. 154 and the state shown in FIG. 155 are alternately switched. At that time, after switching the side of the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing bar B2500 that is in the open state to the closed state, the side that is in the closed state is opened after an interval between rounds whose length of time is defined in advance. By setting the switching interval to be shorter than the time the ball falls (for example, 0.04 seconds), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of loose balls.

Here, of the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing rod B2500, the case where the ball on the side that is switched from the open state to the closed state is arranged above the side that is switched from the closed state to the open state. As described in each of the above-described embodiments, it is easy to prevent the occurrence of stray balls. On the other hand, the present embodiment adopts another effective configuration for preventing the occurrence of loose balls. This will be explained in order.

First, the displacement of the opening/closing plate B2300 from the open state to the closed state is a forward-downward rotational displacement around the rear end, so the ball on the opening/closing plate B2300 flows down while being drawn forward. However, when the opening/closing bar B2500 moves from the closed state to the open state, the connecting portion B2530 is displaced along the arc direction with the rear end portion as the central axis, in which the connecting portion B2530 slides downward on the back side. That is, the direction of displacement of the connecting portion B2530 is opposed to the downward direction of the ball in the front-rear direction.

Similarly, the displacement of the connecting portion B2530 of the opening/closing rod B2500 from the open state to the closed state is along the arc direction with the rear end portion as the center axis in the manner of rising upward on the front side, so that it was riding on the connecting portion B2530. When the ball flows down while being gathered to the rear side, the direction of displacement of the opening/closing plate B2300 when moving from the closed state to the open state becomes forward upward rotational displacement about the rear end portion as an axis. That is, the direction of displacement of the opening/closing plate B2300 is opposite to the downward direction of the ball in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to the case where the ball flows vertically downward, the amount of displacement of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the connecting portion B2530 from when the ball is switched to the open/closed state to when the ball starts to be received can be reduced, thus avoiding the spilled ball. can be made easier.

Secondly, as shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, at least a part of the displacement trajectory BE11 of the plate portion B2310 of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the displacement trajectory BE12 of the connection portion B2530 of the opening/closing bar B2500 are It is located below the center of the ball on the plate B2300 or the opening/closing bar B2500). Therefore, even if the mating member is switched to the closed state and the ball starts falling, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a loose ball by forming the open state while the ball is in the displacement trajectory BE11, BE12. .

In particular, as shown in FIG. 154(c), the ball that is on the lower part of the pre-entering range of the ball rolling on the opening/closing plate B2300 protrudes below the displacement trajectory BE12, and a loose ball is likely to occur. In terms of form, the ball is easily rescued by the anti-drop portion B2524 extending from the vicinity of the right arm portion B2520 of the connecting portion B2530.

The anti-spill portion B2524 extends in the shape of a thin plate that curves downward when the opening/closing rod B2500 is in the closed state from the tip of the rotation of the right arm portion B2520. The thin plate has a constant cross-sectional shape in the axial direction, and the radius of curvature of the curved shape is configured to be larger than the radius of the sphere when viewed in the axial direction. As a result, the contact between the spill prevention portion B2524 and the ball can be made to be a contact at a single point.

The extended distal end of the spill prevention portion B2524 is formed so as to taper in the axial cross-sectional shape. As a result, the area of contact with the ball when the anti-spill portion B2524 is displaced closer to the sphere can be suppressed, so the anti-spill portion B2524 can be easily slipped into the lower hemispherical portion of the sphere.

Here, if an attempt is made to rescue the ball by attaching a front-hanging portion to the tip of the member that is displaced in the front-rear direction, as in the guide plates B1300 and B1500, the area of the portion to be rescued expands when viewed from the front. In addition, since the direction of the load is orthogonal to the front side surface, there is likely to be no place for the load to escape through the ball, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are likely to stop.

On the other hand, the displacement of the anti-spill portion B2524 includes displacement in the vertical direction, so even if the tip is made thinner, the surface that contacts the sphere can be increased. In addition, since the direction of the load is inclined with respect to the front and rear side surfaces, the load can be released favorably. This makes it easier to avoid the situation where the opening/closing rod B2500 stops.

In this embodiment, the anti-spill portion B2524 is formed from the downstream end with a width half the axial length of the connecting portion B2530. Even if the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state when the ball is on the ball, the opening/closing bar B2500 is opened after that, so that the ball can be easily rescued by the spill prevention portion B2524. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a lost ball.

On the other hand, focusing on the ball rolling on the opening/closing rod B2500, the ball is arranged above the lower edge of the displacement trajectory BE11 throughout the flow path of the ball flowing down on the opening/closing rod B2500. Therefore, even if a portion corresponding to the spill prevention portion B2524 is not formed on the opening/closing plate B2300, the width of the plate portion B2310 in the lateral direction can be used to facilitate the recovery of the ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a lost ball.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, when the opening/closing plate B2300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the opening/closing plate B2300 is displaced upward. do. Therefore, if no countermeasures are taken, the ball will be fixed between the opening/closing plate B2300 and the projecting portions B1140 and B2211, which may hinder the operation of the opening/closing plate B2300.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 are displaced to the left and right, and the length of each projecting portion is shorter than the radius of the sphere (2.7 mm in the present embodiment). When the ball abuts against the protruding portions B1140 and B2211 during operation of the opening/closing plate B2300, the ball can be displaced in the horizontal direction by utilizing the curvature of the ball. In addition, since the lower ends of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 are arranged above the center position of the ball rolling on the opening/closing plate B2300, the ball can be displaced in the front-rear direction using the curvature of the ball. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from being fixed, so that the operation of the opening/closing plate B2300 can be maintained well.

When the opening/closing rod B2500 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, it is displaced upward, so that it vertically faces the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 with the ball interposed therebetween. Therefore, if no countermeasure is taken, the ball will be fixed between the opening/closing rod B2500 and the projecting portions B1140 and B2211, which may hinder the operation of the opening/closing rod B2500.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the radius of the displacement trajectory of the connecting portion B2530 is set larger than the radius of the sphere, so that the connecting portion B2530 can be configured to move around the outside of the sphere. This makes it easier to avoid the situation where the ball is fixed between the connection portion B2530 of the opening/closing rod B2500 and the projecting portions B1140 and B2211.

Further, when the opening/closing rod B2500 is displaced toward the closed state, the connecting portion B2530 is displaced toward the covering member B2200 (front side), while the ball on the connecting portion B2530 moves along with the displacement of the opening/closing rod B2500. As the rolling contact surface B2531 inclines in the rearward downward direction, it is displaced to the base member B2100 side (rear side).

That is, the ball riding on the connecting portion B2530 is configured to move the upper side of the connecting portion B2530 toward the side that does not interfere with the displacement of the connecting portion B2530. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid obstruction of the displacement of the connecting portion B2530 by the ball, so that the ball is fixed between the connecting portion B2530 of the opening/closing rod B2500 and the projecting portions B1140 and B2211. It can be made easier to avoid the occurrence.

With reference to FIG. 156, the manner in which a ball enters the variable winning device B2000 will be described. Figures 156(a) and 156(b) are front views of the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640 and the variable winning device B2000.

In FIG. 156(a), the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the open state and the opening/closing rod B2500 is in the closed state. In FIG. 156(b), the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the closed state and the opening/closing rod B2500 is opened. state.

In this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 144, the variable winning device B2000 is arranged in the lower left and right center of the game area (below the first winning opening 64). A ball can be made to reach the variable winning device B2000. In addition, since the game area is configured in a substantially bilaterally symmetrical shape, there is not much difference in the time it takes for the shot ball to reach the variable winning device B2000 depending on whether it is a left-handed game or a right-handed game.

In such a game machine, for example, the opening/closing plate of the variable winning device is configured to be opened by tilting and displacing toward the player's side with the lower side as an axis. If the balls are arranged symmetrically, it is considered that there is not much difference in the time from when the ball reaches the variable winning device to when the ball passes the detection sensor in either the left-handed game or the right-handed game.

On the other hand, in the variable winning device B2000 of the present embodiment, there is a large difference between the left-handed game and the right-handed game in the time it takes for the ball to pass through the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 after reaching the pre-entering range. occur.

First, the difference in the time from arrival to ball entry will be described. For example, when a game is played left-handed, many balls are left-handed and left-handed, except for the ball that deviates to the right from the top of the first winning port 64 due to the strong firing intensity, before entering the variable winning device B2000. go to the range.

In this case, when the opening/closing plate B2300 is opened (see FIG. 156(a)), the ball rides on the left side (upstream side) of the opening/closing plate B2300 and flows down toward the first specific winning opening B1001. do. Therefore, after the ball rides on the opening/closing plate B2300, it takes longer than the time required for the ball to flow down the half of the left/right length of the opening/closing plate B2300 until it passes through the first specific winning hole B1001.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing bar B2500 is opened (see FIG. 156(b)), the ball rides on the left side (downstream side) of the opening/closing bar B2500 and flows down toward the second specific winning opening B1002. do. Therefore, the time required from when the ball rides on the opening/closing bar B2500 until it passes through the second specific prize winning opening B1002 is less than the time required for the ball to flow down half of the left/right length of the opening/closing bar B2500.

Also, for example, when a game is played with a right-handed player, most of the balls, excluding the ball that deviates to the left from above the first winning hole 64, are moved along the right-handed downflow path BL22 to the pre-entering range of the variable winning device B2000. Head.

In this case, when the opening/closing plate B2300 is opened (see FIG. 156(a)), the ball rides on the right side (downstream side) of the opening/closing plate B2300 and flows down toward the first specific winning opening B1001. do. Therefore, the time required for the ball to ride on the opening/closing plate B2300 until it passes through the first specific prize winning opening B1001 is less than the time required for the ball to flow down half of the lateral length of the opening/closing plate B2300.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing bar B2500 is opened (see FIG. 156(b)), the ball rides on the right side (upstream side) of the opening/closing bar B2500 and flows down toward the second specific winning opening B1002. do. Therefore, after the ball rides on the opening/closing bar B2500, it takes longer than the time required for the ball to flow down half of the left/right length of the opening/closing bar B2500 until it passes through the second specific prize winning opening B1002.

In this way, in the variable winning device B2000, the distance from the left-handed downstream path BL21 (or right-handed downstream path BL22) to the first detection sensor B1230, and the distance from the left-handed downstream path BL21 (or right-handed downstream path BL22) to the second Since the distance to the detection sensor B1250 is arranged to be different, the period until the ball that has reached the pre-entering range passes through the first specific winning hole B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1002 It can be changed by striking games.

Therefore, since the selection of the ball shooting mode (selection of left-handed game or right-handed game) can be associated with the digestion speed of the jackpot game, the player is requested to switch the ball shooting mode in the jackpot game. be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the jackpot game.

A display device or a voice output may be used to provide a notification suggesting a shooting mode in which the speed of digestion of the jackpot game is advantageous to the player (for example, it becomes faster). For example, in accordance with the execution of the round game in which the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the open state, "Right shot" is displayed or voice output is performed, while in accordance with the execution of the round game in which the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the open state, " Left-handed" may be displayed or voice output may be performed. In this case, the player can speed up the progress of the jackpot game by switching the shooting mode of the ball according to the notification.

Secondly, the difference in the susceptibility to the occurrence of loose balls will be described. For example, in a round in which the opening and closing plate B2300 is in an open state (see FIG. 156(a)), when performing a left-handed game, the ball rolling on the rolling surface B2311 by the action of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 Among them, the number of balls arranged on the downstream side (the right side in FIG. 156(a), the lower part of the pre-entering range) of the projecting portion B2211 at the center of the left and right can be limited to one.

Therefore, even if the specified number of balls from the lower part of the pre-entering range enter the first specific prize winning hole B1001 and the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state, the balls rolling on the rolling surface B2311 are not left and right. Since it is arranged only on the upstream side (left side in FIG. 156(a), upper part of the pre-entering range) from the center projecting portion B2211, it can be saved by the opening/closing bar B2500 which is immediately switched to the open state. As a result, the number of loose balls generated can be reduced.

On the other hand, in a round in which the opening/closing plate B2300 is in an open state (see FIG. 156(a)), when a right-handed game is played, the ball reaching the rolling surface B2311 is Although the ball is promptly guided to the first specific winning hole B1001, the number of balls arranged in the lower part of the pre-ball entry range is not limited to one.

Therefore, when the specified number of balls from the lower part of the pre-entering range enter the first special winning hole B1001 and the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state, the ball is released from the opening/closing plate B2300 in the lower part of the pre-entering range. can slide down. Since the connecting portion B2530 of the opening/closing bar B2500, which is immediately switched to the open state, is not arranged below the ball, a loose ball may occur. Therefore, in the round in which the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the open state, it is easier to reduce the number of loose balls in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game.

Further, for example, in a round in which the opening and closing bar B2500 is in an open state (see FIG. 156(b)), when performing a right-handed game, the action of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 causes the rolling surface B2531 to roll. Among the spheres to be played, the sphere arranged on the downstream side (the left side in FIG. 156(b), the lower part of the pre-entering range) of the projecting portion B2211 at the center of the left and right can be limited to one.

Therefore, even if the specified number of balls from the lower part of the pre-entering range enter the second specific prize winning hole B1002 and the opening/closing bar B2500 is switched to the closed state, the balls rolling on the rolling surface B2531 are not left and right. Since it is arranged only on the upstream side (the right side in FIG. 156(b), the upper part of the range before entering the ball) from the center projecting portion B2211, it can be saved by the opening/closing plate B2300 that is immediately switched to the open state. As a result, the number of loose balls generated can be reduced.

On the other hand, in a round in which the opening/closing bar B2500 is in an open state (see FIG. 156(b)), when a left-handed game is played, the ball that reaches the rolling surface B2531 is Although the ball is quickly guided to the second specific winning hole B1002, the number of balls arranged in the lower part of the pre-ball entry range is not limited to one.

Therefore, when the specified number of balls from the lower part of the pre-entering range enter the second special winning hole B1002 and the opening/closing bar B2500 is switched to the closed state, the ball is released from the opening/closing bar B2500 in the lower part of the pre-entering range. can slide down. Although the displacement trajectory BE11 (see FIG. 155(a)) of the opening/closing plate B2300, which is immediately switched to the open state, extends to the lower side of the ball on the opening/closing rod B2500 in the lower part of the range before entering the ball, the opening/closing plate B2300 and the ball are arranged in positions where they overlap in the front and rear, so a spilled ball may occur. Therefore, in the round in which the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the open state, it is easier to reduce the number of loose balls in the right-handed game than in the left-handed game.

Thus, in the present embodiment, depending on whether the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the open state or the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the open state, the right-hand shot is advantageous for the purpose of reducing the number of loose balls. or left-handed. Therefore, control may be performed so as to notify an advantageous launching direction according to whether the opening/closing plate B2300 is in the open state or the opening/closing bar B2500 is in the open state.

For example, the third symbol display device 81 may inform the player of the launching direction by displaying "Aim right", "Aim left", or the like. In this case, for example, "Aim left" may be displayed during the round in which the opening/closing plate B2300 is opened, and "Aim right" may be displayed during the round in which the opening/closing bar B2500 is opened. The player shoots the ball in accordance with the notification so that the ball can be shot in a launching direction in which the number of falling balls is reduced.

A similar notification may be made by outputting sound or emitting light to the game area. For example, in the case of light emission, the player can be notified of the direction in which the ball is launched by illuminating the traveling path of the shot ball with light emitting means such as an LED that illuminates the game area.

The variable winning device B2000 has been described above on the assumption that the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing bar B2500 alternately open and close, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, only the opening/closing plate B2300 may be opened/closed, or only the opening/closing bar B2500 may be opened/closed. A round section in which the plate B2300 and the opening/closing bar B2500 alternately open and close may be mixed.

By providing a round section in which the same member of the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing bar B2500 repeatedly opens and closes, the effect of suppressing the falling ball is weakened. It still has the effect of being able to achieve both the case where the ball enters the first specific prize winning port B1001 and the case where the ball enters the second specific prize winning port B1002.

FIG. 157 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the performance of the variable winning device B2000 in the first control example of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157, the first specific winning hole B1001 and the second specific winning hole B1002 are set so that the number of awarded balls to be paid out is different, and furthermore, the specified number in the round game in the special game state is set to be different. be done.

In this embodiment, the range before ball entry includes the path for the ball rolling on the opening/closing plate B2300 and the path for the ball rolling on the opening/closing bar B2500. Regardless of whether the B2500 is in the open state, the jackpot game can be progressed by shooting the ball in a common shooting mode (for example, hitting to the right).

In other words, in the jackpot game, even when the opening/closing plate B2300 is opened and the first specific winning opening B1001 is opened, the opening/closing bar B2500 is opened and the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened. Even in the case where the ball is in the ball, the game can be played by shooting the ball aiming at the common range (range before entering the ball), so that the player does not feel the difference between the types of jackpots. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the player playing the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 157, the performance of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the performance of the second specific winning opening B1002 are set to be different. As a result, it is possible to cause a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the difference in the jackpot type.

For example, even if the number of rounds is the same (for example, 15 rounds), in one type of jackpot, only the opening/closing plate B2300 is repeatedly opened, and the first specific winning hole B1001 is set to be able to enter. (The number of prize balls to be paid out is 2250 (=15×10×15)). In the other jackpot type jackpot, only the opening/closing rod B2500 is repeatedly opened to allow the ball to enter the second specific prize opening B1002. (the number of paid-out prize balls is 375 (=5×5×15)), the difference in the number of paid-out prize balls is about 1875. Furthermore, by setting many types of jackpots and also setting jackpots of different numbers of rounds, it is possible to increase the number of types of prize balls to be paid out.

This makes it possible to increase the difference in the number of prize balls between the jackpot with the smallest number of prize balls and the jackpot with the largest number of prize balls. In addition, it is possible to realize such an improvement in the ball-putting performance in a small space.

That is, even in the past, it was possible to improve the performance of putting out balls by arranging a plurality of variable winning devices in the game area and setting the number of prize balls and the prescribed number of them differently. However, in this case, the range required for arranging the plurality of variable winning devices tends to be large.

In particular, when the game area is left-right symmetrical as in the present embodiment, if a plurality of variable winning devices are arranged on the left and right, not only does the arrangement range increase, The player is required to play either a hitting game or a right-handed game, whichever is more appropriate, which hinders the advantage of the symmetrical game area in which the player can freely split between the left and right sides.

In addition, when a plurality of variable prize winning devices are arranged vertically, the heights of the plurality of specific prize winning ports are stacked vertically, and the vertical width of the variable prize winning devices becomes longer, which not only widens the arrangement range, but also , the third symbol display device 81, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are likely to have a lower degree of freedom in arrangement.

On the other hand, the variable winning device B2000 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 are arranged on the left and right, thereby suppressing the vertical dimension of the variable winning device B2000. By forming a plurality of paths in the pre-ball-entering range that partially overlap to suppress the vertical width, it is possible to eliminate the need to separate the left and right shots.

In addition, in this embodiment, it has been described that one of the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 is continuously opened in the special game state, but the first operation pattern (see FIG. 143(a)) is described. Alternatively, control may be performed so that the left and right sides are alternately opened.

In this case, an inter-round interval transitioning from an odd round to an even round (hereinafter also referred to as "inter-round interval A") and an inter-round interval transitioning from an even round to an odd round (hereinafter also referred to as "inter-round interval B" ) may be set to have different lengths.

For example, a case will be described in which the inter-round interval A is set short (for example, 0.04 seconds) and the inter-round interval B is set long (for example, 2 seconds). In this case, in the inter-round interval B, the ball that was on the range before entering the ball becomes a lost ball. can increase the profit of

Immediately before the interval B between rounds, the first specific prize winning opening B1001 is open, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained, so the player shoots a large number of balls aiming at entering a ball of a prescribed number or more. tend to be easy. On the other hand, in the setting of the length of the inter-round interval B in this embodiment, all the balls that are shot in excess may become loose balls, so the profit that the player can obtain can be thinned out. In other words, it is configured to increase the possibility that a large number of balls shot with the aim of winning an over prize will become a lost ball.

A loose ball during the transition from odd-numbered rounds (rounds in which the ball is guided downward to the left in the area before entering the ball) to even-numbered rounds (rounds in which the ball is guided downward to the right in the area before entering the ball) In order to reduce it, it is sufficient to shoot the ball toward the right side, which is the upstream side (upper part of the range before entering the ball) in odd-numbered rounds. can be done.

Immediately before the inter-round interval A, it is possible to enter the second specific winning hole B1002, but since the number of winning balls is small in the first place, it is common to shoot a large number of balls with the aim of over-winning. At that time, if all the extra balls are discarded, the loss of the player is large, and there is a possibility that the player's interest will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the inter-round interval A is set short so as not to discard a ball that is fired in large numbers aiming to enter the second specific winning hole B1002.

In this way, by setting the length of the interval between rounds differently, for example, it is possible to create a variable winning device that tends to cause over winning. That is, as described above, in the mechanism that sets the interval between rounds short and reduces the number of lost balls, a large number of balls tend to enter the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 immediately after the interval between rounds. For example, when the specified number of the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 is set to 1, the second and subsequent balls are all over-winning (the number of balls exceeding the specified number of the round game is to enter B1002). Therefore, depending on the setting of the prescribed number, it is possible to generate many over-wins.

It should be noted that the length of the interval between rounds can be arbitrarily set. The lengths of the inter-round intervals A and B may be set in the reverse of the above, or only some of the round intervals are set long and short, and the other round intervals are fixed regardless of the inter-round intervals A and B. or all intervals between rounds may be of different lengths.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 162. FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the open state of the variable winning device B1000 is configured by the guide plates B1300 and B1500 sliding forward and backward. A plurality of members constitute the open state by . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the variable winning device B3000 in the thirteenth embodiment. In FIG. 158, the illustration of the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is omitted so that the rear side of the cover member B1200 can be visually recognized so that the range before entering the ball can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 158, the variable winning device B3000 includes a covering member B1200 in a state where the projecting portion B1211 and the extended supporting portion B1212 are omitted, and the base member B3100 is arranged on the back side of the covering member B1200. a first guide plate B3300; a second guide plate B3500; and a second rotating member B3900 that configures a ball guide path by rotatingly displacing so as to approach the guide plate B3500.

Like the base member B1100 (see FIG. 128), the base member B3100 includes a thin plate member B1100, a holding hole B1130, and a discharge port B1150. A through-formed portion B3120 is formed through (with a slightly larger shape) along the shape of the upstream member B3320 and the upstream member B3520 at a substantially central portion of the thin plate member B1110, and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are formed in a circle so as to be pivotally supported. A pair of left and right projecting shafts B3171 projecting in a columnar shape, an arc-shaped hole B3172 drilled along an arc centering on the projecting shaft B3171 and guiding the displacement of the projecting parts B3711 and B3911, Prepare.

The through-formed portion B3120 is formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front, and the vertical width of the central portion is slightly longer than the vertical width of the left and right ends.

The first guide plate B3300 includes an upstream member B3320 that is inserted into the left half of the through-formed portion B3120 and is slidably displaceable back and forth. The upstream member B3320 is formed in a plate shape that slopes down toward the left and right center side (right side) of the range before entering the ball, and the rolling surface B3321 formed on the upper surface side so that the game ball can be placed, and the right lower end and an extension receiving portion B3322 that extends rightward from the portion and is configured to be able to abut against the first rotating member B3700.

The rolling surface B3321 is formed with an inclination angle of 3 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. That is, it is formed at an inclination angle smaller than the inclination angle (7 degrees) of the rolling surface B1321 of the first guide plate B1300 (see FIG. 139) described in the above embodiment. As a result, even in this embodiment in which the formation of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 is omitted, a deceleration effect can be produced by reducing the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3321.

In the present embodiment, the upstream member B3320 is formed in a plate shape with a uniform thickness on the left and right sides, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a wedge shape in which the lower surface is horizontal and only the upper surface is inclined. Even in this case, the inclined state of the rolling surface B3321 can be maintained.

The first rotating member B3700 is rotated and displaced so as to fill the gap between the closed state (see FIG. 158) that prevents the ball from entering the first specific winning opening B1001 and the first guide plate B3300. A body portion B3710 configured to be switchable between an open state in which a ball can be guided to a specific winning opening B1001, and a main body portion B3710 pivotally supported by a projecting shaft portion B3171 on the right side so as to be rotatably displaceable. and an extended plate portion B3720 extending along the radial direction of the.

The main body portion B3710 includes a protruding portion B3711 that protrudes toward the back side in parallel with the rotation axis from a left-right inner (left) position than the protruding shaft portion B3171. The projecting portion B3711 protrudes toward the rear side of the thin plate member B1110 through the arc-shaped hole B3172.

The extension plate portion B3720 has the same cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to taper toward the extension tip side in a front view. A curved portion B3722 chamfered into a curved shape is provided on the opposite side of the moving surface B3721.

The rolling surface B3721 has an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane in the open state for guiding the balls. That is, the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3321 is larger than the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3321, and the balls rolling on the rolling surfaces B3321 and B3721 are It is configured such that the degree of deceleration weakens as the boundary position enters the first specific winning opening B1001 side.

The curved portion B3722 has a shape that matches the shape of the upper right surface of the extension receiving portion B3322 of the first guide plate B3300. That is, by forming the shape of the curved portion B3722 in accordance with the shape of the upper right surface of the extension receiving portion B3322, the first rotating member B3700 can be positioned on the curved surface of the extension receiving portion B3322 in the open state of the first rotating member B3700. , the posture of the first rotating member B3700 can be stabilized.

The second guide plate B3500 includes an upstream member B3520 that is inserted through the right half of the through-formed portion B3120 and that is slidably displaceable back and forth. The upstream member B3520 is symmetrical with the upstream member B3320 and is formed in a plate shape that slopes down toward the left and right central side (left side) of the range before entering the ball, and is formed on the upper surface side so that the game ball can be placed. and an extension receiving portion B3522 extending leftward from the left lower end portion and configured to contact the second rotating member B3900.

The rolling surface B3521 is formed with an inclination angle of 3 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. That is, it is formed at an inclination angle smaller than the inclination angle (7 degrees) of the rolling surface B1521 of the second guide plate B1500 (see FIG. 137) described in the above embodiment. As a result, even in this embodiment in which the formation of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 is omitted, a deceleration effect can be produced by reducing the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3521.

In the present embodiment, the upstream member B3520 is formed in a plate shape with a uniform thickness on the left and right sides, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a wedge shape in which the lower surface is horizontal and only the upper surface is inclined. Even in this case, the inclined state of the rolling surface B3521 can be maintained.

The second rotating member B3900 is rotated and displaced so as to fill the gap between the closed state (see FIG. 158) that prevents the ball from entering the second specific winning opening B1002 and the second guide plate B3500. A body portion B3910 configured to be switchable between an open state in which a ball can be guided to a specific winning opening B1002, and pivotally supported by a projecting shaft portion B3171 on the left side so as to be rotatably displaceable, and its body portion B3910. and an extended plate portion B3920 extending along the radial direction of the.

The body portion B3910 includes a protruding portion B3911 that protrudes toward the back side in parallel with the rotation axis from a left and right inside (right side) position relative to the protruding shaft portion B3171. The projecting portion B3911 protrudes toward the rear side of the thin plate member B1110 through the arc-shaped hole B3172.

The extension plate portion B3920 has the same cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction, and is formed to taper toward the extension tip side in a front view. A curved portion B3922 chamfered into a curved shape is provided on the opposite side of the moving surface B3921.

The rolling surface B3921 has an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane in the open state for guiding the balls. That is, the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3921 is larger than the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3521, and the balls rolling on the rolling surfaces B3521 and B3921 It is configured such that the degree of deceleration weakens as the boundary position enters the second specific winning opening B1002 side.

The curved portion B3922 has a shape that matches the shape of the upper left surface of the extension receiving portion B3522 of the second guide plate B3500. That is, by forming the shape of the curved portion B3922 in accordance with the shape of the upper left surface of the extension receiving portion B3522, the second rotating member B3900 can be positioned on the curved surface of the extension receiving portion B3522 in the open state of the second rotating member B3900. , the posture of the second rotating member B3900 can be stabilized.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first guide plate B3300 and the first rotating member B3700 or the second guide plate B3500 and the second rotating member B3900 act on each other to switch between the closed state and the open state. Configure. In this case, the first guide plate B3300 and the first rotating member B3700 are driven by the first driving device B1400, and the second guide plate B3500 and the second rotating member B3900 are driven by the second driving device B1600.

FIG. 159 is a top view of the variable winning device B3000, FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the second rotating member B3900 and transmission member B3640, and FIGS. is a right side view of the second rotating member B3900 and the transmission member B3640 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLXIa.

In addition, in FIGS. 161(a) and 161(b), only the second rotating member B3900, the transmission member B3640, and the transmission extension B3550 are illustrated for easy understanding, and these members are held. Illustrations of other configurations are omitted. 161(a) shows the closed state of the second rotating member B3900 (the second solenoid B1610 is de-energized), and FIG. 161(b) shows the open state of the second rotating member B3900 ( A state in which the second solenoid B1610 is energized) is illustrated.

That is, when the second solenoid B1610 is de-energized and the transmission extension B3550 is arranged on the back side, the second rotating member B3900 is in the rising posture (see FIG. 161(a)), and the When the second solenoid B1610 is energized and the transmission extension B3550 is arranged on the front side, the second rotating member B3900 is in an inclined posture (see FIG. 161(b)).

As shown in FIG. 159, in this embodiment, driving devices B1400 and B1600 similar to the variable winning device B1000 are employed, while transmission members B3440 and B3640 capable of transmitting driving force to the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are installed. By interposing between the guide plates B3300, B3500 and the rotating members B3700, B3900, the guide plates B3300, B3500 and the rotating members B3700, B3900 can be displaced at once.

That is, a pair of support claw portions B3111 projecting in a U-shape toward the back side of the thin plate member B1110 are arranged on both left and right sides, and the transmission members B3440 and B3640 are rotatably supported by the respective support claw portions B3111. be.

Transmission members B3440 and B3640 are configured to be able to change their own rotational displacement to displacement of rotating members B3700 and B3900. The transmission members B3440 and B3640 can contact the transmission extension portions B3350 and B3550 integrally formed with the guide plates B3300 and B3500. B3440 and B3640 are configured to be rotationally displaced.

More specifically, the first guide plate B3300 includes the above-described upstream member B3320, a connecting fixing member B1330 that supports the upstream member B3320, and a transmission hole B1340. It has a transmission extension part B3350 extending from the lower part to the front side to a position where it can come into contact with the transmission member B3440.

In addition, the second guide plate B3500 includes the upstream member B3520 described above, a connecting fixing member B1530 that supports the upstream member B3520, and a transmission hole B1540. It has a transmission extension portion B3550 that extends to the front side to a position where it can come into contact with the transmission member B3640.

160 and 161 illustrate the mechanism of driving force transmission to the second rotating member B3900. Since the mechanism of driving force transmission to the left and right rotating members B3700 and B3900 is the same, the driving force transmission to the second rotating member B3900 will be explained first, and the driving force transmission to the first rotating member B3700 will be explained. omitted.

The transmission member B3640 is a member that is rotatably pivotally supported on the back side of the thin plate member B1110 and engages with the transmission extension portion B3550. are configured to engage. As a result, the state (open state or closed state) of the second rotating member B3900 is changed in accordance with the change in the posture of the transmission member B3640.

The transmission member B3640 is formed of a flexible resin material and includes a rotating arm B3641 composed of a plate-like portion that intersects (perpendicularly) with the rotation axis BJ1, and a C-shaped tip of the rotating arm B3641. A claw-shaped portion B3642 formed in a claw shape, a pair of protruding shaft portions B3643 projecting from the rotating arm portion B3641 in a cylindrical shape centered on the rotating shaft BJ1, and from the rotation proximal end side of the rotating arm portion B3641 A proximal side extending portion B3644 extending in the radial direction, and a distal side extending portion B3645 extending in a direction parallel to the proximal side extending portion B3644 from the rotation distal end side of the rotating arm B3641. Prepare.

The transmission member B3640 is supported by the thin plate member B1110 by fitting the projecting shaft portion B3643 into the support claw portion B3111 from the tip side. At this time, the supporting claw portion B3111 is elastically deformed and fitted into the supporting claw portion B3111. It is intended to prevent it from falling off from the part B3111.

The driving force transmission to the second rotating member B3900 will be described. As shown in FIG. 161(a), in the non-excited state of the second solenoid B1610 of the second drive device B1600, the distal end side lower end portion of the transmission extension portion B3550 is aligned with the base end side extension portion of the transmission member B3640. It is in contact with B3644. The transmission extension B3550 is urged toward the back side by the return spring of the second solenoid B1610, and the posture of the transmission member B3640 is maintained in such a manner that it is pushed toward the back side by this urging force. This maintains the closed state of the second rotating member B3900.

As shown in FIG. 161(b), when the second solenoid B1610 of the second drive device B1600 is in an energized state, the tip-side lower end of the transmission extension B3550 abuts the tip-side extension B3645 of the transmission member B3640. ing. The transmission extension B3550 is biased toward the front side by the driving force of the second solenoid B1610, and the transmission member B3640 maintains its posture in a state of being pushed toward the back side by this driving force. Thereby, the open state of the second rotating member B3900 is maintained.

FIGS. 162(a) to 162(c) are front views of the pre-entering range in the range CLXIIa of FIG. 158. FIG. FIGS. 162(a) to 162(c) show how the state of the second specific prize winning opening B1002 is switched from the closed state to the open state in chronological order.

That is, in the variable winning device B3000, after the front-to-rear distance between the front end of the upstream member B3520 and the covering member B1200 becomes less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 162(b)), the second rotating member B3900 The transmission extension portion B3550, the transmission member B3640, and the second rotation member B3900 are designed so that the displacement occurs in the order of displacing until the end of rotation.

In addition, when switching from the open state to the closed state, the gap between the transmission extension portion B3550 and the base end side extension portion B3644 is made as small as possible so that the second rotating member B3900 starts displacing without delay. (see FIG. 161(b)), and is configured to be able to release the abutment between the second rotating member B3900 and the upstream member B3520 before the upstream member B3520 starts sliding displacement. Thereby, the occurrence of rubbing between the second rotating member B3900 and the upstream member B3520 can be suppressed.

In this way, when the state is switched to the open state, the second rotating member B3900 is displaced in a direction (non-parallel direction) that intersects perpendicularly with the front-rear direction, which is the displacement direction of the upstream member B3520 of the second guide plate B3500. Therefore, the gap between the second rotating member B3900 and the upstream member B3520 can be narrowed by displacement.

The switching from the open state to the closed state of the second specific winning hole B1002 occurs in reverse order from FIG. 162(a) to FIG. 162(c). In this case, since the rolling surface B3921 is displaced upward so as to approach the second specific winning opening B1002, when the ball is on the rolling surface B3921, the ball is guided to the second specific winning opening B1002. It becomes the structure that it is easy to do. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to easily generate an over-winning (a number of balls exceeding the prescribed number of the round game entering the second specific winning port B1002).

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 171. FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the open state of the variable winning device B1000 is configured by displacing the guide plates B1300 and B1500 to the front side. The open state is constituted by the displaced guide plate B4300 and the opening/closing bar B2500 displaced toward the rear side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 163, in the game area in this embodiment, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 64 which were arranged between the variable winning device B2000 and the third symbol display device 81 in the game area described above in FIG. The winning port 640 is omitted, and these functions are supplemented by the configuration provided in the variable winning device B4000.

163, the function of the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 144) is transferred to the guide port B4160, and the function of the second winning port 640 (see FIG. 144) is the second The function of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 144) is transferred to the opening/closing rod B2500. The first detection sensor B1230 is used as the first specific winning hole B1001 as described above.

By configuring in this way, the degree of freedom in designing the area surrounded by the rails 61 and 62 (the area including the game area) can be improved. For example, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 may be expanded by utilizing the range generated by omitting the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640, or the first winning hole 64 and the second winning port 640, another distribution mechanism (for example, a mechanism that alternately distributes the balls that arrive to the left and right, or a drive that is always driven in a constant motion and changes the flow path of the balls) mechanism, etc.) may be arranged to increase the variation of the flow-down mode of the ball.

164, 165 and 166 are front perspective views of the variable winning device B4000. 164 shows the closed state of the guide plate B4300 and the opening/closing bar B2500, FIG. 165 shows the open state of the guide plate B4300 and the closed state of the opening/closing bar B2500, and FIG. An open state of the opening/closing bar B2500 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, in the variable winning device B4000, the front and rear width of the driving device can be reduced more than the variable winning device B1000, and the arrangement space can be suppressed, and the range before ball entry is greater than that of the variable winning device B2000. Since the area below the guide path of the ball can be vacated, the ball guide receiving portion B4260 can be arranged.

FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device B4000, and FIG. 168 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device B4000. As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, each configuration of the variable winning device B4000 is partially diverted from and combined with the configurations of the variable winning devices B1000 and B2000 described above. This will be explained below.

The variable winning device B4000 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and includes a base member B4100 fixed to the base plate 60, and a flow path configuration range (range before entering the ball) that is fastened and fixed to the base member B4100 from the front side. a guide plate B4300 configured to be slidable forward from the back side of the base member B4100; the above-described first driving device B1400 that drives the guide plate B4300; and the above-described opening/closing rod B2500 , the above-mentioned second driving device B2600, and a rear cover member B4700 assembled to the base member B4100 from the back side and configured to cover the guide plate B4300 and the first driving device B1400 from the back side. .

The base member B4100 includes a thin plate member B1110, a holding hole B1130, a projecting portion B1140, and a discharge port B1150 in the same manner as the base member B1100 described above. and a guide support portion B2180.

Further, the base member B4100 includes a through-formed portion B4120 whose design is changed to a shape suitable for the guide plate B4300 through which the through-formed portion B1120 is inserted, and the projecting portion B1140 extending outward from the upper end of the projecting portion B1140. Auxiliary protrusion B4141, a guide opening B4160 drilled below the penetration forming part B4120 so as to guide the ball from the front side to the back side, a detour B4170 for guiding the ball passing through the guide opening B4160, and a thin plate An overhanging portion B4190 is formed so as to overhang the right side portion of the member B1110 toward the front side so as to cover the right extending portion B1220 of the covering member B4200. The penetration formation part B4120 is formed as an elongated rectangular opening inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front.

The auxiliary projection B4141 has a cross-sectional shape similar to that of the projecting portion B1140 and extends in an upwardly inclined direction toward the left and right outer sides. Due to this configuration, the auxiliary protrusion B4141 has a function as a part that assists the ball falling down, which will be described later in detail.

The protruding portion B4190 is formed to incline downward to the left when viewed from the front at the same angle as the inclined surface B1223 of the right extending portion B1220. It is configured to come into surface contact with the surface B1223. The rolling contact surface B4191 forming the upper side surface is formed as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front side.

The rolling surface B4191 is formed in a planar shape on which a ball can roll. A ball that rolls on the rolling surface B4191 flows into the pre-ball-entering range along its inclination while being pulled toward the front side. As a result, the ball that rolls on the rolling surface B4191 and flows into the ball-entering range can easily flow down avoiding the projecting portion B1140, so that the deceleration effect applied to the ball can be weakened.

The covering member B4200 includes a body member B2210, a right extending portion B1220, a first detection sensor B1230, a left extending portion B1240, a second detection sensor B1250, and a cover plate portion B2270, similarly to the covering member B2200 described above. In addition, a ball guide receiving portion B4260 is provided in the main body member B2210 and guides the ball to the guide port B4160.

The projecting portion B2211 provided on the main body member B2210 is omitted from the covering member B4200. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball flowing down toward the ball guide receiving portion B4260, which will be described later, collides with the projecting portion B2211 and deviates from the ball guide receiving portion B4260. In addition, it is possible to avoid the situation where the ball is decelerated by the projecting portions B2211 on the left and right sides.

The right extended portion B1220 is formed with a ridge support portion B1225 in the same manner as the variable winning device B1000 described above, and guides the longitudinal displacement of the guide member B1310 of the guide plate B4300. Further, the left extending portion B1240 does not have the protrusion supporting portion B1245, as in the variable winning device B2000 described above.

The guide plate B4300 has the same configuration as the first guide plate B1300 described above, and is formed so as to eliminate the gap between the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320, and connects the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1321 so that they are flush with each other. and a front projecting portion B4360 projecting upward from the front end portion located between the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320.

The front projecting portion B4360 is formed in a triangular shape in which the front side surface B4361 has an upper vertex vertically above the center position of the guide opening B4160 in a front view and is symmetrically inclined, and the upper side surface B4362 is directed toward the front side. It is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward.

With this configuration, the front projecting portion B4360 causes the ball rolling on the rolling surface B1321 in the open state of the guide plate B4300 to flow down toward the body member B2210 side (front side) of the covering member B4200. In this case, by contacting the sphere, the flow path of the sphere can be made closer to the back side. That is, the front protruding portion B4360 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the ball flowing down in the range before entering the ball while the guide plate B4300 is open, and the ball comes into contact with the thin plate member B1110. The contact side, ie, the inner surface of the opening of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 is flush with the ball, so that the ball can be guided to the side with less resistance (see FIG. 126).

Further, in the closed state of the guide plate B4300, the front protruding portion B4360 is configured to enter the penetration forming portion B4120 and not protrude from the front side surface of the thin plate member B1110. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front projecting portion B4360 from coming into contact with the ball when the guide plate B4300 is closed.

Note that when the guide plate B4300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the front projecting portion B4360 can come into contact with the ball. This abutment is intended to prevent the ball from entering the ball guide receiving portion B4260, the details of which will be described later.

It should be noted that the aspect of the front projecting portion B4360 is not limited to the aspect of the present embodiment. For example, in the closed state of the guide plate B4300, the thin plate member B1110 may be configured to protrude from the front side surface to the front side. In this case, when the guide plate B4300 is closed, the front protruding portion B4360 can contact the ball, so that the ball flows differently.

The rear cover member B4700 omits the formation of the third support plate B1750 and the fourth support plate B1760, which are unnecessary due to the omission of the second driving device B1600 from the rear cover member B1700 described above, and replaces the main body portion B1710. It is formed so that the vertical dimension and the front-rear dimension are reduced.

That is, since the rear cover member B4700 is formed to be smaller than the rear cover member B1700, the variable winning device B4000 includes a guide plate B4300 that slides back and forth like the variable winning device B1000. On the other hand, it is possible to reduce the space (particularly in the front and rear) required on the back side of the game area for arranging the driving devices B1400 and B2600.

Switching of the state of the variable winning device B4000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 171. FIG. 169, 170 and 171 are front views of the variable winning device B4000. 169, the guide plate B4300 and the opening/closing rod B2500 are in the closed state, in FIG. 170, the guide plate B4300 is in the open state and the opening/closing rod B2500 is in the closed state, and in FIG. 171, the guide plate B4300 is in the closed state. Then, the opening/closing bar B2500 is opened.

In addition, in FIGS. 169 to 171, the body member B2210 of the covering member B4200 is illustrated transparently so that the shape on the back side thereof can be visually recognized. In addition, in the pre-entering range, at least a part of the range through which the ball cannot pass is supplementarily marked with polka dots (dots). Also, FIG. 163 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 169 to 171 as appropriate.

First, the outline of the game progress of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. The progress of the game is based on the contents explained in the eleventh embodiment. That is, during the normal period, the ball is entered into the guide port B4160 by hitting to the left, aiming for a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 1. - 特許庁

As an added value after the end of the jackpot, a variable state (high probability state) of the special pattern is given until the lottery of the special pattern is completed 100 times after the special game state is finished, and there is a state where it is easy to receive the lottery of the special pattern 2. After the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times, the normal state is set.

Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, the ball is shot aiming to enter the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 from the end of the special game state until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times. In the special game state, prize balls are paid out by making the balls enter the opening of the first detection sensor B1230.

Next, each part of the game progress will be described in detail. The game area in this embodiment is basically bilaterally symmetrical, and is configured so that the ball hit to either the left or the right can reach the variable winning device B4000. On the other hand, due to the effect of the added configuration, it is recommended to play left-handed in the normal state aiming to win the special symbol 1 jackpot.

A projecting wall B4010 that is fixed to the game board 13 so as to project to the front side of the base plate 60 on the lower side of the center frame 86 as a portion that is not configured bilaterally symmetrically and that obstructs the passage of the ball, A sphere collecting wall B4020 is added above the through gate 67 on the left side so as to be fixed to the front side of the base plate 60 so as to protrude in an inverted V shape.

The projecting wall B4010 is a wall portion that extends vertically at a position to the right of the center frame 86 in the left-right direction, and obstructs passage of the ball to the left and right. As a result, it is possible to limit the balls that can be guided to just below the center of the center frame 86 in the left-right direction by the dowels arranged just below the center frame 86 to left-handed balls.

In other words, the left-handed ball is guided to just below the left-right center of the center frame 86 by the road spike, and then falls along the downflow path BL41 extending vertically along the left-right center of the center frame 86 to enter the guide port B4160. Since a ball is possible, it is easy to obtain the lottery of the special symbol 1.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, since the projecting portions B1140 are arranged on the left and right sides of the flow-down path BL41, even if the ball deviates left and right from the flow-down path BL41, the projecting portions B1140 come into contact with the ball, thereby moving the ball. It can be returned to the downstream path BL41 side. As a result, it is possible to improve the probability of a ball entering the guide hole B4160.

On the other hand, the ball hit to the right is prevented from passing to the left and right by the projecting wall B4010, so it is not guided by the road nail to the center of the left and right of the center frame 86, and reaches the variable winning device B4000. Also in this case, it lands on the rolling surface B4191 and flows down along the rolling surface B4191 along the downflow path BL42.

Since the rolling surface B4191 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front side, the ball that rolls on the rolling surface B4191 in the flow-down path BL42 passes through a path closer to the front. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the degree of deceleration due to contact with the projecting portion B1140.

A ball that has passed the left end of the rolling surface B4191 is configured to pass from right to left above the guide port B4160 along the upper surface of the auxiliary protrusion B4141. In particular, the cover plate portion B2270 is arranged on the right extending portion B1220, and the rolling surface B4191 that guides the ball protrudes more toward the center than the left side, so that the ball can easily be placed on the upper surface of the auxiliary protrusion B4141. can be put on As a result, it is possible to reduce the probability of the ball entering the guide hole B4160.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, a ball hit to either the left or right side is configured to reach the variable winning device B4000. A ball is configured to have a higher probability of entering the guide port B4160. Therefore, in the normal state aiming at the acquisition of the special symbol 1 jackpot, it is recommended to play with the left hand.

In the variable probability state, it is configured to allow the player to choose whether to play left-handed or right-handed. At this time, the player considers the advantages and disadvantages that can be obtained, and selects whether to play the game with the left hand or with the right hand. This will be explained below.

In the variable probability state, the ball is passed through the through gate 67, and the opening/closing bar B2500 is switched to the open state according to the result of the lottery, so that the ball can enter the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. Since the through gates 67 are arranged on the left and right, a ball hit to either the left or right can pass through the through gates 67, but the ball entry probability to the left and right through gates 67 is differentiated by the ball gathering wall B4020. .

That is, at the through gate 67 on the right side, the path is changed by the collision with the nail arranged on the upstream side, and only the ball that reaches the through gate 67 passes through the through gate 67, while the through gate 67 on the left side changes the path. In addition to the ball whose path has been changed due to the collision with the nail, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the ball collecting wall B4020 can pass through the through gate 67 .

The sphere collecting wall B4020 is composed of a pair of plate-like wall portions arranged above the through gate 67 with a gap of about the diameter of the sphere. The left plate-like wall has a gap with the inner rail 61 that is less than the radius of the sphere, and the right plate-like wall has a gap with the center frame 86 that is slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere.

A gap slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the lower ends of the pair of plate-like walls, and the center of the gap is positioned vertically above the center of the through gate 67 . Therefore, the ball passing through the gap of the ball gathering wall B4020 passes through the through gate 67 with a higher probability (than the probability that a ball hit to the right passes through the right through gate 67). Therefore, focusing on passing the ball through the through gate 67, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the ball left-handed.

On the other hand, as described above, a left-handed ball enters the guidance port B4160 where the special symbol 1 lottery is performed with a higher probability than a right-handed ball. If the special symbol 1 lottery is set so that the player's profit is lower than the special symbol 2 lottery if the lottery result is a big hit (for example, FIG. 142 ( See b)), in a situation where the lottery for the special symbol 2 is likely to be performed, the player's profit may increase if the game proceeds so that the lottery for the special symbol 1 is not performed.

Therefore, focusing on progressing the game so as not to let the ball enter the guide port B4160 (so that the special symbol 1 lottery is not performed), it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball with the right hand. .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the variable probability state game is advantageous in that the ball easily passes through the through gate 67, but is disadvantageous in that the ball is likely to enter the guide opening B4160. It is left to the player's choice whether to hit the ball right-handed, which is disadvantageous in that the probability of the ball passing through the through gate 67 is inferior, but is advantageous in that it is difficult for the ball to enter the guide port B4160. .

In the special game state (jackpot state), the guide plate B4300 is controlled to open in accordance with the round progress. In this case, a right-handed game is recommended for the purpose of lowering the probability of a ball entering the guide port B4160.

That is, in the left-handed game, if the ball flows down the flow-down path BL41 when the opening/closing plate B4300 is closed, the ball will enter the guide port B4160, so the right-handed game is recommended to avoid this. . A ball hit to the right flows into the range before ball entry along the flow-down path BL42 even when the opening/closing plate B4300 is closed. It is difficult to enter the ball.

On the other hand, a ball hit to the right flows into the range before ball entry along the flow-down path BL42, so it passes directly above the guide opening B4160 before heading to the first detection opening B1230. Therefore, without countermeasures, a ball that has slid down from the opening/closing plate B4300 may enter the guide opening B4160. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the guide opening B4160 by the action of the front projecting portion B4360.

That is, the ball slides down from the opening/closing plate B4300 when the opening/closing plate B4300 is switched from the open state to the closed state. Pass the bottom to the back side. Therefore, when a ball is placed behind the front projecting portion B4360, the ball is pushed by the upper side surface B4362 of the front projecting portion B4360, and is moved to the left and right outside due to the shape of the front side surface B4361. slide down. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the ball enters the guide hole B4160.

Here, it is possible to control the flow-down path of the ball after switching to the closed state by providing a portion of the same shape in the opening/closing plate B2300. , and the falling direction of the ball are both downwards, so it is easy for the ball to be left behind. Therefore, the degree of pushing the ball tends to be weak. Also, if the ball is left overhanging in the pre-entering range even in the closed state, there is a risk of adversely affecting the ball flowing down the pre-entering range.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the falling direction of the ball intersects (perpendicularly) with the moving direction of the front projecting portion B4360. Since the ball slides down from the guide plate B4300 only after the B4300 is displaced rearward, the front projecting portion B4360 can easily push the ball strongly. As a result, the ball can be moved to the left and right outside significantly compared to the case where the opening/closing plate B2300 is used, and it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the ball enters the guide opening B4160.

With such a configuration, the guide port B4160 can be arranged at a position directly below the guide plate B4300 and close to the guide port B4160 while maintaining the above-described playability. In this case, the guide port B4160 may be arranged higher than in this embodiment. For example, the vertical position of the upper edge of the guide port B4160 may be higher than the vertical position of the lower end of the guide plate B4300 (and the vertical position of the lower end of the opening/closing rod B2500). . In this case, the vertical width for arranging the openings of the guide opening B4160 and the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 as the ball entrance can be narrowed.

For this configuration, the guide plate B4300 is more advantageous than the opening/closing plate B2300. That is, in the opening/closing plate B2300, the guide port B4160 cannot be arranged in the range where the plate portion B2310 (see FIG. 150(a)) hangs downward in the closed state, but according to this embodiment, Since the guide plate B4300 does not hang down in the closed state, the guide port B4160 can be arranged at a higher position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the ball-entering openings corresponding to the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640 and the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 2) can be collectively arranged in the variable winning device B4000. . On top of that, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal state, right-handed hitting is recommended in the special game state (jackpot state), and in the variable probability state, the player selects left-handed or right-handed depending on the player's preference. can be configured.

In addition, while the guide port B4160 corresponding to the first winning port 64 is arranged below the rolling path in the range before entering the ball, the probability of entering the guide port B4160 in either the left-handed game or the right-handed game are different, the game can be progressed so as not to perform the lottery for the special symbol 1.例文帳に追加

Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 to 176. FIG. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the opening/closing plate B2300 is arranged on the back side of the range before entering the ball has been described. The open state is constituted by the second opening/closing plate B5500 that displaces to the rear side with the same displacement as B2300. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 172 is a front view of the variable winning device B5000 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 173 is a rear view of the variable winning device B5000. In FIG. 172, the opening/closing plate B2300 and the second opening/closing plate B5500 are in the closed state, and the body member B1210 of the covering member B5200 is shown transparently so that the shape of the rear side thereof can be visually recognized. . In addition, in the pre-entering range, at least a part of the range through which the ball cannot pass is supplementarily marked with polka dots (dots).

Further, in FIG. 173, while the first driving device B2400 is illustrated, the second driving device B5600 that generates driving force for opening and closing the second opening/closing plate B5500 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

The variable winning device B5000 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and includes a base member B5100 fixed to the base plate 60, and a flow path configuration range (range before entering a ball) that is fastened and fixed to the base member B5100 from the front side. a covering member B5200 covering from the outside, the above-described opening/closing plate B2300, the above-described first driving device B2400, a second opening/closing plate B5500 rotatably supported by the covering member B5200, and driving the second opening/closing plate B5500. and a rear cover member (not shown) assembled to the base member B5100 from the rear side and configured to cover the first driving device B2400 and the second driving device B5600 from the rear side. ) and The rear cover member has a discharge portion which is a through hole through which the ball discharged from the discharge port B1150 passes, and the ball discharged from the discharge portion is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

As with the base member B2100 described above, the base member B5100 includes a thin plate member B2110, a holding hole B1130, a projecting portion B1140, an outlet B1150, and a rotation support portion B2170. A slide guide hole B5180 is provided through which a slide rod B5610 of the driving device B5600 can be inserted.

The slide guide hole B5180 is formed in a gap between the through hole B2114 and the power transmission member B2430 (the motion locus BE1 thereof). In addition, in this embodiment, compared with the power transmission member B2430 described above in the twelfth embodiment, the extended portion B2435 is formed slightly shorter, and a gap forming the slide guide hole B5180 is created.

The covering member B5200 includes a body member B1210, a right extending portion B1220, a first detection sensor B1230, a left extending portion B1240, and a second detection sensor B1250, similarly to the covering member B1200 described above. The portion B1212, the ridge support portions B1225 and B1245, and the ball guide receiving portion B1260 are omitted.

Further, the covering member B5200 includes a housing portion B5270 recessed from the rear surface to the front side of the main body member B1210 to partially penetrate the shaft portion B5520 of the second opening/closing plate B5500.

The accommodation portion B5270 includes a pair of left and right support recesses in which the shaft portion B5520 of the second opening/closing plate B5500 is accommodated, and a rectangular recess B5272 that is recessed (formed through) in a rectangular shape below the straight line that connects the support recesses. Then, in order to move the small load-bearing portion B5530 of the second opening/closing plate B5500 that operates along the right end of the rectangular recess B5272 so as to enter the inside of the front-rear width of the main body member B1210, the straight line connecting the pair of support recesses and a through hole B5273 that is formed in a rectangular shape along the direction perpendicular to the through hole B5273.

The support recess has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft portion B5520 of the second opening/closing plate B5500 and is recessed from the front side to the back side, and accommodates the shaft portion B5520 of the second opening/closing plate B5500 in the assembled state. A rectangular cover plate B5273 (see FIG. 174) is fixed from the front side so as to cover the support recess, thereby preventing the shaft portion B5520 from falling out of the support recess.

The rectangular recess B5273 has a larger surface area than the plate portion B5510 of the second opening/closing plate B5500, and the length of the recess is slightly longer than the thickness of the plate portion B5510. As a result, when the second opening/closing plate B5500 tilts (closed state), the plate portion B5510 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular concave portion B5272, and the opening/closing plate B5500 can be prevented from protruding to the rear side of the main body member B1210.

The second opening/closing plate B5500 is a member that switches between the case where the ball rolls toward the second detection sensor B1250 and the case where the ball falls downward without coming into contact with the ball, depending on the difference in posture. A horizontally long rectangular plate portion B5510 formed in the same size as the plate B2300 and a pair of shaft portions B5520 protruding along the longitudinal direction from the lateral direction end portions of the plate portion B5510 are newly described. As the portions to be loaded, a small load receiving portion B5530 extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion B5520 at the base of the shaft portion B5520 on the right side in front view, and a small load receiving portion B5530 at the base of the shaft portion B5520 on the left side in front view and perpendicular to the shaft portion 5520 and a ball entry prevention portion B5540 that extends along a horizontal plane and that (partially) blocks the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 in the closed state so as to prevent the ball from entering the opening.

The plate portion B5510 has a rolling surface B5511 on which the ball rolls in the raised posture (open state), and the length of the short direction is the base member in the raised posture (open state) in which the short direction extends along the front and back direction. The distance from B5100 is set to a length that is equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the left end in the longitudinal direction is set to be close to the second detection sensor B1250.

In addition, the plate portion B5510 includes a chamfered portion B5512 chamfered into an arcuate cross-sectional shape at the upper corner of the opposite end of the shaft portion B5520 in the raised posture (open state).

The plate portion B5510 is formed in the shape of a flat plate elongated in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

The small load-bearing portion B5530 protrudes on the opposite side of the rolling surface B5511 with respect to the shaft portion B5520, and has a shape in which the cross section in the axial direction constitutes a part of a circular shape. This is the part that receives driving force transmission.

The ball entry prevention portion B5540 extends on the front side of the rolling surface B5511 with a parallelogram cross section in an axial direction, and extends to a position that blocks at least a portion of the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. This is a portion configured to prevent the ball from entering the second specific winning hole B1002.

174(a) and 174(b) are sectional views of the variable winning device B5000 taken along line CLXXIVa-CLXXIVa in FIG. FIG. 174(a) illustrates the closed state of the second opening/closing plate B5500, and FIG. 174(b) illustrates the opening state of the second opening/closing plate B5500.

The second drive device B5600 includes a slide rod B5610 that is inserted through the slide guide hole B5180 and configured to be displaced back and forth in accordance with the operation of a second solenoid (not shown). When the second solenoid is not energized, the slide rod B5610 is retracted toward the rear side of the thin plate member B2110 rather than the front side surface (see FIG. 174(a)). It projects to the front side of the thin plate member B2110 and is configured to be able to push the small load receiving portion B5530 (see FIG. 174(b)).

As shown in FIG. 174(b), in the open state of the second opening/closing plate B5500, the slide rod B5610 enters between the upper edge of the through hole B5273 and the small loaded portion B5530. In this state, when a ball rides on the rolling surface B5511 of the second opening/closing plate B5500, the weight of the ball urges the second opening/closing plate B5500 to the closed state (tilted state). On the other hand, since the slide rod B5610 is in the displacement trajectory of the small load receiving portion B5530, the slide rod B5610 is pushed toward the small load receiving portion B5530 when the second opening/closing plate B5500 is displaced toward the closed state. However, the upward displacement of the slide rod B5610 is restricted by the upper side surface of the through hole B5273. As a result, displacement of the small load-bearing portion B5530 can be restricted, so that the second opening/closing plate B5500 can be maintained in an open state.

In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the slide rod B5610 protrudes into the pre-ball-entering range when the second opening/closing plate B5500 is open. Therefore, if no countermeasures are taken, there is a possibility that the slide rod B5610 will hinder the flow of the ball flowing down the pre-entering range. For example, if the slide rod B5610 is placed on the right side of the opening of the second detection sensor B1250, it prevents the ball from flowing down. there's a possibility that.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the slide bar B5610 is arranged near the shaft B5520 on the right side of the second opening/closing plate B5500, that is, on the opposite side of the second detection sensor B1250. This makes it possible to prevent the slide rod B5610 from interfering with the flow of the ball toward the opening of the second detection sensor B1250.

FIG. 175(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 along the line corresponding to line CLXXVa-CLXXVa in FIG. 172, and FIG. 175(b) is a variable winning device along the line corresponding to line CLXXVb-CLXXVb in FIG. 175(c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 along the line corresponding to the line CLXXVc-CLXXVc in FIG. 175(a) to 175(c) illustrate the open state of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the closed state of the second opening/closing plate B5500.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 along the line corresponding to line CLXXVa-CLXXVa in FIG. 172, and FIG. 176(b) is a line corresponding to line CLXXVb-CLXXVb in FIG. 176(c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 along the line corresponding to line CLXXVc-CLXXVc in FIG. 172. FIG. 176(a) to 176(c) illustrate the closed state of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the open state of the second opening/closing plate B5500.

As shown in FIGS. 176(a) to 176(c), regardless of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate B2300 in the left-right direction, when the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state, the ball riding on the opening/closing plate B2300 The second opening/closing plate B5500 is configured to be displaced toward the open state so as to pass below the slide-down start position. The same applies to the displacement of the opening/closing plate B2300 when the second opening/closing plate B5500 is switched to the closed state.

As a result, in opening and closing the opening/closing plate B2300 and the second opening/closing plate B5500, the effect of reducing the number of loose balls generated can be produced regardless of the order of opening/closing and the arrangement of the balls with respect to the opening/closing plates B2300 and B5500.

This effect becomes particularly large when the ball placed in the upper part of the pre-entering range slides down (see FIG. 176(a)). That is, when the ball slides down from the opening/closing plate B2300, in addition to the vertical distance between the rolling surfaces B2311 and B5511 in the open state, the width of the plate portion B5510 of the second opening/closing plate B5500 in the lateral direction from below Since the rolling surface B5511 can be displaced upward (rotated upward), the ball can be easily rescued.

In this embodiment, for example, in the special game state, after the round in which the opening/closing plate B2300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 175) ends and the opening/closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state, the second opening/closing plate B5500 is opened. When switching from the closed state to the open state (see FIG. 176), the second opening/closing plate B5500 can be configured to easily rescue a ball that is about to slide down from the opening/closing plate B2300.

Therefore, in the special game state, by controlling the opening/closing plate B2300 and the second opening/closing plate B5500 so as to alternately open and close in accordance with the progress of the round, as in the above-described first operation pattern, all inter-round intervals It is possible to produce an effect of suppressing the occurrence of spilled balls.

In order to suppress the occurrence of loose balls, it is required to shorten the interval between rounds. , B2300 vertically face each other, and the displacement trajectories partially overlap each other. Therefore, if the displacement of the opening/closing plates B2300 and B5500 to the closed state is delayed, there is a risk of collision with the opening/closing plates B5500 and B2300 that are displaced toward the open state.

Here, for example, when the direction of displacement to the closed state is the direction in which the ball is lifted up, as in the first rotating member B3700 described above, the displacement resistance to the closed state varies depending on the number of balls. may be delayed.

On the other hand, the direction of displacement of the opening/closing plates B2300 and B5500 to the closed state in this embodiment is the direction of tilting downward, so the displacement resistance does not change depending on the number of balls. Furthermore, as the number of balls increases, the self-weight of the balls increases the degree of biasing toward the displacement direction of the opening/closing plates B2300 and B5500, so that the speed of displacement to the closed state can be improved.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent delays in displacing the opening/closing plates B2300 and B5500 to the closed state. Collision with B2300 can be avoided.

Next, a 16th embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the first specific prize winning port B1001 and the second specific prize winning port B1002 are arranged with an interval of about 60 mm has been described. The interval between the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 is lengthened. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 177 is a front view of the game board 13 and variable winning device B6000 in the sixteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 177, the layout of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 are shifted outward to the left and right, and the interval is increased.

In this embodiment, the first specific prize winning port B1001 is arranged at a position with a lateral distance of 65 mm from the electric role product 640a, and the second specific prize winning port B1002 has a lateral distance of 65 mm from the electric role product 640a. placed in position. Since the outer width of the electric accessory 640a in the closed state is about 30 mm, the distance between the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 is set to about 160 mm. In this case, the left-right length in which the ball can flow into the pre-entering range is approximately 130 mm after subtracting the outer width of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, the electric accessory 640a configures an open state by tilting in a direction away from each other about the rotation shaft arranged at the lower end, and configures a closed state by rising in a direction approaching each other.

As for the configuration of the members that open and close in the pre-ball-entering range, the above-described configuration can be used by changing the design. For example, the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 are extended in the longitudinal direction to match the distance between the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002. With this configuration, the variable winning device B6000 can be configured to cause the ball that has reached the pre-entering range to enter the first specific winning hole B1001 or the second specific winning hole B1002.

The inclination angles of the guide members B1310, B1510 and the upstream members B1320, B1520 are 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane as described above. In this case, the vertical length between the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged below them is about 19.6 mm (=160×tan (7 degrees)). Become. Therefore, even if the interval between rounds is set longer than the above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loose balls.

In this embodiment, the guide members B1310, B1510 and the upstream members B1320, B1520 have been described as having an inclination angle of 7 degrees, but the inclination angle is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tilt angle may be set at 45 degrees. In this case, the vertical length between the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged therebelow can be further increased, so the interval between rounds can be further increased. Even if it is set, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loose balls.

Further, a space is formed between the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged therebelow so that the ball can enter from the side. Therefore, the ball that is not guided by the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and flows down to the left and right outside thereof collides with other members (nails and resin members) on the downstream side, and then passes through the above-mentioned space and passes through the guide member. A situation can be caused to reach B1510 and B1310.

This serves as a basis for the player's decision as to whether to aim for the lower part of the pre-entering range to hit right or left, or to aim for the upper part of the pre-entering range to hit left or right. In addition, in a situation where the ball can be guided to the first specific winning hole B1001, the upper part of the pre-entering range can be aimed by hitting left, and the lower part of the pre-entering range can be aimed by hitting to the right. On the other hand, in a situation where the ball can be guided to the second special winning hole B1002, the upper part of the range before entry can be aimed by hitting to the right, and the lower part of the range before entry can be aimed by hitting to the left. Since the relationship between the mode and the aim is reversed when the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 capable of guiding the ball are changed, the player can concentrate on the game.

When hitting a ball aiming at the upper part of the pre-entering range, it is possible to avoid placing a plurality of balls in the lower part of the pre-entering range due to the deceleration effect of the projecting portion B1140 and the like described in each of the above embodiments. , the number of loose balls can be reduced. On the other hand, even if a ball enters the pre-entering range from the space between the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged below, the ball will be out. It is disadvantageous in that it tends to flow down toward the mouth 71 .

On the other hand, when hitting a ball aiming at the lower part of the range before entering the ball, the deceleration effect cannot be expected, so multiple balls will be placed in the lower part of the range before entering the ball, and the number of loose balls will increase. The disadvantage is that it is easy. On the other hand, a ball that has entered the pre-ball-entering range from the space between the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 arranged below them will enter the lower part of the pre-ball-entering range. It is advantageous in that it can be reached and guided to the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

To put it briefly, when hitting a ball aiming at the upper part of the range before entering the ball, the possibility that the ball after falling from above the variable winning device B6000 will become a spilled ball is low, but it entered the range before entering the ball from the side. There is a high possibility that the ball will become a lost ball. On the other hand, when hitting the ball aiming at the lower part of the pre-entering range, it is fully conceivable that even the ball after falling from above the variable winning device B6000 will become a falling ball, but from the side before entering the ball. Even if the ball enters the range, there is a possibility that it will be guided to the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 without becoming a lost ball.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the balance is set for the profit that the player can obtain when the ball flowing down to the variable prize winning device B6000 is different, the player can select the desired profit balance. , it is possible to select the shooting mode of the ball.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the same driving mode as the variable winning device B6000, the state is switched between a state in which the ball is guided downward to the right, a state in which the ball is guided downward to the left, and a state in which the ball is not guided. Variable devices B6001 and B6002 that can be configured are arranged in the game area. The timing of the state switching is not limited at all, but in the present embodiment, the state is switched in a fixed pattern after the power is turned on (a fixed state switching pattern is repeatedly executed, or the state is switched at a fixed interval). state can be switched).

The first variable device B6001 is arranged directly below the through gate 67 on the left. When the ball is guided downward to the left, the ball is temporarily retained because the distance between the lower end of the plate that guides the ball and the inner rail 61 is less than the diameter of the ball. As a result, it is possible to intentionally vary the arrangement intervals of the balls that are shot at equal intervals.

Also, in the state where the ball is guided downward to the right, the guided ball is guided to the internal flow path 86 a of the center frame 86 . A ball entering the internal flow path 86a passes through the inside of the center frame 86 and is guided toward the base plate 60 side (front side) from the vicinity of the position directly above the first prize winning port 64. The base plate 60 and the glass unit 16 ( (See Figure 1). Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64 .

Note that the first variable device B6001 is not arranged on the right side of the game area. Therefore, the easiness of entering the internal flow path 86a can be changed depending on whether the ball is hit toward the left side of the center frame 86 or the right side of the center frame 86. It is possible to change the ease of entering the ball into 64.

The second variable device B6002 is arranged directly above the center frame 86, and is arranged so that the crossing position of the guide path coincides with the center position of the center frame 86 in the left and right direction. Spaced out enough to allow passage.

With the second variable device B6002, it is possible to switch between a state in which the ball that is shot with strength enough to land on the upper end of the center frame 86 is flowed to the left side of the game area and a state to be flowed to the right side of the game area. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the balls flow down evenly to the left and right, and to cause a large number of balls to flow down to the left or right.

As a result, by grasping the state of the second variable device B6002 and shooting the ball, it is possible to easily guide the ball to the target range of the game area. You can improve your strength.

Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are driven by separate driving devices B1400 and B1600 has been described. A dual-purpose driving device B7700 that is also used to displace the B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 178 is a top view of the variable winning device B7000 in the seventeenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178, the variable winning device B7000 includes, in addition to the configuration of the above-described variable winning device B1000, a shared driving device B7700 disposed on the rear side, and a direct-acting member B1420 toward the shared driving device B7700. A transmission rod B7422 that extends from the linear motion member B1620 to the back side, bends at the extension tip and extends upward, and a transmission rod B7622 that extends from the linear motion member B1620 to the back side, bends at the extension tip and extends downward. And prepare.

The driving force generated by the combined driving device B7700 is transmitted to the linear motion members B1420 and B1620 through the transmission rods B7422 and B7622, so that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be displaced.

The dual-purpose driving device B7700 rotates about a shaft fixed in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) by a driving motor B7710 that is rotationally driven and the rotational force of the driving motor B7710. and a transmission rotating body B7720 configured to be capable of transmitting driving force to B7622.

The transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are extended along the vertical direction of the axis of the transmission rotor B7720 at the extension tip side. The extended ends of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are configured to engage with the transmission rotator B7720 at the vertical position of the transmission rotator B7720 (the position separated by 180 degrees from the axis, see FIG. 179(a)). there is Hereinafter, the configuration of the transmission rotor B7720 will be described in detail, and the mode of driving force transmission to the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 will be described.

Fig. 179(a) is a front view of the transmission rotator B7720, Fig. 179(b) is a side view of the transmission rotator B7720 viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIXb in Fig. 179(a), and Fig. 179(c) [Fig. 4] is a developed view of a circumferential surface of a transmission rotating body B7720.

As shown in FIGS. 179(a) to 179(c), the transmission rotor B7720 is a circular plate-shaped member having a central hole B7721 to which the shaft of the drive motor B7710 is fixed, and an outer peripheral hole B7721. and a recessed groove portion B7730 that is recessed radially inward from the surface and continuously formed along the circumferential direction.

As shown in FIG. 179(a), the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged so as to enter the groove portion B7730 to be entered. The groove portion to be entered B7730 is configured such that the minimum groove width Wmin is slightly longer than the tip thickness of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622. It is possible to rotate the rotating body B7720 more than 360 degrees.

The entered groove portion B7730 is formed with a groove width Wmin in most of the angular range, and is expanded to the maximum groove width Wmax in a specific angular range. The groove width Wmax is set as a sufficiently long width that does not limit the displacement of the transmission rods B7422, B7622 allowed by the solenoids B1410, B1610.

The groove portion B7730 to be entered has a range formed with a groove width Wmin extending along one of two planes BS71 and BS72 perpendicular to the rotation axis, and a section extending along one of the two planes BS71 and BS72 perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a section connected along a sloping line.

Two planes BS71 and BS72 correspond to the left and right positions of transmission rods B7422 and B7622. In this embodiment, the distance between the two planes BS71 and BS72 is set to correspond to the displacement width of the linear motion members B1420 and B1620 of the solenoids B1410 and B1610.

That is, when the transmission rod B7422 is arranged on the first plane BS71, the direct-acting member B1420 is arranged at the position where the first solenoid B1410 is in the non-excited state, so the first guide plate B1300 is closed. state. On the other hand, when the transmission rod B7422 is arranged on the second plane BS72, the linear motion member B1420 is arranged at the position in which the first solenoid B1410 is excited, so the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state. be done.

Further, when the transmission rod B7622 is arranged on the first plane BS71, the linear motion member B1620 is arranged at the position in which the second solenoid B1610 is in the non-excited state, so the second guide plate B1500 is closed. state. On the other hand, when the transmission rod B7622 is arranged on the second plane BS72, the linear motion member B1620 is arranged at the position in which the second solenoid B1610 is excited, so that the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state. be done.

Therefore, by appropriately designing the entry groove portion B7730, the states of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be switched in synchronization with the rotation of the transmission rotor B7720. Details of the shape of the groove portion to be entered B7730 will be described below.

With the boundary position BCL71 as a reference, the groove to be entered B7730 is configured such that the transmission rod B7622 is guided in the upper groove and the transmission rod B7422 is guided in the lower groove. The non-driving section B7731, the driving sections B7740 and B7750, and the performance section B7760 are configured in the same angular range and order.

The non-driving section B7731 has two sections of approximately 30 degrees arranged at intervals of 180 degrees, and the central portion in the angular direction has a groove width Wmax. In the state where the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the groove width Wmax, the displacement of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 is not limited to the groove portion B7730 to be entered. Therefore, by controlling the driving of the solenoids B1410 and B1610, the state of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be switched between the closed state and the open state.

The drive sections B7740 and B7750 are continuously formed in a section of 105 degrees from the end of the non-drive section B7731, but have different shapes across the boundary position BCL71.

The first drive section B7740 arranged below the boundary position BCL71 in FIG. , a second groove portion B7742 continuously formed over approximately 45 degrees from the first groove portion B7741, and a third groove portion B7743 continuously formed over approximately 45 degrees from the second groove portion B7742.

The first groove portion B7741 and the second groove portion B7742 are arranged on the first plane BS71, and the arrangement of the third groove portion B7743 is shifted from the first plane BS71 to the second plane BS72.

The second drive section B7750, which is arranged above the boundary position BCL71 in FIG. 179(c), is a section related to the displacement of the transmission rod B7622. A second groove portion B7752 continuously formed over approximately 45 degrees from the first groove portion B7751, and a third groove portion B7753 continuously formed over approximately 45 degrees from the second groove portion B7752.

The first groove B7751 and the third groove B7753 are arranged on the first plane BS71, and the second groove B7752 is shifted from the first plane BS71 to the second plane BS72.

Therefore, when the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the driving sections B7740 and B7750, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are displaced along the shape of the groove portion B7730 to be entered. Therefore, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be switched between the closed state and the open state by rotating the transmission rotor B7720.

FIG. 179(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between the rotation direction of the transmission rotor B7720 and the states of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500. In FIG. 179(d), it is assumed that the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are entering the driving sections B7740 and B7750.

According to FIG. 179(d), by appropriately switching the rotation direction of the drive motor B7710, both the operation pattern of opening and closing only the first guide plate B1300 and the operation pattern of opening and closing only the second guide plate B1500 can be changed. An actuation pattern that alternately opens and closes B1300 and B1500 is also feasible.

When the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged in the first grooves B7741 and B7751 in the standby state, the second guide plate B1500 is opened even when the operation pattern of opening and closing only the second guide plate B1500 is started. Although it is necessary to go through the open state of the first guide plate B1300 before configuring the state, it is possible to immediately switch the first guide plate B1300 to the closed state by increasing the rotation speed of the drive motor B7710. , is unlikely to pose a problem in practice.

Further, when the second guide plate B1500 is opened in the final round, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are returned to the first grooves B7741 and B7751 at the end of the round via the second grooves B7742 and B7752. Therefore, it is thought that there will be a problem that the first guide plate B1300 will be opened.

On the other hand, in practice, as described above, the rotation speed of the drive motor B7710 is increased, or the transmission rods B7422, B7622 are arranged at the boundary positions between the second grooves B7742, B7752 and the third grooves B7743, B7753. This can be dealt with by closing both of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, so that this problem is unlikely to occur in practice.

By arranging the transmission rods B7422, B7622 at the boundary positions between the second grooves B7742, B7752 and the third grooves B7743, B7753, even if both the guide plates B1300, B1500 are closed and the special game state is finished. , If the arrangement of the transmission rods B7422, B7622 is stored until the start of the next special game state, ), it is possible to cope with both the case of opening the first guide plate B1300 and the case of opening the second guide plate B1500 in the first round.

An advantage of displacing the guide plates B1300 and B1500 by rotating the transmission rotor B7720 is that the operation order of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be mechanically defined simply by rotating the transmission rotor B7720. be done.

Therefore, the complicated control program required when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are driven by separate driving devices is not required, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are interlocked in an appropriate order regardless of the speed of the transmission rotor B7720. can be made

In this case, the interval between rounds can be shortened by increasing the rotation speed of the drive motor B7710 and rotating the transmission rotor B7720 at high speed. In addition, when the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are driven to switch between the closed state and the open state, there is no need to reverse the rotation direction of the drive motor B7710, shortening the interval between rounds. can be made easier.

The effect section B7760 has two sections of about 45 degrees arranged at intervals of 180 degrees so as to connect between the non-driving section B7731 and the driving sections B7740 and B7750. It is formed so that the arrangement can be shifted on the BS72. That is, when the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the effect section B7760, both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched to the open state.

FIG. 180 is a front view of the variable winning device B7000. FIG. 180 shows a state in which the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 have entered the effect section B7760. That is, the drawing shows a state in which both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 180, when both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are opened, the ball entering the first specific winning hole B1001 is blocked by the upstream member B1520 and enters the second specific winning hole B1002. The ball is blocked by the upstream member B1320. Also, the balls that have reached the pre-entering range are collected at the intersection of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, and drop downward as the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced to the closed state.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 180, while both guide plates B1300 and B1500 are in the open state, it is possible to prevent balls from entering both specific winning holes B1001 and B1002. Therefore, by opening and closing the guide plates B1300 and B1500, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the balls from entering the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002.

Strictly speaking, the state shown in FIG. 180 is not an open state because the balls are prevented from entering the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 although the states of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are changed. Therefore, for example, the output from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to rotate the drive motor B7710, and control is performed to configure the state shown in FIG. 180 as the performance operation in the normal state. can be In addition, when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 constitute the open state without the start of the big winning game (for example, a small winning), the mode shown in FIG. 180 may be used.

As the closed state of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, both the state in which both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are arranged on the back side and the state in which both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are arranged on the front side are It may be configurable. In a state where both are arranged on the front side, by displacing one of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 to the back side, a ball can be entered into either of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, and the open state is maintained. Configurable.

In this embodiment, a discharge port B7160 is formed through which the ball can be discharged from the crossing position of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 to the rear side. As a result, it is possible to prevent balls from accumulating at the intersection of the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

In addition, the ball that has passed through the outlet B7160 may be treated as an out ball, or it may be configured to return to the game area again via a detour passage communicating from the outlet B7160, and the return ball will enter the ball entrance. It may be configured so that it can be entered.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor B7710 is provided in addition to the solenoids B1410 and B1610, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the solenoids B1410 and B1610 may be omitted and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 may be driven only by the drive motor B7710.

In the special game state, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are driven by the driving force of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 in the first state, and by the driving force of the drive motor B7710 in the second state different from the first state. You can make it work.

Also, the special game state may be executed by the driving force of the solenoids B1410 and B1610, and the drive motor B7710 may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, in the special game state, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 may enter the non-driving section B7731.

Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described. This embodiment corresponds to another control example of the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the first detection sensor B1230 and the second detection sensor B1250 both constitute the special winning openings B1001 and B1002. The plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are allowed to be displaced at the same time, and the first detection sensor B1230 constitutes the first specific winning opening B1001, while the second detection sensor B1250 is configured to function as a specific area. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 181(a) is a diagram showing changes over time of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 181(b) is the first guide plate in the fifth operation pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time of a plate B1300 and a second guide plate B1500; 130, 132 and 137 are referred to in the description of FIG.

In this embodiment, the second guide plate B1500 and the second detection sensor B1250 function as a probability variation determination unit. That is, the second detection sensor B1250 functions as a sensor that detects passage of the sphere through the specific area.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the second detection sensor B1250 in the special game state, it is controlled to shift to the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends.

The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main control device 110 makes a determination regarding the acquisition of the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol in a special round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, the first round ) only. The operating pattern of this special round is described in detail below.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot D and jackpot E are provided as jackpot types of special symbols. Depending on the type of jackpot, the operation patterns of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are configured differently, and the number of payout prize balls accompanying the ball entry and the transition to the variable state (high probability state) of special symbols. is configured to vary the probability of obtaining the right to

When the jackpot D is reached, the jackpot game of the first round is executed in the fourth operation pattern. In this case, the player can almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state), but is configured so that he or she can hardly receive the payout of prize balls.

When the jackpot E is obtained, the jackpot game of the first round is executed in the fifth operation pattern. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 150 prize balls, and in most cases cannot obtain the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure winning determination, after the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, it starts controlling the determined kind of big winning game. Operation control of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be described below.

<When operating with the fourth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot D, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids B1410 and B1610 so that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 activates the solenoid to keep the guide plates B1300 and B1500 closed until the timer means (not shown) passes a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the round game R of the first round is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and displaces the first guide plate B1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole B1001. B1410 is driven and controlled. The driving of the first solenoid B1410 is controlled to be switched at intervals of three seconds, and the first guide plate B1300 is switched between the open state and the closed state at intervals of three seconds.

The second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state by controlling the driving of the second solenoid B1610 two seconds after the timing at which the first solenoid B1410 is first driven. The second solenoid B1610 continues to be driven for 28 seconds thereafter. Therefore, the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in an open state.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the win) is satisfied, the first guide plate B1300 is displaced to the closed state and the first solenoid B1410 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning port B1001, and the first round round game R ends. do.

According to the above-described fourth operation pattern, it is possible to enter the ball into the first specific winning hole B1001 for 2 seconds after the first guide plate B1300 is opened. , By opening the second guide plate B1500, the ball can enter the specific area of the second detection sensor B1250. It is not possible to achieve the number of balls entered.

As a result, in the first round special game, the player can acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but is controlled so that it is necessary to wait for the lapse of the specified time. be able to.

<When operating with the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids B1410 and B1610 so that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 operate based on the fifth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 activates the solenoid to keep the guide plates B1300 and B1500 closed until the timer means (not shown) passes a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the round game R of the first round is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and displaces the first guide plate B1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole B1001. B1410 is driven and controlled. The driving of the first solenoid B1410 is controlled so that the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state, and the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state until the end of the round.

The second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state by controlling the driving of the second solenoid B1610 two seconds after the timing at which the first solenoid B1410 is first driven. The second solenoid B1610 is deactivated after 0.5 seconds, so the second guide plate B1500 returns to the closed state.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the win) is satisfied, the first guide plate B1300 is displaced to the closed state and the first solenoid B1410 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning port B1001, and the first round round game R ends. do.

According to the fifth operation pattern described above, it is possible to enter the ball into the first specific winning hole B1001 after the first guide plate B1300 constitutes the open state. Although the second guide plate B1500 is opened after 2 seconds have passed, it is immediately switched to the closed state, so it does not hinder the entry of the ball into the first specific winning hole B1001. On the other hand, since the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state over the period in which the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state, the second detection sensor B1250 is blocked by the first guide plate B1300. Therefore, the ball will not pass through the specified area.

As a result, in the special game of the first round, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but the first specific winning without waiting for the lapse of the specified time. The special game of the first round can be finished by entering a specified number of balls into the mouth B1001.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the variable winning device B1000 is provided with different operation patterns as the control of the first round. A round can be configured to acquire the right to transition to a high-probability state).

Here, unlike the prior art, in the fourth operation pattern and the fifth operation pattern, while the second guide plate B1500 is closed before the operation in the first round game, the first guide plate B1300 is not required to be in the closed state, it is possible to easily prevent the ball reaching the first guide plate B1300 from spilling. This will be explained below.

In the prior art, when a specified number of balls enter the first specific winning opening B1001 and the round game ends before the action member for opening and closing the specific area starts to operate, the action member is in an open state. However, there is a risk that the ball will not enter the first specific winning hole B1001 and the player will not be able to acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In order to prevent this, the opening/closing member for opening/closing the first specific winning hole B1001 is controlled to remain closed for several seconds after the start of the round.

Therefore, the ball that flows down after the start of the round and reaches the opening/closing member at the timing when the ball can enter the first specific winning hole B1001 spills because the opening/closing member is maintained in the closed state, and the player feels disappointed. I was afraid it would increase.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second detection sensor B1250 is not arranged downstream of the first specific winning opening B1001, so the first guide plate B1300 constitutes a closed state and the first specific winning opening B1001 is closed. Even if the ball cannot enter the ball, as long as the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special pattern probability change state (high probability state) without any problem. can do.

In addition, by setting the time to start driving to 2 seconds, the second guide plate B1500 is opened before the specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) enter the first specific winning hole B1001. I am trying to switch.

Therefore, in this operation pattern, even while the second guide plate B1500 is in the closed state before the operation in the first round game, the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state. While preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the operation of B1300, there is a problem that the player can not acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol due to the winning mode. can be prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, in the fifth operation pattern, the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state and does not change to the closed state, so compared to the case where the opening/closing member is maintained in the closed state for several seconds as described above in the prior art. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of loose balls generated during the game in the first round.

In addition, the aspect of a special round is not restricted to said description. For example, it may be configured in the second round instead of the first round, or may be configured in the final round, and the number of rounds in which it is configured is arbitrary. Also, a plurality of special rounds may be configured.

In addition, although the operation pattern after the second round of the big win D and the big win E will not be particularly described, it may be configured in common. For example, the first opening/closing plate B1300 maintains an open state during a round, and the second opening/closing plate B1500 maintains a closed state at all times.

Next, a 19th embodiment will be described. In the fourteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball rolling on the guide plate B4300 is configured to be difficult to enter the ball guide receiving portion B4260. It is configured so that the ball can be easily entered into the receiving portion B4260. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Further, it is possible to arbitrarily set what kind of profit is given to the player by entering the ball into the ball guide receiving portion B4260. For example, it may be an advantageous one such as a special symbol lottery, a prize ball payout, or a variable probability state, or a disadvantageous one such as a drop lottery.

FIG. 182 is a front view of the variable winning device B9000 in the nineteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 182, in the variable winning device B9000, the formation of the left extension portion B1240 is omitted, and the penetration formation portion B9120 drilled in the base member B9100 is inclined from the left end portion of the penetration formation portion B4120. Similarly, the front-rear direction is switched between an open state in which the ball can be guided to the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 and a closed state in which the ball cannot be guided. A guide plate B9300 configured to be slidably displaceable has a shape extending leftward from the left end portion of the above-described guide plate B4300 while maintaining an inclination.

That is, the variable prize winning device B9000 forms only a guide path that descends to the right to guide the ball toward the opening of the first detection sensor B1230, and unlike each of the above embodiments, the formation of the guide path that descends to the left is omitted. ing.

When the guide plate B9300 is in the open state, various aspects are exemplified as aspects of how the ball reaches the guide plate B9300. For example, the base plate 60 (see FIG. 124) can be arranged in such a manner that the ball falls from above the guide plate B9300 or can be guided to the guide plate B9300 on the left side (upstream side) of the guide plate B9300 (inclination mode). ) in which the ball that collides with the nail BKG91 implanted in the guide plate B9300 reaches the left side of the guide plate B9300.

The base member B9100 includes a plurality of projections B9140 acting on balls rolling on the rolling surface 9311 of the guide plate B9300 in the open state. The plurality of protruding portions B9140 are formed in a columnar shape elongated in the vertical direction, and are protrusively formed with a length that allows contact with the ball rolling on the guide plate B9300. different.

That is, the first projecting portion B9141 disposed at the left end is disposed with a space approximately equal to the diameter of the sphere from the rolling contact surface B9311, and is located to the right of the first projecting portion B9141 with a distance of approximately the diameter of the sphere. The second protruding portions B9142, which are arranged at a lateral interval of about double the length, are arranged at a interval of about 5/6 of the diameter of the ball from the rolling surface B9311.

The third projecting portion B9143, which is arranged on the right side of the second projecting portion B9142 at a horizontal interval of about the diameter of the sphere, has a diameter of about 4/6 (= 2/3) of the diameter of the ball with the rolling surface B9311. The fourth projecting portion B9144, which is spaced apart from the third projecting portion B9143 and is located on the right side of the third projecting portion B9143 at a horizontal interval approximately equal to the diameter of the sphere, is located approximately the radius of the ball from the rolling surface B9311. They are spaced apart. The fourth projecting portion B9144 is formed at a position slightly shifted to the left from directly above the ball guide receiving portion B4260.

That is, as the protruding portion B9140 moves from the first protruding portion B9141 to the fourth protruding portion B9144, the contact position with the ball rolling on the rolling surface B9311 approaches the center of the ball. The effect of slowing the ball gradually increases. Therefore, the protrusion B9140 can increase the degree of deceleration of the ball rolling on the rolling surface B9311 toward the downstream.

As a result, the residence time of the rolling ball can be differentiated for each position on the rolling surface B9311. In particular, since the residence time of the ball in the vicinity of the fourth projecting portion B9141 can be relatively lengthened, the probability of the ball flowing down toward the ball guide receiving portion B4260 when the guide plate B9300 is switched to the closed state is reduced. can be raised.

The fifth projecting portion B9145, which is arranged on the right side of the fourth projecting portion B9144 at a lateral interval of about 1.5 times the diameter of the ball, is formed between the rolling surface B9311 and 4/6 (=2) the diameter of the ball. /3), and the sixth projecting portion B9146, which is disposed on the right side of the fifth projecting portion B9145 at a lateral interval of about the diameter of a ball, is the rolling contact surface B9311. They are arranged at intervals of about 5/6 of the diameter of the spheres.

That is, as the projecting portion B9140 moves from the fourth projecting portion B9144 toward the sixth projecting portion B9146, the contact position with the ball rolling on the rolling surface B9311 becomes farther from the center of the ball. The effect of slowing the ball is gradually reduced. Therefore, the protrusion B9140 can increase the degree of acceleration of the ball rolling on the rolling surface B9311 toward the downstream.

As a result, the residence time of the rolling ball can be differentiated for each position on the rolling surface B9311. In particular, since the residence time of the ball at the position immediately before the first detection sensor B1230 can be relatively shortened, the ball is allowed to enter the first detection sensor B1230 before the guide plate B9300 is switched to the closed state. can be made easier. As a result, the efficiency of ball entry into the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 can be improved, and the number of loose balls can be reduced.

Further, by making the contact positions with the ball different between the upper and lower sides as in the present embodiment, the load in the vertical direction is easily applied to the ball. Therefore, not only the case where the ball always adheres to the rolling surface B9311 and rolls, but also the case where it bounces down (randomly) may occur. As a result, it is possible to give variety to the flow-down manner of the ball guided by the guide plate B9300, so that the player who pays attention to the ball is not bored.

Although the projecting portion B9140 has been described as being elongated in the vertical direction, the projecting portion B9140 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the longitudinal direction may be inclined with respect to the vertical direction. For example, the longitudinal direction may coincide with the direction of downward inclination toward the left side. In this case, the speed of the ball rolling on the rolling surface B9311 can make a difference in the degree of deceleration of the ball. For example, when the ball rolls at high speed, it is easy to ride on the slope of the projecting portion B9140, and the degree of deceleration is small. can be decelerated to In this case, the degree of deceleration of the ball approaching the projecting portion B9140 can be varied depending on the difference in the rolling speed of the ball.

In addition, in the section where the degree of deceleration gradually increases in the present embodiment (the section from the first protruding portion B9141 to the fourth protruding portion B9144), a gradually accelerating section may be provided, or the gradual acceleration may be provided. A section in which the speed is gradually decelerated may be provided in the section where the degree of is increased (the section from the fourth protrusion B9144 to the sixth protrusion B9146).

Note that the configuration of this embodiment may be employed in a device in which the guide routes described in each of the above embodiments intersect. Moreover, the projecting portion B9140 is not limited to being fixed to the base member B9100.

For example, through an opening formed integrally with the guide plate B9300 and formed in the base member B9100, switching between a state of protruding into the range before ball entry in conjunction with the guide plate B9300 and a state of being buried from the range before ball entry It may be configured as possible. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from colliding with the projecting portion B9140 in the closed state. In this case, all the projecting portions B9140 may be configured to interlock with the guide plate B9300, or some of the projecting portions B9140 may be interlocked with the guide plate B9300, and the other projecting portions B9140 may be the base member. It may be fixed to the B9100.

It should be noted that the ball guide receiving portion B4260 is not limited to being arranged below the lower end of the guide plate B9300. For example, it may be arranged close to the guide plate B9300, and may be arranged above the lower end portion of the guide plate B9300 (the portion in contact with the ridge support portion B1225). In this case, by narrowing the vertical distance between the guide plate B9300 and the ball guide receiving portion B4260, it is possible to make it easier for the ball that has slid down from the guide plate B9300 to enter the ball guide receiving portion B4260.

Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are configured to be in the open state by rotating downward. It is configured to be in an open state by rotationally displacing. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

183(a) and 183(b) are partial front views of the variable winning device B20000 in the twentieth embodiment in the range corresponding to the range CLXIIa of FIG. ) is a partial top view of the variable prize winning device B20000 as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXXIIIc.

183(a) and 183(c) illustrate the closed state of the variable winning device B20000, and FIG. 183(b) illustrates the open state of the second rotating member B20900. As shown in FIG. 183, the variable winning device B20000 includes a first rotating member B20700 that configures the ball guide path by rotating and displacing, and a second rotating member B20700 that configures the ball guide path by rotating and displacing. and a moving member B20900.

The support member that supports the rotating members B20700 and B20900 includes the above-mentioned protruding shaft B3171 and a guide for displacement of the protruding portions B20711 and B20911 that are drilled along an arc centered on the protruding shaft B3171. An arcuate hole B20172 is formed.

Since the first rotating member B20700 and the second rotating member B20900 are formed in substantially symmetrical shapes, the first rotating member B20700 will be described, and the description of the second rotating member B20900 will be omitted.

The first rotating member B20700 has a closed state (see FIG. 183(a)) that prevents the ball from entering the first specific winning hole B1001, and a rotating displacement in the rising direction to move the ball to the first specific winning hole B1001. can be guided between the open state (see FIG. 183(b) for the second rotating member B20900). and an extended plate portion B20720 extending along the radial direction of the main body portion B20710.

The body portion B20710 includes a protruding portion B20711 that protrudes toward the back side in parallel with the rotation axis from a position on the inner side (left side) of the protruding shaft portion B3171. The protruding portion B20711 protrudes toward the rear side through the arc-shaped hole B20172.

In addition, the body portion B20710 includes a plate portion B20712 projecting along the radial direction. The plate portion B20712 protrudes toward the opening of the first detection sensor B1230, and can prevent a ball from entering the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 in the closed state. On the other hand, in the open state (state in which the tip is raised), the plate portion B20712 and the lower edge of the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 are in a shape that gently connects to the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 in the open state. You can enter the ball.

The extension plate portion B20720 is formed so as to taper toward the extension tip side in a front view, and is recessed along a rolling surface B20721 on which a game ball can be placed and a plane perpendicular to the direction of the rotation axis. A concave portion B20722 is provided.

The recessed portion B20722 is a recessed portion formed up to a retracted position from the locus of movement of the second rotating member B20900 in front view in order to avoid interference with the second rotating member B20900. B20922 is also formed on the second rotating member B20900.

The recessed portions B20722 and the recessed portions B20922 are alternately formed in the axial direction. Thereby, while avoiding the collision of the first rotating member B20700 and the second rotating member B20900, the formation area of the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 is ensured.

Balls can contact the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 regardless of the state of the rotating members B20700 and B20900. Therefore, for example, immediately after reaching the vicinity of the central position guided by the closed rolling surface B20721, the rolling surface B20921 opens and guides the ball to the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. . That is, both rotating members B20700 and B20900 may function to bring the ball closer to the opening of the same detection sensor (eg, second detection sensor B1250).

In the closed state shown in FIG. 183(a), the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 of the rotating members B20700 and B20900 intersect, and the spheres will accumulate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a discharge port B20001 is formed for discharging the ball reaching the intersection position of the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 to the rear side. As a result, it is possible to prevent balls from accumulating at the position where the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 intersect in the closed state.

The profit given to the player by the ball entering the outlet B20001 is not limited at all. For example, the discharge port B20001 may be configured as an out port so as not to give any profit, or the ball entering the discharge port B20001 may cause a prize ball to be paid out, or the discharge port B20001 The entered ball may return to the game area again, and in that case, the return position may be a position where the ball can easily enter one of the winning holes.

Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the ball guide receiving portion B1260 is fixed has been described, but in the variable winning device B21000 in the twenty-first embodiment, the ball guide receiving portion B21260 is configured to be rotatably displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 184 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the 21st embodiment. As shown in FIG. 184, in the variable winning device B21000 of this embodiment, a ball guide receiving portion B21260 is formed so as to have a concave portion capable of receiving one ball vertically above the intersection position of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. is arranged.

The ball guide receiving portion B21260 can receive one ball in a receiving posture in which the recess faces upward, and the received ball is held by the ball guide receiving portion B21260 as long as the receiving posture is maintained. If another ball reaches the ball guide receiving portion B21260 while the ball is received by the ball guide receiving portion B21260, the ball collides with the ball held by the ball guide receiving portion B21260 and is guided by the ball. It flows down the left and right outer sides of the receiving portion B21260.

The ball guide receiving portion B21260 can be switched to a discharge posture in which the concave portion faces diagonally downward to the right by rotating clockwise around the rotation axis B21261. It is configured to be able to discharge the ball that has been held downward. The ball guide receiving portion B21260 is configured to return to the receiving posture by being rotationally displaced counterclockwise from the ejection posture.

As a result, up to one ball flowing down the left flow path BL1 can be held by the ball guide receiving portion B21260. It is possible to vary the period until the reaching ball hits the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 by means of the ball guide receiving portion B21260.

In addition, the timing at which the posture of the ball guide receiving portion B21260 changes is not limited at all. For example, the posture may be changed at regular intervals after the power is turned on, or the posture may be changed to the discharge posture by the load of the collision of the ball, and the posture may be returned to the receiving posture by an urging means such as a spring. Alternatively, the posture may be changed in conjunction with solenoids that drive the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

When interlocking with the solenoid, each time the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched to the open state, the ball guide receiving portion B21260 is switched from the receiving posture to the discharge posture, and at the timing to be switched to the closed state, the ball guide receiving portion B21260 is switched. By making B21260 return to the receiving posture, balls that may pass through the pre-ball entry range in the closed state can be temporarily retained in the ball guide receiving portion B21260, so the number of out balls generated can be reduced. can be reduced.

Further, although the displacement of the ball guide receiving portion B21260 has been described as the displacement in which the concave portion reciprocates on the right side of the rotating shaft B21261, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by displacing the ball guide receiving portion B21260 in the same direction by one rotation or more, it may be configured to return from the receiving posture to the ejecting posture and then to the receiving posture again.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the projecting portion 154 decelerates the ball flowing down the ball falling unit 150, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow resistance of the sphere may be increased by placing an adhesive member on the inner surface, air may be sent into the flow path, or the flow speed of the sphere may be adjusted by magnetic force. You can

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is disposed on the rear case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement restricting device 180 may be arranged on the side of the movable accessory. A displacement regulating device 180 may be provided on the back side of the effect member 700 so that the extension width to the back side can be changed by a pushing operation.

In this case, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the effect member 700 by configuring the body portion 183a of the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 to be inserted through the rear case 510 in a state in which the overhang width is long. can. On the other hand, the production member 700 can be displaced by disengaging the operation member 183 from being inserted into the rear case 510 in a state in which the operation member 183 is operated to shorten the overhang width. Along with the displacement, the displacement restricting device 180 is also displaced. Therefore, by adding a designed shape to the displacement regulating device 180 or arranging a light emitting device such as an LED, the displacement regulating device 180 can be visually recognized by the player.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the state change of the displacement restricting device 180 is caused by manual operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement restricting device 180 may include a driving device, and the arrangement of the operating member 183 may be electrically switched. In this case, by controlling the displacement restricting device 180 to be in the restricted state prior to the initial operation after power-on, it is possible to prevent the enlargement/reduction unit 600 from starting displacement while the displacement restricting device 180 remains in the restricted state. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation member 183 from being overloaded.

Further, a cushioning material having a high cushioning property may be arranged around the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183. FIG. Further, when a detection sensor capable of detecting the arrangement of the operation member 183 is provided without driving the displacement restricting device 180, and the detecting sensor determines that the displacement restricting device 180 is in the restricting state. Alternatively, the enlargement/reduction unit 600 may be controlled not to start driving.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is arranged on the back side of the back case 510 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the rear case 510, may be arranged on at least one of the left and right sides of the rear case 510, or may be a combination thereof.

For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the production member 700, it is sufficient to prevent the arrangement change of the lower arm member 630. Therefore, a recess is provided in the upper surface of the lower arm member 630 in the production standby state, and from the upper side of the back case 510 By constructing the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 to engage with a recess provided in the lower arm member 630 when the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 protrudes, the lower arm member 630 is prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction. can be done.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 is provided as an example of a device for restricting the displacement of the scaling unit 600 arranged above the game area has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, by disposing a device for regulating (restricting) the displacement of the granular member 320 (a member capable of freely displacing the internal space IE1) of the injection device 400, the granular member 320 displaces the internal space IE1 at the time of shipment. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the partition member 310 from rubbing against the wall surface of the partition member 310 , cracking the granular member 320 , and scratching the partition member 310 .

For example, the granular member 320 can be prevented from exceeding the lid member 480 and displacing the internal space IE1 by shipping the lid member 480 in the state of being placed at the displacement end position on the entrance side (indicator standby state). Therefore, it is possible to limit the range of the partitioning member 310 with which the granular members 320 can come into contact at the time of shipment. can.

Further, as another example, a granular member 320 is disposed on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate rendering means 160, configured to be able to protrude into the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310, and arranged in the internal space IE1 in the protruding state. A protruding member configured to limit the displacement of is also provided.

The projecting member can be pushed from the front side of the lower support member 163 (the front side of the game board 13), and can be switched between the projecting state and the non-projecting state each time the pushing operation is performed. After the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game machine parlor, the projecting member can be operated from the front side by opening the front frame 14, so that the operability of the projecting member can be improved.

In addition, the aspect of the state change of the projecting member is not limited at all. For example, like the displacement restricting device 180, the state may be changed by a latch mechanism, or the state may be changed by engaging and disengaging claws.

As another example, the arrangement of the granular members 320 may be maintained by shipping the partitioning member 310 in a state where the internal air pressure is increased. In this case, by installing the pachinko machine 10 in the amusement machine parlor and lowering the air pressure inside the partitioning member 310 before starting operation, the granular members 320 can be arranged freely.

As another example, the granular member 320 may be formed by mixing ferromagnetic metal powder with the resin material of the granular member 320, and the magnet may be arranged near the lower end of the partition member 310 at the time of shipment. Accordingly, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be maintained by the magnetic force of the magnet during shipment. On the other hand, during operation, the granular member 320 can be freely arranged by removing the magnet.

Note that the magnet is not limited to one that needs to be removed during operation. For example, a magnet may be arranged on a part of another movable accessory, and as an example, a magnet may be arranged on the lid member 480 .

In addition, in a mode in which ferromagnetic metal powder is mixed in the granular member 320, for example, after execution of the shooting effect, an operation is performed so as to generate a magnetic force near the partitioning member 310 (for example, to bring the magnet closer to the partitioning member 310). By arranging the performance accessories that operate, it is possible to include a performance mode in which the granular member 320 is stopped in the air (visible as if it is floating) in the shooting performance.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the displacement restricting device 180 that restricts the displacement of the scaling unit 600 is fixed to the back case 510 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an insertion hole is formed in the rear case 510 so as to be aligned with the central axis of the regulated hole 657 when the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 is located at the predetermined end position. A metal rod or resin rod is inserted through the insertion hole into the regulated hole 657 and fixed with a tape or the like. The scaling unit 600 may be configured to be displaceable.

On the other hand, with this method, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may become dirty with the tape for fixing, and it is not possible to throw away the metal rod or resin rod for delivery of the pachinko machine 10 to another store, so storage is not possible. It may be necessary to do so.

Also, if the storage of the metal sticks or resin sticks is entrusted to each game machine store, the possibility of loss increases. may not be possible. It can also be recognized that the displacement restricting device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the back case 510 is an improvement on this point of view.

In the first embodiment described above, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 and the front-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear section lower portion 314 are approximately the same, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, the front-to-rear width between the left-right central portion 312b and the rear section lower portion 314 may be configured to be as narrow as the front-to-rear width between the left and right portions 312a and the rear section lower portion 314. FIG. In this case, since the movement resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased in the lower side of the internal space IE1 regardless of the lateral position, the momentum of the injected granular member 320 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the probability that the granular member 320 will be damaged or damaged due to collision.

Also, for example, the front-to-rear width between the left and right portions 312a and the rear section lower portion 314 may be widened to the same extent as the front-to-rear width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can enter the internal space IE1 without reducing the momentum of the granular member 320 to be injected.

Also, the front-to-rear width of the internal space IE1 does not have to be constant. For example, it may be tapered toward the moving direction (upper side) of the ejected granular member 320 . In this case, the momentum of the granular members 320 can be gradually reduced, so that localized excessive loads on the partitioning members 310 can be easily avoided. Furthermore, by bringing the tapering direction to the front side, the scattering granular members 320 can be easily brought to the front side.

Further, for example, a bump-shaped portion projecting toward the rear side in a manner of protruding toward the rear side may be provided at a portion of the front plate portion 311 where it is expected that the injected granular members 320 will collectively arrive. good. This hump-like portion may be formed by fixing a separate member to the rear surface of the front plate portion 311, or by forming a metal plate so that a portion of the front plate portion 311 protrudes toward the rear surface side. The mold may be configured to have a convex portion.

In the above-described first embodiment, the granular member 320 is configured in the shape of a soccer ball, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may have a spherical shape, a rugby ball shape, or a star shape (a shape in which protrusions are formed three-dimensionally). By configuring the members with a certain size, gaps can be generated between the members, so that the granular members 320 can be violently scattered when the shooting effect is executed.

In the first embodiment, the ejection device 400 is arranged below the back side of the light guide plate 161 and is configured to eject the granular members 320 obliquely forward and upward, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the injection device 400 may be arranged on the left and right sides of the light guide plate 161 or on the upper side. Even in this case, an effect of shooting the granular member 320 obliquely forward can be executed. When the injection device 400 is arranged at the upper position, it is preferable to add a device for lifting the granular member 320 to the presentation standby position.

In the first embodiment described above, the granular member 320 is formed of a single-color (red in this embodiment) resin member, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one granular member 320 may be configured by two-color molding or combining two members of different colors. In this case, the appearance at the time of deposition can be devised by color-coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity. For example, by changing the color at the horizontal position in the stable posture of the granular member 320 in consideration of the position of the center of gravity, it is possible to visually recognize the layer of color when the granular member 320 is deposited.

Also, the number of granular members 320 is not limited, and may be one. For example, a member having approximately the same size as the collision member 420 may be employed as the granular member 320 , and the outer surface may be configured to have a concave curved shape approximately the same as the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 . As a result, how the granular member 320 flies and how it looks changes depending on whether the shooting effect is executed in a state where the curved shape fits well or when the firing effect is executed in a state where the curved shape does not fit. be able to.

In the above-described first embodiment, the granular members 320 are disposed in the internal space IE1 so as to be able to scatter, and gather on the collision member 420 due to gravity, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an urging means for urging the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (position side of the standby state for the effect) is provided, and the granular member 320 is returned to the initial position side by the urging force of the urging means. can be In this case, it is possible to avoid limiting the initial position side of the granular member 320 to the lower side.

Examples of the urging means include a spring, an elastic rubber-like member, a net-like member whose ends are fixedly arranged, an elastic sheet that partially covers the path of the granular member 320, and the like.

The relationship between the biasing means and the granular member 320 is not limited at all. For example, the granular member 320 and the urging means may be adhered to each other, or they may not be adhered but are not separated, and a part of the urging means is arranged inside the granular member 320 and integrated. Alternatively, the urging means may be supported in the internal space IE1 while being able to be arranged apart from the granular member 320 .

Also, the biasing means is not limited to an object that can come into contact with the granular member 320 . For example, in the same way as the gravitational force acting on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment, air pressure adjusting means for adjusting the air pressure in the internal space IE1 may be employed. In this case, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be affected by increasing or decreasing the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1.

For example, when the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 is increased by injecting gas into the internal space IE1 from above, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1, and conversely, above the internal space IE1. When the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 is lowered in a manner in which gas is extracted from the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 can be displaced (displaced to float) toward the upper side of the internal space IE1. Further, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, and can be set to any side of up, down, left, right, front and back.

It should be noted that it is preferable to close the deformed through portion 315 when the air pressure is to be changed. It is easily possible to provide the lid member 480 with the function of closing the deformed through portion 315 . For example, when a soft, thin, deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low-friction rubber-like member) is attached to the lid member 480 and the lid member 480 enters the deformed through portion 315, the lid The gap between the member 480 and the deformed through portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. As a result, the deformed penetrating portion 315 can be closed or opened according to the displacement of the cover member 480 with respect to the deformed penetrating portion 315 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ridge portion 414 of the direct-acting member 410 is formed along a straight line has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the surface of the right distal end facing the transmission projection 446 may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement locus of the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 . In this case, the direct-acting member 410 can be maintained at the displacement lower end position while the transmission projection 446 is in contact with the curved surface. It is possible to shift to the firing state while maintaining the maximum biasing force.

In the above-described first embodiment, the collision member 420 has a curved shape in which the left-right center portion of the collision member 420 protrudes upward, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be shaped like a slope that descends in the left-right direction with a sharp central portion, or it may be shaped like a hipped roof. In this case, compared to a curved shape, it is possible to make it more difficult for the granular member 320 to pass through the central sharp point in the left-right direction. Therefore, the left-right arrangement bias of the granular members 320 can be increased.

Further, for example, a planar shape orthogonal to the displacement direction may be used, or a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward may be used. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to configure a displacement mode in which the granular members 320 are displaced as a lump until they collide with the inner wall of the partitioning member 310, and are separated by the collision.

When changing the shape of the collision member 420, it is preferable to change the shape of the lid member 480 accordingly. For example, when the upper surface of the collision member 420 is configured to have a curved shape in which the central portion of the left and right sides are concave downward, the retractable portion 481 of the cover member 480 preferably has a curved shape in which the central portion of the left and right portions is convex upward. Therefore, collision between the granular member 320 and the lid member 480 can be easily avoided.

In the first embodiment, the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 has a flat shape when viewed from the side, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the lower half may protrude and be bent when viewed from the side. In this case, the dense position of the granular members 320 can be shifted to the upper half side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the size of the partitioning member 310 in front view is approximately the same as the size of the light guide plate 161 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the size of the partitioning member 310 when viewed from the front is designed to be about the size of, or larger than, the visual recognition area in which the player can visually recognize the display in the display area of the third pattern display device 81. You can do it. As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation where the edges of the partitioning member 310 are superimposed on the display of the third pattern display device 81 and visually recognized, so that the visibility of the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be improved. can.

In the above-described first embodiment, the single collision member 420 is used as the member that applies the load to the granular member 320, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 arranged to apply a load to the granular member 320 may be employed and may be operated in concert or individually by separate driving devices.

In the above-described first embodiment, the linear motion member 410 is in contact with the collision member 420 and the front transmission member 440 is not in contact with the collision member 420, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a pillar portion projecting from the plate portion 422 to the rear side may pass through the intermediate member 401 and may contact the front transmission member 440 . In this case, the abutting portion of the front transmission member 440 with the pillar is unevenly formed in such a manner that the length in the radial direction changes according to the angular arrangement. can be changed. By utilizing this, the collision member 420 may be slightly displaced up and down to cause the granular member 320 to vibrate (slightly displace).

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the cover member 480 enters the partition member 310 by rotational displacement has been described, but the displacement mode of the cover member 480 is not limited in any way, and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be entered by sliding displacement along a straight line. In this case, the shape of the deformed through portion 315 can be easily formed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the extension plate portions 485 arranged on the left and right sides of the lid member 480 are formed in a shape recessed toward the back side has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the granular members 320 from flowing into the collision member 420 from the left and right.

In the above-described first embodiment, the granular member 320 is separated and stored under the cover member 480 in the waiting state of the injection device 400, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a protruding portion may be formed from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side, and the protruding portion may contact the granular member 320 . In this case, when the granular members 320 are locally deposited, the accumulation of the granular members 320 can be broken as the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side by pushing the granular members 320 with the projecting portion. . Thereby, uniformity of the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be achieved.

The shape of the projecting portion of the lid member 480 is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured such that a plurality of protrusions are scattered. In this case, regardless of the position where the particulate members 320 are deposited, the protrusions can be brought into contact with the deposited particulate members 320, and the deposition of the particulate members 320 can be broken.

Alternatively, the projections may be configured as a pair of protrusions that are arranged so as to incline left and right outward toward the retraction side tip portion of the advancing/retracting portion 481 from the left-right central portion of the leading end portion of the projecting portion 482 as a starting point. . In this case, as the cover member 480 is displaced on the approach side, a load can be applied to the granular member 320 in a direction that pushes the granular member 320 outward in the left and right directions.

Also, the direction of the protrusions is not limited to this. For example, the inclination may be reversed, the ridge may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of a pair of inclination directions, or a combination of ridges with different degrees of inclination may be used. A ridge (a ridge extending on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis or a ridge extending on a plane parallel to (or overlapping) the rotation axis) may be used. Also, the number of protrusions is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.

In addition, the projecting length of the projecting portion is not limited at all. For example, the projecting tip may project until it reaches a circle having the same diameter and coaxial with the rotating shaft of the lid member 480, or the projecting length of the lid member 480 from the advancing/retracting portion 481 may be constant. Also good. In the latter case, the surface connecting the projecting tips of the projecting portions has a shape along the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing/retreating portion 481, so that the same effect as the above-described effect obtained from the shape of the lid member 480 can be obtained from the projecting portion. It can be played by the department.

When the protrusion is formed on the lid member 480, the action timing of the protrusion is not limited to when the granular member 320 stops and the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is accommodated under the lid member 480, the drive motor MT1 is rotated in small increments in the forward and reverse directions when the front side transmission member 440 rotates 66 degrees in the forward rotation direction with reference to the effect standby state. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be vertically displaced in small steps, and the granular member 320 on the collision member 420 can be displaced in small increments. can be vertically displaced.

Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420 , the vertical displacement of the collision member 420 causes the granular member 320 to bounce up and collide with the projecting portion of the lid member 480 . Due to this collision, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be changed, and the stacking of the granular members 320 can be collapsed.

Further, when the collision member 420 flips up the granular member 320 (when displaced upward), the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entrance side, so that the load is easily applied to the granular member 320 via the projecting portion. be able to.

The execution of the forward and reverse rotation of the driving motor MT1 in small increments may be controlled so that the driving force is reversed in the forward and reverse directions, or may be rotated in the forward direction at short time intervals. In this case, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 displaces the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 in the reverse rotation direction via the linear motion member 410, thereby causing the drive motor MT1 to rotate in the reverse direction.

In the above-described first embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advancing/retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane across the left and right. Although the case where the interval between 480 and curved plate portion 312 changes has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the lid member 480 is not flat but has an uneven (wavy shape) shape, and the relative relationship between the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312 causes the lid member to It may be configured such that the interval between 480 and the curved plate portion 312 is changed. Alternatively, the entrance-side end of the advance/retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 may be formed parallel to the axis of the rotation shaft O1.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the contact area between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is secured by changing the inclination angles of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489 has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, a roller member whose posture can be changed may be provided on the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be secured by changing the posture of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

In the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and the plurality of members (the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430, the transmission arm In the situation in which the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, the displacement timing is devised so that all the members are not displaced at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, there may be a timing for displacing all of the plurality of members by the driving force of the drive motor MT1. In this case, the size of the drive motor MT1 to be employed should be slightly increased.

In the above-described first embodiment, the front transmission member 440 contacts the linear motion member 410 to transmit the driving force, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when at least part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material and the projection 414 of the direct-acting member 410 is made of a magnetic material, and a repulsive force is generated therebetween, the front side A load can be transmitted to the direct-acting member 410 when the transmission member 440 and the direct-acting member 410 are not in contact with each other.

For example, the half of the transmission projection 446 in the circumferential direction facing the projection 414 of the direct-acting member 410 is provided with a magnetic material having a magnetic pole that generates an attractive force between itself and the projection 414 . On the other hand, on the opposite half of the circumference, a magnetic material having a magnetic pole that generates a repulsive force with respect to the protrusion 414 is disposed, so that the repulsive force moves the direct-acting member 410 to the lower end position. Since it can be configured to be generated on the side to be maintained at , the load at the start of contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 can be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted at two positions, the grooved portion 442 formed on the front surface of the front transmission member 440 and the grooved portion 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear transmission member 460. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a groove may be formed in the circumferential surface of at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and driving force may be transmitted through this groove to increase the number of driving force transmission targets.

In the first embodiment described above, there is a possibility that it may become unclear whether or not it is time to reversely rotate the front transmission member 440 based on detection by the detection sensor SC4, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor that detects the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is provided, and the detection result of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 determines whether the front side transmission member 440 reversely rotates. You may judge whether it is possible or not. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the firing state has been passed by driving in the forward rotation direction. It can be determined that it is possible.

Although the case where the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by displacement other than rotation (for example, linear slide).

In the above-described first embodiment, by making the shape of the extension claw portion 734 of the effect member 700 different between the upper and lower sides, problems related to the displacement of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 toward the collective arrangement state can be prevented. Although the case where it is configured has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, by varying the shape of the extension claw portion 734, the start timing of the radial expansion displacement can be adjusted to the upper expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 compared to the lower expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. As a result, the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 on the lower side are balanced with the acceleration of the start of displacement due to their own weight. You can make it look like the displacement is starting.

In the above-described first embodiment, by bringing the rotating plate 730 into contact with the telescopic displacement member 740, a load is generated in the radial direction of a circle about the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730. However, this does not necessarily apply to this case. It is not limited. For example, a spring member that applies a biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740 may be disposed to apply the biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740, or a magnet may be disposed to apply a magnetic force to the telescopic displacement member 740. good.

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotating plate 730 is used both as means for transmitting the load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and as means for displacing the telescopic displacement member 740, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, means for applying a load to the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 and means for displacing the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 may be provided separately.

In the first embodiment, when the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is displaced toward the collective arrangement state, the first guided protrusion 743b receives the load first, and the first guided protrusion 743b receives the load radially outward from the first guided protrusion 743b. Although the case where the arranged second guided protrusion 744b receives a load later has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730 may be configured so that the order is reversed, and load transmission to the first guided projection 743b and the second guided projection 744b occur simultaneously. It may be configured as follows.

In the first embodiment described above, the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 has two protrusions, the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one protrusion may be configured to protrude obliquely with respect to the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 730 . In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 , the function of generating a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760 can be generated in one protrusion.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the outer side of the circumference is configured to assist the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 toward the collective arrangement state, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, a protruding portion is formed on the outer circumference of the rotating plate 730, and the protruding portion can push the first guided projection 743b radially outward. It can assist with directed displacement.

In the above-described first embodiment, the lower arm member 630 suppresses the change in posture of the effect member 700 at the lower end position of the displacement, and the degree of change in the posture of the effect member 700 permitted at the upper and lower intermediate positions is reduced. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the degree of allowable change in the posture of the effect member 700 increases toward the displacement lower end position.

Also, although the degree of posture change is configured by increasing or decreasing the position where the force acting on the effect member 700 is generated, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured by increasing or decreasing the area where the acting force is generated.

That is, the contact area between the arc-shaped hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 may be configured to be variable. For example, the thickness (hole depth) of the arcuate hole 634 can be changed by changing the thickness of the tip of the lower arm member 630 for each part, so that the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 can be changed. contact area can be changed.

The degree of posture change of the effect member 700 is not specified only by the connecting position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 . For example, the front surface of the body member 601 facing the pressing member PC1 of the lower arm member 630 or the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 may be provided with unevenness to change the distance from the pressing member PC1. good. In this case, in the process of displacing the lower arm member 630, it is easy to allow the attitude change of the effect member 700 in the front surface of the main body member 601 and in the portion where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is wide. This makes it easier to suppress posture changes in portions where the distance is narrow. Alternatively, the interval may be gradually narrowed as the effect member 700 approaches the end of the descent.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is configured so as not to change, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, a resistance increasing/decreasing device capable of increasing/decreasing the displacement resistance of the relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be provided. The resistance increasing/decreasing device may be a brake device capable of increasing/decreasing frictional resistance, a device increasing/decreasing displacement resistance by magnetic force, or a device projecting to a position where the displacement of the lower arm member 630 can be mechanically regulated. . In the case of a device using magnetic force, it can be easily configured by arranging a magnetic material in a portion (for example, an auxiliary arm portion in which an arc-shaped hole 634 is formed) that is arranged close to the tip side portion of the lower arm member 630 . be able to.

In the above-described first embodiment, the effect member 700 is permitted to undergo a large displacement as a displacement in the expansion direction as the arrangement position moves downward. Although the case in which displacement occurs has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the effect member 700 may be controlled to be displaced in the expanding direction while being displaced in the vertical direction. In this case, by displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in the direction of contracting the effect member 700 (displaced radially inward) while the effect member 700 is displaced downward, the lower arm member 630 moves left and right. It is possible to cancel the influence of the change from the extremely long posture to the vertically long posture, and suppress the change in the posture of the production member 700 in the forward tilting direction.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the effect member 700 is vertically displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided in the central portion of the center frame 86, and the effect members 700 project to the front side of the center frame 86 in a collectively arranged state, and change the state to a discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86, thereby opening. It may be configured to change to a larger state than .

In this case, in order to avoid collision between the glass unit 16 and the effect member 700, it is preferable to form an opening in the front side portion of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second layer of glass unit covering the front side of the glass unit 16 separately from the glass unit 16 covering the front surface of the game area. In addition, from the viewpoint of maintaining the size of the upper tray 17, the glass unit of the second layer is inclined from the same front-rear position as the lower end of the glass unit 16 toward the front as it goes upward. preferred from

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the shielding design member 760 and the tip adjustment member 744 tend to tilt due to the positional relationship of the second elongated member 743 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an urging means such as a spring that generates an urging force is provided between the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744, and the orientation of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is adjusted by the urging force. It may be configured to change. In this case, since the attitude inclination of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be intentionally formed, the effect of the attitude inclination of the distal end adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily exhibited.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a cable tube may be wound around the electrical wiring DK1. In particular, by winding the cable tube around the portion arranged above the base-end through-hole 635a, it is possible to prevent the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 from rubbing against the electrical wiring DK1.

In the first embodiment described above, in the displacing/rotating unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide recess 886, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a driving device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By controlling the operation of the driving device based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be appropriately changed.

In the above-described first embodiment, the electric wiring DK2 is tentatively fastened by being sandwiched between the narrowed portions 871a of the wiring arm members 870, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the electrical wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 with a fixture such as a binding band, or the displacement direction of the electrical wiring DK2 may be restricted.

Moreover, the fastening position of the electrical wiring DK2 can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the electrical wiring DK2 arranged through the connection position between the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a fastening position (for example, a narrowed portion 871a) may be provided on the wiring arm member 870 side of the connection position. , the fastening position may be provided on the vertical slide member 820 side of the connecting position.

Further, the means for fastening the electrical wiring DK2 is not limited to use for the electrical wiring DK2. For example, it may be used to fasten the electric wiring DK1 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600. FIG. That is, by narrowing the width of a portion of the placement portion 635 in which the electrical wiring DK1 is arranged, the electrical wiring DK1 may be sandwiched to limit the displacement. Alternatively, the electrical wiring DK1 may be temporarily fixed with a fastener such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the placement portion 635 as the wiring path of the electrical wiring DK1.

In this case, the target to which the electrical wiring DK1 is temporarily fastened may be the lower arm member 630 including the arrangement portion 635, or the effect member 700 arranged on the tip side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. However, the body member 601 or the front cover member 610 disposed on the base end side (other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the rear case 510 to which the body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

In the first embodiment, in the displacement/rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in the direction (front-rear direction) toward and away from the up-down, left-right plane in association with the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 on the up-down, left-right, plane. Although the case where it does is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the lateral slide member 840 is displaced on the front, rear, left, and right plane, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the vertical direction. It is good also as the direction which inclines and is displaced.

Although the relationship between the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b in the displacement/rotation unit 800 has been described in the first embodiment, the relationship is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may be configured to have the same diameter.

In the first embodiment described above, in the displacement/rotation unit 800, the electric wiring DK2 is spirally displaced at the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of arm members whose posture can be changed along with the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b, and electrical wiring is passed through the plurality of arm members. Thus, the arrangement of the electrical wiring may be changed by changing the posture of the arm member.

In the above-described first embodiment, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced in the displacing/rotating unit 800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be arranged apart from each other.

In this case, by disposing a driving device such as a solenoid for displacing the wiring arm member 870, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Therefore, for example, by further separating the wiring arm member 870 from the vertical slide member 820 during rotational displacement of the feather-shaped member 854, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced if necessary even while the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. It can be driven and controlled as follows.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the effect member 700 of the enlargement/reduction unit 600 changes its state to the extended state or enlarged state while the displacing/rotating unit 800 is in the effect waiting state. do not have. For example, when the vane-shaped member 854 of the displacing/rotating unit 800, which has the same position in the longitudinal direction with respect to the effect member 700, is arranged in the gap between the shielding design members 760 of the effect member 700 in the discrete state, the effect member 700 can be changed to the expanded state.

In this case, collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement/rotation unit 800 can be avoided, and it is possible to avoid predicting a state change of the effect member 700 from the arrangement of the displacement/rotation unit 800 . In this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical arrangement of the vane member 854 of the displacement/rotation unit 800 .

In the first embodiment described above, the intermediate flow path LM1 has the same shape as the guide path DL1, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a flow path that bends with a longer lateral width than the guide path DL1, may bend in the front-rear direction, or may be formed as a flow path that extends vertically without bending. .

In the above-described first embodiment, the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured as a path through which the ball that enters the second winning hole 640 flows down, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be used as a path for a ball entering the general winning opening 63, may be used as a path for a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, or may be used in combination. good. Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be configured as a sphere path passing through the out port 71 .

Further, since the winning openings 63, 64, 640, 65 are set at arbitrary positions within the game area, the middle flow path LM1 can also be set arbitrarily. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be arranged on the left side of the game area.

Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 is not limited to being arranged on the back side of the game area. For example, they may be arranged side by side on the left and right of the game area, or may be arranged on the front side of the game area (inside the glass unit 16, etc.). Also in this case, it is preferable that the intermediate flow path LM1 has a section that flows down along the path in the front view of the ball that flows down the game area.

Further, for the purpose of bringing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 into the field of view of the player, it is sufficient that the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to be closer to the left-right center side of the game area. Therefore, a route that does not reach the inside of the center frame 86 when viewed from the front may be used.

In the above-described first embodiment, a description has been given of the case where the electrical boards of the horizontal board unit 166 are arranged in a posture in which the thickness direction coincides with the vertical direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, like the hemispherical lighting device 613, the illumination board may be arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

Also, the entire range of the electrical board is not limited to that covered by the first decorative member 171 . For example, a part of the electrical board may not be shielded, and the light emitted from the light emitting means such as an LED may be directly visible.

In the above-described third embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement start timing of the expansion/contraction displacement member 740 is changed by changing the shape of the guide hole 733, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the shape of the guide hole 733 in a stepped shape, it may be configured such that a section in which the elastic displacement member 740 is displaced and a section in which it stops alternately occur.

Further, by fixing the stepped guide holes 733 to some of the guide holes 733, the shielding design member 760 can be displaced so as to approach or abut on different displacement trajectories or different displacement timings.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 arranged on the left and right sides of the firing effect unit 6300 are provided with a plurality of decorative substrates has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, the horizontally placed board unit 166 and the vertically placed board unit 167 of the light guide plate rendering means 160 may employ a configuration of a plurality of decorative boards. In addition, the portion corresponding to the oblong groove portion 171a of the decoration means 170 (the left and right long portion) is configured so as to have good light transmission, and the oblong groove portion 171a is adopted as an intersection position of a plurality of electrical decoration substrates. By arranging a light emitting means such as an LED, it may be configured such that light can be visually recognized through the oblong groove portion 171a.

In addition, from the viewpoint of increasing the irradiation direction of light, it is not limited to the case of using a plurality of rigid electrical boards. For example, a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board) may be provided with light emitting means such as an LED. In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions by winding the flexible substrate or fixing it at parts. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the surface of the flexible substrate can be directed in various directions, and the number of light irradiation directions can be increased. Also, in this case, it can be configured with a single substrate.

In each of the above-described embodiments, regardless of whether the number of configurations is singular or plural, the configuration may be omitted (if there are multiple configurations, the number of configurations may be reduced). Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the key device A130 has two protrusions A133b, but the number of protrusions A133b may be reduced to one. Similarly, in each of the above embodiments, the case where one key device A130 is arranged in the main control device A110 has been described, but the number of such key devices A130 (the number of arrangement) may be increased to two or more. .

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the arrangement position of each configuration with respect to other configurations, the arrangement direction (orientation, posture, phase) of each configuration with respect to other configurations, or the arrangement based on the other configuration of each configuration You can change the order of The order of arrangement may be changed for all configurations, or only some configurations may be exchanged. That is, the arrangement position, arrangement direction, and order of arrangement of each component are arbitrary.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (key device A130) is located on one side (first connection wall A220 side) of the center in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall A210 (second region). However, the opening A260 (key device A130) may be arranged in the longitudinal center of the operation wall A210 (second area). It may be arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the side of the third connecting wall portion A240).

Further, for example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the key device A130 (coating portion A270) connects the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusion A271b) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L , R direction), but the direction connecting the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusions A271b) is the operation wall A210 ( The arrangement direction (posture, phase) parallel to the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L, R) of the second region), and the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L, R) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) and a predetermined The key device A130 (coating part A270) may be arranged in an arrangement direction (posture, phase) having an angle of (larger than 0° and smaller than 90°).

Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (coating portion A270), the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening AOP1 are arranged in order from the side closer to the first connecting wall portion A220. For example, the order of arranging the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (the covering portion A270) in order from the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 is opposite to the order of arrangement in each of the above embodiments. ), and the order of arrangement of only a part may be changed (for example, the order of arrangement in which the opening AOP1 is positioned between the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) is exemplified. is done).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 protrudes from the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height position as the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is provided. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

In the above embodiments, the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall A210, and the opening A260 is formed in the covering portion A270 (end wall portion A272). may be formed at the site of That is, it does not need to be formed on the lowered portion of the outer surface of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100. Other parts include, for example, the parts forming the outer surfaces of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100 and A4100, that is, the front wall A201, upper wall A202, lower wall A203 and left wall of the box covers A200 and A3200. Examples include A204 or right wall A205, back wall A301, upper wall A302, lower wall A303, left wall A304 or right wall A305 of box base A300. Moreover, similarly, as another part, the 1st connection wall part A220, the 2nd connection wall part A230, or the 3rd connection wall part A240 is illustrated, for example.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 protrudes from the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height position as the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used by the operation wall portion A210), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271 is provided. It may be provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

In this case, the switch device A120 may extend the length dimension of the operation portion A122 to a position protruding from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. In addition, it is preferable to provide the guide wall A251 also on the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 along with the extension of the length dimension of the operation portion A122.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a recess is formed in the outer surface (front face) of the box covers A200 and A3200, and the portion forming the recessed bottom surface of the recess is the operation wall A210 (that is, the front wall A201 (when the operation wall A210 is positioned at the lower position (on the side of the main controller A110)), but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer surface (for example, the front) of the box covers A200 and A3200 A projecting portion may be formed, and the portion forming the projecting tip surface of the projecting portion may be used as the operation wall portion A210 (that is, the operation is performed at a position one step higher than the front wall portion A201 (on the side opposite to the main controller A110). position the wall A210).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the main controller 100 is housed in the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and at least the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 Any item can be stored as long as the manipulator can be operated through the opening. For example, it may be one that does not have an electrical configuration. For example, such a storage item has a connecting portion connected to an open/close lid that opens and closes a discharge port for discharging balls from the ball flow path, and the open/close lid is operated by operating the connecting portion as an operator. A member (structure, device) that opens and closes is exemplified.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation means (the switch device A120, the key device A130) has been described as a case where a push button switch or a key-operated selector switch is employed. You may adopt the operation means of. Other types of operating means include, for example, tactile switches, rocker switches, dip switches, thumb rotary switches, toggle switches, and the like.

In each of the above embodiments, the operating mode of the operator (operation unit A122, key A140) is described as pushing and rotating. Any operation mode may be employed as long as it is arranged so as to be operable through the openings (the openings A250 and A260 in each of the above-described embodiments). Other modes of operation include pull-out, slide, seesaw displacement (for example, a mode in which the operation button is displaced like a seesaw by alternately pressing both ends like the operation button of a rocker switch), tilting (for example, toggle A mode in which the operation lever is displaced so as to fall to one side with the base end side as a fulcrum, like an operation lever of a switch, is exemplified.

In this case, the sliding direction of the manipulator, the direction connecting both ends of the seesaw-displaced manipulator, and the tilting direction of the tilting manipulator are in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows L and R) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). It is preferable to dispose the operating means in a parallel posture. This is because the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second area) can be effectively used to improve the operability of the operation means.

In any of the operation modes described above, the front view shape of the openings A250 and A260 is assumed to be a shape formed only in a region corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the manipulator (a region necessary for allowing displacement). Also good.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case where a predetermined gap is formed between the surface and end surface of the key A140 gripped by fingers and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b) has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. In a state where no external force is applied to the key A140 or the key device A130, at least one of the surface or the end surface of the key A140 gripped by fingers and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (annular The outer edge of the portion A272a or the rectangular portion A272b may be in contact. That is, at least one of the finger gripped surface and the end surface of the key A140 in the OFF position or ON position is brought into contact with the end wall portions A272, A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a or the square portion A272b), and the key A140 is operated. When (rotated), the end surface of the key A140 may slide against the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a).

The gap between the surface and end surface of the key A140 gripped by fingers and the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b), and the gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the covering portion A270. The gap between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the erected wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is such that the inclination of the key device A130 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 is a specified angle (an angle that allows the inclination of the key device A130 That is, it is set to a value at which at least one of the gaps disappears (the key A140 or the key device A130 abuts) before reaching the angle at which the leg A131 is unlikely to come off, be damaged, or the solder peels off. . The specified angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, and even more preferably 5 degrees or less. In this embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two locations in the circumferential direction. , A133b may be formed at only one position, or at three or more positions. Moreover, when forming in two or more places, those circumferential directions positions (phase) are arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as in each of the above embodiments, or may be formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed intermittently in the circumferential direction. , A133b may be formed continuously in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the projection A271b of the covering portion A270 and the projection A133b of the key device A130 project radially outward, and the projection A133b of the device A130 is arranged in the space formed by the projection A271b. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which a concave recess is provided, and the projection of the covering portion A270 is arranged in the internal space of the recess of the key device A130. In this case, if the recess is continued to the end surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) of the base A133a (the projection It is only necessary to form an opening in the end face for inserting the part into the recess).

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. may be concatenated.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where two protrusions (the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212) are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described, but the number of protrusions formed is not necessarily limited to this. , may be one, or three or more. When forming a plurality of wires, the connection position between one end thereof and the covering portion A270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect other protrusions at positions that are substantially 180 degrees out of phase with the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. This is because the load input from the key A140 in the off position/on position to the covering portion A270 can be efficiently received.

In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212, the other protrusions, the height dimension of the cross-sectional shape (the standing dimension from the front surface of the operation wall A210 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) ) and the width dimension (the dimension in the direction perpendicular to the height direction of the vanishing cross section) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the shape of the end surface include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, and a combination of these shapes. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and either one may have a larger value.

In each of the above embodiments, the height dimension of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (standing dimension from the front of the operation wall portion A210 (surface on the arrow F direction side)) is along the extension direction Although a case has been described in which the width is constant along the extending direction, the width is not necessarily limited to this, and may be varied along the extending direction.

It should be noted that the height dimension may be configured to gradually decrease as the distance from the one end connected to the covering portion A270 increases. In this case, the rigidity of the covering portion A270 can be efficiently increased while reducing the material cost.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the rotation angle (phase difference between the ON position and the OFF position) of the key A140 is set to 90° has been described. phase difference). That is, the rotation angle of the key A140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90° or may be set to an angle larger than 90°.

In this case, the shape of the opening A260 (the shape of the edge of the end wall portion A272) corresponds to the displacement trajectory of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is preferably formed only in (regions necessary to allow displacement). That is, when the rotation angle of the key A140 is θ, the opening A260 is a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, A second fan-shaped opening having a center angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of the portion on the other side (the side opposite to the one side) of the rotation center of the key A140 is coupled with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees. It is formed into a shape.

In each of the above embodiments, the key A140 has a radius of rotation (distance from the center of rotation to the end face (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by fingers)) on one side of the center of rotation, and Although the description has been given of the case where the radius of rotation of the other side is different, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The distance to the narrow surface) along the outer edge of the surface) may be substantially the same. That is, the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening of the opening A260 may have substantially the same size (radius).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the front view shape of the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a substantially horizontally elongated rectangle (rectangular shape) has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and other front view shapes may be used. good. Other shapes in front view include, for example, a substantially square shape, a substantially circular shape, a substantially elliptical shape, a substantially triangular shape, a substantially polygonal shape with five or more sides, and a shape combining these shapes.

In each of the above embodiments, the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (box covers A200, A3200). It is not limited and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, they may be substantially orthogonal (that is, the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 may be along the directions of arrows U and D).

In each of the above embodiments, part of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 (three sides in each of the above embodiments) is connected to the connection walls (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230 and the third connection wall). A240) and the remaining portion of the outer edge (one side in each of the above embodiments) is not surrounded (opened), but this is not necessarily the case. The entire outer edge of the operation wall A210 may be surrounded by the connection wall.

That is, in the front view of the box covers A200 and A3200, in each of the above-described embodiments, the operation wall A210 is positioned at a position where a part of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 coincides with a part of the outer edge of the box covers A200 and A3200. is arranged (formed), the operation wall A210 may be arranged (formed) at a position where the outer edges of the operation wall A210 do not match the outer edges of the box covers A200 and A3200.

In each of the above embodiments, the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (the guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (the covering portion A270) are arranged substantially in series (substantially in one row). Other arrangements may be used. Examples of other arrangements include a staggered arrangement, an arrangement distributed to positions having no regularity, and a grid arrangement (arrangement at intersections of a plurality of mutually orthogonal straight lines). When they are arranged substantially in series (substantially in one row), the direction of the series may be non-parallel to the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (box covers A200 and A3200), or may be substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. can be

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front surfaces of the end wall portions A272 and A2272 (surfaces in the direction of the arrow F) are formed as flat surfaces has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the end wall portions A272 and A2272 One or a plurality of protrusions or ribs may be erected from the front surface of (the surface on the arrow F direction side).

In this case, the ridge (rib) (for example, a portion formed by extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular or substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape) is, when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B), the end wall It is preferable to extend radially outward from the center of the portions A272 and A2272 (the axis of the peripheral wall portion A271). Moreover, it is preferable that a plurality of such ridges (ribs) are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. As a result, when the key A140 is pulled out, the key A140 engages with the edges of the end wall portions A272 and A2272, and even if the end wall portions A272 and A2272 are lifted in the direction in which the key A140 is pulled out (direction of arrow F), This is because damage to the end wall portions A272 and A2272 can be suppressed by utilizing the rigidity of the ridges (ribs).

Alternatively, the ridges (ribs) may be formed in an annular shape continuous in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front. A plurality of such protrusions (ribs) may be arranged with different diameters (that is, at predetermined intervals in the radial direction). In addition, it may be intermittent (non-continuous) in the circumferential direction.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the height position of the upright end face of the upright wall A209 is set back from the height position of the upright end face of the upright walls A208, A280, and A290 (that is, from the printed circuit board A119). However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the other standing walls A208, A280, A290 may be retreated.

Further, the amount of retreat of each standing wall A208, A209, A280 and A290 from the reference plane may be different from the amount of retreat from the reference plane of the other standing walls A208, A209, A280 and A290. Furthermore, in one standing wall A208, A209, A280, A290, the retreat amount may be changed.

In this case, it is preferable that the farther the erected wall is from the fastening hole A206a, the smaller the receding amount of the erected tip surface from the reference plane. In the printed circuit board A119, the area farther from the fastening hole A206a is less regulated by the screw ASC than the area closer to the fastening hole A206a. It becomes easy to deform (displace) in the direction to move toward the front of the printed circuit board A119, and the degree of adhesion to the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 is weakened. This is because it is possible to easily ensure close contact between the upright end surface of the upright wall and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 in all the upright walls.

For example, in the present embodiment, assuming that the standing tip surface of the standing wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is the reference plane, the fastening hole A206a ( Since the distance from the erected wall A209) increases, the amount of retreat from the above-described reference plane is decreased in this order according to the distance from the fastening hole A206a (that is, the erected tip surface of the erected wall A208 is preferably minimized from the reference plane).

Further, each standing wall A208, A209, A280, and A290 may be changed so that the amount of retreat from the reference plane described above decreases as the distance from the fastening hole A206a increases. That is, the erected end surfaces of the erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may be inclined with respect to the front wall portions A201 of the box covers A200 and A3200, respectively.

In each of the above-described embodiments, in the setting change mode, the case where the set value is displayed on at least one of the third pattern display device 81 or the 7-segment display has been described, but this is not necessarily the case, and instead Alternatively, or in addition, it may be displayed on another display device. Other display devices include, for example, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the like.

Moreover, the configuration may be such that the set value is not displayed on either the third pattern display device 81 or the 7-segment display.

In this case, when the setting change mode is activated, the set value is updated to a predetermined initial value (for example, the first value) regardless of the set value before activation, and the operation portion A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed. A configuration may be adopted in which the operator recognizes the set value based on the number of times. Unauthorized acquisition of setting values by unauthorized means (for example, means for photographing the display of the third pattern display device 81 with a hidden camera installed in the hall) can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the setting value when changing the setting during the game. In this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

Although not described in each of the above embodiments, a first detection sensor is provided to detect the relative position of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 (rotational position about the hinge 18). When the first detection sensor detects that the frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the setting change described above is permitted, and the inner frame 12 is opened by a predetermined angle or more with respect to the outer frame 11. If the opening (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, the setting change may be prohibited (for example, input from the switch device A120 or the key device A130 may be disabled). . This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes.

A second detection sensor is provided to detect the relative positions of the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 (rotational positions about the rotation axis A410). , A2100, A3100, and A4100 are opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-described setting change is prohibited (for example, switch device A120 or key device input from A130 is invalidated) and opening (rotation) of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 by a predetermined angle or more is not detected by the second detection sensor, the setting change is performed. It may be configured to allow. This is because it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes.

Both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one of them may be provided (the other may be omitted). When both are provided, the opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle or more is detected by the first detection sensor, and the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 are detected by the predetermined angle. The above-described setting change may be allowed when the second detection sensor does not detect the opening (rotation) beyond the angle. Examples of the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor include a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle and a limit switch whose mechanical detection portion is displaced when opened or closed.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) is connected to the main controller A110, the switch device A120 and the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110), but this is not necessarily the case. , and the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 to the main controller A110. That is, as long as at least the power supply device 115 is connected to the main controller A110 by an electrical connection line, regardless of the connection state of the other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected or disconnected) , connection and disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be permitted. In this case, the set value associated with the setting change cannot be confirmed on the third pattern display device 81, but can be confirmed on the 7-segment display of the main controller A110.

In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) is connected to the main controller A110, the switch device A120 and the case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, if a predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the main control device A110, the setting change is prohibited), but this is not necessarily the case. However, if a predetermined electrical connection line is not disconnected from the main controller A110, regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, even if it is connected, it is disconnected) (Even if connection and disconnection are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not permitted (that is, if a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110 setting change is prohibited). Also in this case, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

For example, the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the predetermined electrical connection line. According to this, since the power supply of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 from operating illegally and the game balls from being paid out.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the projecting ridges A2273 extend in a stripe shape has been described as the form of the portion protruding from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end wall portion A2272, but this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to For example, a plurality of protrusions may be arranged side by side at predetermined intervals between positions AP1 to AP6 including positions AP2 to AP5. Alternatively, the protrusion A2273 may be intermittently formed between positions AP1 to AP6 including positions AP2 to AP5.

The range in which the ridge A2273 or the plurality of protrusions are formed is not limited to the range from the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the positions AP2 to AP5, and the range may be reduced or expanded. . Such a range may be the entire outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the rectangular portion A272b.

In the ninth embodiment, the board box A3100 rotates around the rotation axis A410 to move to the second position (the position where the front of the operation wall A210 faces the front of the pachinko machine A3010, as shown in FIG. 122 ( Although the case where it is arranged in b) is explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is of course possible to adopt other displacement forms.

As another form of displacement, for example, the substrate box is arranged so as to be slidable in the width direction (directions of arrows L and R) with respect to the inner frame 12, and is slidably displaced in the direction opposite to the hinge 18 (direction of arrow L). By doing so, the board box is arranged at the second position, the rotation axis A410 is formed as an axis along the front-rear direction (arrow F, B direction) of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12), and the rotation axis A mode in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position by being displaced (rotated) around A410 is exemplified.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A4410 is formed in each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub-cover A500 has been described. It may be formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. In this case, each of the box covers A200 and A3200 and the box base A300 is provided with a division of the rotation axis A4410. A4410 may be formed.

The seventh to ninth embodiments are the same, and the case where the rotation axis A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400 has been described. can be Further, as in the case described above, in a state where the box covers A200 and A3200 are connected to the box base A300, one rotary shaft A410 may be formed from divisions formed respectively.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 rubs against the upper extending portions B1312 and B1512 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an opening may be provided on the side of the covering member B1200, and the front side surfaces of the upper extending portions B1312 and B1512 may protrude forward to a dimension that allows entry into the opening. In this case, it is possible to stabilize the vertical positions of the downstream ends of the guide members B1310 and B1510 by engagement (fitting) instead of frictional resistance.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are partially assembled from the front side of the thin plate member B1110, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the shape of the penetrating portion B1120 is such that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 including the upwardly extending portions B1312 and B1512 can be inserted forward and backward, so that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be assembled on the back surface of the thin plate member B1110. can be completed on the side.

Also, the upper extending portions B1312 and B1512 may be configured to be disassembled from the guide members B1310 and B1510. As a result, the portions that require assembly from the front side of the thin plate member B1110 are limited to the upwardly extending portions B1312 and B1512, which are likely to be subjected to a collision load from the ball and are more likely to be damaged than other portions. can do. In this way, by assembling only the parts that are likely to be damaged from the front side, maintainability can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the opening order of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is alternated and the case where one of them is opened is explained, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, other variations may be prepared in which the ratio of the round sections to be opened alternately and the round section to which one side is continuously opened is changed.

For example, the 1st to 8th rounds may be alternately opened, and the 9th to 15th rounds may be opened only by the first guide plate B1300. In this case, an operation pattern having half of the characteristics of each operation pattern (the number of balls paid out, the round game time, the number of loose balls, etc.) can be used.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the protrusions B1140 and B1211 are equally spaced horizontally and the length of the protrusions is changed, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the projection length may be the same, but a section may be provided in which the arrangement interval is changed, or the projection length may be the same and the arrangement interval may be equal. The protrusions B1140 and B1211 may be designed according to the desired deceleration mode.

In the eleventh embodiment, the projections B1140 and B1211 are arranged at a height that does not come into contact with the ball rolling in the lower part of the pre-entering range, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the height may be such that it grazes the vicinity of the upper end of the sphere. In this case, the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 are made to function as protruding portions that have a large deceleration effect on the ball when tilted on one side (for example, when tilted toward the lower right), and when tilted on the other side (for example, when tilted toward the lower left). ), it can function as a protrusion that has a small decelerating effect on the ball.

The deceleration section is configured by the shape of the portion that abuts the game ball (addition of a protrusion projecting inward of the guide path or change in inclination of the guide path). In that respect, the protruding portions B1140 and B1211 are not limited to protruding in the front-rear direction. For example, the upper end portion of the extended support portion B1212 may protrude upward from the lower end positions of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521.

The preferable configuration of the deceleration section differs depending on the displacement mode of the member that guides the ball. For example, in the case of a member that is linearly displaceable, it is easy to add a projecting portion and change the inclination of the rolling surface. Further, for example, if the member is rotationally displaced so as to protrude from the width direction of the guide path, it is easy to add a protrusion, but the change in inclination reduces the degree of freedom in design due to the relationship with the rotation axis. Further, for example, in the case of a member that is rotationally displaced so as to protrude from the longitudinal direction of the guide path, the degree of freedom tends to be low because it is necessary to avoid the displacement trajectory of the displaced member when adding the protrusion. However, the degree of freedom in designing changes in inclination is high.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where a plurality of detection sensors are arranged in one variable prize winning device B1000 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, part of the configuration of the variable winning device B1000 may be used to configure a variable winning device that guides the ball to a single detection sensor.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, both guide plates B1300 and B1500 have a structure in which there is a gap in the middle, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a gap may be formed only on one side, and the other side may be composed of a single plate without forming a gap.

In the eleventh embodiment, both the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 have the connection fixing members B1330 and B1530 formed in a block shape, and a space is provided between the front and rear portions. However, this is not necessarily the case. Not. For example, by removing the portion overlapping the connecting fixing member B1330 in the front view from the connecting fixing member B1530 and configuring the connecting fixing member B1530 as an L-shaped member in the front view, the connecting fixing member B1530 can be replaced with the connecting fixing member B1330. It may be possible to arrange it directly above.

That is, in the standby state, the connecting fixing members B1330 and B1530 may be arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction. In this case, the front-to-rear width required for arranging the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be shortened.

In the eleventh embodiment, the extended support portion B1212 fills the gap between the guide members B1310, B1510 and the upstream members B1320, B1520. Formation of the extended support portion B1212 may be omitted. In this case, the gaps between the guide members B1310, B1510 and the upstream members B1320, B1520 become steps, and although the flow of the ball is slightly disturbed, the ball can be guided to the detection sensors B1230, B1250 without any problem. In addition, by omitting the formation of the extended support portion B1212 and utilizing the empty space, the ends of the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 are extended to narrow the gap. flow turbulence can be minimized.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, in the guide plates B1300 and B1500, the relative positions of the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 do not change, and only forward and backward movement occurs, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, the upstream members B1320 and B1520 may be connected to the connection fixing members B1330 and B1530 so as to be displaceable in the left-right direction. In this case, the upstream members B1320 and B1520 can be configured to be displaced so as to approach the guide members B1310 and B1510 according to the longitudinal displacement of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. As a result, even though the guide plates B1300 and B1500 intersect when viewed from the front, the gap generated at the intersecting position can be closed by laterally displacing the upstream members B1320 and B1520, so the formation of the extended support portion B1212 is omitted. be able to.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched from the open state to the closed state, the upwardly extending portions B1312 and B1512 are arranged upstream of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 to prevent the ball from entering. Cut off. In this case, the upper extending portions B1312 and B1512 are configured to be displaced from the front side to the back side of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. Therefore, since the direction of the load applied to the sphere from the upwardly extending portions B1312 and B1512 is toward the rear side, the sphere to which the load is applied from the upwardly extending portions B1312 and B1512 that are being displaced first moves toward the thin plate of the base member B1100. The ball collides with the member B1110, and the ball whose momentum is reduced by the bounce collides with the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 that constitutes the design surface.

Therefore, the load applied to the main body member B1210 can be reduced, and problems such as cracking of the design surface can be easily avoided, but the displacement of the upwardly extending portions B1312 and B1512 is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, when the upwardly extending portions B1312 and B1512 block entry of a ball, they may be configured to be displaced from the back side to the front side. In this case, when the inner edges of the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 are configured to be flush with the plate surface of the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100, the ball can be blocked early.

It should be noted that the manner in which the member blocking the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 is displaced from the back side to the front side is not limited at all. For example, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 may be configured to be displaced to the front side when switching to the closed state, or the upward extending portions B1312 and B1512 may be configured separately from the guide plates B1300 and B1500. However, the upper extending portions B1312 and B1512 may be configured to be displaced to the front side as the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced to the back side when switching to the closed state.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the extended support portion B1212 and the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521 are flush with each other has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the lower ends of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521 may be positioned lower than the upper end of the extended support portion B1212. In this case, the upper end portion of the extended support portion B1212 forms a step (step) with respect to the ball rolling on the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521, and this step can reduce the falling velocity of the ball.

That is, the protrusions such as the protrusions B1140 and B1211 that decelerate the flow velocity of the ball by contact with the ball are not limited to those projecting from the front-rear direction of the flow-down path. It may be configured to protrude upward from the lower surface. In addition, projecting parts B1140 and B1211 are described as an example of a mode projecting downward from the upper side of the flow-down path of the ball.

For example, the lower ends of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521 may be positioned higher than the upper end of the extended support portion B1212. In this case, the upstream members B1320 and B1520 form a step (step) with respect to the extended support portion B1212, and this step causes the balls to flow backward from the downstream side of the lower ends of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521. It is possible to prevent running on the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521. Therefore, the ball can be smoothly guided to the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002.

In this way, the extended support part B1212 is always arranged in the range before the ball enters the ball even when the first opening/closing plate B1300 and the second opening/closing plate B1500 are closed. Depending on the design of the arrangement with respect to the surfaces B1321 and B1521, it can be used as a means for slowing down the downflow of the spheres or as a means for preventing the backflow of the spheres.

In the twelfth embodiment, the rolling surface B2531 is configured to be horizontal with respect to the front-rear direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface B2531 may be inclined forward and backward. At this time, for example, by inclining downward toward the back side, the ball can be dropped smoothly when switching to the closed state, so that the opening/closing rod B2500 can be smoothly displaced.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the balls are sorted to the left and right by the sorting device B1800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mechanism for alternately distributing balls to the left and right may be provided on the upstream side of the variable prize winning device B1000, or may be configured such that the balls are distributed by a movable body that performs a constant operation when the power is turned on. Also, the sorting mechanism on the upstream side of the variable winning device B1000 may be omitted.

Moreover, although the example in which the ball can enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260 only when the solenoid is de-energized and the sorting device B1800 is raised has been described, the reverse is also possible. For example, the sorting device B1800 is configured to rise when any solenoid is energized. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from winning the ball guidance receiving portion B1260 during normal operation or during time saving.

The ball guide receiving portion B1260 may be arranged upstream of the sorting device B1800. Also, the ball guide receiving portion B1260 may be omitted. In this case, the time efficiency of progress of the special game state can be improved. In addition, it may be constructed so that the ball can enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260 in either direction of the sorting device B1800 in the downstream path. The distribution device B1800 is not limited to cutting 100% of the paths of the spheres. For example, the nail may have a similar function, such as 80% splitting.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the extended support portion B1212 is fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the extended support portion B1212 may be movable. In this case, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 may be configured to operate in conjunction with each other (for example, by being pushed).

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the pre-entering range is about the same as the game area is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured long in the front-rear direction (it may be configured with a length that is twice or more the diameter of the sphere). In this case, even if they cross each other when viewed from the front, they can be separated in the front and rear directions when viewed from the top. Therefore, it does not need to be placed directly above. In other words, by intersecting, even in a game area with a front-to-rear width of 19 mm, it is possible to lengthen both the left and right lengths of the guide flow paths to the ball entrances arranged on the left and right sides. On the other hand, if the front-rear width is such that two balls can be arranged in the front-rear direction, it is possible to arrange a plurality of specific winning holes with small vertical widths without crossing each other.

In the eleventh embodiment, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 both protrude from the back side to the front side. You can do it.

In the eleventh embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball aimed at the upper part of the pre-entering range is decelerated more than a ball aimed at the lower part of the pre-entering range, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, by omitting the formation of the protruding portion B1140, etc., the ball hit in the upper part of the pre-entering range (tilt upstream side) is accelerated, and the ball hit in the lower part of the pre-entering range (tilt downstream side) is accelerated. , may be configured to slow down due to reversal of the horizontal direction.

In the twelfth embodiment, the design is based on the assumption that the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing rod B2500 operate independently, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, since the displacement trajectory BE11 and the displacement trajectory BE12 partially overlap, when the interval between rounds is shortened in order to prevent a loose ball, the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing bar B2500 come into contact and operate in relation to each other. It may be designed in consideration of the possibility that there is a case where it is (interlocked).

For example, when the connecting portion B2530 is displaced toward the open state before the switching of the open/close plate B2300 from the open state to the closed state is completed, the connecting portion B2530 is engaged with the lower side portion of the plate portion B2310. This may cause malfunction of the opening/closing plate B2300.

On the other hand, the opening/closing plate B2300 is provided with a hemispherically protruding preceding collision portion that protrudes toward the opening/closing rod B2500 from the left/right central portion of the pivot tip side of the plate portion B2310. A hemispherical preceding collision portion projecting from the left-right central portion of B2530 toward the opening/closing plate B2300 may be formed, and these preceding collision portions may be arranged so as to collide with each other.

By configuring each preceding collision portion as a portion that approaches the mating member ahead of other constituent members, the preceding collision portions collide with each other before the connecting portion B2530 engages with the lower side portion of the plate portion B2310. be able to.

If the load due to the collision between the preceding collision parts is generated in the direction of displacing the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing rod B2500 toward the closed state, the opening/closing plate B2300 or the opening/closing rod B2500 is switched to the closed state. Even if the opening/closing rod B2500 or the opening/closing plate B2300 starts to be displaced toward the open state, the opening/closing rod B2500 or the opening/closing plate B2300 that is switched toward the open state does not apply a load to the opening/closing plate B2300 or B2500 that is displaced toward the closed state. By giving it, you can promote state switching.

As a result, the interval between rounds becomes too short, and before one of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing rod B2500 forms the closed state, the other member starts to be displaced toward the open state. Even if a collision occurs, the load due to the collision acts only to push one member toward the closed state, and malfunction of the opening/closing plate B2300 and the opening/closing rod B2500 can be avoided.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of problems occurring when the inter-round interval is set short, and it is possible to facilitate the execution of control to set the inter-round interval short enough to avoid a falling ball. can. The shape and arrangement of the preceding collision portion can be arbitrarily set. For example, the spill prevention section B2524 may function as a preceding collision section.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the opening/closing plate B2300 is displaced toward the open state is upward displacement (raising displacement) about the upper side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the open state may be obtained by downward displacement (tilting displacement) about the lower side from the upright closed state, and the upper surface in the open state may be used as the falling surface (rolling surface) of the ball.

In this case, it is preferable to form a recess large enough to allow the ball to enter in the back side of the opening/closing plate in the closed state, and to dispose the detection sensor downstream of the recessed portion. When the opening/closing plate is switched to the closed state when the ball is on the upper side surface of the opening/closing plate in the open state, the ball on the opening/closing plate can be drawn into the recessed part without spilling.

In the twelfth embodiment, the opening/closing plate B2300 that is displaced to the front side when switching to the open state and the opening/closing bar B2500 that is displaced to the back side when switching to the open state are used to move the ball in the pre-entry range. Although the case where the flow mode can be switched has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the member displaced to the front side may be configured as a member having the same configuration as the opening/closing bar B2500.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the rolling surfaces B2311 of the opening/closing plate B2300 are formed in a planar shape with the same inclination has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the rolling surface may be formed in a mountain shape, and the inclination angle may change along the way. In this case, depending on the shape of the rolling surface, the degree of deceleration of the ball can be varied.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the right arm portion B2520 is formed in the same shape as the left arm portion B2510 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the shape of the right arm portion B2520 can be set arbitrarily. . For example, the right arm portion B2520 may be formed in the shape of a straight bar, or may be in a J-shape that curves in the opposite direction to the curve of the left arm portion B2510. In this case, in the closed state of the opening/closing rod B2500, the right arm portion B2520 can be separated from the downflow path of the ball rolling toward the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. This can reduce the possibility of hindering the flow of the ball flowing down along the rolling surface B2311 of the opening/closing plate B2300.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the flow path branches to the left and right with the center frame 86 as a boundary has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, on either the left or right side of the center frame 86 (for example, on the right side), a partition may be provided to divide the flow path of the balls. In this case, on either the left or right side of the center frame 86, a plurality of flow-down paths for the balls can be formed.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the first guide plate B3300 and the first rotating member B3700 are driven by the single first driving device B1400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a driving device for driving the first guide plate B3300 and a driving device for driving the first rotating member B3700 may be provided separately, and the displacement timings may be matched by control.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the guide plates B3300 and B3500 guide the ball in the upper part of the pre-entering range, and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 guide the ball in the lower part of the pre-entering range. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide plate and the rotating member are configured with a length that spans the left and right of the range before entering the ball, the guide plate guides the first detection sensor B1230 to the opening, and the guide plate guides the second detection sensor B1250 to the opening. It may be configured to be performed by a rotating member.

In this case, the rotating member may be configured to tilt further by switching to the closed state. In this case, switching to the open state causes the rotating member to move in the direction of displacement in which the balls are rescued, so that the number of loose balls can be reduced.

Also, the rotating members arranged on the left and right may be configured to have a length covering the left and right of the pre-entering range. In this case, in order to prevent a collision near the crossing position, it is configured to have a recessed portion that is recessed from the rotation distal end side toward the rotation proximal end side (for example, the width in the axial direction is increased). or in a comb-like shape with radially extending teeth), and the positional relationship is such that the non-recessed portion of one rotating member can enter the recessed portion of the other rotating member. It is preferable to design As a result, even if the left and right rotating members overlap each other in front view during displacement, collision between the members can be prevented.

In this case, the rotating member may be configured to tilt further by switching to the closed state. In this case, switching to the open state causes the rotating member to move in the direction of displacement in which the ball is rescued. The number of dead balls can be reduced.

Moreover, although the rolling surfaces B3721 and B3921 of the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are configured to be planar, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be composed of a plurality of flat surfaces with varying inclinations, or may be composed of curved surfaces. This makes it possible to complicate the flow-down mode of the balls rolling on the rolling surface.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the guide plates B3300 and B3500 are slid to the front side to form the open state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the open state may be configured by sliding the guide plates B3300 and B3500 toward the rear side.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane of the rolling surfaces B3721 and B3921 that form the lower part of the pre-entering range is greater than the inclination angle of the rolling surfaces B3321 and B3521 that form the upper part of the pre-entering range with respect to the horizontal plane. Although the case in which one is larger has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower part of the pre-entering range may have a smaller inclination angle. That is, the lower part of the pre-entering range may be configured so that the degree of deceleration is higher.

In this case, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which a plurality of balls are arranged on the rolling surfaces B3721 and B3921 in the lower part of the pre-ball entry range. It is possible to increase the number of balls pushed by the members B3700, B3900 and caught in the detection sensors B1230, B1250.

It should be noted that the change in the degree of deceleration does not necessarily have to be caused by the difference in the inclination of the rolling surface. For example, by arbitrarily setting the formation width, projection length, and formation interval (density) of projections projecting into the pre-ball-entering range, such as the projecting portion B1140, it is possible to provide a difference in the degree of deceleration. .

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the ball guide path is configured by the rotating members B3700, B3900 and the guide plates B3300, B3500 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the guide plates B3300 and B3500 that are slidably displaced, rotating members that are displaced in the same manner as the opening/closing plate B2300 may be configured to have the same horizontal width as the guide plates B3300 and B3500.

In this case, since the rotational directions of the rotating member as a substitute product and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are opposed to each other, the load can be offset when they come into contact with each other, so that they can be stopped early. Furthermore, since they are displaced so as to approach each other in the vertical direction, it is easy to fill the gap.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the guide plates B3300 and B3500 and the rotating members B3700 and B3900, both of which are displaceable, are displaced closer to each other to close the gap, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, a fixed member is interposed between the guide plates B3300, B3500 and the rotating members B3700, B3900 so that the guide plates B3300, B3500 and the rotating members B3700, B3900 do not come into direct contact with each other, and a gap is formed. You can block it.

Further, when both the guide plates B3300, B3500 and the rotating members B3700, B3900 are displaced and contact each other to close the gap, one is formed more flexibly than the other so that it bends when contacted. can be For example, the guide plates B3300 and B3500 may be configured to be harder than the rotating members B3700 and B3900. Thereby, the gap can be easily filled by the bending of the rotating members B3700 and B3900.

Further, for example, if the guide plates B3300 and B3500 are configured more flexibly than the rotating members B3700 and B3900, damage to the guide plates B3300 and B3500 can be avoided. The plates B3300 and B3500 can be made thin easily.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are arranged at a distance of about five balls, but the spacing between the rotating members B3700 and B3900 is arbitrary. For example, the rotating members B3700 and B3900 may be arranged separately at the left and right ends of the game area.

Also, a canopy may be formed above the rotating members B3700 and B3900 to prevent collision of the balls in the closed state.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the case where the rolling surface B2531 of the opening/closing rod B2500 is not tilted in the front-rear direction has been described, but it may be tilted in the front-rear direction. In particular, since deceleration of the ball rolling on the opening/closing rod B2500 is not intended, ease of contact with the projecting portion B1140 is not a problem. For example, by configuring the rolling surface B2531 to be inclined downward toward the front side, the ball can be rolled on a path away from the projecting portion B1140.

Using the configuration of the sixteenth embodiment, the guide port B4160 may be arranged below the crossing position of the guide route. In this case, since a sufficient space can be provided inside the vertical width of the guide route, the guide port B4160 can be easily arranged inside the vertical width of the guide route.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the opening/closing bar B2500 projecting toward the rear side is rotationally displaced, and the guide plate B4300 projecting toward the front side is slidably displaced, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the member protruding to the back side may be slidably displaced, and the member protruding to the front side may be configured to be rotationally displaced.

In the fourteenth embodiment described above, there is a possibility that the ball will not be sufficiently decelerated due to the configuration in which collision with the projecting portion B1140 is avoided when guided by the opening/closing rod B2500, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, the opening/closing bar B2500 may be bent at an intermediate position, and in the open state, the ball guide path may be bent (the vertical inclination of the guide path may be changed in the middle). This allows the deceleration of the sphere to occur due to the change in the tilt angle.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the ball flowing from the eaves B2271 is configured to pass through the ball guide receiving portion B4260, thereby changing the frequency of ball entry into the ball guide receiving portion B4260 on the left and right. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting portion B1140 may be added to an intermediate position of the projecting portion B1140, and the lower edge of the center frame 86 may be configured to protrude forward from the projecting tip of the added projecting portion B1140. .

In this case, the ball falling from the lower edge of the center frame 86 can be made difficult to abut on the protruding portion B1140, and can be configured not to hinder the ball from entering the ball guide receiving portion B4260. A ball that slides down from the opening/closing bar B2500 when switching to the state (a ball that is pulled toward the back side) can be brought into contact with the projecting portion B1140, and the trajectory of the ball can be deflected to the left and right of the ball guide receiving portion B4260. As a result, only the frequency of ball entry from the opening/closing rod B2500 to the ball guide receiving portion B4260 can be reduced.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the sphere gathering wall B4020 facilitates the entry of the spheres into the through gate 67, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an alternate sorting device may be provided upstream of the through gate 67 so that the balls pass through the through gate 67 at a rate of one ball out of two (alternately), or the through gate 67 may be placed on the left side. A plurality of them may be arranged.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, a case was described in which a single drive motor B7710 drives a plurality of guide plates B1300 and B1500 based on the configuration of the variable winning device B1000, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, driving by the combined drive device B7700 may be added to the configuration of the variable winning device B2000. It should be noted that it is necessary to redesign the entry groove portion B7730.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the variable winning device B4000 is provided with the ball guide receiving portion B4260, and the variable winning device B4000 is unitized in the same manner as the guide opening B4160. do not have. For example, the ball guide receiving portion B4260 and the guide opening B4160 may be arranged on the base plate 60, and a concave portion may be formed in the base member B4100 to avoid interference with the ball guide receiving portion B4260. In this case, a nail can be implanted in the base plate 60 in the gap between the ball guide receiving portion B4260 and the recessed portion of the base member B4100. As a result, when the ball guide receiving portion B4260 is used instead of the first prize winning opening 64, the life nail can be easily implanted.

Also, the ball guide receiving portion B4260 may function as a substitute for the general winning opening 63 instead of the first winning opening 64 . The number of paid-out prize balls can be increased. Also, since it is located below the guide path, it is possible to prevent the special game state from prolonging as compared with the case of arranging it on the upstream side.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the case where the front projecting portion B4260 is integrally formed with the guide plate B4300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be fixed to the covering member B4200 as a member independent of the guide plate B4300. According to this, even in the closed state of the guide plate B4300, the front projecting portion B4260 can collide with the ball. Further, the front projecting portion B4260 may have a block shape, or may be formed in a columnar shape extending to the rear side.

In the nineteenth embodiment, the difference in function of the projecting portion B9140 was explained by the difference in arrangement height, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projection length may be changed. In addition, although the case where the guidance route for the ball is only the downward-sloping route has been described, the route may be configured in both directions, as in the above-described embodiments.

In addition, the structure which makes it easy for the game ball to stay is not limited at all. For example, the game ball may be decelerated by a protrusion protruding toward the inside of the flow-down path of the game ball so that the game ball can be easily retained, or the game ball can be easily retained by switching the degree of inclination of the guide path. It is also possible to make it easier for the game ball to stay by decelerating the speed.

In addition, it is also possible to form an uneven shape (wavy shape) on the rolling surface of the path forming means so that the game ball can be decelerated, thereby making it easier for the game ball to stay. The kinetic energy of is used for the rotation of the windmill to decelerate the game ball, thereby making it easier for the game ball to stay.

It should be noted that, for example, in a mode in which the path construction means are displaced corresponding to a predetermined number of rounds in a special game, a plurality of path construction means are provided, and a game ball spilled from one of the path construction means is displaced by the other path construction means. If it is configured to be able to be rescued, it is preferable to arrange the second ball entrance below the position where the game ball tends to stay in the path configuration means on the side that configures the guide path in the final round of the special game.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guiding path of the intersecting spheres is bilaterally symmetrical has been described, but it may be bilaterally asymmetrical. In each of the above-described embodiments, it is described that the player who loses from the intersecting path loses money.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the protruding portion B1140 and the like that can come into contact with the ball rolling on the guide path have been described, but the arrangement of the protruding portion is not limited to this. For example, on the left and right of the crossing position of the guide route, protrusions may be provided at positions where the ball falls. In this case, the speed of the ball in the vertical direction can be decelerated, and the falling speed can be reduced, so the degree of freedom in setting the interval between rounds is improved. That is, it is possible to set a value longer than 0.04 seconds.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the degree of deceleration of the ball is switched using the boundary between the left and right intermediate positions of the pre-entering range, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the degree of deceleration may be switched over three or more sections, or the degree of deceleration may be changed with a boundary at a position closer to the left or right from the middle position in the left or right direction.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a member that guides the ball to the opening of the pair of detection sensors B1230 and B1250 overhanging the range before the ball enters the ball is individually arranged for each of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250, but it is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, a rotator having an axial length approximately equal to the left-right width of the pre-entering range is arranged on the back side of the pre-entering range, and the rotator can guide the ball to both detection sensors B1230 and B1250. You can

That is, for example, in the case where the rotating body is configured in the shape of a quadrangular prism elongated in the left-right direction, the outer surface facing the pre-entering range is switched from the first outer surface to the fourth outer surface each time the rotation angle changes by 90 degrees. configured to be A rolling surface capable of guiding the ball to the first detection sensor B1230 is formed on the first outer surface so as to project radially outward, and a rolling surface capable of guiding the ball to the second detection sensor B1250 is formed on the third outer surface. A moving surface is formed to protrude radially outward. Further, the second outer surface and the fourth outer surface are not formed with an overhanging portion, and are arranged outside the pre-ball-entering range when they are arranged to face the ball-entering range. Further, a drive motor is provided to rotate the rotating body, and the rotating body is configured to be rotatable in both forward and reverse directions.

In this case, the rotating body is rotated by the drive motor, and the ball can be guided to the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 by setting any one of the first outer surface to the fourth outer surface to face the pre-entering range. State (first outer surface facing, first open state), state in which the ball can be guided to the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 (third outer surface facing, second open state), and detection sensors B1230, B1250 The state can be switched between a state in which the ball is not guided (the second outer surface or the fourth outer surface faces each other, closed state). Therefore, the members for guiding the balls to the openings of the pair of detection sensors B1230 and B1250 can be constructed with a single member and a single driving device.

Further, the direction of displacement of the rotating body when switching from the closed state to the open state (first open state or second open state) can be forward or reverse. That is, when switching to the open state (the first open state or the second open state), the rolling surface is displaced upward in the range before the ball enters, and the rolling surface descends in the range before the ball enters. It is possible to construct a case in which they are displaced and arranged.

For the purpose of reducing the number of loose balls from the pre-entering range, it is easier to rescue the balls when the rolling surface is displaced upward, which is advantageous. Therefore, by configuring the rotation direction of the rotating body to be controllable in different directions, it is possible to configure an opening mode that is advantageous to the player and an opening mode that is disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, when employing a rotating body, there is no need to consider interference between members unlike in the case of configuring with individual members, so the degree of freedom in design can be improved. For example, the first detection sensor B1230 and the second detection sensor B1250 are arranged on the same side (for example, the right side) with different vertical positions, and the guide route is configured to be inclined in the same direction, and the upper side of one of the guide routes on the upstream side. By arranging the other guide route, which has been arranged at the bottom, below the one guide route on the downstream side (for example, providing a step), it is possible to easily configure a structure that crosses the guide routes.

It should be noted that such a structure (structure inclined in the same direction) may be replaced with the guide members (guide plates B1300, B1500, B3300, B3500, B4300, opening/closing plates B2300, B5500, opening/closing rods B2500, and rotating members B3700, B3900) may be configured by changing the shape.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the variable winning device B1000 and the like is arranged near the bottom of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variable winning device B1000 or the like may be arranged in the upper part of the game area (for example, above the center frame 86 or above the center frame 86 above and below the center frame 86).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the structure for intersecting the rolling paths of the balls has been described as the structure of the member that opens and closes the prize winning opening, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be used without the winning opening (separately from the winning opening) as a means for changing the flow-down path of the ball in one range of the game area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, by varying the flow path on the upstream side of the variable winning device B1000 or the like, or by arranging another winning opening, a round in which the opening of the first detection opening B1230 is opened and a second Although the case where the round digestion time differs between the round in which the opening of the detection port B1250 is opened has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the degree of deceleration is varied so that the flow speed of the ball guided toward the opening of the first detection port B1230 and the flow speed of the ball guided toward the opening of the second detection port B1250 are different. By doing so, the round digestion time may be differentiated.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Production incorporating randomness>
A game machine comprising: an action means; a displacement means configured to be displaceable by receiving action from the action means; A1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine that is displaceably arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display area and includes displacement means that is displaced according to the driving of a driving device such as a motor (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). ). However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that the operation pattern of the displacement means is poor, and the effect on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the attention of the player gradually decreases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the displacement of the displacement means can be made complicated by the function of the auxiliary means of making the displacement mode of the displacement means into a plurality of modes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, and to keep the player's attention at a high level.

A specific example of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a box-shaped space forming means that forms a space in which the displacement means can be displaced, or it may be displaced by a driving device separate from the action means and pushed to change the displacement mode of the displacement means. Any means is fine. Further, the driving device for the pushing means may also be used as the driving device for driving the action means.

In the gaming machine A1, the action means can be configured to have a first state in which a first action portion can act on the displacement means, and a second state in which a second action portion can act on the displacement means. A gaming machine A2 characterized by:

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, it is possible to change the part when the action means acts on the displacement means. The means can be displaced differently.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the action means comprises contact means for contacting and applying a load to the displacement means, and is configured to be capable of generating loads in a plurality of modes via the contact means. A gaming machine A3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, there are multiple types of load modes generated via the abutting means, so that multiple types of displacement modes of the displacement means can be provided.

In the game machine A3, the abutment means includes a first abutment portion configured to be displaceable and configured to abut against the displacement means, and a first abutment portion configured to be abuttable to the displacement means. and a second contact portion different from the portion, and the angle between the displacement direction of the contact means and the first contact portion (or the tangential line of the first contact portion) when viewed in a predetermined direction is A game machine A4, characterized in that the angle between the displacement direction of the abutment means and the second abutment portion (or a tangent to the second abutment portion) is different from the angle when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the direction of the load applied to the displacement means can be varied without changing the displacement direction of the contact means. can be generated in the direction of

In the gaming machine A4, the contact means is configured such that tangent lines drawn to the first contact portion and the second contact portion and parallel to each other are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the contact means. A gaming machine A5 characterized by:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, a load can be applied to the displacement means in a direction parallel to the plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement means can be displaced with little energy loss. can be made Thereby, a large amount of displacement of the displacement means can be ensured.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, load generating means configured to generate a load for displacing the action means is provided, and the load generating means generates the load at a position where the displacing means are densely arranged. A game machine A6 characterized in that it is configured to generate

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the load can be efficiently transmitted to the displacement means.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the action means is supported in a support manner that allows a change in posture, and the change in posture occurs on the side of the displacement means that facilitates maintaining a balance of arrangement with respect to the action means. A gaming machine A7 characterized by:

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, it is possible to maintain the balance of the arrangement of the displacement means by changing the posture of the action means. can be avoided from occurring.

In addition, the cause of the attitude change of the action means is not limited at all. For example, it may be caused by balancing the load from the displacement means, or a drive device may be provided to change the posture of the action means. When the attitude of the action means is caused to change by balancing the load from the displacement means, the attitude of the action means can be easily changed by providing a plurality of lengths from the portion facing the displacement means to the support position of the action means. can be produced in multiple types.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes guide means configured to be able to guide displacement of the displacement means, and the guide means can guide displacement of the displacement means in one direction. and a second guide portion capable of guiding displacement of the displacement means in another direction, wherein the first guide portion and the second guide portion face the displacement means. A game machine A8 characterized in that the formation mode of is different.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be varied according to the displacement direction of the displacement means.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the action means is configured to be displaceable, configured to change the easiness of keeping the balance of the displacement means depending on its arrangement, and the position where the balance of the displacement means is easy to keep. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being constructed so as to be able to act on the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, it is possible to easily maintain the balance of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

A game machine A10 in any one of the game machines A1 to A9, wherein the displacement means comprises one or more members, which are configured so as not to be coupled with each other.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A9, when the displacement means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from joining together to form a lump. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a plurality of members scatter.

A gaming machine A11 characterized in that in the gaming machine A10, the center of gravity of the one or more members is arranged at a position different from the center of the member.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, it is possible to stabilize the attitude of the displacement means when the displacement means is arranged in the action means.

Note that the method of forming the center of gravity is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the member or a method of partially forming holes in the member may be used.

<Change due to advancing/retreating means moving forward/backward within the displacement range of the displacement means>
Arranging means configured to be arranged in a predetermined range, and advance/retreat means configured to be displaceable in a forward/retreat direction with respect to the range, the advancing/retreating means moving into a predetermined portion of the range, A game machine B1 is characterized by being configured to be able to change the width of the width of the game machine B1 so that the width can be changed in a plurality of ways.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine comprising a first movable member that displaces to the left and right, and a second movable member that enters a range generated between the first movable members as the first movable member displaces. There is (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is only one type of displacement when the second movable member enters the range, and there is room for improvement in the displacement of the second movable member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the advance/retreat means is configured with a plurality of types of change modes of the width of the range when entering the range, it is possible to configure with a plurality of types of displacement modes of the placement means, and the placement means can can be improved.

In addition, the mode of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a granular performance member made of a resin material, a powdery member, a liquid, or a game ball.

In addition, the method of configuring a plurality of types of change modes of the width of the range due to the displacement of the advance/retreat means is not limited at all. For example, the entrance side portion of the advancing/retreating means may be formed with an inclined surface, and the width of the range may be changed by providing a portion with a different width to enter the range, or the displacement width of the advancing/retreating means may be changed to change the range. may be made variable.

In the game machine B1, the range is formed inside a box-shaped means configured to prevent entry and exit of the arrangement means, and is configured to be changeable, and the advancing/retreating means enters the range in a non-changing state. The game machine B2 is characterized in that the box-shaped means has an opening through which the advance/retreat means can be inserted and the arrangement means cannot be inserted.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the advance/retreat means can enter the range through the opening portion, while the arrangement means can be prevented from falling out of the range.

In addition, the arrangement of the open portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be placed in a location that is difficult for the placement means to reach. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the arranging means will fall out of the range by mistake. Also, the open portion may be arranged at a location where the load from the arrangement means is less likely to occur (for example, the upper side opposite to the direction of gravity). In this case, it is possible to prevent a load from the arranging means from being applied to the advancing/retreating means during displacement, hindering the displacement of the advancing/retreating means, or causing damage to the advancing/retreating means or the arranging means.

A gaming machine B3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the advance/retreat means is configured such that the direction of guiding the placement means is different corresponding to the direction of contact with the placement means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the arrangement means are guided in different directions by the same advancing/retreating means. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of types of presentations, thereby improving the presentation effect of presentations using the arrangement means and the advance/retreat means.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the advancing/retreating means is configured such that, when entering the range, the gap between the opposing surface of the range and the opposing surface is shorter than the width of the arrangement means. A gaming machine B4 characterized by:

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, even if the arrangement means is arranged on the far side from the advance/retreat means, the advance/retreat means can be moved to the arrangement means in the entered state. can work.

In addition, it is also possible to configure so that there is no gap between the advance/retreat means and the facing surface of the range. Also, it may be configured such that there is a gap in one part and no gap in the other part.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the advance/retreat means is configured to enter the range by rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and at the tip on the entry side, the representative tip farthest from the axis is the A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is configured so that the gap between the range and the range is the shortest.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, by making the representative tip portion, which is most likely to be displaced from the axis, first enter the range, Misalignment can be addressed early, and the resistance of the subsequent entry motion can be reduced.

In the game machine B5, the representative tip portion is provided with a predetermined projecting portion, and is formed so as to be inclined away from the range as the distance from the projecting portion along the axial direction increases. Game machine B6 to play.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the arrangement means can be displaced away from the predetermined projecting portion in the process of entering the advance/retreat means.

In the gaming machine B6, the advancing/retreating means has a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the projecting portion in the axial direction.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the shape of the advance/retreat means is a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging part, so that the arrangement means pushed away by the overhanging part can be secured.

Various modes are exemplified as the shape in which the range side is open. For example, it may have a shape in which the range side is opened before the advance/retreat means enters, or a shape in which the range side is opened in a state in which the advance/retreat means has entered.

In any one of the game machines B5 to B7, it comprises a drive means capable of generating a driving force, and a transmission means capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the advance/retreat means, wherein the transmission means and the advance/retreat means means that a driving force is transmitted by abutment, and the contact area of the abutment surface between the transmission means and the advancing/retreating means is configured to be variable, and the contact area varies depending on whether the advancing/retreating means enters the range. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it is configured so that it becomes maximum at the beginning and then decreases.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B5 to B7, the contact area is maximized at the initial stage of entry when a large load is likely to occur due to the advance and retreat means starting to contact the arrangement means. By doing so, the load per unit area of the contact surface can be reduced. As a result, the durability of the advance/retreat means and the transmission means can be improved.

In addition, the mode of the advance/retreat means is not limited at all. For example, means for displacing outside the game area or means for displacing inside the game area may be used.

<Synchronize two members with a transmission cam>
driving means; displacement means configured to be displaceable and composed of one or more members; and transmission means configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement means, the transmission means comprising: In a first aspect, a first transmission portion configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to a first target portion of the displacement means; and in a second aspect, different from the first aspect, the displacement means. A gaming machine C1 comprising a second transmission section configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second target section.

A driving device used for displacing displacement means in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, comprising a first driving device for vertically displacing the displacing means and a second driving device for rotationally displacing the displacing means. There is a game machine (see, for example, JP-A-2016-202210). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, even if the first driving device and the second driving device are synchronized to displace a plurality of displacement means in order to execute the motion presentation of the displacement means, the driving timing is shifted. There is a problem that the possibility cannot be excluded and the displacement of the displacement means tends to be unstable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission means is provided with the first transmission portion and the second transmission portion, and the driving force is transmitted to the first target portion or the second target portion of the displacement means, respectively. With this configuration, the transmission of the driving force to the first target portion and the second target portion can be automatically synchronized, and the displacement of the displacement means can be stabilized.

In addition, the timing at which the driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, the driving force may be transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion at the same time, the driving force may be transmitted at different times, or a combination thereof (partially simultaneous transmission) may be used.

Further, when the driving force is transmitted to the first target portion and the second target portion at the same time, it is preferable that the direction in which at least part of the driving force is generated is along the direction of gravity. As a result, its own weight can be used for driving force transmission.

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the transmission of the driving force to the first target part and the transmission of the driving force to the second target part occur at different times.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the driving force required for the driving means can be suppressed by keeping the maximum value of the driving resistance low.

Here, the term "driving force transmission" may refer to a load in the direction of travel in which the transmission means is displaced by the driving force. Also good.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first target portion and a second member having the second target portion, and the displacement trajectory of the first member and the second member The first member is configured to partially intersect with the displacement trajectory of, the first member is configured to be able to contact the second member in a predetermined arrangement, and in the contacting state, the A gaming machine C3 characterized by being configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the second member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means. In other words, it is possible to configure a case where the driving force is directly transmitted from the transmission means to the second member and a case where the driving force is indirectly transmitted through the first member.

In the game machine C3, the second member is configured to be retractable to a position where it does not come into contact with the first member in a state in which the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement. .

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, it is possible to avoid contact between the displacing first member and the second member. As a result, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs when the first member reaches the predetermined position and stops, so that the mode of driving force transmission to the second member can be switched smoothly. can be facilitated.

A game machine C5 characterized in that, in the game machine C3 or C4, the state of the first member is associated with the arrangement of the transmission means.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3 or C4, the switching of the transmission mode of the driving force can be performed by changing the arrangement of the transmission means, so that the displacement of the first member and the second member can be stabilized. and avoid unintended collision or contact of each member.

In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, an urging means configured to urge the second member in a predetermined direction is provided, and the driving force is transmitted to the second member in a direction opposing the urging force. The game machine C6 is characterized in that the first member is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C3 to C5, the first member is arranged in a predetermined manner while the second member is arranged on the opposite side of the first member in a predetermined direction. can be done. Thereby, it is possible to form the timing for displacing the second member against the biasing force and the timing for stopping the second member against the biasing force as the transmission means is displaced.

The game machine C7, wherein the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmission portion of the transmission means is displaced in the predetermined direction in the game machine C6. .

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, part of the load necessary for displacing the first member can be generated by the biasing force of the biasing means. That is, the urging force can be used in an auxiliary manner.

In any one of game machines C3 to C7, the second transmission section is capable of forming a non-contact state in which the second member is not in contact, and in the non-contact state, the second member displaces. A gaming machine C8 characterized in that the second member is configured so that the second transmission section does not interfere with the.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C3 to C7, the displacement state of the second member includes a displacement state of being pushed by the second transmission section and a displacement state of being separated from the second transmission section. and can be configured.

In any one of game machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending in parallel with the predetermined direction from a point of contact between the first member arranged in the predetermined manner and the transmission means controls the displacement of the transmission means in a predetermined manner. A game machine C9 characterized by passing through a regulating part that regulates.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the urging force transmitted to the transmission means via the first member is cut off by the restricting section, so that the drive means can be reached. can be prevented (to a lesser degree).

In addition, the aspect of a regulation part is not limited at all. For example, it may be a guide portion that limits the displacement mode to sliding displacement by restricting the displacement, or a shaft support portion that limits the displacement to rotational displacement.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C9, the first target portion of the displacement means receives the driving force of the drive means and is displaced or stopped, and receives the load from the second target portion. A gaming machine C10 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state between a second state in which it is displaced or stopped.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target part can be complicated.

<By limiting the generation of load when the user is away from the vehicle, load transmission is cut off>
A game machine comprising a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a transmission means configured to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means, the contact contacting the displacement means and a non-contact state in which the displacement means is not in contact with the displacement means. A gaming machine D1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a displacement means composed of one movable body displaced by a driving force of a drive means contacts another movable body at a displacement end position (upper end position) and receives a load. There is (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-028623). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a possibility that a load from another movable body may be transmitted to the drive means via the displacement means. There is room for improvement from the standpoint of stabilizing the drive state, since there is a possibility that a difference from the actual state of the drive means will occur.

Moreover, it is conceivable that the operating resistance of the driving means may increase or decrease unstably due to the load applied to the driving means, accelerating the deterioration of the driving means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, the driving state of the driving means can be stabilized. In addition, by suppressing unstable increases and decreases in the operating resistance of the driving means, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

Note that the method of suppressing load transmission in the contact state is not limited at all. For example, a member capable of absorbing the load may be interposed in the contact portion, and the displacement of the first means that causes the load (for example, the first means receiving an external force) may cause the displacement of the first means. It may be configured so that it occurs only in the non-contact state.

In the game machine D1, the load received by the displacement means from the first means and the driving force received by the displacement means via the transmission means face the same side.

According to the gaming machine D2, the load received by the displacement means can be reduced compared to the case where the load from the first means and the driving force are directed to opposite sides.

The game machine D1 or D2 is provided with an arrangement means arranged so as to be capable of colliding with the first means, and the collision of the arrangement means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other. A gaming machine D3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the collision of the arranging means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other. can be blocked.

Incidentally, the collision of the arranging means may occur in the contact state of the first means, or may occur in the non-contact state. If the locating means collides in a non-contact state, load transmission between the first means and the displacing means can be interrupted. ), load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the transmission means includes a contact portion configured to be able to contact the displacement means, and the contact portion bends in the direction of the load caused by the contact ( A gaming machine D4 characterized by being flexibly constructed to such an extent that it can be deformed.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the load is absorbed by the bending (deformation) of the contact portion, thereby suppressing the load transmission between the displacement means and the transmission means. can do.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacement means are provided with a second abutment portion configured to be able to abut against the second contact portion of at least one of the first means and the displacement means. The gaming machine D5, wherein the abutting portion is made of a material capable of absorbing impact.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the second contact portion can absorb the impact, so that the load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5 is characterized by comprising biasing means for biasing the displacement means, wherein the standby position of the displacement means is set at the end of the biasing direction displacement range of the biasing means. A game machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D5, it is possible to avoid deviation of the standby position of the displacement means (the position where the load is generated from the transmission means). It is easy to arrange the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means in an appropriate position for controlling the transmission means to operate at high speed until the position where the 1 means and the displacement means are separated from each other. This makes it possible to easily and appropriately control the driving means.

In addition, by reducing the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to avoid accidental contact between the first means and the displacement means.

In any one of game machines D3 to D6, the game machine D7 is characterized in that the first means permits a change in posture due to a collision of the arrangement means.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D3 to D6, the load from the arrangement means can be used for the change in the posture of the first means, so the load transmission to the drive means is suppressed. be able to.

In the game machine D6 or D7, the first means and the displacement means are in contact with each other, and the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the first means exerts the biasing force of the biasing means. a receiving biasing state, wherein the transmission means abuts against the displacement means and displaces the displacement means in a direction opposite to the direction of the biasing force of the biasing means; A gaming machine D8 characterized by being capable of changing states between an ineffective contact state in which transmission to means is disabled and a non-contact state in which said first means and said displacement means are separated from each other.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of the game machine D6 or D7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of ease with which the placement means changes its posture with respect to collision).

<Conditionally regulate one of forward and reverse rotation>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable along a path including a predetermined position is provided, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position serving as a reference point for changing the displacement mode. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is constructed so as to be displaceable to the predetermined position in the manner of .

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that control the same movable accessory to perform different actions in a plurality of effects (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-73517). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, different actions correspond to the presence or absence of switching of the driving direction of the driving device. Since the player can predict about, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate the performance to be executed from now on by the discriminating means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, the displacement mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, the winning effect and the losing effect may be different effects involving displacement of the displacement means. In this case, if there is only one way of displacing the displacing means to a predetermined position, it will be known whether or not it is correct by the displacement from the predetermined position (for example, the generation of driving sound). On the other hand, by providing a plurality of displacement modes, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the displacement is correct or not even if displacement occurs (for example, driving sound occurs).

Moreover, the mode of displacement is not limited at all. For example, it may be a path, a displacement speed, or a displacement speed pattern.

The game machine E1 comprises driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and regulation means for regulating the displacement of the displacement means. A gaming machine E2, characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be regulated in a non-operating state.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the driving sound of the driving means can be eliminated when the displacement means is restricted. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the direction is reverse.

Further, unlike the case where the driving means continues to generate driving force when performing a long performance (Long Reach, etc.) with the displacement of the displacement means restricted, it is possible to suppress heat generation by the driving means.

A gaming machine E3 in the gaming machine E1 or E2, wherein the restricting means is displaced to a position where it can act on the displacing means by the driving force of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of driving means to be arranged can be reduced compared to the case where the driving means for driving the restricting means is provided separately.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the game machine is characterized by comprising a discrimination participating means configured to have a section that makes it difficult to discriminate in which form among the plurality of types of modes the displacement is made. E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the determination participating means can be configured to make it difficult to determine the displacement mode of the displacement means in a predetermined section. Compared to the case where it is difficult to determine the displacement mode only in the case where it is difficult to determine the displacement mode, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the displacement of the displacement means while it is difficult to determine the displacement mode.

A gaming machine E5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E4, the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained in the section.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, it is possible to switch the driving direction of the driving means while maintaining the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of displacement mode of the displacement means from being detected from the driving sound. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform drive control such as starting the driving of the driving means before notification of acceptance or rejection.

Any one of the game machines E1 to E5 is provided with detection means capable of detecting the position of the displacement means, and the detection means determines switching of executable displacement among the displacements in the plurality of types of displacement modes. A game machine E6, which is also used as a determination means.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E5, the sensor for detecting the position of the displacement means and the sensor for judging the switching of the displacement mode can be used together. It is possible to reduce the number of devices to be arranged.

<Sense of unity of multiple members>
A gaming machine configured such that a first member and a second member are displaceable, wherein the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is different between the first member and the second member. A game machine F1 characterized by being configured as follows.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a first member and a second member configured to be displaceable are controlled to be vertically displaced while maintaining an adjacent state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the first member and the second member are displaced on the same straight line, so depending on the approaching speed, the first member and the second member may return after contact. Yes, it can look bad. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintaining the effect mode regardless of the displacement speed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the manner in which the first member and the second member approach each other is made different. For example, the displacement mode of the first member and the second member is not made to approach on the same straight line, but after approaching on another straight line, the direction is changed and the first member and the second member approach each other. It is possible to avoid reversal and make it easier to maintain the presentation mode.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement of the first member and the second member is divided into at least a first section for approaching each other and a second section as a preparatory section for coming into contact with each other. The game machine F2 is characterized in that the second member is configured such that the attitudes of the first section and the second section are different.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed according to the purpose of displacement.

A gaming machine F3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F1 or F2, it comprises a load generating means capable of generating a load directed to the side maintaining the close arrangement of the first member and the second member.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generating means.

It should be noted that the load generated by the load generating means is not limited to a load in a fixed direction or a load of a fixed magnitude. For example, if the load that is likely to be received (eg, a performance mode that generates an external force) changes depending on the situation (eg, game state), the direction and magnitude of the load generated by the load generating means may be changed accordingly.

Moreover, the load generated by the load generating means does not need to be generated all the time. For example, it may be possible to switch between load generation and load cancellation in accordance with the above-described change in the situation. Incidentally, the load generating means may be external.

In the game machine F3, displacement generating means is configured to displace at least one of the first member and the second member, and a predetermined state can be configured by the displacement, and the load generating means is configured to displace the displacement. A game machine F4 characterized in that it is configured integrally with a generating means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, it is possible to appropriately maintain the relationship between the load generation timing by the load generating means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member. It is possible to prevent the load from occurring at

Also, the action of the load generating means and the action of the displacement generating means can complement each other. For example, the load of the load generating means can be used to assist the displacement of the first member or the second member caused by the displacement generating means.

In the game machine F4, the predetermined state is a contact state in which at least part of the first member contacts the second member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the mode of filling the gap between the first member and the second member.

In the game machine F4 or F5, the game machine F6 is characterized in that the load generating means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4 or F5, it is possible to prevent the load of the load generation means from affecting the first member and the second member even in states other than the predetermined state.

The game machine F7 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F3 to F6, the load generating means is configured to generate loads at a plurality of locations on the first member or the second member.

According to the game machine F7, in any one of the game machines F3 to F6, since the load generating means generates a load on the first member or the second member at a plurality of locations, it is possible not only to maintain the state against displacement in one direction, but also to It is also possible to maintain the state of the first member or the second member against changes in posture. Thereby, even when the first member and the second member are configured three-dimensionally, it is possible to avoid conspicuous displacement of the arrangement.

In the gaming machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of load receiving portions that receive a load from the load generating means, and the plurality of load receiving portions are the first load receiving portion and the first load receiving portion. and a second loaded portion having a larger displacement amount with respect to the load generating means than the loaded portion, wherein the load generating means applies the load to the first loaded portion before the second loaded portion. A gaming machine F8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be applied to the first member or the second member in stages. Also, the role of the load applied to the first load receiving portion and the second load receiving portion can be divided. For example, it is possible to use the first load receiving part for positioning at a predetermined position and the second load receiving part for attitude adjustment.

In any one of the game machines F3 to F8, the load generating means may be such that the portion that applies the load directed to the side facing gravity to the first member or the second member is greater than the other portions. Alternatively, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the facing surface facing the second member has a long facing length.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the sagging due to the weight of the first member or the second member. On the other hand, for other portions, the facing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, so that the degree of freedom in designing the load generating means can be improved and the facing surface can be easily hidden.

A game machine F10 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F3 to F9, the assembly of the first member and the second member is possible in a state in which the first member and the second member are separated. .

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily avoid cracking or chipping of the first member or the second member due to the load caused by the assembly work. That is, compared to the case where the assembling work is performed in the abutting state, it is easier to avoid the occurrence of load transmission between the first member and the second member, so that the first member and the second member can be assembled without damage. can.

As a result, it is possible to provide the contact surfaces as designed on the first member and the second member, thereby preventing a situation in which the load generated by the load generating means, such as when there is a gap, is likely to cause misalignment. can do.

<Construction of multiple types of wobble states of the displacement means>
A gaming machine G0 comprising displacement means and action means for displacing the displacement means, wherein the action means is configured to suppress a change in posture of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes displacement means configured to enable displacement composed of position change and rotation (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, although the portion supporting the displacement means disposed at the tip of the arm is formed to have a large diameter, it is necessary to provide a gap in order to ensure the displacement, so that the posture of the displacement means is limited. There is a problem that the countermeasure against the change is not sufficient and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the change in the attitude of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G0, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the displacement means by the configuration of the action means. Accordingly, even if the space in which the displacement of the displacement means is allowed is narrow, it is possible to easily avoid collision between the wall member forming the space and the displacement means.

It should be noted that the direction in which the displacement means changes its posture is not limited at all. For example, it may be tilted about a straight line along the lateral direction (horizontal direction, etc.), or may be swung laterally about a straight line along the vertical direction (vertical direction, etc.).

In the game machine G0, the action means is configured to be able to increase or decrease the action force for suppressing the posture change of the displacement means in accordance with the arrangement position of the displacement means.

According to the game machine G1, in addition to the effects of the game machine G0, it is possible to change the degree of suppression of the posture change of the displacement means according to the arrangement of the displacement means. As a result, the arrangement space of the displacement means can be narrowed while maintaining a high degree of freedom in the performance of the displacement means.

For example, when the displacement means is reciprocatingly displaced, the attitude of the displacement means tends to collapse at the displacement end where the displacement direction is switched. By increasing it, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

Further, for example, even when the displacement means itself is enlarged, reduced, or rotated by the driving force mounted on the displacement means, the attitude of the displacement means tends to be easily lost. By increasing the acting force generation positions in (1), it is possible to suppress collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

In game machine G0 or G1, game machine G2 is characterized in that said action means is configured to support said displacement means with a plurality of main support means arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the center of gravity of said displacement means.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G0 or G1, the action means supports the displacement means by a plurality of main support means on the horizontal plane at the position of the center of gravity of the displacement means, thereby preventing the displacement means from tilting. can be made easier.

In the game machine G2, the action means includes auxiliary support means for supporting the displacement means at a position different from the horizontal plane on which the main support means is arranged.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, the main support means and the auxiliary support means support the displacement means at three or more support points that are not arranged on a straight line, so that the displacement means Attitude change can be suppressed in all directions.

In the game machine G3, the auxiliary support means also functions as guide means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, the auxiliary support means can be added not only as a supporting force generating position but also as a position for guiding displacement.

In the gaming machine G1, the displacement means can be displaced in such a manner that its area when viewed in a predetermined direction increases or decreases, and the action means is configured such that the acting force generation position is maximized at the end position of displacement of the displacement means. A gaming machine G5 characterized by:

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, it is possible to generate acting forces on the displacement means at a plurality of points at the displacement end position where the effect of increasing the area of the displacement means is most effective. , the change in posture of the displacing means can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, by relatively reducing the acting force generating positions during the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement resistance of the displacement means can be reduced and the displacement can be smoothed. That is, during the displacement of the displacement means, it is easy to maintain the posture due to the inertia associated with the displacement. Therefore, if the acting force generation position is increased recklessly, the acting force becomes excessive and the displacement resistance of the displacement means rises. , the problem that the driving device becomes large is assumed.

On the other hand, by reducing the acting force generation positions at positions other than the displacement end position, it is possible to avoid the displacement resistance of the displacement means from becoming excessive and to avoid an increase in the size of the driving device.

<Wiring Guide for Propeller Unit>
Displacement means, electric wiring connected to the displacement means, and electric wiring displacement means configured to be capable of displacing a predetermined portion of the electric wiring, wherein the electric wiring displacement means is such that the displacement means is the predetermined portion. The game machine H1 is characterized in that the predetermined portion can be displaced to the side avoiding the displacing means when the game machine H1 is displaced to the side approaching the .

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which electrical wiring connected to the displacement means is aligned with a long member interlocking with the displacement means to limit the arrangement of the electrical wiring (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). (see Gazette). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, in order to avoid contact between the displacement means and the electric wiring, it is difficult to configure the displacement means to continue to displace beyond the electric wiring. Since a space is required for arranging the electrical wiring on the outside, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging the displacing means is low.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the electric wire displacing means can displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring to the side avoiding the displacing means. so that the displacement means can be arranged to displace over the electrical wiring. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means.

It should be noted that the case where the displacement means approaches the predetermined portion is not limited at all. For example, if the predetermined portion is stopped, there is a danger of contact between the displacement means and the predetermined portion, or the distance between the predetermined portion and the displacement means is shorter than the reference length.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in at least a first direction and a second direction, and the predetermined portion is displaceable in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, it is possible to avoid the electric wiring from limiting the amount of displacement of the displacement means in the predetermined plane defined by the first direction and the second direction.

In the game machine H2, the game machine H3 is characterized in that the first direction and the second direction are directions parallel to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined direction view.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the displacement direction of the predetermined portion can be set along the predetermined direction view. It is possible to reduce the effect on appearance.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H3, it comprises a stopping means for stopping a second predetermined portion of the electrical wiring arranged on the opposite side of the displacing means with respect to the predetermined portion, wherein the electrical wiring displacing means A gaming machine H4 characterized in that the second predetermined portion is configured to be easily displaceable with respect to the stopping means.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electrical wiring arranged in the stopping means can be improved.

In addition, the configuration in which the second predetermined portion is easily displaced with respect to the stopping means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is spirally arranged in the retaining means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed in along the tangential direction of the outer peripheral portion of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be attached to the movable member. When guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed so as to displace the movable member.

In the game machine H4, the game machine H5 is characterized in that the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machine H4, the stopping means is arranged outside the displacement terminal of the displacement means in the first direction, so that the stopping means is projected to the plane side where the displacement means is displaced. can be configured As a result, it is possible to increase the storage capacity of the electric wiring of the stopping means, so that the amount of displacement of the displacement means that compensates for the separation from the stopping means by the second predetermined portion can be increased.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the electrical wiring displacing means is integrated with the displacing means, and includes correspondence changing means for changing the arrangement of the electrical wiring displacing means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacing means. A gaming machine H6 characterized by:

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the correspondence changing means can appropriately manage the relative arrangement between the electric wiring and the displacement means.

<Flow path of sphere with electric tube>
It comprises a game area and a flow-down means for causing the game balls discharged from the game area to flow down, and the flow-down means has a section configured so that the game balls discharged from the game area can be visually recognized. gaming machine I0 to play.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a base plate forming a game area is made of a plywood board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-80178). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the game ball discharged from the game area flows to the back side of the base plate, it is hidden by the base plate, and the player cannot see the game ball. Therefore, the player is likely to lose sight of the game ball, and if the player does not pay attention to the ejection timing, the player may get the impression that the game ball suddenly disappears from the game area.

Also, even if you pay attention to the ejection timing, in recent pachinko machines, the winning hole and the out hole are often arranged close to each other, and even though the ball actually entered the out hole, the ball did not reach the winning hole. There is a possibility that it may be mistaken for the one that entered the ball. In this case, there is a possibility that players will feel distrustful of the fact that no prize balls are paid out. In other words, the conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in discharging the game balls from the game area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, since the flowing-down means is configured to have a section in which the game balls discharged from the game area can be visually recognized, the player can visually observe the game balls flowing down in the section. By doing so, it is possible to confirm how the game balls are arranged from the game area. As a result, ejection of game balls from the game area can be improved.

It should be noted that the discharge of the game ball from the game area means the overall manner in which the game ball is discharged from the game area. For example, the balls may be discharged through a prize ball opening, or may be discharged through an outlet without prize balls.

In the gaming machine I0, the game ball that has flowed down in the game area is disposed so as to pass through, and the game ball is provided with a profit giving means configured to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the passage of the game ball. The means comprises a first constituent part configured to be able to guide a game ball toward the profit imparting means above the profit imparting means, and a first constituent part disposed downstream of the first constituent part. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising a second component configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side away from the profit giving means above the giving means.

According to the game machine I1, in addition to the effects of the game machine I0, the player can grasp how the game ball is discharged from the game area by visually recognizing the game ball flowing down the flowing-down means. It is possible to avoid the game ball from approaching the profit giving means on the lower side. As a result, game balls that have already been discharged from the game area and game balls that are still flowing down the game area can be clearly distinguished in the vicinity of the profit giving means, so that the player can comfortably play the game. We can try to make it possible.

Note that the predetermined profit is not limited at all. For example, it may be a payout of prize balls, a lottery of symbols such as a first symbol or a second symbol, or other profit.

The game machine I0 or I1 includes attention means formed inside the game area, and frame means arranged in a frame shape around the attention means, and the flow-down means is the frame when viewed from the front. A game machine I2 characterized by being constructed so as to cause game balls to flow down to the inner side of means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0 or I1, the flowing-down means can cause the game balls discharged from the game area to enter the visual field of the player who pays attention to the attention means. As a result, even in a situation where the player is paying attention to the attention means, it is possible to let the player know that the game ball has been ejected from the game area.

Note that the attention means is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate (illumination plate), a liquid crystal display means for changing and displaying a pattern, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable by a driving means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED. good.

The game machine I3 is characterized in that in the game machine I2, the flow-down means comprises deceleration means for decelerating the game ball on the inner side of the attention means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the game ball stays in the field of view of the player who pays attention to the attention means.

<Ingenuity around the board surface design part and light guide plate>
A predetermined substrate provided with a light emitting means, and an arranged means arranged in front of at least a part of the predetermined substrate when viewed from a predetermined direction, wherein the predetermined substrate has an area visually recognized when viewed from the predetermined direction of A gaming machine J0 characterized in that it is arranged so as to be smaller than an area where the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an illumination board having light emitting means such as LEDs is arranged on the back side of a base plate having a game area on the front side, and the plate surface of the illumination board and the plate surface of the base plate are arranged. There is a gaming machine in which are arranged substantially parallel (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-333887). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the area of the decorative board that is visually recognized when viewed from the front is large, when the decorative member arranged on the front side of the decorative board is irradiated with the LED light, the field of view of the decorative board is covered with electric lights. There is a possibility that the decorative board may enter and be visually recognized as if the decorative member and the decorative board are overlapped in the front and back.

On the surface of the decorative board, only functionally necessary components such as circuits and resistors are arranged, and usually the board does not have a high degree of design. Therefore, when the decorative member and the decorative board are visually superimposed in the front and rear, the appearance is poor, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player is lowered. In other words, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the presentation effect of the predetermined board.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J0, since the predetermined substrate is arranged such that the area of the predetermined substrate that is visually recognized when viewed in the predetermined direction is smaller than the area of the irradiated light, at least the predetermined A region in which only light can be visually recognized can be configured without overlapping with the substrate. As a result, it is possible to improve the rendering effect of the predetermined substrate.

In addition, the arrangement of the predetermined substrate is not limited at all. For example, the visible area may be reduced by partially hiding, or the visible area may be eliminated by completely shielding.

Incidentally, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means arranged on the predetermined substrate can be arbitrarily set. For example, the optical axis may be directed in the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, the optical axis may be directed in the direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, or the optical axis may be directed at an angle between them. Anything that can be done is fine.

The optical transparency of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to have good light transmittance, may be configured to have low transmittance, or may have a different degree of light transmittance for each portion.

In the gaming machine J0, the arranged means includes a plurality of direction changing means arranged on both surface sides of the predetermined substrate for changing the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means. and a low transmission means having a lower light transmittance than the direction changing means is disposed, and when viewed from a predetermined direction, at least a part of the predetermined substrate is arranged inside the low transmission means. Gaming machine J1.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate can be hidden by the low transmission means. Thereby, the range in which the predetermined substrate is visible can be narrowed.

In addition, the direction changing means is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate or an illumination plate, a movable accessory that can be displaced by a driving device, a game area or flow path where game balls flow down, a case member or a decorative member that is fixedly arranged. But it's okay.

A gaming machine J2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1, the low-transmittance means is at least part of a shape portion forming a shape of a predetermined pattern or figure.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1, the low-transmittance means can be blended into the shape of a predetermined pattern or figure, so that it is possible to avoid making the player feel uncomfortable.

Note that the shape of the predetermined pattern or figure is not limited at all. For example, it may be a frame-shaped bone portion such as a window frame, a bone portion connecting the shaft of a rotating body such as a tire and the rotating outer peripheral portion, or a series of meaning contents composed of arbitrary character strings and patterns. It may be part of the design to be expressed (for example, a title logo).

A game machine J3 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines J0 to J2, the predetermined board is arranged with the end face of the board facing the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J3, it is possible to minimize the area of the predetermined substrate when viewed in a predetermined direction.

The gaming machine J3 includes display means for executing display effects that can be visually recognized when viewed from a predetermined direction, and a game area arranged in front of the display means. A game machine J4 characterized in that it is arranged at a boundary with a game area when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine J4, the predetermined board is arranged at the boundary, so that the light is emitted from the back of the game area to the front side, unlike the case where the light effect is performed as a whole, only the display area side from the predetermined board. It is possible to execute an effect of irradiating light on the side of the game area or an effect of irradiating light only on the game area side.

A gaming machine J5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine J4, the predetermined substrate is fixedly arranged on a gaming board forming the gaming area on the front side.

According to the gaming machine J5, since the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the game board, the arrangement of the light-emitting means is reduced compared to, for example, the case where it is fixedly arranged on the inner surface of the back case in which the movable accessory or the like is arranged. degree of freedom can be improved.

In addition, since the electric wiring for supplying electricity to the light emitting means can be guided along the back surface of the game board to the outside of the back case, even if the back case side is visible through the window part of the game board, Also, since it is impossible to see the back side of the game board without looking around with a particularly wide field of view, it is possible to easily prevent the electric wiring from being seen by the player.

Furthermore, when the liquid crystal display device is arranged in the center of the rear case, the space for arranging the predetermined substrate is limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device. If so, the predetermined substrate can be arranged at an arbitrary position without being restricted by the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the predetermined substrate.

<Locking member to prevent misalignment of accessories during shipment>
Displacement means and limitation means capable of limiting the displacement of the displacement means are provided, and the limitation means has a first state that can act on the displacement means and a second state that cannot act on the displacement means. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state in the first state, and is configured to suppress the movement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction in the first state.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine provided with a movable accessory (displacement means) that is displaced downward from a standby position to the front of a liquid crystal display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of fixing and releasing the displacing means.

That is, while the game machine is configured so as to be able to operate normally after being installed, it is difficult to fix movable accessories even in a situation where a large vibration or external force may be applied to the game machine such as during shipping. Not configured to work.

Therefore, as a countermeasure for fixing the movable accessory at the time of shipment, the displacement of the movable accessory is suppressed by stuffing cushioning materials in the range where the movable accessory is displaced, and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. However, if the opening in the center of the game board is closed, the cushioning material cannot be easily removed, and the burden on the game hall may be increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, by changing the state of the restricting means, the restriction on the displacement of the displacing means can be released, so that the displacing means can be fixed and released satisfactorily.

On the other hand, unlike the case where the cushioning material is pulled out, the limiting means is not pulled out, so it is difficult to continue the game if an external force that may occur during the game causes a change in state easily. On the other hand, by configuring the restricting means to suppress unintended state changes in the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles during the game.

In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the limiting means is configured to be able to change between the first state and the second state when the power is not supplied.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the state change of the limiting means can be caused when the gaming machine is not energized, so that the occurrence of malfunction of the limiting means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the worker's work from becoming difficult in the state of power failure and in the restoration work from the state of power failure.

In the game machine K1 or K2, an urging means for urging the operation portion of the restriction means in a predetermined direction is provided, and the restriction means displaces the operation portion from a reference position by a predetermined amount in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. the operating portion is displaceable away from the reference position in the predetermined direction by the biasing force of the biasing means; A game machine K3 characterized in that it is arranged at a spaced position away from.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1 or K2, since the operation unit is arranged at the spaced position away from the reference position in the second state, opening and closing of the door, etc., are provided to the gaming machine after installation. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change of the limiter due to an external force that may be applied, and it is possible to easily prevent the state of the limiter from changing from the second state.

In any one of game machines K1 to K3, game machine K4 is characterized in that the operating portion of the restriction means is arranged outside area forming means for forming an area in which the displacement means can be displaced.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K1 to K3, since the operation section is arranged outside the area forming means, even if the displacement means is displaced due to the operation of the operation means, Contact of the displacement means with the operator can be avoided.

In any one of game machines K1 to K4, biasing means for biasing the operating portion of the limiting means in a predetermined direction is provided, and the limiting means moves the operating portion from a reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction by a predetermined amount. The restricting means includes guiding means for guiding displacement of the operating portion in the predetermined direction, and the guiding means is configured to change the state along with the displacement. A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it is configured to ensure an allowable displacement width (orientation change width) of the part.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K1 to K4, the operation means can be displaced in a direction intersecting with the predetermined direction. When an unknown load is applied, it is possible to easily prevent displacement in a predetermined direction, and it is possible to easily prevent the operation portion from being displaced by a predetermined amount. As a result, it is possible to avoid changing the state of the restricting means due to an unintended external force caused by opening or closing the door or the like.

In the game machine K5, the operating section includes an engaging section configured to be engageable with the guiding means, the biasing means is arranged at the center of the operating section, and the engaging section A game machine K6 characterized in that it is arranged at a position away from the center of the part.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5, even if an external force of unknown direction is applied to the limiting means in the first state of the limiting means, the operating portion is displaced about the engaging portion as a fulcrum. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change, which is limited to (posture change). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the limiting means from changing from the first state to the second state due to external forces such as opening and closing of the door, vibrations during shipping, and the like.

In the gaming machine K6, the restricting means is arranged on the back side of the area forming means configured to be rotatable on the support shaft on the left and right side, and the engaging portion is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft. A gaming machine K7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K6, the state of the restricting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging portion of the restricting means. It is possible to facilitate the operation when operating the control means. That is, when the front door is opened, the engaging portion is arranged on the side where the opening width is large (opposite side of the support shaft), so that the operating position of the restricting means can be further forward.

A gaming machine K8 characterized in that, in the gaming machine K7, the limiting means is arranged on the support shaft side of the area configuring means.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, the restricting means is arranged on the support shaft side, so that the operator who opens the front door for work is prevented from accidentally touching the restricting means. can do.

In addition, since the load applied to the restricting means when the front door is opened and closed can be reduced compared to the case where the restricting means is arranged on the opposite side of the support shaft, the restricting means can be displaced by the impact caused by the opening and closing of the front door. change can be prevented.

A gaming machine K9 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the displacement means guides the displacement of the limiting means in the first state.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the displacement guidance accuracy when the restriction means acts on the displacement means in a state where the displacement guidance accuracy of the restriction means alone is reduced is can be improved.

A gaming machine K10 characterized in that any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9 is provided with prevention notification means for notifying to prevent continuation of the energized state when energized in the first state.

According to the game machine K10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K1 to K9, the prevention notification means can notify to switch the state of the restriction means from the first state.

In addition, the mode of notification is not limited at all. For example, the error display may be notified by displaying it on a liquid crystal display device, or by outputting a notification sound from a speaker, or by illuminating a predetermined lighting means (or keeping it off). You can notify us by

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A gaming machine comprising a container for containing an object, comprising an operation means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, and an opening formed in the container at a position corresponding to the operation means. A gaming machine L0 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). The board box is sealed to prevent tampering with the control board.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operating means is provided on the control board, it is necessary to open the board box in order to operate the operating means. Therefore, there was a problem that it took time and effort.

According to the game machine L0, the operation means arranged on the object and formed to be operable is provided, and the container has an opening at a position corresponding to the operation means, so that the operation means can be operated through the opening. can be manipulated. That is, it is unnecessary to open the container when operating the operating means. Therefore, labor can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Board Boxes A100 and A2100 (Coating Parts A270 and A2270) as Examples>
In the game machine L0, the operation means has a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container has a facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. M1.

According to the game machine M1, in addition to the effects of the game machine L0, the operation means has the first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container has the facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the container through the opening.

In the game machine M1, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and the opposing portion is at least a range of the first surface of the operating means excluding the displacement trajectory of the operator. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that it is arranged facing a part of it.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, the facing portion is arranged to face at least a part of the range excluding the displacement trajectory of the manipulator in the first surface of the manipulator. In addition, the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing portion while suppressing the insertion of the operating element into the operating means and the displacement of the inserted operating element. Insertion can be suppressed.

In the game machine M1 or M2, the game machine M3 is characterized in that the facing portion is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end, so that the shape is simplified and moldability is improved. can be secured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

A game machine M4 characterized in that, in the game machine M3, a projection is provided in the facing portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M3, the opposing portion is provided with a projecting portion, so that the rigidity of the opposing portion can be increased and damage thereof can be suppressed.

In addition, the protrusion may be formed as a ridge extending in a streak shape.

In the game machine M4, the game machine M5 is characterized in that the projecting portion projects from a surface of the facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machine M4, the protrusion is provided so as to protrude from the surface of the opposing portion facing the first surface of the operation means, so that the first surface of the operation means and the opposing portion It is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the inside of the container through the gap by reducing the gap between the surfaces.

A gaming machine M6, wherein the protrusion is brought into contact with the first surface of the operating means in the gaming machine M5.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M5, the protrusion abuts against the first surface of the operation means, so that the contact portion and the first surface of the operation means are in contact with each other. It is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container by eliminating the gap between them.

In addition, since the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, even if the facing part is pushed by the operating element in the insertion direction when the operating element is inserted into the operating means, the facing part moves in the insertion direction. deformation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress damage to the base end side of the opposing portion.

In addition, since the facing portion is formed in a plate shape with a fixed base end and a free end, the elastic deformation of the facing portion is used to form and maintain the state in which the protrusion is in contact ( That is, it is possible to increase the degree of close contact and suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire.

A game machine M7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a ridge extending in a stripe shape.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a ridge extending in a stripe shape, so that the rigidity of the facing part can be further increased. At the same time, it is possible to easily suppress insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the container.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the operating means is operated by being displaced by inserting an operator, and the facing portion has an edge that abuts against the operator inserted into the operating means. A gaming machine M8 characterized in that it is formed in such a way that:

Here, if the manipulator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly manipulates the manipulator in the lateral direction or carelessly opens and closes the member in which the container is arranged) , and when the manipulator collides with another member and is pushed laterally, the manipulating means is also tilted, and the load on the base of the manipulating means (the part connected to the object) increases. In addition, when the displacement (for example, rotation) of the operator inserted into the operation means becomes excessive, the operation means is also displaced in the direction of the displacement, and the load on the base of the operation means (the part connected to the object) becomes large. Become. In these cases, there is a risk that the operating means will fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion that connects the operating means and the object will break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the opposing portion is formed such that the edge portion can abut against the operator inserted into the operating means. The manipulator (that is, the position farther from the fulcrum when the manipulator tilts) is brought into contact with the edge of the facing portion, thereby suppressing tilting and excessive displacement of the manipulator. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

A gaming machine M9 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the containing body comprises a covering portion covering one end side of the operating means.

According to the game machine M9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M1 to M8, the containing body is provided with the covering portion covering one end side of the operating means, so that the gap between the operating means and the covering portion is eliminated. It can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

Here, in the case where the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, if the operator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly When the operator is pushed laterally by colliding with another member by accidentally opening or closing the member in which the container is arranged, the operating means is also tilted, and the operating means is also tilted. The load on the base of the means (the part connected to the object) increases. In this case, there is a risk that the operating means will fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion that connects the operating means and the object will break).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, since the covering portion covers one end side of the operating means, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion, thereby suppressing the tilting of the operating means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

A game machine M10 characterized in that in the game machine M9, the outer shape of the base end side opposite to the one end side of the operating means is larger than the inner shape of the covering portion.

According to the game machine M10, in addition to the effects of the game machine M9, the outer shape of the operation means on the base end side opposite to the one end side is made larger than the inner shape of the cover, so that the operation means on the base end side and the covering portion can be curved. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion and the operation means has a bulging portion formed by swelling, and the other of the covering portion and the operation means has a receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion. A gaming machine M11 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effects of either the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion and the operation means has a bulging portion, and the other of the covering portion and the operation means Since the receiving portion is provided for receiving the bulging portion, the gap between the bulging portion and the receiving portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

A gaming machine M12 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction.

According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction. Excessive displacement (in particular, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In any one of game machines M1 to M12, game machine M13 is characterized in that the container has an erected wall erected from the inner surface thereof and whose erected end abuts against the object.

According to the game machine M13, in addition to the effects of the game machines M1 to M12, the container is provided with an erected wall erected from the inner surface of the container, the erected tip of which contacts the object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

A gaming machine M14 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M13, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means.

According to the game machine M14, in addition to the effects of the game machine M13, the erected wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means, so that it is possible to block the path for entering the container. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic parts are mounted, and the side on which the electronic parts are connected to the circuit of the control board by soldering is the side on which the operation means is arranged. is set on the opposite side of the gaming machine M15.

According to the game machine M15, in addition to the effects of the game machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic parts are mounted, and the surface of the control board for connecting the electronic parts to the circuit by soldering serves as the operation means. is set on the side opposite to the side on which the is arranged, so that the erected end of the erected wall can be easily brought into close contact with the object (control board), and the object (control board) and the erected wall It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between Therefore, the erected wall can reliably function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts, thereby suppressing the insertion of the foreign object such as a wire into the container.

A game machine M16 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines M13 to M15, the erected wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the erected tip is reduced.

According to the game machine M16, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M13 to M15, the standing wall is formed in a plate shape and the thickness dimension of the tip of the standing wall is reduced, so that the wall is brought into contact with the object. In addition, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire from between the object and the erected tip by increasing the surface pressure at the erected tip. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

A gaming machine M17 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M16, the erected tip of the erected wall has a tapered surface formed on the surface on the operation means side, thereby reducing the thickness dimension of the erected tip.

According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M16, the thickness dimension of the standing tip of the standing wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operating means side of the standing wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign matter such as a wire into the container while improving the moldability. That is, by forming the tapered surface, it is possible to moderate the shape change and ensure the fluidity of the resin in the mold. On the other hand, when the standing tip of the standing wall is brought into contact with the object, a groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening can be moved (guided) along the groove described above. That is, it can be made difficult to pass between the standing wall and the object. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In any one of the game machines M9 to M12, the container has one outer surface formed of a first region and a second region positioned closer to the object than the first region. A gaming machine M18 characterized in that the covering portion is protruded from two areas.

According to the game machine M18, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M9 to M12, the container is one of the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region. Since the side outer surface is formed and the covering portion protrudes from the second region, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased. Therefore, the area in which the covering portion covers the operating means (the area that suppresses the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire, and the area that contacts the operating means to suppress tilting and displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container and to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

The gaming machine M19 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, and the opening is formed on the projecting tip side of the covering portion.

According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion projects from the outer surface of the container, and an opening is formed on the projecting tip side of the covering portion, so that wires and the like can be removed. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a foreign object to reach the opening.

For example, when the opening cannot be visually recognized due to a shield, etc., and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening, the tip of the foreign object such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container to reach the opening. method is done. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M19, when the tip of a foreign object such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container, the tip of the foreign object such as the wire is caused to hit the outer surface of the covering portion, progress can be stopped. In other words, the outer surface of the covering portion can be made to function as a wall that restricts the sliding of foreign objects such as wires. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate box A100 (standing walls A280, A290) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and the containing body is formed so as to be able to abut against the operating means or the outer surface of the operator. Game machine N1 to play.

Here, if the manipulator inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, an operator carelessly manipulates the manipulator in the lateral direction or carelessly opens and closes the member in which the container is arranged) , and when the manipulator collides with another member and is pressed laterally), the manipulator is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, there is a risk that the displaced (tilted) operation means will be damaged (for example, the connecting part that connects the operation means and the object will come off or break).

On the other hand, according to the game machine N1, in addition to the effects of the game machine L0, the container is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the outer surface of the operation means or the operation element, so that the operation means or the operation element can be placed in the container. It is possible to receive and suppress the displacement of the operating means. As a result, damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

In game machine N1, game machine N2 is characterized in that the container has an erected wall erected from the inner surface thereof and whose erected end abuts against the object.

If the container receives the displaced (tilted) operating means, the container may be deformed and damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine N2, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1, the containing body is provided with an erected wall erected from the inner surface of the container and whose erected end contacts the object. serves as a support, and deformation of the container can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

At the same time, the deformation of the container is suppressed by the support of the erected wall, so that tilting of the operation means can be suppressed more reliably. As a result, damage to the operating means can be easily suppressed.

The game machine N3 is characterized in that, in the game machine N2, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2, the erected wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means, so that the erected wall is prevented from tilting in any direction of the operation means. As a support, deformation of the container can be suppressed. Therefore, breakage of the container can be suppressed.

In addition, the standing wall can block the path for entering the inside of the container. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted through the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the game machine N3, the erected wall is connected to an inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the erected wall is erected.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N3, the erected wall is connected to the inner surface of the container different from the inner surface of the container on which the erected wall is erected, so that the rigidity of the container is increased. can be used to increase the rigidity of the erected walls, and the connection between the inner surfaces can increase the rigidity of the entire container. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the function of the standing wall as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) for suppressing deformation of the container when the operation means is tilted. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

A gaming machine N5 in any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, wherein the containing body comprises a covering portion covering one end side of the operating means.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines N1 to N4, the containing body has a covering portion covering one end side of the operating means, so that the operating means is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion. Therefore, tilting of the operation means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

Further, according to the gaming machine N5, the one end side of the operating means is covered with the covering part, so that the gap between the operating means and the covering part can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted through the opening abuts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container.

In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, the container has a ridge protruding from the outer surface and extending in a streak shape, and one end of the ridge extends from the outer surface of the container. A gaming machine N6, characterized by being connected to the cover.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the housing body, and the housing body is provided with ridges that protrude from the outer surface and extend in a stripe shape. Since one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion, the ridge functions as a rib and the covering portion can be supported by the ridge. Therefore, the operation means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion, and tilting of the operation means can be suppressed, and breakage of the covering portion at that time can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In addition, since the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the area in which the covering portion covers the operating means (the area that suppresses the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire, and the area that contacts the operating means to suppress tilting and displacement of the operating means) can be made larger. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container and to prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the game machine N6, the container has a display portion formed on its outer surface to display predetermined information, and the display portion is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effects of the game machine N6, the container has a display portion formed on its outer surface to display predetermined information, and the display portion is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion. Therefore, the protrusion can also function as an indication line for indicating the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machine N6 or N7, the operation means has a first surface facing the opening of the housing body, and the operation means is operated by inserting the operator into the first surface and displacing the housing body. A game characterized in that the body is provided with a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means, and the facing portion is formed such that an edge portion can come into contact with the manipulator inserted into the operating means. Machine N8.

According to the game machine N8, in addition to the effects of the game machine N6 or N7, the operation means has a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container has a facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. Since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the container through the opening.

In addition, since the edge of the opposing portion is formed so as to be able to abut against the operation element inserted into the operation means, the operation element (that is, the position farther from the fulcrum when the operation means tilts) can be brought into contact with the part to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the manipulator. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and falling off of the operating means from the object can be suppressed.

In the game machine N8, the facing portion is arranged to face at least part of a range of the first surface of the operation means excluding the displacement trajectory of the manipulator.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N8, the opposing portion is arranged in at least a part of the range excluding the displacement trajectory of the operator in the first surface of the operator. The area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing portion while suppressing interference with the insertion into the operation means and the displacement of the inserted operation element, so that a foreign object such as a wire can be inserted into the container through the opening. can be suppressed.

Also, by increasing the area of the facing portion that abuts the displaced manipulator, it is possible to easily suppress excessive displacement of the manipulator (in particular, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction). As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive displacement of the operating means and prevent the operating means from falling off from the object.

In the gaming machine N9, the operating means is formed so as to be able to displace the operator to a first position, and the position at which one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is displaced to the first position. A gaming machine N10 characterized in that the child and the facing portion are positioned at abutting positions.

In the game machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed so as to be able to displace the operator to a second position different from the first position, and the position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is the first position. A gaming machine N11 characterized in that the operating element displaced to position 2 and the facing portion are positioned to abut against each other.

According to the game machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effects of the game machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed so that the operation element can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion. is a position where the manipulator displaced to the first position or the second position contacts the facing portion, so that the manipulator displaced to the first position or the second position contacts the facing portion. The ridges can be used to effectively prevent the facing portion and the covering portion from being damaged when they come into contact with each other.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (operation wall A210) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the container has one outer surface formed by a first region and a second region positioned closer to the object than the first region, and the opening is formed in the second region. is formed.

Here, since the operation means can be operated through the opening, it is unnecessary to open the container when operating the operation means. Therefore, labor can be suppressed. However, there is a risk that a foreign object such as a wire may be inserted through the opening.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, the container has one outer surface formed of the first region and the second region positioned closer to the object than the first region. Since the opening is formed in the container, the opening can be arranged at a position recessed from the outer surface of the container, and a step (connection surface) connecting the first area and the second area can be arranged around the opening. As a result, the distance to the opening can be increased and the position of the opening can be made difficult to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container through the opening. That is, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activity.

In the gaming machine O1, at least part of a connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area. O2.

Here, considering heat radiation from the object (control board), the container (board box) needs to secure a distance (internal space) between the object (control board) and the inner surface. On the other hand, if the opening is too far from the operating means, operability will deteriorate. Therefore, by forming the opening in the second region, it is possible to easily ensure the operability of the operating means, and as described above, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container through the opening. . However, when operating the operating means, the operator's hand interferes with the step (connecting surface) between the first area and the second area, which interferes with the operation. Therefore, there is a possibility that the operability of operating the operating means may deteriorate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, since at least a part of the connecting surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, the gaming machine In addition to the effect of O1, the downward slope expands the space connected to the second area, thereby improving the operability when operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine O2, the second area is formed as a generally rectangular area in a front view, the length dimension along one direction being larger than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction, and the operation means includes an operation A game machine O3 characterized in that the operation element is operated by being inserted and displaced, and the attitude of the operation element when the operation element is inserted into the operation means or pulled out from the operation means is the attitude along the other direction. .

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, the second area is a generally rectangular area in a front view whose length dimension along one direction is greater than the length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction. , and the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing the operation element, and the attitude of the operation element when the operation element is inserted into or pulled out from the operation means is the attitude along the other direction. A space can be secured on the opposite side of the gripping surface by directing the surface for gripping the child in the longitudinal direction of the second region. Therefore, when the manipulator is inserted into or pulled out from the manipulator, it is possible to prevent the fingers holding the manipulator from interfering with the container. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the longitudinal center of the second area, and the connection surface located on one longitudinal side of the second area extends from the first area to the second area. A gaming machine O4 characterized by being inclined downward toward an area.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effects of the game machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the longitudinal center of the second area, and the connecting surface located on the one longitudinal side of the second area is the second area. Since it is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, it is possible to suppress interference of fingers other than the gripping fingers with the container when gripping and displacing the manipulator. For example, when the manipulator is gripped with the index finger and thumb and the manipulator is displaced (for example, rotated), the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface and the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region are A space for moving the little finger side can be secured, and interference between the little finger side and the container can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

A game machine O5 characterized in that, in the game machine O4, the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second area.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O4, the connecting surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second area. Means can be protected. For example, it is possible to suppress damage to the operating means by suppressing interference with other members during manufacturing. In addition, it is possible to prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container through the opening by making it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening.

In addition, since the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be expanded accordingly. The volume of the internal space of the container can be increased.

In any one of the game machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction of the second area, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the short direction of the second area. A gaming machine O6 characterized by:

According to the game machine O6, in any one of the game machines O3 to O5, a connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction in the second area, and no connection surface is formed on the other side in the short direction in the second area. , the other side of the second region in the short direction can be opened. Therefore, when the manipulator is gripped with fingers and operated (insertion into the operating means, withdrawal from the manipulating means, or displacement (eg, rotation) of the manipulator), the gripped fingers (eg, thumb and forefinger) The above-described open space can be used as a space for arranging or displacing a finger different from the finger. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

In any one of game machines O3 to O6, the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, and the other connecting surfaces are inclined downward from the first area. A gaming machine O7 characterized by being substantially orthogonal to the area and the second area.

According to the game machine O7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, and the other Since the connection surface of is substantially perpendicular to the first region and the second region, it is possible to secure the effect of downwardly sloping the connection surface while coping with heat dissipation from the object (control board). The volume of the internal space can be secured. That is, it is possible to minimize the reduction in the volume of the internal space of the container due to the downward inclination of the connection surface.

The game machine O4 or O5 comprises a base body on which the container is disposed, and a rotating shaft that rotatably supports the base body, and the longitudinal direction of the second region is the axial direction of the rotating shaft. It is characterized by being substantially orthogonal and having a lateral direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal side of the second region being arranged farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal side. game machine O8.

According to the game machine O8, in addition to the effects of the game machine O4 or O5, the base body on which the container is arranged and the rotation shaft rotatably supporting the base body are provided, and the longitudinal direction in the second region is provided. The direction is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, the lateral direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one longitudinal side of the second region is arranged farther from the rotating shaft than the other longitudinal side. Therefore, when the operating means is operated in the space formed by rotating the base body around the rotation axis, the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface can be effectively utilized. That is, it is possible to secure a space for allowing a worker's (operator's) hand to access the operation means by the amount of the space formed by the downward inclination of the connecting surface. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability when operating the operating means.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A game machine having a container for containing an object, comprising: a display device arranged in a game area; A gaming machine P1 characterized in that information can be displayed on the display device.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operating means are arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the operating state of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine P1, it is provided with a display device arranged in a game area and operation means arranged on an object and formed to be operable, and information regarding operation of the operation means can be displayed on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the operation means based on the display of the display device. In addition, by arranging the display means in the game area, the display means can also be used as a device for displaying information about the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

A game machine P2, wherein the container is formed to be displaceable in the game machine P1.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, since the container is formed displaceable, the container is arranged (displaced) at a position where the operation means can operate while viewing the display device. be able to. As a result, it is possible to operate while confirming the display (information), so that operability can be improved and operation errors can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the operation means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

In the game machine P2, the containing body can be displaced to a position where the surface of the containing body on which the operating means is arranged and the display surface of the display device can be viewed at the same time. P3.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P2, the container can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the container are arranged and the display surface of the display device can be viewed simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of operating the operating means while checking the display on the display device. As a result, improvement in operability and suppression of erroneous operations can be achieved more reliably.

In the game machine P3, the container is rotatably pivotally supported, and the operation means is arranged farther from the center of the container than the center of the container.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P3, the container is rotatably pivotally supported, and the operation means is arranged farther from the center of the container than the center of the container. In a state in which the container is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the container are arranged and the display surface of the display device are visible at the same time, the operation means is moved to a position farther from the outer edge of the main body of the game machine. can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fingers operating the operation means from interfering with the outer edge of the game machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

In the gaming machine P4, the operation means is composed of a plurality of means, and the second operation means, which is operated more frequently than the first operation means, is farther from the pivotally supported position than the first operation means. A gaming machine P5 characterized in that it is arranged in the .

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects of the game machine P4, the operation means are composed of a plurality of means, and the second operation means, which has a higher frequency of operation than the first operation means, is operated more frequently than the first operation means. Since it is arranged on the far side from the pivotally supported position, the frequently operated operating means (first operating means) can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the main body of the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the finger from interfering with the outer edge of the main body of the game machine when operating the operating means (first operating means) with high operating frequency. As a result, operability can be improved.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as examples>
A game machine comprising a container for containing an object, comprising an operating means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, wherein one or more electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the A game machine Q1 characterized in that whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the state of connection of an electrical connection line to the object.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operation means is provided on the control board (object), there is room for improvement in terms of whether or not the operation means can be operated. That is, if operation is permitted regardless of the state of connection of one or more electrical connection lines to an object, there is a risk that the operation means will be more likely to be operated illegally. If the operation is prohibited regardless of the state, there is a risk that the workability of the operation associated with the operation of the operation means will be deteriorated.

According to the gaming machine Q1, an operation means is provided on an object and formed to be operable, one or a plurality of electrical connection lines are connected to the object, and the electrical connection line is connected to the object. Since whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the state, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

A gaming machine Q2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine Q1, the container is formed to be displaceable.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q1, the container is displaceable, so that the container can be arranged (displaced) at a position where the operation means can be easily operated. As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, when the operation means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), so that it is possible to suppress fraud. In this case, when displacing the container, at least one electrical connection wire is released (pulled out) from the object, so whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection wire. This configuration is particularly effective in suppressing fraud and improving workability.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state in which at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected to the object. Q3.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is permitted in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line among the electrical connection lines is connected. It is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability. That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, the operation of the operation means is prohibited, so that fraud can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the connection of a predetermined electrical connection line to the object is secured and fraud can be suppressed, the operation means can be used even if other electrical connection lines are released (pulled out) from the object. By permitting the operation, it is possible to improve workability (ensuring versatility).

In particular, in a configuration in which the container is made displaceable, another electrical connection line released (unplugged) from the object in order to displace the container (i.e., arrange it for easy operation) can be connected to the container. After displacing the other electrical connection line that has been released (pulled out), for example, by interposing an extension line between the object and the other electrical connection line in order to allow the operation of the operation means avoids the trouble of reconnecting to the object.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, when at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object, the operation of the operating means is prohibited. Q4.

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q1 or Q2, when at least one of the electrical connection lines is disconnected from the object (that is, all electrical connections If the line is not connected to the object), the operation of the operating means is prohibited, so that the illegal operation of the operating means can be suppressed.

In addition, in a configuration in which the container is formed to be displaceable, another electrical connection line released (pulled out) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, to arrange it so that it is easy to operate) is connected to the container. After displacing , for example, by interposing an extension wire between the object and another electrical connection line and reconnecting the released (disconnected) other electrical connection line to the object, the operation Since it is possible to allow the operation of the means, it is possible to perform work by operating the operation means.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A3100 and A4100 as examples>
A game machine having a container for containing an object, comprising an operating means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, the container being formed to be displaceable and arranged during a game. The game machine R1 is characterized in that it can be displaced to a position where the operation means is easier to operate than the position.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine having a substrate box (accommodating body) that accommodates a control substrate (object) is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the operating means is arranged on the control board (object), there is a problem that the operability of the operating means is insufficient.

According to the game machine R1, the operation means arranged on the object and formed to be operable is provided, and the container is formed to be displaceable, and the operation means is easier to operate than the position where it is arranged during the game. Since the position can be displaced, the operability of the operating means can be improved.

In the game machine R1, the container is rotatably pivotally supported and is displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1, the container is rotatably pivotally supported and displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion, so that the container is displaced. Structure can be simplified. As a result, product costs can be reduced.

In the game machine R1 or R2, the game machine R3 is characterized in that, in the position where the container is disposed during the game, a separate member faces the operation means.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1 or R2, the container faces the operation means at the position where the container is arranged during the game, so that the operation means is illegally operated. can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operator, and in a state in which the operator is inserted, the operator is brought into contact with the separate member to operate the operating means. The game machine R4 is characterized in that the container cannot be displaced to the position where it is disposed during the game.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effects of the game machine R3, the operation means is operated by inserting the operator and displacing it, and when the operator is inserted, the operator contacts another member. By being in contact, the containing body cannot be displaced to the position where it is disposed during a game, so that it is possible to prevent forgetting to pull out the manipulator. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegal use of the operator.

<One guide route has a portion located higher than the other guide route>
A game machine comprising a game area in which game balls flow down, a first state that constitutes a guide route capable of guiding game balls, and a route configuration means that can be switched between a second state that does not configure the guide route, The route configuration means can configure a first guide route and a second guide route different from the first guide route as the guide routes, and the first guide route is more suitable than the second guide route. A game machine XA1, characterized by comprising an upper arrangement portion arranged on the upper side of the game machine XA1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the detecting means is arranged so that the detection opening of the big winning opening is oriented sideways, and the operation member for rolling the balls toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. A game in which a predetermined number or more of balls are prevented from passing through the detection opening of the detection means by dropping the balls that have been on the guide path on the operation member at the time of the operation, triggered by passing through the opening. There is a machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the ball dropped from the guide path is directed toward the out port. There is a problem that there is a risk of causing a difference in game efficiency.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, even if the game ball falls from the first guide path, if the game ball falls from the upper arrangement portion, the game ball is rescued to the second position. 2 It can be put on the guidance route. Since the rescued game balls are guided to a predetermined ball entry area, compared to the structure in which many balls that have fallen from the guide path go to the out hole as spilled balls, the game can be played according to the way of playing. Efficiency changes can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine XA1, the ball-entering area includes a first ball-entering area and a second ball-entering area different from the first ball-entering area, and the first guide path leads to the first ball-entering area. A game ball is configured to be guided, the second guide path is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the second ball entry area, and the second guide path is arranged above the first guide path. A game machine XA2 characterized by comprising an upper arrangement portion that

According to the gaming machine XA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XA1, even if the game ball falls from the second guide path, if the game ball falls from the upper arrangement portion of the second guide path , the game ball can be put on the first guide route by rescuing it. That is, it is possible to achieve the effect of suppressing the change in game efficiency not only for the game ball falling from the first guide path but also for the game ball falling from the second guide path.

A game machine XA3, wherein in the game machine XA1 or XA2, the first guide route and the second guide route are configured to intersect when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine XA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XA1 or XA2, the upper arrangement portion of one guide route can be arranged above (directly above) the other guide route.

Note that the crossing position is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the center of the first guide route and the center of the second guide route may intersect. In this case, the easiness of rescue becomes equal between the left and right sides.

For example, the lower side of the first guide route and the lower side of the second guide route may intersect. In this case, the distance from the crossing position to the first and second ball entry areas is shortened, which has the advantage of shortening the period in which the game ball flows down the opponent's path, and it can be placed above the crossing position. There is an advantage that the number of game balls can be increased.

For example, the first guide route above the center and the second guide route above the center may intersect.

For example, the first guide route below the center and the second guide route above the center may intersect. In this case, it is easier to save the game ball when it falls from the first guide path side to the second guide path side than in the opposite case.

In this case, the movable member that constitutes the first guide path is composed of a feather member that rotates and displaces upward so as to rescue the ball, thereby facilitating the rescue of the game ball falling from the second guide path. Also good.

In any one of the gaming machines XA1 to XA3, a first route forming means for forming the first guide route and a second route forming means for forming the second guide route are provided, and the first route forming means is configured to form the second guide route. The game machine XA4 is characterized by comprising a relief part projecting through the lower side of the path constructing means.

It should be noted that there are cases in which the first path configuring means can achieve the same effect without going through the lower side than the second path configuring means. For example, even when projecting above the second path constructing means, if the vertical difference is less than the radius of the game ball, the first path constructing means is made to slip below the center of the game ball. is possible, and the game ball can be easily placed on the first path forming means.

Furthermore, in the description of crawling below the center of the game ball, at least the point where contact with the game ball starts should be below the center of the ball. That is, for example, even if the part other than the point where the game ball starts contacting is arranged above the center of the ball, the game ball is pushed upward after contact with the game ball. It can be placed on the first route constructing means.

The game machine XA5, wherein the relief part constitutes the lower flow path of the first guide path in the game machine XA4.

According to the gaming machine XA5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XA4, it is possible to save a game ball that is about to enter the first ball entry area.

A game machine XA6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines XA3 to XA5, the inclination of the first guide path and the inclination of the second guide path are horizontally opposite to each other.

According to the game machine XA6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines XA3 to XA5, the vertical width in which the first guide path and the second guide path are arranged can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines XA3 to XA6, it is arranged on the first guide route or the second guide route on the lower side (disadvantage side) of the intersection position between the first guide route and the second guide route. The game machine XA7 is characterized in that it is configured so that the number of game balls is one.

According to the game machine XA7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines XA3 to XA6, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of loose balls.

In the gaming machine XA7, the game machine XA8 is characterized in that decelerating means for decelerating a game ball is arranged above the intersection position (advantageous side) than below the intersection position.

According to the gaming machine XA8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XA7, by decelerating the game ball by the decelerating means, the interval between the game balls before and after passing through the decelerating means can be adjusted.

In addition, since the position of the game ball can be notified to the player by the change in the speed of the game ball, the player's attention to the game ball can be improved. That is, it is possible to easily grasp whether the game ball is arranged on the advantageous side or the disadvantageous side of the crossing position, depending on the flowing speed of the game ball.

<Guidance route configuration means for obtaining a feeling of hitting the ball>
A first state comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a predetermined ball entry area into which the game ball that has flowed down the game area can enter, and a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the ball entry area; In a gaming machine comprising path construction means capable of switching between a second state in which the guide path is not constructed and a second state in which the guide path is not constructed, the path construction means determines whether a game ball that has reached the guide path enters the ball entry area. The game machine XB1 is characterized in that the period can be changed in a plurality of types.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the detecting means is arranged so that the detection opening of the big winning opening is oriented sideways, and the operation member for rolling the balls toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. A game in which a predetermined number or more of balls are prevented from passing through the detection opening of the detection means by dropping the balls that have been on the guide path on the operation member at the time of the operation, triggered by passing through the opening. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the flow-down path to the operating member is almost the same, the game balls are spaced apart in a normal shooting mode (a mode in which game balls are continuously shot at specified intervals). Since the game ball is easily reached and is guided to the detection port along the upper surface of the operating member (operating member 100), the flow speed of the game ball is easily suppressed, so that the game ball is continuously delivered to the detection port without a gap. It was difficult for the situation to pass through. Therefore, there is a problem that it is easy to have a gap between payouts, and it is difficult to give the player a feeling of hitting the ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XB1, since the path construction means is configured to be able to change the period until the game ball passes through the ball entry area, the intervals at which the game ball reaches the path construction means are equal. Even if there is an interval, since the interval between the game balls can be changed in the path constructing means, by reducing the interval between the two specific game balls, the game balls continuously pass through the ball entry area. can be generated. As a result, even when the game is played in the above-described normal shooting mode, it is possible to intentionally cause the game balls to be paid out at short intervals, thereby giving the player a feeling of hitting the ball.

Note that various modes are exemplified for the means for changing the period. For example, a mode in which the ball-entering area to which the game ball is guided may be switched midway, or a mode in which the game ball can reach different positions in the guide path of the ball-entering area may be employed.

In the game machine XB1, a plurality of flow-down routes to the guide route are configured so that the distance between one flow-down route and the ball-entering area is different from the distance between the other flow-down route and the ball-entering area. A gaming machine XB2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine XB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XB1, it is possible to easily shift the arrival timing of the game balls to the ball entry area even when the game balls are shot at equal intervals. As a result, it is possible to change the interval between the game balls entering the ball entering area.

A gaming machine XB3, in the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, wherein the ball-entering area comprises a first ball-entering area and a second ball-entering area.

According to the gaming machine XB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the game balls entering the ball entering area are changed or switched by changing or switching the ball entering area guided by the path configuration means. can be varied.

In the gaming machine XB3, the path construction means can change between a first guide state for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering area and a second guide state for guiding the game ball to the second ball entering area. A gaming machine XB4 characterized by comprising a state changing means configured as:

According to the gaming machine XB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XB3, it is possible to easily change the interval between the game balls entering the ball entry area by changing the state of the state changing means.

In addition, the mode of the state changing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one that is electrically controlled, or one whose state is changed by contact with a ball (a pendulum member or a seesaw-shaped member).

The gaming machine XB5 in the gaming machine XB4 is characterized in that the state changing means is electrically controlled so as to be capable of shortening the ball entry interval of the game ball into the ball entry area in a predetermined period after the state change.

According to the gaming machine XB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XB4, it is possible to facilitate the continuous ball-entering in the predetermined period after the state change. As a result, it is possible to generate unevenness in payout of prize balls by entering the ball entering area, and to suppress over-winning as compared to the case of shortening the ball entering interval in a predetermined period before the state change. can be done.

In any one of the gaming machines XB3 to XB5, the guide path includes a first guide path configured to guide the game ball to the first ball entering area and a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the second ball entering area. and a deceleration means for decelerating the game ball in the advantageous side range of the first guide path in which the game ball placed can reach the second guide path. A game machine XB6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine XB6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines XB3 to XB5, the game balls are decelerated by the decelerating means on the first guide path, and in a state where the interval between the game balls is narrowed, the second When the game ball reaches the guide path, it is possible to narrow the ball-entering interval to the second ball-entering area.

<Two plates play the role of an opening and closing plate>
A game machine comprising a game area in which game balls flow down, a first state that constitutes a guide route capable of guiding game balls, and a route configuration means that can be switched between a second state that does not configure the guide route, The path forming means comprises first and second forming means configured to be displaceable to form the guide path, and a guide path for reducing a gap between the first and second forming means. A game machine XC1 comprising: gap reducing means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a pair of movable members that are rotated and opened and closed by a rotating shaft extending on the front side of the game board form a guide path that guides game balls toward the same detection opening. There are gaming machines that

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, a gap is provided between the movable members in order to prevent the game ball from being caught. There is a problem that there is a risk of adverse effects such as slippage or game balls getting caught in the gaps.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XC1, the clearance reducing means reduces the gap between the first constituting means and the second constituting means, so that when the game ball rolls, the first constituting means or the second constituting means It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the is displaced or the game ball is caught in the gap.

Incidentally, the mode of the gap reducing means is not limited at all. For example, the first and second constituent means may be configured to be displaceable, and arranged to face each other so as to be in contact with each other in the displacement direction. In this case, the gap can be filled in the contact state. Further, for example, the first and second constituent means may be configured to be displaceable, arranged opposite to each other on the side orthogonal to the displacement direction, and configured to gradually narrow the gap (the gap is eliminated). It may be made to slide afterwards). In this case, the load applied to the first and second constituent means can be reduced.

In addition, the mode of the gap reducing means is not limited at all. For example, when the first forming means and the second forming means form the same straight guide path, the means may be formed so as to narrow the gap generated in a part of the straight line, or the first forming means may form the guide path. If the guide route and the guide route formed by the second composing means are different (for example, if they are not on the same straight line), the means configured to narrow the interval between the different guide routes may be used.

In addition, the displacement direction of the first component and the second component is not limited at all. For example, they may be parallel to each other or non-parallel to each other.

In the game machine XC1, the game machine XC2 is characterized in that the gap reducing means is arranged in a partitioning member that partitions the guide path.

According to the gaming machine XC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XC1, the gap reducing means can be easily arranged. In addition, the mode of the gap reducing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a fixed portion or a movable portion.

In addition, when the gap reducing means is a fixed part, it may be arranged, for example, on the design member arranged on the front side of the guide path, or it may be arranged on the opposite side (back side) of the design member. It may be arranged on a member.

In the game machine XC1 or XC2, the gap reducing means suppresses displacement of the first or second constituting means in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first or second constituting means. A gaming machine XC3 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine XC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XC1 or XC2, the gap reducing means improves the stability of the arrangement of the first or second constituting means in the direction intersecting the displacement direction. can be done. The mode of intersection of the displacement directions is not limited at all, and may be any direction that is non-parallel to the displacement direction of the first component or the second component.

In any one of the game machines XC1 to XC3, the clearance reducing means reduces the first or second constituent means at least partly while the first or second constituent means is stopped or displaced. A game machine XC4 characterized in that it is configured to support.

According to the gaming machine XC4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines XC1 to XC3, the member supporting the first constituent means or the second constituent means can also serve as the gap reducing means, so that the number of members can be increased. It is possible to achieve functionalization and a reduction in the arrangement space of members.

In any one of the game machines XC1 to XC5, the game machine XC6 is characterized in that the gap reducing means is configured integrally with the first component means or the second component means.

According to the game machine XC6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines XC1 to XC5, the gap reduction means can be displaced by displacing the first component means or the second component means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid reduction in the degree of freedom in designing the guide route.

A gaming machine XC7 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines XC1 to XC6, the displacement direction of the first constituent means and the displacement direction of the second constituent means are non-parallel.

According to the game machine XC7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines XC1 to XC6, the gap after the displacement is made non-parallel in the displacement direction compared to the gaps before the displacement of the first constituent means and the second constituent means. It can be narrowed down by using

Note that the oblique displacement mode means an oblique direction with respect to the front, rear, left, and right directions as the normal displacement direction of the path forming means, but is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement directions of both the first and second structuring means may be oblique, or one of the first structuring means and the second structuring means may be oblique.

In the former case, the displacement directions of both the first and second constituent means are arranged obliquely, and the case where the displacement directions are parallel to each other is excluded. That is, the displacement direction of the first component and the displacement direction of the second component are required to be relatively oblique (non-parallel). This non-parallel may not be parallel, and the relative angle of the displacement direction may be 90 degrees.

The direction of oblique displacement of the route forming means is not limited at all. The effect of rubbing the game ball can be expected due to the frictional resistance of the As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the game ball entering the ball entering area.

Also, in the first configuration means or the second configuration means, the displacement directions do not have to be non-parallel to each other throughout the displacement. That is, for example, it may be composed of both a section with parallel displacement directions and a section with non-parallel displacement directions.

<Auxiliary Means Constituting Guidance Route Together with Variable Means>
A game machine comprising a game area in which game balls flow down, a first state that constitutes a guide route capable of guiding game balls, and a route configuration means that can be switched between a second state that does not configure the guide route, The game machine XD1 is characterized in that the route constructing means comprises displaceable variable means and auxiliary means for assisting the guide route.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine configured so that a game ball is guided along the upper surfaces of the opening/closing members 30a and 31a (variable means) (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-159997). reference). Originally, the opening and closing members 30a and 31a should be free-form in design. , 31a need to be thickly designed, and the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing members 30a, 31a is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine XD1, since the guide route is composed of not only the variable means but also the variable means and the auxiliary means, it is possible to eliminate the need to receive the load from the game ball only by the variable means. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the variable means, for example, it is possible to form the variable means to be thin.

Furthermore, as another effect of configuring the variable means with a thin wall, the weight of the variable means can be reduced, so that the displacement speed of the variable means can be improved and the size of the drive means for driving the variable means can be reduced. .

A gaming machine XD2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine XD1, it comprises collision suppression means configured to suppress collision of the game ball against the auxiliary means.

According to the game machine XD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine XD1, it is possible to prevent damage to the auxiliary means. In addition, the mode of the collision suppression means is not limited at all. For example, by forming a pocket-shaped portion that allows a ball to enter above the auxiliary means, the ball falling above the auxiliary means may be discharged from the game area through the pocket-shaped portion. You may make it form the roof-shaped part which prevents the fall of.

A gaming machine XD3, wherein in the gaming machine XD1 or XD2, the auxiliary means is configured to be able to guide the displacement of the variable means.

According to the game machine XD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XD1 or XD2, the auxiliary means can be used not only as means for constructing the guide path of the game ball, but also as means for guiding the displacement of the variable means. .

Note that the variable means and the auxiliary means may be configured separately or integrally. In the case of an integral configuration, for example, the variable means may be the rolling surface forming portion, and the auxiliary means may be the forming portion that is displaced integrally with the rolling surface forming portion.

In the game machine XD3, the auxiliary means is configured to suppress displacement of the variable means in a direction non-parallel to the displacement direction.

According to the game machine XD4, in addition to the effects of the game machine XD3, the arrangement of the variable means after being displaced can be stabilized by the auxiliary means.

A game machine XD5, wherein in the game machine XD3 or XD4, the auxiliary means is configured to be interlockable with the variable means.

According to the game machine XD5, in addition to the effects of the game machine XD3 or XD4, the degree of freedom in setting the action of the auxiliary means can be improved compared to the case where the auxiliary means are fixedly arranged.

For example, by arranging the variable means at a position where the variable means avoids the play area while the auxiliary means closes the ball entry area, it is possible to reduce the arrangement space within the game area for the path construction means when the ball entry area is closed. can. As a result, it is possible to widen the game ball flow down range of the game area in the closed state of the entering ball area, and to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game area.

In addition, for example, as an auxiliary means, fixed ridges are arranged from the width direction of the guide path, and when trying to produce a deceleration action of the game ball, a plurality of guide paths are formed, and only a specific guide path is decelerated. Attempting to produce an effect can be difficult when multiple guide paths are closely spaced. On the other hand, by constructing the auxiliary means so as to be interlocked with the variable means, it is possible to easily cause a deceleration action to occur in a specific guide route.

In any one of game machines XD1 to XD5, game machine XD6 is characterized in that the auxiliary means is configured to be able to change the flowing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine XD6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines XD1 to XD5, it is possible to set the flow-down path of the game ball on the guide path independently (separately) from the arrangement of the variable means.

In the game machine XD6, the game machine XD7 is characterized in that the auxiliary means changes the flow direction of the game ball by changing the arrangement of the variable means.

According to the game machine XD7, in addition to the effects of the game machine XD6, it is possible to cause a plurality of types of changes in the flow-down mode of the game ball by the same auxiliary means. In addition, the cause of the change in the action of the auxiliary means on the game ball due to the different arrangement of the variable means is not limited at all. For example, it may be caused by the fact that the game ball and the auxiliary means are blocked due to the different arrangement of the variable means, and the game ball does not reach the auxiliary means, or the arrangement of the variable means is different. Therefore, the falling state of the game ball when contacting the auxiliary means may be different depending on whether it is a rolling state or a falling state.

<Guidance from the middle position of the guide route>
A game machine comprising a game area in which game balls flow down, a first state that constitutes a guide route capable of guiding game balls, and a route configuration means that can be switched between a second state that does not configure the guide route, A predetermined ball entry area is provided in which game balls deviating from the guide path are arranged so as to be able to enter the ball entry area, and the ball entry area includes at least part of the game balls deviating from the guide path from a midway position of the guide path. A game machine XE1 characterized in that it is configured so that a ball can be entered.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game in which a first start prize winning port and a second start prize winning port are arranged above a special variable prize winning ball device 7 that guides a game ball to a ball entering area. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). In this case, there is an advantage that the game can be easily understood by the player because the game ball can be shot and aimed at the same position. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, a plurality of winning openings (ball-entering areas) are arranged vertically, and the lower winning opening is hidden by the upper winning opening. There is a high possibility that the ball deviated from the mouth will also deviate from the lower winning mouth, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the player's interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XE1, since it is configured so that a game ball deviating from the guide route can easily enter the ball entry area, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine XE1, the gaming machine XE2 is characterized in that at least part of the ball entry area is arranged at a height between the lower end position and the upper end position of the path constructing means.

According to the gaming machine XE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XE1, by arranging the ball entry area at a height position inside the vertical width of the path construction means, the vertical distance between the path construction means and the ball entry area is reduced. can be shortened, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the game ball deviates to the left and right of the ball entry area.

In addition, even when a plurality of ball-entering areas are arranged so as to overlap vertically, the extent to which the vertical width increases can be reduced, and the plurality of ball-entering areas can be freely arranged in a limited-sized game area. degree can be improved.

In the gaming machine XE1 or XE2, the path construction means constructs a second guide path along which a game ball is guided to the ball entry area, and a game ball deviating from the second guide path enters the second ball entry area. A gaming machine XE3 characterized by being configured so that a ball can be played.

According to the gaming machine XE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XE1 or XE2, the path configuration means includes a second guide path for guiding the game ball to the ball-entering area and a path for guiding the game ball to the second ball-entering area. can be configured, and a game ball deviated from one path can be placed on the other path. As a result, the attention of the path construction means can be improved as compared with the case where the path construction means guides the game ball to a single ball entry area.

In the game machine XE3, the guide route and the second guide route are configured to intersect at a predetermined position, and the downward inclination direction of the guide route and the downward inclination direction of the second guide route are opposite to each other. A gaming machine XE4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine XE4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XE3, on the side where one guidance route is arranged downward with respect to a predetermined position as a boundary, the other guidance route is arranged upward. The vertical width required for arrangement can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the guide route, the second guide route, the (first) ball-entering area, and the second ball-entering area.

In the gaming machine XE1, the gaming machine XE5 is characterized in that the ball entry area is arranged at a vertical position of the path constructing means.

According to the gaming machine XE5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XE1, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball that has deviated from the guide path or the ball-entering area to reach the ball-entering area or the guide path.

It should be noted that the placement of the ball entry area is not limited at all. For example, the ball entry area may be arranged above or below the path forming means.

Also, the form of the ball entry area is not limited at all. For example, the ball entry area may be configured as a starting opening, may be configured as a general winning opening, may be configured as a normal winning opening, or may be configured as a special winning opening, It may be configured as a discharge port (out port).

In any one of the game machines XE1 to XE5, a control means is provided, and the route configuration means is switchable between a first state that configures the guide route and a second state that configures the second guide route. The game machine XE6 is characterized in that the control means is configured to be able to execute control for switching the path construction means between the first state and the second state based on a predetermined pattern.

According to the gaming machine XE6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines XE1 to XE5, by selecting a pattern for switching the state of the path configuration means, the game ball deviating from the (first) ball entering area is the second entering ball. It is possible to configure a case where it is easy to guide the area and a case where it is difficult to guide the game ball that has deviated from the (first) ball-entering area to the second ball-entering area.

<Displacement directions of a plurality of opening/closing plates arranged in the flow-down path face each other>
A first state comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a predetermined ball entry area into which the game ball that has flowed down the game area can enter, and a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the ball entry area; In a gaming machine comprising a path configuration means capable of switching between a second state in which the guide path is not configured and a second state in which the guide path is not configured, the ball-entering area includes a first ball-entering area and a second ball-entering area. The configuration means includes first path configuration means configured to be displaceable so as to configure a first guide path configured to guide the game ball to the first ball entry area, and a game ball to the second ball entry area. a second route configuring means configured to be displaceable so as to configure a second guide route configured to be guided to the direction of displacement of the first route configuring means and the displacement direction of the second route configuring means; and are directed toward each other.

Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which the opening/closing members 30a and 31a (path configuring means) are configured to be displaced to the same side (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-159997). . However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is expected that a game ball that deviates from one opening and closing member (flows down the right side of the opening and closing member) will also deviate from other opening members in the same way. There is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of attracting the player's attention.

That is, when the game ball continues to flow down the game area without being rescued by the opening/closing member 31a on the upstream side, if it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the next opening/closing member 30a will rescue the game ball, the vertical width of the game area can be increased. It is easy to maintain the player's willingness to play by making use of the entire area to show the player the falling game balls. This makes the player feel that there is a low possibility of being rescued by the player, and it is difficult to guide the player's line of sight to the downstream side.

On the other hand, according to the game machine XF1, the direction of opening displacement of the first path configuring means faces the opposite side of the direction of opening displacement of the second path configuring means, so that the game ball deviates from the path configuring means on the upstream side. becomes easier to go to the downstream route constructing means. As a result, a game ball that deviates from the path constructing means on the upstream side can be easily rescued (picked up) on the downstream side, so that the player can handle the game ball that deviates from the path constructing means on the upstream side. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the ball may be picked up by other path constructing means, and to easily attract the player's attention to the game ball.

In the game machine XF1, one of the first guide route and the second guide route is arranged above the other of the game machine XF2.

According to the gaming machine XF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XF1, it is possible to make it easier to prevent (easily save) game balls from falling out by utilizing the vertical difference.

In the game machine XF1 or XF2, the game machine XF3 is characterized in that the first route construction means and the second route construction means are constructed so as to intersect when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine XF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XF1 or XF2, by setting the displacement direction along a predetermined direction, one path construction means is divided into the other path construction means at the crossing position. configuration can be made unnecessary. Therefore, both path forming means can be formed non-divided.

In any one of the gaming machines XF1 to XF3, the gaming machine XF4 is characterized in that the first path configuring means is arranged on the same side with respect to the second path configuring means before and after displacement. .

According to the game machine XF4, in any of the game machines XF1 to XF3, since the first path construction means does not pass through the second path construction means before and after displacement, both path construction means are formed in a non-divided manner. be able to.

In any one of the gaming machines XF1 to XF4, the first path constructing means is arranged on the same side as the second path constructing means in a predetermined first direction, and is located on a predetermined line crossing the first direction. A gaming machine XF5 characterized in that it is arranged on the opposite side to the second path constructing means in two directions.

According to the gaming machine XF5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines XF1 to XF4, the first path configuring means and the second path configuring means can be configured in a non-divided manner. Thus, it is possible to visually recognize that the first path constructing means is displaced past the second path constructing means. This makes it possible to enhance the unexpectedness of the displacement.

In any one of game machines XF1 to XF5, game machine XF6 is characterized in that the first route construction means or the second route construction means is configured to be displaceable along the width direction of the guide path.

According to the game machine XF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines XF1 to XF5, the load applied to the game ball by the path construction means during displacement is reduced compared to the case of displacement along the direction perpendicular to the width of the guide path. The degree can be easily reduced, and the influence of the displacement of the path constructing means on the game ball can be minimized. For example, when the path construction means is displaced obliquely downward, it is possible to avoid the game ball from flowing obliquely downward following the displacement.

<Points about the action part that affects the flow of the ball>
A game machine comprising a game area in which game balls flow down, a first state that constitutes a guide route capable of guiding game balls, and a route configuration means that can be switched between a second state that does not configure the guide route, An action part configured to be able to act in contact with the game ball flowing down the guide path is provided, and the action part increases in degree of action on the game ball in accordance with the displacement of the game ball on the guide path. A gaming machine XG1 characterized by being configured as follows.

Here, among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured to slow down the flow speed of balls by providing ribs on the game area side (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-016095). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the same deceleration of the ball flowing down the range of rib formation may interfere with the game regardless of the situation.

For example, when the variable winning device is arranged on the downstream side of the rib, when the variable winning device is in a closed state (a state unfavorable to the player), the flow of the ball is delayed until the variable winning device is in an open state. However, if the variable prize winning device is in an open state (a state advantageous to the player), delaying the flow of the ball may be disadvantageous to the player. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the design of the game area because the action of the ribs on the game ball may disadvantage the player.

On the other hand, according to the game machine XG1, the degree of action of the action portion exemplified by the rib is configured to increase corresponding to the displacement of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to easily connect the behavior of the game ball with the increase or decrease in the profit given to the player, so that the attention to the game ball can be improved.

In the game machine XG1, the action parts are arranged differently with respect to the guide path, and the degree of difference increases as the displacement of the game ball increases.

According to the game machine XG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine XG1, by gradually changing the arrangement of the action portion, the action on the game ball can be gradually changed.

In the game machine XG1 or XG2, the game machine XG3 is characterized in that the action given to the game ball by the action section is deceleration of the flow velocity.

According to the gaming machine XG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XG1 or XG2, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to stay at a predetermined position. As a result, even in a game mode in which game balls are shot at regular intervals, it is possible to easily improve attention to the predetermined position.

A game machine comprising a game area in which game balls flow down, a first state that constitutes a guide route capable of guiding game balls, and a route configuration means that can be switched between a second state that does not configure the guide route, An action part configured to be able to act in contact with the game ball flowing down the guide path is provided, and the action part has different actions on the game ball in accordance with the arrangement of the game ball on the guide path. A gaming machine XG4 characterized by:

Any one of the game machines XG1 to XG4, comprising a predetermined ball entry area and other ball entry areas, comprising an opening/closing displacement means configured to be displaceable so as to open and close the predetermined ball entry areas, and the action portion is different in the first action on the game ball flowing down the guide path in the open state of the predetermined ball-entering area and the second action on the game ball flowing down the guide path in the closed state of the predetermined ball-entering area. A gaming machine XG5 characterized by:

According to the game machine XG5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines XG1 to XG4, the action of the action part is changed in response to the switching of the state of the opening/closing displacement means. Even if the arrangement space is limited, the degree of freedom in designing the flow-down mode of the game ball can be improved.

Note that the relationship between the first action and the second action is not limited at all. For example, when a load is applied to a game ball, the direction of the load may change, or the magnitude of the load may change.

Also, the relationship between the first action and the second action may be specified as the action on the flow-down mode of the game ball. For example, there may be a contradictory working relationship such as a first action that delays the arrival of the game ball to the ball-entering area and a second action that hastens the arrival of the game ball to the ball-entering area.

A game machine XG6 characterized in that, in the game machine XG4 or XG5, the change in action caused by the action part is caused by a difference in arrangement of the game ball with respect to the path forming means.

According to the game machine XG6, in addition to the effects of the game machine XG4 or XG5, the action of the action part is caused by the positional relationship of the game ball with respect to the path construction means. Making it movable can be made unnecessary.

In addition, specification of the aspect of arrangement|positioning relationship with respect to a path|route structure means of a game ball is not limited at all. For example, it may be specified by the arrangement interval of the game ball from a predetermined portion of the path construction means, or it may be specified by whether the game ball is in contact with the path construction means or not yet in contact with the path construction means.

In any one of gaming machines XG4 to XG6, the guide route includes a first section and a second section arranged away from the ball-entering area with respect to the first section, wherein the first section and the A game machine XG7 characterized in that it is configured to change the degree of action of the action section on the game ball in the second section.

According to the gaming machine XG7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines XG4 to XG6, even if the game balls are shot at a constant interval, the intervals between the game balls can be shortened or separated on the guide path. By setting the first section and the second section, it is possible to set a place where the game balls tend to accumulate on the guide route.

In addition, the method of changing the degree of deceleration is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to decelerate the game ball by constructing a protruding part projecting toward the guide path and bringing it into contact with the game ball. In this case, the degree of deceleration can be changed according to the length of the protrusions and the density of the protrusions arranged in the predetermined section.

In this case, the degree of deceleration can also be changed depending on which height position of the game ball the projecting portion abuts. For example, when the projecting part hits above the center of the game ball, in addition to the load in the projecting direction, the load in the vertical direction is also generated. In this case, a load is generated in the direction of pressing down the rolling game ball, and the deceleration action tends to be large. Therefore, even if the arrangement intervals of the projecting portions are the same, the deceleration action can be made different by the projecting portions that hit the game ball at different positions.

In the gaming machine XG7, the game machine XG8 is characterized in that the action on the game ball in the first section is set smaller than the action on the game ball flowing down the second section.

According to the gaming machine XG8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XG7, by increasing the flow speed of the game ball in the section closer to the ball entering area, the situation where the game balls enter the ball entering area in a row is prevented. can be easily avoided.

In any one of the gaming machines XG5 to XG8, the predetermined ball-entering area and the second ball-entering area are provided, and the guide path includes a first guide path capable of guiding a game ball to the predetermined ball-entering area; and a second guide route capable of guiding the game ball to the second ball entry area, wherein the first guide route and the second guide route are configured to intersect near a predetermined position and can occur due to crossing. A game ball flowing down a downstream section arranged on the downstream side of the predetermined position as a reference has a higher flow rate than a game ball flowing down the upstream section arranged on the upstream side. A gaming machine XG9 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine XG9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines XG5 to XG8, by avoiding the situation where the game balls accumulate downstream of the intersection position as the predetermined position, the first guide route and the second guide It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the game ball falls from the downstream side of the crossing position when switching between paths. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of stray balls.

Note that the boundary between the upstream section and the downstream section is not limited to the crossing position. For example, even if the predetermined position is set on the upstream side of the crossing position, it is possible to make it difficult for game balls to accumulate on the downstream side of the crossing position. Also, for example, even if the predetermined position is set downstream of the crossing position, it is possible to prevent the game balls from accumulating between the predetermined position and the ball entry area, so if the predetermined position is not set. It is possible to reduce the number of loose balls generated compared to .

In the gaming machine XG9, when a game ball flows down along a predetermined straight line toward the ball entry area, the time required for the game ball to pass through the downstream section is equal to the time required for the game ball to pass through the upstream section. A gaming machine XG10 characterized by being shorter than the time required for the diameter to flow down.

According to the game machine XG10, in addition to the effects of the game machine XG9, while the game ball flowing down earlier passes through the downstream section, the game ball flowing later does not enter the downstream section. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from accumulating in the downstream section by setting the time required for the flow down.

In the game machine XG9 or XG10, the game machine XG11 is characterized in that the action section is configured to maximize the degree of action on the game ball at the crossing position.

According to the gaming machine XG11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XG9 or XG10, the flow speed of the game ball is increased at the point where the game ball enters from the upstream section (advantageous anti-spill section) to the downstream section (unfavorable anti-drop section). is maximized to maximize the change in the flow of the game ball, thereby improving the player's attention to the game ball.

In any one of the game machines XG9 to XG11, the action section is configured to act on the game ball flowing down along the first guide path, but does not act on the game ball flowing down along the second guide path or is different. A gaming machine XG12 characterized by comprising an action selection unit configured to act in a manner.

According to the game machine XG12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines XG9 to XG11, the action part can be designed on the premise of a specific path, so that the action part can be easily designed. In addition, the design of the action portion is not limited at all. For example, the action of the action part on the game ball can be arbitrarily set by designing the arrangement of the action part in the direction intersecting the guide path, the formation length, the formation length of the action part on the guide path side, etc. can be done.

In the game machine XG12, the action section is configured to be able to act on the game ball before it reaches the path construction means, and its action is configured to be different from the action that occurs on the game ball after it reaches the path construction means. A gaming machine XG13 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine XG13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XG12, the acting portion can cause some kind of action on the game ball regardless of the state of the path constructing means. can increase

<Relationship between the arrangement interval of the pair of driving devices and the arrangement interval of the pair of opening/closing plates>
A first state comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a predetermined ball entry area into which the game ball that has flowed down the game area can enter, and a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the ball entry area; In a gaming machine provided with route construction means capable of switching between a second state in which the guidance route is not constructed, the route construction means comprises a first route construction means and a second route different from the first route construction means. and a first driving means for driving the first path configuring means and a second driving means for driving the second path configuring means, the first path configuring means being compared with the arrangement interval of the first driving means for driving the first path configuring means and the second driving means for driving the second path configuring means. and the second path forming means are arranged so as to narrow the distance between them.

Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of opening/closing members 30a and 31a are configured to be independently openable and closable by a plurality of different drive means (equivalent to solenoids) (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 159997). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, a plurality of driving means are arranged in the same manner on each of the opening/closing members 30a and 31a, and the arrangement intervals of the plurality of driving means are set equal to the arrangement intervals of the opening/closing members 30a and 31a. be done. In this case, there is a problem that the size and arrangement of the opening/closing members 30a and 31a may be restricted by the size of the driving means. In other words, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the flow-down path forming means to the ball-entering area is limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine XH1, the arrangement interval between the first route constructing means and the second route constructing means is narrower than the arrangement interval between the first driving means and the second driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the first route constructing means and the second route constructing means can be improved.

In addition, the aspect which narrows an arrangement|positioning space|interval is not limited at all. For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-159997, the arrangement of the driving means with respect to the opening/closing members 30a and 31a is different for each of the opening/closing members 30a and 31a, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the size and arrangement of the opening/closing members 30a and 31a. can be made

In the gaming machine XH1, at least one of the first path constructing means and the second path constructing means is configured to be displaced closer to the other second path constructing means or the first path constructing means by driving. Characterized game machine XH2.

According to the game machine XH2, in addition to the effects of the game machine XH1, it is possible to keep the range required for the displacement of the first path constructing means and the second path constructing means narrow.

A gaming machine XH3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine XH1 or XH2, the first path constructing means and the second path constructing means are constructed so as to intersect when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine XH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XH1 or XH2, the crossing range can be shared by the first route construction means and the second route construction means. As a result, the range required for arranging the first path configuring means and the second path configuring means can be narrowed.

The game machine XH4 is characterized in that the game machine XH3 is provided with suppressing means capable of suppressing displacement of the first path constructing means and the second path constructing means at the intersecting position.

According to the gaming machine XH4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XH3, one of the first path configuring means and the second path configuring means can easily interfere with the displacement of the other. By suppressing the displacement of the second path configuring means, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the first path configuring means and the second path configuring means from being hindered.

A game machine XH5 characterized in that in the game machine XH3 or XH4, the intersecting position is arranged outside the game area.

According to the gaming machine XH5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XH3 or XH4, it is possible to narrow the range required for arranging the first path configuring means and the second path configuring means outside the game area (for example, on the back side). can.

In any one of the gaming machines XH1 to XH5, the first driving means is arranged on one side of the route forming means, and the second driving means is arranged on the other side of the route forming means. Gaming machine XH6.

According to the gaming machine XH6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines XH1 to XH5, by reversing the arrangement of the first driving means and the second driving means with respect to the path configuring means, the first driving means and the second driving means can be spaced apart.

<Points that eliminate the need for short opening to prevent false V>
A first state comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a predetermined ball entry area into which the game ball that has flowed down the game area can enter, and a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the ball entry area; In a gaming machine provided with route construction means capable of switching between a second state in which the guide route is not constructed, profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to a player when a game ball enters, and profit giving means for the profit giving means. a profit switching means for switching between a first state in which the game ball can be guided to the second state and a second state in which the game ball cannot be guided to the profit giving means; The gaming machine XI1 is characterized in that the profit switching means is switched to the first state.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a big winning hole is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by a distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. There are gaming machines that However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate of the big prize opening during the period in which the distribution unit is in a state where the ball can be distributed to the advantageous route is the operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into a mode and an operation mode for when the ball does not flow down the advantageous route. Since the opening/closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain attention to the ball heading for the big prize opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of making the player pay attention to the behavior of the ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine XI1, while the path constructing means is maintained in the first state, switching between the case where the ball can pass through the profit giving means and the case where the ball cannot pass through the profit giving means is performed. Therefore, the path constructing means does not block the entry of the ball into the entry area. As a result, it is possible to maintain attention to the ball heading toward the ball entry area.

In the game machine XI1, the game machine XI2 is characterized in that the first state of the path constructing means prevents a ball from entering the profit imparting means.

According to the game machine XI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine XI1, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the profit imparting means by the path construction means.

A game machine XI3 is characterized in that in the game machine XI1 or XI2, a game ball can be entered into the profit imparting means in the second state of the path constructing means.

According to the gaming machine XI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XI1 or XI2, it is possible to increase the profit that the player can obtain from the game balls flowing down when the path forming means is in the second state.

In any one of gaming machines XI1 to XI3, gaming machine XI4 is characterized in that the profit giving means can be arranged on the upstream side of the ball-entering area.

According to the game machine XI4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines XI1 to XI3, the state of the path construction means and the execution of the ball entry to the profit giving means can be made non-correspondence.

In the gaming machine XI4, the profit switching means is set to the first state when the path forming means is in the first state, and the ball is prevented from entering the ball entering area when the profit switching means is in the first state. A gaming machine XI5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine XI5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XI4, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball-entering area while allowing the ball to enter the profit imparting means. As a result, for example, it is possible to construct a round game in which the payout of prize balls associated with entering the ball entering area is extremely small, while the player can obtain a profit associated with entering the profit giving means.

Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R4, XA1 to XA8, XB1 to XB6, XC1 to XC7, XD1 to XD7, XE1 to XE6, XF1 to XF6, XG1 to XG13, A game machine Z1 in any one of XH1 to XH6 and XI1 to XI5, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R4, XA1 to XA8, XB1 to XB6, XC1 to XC7, XD1 to XD7, XE1 to XE6, XF1 to XF6, XG1 to XG13, A game machine Z2 in any one of XH1 to XH6 and XI1 to XI5, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R4, XA1 to XA8, XB1 to XB6, XC1 to XC7, XD1 to XD7, XE1 to XE6, XF1 to XF6, XG1 to XG13, A game machine Z3 in any one of XH1 to XH6 and XI1 to XI5, wherein the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
There is a game machine configured such that the path configuring means are displaced to the same side (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159997).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of attracting the player's attention. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the player's attention.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 includes a game area where game balls flow down, a predetermined ball entry area where game balls that have flowed down the game area can enter, and a A game machine comprising a route configuration means capable of switching between a first state that configures a guide route that can be guided to a ball area and a second state that does not configure the guide route, wherein the ball entry area is a second state. A first ball-entering area and a second ball-entering area are provided, and the path configuring means is configured to be displaceable so as to configure a first guide path capable of guiding a game ball to the first ball-entering area. and a second path configuration means configured to be displaceable so as to configure a second guide path configured to guide the game ball to the second ball entry area, wherein the The displacement direction of the first path constructing means and the displacement direction of the second path constructing means are directions in which they approach each other.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein one of the first guide route and the second guide route is arranged above the other route.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the first path constructing means and the second path constructing means are configured to intersect when viewed from a predetermined direction.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to improve the player's attention.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, it is possible to make it easier to prevent game balls from falling out by utilizing the vertical difference.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, by setting the displacement direction along a predetermined direction, one path configuration at the intersection position It is possible to eliminate the need for the means to be divided into the other path forming means.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board (a part of the area configuration means)
18 hinge (part of support shaft)
19 hinge (part of support shaft)
65a Specific winning slot (part of profit granting means)
81 Third pattern display device (part of attention means, display means)
86 center frame (frame means)
150 spherical flow down unit (part of flow down means)
152 first receiving channel (first component, second component)
153 second receiving channel member (second component)
154 ridge portion (part of reduction means)
161 light guide plate (part of attention means)
166 horizontal board unit (predetermined board)
170 decoration means (located means)
171a horizontally long groove (low transmission means)
171b reflection shape part (direction changing means)
180 Displacement restricting device (limiting means)
181 contact member (part of guide means)
181b Cylindrical holding portion (part of guide means)
183 operation member (operation part)
183f engaging portion 184 coil spring (biasing means)
221 MPU (prevention notification means)
310 partition member (part of auxiliary means, guide means, box-shaped means)
312 curved plate portion (first guide portion)
314 rear section lower part (second guide part)
315 Irregular shape through part (open part)
320 Particulate member (part of displacement means, part of placement means)
362 Axle (Regulator)
410 Linear motion member (part of displacement means, second member)
413 Trapezoidal projecting portion (second contact portion)
414 ridge portion (second target portion)
420 Collision member (part of action means, contact means, first means)
424 buffer member (second contact portion)
430 contact member (part of displacement means, first member, restricting means)
432 projecting portion (first target portion)
440 front transmission member (part of transmission means)
442 Groove forming part (second transmission part, determination participating means)
446 transmission projection (first transmission portion, contact portion)
470 transmission arm member (transmission means)
480 Lid member (a part of action means, abutment means, advance/retreat means)
482 overhang (representative tip)
489a first contact surface (contact surface)
489b second contact surface (contact surface)
489c Third contact surface (contact surface)
510 rear case (part of area configuring means)
630 lower arm member (part of action means)
633 support hole (main support means)
634 arc-shaped hole (auxiliary support means, guide means)
700 production member (displacement means)
730 Rotating plate (load generating means, displacement generating means)
740 telescopic displacement member (part of first member, part of second member)
743b first guided projection (first loaded portion)
744b Second guided projection (second loaded portion)
760 Shielding design member (part of first member, part of second member)
820 Vertical slide member (part of displacement means)
840 Lateral slide member (part of displacement means)
870 long arm member (electric wiring displacement means)
882a wall (part of stopping means)
886 guide recess (corresponding change means)
887 Cylindrical projecting part (part of stopping means)
DK2 Electric wiring DK2b Lower winding portion (second predetermined portion)
LM1 intermediate flow path (part of flow-down means, first component)
MT1 drive motor (driving means)
IE1 internal space (range)
SC4 detection sensor (detection means)
SP1 coil spring (part of load generating means, biasing means)
A10, A3010, A4010 Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 outer frame 12 inner frame (base body)
18 Hinge (rotating shaft)
A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 Substrate box (container)
A110 Main controller (object)
A119 Printed circuit board (object, control board)
A120 Switch Device (Operating Means)
A122 Operation unit (operator)
A123b Projection (first surface)
A130 Key device (operating means)
A133b Protrusion (receiving part)
A133c end (first surface)
A140 key (operator)
A200, A3200 Box cover (container)
A203 Lower wall (standing wall)
A210 Operation wall (facing part)
A211 First ridge (ridge)
A212 Second ridge (ridge)
A220 First connection wall (connection surface)
A230 Second connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A240 Third connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A250 opening A260 opening A270, A2270 covering part A271 peripheral wall part (covering part)
A271a base (coating)
A271b Projection (bulge)
A272, A2272 End wall portion (covering portion, facing portion)
A272a Annular part (opposing part)
A272b square part (opposing part)
A2273 Protrusions (protrusions)
A280, A290 Upright walls A280a, A290a Tapered surfaces A281, A291 First upright wall (upright wall)
A282, A292 Second standing wall (standing wall)
A283, A293 Third standing wall (standing wall)
A284 4th standing wall (standing wall)
A300 box base (container)
A410, A4410 Rotating shaft 110 Main controller (control means)
B1000 variable winning means (part of route configuration means, part of state change means)
B1140 projecting part (reduction means, part of action part, part of action selection part)
B1200 cover member (part of partition member)
B1211 projecting portion (reduction means, part of action part, part of action selection part)
B1212 Extended Support Part (Gap Reduction Means, Part of Auxiliary Means)
B1230 first detection sensor (part of ball entry area, first ball entry area)
B1250 Second detection sensor (part of ball entry area, second ball entry area)
B1260 Ball Guide Receiving Part (Collision Suppression Means)
B1300 First Guide Plate (Part of Path Constructing Means, Part of State Changing Means, First (Path) Constructing Means, Part of Variable Means, Part of Opening/Closing Displacement Means)
B1310 guide section (rescue section)
B1311 rolling surface (part of guide path)
B1313 sliding portion (gap reduction means)
B1323 sliding portion (gap reduction means)
B1500 Second guide plate (part of route construction means, part of state change means, second (route) construction means, part of variable means)
B1510 guide section (rescue section)
B1511 Rolling surface (part of guide path)
B1513 sliding portion (gap reduction means)
B1523 sliding portion (gap reduction means)
B2300 opening/closing plate (part of path configuration means, first path configuration means, part of opening/closing displacement means)
B2500 Open/close bar (part of path configuration means, second path configuration means)
B4260 ball guide receiving part (part of ball entry area)
B4360 Front Projection (Part of Auxiliary Means)
B9140 projecting part (part of action part)
BKL1 Left tilt trajectory (part of guidance route, second guidance route)
BKL2 right tilt trajectory (part of guidance route, first guidance route)
BL1 left flow route (part of flow route)
BL2 right flow path (part of flow path)
BL21 left-handed downflow route (part of downflow route)
BL22 right-handed downstream route (part of downstream route)

Claims (3)

A first state comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a predetermined ball entry area into which the game ball that has flowed down the game area can enter, and a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the ball entry area; A game machine comprising route configuration means capable of switching between a second state in which the guidance route is not configured,
The ball entry area includes a first ball entry area and a second ball entry area,
The path configuration means is configured to be displaceable so as to configure a first guide path configured to guide the game ball to the first ball entry area;
a second path configuration means configured to be displaceable so as to configure a second guide path configured to guide the game ball to the second ball entry area;
A gaming machine, wherein a displacement direction of the first path construction means and a displacement direction of the second path construction means are directions approaching each other. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein one of the first guide route and the second guide route is arranged above the other of the guide routes. 3. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the first route constructing means and the second route constructing means are constructed so as to intersect when viewed from a predetermined direction.

Images